Alan Rapp's Comic Reviews

Reviewer For: Razorfine Reviews: 2948
7.0Avg. Review Rating

8
007 (2022) #1

Aug 15, 2022

While on suspension, a voice from the past reaches out. An old mentor (and lover?), the former 003 Gwendolyn Gann, reaches out to Bond with a proposition. 007 #1 offers an interesting wrinkle to Bond's history in suggesting the primary influence to him as an agent was a woman. We're given a handful of images from his memory suggesting there might be more to delve into. But, is it already too late? Can Bond solve the clues left behind, and how might all this relate to the shadowy operatives testing him at the beginning of the issue?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
007 (2022) #2

Sep 14, 2022

The last half of the issue deals with Bond turning down taking over the case only to be attacked outside his apartment and abducted by mercenaries from Myrmidon who appear to want to know just how much Bond knows about their plans. A solid issue that underscores the talents of 007, teases us with the toughness of the Myrmidon agents, and sets Bond up all alone on a fight for revenge.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
007 (2022) #3

Oct 25, 2022

Like several Bond villains before him, Fromm gives Bond the hard sell which ties back into that same dictator England wants to put back in power. At the time of her death, Gann was working with Myrmidon to prevent this. All the other trappings of the organization's facility, while interesting, are secondary to this idea which offers a plausible reason, at least in the short-term, for Bond to go with the flow.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
007 (2022) #4

Dec 7, 2022

Looking for answers, Bond begins working for Myrmidon with his first assignment stealing secure information from the British Government. Seducing a young woman at MI5 for access and then breaking into a secret government server room, Bond looks for answers about Gwendolyn Gann and for what his government is doing in bed with a terrorist and dictator.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
007 (2022) #5

Jan 2, 2023

007 #5 offers the twist you've been waiting for explaining both Bond's endgame with Nassar and his role with helping Myrmidon (or not so much helping, but delivering them into the clutches of the authorities).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
007 (2022) #6

Feb 6, 2023

My complaint is the story relying on the laziest of action cliches with our obvious hero being hunted by his own head-up-the-ass government mistakenly believing Bond is a traitor. It's a move that makes M6 look so incompetent, that if Bond wasn't around, every one of them would likely end up like White Boy Bob in Out of Sight.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
007: For King and Country #1

Apr 25, 2023

Solid first issue with the action bookended a bored 007 living in hiding with Gwendolyn Gann for much of the comic, getting grouchier day by day, before new trouble comes calling.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
007: For King and Country #2

Jun 6, 2023

We're given a couple action sequences, first with the new 00 catching up with them, who our spies on the run easily dispatch, and later with the much more seasoned 006 finding them in Rome as Gann attempts to recruit an old friend to help the pair in their fight.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
007: For King and Country #3

Jul 11, 2023

Just what is the secret Gann has been keeping? And how much will it effect Bond's mission to destroy Myrmidon (which we see more examples of their monstrosity on display underlining that despite Gann's secrets, Myrmidon needs to be taken down whatever the cost).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
007: For King and Country #5

Oct 23, 2023

007: For King and Country #5 opens with a trigger-happy 009 and an assassination attempt James Bond barely survives in an action sequence that cover several pages.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
007: For King and Country #6

Dec 6, 2023

3.5 Razors, Action, James Bond

View Issue       View Full Review
8
47 Ronin #1

Nov 18, 2012

The first issue of the five-issue mini-series is presented in a way that should appeal both to those who already know the story and those discovering it for the first time. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
47 Ronin #2

Jan 10, 2013

With their master now dead, and the man responsible unpunished, the story can begin in earnest as the 47 ronin will begin their own search for justice for the death of their fallen lord. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
47 Ronin #3

Mar 11, 2013

Three issues in 47 Ronin is still quite a bit of politics and set-up without delivering much action. That said, the story is well told and I'm willing to read anything drawn by Sakai (although I prefer it to center around a rabbit with a samurai sword). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
47 Ronin #4

May 7, 2013

Writer Mike Richardson and artist Stan Sakai's retelling of the classic Japanese legend has been heavy on story and character, but that should change with the series' finale. (And, even more importantly, it will free Sakai to return to doing what he does best – write and draw Usagi Yojimbo.) Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
47 Ronin #5

Jul 6, 2013

I happy to see Richardson and Sakai bring to story to a satisfactory conclusion, especially as that means Sakai's responsiblities on the mini-series are done once again freeing him to do what he does best and return to beloved creation Usagi Yojimbo. For those of us with serious rabbit ronin withdrawal it can't come soon enough. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
5 Ronin #1

Mar 9, 2011

More of a curiosity than anything else, this first issue is really nothing more than a mediocre What If"? story. It's not bad, the tale simply doesn't engage the reader and there's nothing here to make someone like me come back for four straight weeks to see if the other X-Men characters fare any better. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
80th Anniversary 100-Page Super Spectacular: Robin #1

Mar 23, 2020

The other Robins also get tales, my favorite of which features the Red Hood completing a task he started during his time as Robin in “More Time.” Tim Drake gets a pair of stories in “Extra Credit” and “Boy Wonders” both touching on themes of growing up and learning to grow into his own Robin. Stephanie Brown struggles with becoming the new Robin in “Fitting In” in a nice story featuring the shortest tenured Robin of them all. Damian is seen in “My Best Friend” centering around his friendship with Jonathan Kent and “Bat and Mouse” which ties into current storylines (and is the least interesting of all the tales). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
80th Anniversary 100-Page Super Spectacular: Green Lantern #1

Jun 29, 2020

Guy Gardner and Kilowog are given a tale with a fun twist, Sinestro tortures a Green Lantern in his story, and Jessica Cruz and Simon Baz overcome fear and hatred respectively in their solo tales. Like similar recent one-shots from DC, this one's mostly for fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
80th Anniversary 100-Page Super Spectacular: Catwoman #1

Jun 15, 2020

We also get Catwoman going up against Clayface in "Born to Kiln," escaping a trap by the Taxidermist in "Save the Cat," and dealing with a crooked rent-a-cop in "Now You See Me," And, as with the other collections we've seen, the story included from the current timeline, "Addicted to Trouble," featuring Catwoman on the road proves to be one of the lesser entries.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
A Haunted Girl (2023) #1

Oct 19, 2023

Halloween time fits well with the release of the first issue, although I'll be curious to see just how long it takes for Cleo to get answers to what is going on and seeing how the pieces begin to fit together.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
A+X #6

Mar 30, 2013

The second story, although not nearly as entertaining, also features two heroes winding up at a poker game as the Yancy Street friends of Ben Grimm invite Gambit, over for the weekly poker game. There's some okay back-and-forth between the characters and late twist, but it's the less interesting of the two stories. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
A+X #8

May 30, 2013

Although I've never been a big fan of Hawkeye, I really enjoyed Deadpool Team-Up and the idea of Deadpool driving any Avenger crazy for half an issue appealed to me. Despite having some nice moments as well, the story isn't nearly as zany or outrageous as I was hoping. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Action Comics (2011) #19

Apr 6, 2013

The rest of the comic features Superman battling giant robots (for reasons that don't make a lot of sense), Lex Luthor keeping his shrink locked up for an accurate diagnosis of him as a megalomanical psychopath, and a weird hallucinatory moment where Superman thinks one of the soldiers piloting the robots is Jimmy Olsen (which, also, makes very little sense). Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Action Comics (2016) #1000

Apr 20, 2018

Action Comics #1000 may lack one stand-out story, but the comic offers something for everyone with some great art by a variety of comic artists celebrating the Man of Steel's 80 years. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Action Comics (2016) #1001

Jul 31, 2018

We also get introduced to a new super-powered threat in Red Cloud (think Livewire except on fire?) who may have ties to Clark Kent's world as well as Superman's. Hmmm…. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Action Comics (2016) #1003

Oct 2, 2018

The issue is worth picking up for the Batman and Superman angle (including Bruce's joke about what he plans to do with the Kryptonite). Also of interest, though, is the late reveal of Lois Lane being tracked down by an old “friend.” Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Action Comics (2016) #1006

Jan 9, 2019

There's some nice action here once Red Cloud rebuffs our hero's offer (the character's nature provides some interesting visuals of Superman fighting mist without a solid physical form for the Man of Steel to punch his way through). I'm really enjoying Bendis' take on Superman (and again huge props for pushing for the return of the trunks on both Batman and Superman!). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Action Comics (2016) #1008

Mar 4, 2019

Whatever Leviathan is, and apparently its big enough to take out several secret organizations without much effort or leaving much of a trace, it looks like the threat is very real. The first question Superman will have to decide is if he can trust Waller (who apparently has known his secret identity for some time)? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Action Comics (2016) #1009

Apr 9, 2019

I'll admit I'm a bit confused by the final few panels in which Superman and Lois appear transformed for an undercover mission (what did I miss?), but even an unclear ending doesn't detract all that much from another solid issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Action Comics (2016) #1011

May 29, 2019

The night before the new day that Leviathan has promised, there are still quite a few questions unanswered including what happened to all the agents from the agencies that Leviathan put down? And just what does Leviathan have planned when the sun rises tomorrow? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Action Comics (2016) #1022

Jun 15, 2020

The issue's B-story continues the fallout of The Daily Planet's recent woes (keeping that plot thread alive), but this issue is primarily about re-incorporating another character back into the Kent family.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Action Comics (2016) #1028

Dec 28, 2020

Kara earns really only a token appearance, but there are also several pages of Superman hanging out with Jon prior to his son returning to the future in which we get to see Clark in the role of a father once more.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Action Comics (2016) #1051

Feb 1, 2023

3 Razors, Power Girl, Supergirl, Superman

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Adventureman (2020) #9

May 30, 2022

I'll admit to not giving this comic as much attention as it probably deserves and feeling a bit lost, not unlike Claire and Crossjaw wandering through the underground tunnels, after taking a break from this story after the introductory first issue. That said, I still enjoyed the mix of humor and creepy weirdness here involving a gang of ghosts returning to the living and a woman taking on powers of a pulp hero being the only thing standing in their way. I'm curious to see the adventure continue.

View Issue       View Full Review
2
Age of Ultron #1

Mar 13, 2013

Aside from being extremely violent, unnecessarily gritty, and all around unenjoyable, this first issue is also rather pointless as we don't really spend any time getting to know any of these versions of classic Marvel characters. Maybe they're saving that for the next nine issues. God help us all. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
All-New Batman: The Brave and the Bold (2011) #13

Nov 14, 2011

The comic ends with a discussion between the Phantom Stranger and Madame Xanadu. Xanadu congratulates the Stranger on the success of his plan but reminds him Robin wasn't Batman's only partner. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
All-New Batman: The Brave and the Bold (2011) #14

Dec 17, 2011

I know the title is geared towards younger readers, and this is a holiday issue, but it has done a pretty good job not talking down to them and spoon feeding them issues (religious or otherwise), which we get more than our fill of here. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
All-New Batman: The Brave and the Bold (2011) #16

Feb 11, 2012

Bat-Mite manages to take the rejection rather well, and finds a new target for his amorous advances. It's not a bad end to the series but with the show already off the air and the rest of the New 52 Bat-titles firmly entrenched in a far less stories there certainly seems like there's a market to keep this title around. I'm going to be sad to see it go. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
All-New X-Men #23

Feb 17, 2014

Filled with action, suspense, and an awful lot of humor and inside references (such as Kitty Pryde's mention of her uncomfortable past with space travel), the pairing of the two teams is a lot of fun while the pre-trial moments between Jean Grey and a Shi'ar telepath continue to set the stage for the trial yet to come. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
All-New X-Men #25

Apr 14, 2014

Don't get me wrong, there's some very nice artwork here (highlighted for me by Bruce Timm's showcasing Jean Grey in her various forms), some of it quite funny, but as a fan of the original idea of The Watcher as a silent observer I'm less than satisfied with this verbose version that even goes so far as to insult the X-Man after speaking his mind. For such a momentous issue All New X-Men #25 can easily be skipped by those not willing to pay $5 for a story that doesn't do much of anything to further ongoing stories and whose absence won't be felt going forward if you choose not to read it. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
All-New X-Men #27

May 19, 2014

Smartly, the group attacks the team's psychics taking down the Cuckoos and then turns its attention to Cyclops, Emma Frost, and Jean Grey (who Xavier psychically reaches out to at the end of the issue). Even with a full issue of action, there's not much here in terms of advancing the story as the Brotherhood is only marginally more in control of their attack on the base than it is at the beginning. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
All-New X-Men #28

Jun 16, 2014

Faced with a serious threat in Xavier and his team, All New X-Men #28 continues the trend of showcasing Jean Grey as the pivotal figure on the team whose power continues to surprise even those who know her all too well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
All-New X-Men #29

Jul 16, 2014

All-New X-Men #29 is another strong issue although by their nature the Brotherhood's failed attacks are beginning to grow stale. Hopefully next month's issue moves towards an end to this storyline and begins to look forward to something new for the team to sink its teeth into. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
All-New X-Men #30

Aug 16, 2014

The other major plot thread involves Emma Frost trying to pick a fight with Jean Grey, but not for the reason you may suspect. The ending of that story completely changes the pair's dynamic (which didn't have anywhere to go) and opens up the door for several new possibilities between Scott Summers‘ ex-girlfriends as actual friends. Poor Cyclops. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
All-New X-Men #31

Sep 9, 2014

Although I think it's very possible for these characters and this comic specifically to get time/space dimension fatigue beginning so quickly after wrapping up a storyline involving villains from the future, Brian Michael Bendis' choice to bring Jean Grey into a universe he knows so well (he did help create it after all) does open the door for some intriguing possibilities as long as the arc doesn't overstay its welcome (a problem the title has had issues with in the past). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
All-New X-Men #32

Oct 1, 2014

The Jean Grey/Miles Morales team-up sells the issue (while also providing a pretty cool splash panel of Miles' time as Spidey), but the other storylines don't put the original X-Men in situations which they couldn't have found on their own Earth (in either timeline, really). As someone who has largely ignored the Ultimate Universe since its creation the comic is is only mildly interesting to me but longtime fans may get more out of it. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
All-New X-Men #33

Nov 10, 2014

Getting Angel and X-23 back adds some nice levity to the situation while the rest of the team mainly freaks out with their new reality. For someone unfamiliar with Marvel's Ultimate Universe (which I've mostly avoided other than the early Ultimate Spider-Man arcs) I felt as out-of-place as the X-Men, but given the fact that is exactly the issue's hook it certainly doesn't hurt the story (although those more familiar with the universe will obviously get more out of the cameos of the various alternate versions of Marvel Comics characters). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
All-New X-Men #34

Dec 29, 2014

Things aren't any easier for the Beast who has a dinner date with this world's Doctor Doom who is fascinated with the tale of time-and-space-displaced mutants. Just what the super-villain plans to do with such knowledge is yet to be seen. And, in the least interesting of the three storylines, Iceman finishes battling the mole monster on the streets of New York only to run into a couple of police officers and discover mutants are no more beloved in this reality than his own. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
All-New X-Men #36

Feb 15, 2015

The issue is really a microcosm of the entire arc in that it includes some fun moments but never quite lives up to the promise of its premise ultimately offering a mostly forgettable adventure. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
All-New X-Men (2015) #2

Dec 23, 2015

As to the storyline, the Ghosts of Cyclops aren't that interesting and the increased hatred of mutants outside Austin, Texas where Iceman finds some new friends paints a bleak world view I don't have interest in returning to month after month. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
All-Star Batman #1

Aug 15, 2016

One issue in it's unclear whether, like Frank Miller's All-Star Batman volume, the series is supposed to exist in its own continuity or not. One thing is clear, seams are the new pouches in terms of overused comic cliches. Seriously DC, I don't need to see every damn seam highlighted in every super-hero's costume. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Amazing Spider-Man (1999) #634

Jun 19, 2010

Although I've liked individual stories in The Gauntlet, the story behind the scenes, which comes to the forefront here, has done more to weary me than our hero. Why am I supposed to care about forgotten Spider-Women, Madame Web (a character I've never liked), Ezekiel, Kaine, or Kraven's wacky family? Hopefully Marvel can get through the "Grim Hunt" and on to better things for the wallcrawler as fast as possible. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Amazing Spider-Man (1999) #651

Jan 18, 2011

The issue also includes a short Scorpion story tacked onto the end of the issue. I'm okay with Mac Gargan taking back the name, but I'm not sure I like the HYDRA looking design of the new suit, and I'm sure I hate the issues final couple of pages where the new Scorpion army is revealed. Ugh.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Amazing Spider-Man (1999) #657

Apr 4, 2011

There's also a nice moment at the end where the family sits down to watch the message Johnny left for Peter. It may not be as good as the one from FF #1, but it's still a nice moment. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Amazing Spider-Man (1999) #658

Apr 19, 2011

I have to say the amount of whining Spidey does in this issue troubles me a little. It looks like the decision is to make Peter far more kid-like than we've seen him in recent years in an attempt to better the team dynamic (which I think is a really, really bad idea). We also get the first rumblings of a major problem with Peter and Carlie's relationship which could lead to a big confrontation in the next issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Amazing Spider-Man (1999) #659

May 4, 2011

Meanwhile, back in New York, Carlie makes a decision that just might earn her the title of worst girlfriend ever by getting a tattoo of the Green Goblin to spite Peter for lying to her about his plans. So to teach him a lesson she permanently marks herself with the image of the man responsible for killing Peter Parker's first love. Yeah, that should go over real well. I think it's time to dump this chick Spidey and spend some more time with Ms. Marvel. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Amazing Spider-Man (1999) #660

May 18, 2011

And, finally, the Carlie Cooper tattoo fiasco in a switcheroo that makes no sense whatsoever and yet is still better than what was shown in last issue with her brilliant idea of branding her body with the image of the man who threw Peter Parker's first love off a bridge. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Amazing Spider-Man (1999) #677

Jan 18, 2012

I haven't been keeping up with Amazing Spider-Man lately given my lack of interest in Spider-Island and sheer the number of issues the title puts out every month. However, I have to say I love what Waid does with the ol' Web-Head here and I'm eagerly anticipating the conclusion of the arc this week. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
2
Amazing Spider-Man (1999) #700

Jan 1, 2013

I'm sure there will be some who will be looking forward to the fresh take on the new “Superior” Spider-Man, but, following the example laid down in the Ultimate Universe, Peter Parker is dead and replaced (this wasn't even an original idea). Sure, Marvel is likely to return Peter Parker to the living (perhaps within a year if fan outrage hits critical mass and sales drop), but, to put it bluntly, I honestly don't care what happens from here on. He was inarguably the heart and soul of Marvel Comics, and the Marvel Universe is going to miss him far more than they know. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Amazing Spider-Man (2018) #1

Jul 15, 2018

The only bright spot for Pete is a bit of super-heroing and getting back together with Mary Jane, which offers a fan-friendly moment but is undrecut by the uncertainty of not knowing how much of their history is still canon (or, to be honest, what ages either character is supposed to be at this point). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Amazing Spider-Man (2018) #51

Oct 29, 2020

Despite my absence from the title, and this being the second issue of the storyline, the plot was relatively easy to follow and artist Patrick Gleason has some fun with Spidey in shadow and falling through reality. Enough to keep me around for another issue? Hmm… maybe?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Amazing Spider-Man (2018) #77

Oct 28, 2021

After seeing Ben in action for the past couple of issues, The Amazing Spider-Man #77 takes a step back and examines the life of a corporate super-hero trying to live up to both internal and external expectations. If Ben is likely to have struggles, they may be more from Beyond than what he faces on the streets. It's more building block than standalone issue, although it does offer Spidey versus Morbius for a late fight cliffhanger.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Amazing Spider-Man (2018) #81

Dec 22, 2021

The bad guy of the issue (if you don't count the evil corporate types of Beyond while foreshadowing the inevitable turn of Maxine Danger as a super-villain) is the utterly forgettable Rhizome who the two Spider-Men team-up to stop. Seriously? It took two of them to stop what looks like a drunken mistake by Poison Ivy? Anywho, Maxine isn't pleased with Ben for not pushing the copyright issue with the other Spider-Man, although she may have other more pressing concerns involving Doctor Octopus.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Amazing Spider-Man (2018) #89

Feb 22, 2022

Although we don't see him in action, other than a quick save to save a confused Black Cat from taking a 60-story swan dive onto the pavement, The Amazing Spider-Man #89 offers us Peter Parker back in costume for the first time in several issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Amazing Spider-Man (2018): Chameleon Conspiracy #1

Jul 7, 2021

The issue wraps up the storyline in explosive fashion (heh), with a host of cameos late foreshadowing new stories to come involving Silver Sable, Taskmaster and Black Ant, Kindred, Doctor Octopus, Kraven, and Electro.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Amazing Spider-Man (2022) #1

May 6, 2022

At least he's still got the suit and can do a little wall-crawling which leads into the other thread of the Rose making a play for Tombstone‘s territory. For some reason Tombstone blames Spider-Man, instead of the guy who blew up his home, and threatens to destroy his life (if he only knew). At least Peter is going to have somewhere to put his pent-up aggression.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Amazing Spider-Man (2022) #20

Feb 23, 2023

The second-half of a two-part story by Joe Kelly and Terry Dodson doesn't make a lick of sense, but it does offer some fun moments between Black Cat and Spidey beating the wannabes.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Amazing X-Men (2013) #1

Nov 14, 2013

I really enjoyed the opening sequences of Nightcrawler and the apparent choice of writer Jason Aaron and artist Ed McGuinness to bring him back into the Marvel Universe. Although the chaos on Firestar's first day is humorous, there's a bit much of it for my tastes as the joke runs a little too long. That said, Firestar's inclusion in the title as a part of this core team certainly brought a smile to my face (as did her awkward interaction with Iceman). I haven't yet been sold on any of the X-Men books on Wolverine's side of the X-Men split, but this one I may stick with. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Amazing X-Men (2013) #2

Dec 11, 2013

Despite his voice commenting on actions and events he couldn't possibly be witnessing, the comic is missing the character who the entire first arc of the series is named after on. Because of this the second issue isn't as strong (or as interesting) as the first, but it's still worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Amazing X-Men (2013) #3

Jan 22, 2014

After two issues of set-up, Amazing X-Men finally starts delivering on the promise of working Nightcrawler back into the group. Although I didn't expect the level of romantic undertones we get here, I love the reunion between the pair and can't wait to see where they go from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Amazing X-Men (2013) #4

Feb 25, 2014

Along with the various reunions writer Jason Aaron reveals the origin of the Bamfs and lays the groundwork for the possible cost of Nightcrawler's current heroism which may have serious repercussions for the still-dead hero and his teammates very soon. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Amazing X-Men (2013) #5

Apr 5, 2014

Kurt's return should also force Logan to admit his own failures including the split in the X-Men. How Nightcrawler is going to fit into that schism should be interesting to watch. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Amazing X-Men (2013) #6

Apr 24, 2014

Despite Mystique's plans to kill Kurt's father the pair form an uneasy truce which can't spell good things for any of the X-Men going forward. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Amber Blake #1

Apr 16, 2019

The entire issue is prelude to who and what Amber Blake may become. There's a kernel of a good (but hardly original) idea, but without at least a tease about where the tragic events may lead her, the first issue feels hollow. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Ame-comi Girls #2

Nov 24, 2012

The comic's major weakness is its choice of resurrected best forgotten C-list character in Duela Dent. That said, there's still plenty of fun to be had, and quite a bit of story jammed within the pages of the comic. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Ame-comi Girls #4

Jan 20, 2013

The retelling of Supergirl's origin isn't tweaked too much, but before out two super-powered Kryptonian females can get to know each other they've got an army of Manhunters to deal with. Goofy? Yeah, but it's an awful lot of fun and I'm certainly willing to stick around to see where things go from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Ame-comi Girls #5

Feb 16, 2013

Once again this all-female version of the DCU provides tons of action and a sense of craziness and goofiness missing in far to much of the New 52. The issue ends with the promise of an all new series beginning next week and a Dark Supergirl/Wonder Woman throwdown to kick things off. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ame-Comi Girls (2013) #1

Mar 9, 2013

Although Brainiac's master plan seems more than a little ridiculous (even by Silver Age standards) this first issue is full of action and some humorous moments (such as Duela's amusement of Wonder Woman's attempt to stab every problem into submission). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Ame-Comi Girls (2013) #2

Apr 10, 2013

There are some interesting ideas in the later-half of the comic dealing with vigilantes working with the government (especially when two of them are minors), but (like the final few pages of the Braniac story involving Power Girl nearly coming to blows with Wonder Woman while trying to help a poisoned Supergirl) the writing seems rushed with panels, or even whole pages, missing. I wouldn't be surprised to learn that two-issues worth of story were crammed into this one book. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Ame-Comi Girls (2013) #3

May 6, 2013

I like the unusual choice for the Ame-Comi version of Green Lantern, although the change in the Green Lantern Oath threw me a little (as did the musical aspect of this GL's power). Star Sapphire's origins allow them to sort of merge Hal Jordan and Carol Ferris into a single character who could be friend or foe, depending on if Carol is able to control her emotions and new-found power. I'll be interested to see where this storyline goes from here. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ame-Comi Girls (2013) #4

Jun 12, 2013

Personally, I'd have preferred the comic to stay away from the various rainbow corps other than Sinestra (especially the Black Lanterns), but the introduction of the backstory of the character is certainly no more ridiculous than Geoff Johns‘ original concept. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Ame-Comi Girls (2013) #5

Jul 8, 2013

Although its themes can't be called subtle, I really enjoyed the Hawkgirl story. The Strange story isn't quite as strong, but it works as well to bring the characters together and set-up their eventual arrival on Earth. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ame-Comi Girls (2013) #6

Aug 9, 2013

Things fall apart for me in the final pages where Metra gets directly involvedk. I would have preferred the ladies to win the day on their own but the (unsubtle) Motherbox metaphor works okay and sets up new possibilities (albeit for a comic whose days appear to be numbered). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ame-Comi Girls (2013) #7

Sep 7, 2013

There's plenty of action and some nice humor between Raven and Trigon as the invasion of Earth by a demon horde all because of one guy's daddy issues embraces the absurdity of the situation in a way the New 52 never would. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ame-Comi Girls (2013) #8

Oct 24, 2013

The White Canary story gives us a character whose sonic scream is far more pronounced, making it impossible for the heroine to communicate at anything above a whisper (unless she wants to destroy all surrounding structures). I've enjoyed this series, and even if the final issue is one of the weakest, I'll still miss it's optimism and gleeful spirit. Once again, this is something the New 52 could use far more of… as well as more strong (preferably not insane) female characters. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Angel & Faith Season 9 #1

Sep 7, 2011

This first issue isn't awful, but it's pretty disappointing. Season Nine, the first full comic season with all the characters under one publisher's banner, begins not with a bang but a whimper. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Angel (2019) #0

May 7, 2019

Although the supporting characters we see here aren't likely to make many appearances once the series begins in earnest, Angel #0 is a solid introductory issue to the updated version of the character about to make his first appearance in Buffy the Vampire Slayer #5. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Angel (2019) #1

Jun 5, 2019

Relocated to Sunnydale, Angel #1 features the vampire with a soul looking in an old friend who attempts (but fails) to help Angel see the good he has done. Oh yes, Angel is in full brooding mode. The issue also includes cryptic warnings about dangers Angel is about to face and an opening flashback to his time as Angelus when he sired a vampire hunter. Although the flashback appears completely disconnected from the current storyline, it's obviously important to upcoming events surrounding Angel (who it appears will stay outside Buffy and the Scoobies' orbit for the time being, at least in this plotline). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Angel (2019) #2

Jul 8, 2019

Other storylines in the comic continue the flashback of Angel siring the new vampire Marius and quite a few pages are devoted to the unseen enemy attacking young victims through social media and text messaging by offering an understanding his victims aren't finding elsewhere. No doubt this is the looming threat Angel will need to solve, but personally I'm looking forward to seeing the handsome man save Fred from the monsters. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Angel (2019) #3

Aug 8, 2019

Fred is an interesting choice of a first companion to Angel, rather than Cordelia (who is still in high school) and Lilith‘s note about Angel's journey helping to quiet her mind makes you wonder what version of the character we may see when Angel emerges from the hellish maze Fred just sent him to. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Angel (2019) #4

Sep 10, 2019

The comic also features a scene between the victorious Angel and the more lucid Fred who foreshadows more trouble to come as well as the next member of the gang to be introduced to the fight. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Angel (2019) #5

Oct 3, 2019

The issue ends confirming it was Angel who Buffy spoke to previously at the Halloween dance, and putting Angel in place in time for Drusilla's plans to come to fruition (in the upcoming Hellmouth crossover). Will Fred and Gunn be joining the party? Or will we have to wait a bit for more from them? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Angel (2019) #9

Mar 5, 2020

Angel + Spike #9 also introduces the First Season character Kate Lockley for the first time in the rebooted universe as the detective runs across monsters and is guided to Angel by Lilith. I'll be curious to see if Kate ends up having a larger or smaller role in this version of events. of The comic also furthers the foreshadowing of Wolfram & Hart becoming a major part of the comic in the near future.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Angel (2019) #11

Jul 1, 2020

There are no big reveals or answers in Angel + Spike #11, although Lilith's talk with Angel does seem to suggest that Kate and Mara, the woman we've seen from Angel's past, are linked in some way and may offer Angel a second chance. Fred's journey appears to be taking a dark turn as well, but just what is Wolfram & Hart's endgame and where is Lilah leading her (other than the literal destination, which appears to be Hell)?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Angel (2019) #12

Aug 3, 2020

As Lilith states, Angel chose Kate's safety over Fred. Now bonded with Baphomet, Fred has been given a new position: CEO of Wolfram & Hart. As to how much of Fred remains (from what little Lilith reveals it appears Fred has be joined with the demon rather than taken over by him), and whether she is still friend or enemy, that remains to be seen. What happens when Angel interferes with the plans of Wolfram & Hart?

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Angel (2019) #13

Sep 1, 2020

While the comic feels disconnected from current events on the title, it works as a self-contained story offering us a glimpse into Angel's past (which is always tricky given continuity issues). It's not a must-read, but for fans there may be enough of interest.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Angel (2019) #15

Nov 2, 2020

Issue #15 also continues to tease a more romantic relationship between Angel and Kate, which the TV-show hinted at but never developed. The comic also checks in with Fred, who it appears is having a bit of trouble staying sane with the metaphysical entities warring within her skull.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Angel (2022) #1

Feb 16, 2022

The reimagined Buffyverse continues in a new series for Angel who is now a TV detective with Cordelia while his friends continue to fight monsters and things that go bump in the night in his absence.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Angel (2022) #6

Jun 22, 2022

Our baddies seem to be multiverse versions of other characters, although (after skipping several issues of this title) I'll admit to being a bit lost about the point of the story or their reasons for attacking in such public places. I'd guess their shared trouble should bring Angel home, but we'll have to wait and see.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Angel Season 11 #1

Jan 19, 2017

The story itself is an okay set-up for the new season. However, I'm far more excited by the return of Fred (who apparently is sharing a body with Illyria this time around). The idea of exploring an Angelus storyline is intriguing, but my squees for joy come from seeing Fred back in action. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Angel Season 11 #3

Mar 20, 2017

Angel Season Eleven #3 continues the unexpected opening arc with Angel meeting some of Illyria's worshipers/victims. When present, the current version of Illyria runs straight into danger which makes it a pretty good thing Fred is able to pull her back when things get too crazy. However, given what Illyria discovers at the end of the issue, Angel and Fred may need all the help they can get just to makes sure there is still a future worth returning to. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Angel Season 11 #5

Jun 2, 2017

The other question left unanswered is what is the mystical beetle in the carved wooden box? What is its power and how is it connected to the dark visions of the future Angel must stop? I guess we'll have to wait and see. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Animal Man (2011) #1

Sep 14, 2011

I have to admit a slight disappointment that the character's goofy costume (bright orange and blue tights complete with jacket and goggles) didn't survive the reboot, but other than that I have few complaints. Those looking for a typical hero comic may want to try something else, but if you want a little horror mixed in with an atypical hero saving the day I'd suggest giving Animal Man a shot. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Animal Man (2011) #2

Oct 8, 2011

Even though I'm not the biggest fan of this type of story, and I'll probably move on from the comic before this storyline is finished, I'm interested to see where Lemire and artist Travel Foreman end up taking the character, and how big a role the young Maxine will have in her father's use and understanding of his powers. And given the early glimpses we've seen here, the exploration of The Red is going to be a trippy experience. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Annihilators #1

Mar 8, 2011

Even if I find Doctor Dredd to be infused with way too much power for such a ridiculous character, there's still much worth reading. The choice of Quasar as the main story's narrator is an interesting one, although I am surprised (given his quantum bands) how insecure he feels towards the rest of his teammates. The real fun here, however, is the Raccoon story which alone is worth picking up.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Annihilators #2

Apr 13, 2011

Both stories get equal time this time around and both provide great moments. The cosmic level of the Annihilators matched with the craziness of Rocket and Groot is a great combination. The level of adorableness Timothy Green II infuses the art the B-story with (particularly the look of Rocket Raccoon) is just wonderful. If you only bought one comic this week I hope it was this one. It's rare I'm happy paying $5 for a single issue, but this time I think I got my money's worth. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Annihilators #4

Jun 14, 2011

The final panels of each story seem to suggest we'll be seeing both of these groups again (hopefully at a much-reduced cover price). Even though I love the Silver Surfer, I'm far more interested in a quirky comic about a new Guardians of a Galaxy than further adventures of the Annihilators. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Annihilators: Earthfall #1

Oct 5, 2011

Although we do get a Rocket Raccoon/Groot back-up story it's far shorter than what was included in the first Annihilators mini-series. And that's really too bad because less Rocket Raccoon is never a good thing. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Annihilators: Earthfall #2

Oct 31, 2011

My only real complaint here is the Rocket Raccoon/Groot back-up story gets even more truncated than it did in the first issue. We only get five pages of the pair stuck in Mojo‘s TV studio fighting out battles for the alien's entertainment. I enjoyed the story, and I love how artist Timothy Green II draws Rocket Racoon. I just wanted a few more pages of this story. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Annihilators: Earthfall #3

Nov 29, 2011

With only one issue left it looks like both stories (even if the second isn't being given as many pages as I'd like) look set to go out with a bang. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Annihilators: Earthfall #4

Jan 4, 2012

Much like the first mini-series Earthfall was fun, but not as good as I hoped it to be. Here's hoping the next one knocks it out of the park (and gives us at least twice as much Rocket Racoon and Groot). I AM GROOT!

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Aphrodite V #1

Aug 2, 2018

Although we don't see much in terms of a larger threat for a character, the series does present the idea of a looming threat just beyond the horizon that she alone may be able to deal with. Honestly, I'm not sure that there is enough here to keep me around long enough to find those answers, but Aphrodite V #1 works as a single issue. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Archie Meets Batman '66 #2

Aug 21, 2018

With help still on its way, Archie and the gang try to figure out what has happened to all the adults in town who are acting out of character (it seems the Siren has swayed their minds and hearts, but her powers prove to be inadequate over the teen population). Hmmm, sounds like a convenient way for Archie and company to help save the day. I'll be curious to see where things go from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Archie Meets Batman '66 #3

Oct 3, 2018

Will the joke be on Jughead? With the city continue to stay under the Siren's sway? Will Archie team-up with Robin and Batgirl to save the day? Stay tuned! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Archie Meets Batman '66 #4

Nov 13, 2018

Holy power grab, Batman! Has the Dark Knight Detective arrived too late to save Riveredale from his most fiendish foes? I guess we'll have to tune in next issue to find out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Arrow: Season 2.5 #7

Apr 16, 2015

With Oliver and Felicity both in enemy hands it should be interesting to see Arsenal and Huntress team-up to save them in the storyline's conclusion. Sadly, I have to admit the apparently imminent death of Khem-Adam makes me less interested to see how that plot thread eventually plays out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Arrow: Season 2.5 #9

Jun 18, 2015

Although both the killer and the vigilantes manage to get away from the police, the need to create another batch of Mirakuru cure sets up further issues of this arc by sending Oliver back to Lian Yu (taking Harper along for the ride). I'm curious to see what buddy bonding the two might go through, and what trouble they might get themselves into, in Ollie's old stomping grounds. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Arrow: Season 2.5 #10

Jul 23, 2015

The rest of Arrow Season 2.5 #10 deals with events back in Starling involving Caleb Green‘s (who sadly is a far less interesting character than Slade) short encounter with Laurel Lance (which, as intended, drives Oliver crazy). The issue also spends time filling in the gap between Season Two and Season Three to help explain how Quentin Lance became Starling City's newest Police Captain. The first-half of the issue works better than the second (each was released previously as digital-first issues), but fans can still find some enjoyment here. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Artemis: Wanted (2022) #1

Jul 28, 2022

While I don't think you needed an over-sized issue to tell this tale, the comic does what it sets out to (with quite a bit of exposition in the middle with a literally deus ex machina spelling things out for us including suggesting the roles for all three woman going forward amongst the Amazons) and returns not just Artemis to the Amazons but Freya and her daughter as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Asgardians of the Galaxy #1

Sep 11, 2018

The comic is tied into Marvel's larger event (Infinity Wars) but because so much of the writing is cribbed from other sources its pretty easy to follow. Issue #1 is really memorable only for the unusual makeup of the team (involving villains and magical frogs) who may be able to save the day if they can stop themselves from destroying the universe. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Astounding Wolf-Man #25

Nov 26, 2010

That's not to say I didn't enjoy the issue, I did. The final few pages present several new opportunities should Kirkman and Howard ever decide ever decide to return to the character. And just the thought that they've unleashed an army of werewolf covert opps into the Image universe, answerable only to their new leader, does make me smile.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Astro City (2013) #1

Jun 10, 2013

Although I thought The Broken Man's intro was a little odd, the character's sly narration works well to introduce the world of Astro City to both old and new readers as well as create an idea that the reader is being used to help steer the story to the outcome The Broken Man wishes. I'm happy to see the series get new life at Vertigo, and if this first issue is any indication it looks like Busiek and Anderson still have plenty of entertaining stories left to tell. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Astro City (2013) #2

Jul 15, 2013

Presented completely from Marella's point of view, we get her initial awe at her new job, the driven nature and yearning to get that one call to help save the world, and finally the acceptance and understanding of her small role in the larger picture. Without doubt, Astro City #2 is one of the best comics I've read this year. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Astro City (2013) #3

Aug 19, 2013

Although it may not be as good as Astro City #2 (which is easily one of the best comics I've read this year), it's a joy to see a comic delve into this side of super-hero comics again. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Astro City (2013) #4

Sep 17, 2013

Of course when villains such as the ridiculous Majordomo show up to forcibly recruit those like Martha who have no interest in their conquest, the Sidelineres do know how to defend themselves. Once again writer Kurt Busiek and artist Brent Anderson find another niche in super-hero comics to explore with entertaining results. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #5

Oct 15, 2013

The stories break down into a secret government agency in the 1930s dealing with the alien and bizarre, a Kobra-style cult leader in India during the 1940s, and a steam-punk heroine named Dame Progress chasing down a crafty villain whose motives aren't as black-and-white as she believes. Each story, although truncated, is worth reading.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #6

Nov 20, 2013

Although presented through the trappings of a sci-fi story, the latest issue of Astro City is a straightforward character study of a complicated man taking advantage of an unique situation. For a mobster Thatcher is rather pleasant, but he also knows how the world works and is always looking to take the next available opportunity to improve his situation. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #7

Dec 16, 2013

The focus may be different than the adventures we've gotten so far, but the storytelling is still just as good. Given what we've already seen over six issues I'd expect the role of the battered young boy to play a larger role in the story than we've seen so far, as will The Confessor who makes an appearance in the comic's final panel. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #8

Jan 20, 2014

With the help of The Confessor the group begins to narrow potential suspects, but Winged Victory appears dangerously close to throwing in the towel. However, I'm betting she's got at least one good fight left in her. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #9

Feb 17, 2014

Although the overall story isn't advanced much (the investigation hits dead ends and the evidence against Winged Victory mounts), in terms of exploring the effect of the attack on the hero Astro City #9 works well. And before it's over we get the tease of how the young man who came to her door just before her world started crashing down might have a big role to play in the arc's final issue next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #10

Mar 17, 2014

Although the full effect of the smear campaign isn't yet clear, Winged Victory earns her hard-fought victory and proves her worthiness to continue her quest to help troubled and abused woman (and her first male student) across the globe as her story, thankfully, isn't over quite yet. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #11

Apr 18, 2014

Writer Kurt Busiek and artist Brent Anderson have a flair for telling this kind of story focused on those on the periphery of the super-powerful individuals and eventful moments in the world of Astro City while continuing to deliver one of the best monthly comics available. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #12

May 19, 2014

Obsessed with the wolf in Little Red Riding Hood, the glory days for Edward “Ned” James Carroway involved working alone and with other “Dapper Dans” or “Clotheshorses” whose robberies always included a touch of style and grace and providing an ideal life for his wife and daughter. However, after being caught first by Jack-in-the-Box and later the Confessor we also see the lows of Ned's life which include loosing his family and being lured once again back into a life of crime by old friends and a pair of expensive shoes. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Astro City (2013) #13

Jun 17, 2014

Although similar themes have certainly been developed and explored in more depth elsewhere, Astro City #13 still works by playing with the lives of normal characters and larger-than-life entities who don't always have the same needs or desires. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #14

Aug 19, 2014

The slimy nephew taking advantage of the old woman is a bit pretty easy to see coming, but writer Kurt Busiek hints that there's far more to Ellie's story than we've seen so far. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #15

Sep 24, 2014

Despite every motive to seek revenge from the woman who stole her life, Ellie proves to be a hero in every sense of the word not even accepting the praise or help of the world's heroes once they realize the true story. As always, worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Astro City (2013) #16

Oct 18, 2014

The result is another great addition to the current Astro City series, a heartfelt message to those still struggling to find themselves during adolescence, and a hero in Starbright who I hope to see much more of in the future. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Astro City (2013) #17

Nov 29, 2014

Told as the story by the one who witnessed it, first in dreams and later in reality, Astro City #17 delivers on every level with action, loss, true heroism, and a very Silver Age message about the nature of sacrifice. Best of the Week.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Astro City (2013) #18

Dec 27, 2014

Although I've quite enjoyed the short one-off issues of the current series, Kurt Busiek and Brent Anderson open a door here I'll gladly walk through and stick around to see what does happen when a super-hero decides (or is forced to) retire? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Astro City (2013) #22

Apr 20, 2015

As with most of these one-off stories writer Kurt Busiek creates a beautiful tale that leaves us wanting more. From the man's life as a cosmic hero, a very John Carter-ish father and husband on an alien world, to life on Earth as a sci-fi author, there are many facets to Starfighter I certainly wouldn't mind be explored more in future issues. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Astro City (2013) #23

May 26, 2015

As is true with almost all of the comic's best storylines, Astro City #23 leaves the reader wanting more of the central character's story and Sticks' adventures in his new home. Thankfully we will be getting at least one more issue with the simian hero/drummer, but from what we're given here I'm hoping that won't be all we see from the character for the foreseeable future. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #24

Jul 7, 2015

As with the opening issue to this two-part tale Astro City #24 offers some twists and turns as Sticks struggles to find his role in Astro City where it's too dangerous to be a drummer and too hard to be a hero. His solution, thanks in part to an unexpected pep-talk from the Samaritan allows the character to create an unorthodox solution that not only allows him to live the life he's always wanted but still find a way to put his obvious skills to use. And if he's got to occasionally dress up in a monkey suit, so to speak, well that's a small price to pay for finding the freedom to play beautiful music. Isn't it? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Astro City (2013) #25

Aug 6, 2015

And she's heroic! Presented with hard choices our hero rises to the challenge to save not just one world but two. There's no cynicism or unnecessary grim filter that Busiek and Merino are forced to tell their tale through. This results in a fresh take on a rather basic premise that, like nearly all issues of the series, delivers just the kind of story you've been looking to read. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Astro City (2013) #26

Sep 4, 2015

When the nightmares begin to effect the hero's work he seeks out some super-human help. Although there's an explanation given for his experiences, and a villain to be caught, like most issue of Astro City the truth is never that simple. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Astro City (2013) #28

Nov 17, 2015

The heroes brought to life storyline is a common one in comics. Even if the resolution of the twist is the weakest aspect of the story, there's still plenty to enjoy here including the art of Gary Chaloner who does a good job of fitting his style to match the established art of the series by Brent Anderson far better than we saw in the previous issue (which, while certainly not awful, simply didn't look or feel like Astro City). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #29

Dec 8, 2015

I have a strong hunch about how the storyline will unfold but even so Busiek and Anderson sell me on the concept within the first few panels of the comic. I'll definitely be coming back for more of Zozat and those damn dirty humans. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #31

Jan 28, 2016

I don't know if or when the series might step back in to give us a look at the creature's new life with the Honor Guard, who accepts the Living Nightmare when it shows courage and true heroism and a driving desire for change, but in a series with countless nooks and crannies that might go unexplored for years, its good to know that the creature has earned a new life. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #32

Mar 9, 2016

As to the how, I'm looking forward to see that be played out over the next two issues and learn where it all went wrong (again) for Steeljack. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #33

Apr 4, 2016

It makes perfect since in a world where heroes and villains exist that someone would eventually make a cheap buck off their former merchandise and costumes. It's what they man behind the scenes may be doing with the old weapons which concerns Steeljack and his old friend (who is a little too enthusastic about seeing the Fix-It Man's wares to be completely trustworthy at this point). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Astro City (2013) #34

Apr 28, 2016

Steeljack‘s three-issue arc comes to a close as the former super-villain turned private detective and one-time squeeze Cutlass come up against the arc's true villain: a greedy collector grabbing and using super-villain tech for his own amusement (and to decorate his garish restaurant). Astro City #34 is the weakest issue of the arc but that doesn't mean there isn't still plenty for fans to enjoy including a nice (if a bit hokey) epilogue as dejected Steeljacket is surprised by the support of his friends which helps the man of steel put the entire sordid mess behind him.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Astro City (2013) #35

May 19, 2016

While his family digs at the archaeological site of the death of the first Jack-in-the-Box, Jerome's narrates the history of the hero from his grandfather to father, to the current incarnation of sidekick turned hero. Before he can catch us up on the full story things get interesting with the arrival of a new villain as, thankfully, this storyline will continue for one more issue. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Astro City (2013) #36

Jun 22, 2016

Just as we saw heroism and a desire to do good passed down in the last issue, here the hatred and need for vengeance leads to the creation of a new super-villain hell-bent on revenge for events she doesn't even understand. Finally uncovering the truth proves too much for the tortured soul who spent her entire life on a singular purpose which, now knowing the truth, can never be fulfilled. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Astro City (2013) #37

Jul 28, 2016

Through the stories from the Broken Man we learn about the legendary traveling musician Silverstring, the rebellious Mister Cakewalk, and see the birth of Jazzbaby. Presented through the view of omnipresent narrator who is only telling us the parts of the story he wishes us to know, it's an unusual walk down the streets of Astro City's dark and troubled past that nevertheless still holds its share of magic and wonderment. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #38

Sep 22, 2016

Only tied to the previous issue through it theme of music and how it connects the world, Astro City #38 may not be as strong an issue but there's plenty here to enjoy including both the musical theme which is further developed, the issue's big action sequence, and Jazzbaby herself. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Astro City (2013) #41

Feb 25, 2017

Totally accessible, the issue could be read easily by those who have followed the adventures in Astro City over two decades or someone picking up their first comic book. Nostalgic and wistful (two more trademarks of Busiek and Anderson's work), Astro City #41 in one comic you don't want to pass up about a hero who was more than just a cape and whose convictions helped him save the world (from both internal and external threats). Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Astro City (2013) #43

Apr 28, 2017

With Tillie stealing nearly all of the Broken Man's thunder it's a little unclear what lesson he wanted to impart to the readers in this issue. However, Tillie's story is easily entertaining enough to forgive her. I wouldn't mind hearing more from the girl and learn where he path goes from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Astro City (2013) #44

May 22, 2017

Every piece of this comic is terrific including the heroes unaware of the cat's action, the villain's Scooby-Doo style cursing about how his plans were foiled by a meddlesome cat, and the cat's own cat-like nature to, despite her super-powers and obvious intelligence, still cause mischief around the house. I want so much more of Kittyhawk than just one issue. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Astro City (2013) #45

Jul 6, 2017

It's hard to judge part one of “Who Broke the Broken Man?” as so much of the story is left untold. Next month's concluding issue certainly has plenty of questions to answer, however, and plenty of dots left to connect. Although he's popped up here and there over the current run of the series, so far the Broken Man has been more of a distraction than anything else. To properly judge this two-issue arc, and the number of appearances we've seen in previous issues, we'll have to wait and see just where the character's meandering story takes us, and what it all means for him… and for Astro City. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #46

Aug 24, 2017

I'll admit being surprised by the reveal of the Broken Man's creation. Plus, we get some classic Jack-in-the-Box action thrown in for free. While the comic does give us hard facts about the odd character, the truth about the Oubor remains largely a mystery. It's obviously opposed to the Broken Man and what he stands for, but what does it want? And how can we, the audience, help? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Astro City (2013) #47

Sep 19, 2017

While the cliffhanger suggests the next issue may get far more serious for our characters, this one is pure magic and definitely worth picking up. Best of the Week.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Astro City (2013) #48

Oct 26, 2017

While it might be easy to dismiss the two-issue story as the ridiculous adventures of a canine hero, writer Kurt Busiek and Mike Norton tap into some wonderful Silver Age magic with the reflective touch of a more modern tale. It was a joy to read, and my only sadness comes from knowing G-Dog's adventure is done. Best-of-the-Week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #49

Nov 30, 2017

There are several layers here. We have the reporter searching for the truth, a daughter looking for her father, a woman realizing how her father's abandonment of her is mirrored in her relationship to her husband, and the (highly-speculative) origins of one of the more unusual heroes in Astro City who manifests through different hosts to protect and defend those in danger. While I think ultimately that might be a bit too much to tackle and fully develop in a single issue, writer Kurt Busiek and artist Brent Anderson definitely provide an intriguing story that leaves the reader something to think about. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Astro City (2013) #50

Feb 7, 2018

There's obviously more going on with Michael than he's willing to talk about, or admit to himself, but the loss of the woman he loved in an event that literally removed her from existence has obviously taken its toll. Finding meaning by helping others in the group achieve some measure of peace has given our protagonist a purpose. But who is paying for the group (not to mention his apartment and groceries) and just how will a survivor of the latest attack on the city in the final panel effect his fragile peace? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2013) #51

Apr 10, 2018

The comic's next issue wraps up both this storyline and (sadly) the series. Although it's the longest run of an Astro City comic to date, it still feels far too early to say goodbye. Thankfully, Kurt Busiek and Brent Anderson will be continuing to tell stories less-regularly in graphic novel form. However, we'll only have one issue left to investigate more into Michael's odd story and whether or not he can find the support and solace he needs from those he's offered the same to week after week. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Astro City (2013) #52

Jul 5, 2018

The issue deals with the conflict in the group led by the woman who refused to believe Michael's story and the others who were confused by it. There's healing here, but no quick fixes (despite what the Hanged Man offers). Like always, Astro City reminds us it's a complicated world out there in this fitting finale. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Astro City (2022): That Was Then...

Apr 7, 2022

As a kick-off point, Astro City: That Was Then feels a bit odd. It's really more of a teaser of things to come. Along with the introduction of several new heroes we do see some familiar faces as well and are teased that although the Jayhawks may be dead that doesn't necessarily mean they are gone.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo and The Ring of Fire #1

Aug 3, 2015

The issue's B-story involves the new day-to-day life within Tesladyne, now controlled by Majestic 12 (under their new brand ULTRA), which begins to answer questions about why the group went to such lengths to take control of the company. The Action Scientists better get their boss back into fighting shape soon; it appears the world is going to need him. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo and The Ring of Fire #3

Nov 30, 2015

It's good to have Atomic Robo back looking more like his old self. And it's about time as the situation is only growing more dire issue by the issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo and the Temple of Od #1

Aug 15, 2016

Atomic Robo and the Temple of Od #1 is a solid issue to set-up the latest Atomic Robo mini-series. Filled with homages to the opening scene of Indiana Jones and the Temple of Doom as well as the comic's trademark humor, tie-ins to previous issues, and action-packed science adventuring, I can't wait to see where we go from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo and the Temple of Od #2

Sep 28, 2016

One heroic rescue later and Atomic Robo, Dr. Lu, and Helen are all fleeing the burning laboratory, leaving one pissed-off super-soldier in their wake. Now that the immediate goal of rescuing Dr. Lu has been accomplished, Robo and his friends will still have to deal with a crumbling laboratory full of the tools necessary to create an entire army of enhanced soldiers just like the one that was able to capture Robo all on his own. Good thing we've got three issues left! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo and the Temple of Od #3

Nov 3, 2016

The issue ends with our hero in danger yet again. Although the science of his plan seemed sound, the execution may not have been all that he hoped. With only two issues remaining, Atomic Robo needs to buckle down and find a way to stop the Japanese, their Zero Point experiments, and the super-soldiers at their command. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Atomic Robo Presents: Real Science Adventures #2

May 21, 2012

Although all four stories are fun The Sparrow is still missing a certain robotic hero to liven things up, and it certainly feels like it would have been better served told in more than a few pages at a time (honestly, I'd completely forgotten what happened in this story in issue #1). Sadly, the killer robotic dogs on the cover don't make an appearance in this issue. Only the Rasputin tale stands out and I would have gladly traded the pages of one of the other stories to have this one fleshed-out a little more. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo Presents: Real Science Adventures #3

Jul 3, 2012

The fourth tale, “Atomic Robo and the Electromatic Dream Machine” finds the science adventurer trapped in a dreamlike battle of wits with a disgruntled fired scientist. It's fun, but not too memorable. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo Presents: Real Science Adventures #4

Jul 14, 2012

The most interesting story is the very personal take on today's comic industry as Atomic Robo steps into a comic book shop for the first time in 40 years only to discover the bizarre nature of reboots, retcons, variant covers, and grim and gritty comics – none of which appeal to the comics he once knew and loved. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Atomic Robo Presents: Real Science Adventures #5

Aug 13, 2012

Is it still enjoyable? Will I still pick up the final issue of the series? Of course, but with the new series The Flying She-Devils of the Pacific already underway, I'm ready to delve into an ongoing arc with the more consistent art of Scott Wegener and (hopefully) a bigger payoff than what I've seen here. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Atomic Robo Presents: Real Science Adventures #6

Sep 23, 2012

Although the mini-series gave us some fun short stories over its six-issue run (which turns out to be at least two issues too many) we've seen the comic sputter to a finish the last few months with meandering stories, too many of which didn't include Atomic Robo. What I'll likely remember Atomic Robo Presents Real Science Adventures for is some terrific covers and a lot of missed opportunity in terms of storytelling. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Atomic Robo Presents: Real Science Adventures #7

Apr 23, 2013

Even without Atomic Robo, writer Brian Clevinger still delivers a fun (if somewhat unmemorable) adventure. I like Erica Henderson's art, but at times felt like an odd choice for the tone of the comic. That said, I'm still likely to pick up the next issue. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo Presents: Real Science Adventures #8

Jun 3, 2013

The back-up story concludes Atomic Robo and his group's discovery of a giant robot in Egypt. As Robo and the other scientist argue how best to continue with the creature looming large before them, Jenkins takes matters into his own hands and settles the question once and for all. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Atomic Robo Presents: Real Science Adventures #9

Aug 13, 2013

Although their investigation leads to little in the way of concrete answers, it does narrow the focus of the storyline going forward as well as bring the threesome to the attention of another interested party: Nikola Tesla.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo Presents: Real Science Adventures #10

Sep 6, 2013

I was happy to see the return of both Ke-Ying and Oakley (although Annie isn't given much to do this time around) as it looks like there will be plenty of trouble for all of Tesla's associates to handle beginning next issue with the reprisal from the Black Coats. The issue also reprints the amusing “The Yonkers Devil” as a back-up story. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo Presents: Real Science Adventures #11

Sep 30, 2013

The second back-up story, years later, involves Atomic Robo answering a distress call from the military who have gotten into a spot of trouble into the Vampire Dimension while using that same lost technology (a fact that doesn't go unnoticed by the incensed Robo). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Atomic Robo Presents: Real Science Adventures #12

Dec 1, 2013

The issue includes two short back-up stories involving Atomic Robo taking down a pair of spies in Nevada (by jumping out of an airplane and landing on their car) and Dr. Dinosaur laying what he considers an ingenious trap for members of Tesladyne that doesn't produce the results the insane dinosaur hoped for. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: Ghost of Station X #4

Dec 20, 2011

Thanks to the help of some low tech trucker know-how, Robo is able to trace the signals back to Hashima Island (where Louis and Martin are about to land). With one issue left (enclosed in a giant crate on his way to the island) Atomic Robo will have to save his friends, uncover the truth behind the conspiracy that wants him dead, and save the world. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: Ghost of Station X #5

Feb 17, 2012

One final note: I struggled to find a comic in any local comic shop around Kansas City. I mentioned this to Brian Clevinger via Twitter and was almost instantly granted a review copy to enjoy. Thank you! You're a class act, sir, and I can't wait to read Volume 7 (and I'm already super-excited for the news that Dr. Dinosaur will return in Volume 8). As long as you and Scott Wegener keep making Atomic Robo comics I (and a whole bunch of comic nerds everywhere) will very, very happily keep reading them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: Revenge Of The Vampire Dimension #1

Feb 20, 2010

The team of writer Brian Clevinger and artist Scott Wegener return to their characters in the first issue of this new Atomic Robo mini-series, and, if this first issue is any indication, it should be a fun ride.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Atomic Robo: Savage Sword of Dr. Dinosaur #1

Jun 28, 2013

Although we only get Dr. Dinosaur in the first issue's final pages, there's much to enjoy here including the multiple references to Jenkins hatred of paperwork, the mystery of 8/11 and who exactly is out to destroy the image of our lovable hero, the Tesladyne team realizing they've just been framed (again), and Robo's team on-the-nose reading of why Robo has joined them on what appears initially to be a wild goose chase. Oh, and did I mention, it has Dr. Dinosaur! I can't wait for issue #2. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Atomic Robo: Savage Sword of Dr. Dinosaur #2

Aug 20, 2013

I simply can't recommend the awesome of this comic, and the first two issues of the latest series, enough. Bring on issue #3! Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: Savage Sword of Dr. Dinosaur #3

Nov 25, 2013

Next issue I'd expect to see more of Jenkins leading the group to repel the soldiers who have finally arrived and, hopefully, more back-and-forth between Atomic Robo and Dr. Dinosaur. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Atomic Robo: Savage Sword of Dr. Dinosaur #4

Jan 6, 2014

With only a single issue left, Jenkins captured and Tesladyne in the hands of their enemies, and Dr. Dinosaur detonating his absurd creation, there's still quite a bit of ground to cover to find out just how Atomic Robo and his friends defeat his supremely-awesome arch-nemesis and get out of this one. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Atomic Robo: Savage Sword of Dr. Dinosaur #5

Jan 27, 2014

The issue also sees Jenkins turn the tables on Majestic, but, just as Atomic Robo's story ends on a cliffhanger, we're left to wonder just what happened after the explosion at Tesladyne. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: Spectre of Tomorrow #1

Nov 13, 2017

While the day-to-day of Robo's existence may be lacking excitement, the same can't be said halfway around the world where at a conference in Hungary something quite bizarre occurs (which will no doubt help take Robo's mind of his current troubles" while obviously causing all kinds of new trouble). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: Spectre of Tomorrow #3

Jan 22, 2018

Robo's adventure takes him, a gung-ho Foley, and a less-gung-ho Fischer to Hashima Island after our intrepid science adventurer deduces that the causes of whatever is happening with this cybernetic attacks traces back to the island and to Alan. With Robo getting his butt kicked by the island's defenses, and some poor shooting by Foley, unexpected assistance comes from an equally unexpected source. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Atomic Robo: The Agents of C.H.A.N.G.E. #1

Dec 8, 2022

Fun times all around, including some always enjoyable frustration of Robo concerning a dinosaur scientist (who he tricks into staying home and taking messages), examples of the dinosaur's twisted thinking, and the introduction of threats both new and old for the team to deal with.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: The Agents of C.H.A.N.G.E. #2

Jan 3, 2023

A solid follow-up to the first issue featuring action and plenty of humor fans of Atomic Robo expect.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: The Dawn of a New Era #1

Jan 15, 2019

The first issue gives us a feel for the new recruits and foreshadows potential issues on Bernard's adventure. However, it's Robo's conversations with Alan that prove the most interesting. In instructing his "son" the history of robotics and humanity the lesson turns philosophical and Robo finds himself in the unenviable position of a father asked a question he wasn't prepared for and doesn't know how to answer. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: The Dawn of a New Era #2

Feb 20, 2019

Vikram and Lang have found their trouble, Bernard appears good and lost in his exploration, and the question now becomes is how soon before the rest of the Action Scientist run into troubles of their own? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: The Dawn of a New Era #3

Mar 13, 2019

The latest issue also offers more of Robo teaching his "son," and Foley growing more confident (and sassy) in her role as mentor to the next generation of Action Scientists. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: The Dawn of a New Era #4

Apr 9, 2019

Deep inside the Earth, Bernard discovers just what Princess Nequai needs from him to save her people from the lasting influence of Dr. Dinosaur. Although the rock creature gets what she needs from the scientist, what effect will this have on Bernard going forward? Bring on issue #5! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Atomic Robo: The Dawn of a New Era #5

Jul 8, 2019

In other storylines, Jenkins continues to be Jenkins while arguing for a larger offensive against the dangers he believes to be coming, Vikram and Lang make another attempt at a vacation, and Bernard's transformation has apparently just begun (although it is still to early to tell if this is ultimately a good or bad thing for everyone else not being transformed by talking crystal creatures who live deep under the Earth). There's still plenty out there for the science adventures to tackle, but for today everything seems to be fine. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Atomic Robo: The Deadly Art of Science #1

Nov 13, 2010

Fans of Brian Clevinger and Scott Wegener's off-beat character should feel right at home. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Atomic Robo: The Deadly Art of Science #3

Feb 15, 2011

A very enjoyable issue all around punctuated with Tarot's increasingly short-temper towards all of Atomic Robo's "help." And aside from giving or hero his first kiss, Helen also teaches him a lesson about family which gives us a nice closing sequence between Robo and his creator Nikola Tesla that brings the pair's confrontation earlier in the issue full circle. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Atomic Robo: The Deadly Art of Science #4

Feb 28, 2011

We also get a little more of the book's villain this time around " Thomas Edison. We only get a short glimpse as to what his scientists are working on, but the final issue seems primed to wrap-up all these stories satisfactorily. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: The Deadly Art of Science #5

May 9, 2011

From beginning to end this is the best series of so far of Atomic Robo and I'm going to be on the lookout for the trade paperback of the full series to add to my shelf. Definitely worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: The Flying She-Devils Of The Pacific #1

Jul 5, 2012

A fun first issue to start the new series with an unexpected (but humorous) chauvinistic slant from Atomic Robo. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: The Flying She-Devils Of The Pacific #2

Aug 18, 2012

Robo also has to deal with the news that Lauren, the She-Devil's resident mechanical whiz, has cannibalized the prototype airship Robo was shot down in. Initially furious, Robo comes to find Lauren's inventiveness and outside-the-box thinking infectious and agrees to help her redesign the jet packs using his technology. This brings peace back to the island, or would except for the arrival of the mysterious planes attacking the She-Devils' hidden island. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: The Flying She-Devils Of The Pacific #3

Sep 27, 2012

With so much action there's not a lot of time for character and story development, but writer Brian Clevinger does find places to insert the oddball humor of the comic we've all come to know and love. Hopefully next issue will reveal the identities and motives of the She-Devils' enemies and continue to bring more zany action. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: The Flying She-Devils Of The Pacific #4

Nov 20, 2012

Issue #4 sets up the events of next month's series conclusion, reunites Atomic Robo and the She-Devils, and provides tons of action and a couple of very amusing moments. In other words, exactly what you'd expect from Atomic Robo. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Atomic Robo: The Flying She-Devils Of The Pacific #5

Dec 20, 2012

Most of the action is pretty straightforward, but the comic's best moments come in the battle's aftermath when Atomic Robo looks to see what his involvement with the women has cost the She-Devils (and his own company). We also get a sweet epilogue set years into the future as the granddaughter of one of the She-Devils discovers her Gramms has lived a far more exciting life than she ever dreamed. It's this final scene that really ties a nice bow on the entire series and sends it off in style. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: The Knights of the Golden Circle #1

May 1, 2014

It didn't take long to sell me on the new series, and even after receiving a free digital review copy of the comic I gladly spent the money to grab a print copy. Giddyap Robo, I'm ready to ride! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: The Knights of the Golden Circle #2

Jul 9, 2014

Assuming the role of Ironside (who he's mistaken for by both friend and foe), Robo is forced to take part in events leading to the kind of zany fun regular readers of his adventures have come to expect. The reveal of a nefarious plot involving Helsingard certainly raises the stakes (or at least it will once Robo catches sight of his old, but here younger, enemy). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Atomic Robo: The Knights of the Golden Circle #3

Jul 28, 2014

Another fun action-packed issue clues us on to the limited time our time-displaced robotic-science adventurer has before he runs out of power while also letting our hero learn just who is behind the abductions leaving a series of empty old west ghost towns while creating weapons for conquest and (one would assume) other nefarious purposes. Must-Read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Atomic Robo: The Knights of the Golden Circle #4

Oct 28, 2014

Brian Clevinger and artist Scott Wegener don't skimp on the action or humor as the latest Atomic Robo limited series continues to rolling along towards its conclusion in the next issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Atomic Robo: The Knights of the Golden Circle #5

Nov 22, 2014

It's not every issue of Atomic Robo in which you get to see our hero die, although the state of his remains keeps the door open for his return to the present (or perhaps near future?) as soon as the crate is discovered. Who exactly opens the crate, now that Tesladyne has been shut down, however, opens up new possibilities for what kind of world Robo will find himself in, and what kind of Robo readers may find, once our hero is brought back to the world of the living. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Avengers (2010) #2

Jun 24, 2010

The bad news? The time steam is broken. The good news? The Avengers, with the help of Noh-Varr, are ready to hop into the future and set things straight (unless Wonder Man can stop them). And any title that has a cameo from both the 2099 Universe and the original Guardians of the Galaxy gets a pass from me. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Avengers (2010) #7

Nov 20, 2010

If the story moves forward Parker should be a match for the Avengers, and a villain worthy of the team needing all the help they can get. I just hope writer Brian Michael Bendis isn't set on putting all the gems in the hands of this two-time loser.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Avengers (2010) #8

Jan 11, 2011

This is actually an issue you could easily skip and not miss any big developments in the story arc. That said, it's still worth a look for the interactions between the Illuminati, but it's far from a must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Avengers (2010) #10

Mar 1, 2011

All that plus our heroes finally come face-to-face with the villain amassing the Infinity Gems for himself – the Hood (who's gotten his grubby hands on yet another gem). Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Avengers (2010) #11

Apr 6, 2011

Oh, and the surprise guest who makes his appearance on the final panel? Yeah, that's pretty damn cool, too. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Avengers (2010) #12

Apr 25, 2011

In the end the Hood goes back to jail, the Red Hulk becomes a permanent member of the Avengers, and we see Steve Rogers making a compromise he wouldn't have made three or four years ago. It may not be as good as the last issue, but it's still worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Avengers (2010) #14

Jun 21, 2011

I don't mind the elevated nature as the heroes say kind words about the Red Hulk for apparently (but not really) giving his life in a futile cause, but given the level of reference displayed here you'd think they were talking about someone on the level of Captain America (all the more empty given the absence of any body foreshadowing that this isn't the end of the character). Good idea. Bad execution. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Avengers (2012) #1

Dec 10, 2012

The first comic certainly teases big, epic-size adventures to come, with what looks like may be a rotating roster of reserves. Far less talky than Brian Michael Bendis‘ take on the characters, I've got to admit I kinda want my money back for how little Jonathan Hickman delivers, compared to the epicness which is promised in the first few pages. And I'm sure as hell not going to spend $4 more in just two weeks to see where he goes from here. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Avengers (2018) #1

May 8, 2018

Anyway, bad shit is coming. Time to assemble, or something. Just do it without me. I'm out. Excelsior this ain't. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Avengers (2018) #33

May 28, 2020

Following the will of Khonshu it's unclear just what the endgame of Moon Knight or his God is, but it's obvious he's only getting started. He's unable to draw power from Black Panther, but there are plenty of other mystical forces in the Marvel Universe to draw from.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Avengers (2018) #34

Jul 20, 2020

It's hard to separate the tone-deaf Black Panther scenes from the rest of the story, which is a serviceable middle-issue to the larger arc foreshadowing more trouble to come and a larger threat still yet to be identified.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Avengers (2018) #35

Aug 25, 2020

Elsewhere, Captain America, Blade, and She-Hulk rescue some of their captured allies aboard the Moon Train. But it's the Avenger left behind that shows up to confront the Khonshu heading into the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Avengers (2023) #1

May 30, 2023

Our Avengers lineup includes Sam Wilson, Thor, Tony Stark, Black Panther, the Vision, and the Scarlet Witch. with Carol providing some insight, both through narration and dialogue, about her reasons for wanting each for the team (and choosing them over other contenders). It's an interesting team. Now assembled, let's see just how this new team functions.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Avengers Assemble #7

Sep 14, 2012

The use of the Badoon is a nice touch (given their importance to the original Guardians of the Galaxy) and although Thanos omnipotence and brashness to the Elders of the Universe is nothing new, it's presented well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Avengers Assemble #8

Oct 24, 2012

The end of the arc works well, and gives us two full pages of the two teams beating the crap out of a de-powered Thanos. There is still the matter of the Badoon armada on their way to Earth, but it looks like we'll have to wait a few months to see how that plays out when the Guardians return in their new monthly comic in February. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Avengers Prime #1

Jun 5, 2010

Can a fractured friendship be forged anew? Can trust lost be regained? Can Tony Stark, Steve Rogers, and Thor stop from killing each other long enough to survive the hell to which they've just been sent? Those are just three questions this new mini-series sets out to answer. There's much to enjoy here including Iron Man in my favorite classic armor, Steve Rogers taking down a small army, and an unexpected villain for Thor to battle. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Avengers Vs. X-Men #0

Apr 1, 2012

It's no coincidence the first issue (or does a zero issue still count as a preview issue – goddamit, did I mention I hate zero issues?!) begins with the character who made mutants an endangered species and the one believed to be able to return them to glory. Of the two, I think Hope's story is stronger. Knowing the cold reception she would receive I just don't buy Wanda getting talked into visiting the mansion that easily, even by Carol Danvers (who also should have known better). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Avengers Vs. X-Men #1

Apr 6, 2012

To the X-Men, however, handing over what many believe to be the Mutant Messiah their only chance at fighting back from extinction to a species known to hate and distrust them isn't going to go over well. What's going to be intersting is how these characters and two teams are going to coexist after all the smoke clears. I can't wait until issue #2. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Avengers Vs. X-Men #2

Apr 24, 2012

But it's bad news for the Avengers as it seems Cyclops has bought Hope enough time as the Phoenix has indeed started to rise. The fallout of this issue, in two weeks, should be very interesting. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Avengers Vs. X-Men #3

May 5, 2012

By the end of the issue we now have three distinct groups. Cyclops and the X-Men who want to keep Hope away from the Avengers, the Avengers who want to keep Hope away from becoming the new Phoenix, and Wolverine who just wants her dead. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Avengers Vs. X-Men #4

May 19, 2012

In the end we're left an okay comic with a couple of nice scenes but where the big tease of Hope becoming the new Phoenix is still unfulfilled. I'm probably done with the series until the focus shifts to the actually event and its fallout, rather than just teasing us about what's coming (especially at $4 per issue). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Avengers Vs. X-Men #5

Jun 11, 2012

Honestly, as twists got this one is pretty damn dumb, but having the power dispersed among five different X-Men may create some unusual battles over the next few issues before Marvel finally relents and gives us the only thing we're reading this comic for – the new Phoenix. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Avengers: Earth's Mightiest Heroes #9

Dec 12, 2012

The back-up story involves the Black Widow and the Wasp sneaking into Doctor Doom‘s laboratory to rescue a pair of scientists whose work Doom is corrupting to turn into a biological weapon. Complete with insane escape, quarreling scientists, and Doombots, it proves to be just as much fun. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Bat-Mite #1

Jun 13, 2015

I've always had a soft spot for Bat-Mite who I remember fondly co-starring on The New Adventures of Batman when I was younger (a show that hasn't aged as well as I'd like). I have no problem with the character getting his own mini-series but this toned down version without his abilities feels like a shadow of his former self. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Bat-Mite #4

Sep 16, 2015

It's an unusual team-up to be sure (especially since the New 52 seems fine with writing Booster out of its current continuity). Still, the two unlikely heroes make a fun pair (even if neither is clad in their traditional costumes). Eventually Booster and Bat-Mite learn to work together to stop a villain stuck in the past (and stop him from collecting vintage comics?). Oh well, even if Gridlock's crimes aren't exactly world-shattering, it's still fun to see Booster back in action (whatever he's wearing). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batgirl (2009) #12

Jul 15, 2010

A new Batgirl has found her place in the DCU, and I'm glad. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batgirl (2009) #13

Aug 12, 2010

Throw in the seamless addition of Proxy (who just might be an okay replacement for Oracle), the early scenes of Batgirl at college, and Stephanie's conversations with Detective McHandsome (great nickname), and you've got yourself a really good read. Definitely worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batgirl (2009) #14

Sep 11, 2010

Throw in several humorously drawn moments from Lee Garbett as our pair of heroines take down the Dracula's all over town, and a terrific cover by Stanley Lau, and you've got yourselves a one hellova fun comic. I wasn't kidding about the petition. I definitely want to see more of these two together. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batgirl (2009) #15

Nov 12, 2010

Not as good as some recent issues of Batgirl, but the trademarks that make the character and comic work are still here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batgirl (2009) #16

Dec 9, 2010

And after being framed for murder writer Bryan Q. Miller has given Stephanie the added incentive of revenge to track them down. We also get some great trademark great dialogue between Stephanie and Oracle and another appearance by “Detective McCute.” It may not be the title's best, but there's plenty here worth reading. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batgirl (2009) #17

Jan 19, 2011

There's also a good opening dialogue between Damian and Alfred, who Damian has come to accept as "an adequate servant," and the random panel of Stephanie's dream mumblings about killing Abraham Lincoln. Throw in a high speed chase involving a school bus, which Damian stabs (successfully) and attempts to drive (a little less successfully), and you've got everything you need for a great read!

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batgirl (2009) #18

Feb 15, 2011

Of course this includes dimension jumping, trying to prevent herself from being burned at the stake, fighting off a Witch Boy's cat (which turns out to be a man-sized vicious were-cat), and even kissing Witch Boy in front of her friends. Weird, but also worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batgirl (2009) #19

Mar 16, 2011

Even with these minor quibbles Batgirl continues to deliver yet another good story. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batgirl (2009) #20

Apr 18, 2011

Even if the central relationship to the comic seems to be going away, it's tongue-in-cheek humor is still very much in display here (including an impatient Steph struggling to get through class). Batgirl also creates some new super-duper Batarangs and takes her new ride, "The Compact," out on its first mission. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batgirl (2009) #21

May 17, 2011

The latest issue also shows us how far the new Grey Ghost is going to go in order to protect Batgirl, even if that means betraying her to her enemies. I'm sad that with everyone else leaving this is the character who seems to be sticking around, but we'll have to wait awhile to see how this storyline plays itself out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batgirl (2009) #22

Jun 16, 2011

As to what further trouble Steph will get into overseas we'll have to wait for the crossover in Batman: Incorporated #9. Meaning I have to read a Grant Morrison Batman story to get more Batgirl. Sigh. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Batgirl (2009) #23

Jul 14, 2011

Pick this issue up. My only complaint is there's only a single issue left, but I have a feeling Mr. Miller is going to have Stephanie Brown go out in style. I would expect nothing less. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Batgirl (2009) #24

Aug 15, 2011

Miller doesn't sign-off with regret, or anger. He leaves us with a tearful but hopeful Stephanie Brown savoring her moment in the sun. It's an unbelievably classy exit for a character I couldn't have cared less about two years ago and now I can't imagine the DCU without. For rebooting Stephanie Brown into one great character, for giving her such a terrific farewell, and for everything in between, I've got to thank Bryan Q. Miller. Here's hoping we haven't seen the last of Stephanie Brown; the DCU needs far more characters like her, not less. But if we have, man, what a way to go! Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Batgirl (2011) #1

Sep 13, 2011

Of all the new #1′s Batgirl had the most to prove out of the gate, and it's the most disappointing (at least so far). I'm willing to give Gail Simone some time to try and work this version of Babs into the new DCU, but this is an inauspicious start. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batgirl (2011) #3

Nov 15, 2011

It's not the character I want to see in the role, or the type of stories I want to read, but I wish Gail Simone luck on this Batgirl. I'm not sorry I picked up this issue but I have a feeling it might be a long time before I buy another.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batgirl (2011) #35

Oct 17, 2014

The comic gets a new direction with Batgirl #35 that effectively de-ages the character and creates a more lighthearted world for her to live. Throw in a kick-ass new low-tech costume, a guest-appearance from Black Canary, and Babs fighting the mother of all hangovers to recover her stolen property, and the creative team of writers Cameron Stewart and Brenden Fletcher, and artist Babs Tarr, sell me on the concept fairly early. Do I still wish it was Steph under the cowl and Babs behind the computer? Absolutely, but at least this version of Batgirl has a little of her youthful energy and a slightly less dingy world to explore. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batgirl (2011) #36

Nov 24, 2014

My only disappoint with Batgirl #36 is the fact that neither the flashbacks to Barbara's past nor the investigation into the anime lead to Barbara eventually defeating the evil duo as she simply beats them using her usual skill-set. Batgirl #36 is a good example of where the new New 52 series gets into trouble by trying to make Barbara appear younger and inexperienced but still include her lengthy history and experience (which comes and goes as need-be). Despite these issues it's still pretty darn entertaining. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batgirl (2011) #37

Dec 22, 2014

The new creative team keeps up the energy and more lighthearted feel of the comic. Although Barbara eventually defeats the fake Batgirl, the artist isn't the one actually responsible for the calculated attacks on Babs. Once again the comic foreshadows a bigger villain in the shadows, one who knows all of Batgirl's secrets and is having way too much fun at our heroine's expense. I'm still betting it's Calculator. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batgirl (2011) #39

Feb 24, 2015

Once again the art of Babs Tarr is the highlight of the issue, but the style and look of the series in and of themselves can't hide the fact that better storytelling is needed. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batgirl (2011) #46

Dec 30, 2015

I'm appreciative of any issue that tries to incorporate Steph back into the DCU but this feels more like fan service than an actual attempt to bring Spoiler into Barbara's orbit. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batgirl (2011) #47

Jan 31, 2016

When the break-in inevitably becomes a complete fiasco it also ends the comic on an anti-climactic note. In fact, the only real development here are the final panels where we see the truth of Barbara's memory issues and how she's being coerced into making decisions she neither remembers nor completely understands. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batgirl (2011): Endgame #1

Mar 25, 2015

I'm still very much on the fence about the New 52's version of Black Canary, or her new title as the lead singer of a touring band, but at least Batgirl: Endgame #1 makes Dinah less of the vacuous bitch than she's been in the last few issues of Batgirl and allows the former besties to finally bury a hatchet whose very existence was perplexing to begin with. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batgirl (2016) #1

Aug 5, 2016

I don't know that I'm quite sold enough on this first issue to begin picking it up monthly, but at least it has the more lighthearted feel of what a Batgirl comics should be and is staying away from the dark and gritty (at least for now). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Batgirl and the Birds of Prey #1

Aug 23, 2016

While I think the pairing of this trio could work under the right circumstances, it doesn't work for me here. Nor, based on what we see here, is there any reason to expect that this trio would stick together after their common goals have been met. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batgirl and the Birds of Prey #2

Sep 25, 2016

The second issue works slightly better than the first, although the group is still far from the team it will need to properly earn the name Birds of Prey. There are rumors that another DC character will be joining the Birds in the coming months. Here's hoping it's someone like Zinda Blake who can add some lighthearted ass-kicking fun to the proceedings. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batgirl and the Birds of Prey: Rebirth #1

Jul 24, 2016

The storyline of Barbara reconnecting with her former partner involves a new hacker using her old moniker. When their paths cross with the vengeful former Spyral agent events are set for the comic's opening issue. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman #700

Jun 14, 2010

Is it worth picking up? For big-time Bat-fans, yes. For everyone else, probably not. The time mystery isn't that interesting and of all the stories here only the current version of Batman and Robin is told all that well. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman #702

Aug 26, 2010

There are also a couple of really good lines describing Superman, his abilities, and his larger world, from Batman's point of view. Better late than never, and worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman #703

Sep 9, 2010

There are some nice moments between Dick and Damian (especially towards the end of the story), but nothing that would make anyone other than hardcore Bat-fans pick this issue up. Nice cover, though. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman #706

Jan 23, 2011

The story itself works pretty well as the various stories hint without giving too much away. Filled with action, this actually is a mystery story (in several different ways) for Batman to solve. It's also nice to see Grayson's detective skills highlighted.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Batman #710

May 25, 2011

I've read some bad Batman comics in my day, but this issue is such a clusterfuck it's baffling to behold. Here's hoping the title makes some swift changes and gets back on track as soon as possible.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman #713

Aug 24, 2011

Some might find it a little schmaltzy, but I thought this story worked well as a Coda for the series and a nice send off for this version of Batman and Robin. I also enjoyed art recreating the various looks of Batman over the years and the outline of the big moments in Batman's history. There's also a nice splash page of the Bat-Family. It may not have been my first choice for the Caped Crusader's final issue, but it's a solid one. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman #428: Robin Lives! (2023) #428

Dec 16, 2023

For fans who lived through the original storyline, or saw it brought back up with Todd's eventual return, it's an interesting “what if,” although it's just the planting of a seed and we'll never know exactly how Todd's recovery and his eventual return to the role of Robin would have changed Batman's history. On a personal note, I love seeing Batman drawn in his classic costume again, lovingly rendered by artist Jim Aparo, which has been far too absent in recent years.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman '66 #1

Oct 19, 2013

As a fan of the old television show I can certainly see the nostalgic charm of the comic and the recreations of the designs of the TV-show (who doesn't love that old Batmobile?), the ridiculous riddles and cornball moments (such as Batman and Robin taking a milk break in the Batcave), an a sense of fun missing from far too many of today's Batman titles. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman '66 #2

Oct 27, 2013

The back-up story we get isn't as entertaining but it does feature a pair of the more ridiculous TV-show villains fans of the show should enjoy in Chandell and Lorelei Circe. The story is also notable for the cameo by Kathy Kane who even gets to dress up as Batwoman (although only in Batman's Siren-caused hallucination). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman '66 #5

Nov 30, 2013

The issue also includes the first appearance of Batgirl in a back-up story, featuring some fun art by Colleen Ann Coover, when she takes on the Eartha Kitt Catwoman who attempts to rob the Gotham Museum of the priceless Tiger Topaz. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Batman '66 #6

Jan 1, 2014

The issue's back-up story has a ridiculous moment of Batman taking control of trained killer bears with sign language and then riding them to victory (seriously, WTF), but is also stuck with a D-list villain in Olga, Queen of Cossacks. While I think there are possibly good stories to do with both the Bookworm and even Olga, the margin for error is very small. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman '66 #7

Jan 30, 2014

The back-up story is a bit odd as the Joker decides to take Wall Street's advice and downsize to increase profits only to not have enough henchmen to properly execute a heist or defend himself against Batman and Robin. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman '66 #8

Feb 22, 2014

The back-up story is also a bit odd as it puts Batman and Robin in cowboy hats and sends them after the outlaw Shame in the modern Old West. Only partially successful like the main storyline, the adventure seizes on a villain from the show while offering an odd story which would have been more in line of the comics at the time than on television. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman '66 #9

Mar 26, 2014

Featuring not one but two death traps, Batman '66 #9 offers some enjoyable (if forgettable) moments along the way to the heroes eventually taking down the villain while also crafting a possible origin story for the young woman who Zelda may have turned to a life of crime. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman '66 #10

May 7, 2014

Not only does Batgirl beat Robin to uncovering the villain's hideout (he only shows up after at the very end of the issue), but she also makes short work of Cleopatra who turns out to be all bark and no bite once her venomous cobras are taken out of play. I hope the series has more Batgirl stories in store. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman '66 #11

May 26, 2014

The Joker's plot certainly works well, and teaming him up with Catwoman offers a reason for Batgirl to find her way into the comic's main story – something I hope we'll see more of in the months to come. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman '66 #12

Jul 1, 2014

The back-up story is fun but dumb as the Minstrel steals the Shakespeare bust out of Wayne Manor locking Bruce and Dick out of the Batcave (umm… couldn't they just use Alfred's entrance?) and forcing them to wear old prototype costumes to track the villain down. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman '66 #13

Aug 3, 2014

The choice to drop the price of the issue a dollar and forgo he back-up story is of interest making the comic a bit more affordable but also meaning we're left without a Batgirl sighting or a second villain. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Batman '66 #14

Sep 11, 2014

Widening the Batman '66 universe to include the wacky comic storylines that the TV series inspired, Batman '66 #14 offers a fun issue all around in what is easily one of the title's best issues to date. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman '66 #15

Oct 9, 2014

In another nice mix of action and camp (the citizens of Gotham actually help the police track down money blowing through the streets from the villains' bank robbery), the latest issue puts a more comic book spin on a villain who only made a single appearance on the television show in one two-part episode. Relying less on gadgets than chemicals and animal attraction (and one of the first villains not to be drawn distinctly different than the actor who played her on television), the woman earns her super-villain name as she gets as close to any of Batman's villains in her attempts to kill The Dark Knight Detective and Boy Wonder. The result is an entertaining issue that offers readers the rare opportunity of seeing one of Batman's oldest enemies fight beside Batman and Robin. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman '66 #16

Nov 11, 2014

Although more supernatural than the old television show ever got, Batman '66 #16 certainly feels like a comic of that time period. Eventually the Cro-Magnon Duo find a way to outsmart the super-villain, who has grown weary with how easy his life has become, and restore his brain, their likenesses, and Gotham, back to the status quo. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman '66 #17

Dec 24, 2014

King Tut seems to be a favorite of the Jeff Parker and other writers and artists as the villain makes yet another appearance in the comics while several other classic characters have seen far less attention. Much like his previous appearances, the standard set-up applies as Batman and Robin outwit the deranged pharaoh and conveniently knock the man on the head leading to him recovering his wits once again (almost as conveniently as the original hit which transformed him back into Tut at the beginning of the comic). The zombie plague is a bit bizarre, but Parker has fun with the concept having the mindless citizens bury the Dynamic Duo alive leading to their triumphant resurrection in time to foil the villain's plans once more. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman '66 #19

Feb 11, 2015

Batman '66 fanatics may want to pick it up as it does still capture the feel of the series and highlight one of the show's lesser-known villains. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman '66 #21

Apr 6, 2015

That said, there's still fun to be had given how much Batgirl we get in this issue, Batgirl getting her own (slightly sexist) version of the Bat-Signal, and the chance to see Batman and Batgirl take down a group of ninjas. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman '66 #25

Sep 27, 2015

The comic's back-up story by Gabriel Soria and Ty Templeton features Barbara Gordon taking down the Penguin, the Joker, the Riddler, and Catwoman when the four villains lay siege to the ad agency Miss Gordon recently began temping at. Hoping to get the ad men to rework their image, Barbara turns the villains' distrust of each other to her advantage and defuses the entire situation without ever having to don her tights. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman '66 Meets The Green Hornet #1

Jun 8, 2014

It's a fun first issue although it will be interesting to see how Smith and Garmin get around the Dynamic Duo teaming up with a pair of villains to keep the team-up going. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman '66 Meets The Green Hornet #2

Jul 10, 2014

Certainly a niche story within an already niche market, Batman '66 Meets The Green Hornet #2 continues the fun of the first issue although, even with the introduction of the Joker as a major player going forward in the mini-series, the limitations of the premise are already beginning to show. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman '66 Meets Wonder Woman '77 #1

Jan 27, 2017

It's strange that it took someone this long to make such an obvious pairing, although having them meet when Bruce is a child is certainly unexpected. Except for the beginning of the issue, the entire storyline takes place in an extended flashback to the night Bruce met Talia, Wonder Woman, and Ra's al Ghul and the chase for a mysterious pair of books which it seems many people are wiling to kill for. Just what those books unlock, and why Ra's and his daughter have hunted them for years, isn't explained, but you can bet it's not simply to add to his extensive library. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman (2011) #0

Sep 14, 2012

For a comic that ties all these threads together Batman #0 should feel more than a mixed success (at best), but too many of these pieces don't fit together and the overall narrative feels far too forced. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman (2011) #1

Sep 27, 2011

This one's an easy recommendation, and a solid read (even if the final panel is an obvious red herring). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman (2011) #2

Oct 24, 2011

I'm also impressed with Snyder's ability to capture Bruce Wayne's arrogance while still being able to present a likable character. Even if he villain isn't a great one Snyder's story about the guardians of Gotham and Capullo's art elevate the issue into one of the best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman (2011) #3

Nov 24, 2011

As to the Court of Owls, the uncovering of the mystery works well enough, but the conspiracy and super-secret organization full of people dressed up as owls hiding in the homes of Gotham's most wealthy doesn't come off any better than it sounds. Issue #3 isn't a good as I'd like but it's still the best of the Bat-titles. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman (2011) #4

Dec 24, 2011

The art by Greg Capullo looks great, and the comic ends with a panel that suggests things will pick up in the next issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman (2011) #5

Jan 21, 2012

Although I don't think it's a great Batman story, it is well-told, with some strong artwork by Greg Capullo, and begins and ends with a couple of really nice moments such as the opening pages featuring Batman's friends wondering what has become of their hero and the comic's final panels which (finally) give us a glimpse that Damian may be more than the rebooted spoiled little shit we've seen so far. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman (2011) #7

Mar 27, 2012

There was no real reason to tweak Dick's to include the Court of Owls (which is further explored in this week's Nightwing #7), but it's how Batman informs him (by backhanding him so hard he looses a tooth and nearly conciousness) that I found troubling. Like much of this story arc, the latest issue of Batman is a mixed success with many more Court of Owls stories on the way. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman (2011) #8

Apr 23, 2012

The structure of the book is a little odd as the first half is written by Snyder with art by regular Greg Capullo. However, the second-half of the story, drawn by Rafael Albuquerque, has a completely different look (which still works, although not quite as well). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman (2011) #9

May 14, 2012

I wish the last few pages had dealt with the Night of Owls other than a mostly forgetable back-up story. I'm also not thrilled with writer Scott Snyder's attempt to rope Alfred's family into the seemingly all-encompassing Court of Owls arc. Worth a look

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Batman (2011) #10

Jun 18, 2012

However, Batman learns the truth as he discovers Lincoln March is alive and responsible… and claims he is Bruce Wayne's brother?? And, given the back-up story (which appears to support his claim) it might even be true. Stop the merry-go-round, I want to get off. Snyder better have one hell of a twist up his sleeve to try and salvage what, apparently, this whole arc was leading up to. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Batman (2011) #11

Jul 17, 2012

Not surprisingly, the issue ends with Batman knowing that March was likely lying but unable to prove for certain. We also get scene between Bruce and Dick to smooth over the whole Batman cold cocking him thing and another chapter in the truly awful back-up story involving Alfred‘s father. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman (2011) #12

Aug 11, 2012

It may not be as good as Snyder's pre-New 52 work, and it certainly drags in places with the sheer amount of Harper's narration, but it's refreshing to read something new after the prolonged Court of Owls arc. Whether meaning to or not Harper certainly reminds me of Carrie Kelly and from the final panels, despite Batman's orders for her to stop trying to help him, I have a feeling we may see her again. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman (2011) #13

Oct 15, 2012

The main story ends with a twist as the Joker chooses his first victim, but the issue's back-up story between the Joker and Harley Quinn (whose appearance helps sell how brutal the Joker has become in his time away from Gotham) takes their perverted relationship to disturbing levels I don't need to see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman (2011) #14

Nov 19, 2012

Snyder is careful by giving us an alternative explanation for the Joker's abduction of Alfred as well as the Joker never naming names when he “reveals” he knows Batman's secret identity. I'm hoping for a huge bait-and-switch. But seeing how the New 52 has given me very little of what I actually want, I'm not too hopeful. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Batman (2011) #15

Dec 16, 2012

Don't get me wrong, I think Arkham Asylum is a hell of a video game – but it's story, design, and logic kinda sucks. I certainly didn't need a comic, yet alone the entire Batman Family across all of the DCU, redesigned in it's image. The comic isn't a total waste as it does deliver an okay back-up story between the Joker and the Riddler, but that's hardly enough from me to recommend spending $4 for this one. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
1
Batman (2011) #16

Jan 18, 2013

The Death of the Family issues dealing directly with the Joker have only gotten worse as the months have dragged on, finally hitting rock bottom here in this NC-17 horror fetish fantasy that's so far removed from classic Batman stories it's nearly unrecognizable. For those who enjoy it I'm leaving it to you. Mr. Snyder thanks for the memories, but I'm getting off this particular roller coaster with this issue. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Batman (2011) #18

Mar 19, 2013

You know DC must have plans to unveil a new Robin before too long, and this issue certainly makes Harper the front-runner. Anointing a character whose entire comic history is less than the time between dental appointments, in my opinion, would be a huge mistake another reason to read far less Bat-titles. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman (2011) #28

Feb 15, 2014

Looking optimistically, as Stephanie Brown would do, I will say Snyder and artist Dustin Nguyen succeed with this initial tease by highlighting her new Spoiler costume with traits that suggest her Batgirl run and revealing her to be far more than just another vigilante working in Gotham. Even if the comic doesn't allow the character to speak, to find out if her voice has survived the transition into the New 52, there's the tiniest glimmer of hope in this one panel that the Stephanie of old may get a shot to live again. Of course that could all go down the shitter in record time if she opens her mouth and comes off bastardized like the re-branded Billy Batson. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Batman (2011) #50

Mar 30, 2016

As to the storyline concerning the fall of Gotham (again) by a completely forgettable villain, honestly there wasn't anything here that made me regret giving the title such a wide berth for so long. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Batman (2011) #51

May 4, 2016

I don't know what Rebirth has in store for Batman going forward (other than adding a splash more blue to the Dark Knight's new costume), but I'm glad to close the book on the run that offered the Court of Owls, the Face-Off Joker, and Jim Batman as its most noteworthy accomplishments. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman (2011) Annual #1

Jun 5, 2012

Although the story follows events from Night of Owls, the recent crossover isn't directly addressed here. And at $5 it's a little pricey for a story that simply makes the character a little less interesting to me once again, but I'm willing to give Snyder a chance to play with the character's new history and motivations (as long as he keeps the flashbacks of Victor as a child to himself – ugh!). Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Batman (2016) #1

Jul 5, 2016

Despite these issues, the comic itself is a tense story that certainly sells the self-sacrifice (if not the ingenuity) of its hero. The main objective, however, isn't to present Batman with a problem he couldn't solve but provide the introduction of a new pair of super-powered heroes to the Gotham landscape. While plenty of vigilantes, both as part of the Batman Family and separate, have worked the streets of Gotham they have been normal (or what passes for normal) people relying on skills and training to get the job done. I guess we'll see what happens when you add those with powers to the equation. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman (2016) #2

Jul 14, 2016

After stepping in to help Gotham and Gotham Girl stop Solomon Grundy, Batman agrees to give Gotham City's two new super-heroes a few pointers. This includes introducing the pair to Commissioner Gordon for the first time. Other than the fight at the beginning of the issue Batman #2 doesn't offer much in the way of action, but there's plenty of slow-boiling story here for Bat-fans. It also gives us the first appearance of a classic Batman villain for the first time since the Rebirth reboot. I'll be curious to see just what Hugo Strange is up to and how he ties into the monsters and suicide attacks around Gotham City. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman (2016) #4

Aug 26, 2016

Even once Batman takes care of the super-powered hero run amok, he's still got to find Strange (who I'm sure has his own plans for the city, and Batman). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman (2016) #6

Sep 12, 2016

Batman #6 isn't your typical Batman story, but it gets the humanity of the character right, putting in forefront over justice or vengeance. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman (2016) #9

Oct 24, 2016

If you accept that Batman does need the Suicide Squad's help the issue still has some problems as Batman's trek around the asylum offers plenty of cameos to several Bat-villains but also makes in increasingly confusing as to just who Batman is recruiting for his team as dossiers on random villains are highlighted. While I'm all in favor of Batman working alongside his final choice I am confused as to why she would be in Arkham rather Blackgate or another standard prison. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman (2016) #14

Jan 12, 2017

Despite giving their act some meaning, the act itself still seems off (not laughably bad this time, but still off). I just can't buy Batman letting his guard (and pants) down in public, especially with a woman he admits he can never fully trust. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman (2016) #17

Feb 22, 2017

Despite some of Batman's decisions here, the comic does do a good job in presenting Bane as a legitimate threat. The need for Batman to have access to the Psycho-Pirate for a period of five days in order to fix what the villain did to Gotham Girl also presents an accelerated timetable for Bane. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman (2016) #18

Mar 7, 2017

The comic is inter-cut with images of Bruce Wayne and Bane as children suggesting several similiarities between each's tragic past and the obsession born out of it. These scenes take up a few too many panels for my taste, but they do underline the arc's central message suggesting Bane is a serious threat to Batman with more in common than one might expect. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman (2016) #19

Mar 23, 2017

Batman #19 features cameos from quite a few Bat-villains. Some get multiple panels such as Two-Face, the Riddler, and Calender Man, Mr. Freeze, Scarecrow, (and for some reason Maxie Zeus) while others Bane dispatches in a single page (Black Spider, Solomon Grundy, Firefly, and others). The comic continues to build-up Bane as an unstoppable force which can be slowed but never stopped. Now, once again, he's Batman's problem. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman (2016) #20

Apr 11, 2017

With Bane defeated, the Flash shows up next issue to begin the investigation into a blood-stained button and the secrets lurking behind Rebirth and the shitstorm known as the New 52. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman (2016) #21

Apr 27, 2017

Centering mostly on Batman‘s fight with the world's most evil speedster, Batman #21 opens the door to the mystery of the reconstructed DCU but doesn't shine much light in. What we do know, based on the Reverse-Flash's curiosity, is curiosity can be very deadly indeed. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman (2016) #24

Jun 13, 2017

Batman's choice here is more than a little out of character but it opens new possibilities for the Bat-Family in ways that I'm curious to see play out. While Selena Kyle wouldn't be my first choice for Batman choosing a wife, and there are a number of obstacles for the pair to overcome before this comes to pass, it does provide a shake-up for the character. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman (2016) #25

Jun 29, 2017

While I'm not entirely sold on the concept, the brutality of the issue, or the comic moving drastically away from the big news of Batman and Catwoman becoming a couple again, I do think there is some promise to the story (although a war between the two criminals, as we see here, doesn't offer much time for Batman. Narrated well after the events, the issue is able to tease what's to come including Gotham's villains choosing sides between Riddler and Joker as pair's struggle is likely to reign down all kinds of chaos on the city. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman (2016) #26

Jul 24, 2017

Although I'm still conflicted about this storyline, it does allow Rebirth to bring in several old and new characters as part of the growing factions between the Joker and Riddler. If Kite Man earns this treatment I'm curious to see what else may be in store for other villains. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman (2016) #27

Jul 24, 2017

Although I'm still conflicted about this storyline, it does allow Rebirth to bring in several old and new characters as part of the growing factions between the Joker and Riddler. If Kite Man earns this treatment I'm curious to see what else may be in store for other villains. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman (2016) #28

Aug 9, 2017

Batman #28 is notable for Jim Gordon in his underwear (ugh) and giving us a look at Catwoman in a version of one of the character's classic costumes (before she began aping Black Cat's look). It may not be my favorite version of the character, but I did like seeing Selina sport a different look (if only for a little while). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Batman (2016) #29

Aug 22, 2017

The comic does have a couple of fun moments, such as the Joker offering his opinion about the Riddler and the pair agreeing about Batman's problematic nature. However, the story itself simply doesn't work for me. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Batman (2016) #30

Sep 13, 2017

Despite an interesting start, the arc has overstayed its welcome and left some troubling continuity (Batman unable to stop the villains of Gotham, the Riddler carving a question mark on his bare chest, and plenty more) that the comic will unfortunately have to deal with in the months to come. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Batman (2016) #32

Oct 8, 2017

In the end, the ambitious arc fails on at least as many levels as it succeeds and wastes most of Gotham under siege to short flashbacks with this the only payoff. Hit-and Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman (2016) #35

Nov 20, 2017

While the two women squaring off provides the action, and why Selina is so willing to fight for the man she loves, the conversation between Dick and Damian provides some insight into Bruce and where this proposal may have come from (and the opportunity for Dick to enjoy playing big brother). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Batman (2016) #36

Dec 14, 2017

Fans of both Batman and Superman should enjoy this comic, and I'm looking forward to seeing where “SuperFriends” leads the unusual foursome of a thief in a catsuit, an alien, a reporter, and a man dressed up as a bat. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Batman (2016) #37

Dec 28, 2017

While the action is light (other than taking down a mugger, or Bruce and Selina in the Tunnel of Love), there are some great interactions and character moments that fans of both the Dark Knight Detective and the Man of Steel will enjoy. Best of the Week.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Batman (2016) #41

Feb 25, 2018

Knowing that the rest of the DCU is ignoring what's happening here makes it obvious that Poison Ivy's control won't last long. The question is, how will Batman and Catwoman stop her? I'm curious to find out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman (2016) #43

Mar 28, 2018

The issue hints at a deeper relationship between Pamela and Harley without ever confirming something more than friendship. There does seem to be quite a bit unsaid, and I wonder if this was by design or possibly DC getting cold feet about stating something unequivocally about the two characters. Either way, the story still works, even if the bit about the Riddler tricking Pamela, and continuity seemingly wiping away her more murderous past, does have me wondering just who the current version of Poison Ivy is. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman (2016) #50

Jul 6, 2018

This, of course, leaves Batman solo and brooding once more and spins off Catwoman into her own series. I'll be curious to see if the wedding that never happened remains in continuity or eventually fades and is forgotten by all but fans. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman (2016) #51

Jul 24, 2018

Bruce's single not guilty vote seems to suggest some serious introspection has begun. It looks like the rest of the jurors are in for a longer deliberation than they expected. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman (2016) #75

Jul 24, 2019

We do get moments of Bruce Wayne, far away, searching for something… and finding someone, on his first steps to returning and reclaiming the city from Bane. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman (2016) #77

Aug 28, 2019

During the series of events the comic offers us glimpses of Bruce and Selina who appear finally ready to return to Gotham and take on Bane. They still have time to save Damian, but not poor Alfred (whose tasteless death is celebrated a bit too much in full-page glory). Despite its questionable elements, still worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman (2016) #78

Sep 19, 2019

While I was never all that enthused with DC's plans to marry Bruce and Selina, the last-second folding of that story never set right with me either. If you want do it, do it. Batman #78 begins to help repair the damage done to both characters and reset the romantic status quo one more time. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman (2016) #86

Jan 14, 2020

The fight between Batman and Deathstroke is truncated as much of it takes place off-panel and comes to a quicker conclusion than expected. Catwoman's own crime-fighting foreshadows more about what brought Deathstroke to town (suggesting it has ties to the cat burglar's past). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman (2016) #87

Jan 28, 2020

The issue does have some notable action, including a tussle between Batman and Cheshire, and the prison break which leaves the Dark Knight with more problems, along with highlighting the attempts of characters like Riddler and the Penguin to use the current state of the affairs to their advantage. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman (2016) #92

Jun 16, 2020

Meanwhile, Catwoman and Harley Quinn battle zombie cops in the sewers, Harley meets the Joker's new squeeze Punchline, and Selina does some negotiating with the Underbroker. Between Catwoman and Batman, our heroes score victories on multiple fronts, but heading into the next issue the man behind all chaos, the Designer, still awaits.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman (2016) #118

Dec 13, 2021

Batman #118 ushers in a new creative team, a mystery for Batman outside of Gotham City, and, once he touches down in Badhnisia, a change into the Batman, Inc. costume for our Caped Crusader. I've got to say I'm happy to have the Bat-Symbol back on our hero, but the lack of trunks (plus the unnecessary seams) means we still are denied Batman's classic look as DC seems incapable of providing more than half of a good costume for our hero. As for the mystery, it seems Batman may have an ally (of sorts) in… Lex Luthor?

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman (2016) #119

Jan 13, 2022

The issue also includes an unrelated back-up story involving Mia Mizoguchi to try and justify the higher price and page-count.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Batman (2016) #121

Mar 8, 2022

In any case, the members of Batman, Inc. switch sides and stand with Batman against Abyss. The comic limps home to a finish with Batman tracking the escaping villain and by teasing the next big arc for Batman on his return home with a cameo by Deathstroke and the latest version of the Secret Society of Super-Villains.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman (2016) #125

Jul 18, 2022

Setting aside Broke Batman, which remains one of the dumbest plotlines in the character's history, the first issue of “Failsafe” sets Batman on a series of events that will lead to him being more isolated. Selina Kyle (who is given her own back-up story in a failed attempt to justify the cover price) has moved on. Robin is shot during the gala. And the gloating Penguin frames Batman for his murder (despite, you know, the physical evidence of him killing himself with poison that you'd think would be easy for a hospital to find). While I enjoyed the look of the issue, I have little interest in yet another team trying to make Batman even more gritty.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman (2016) #139

Nov 14, 2023

I can't tell if this was a Riddler story made to fit the Joker or a Joker story that simply relies on behavior better fitting another of Batman's most famous foes. In either case, Joker's breadcrumbs lead to an elaborate doll house where the most painful moments of Bruce Wayne's life are put on display leading to the Joker perhaps getting his fondest wish just as the comic comes to a close. I'm more interested in the art here than the story, having long ago grown tied of broke Batman (who's now schizophrenic… yah!?).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman / Catwoman (2020) #1

Dec 8, 2020

Mostly set-up, the first issue jumps from story to story (at times more effectively than others). Although teased, we don't get the Phantasm here, although there is plenty of foreboding about how tragically events will unfold.

View Issue       View Full Review
2
Batman / Superman (2013) #1

Jul 1, 2013

This is a clusterfuck of a first issue that makes less sense the more you read it. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
2
Batman / Superman (2013) #8

Feb 28, 2014

We also see Superman‘s first meeting with an out-of-control Power Girl who he is determined to help whether she wants his help or not (or whether such efforts could endanger himself). I'm curious to see where this storyline will go. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman / Superman (2019) #1

Sep 2, 2019

The comic features some back and forth between the two characters, along with some inner monologue from both, on the status of their partnership and the threat that the toxin presents. There may not be enough here to keep me around the long term, but I'm certainly curious enough to return and see how the current situation gets resolved. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman / Superman: World's Finest (2022) #1

Mar 22, 2022

The comic goes off in multiple directions here with a separate team-up between the Man of Steel and the Dynamic Duo and also the addition of the Doom Patrol to help with an out-of-control Superman. There are some aspects of the story I enjoy, including character designs and Dan Mora's art, although once Superman gets infected (which seems to be where the comic's main storyline will be focused going forward) things bog down a bit.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman / Superman: World's Finest (2022) #2

Apr 25, 2022

With the introduction of Supergirl, Batman Superman World's Finest #2 also begins a B-story sending Kara and Robin back in time to learn more about an immortal ancient Chinese warlord known as The Devil Nezha who has some connection to current events (but I'll admit being a bit confused by it all). There's obviously some tension between the two younger heroes, that isn't explained, but makes for some fun back-and-forth.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Batman / Superman: World's Finest (2022) #12

Mar 1, 2023

Lots of fun here, including some back-and-forth between the Dynamic Duo to close out the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman / Superman: World's Finest (2022) #14

May 1, 2023

It's a pretty busy issue with not much time to breathe. That said, the story moves fairly well with our four heroes reunited looking for Stagg and Ivo ending on a cliffhanger.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman / The Shadow #1

May 18, 2017

Following the clues left by history, eventually Batman finds the Shadow's Sanctum, the heart of his operation. Yet, the discovery only leads to more questions. The Dark Knight hopes a trip to seek out a mutual acquaintance might yield better results, but as the Shadow told him – Batman isn't ready for the vigilante's world. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman and Robin (2009) #16

Nov 6, 2010

For a comic that's been the least of all the Bat-books since issue #2 this one's not half-bad. Given it's ending it also marks an important milestone in Batman's career and is definitely worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2009) #23

May 24, 2011

The Red Hood is out, and things should be about to get interesting. I actually like this version of Jason Todd (in the biker outfit, not the worst comic costume of all-time), and I'm hoping by the end of the storyline we get a little better sense of how he's going to fit into the DCU and, more specifically, the Batman universe. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman and Robin (2009) #25

Jul 11, 2011

That said, there are a couple of nice scenes where we're given a look into Todd's view of Dick Grayson, and vice-versa. This storyline, even when it has struggled at times has done a good job focusing on the differences between the first two Robins. Personally, I would have liked more of Damian's thoughts on Todd whose outlook is far similar to the Son of Batman than his current boss. With a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman and Robin (2011) #0

Sep 20, 2012

Is it worth a look? Maybe. There one or two moments, although there's little here for those who have already read Morrison's story. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman and Robin (2011) #1

Sep 21, 2011

As first issue's go this one struggles at times but it's the first time when seen father and son paired up as Batman and Robin since Bruce's return from the grave. I'm going to give it a few issue to try and find a balance between the pair, but the most pressing challenge seems to be where to find the fun that should be inherent in a title called “Batman and Robin.” Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman and Robin (2011) #2

Oct 14, 2011

One a postive note the issue also includes an appearnce by Ace the Bat-Hound (sadly, out of costume). I'm all for finding ways to layer in various aspects of Batman's history into this New 52 version. Now let's see that giant penny, and Bat-Mite, and oh so much more! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman and Robin (2011) #4

Dec 21, 2011

I'm less thrilled with Nobody and his connection with Henri Ducard. Although he does offer Damian a tempataion, we know, despite all his flaws, Damian isn't likely to give into his baser desires this early in the New 52. This means despite being handled with some skill (although the opening diatribe in the drive-in is pretty awful) this arc ultimately has nowhere to go. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman and Robin (2011) #5

Jan 18, 2012

Patrick Gleason's art has gotten better as he's gotten more comfortable with the characters, but writer Peter J. Tomasi struggles with Batman's epiphany about his behavior to his son. It feels far too forced for the version of Batman we've seen so far. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman and Robin (2011) #6

Feb 15, 2012

Damian's turning on Nobody is hardly surprising, but I'm thankful writer Peter J. Tomasi didn't milk the story for another issue or two. It's also good to see Damian standing up for something other than himself for a change (even if there's no one else to witness it). The final panels, suggesting some serious injury to the boy, should lead to a brutal confrontation between Batman and Nobody in next month's conclusion of the arc. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman and Robin (2011) #7

Mar 21, 2012

I like the simple dialogue and reaction shots between Damian and Bruce once the battle has ended. I'm far less pleased with the comic's final choice. I certainly understand it, and the story arc certainly gives the “justification” needed for that choice, but just as the pair were coming together the results of Damian's deadly action are likely to tear Batman and Robin apart, again. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011) #8

Apr 14, 2012

The issue doesn't ignore Damian's actions from last issue, but it also doesn't condemn him for it (as I expected it to do, further driving a wedge between the two). Instead Bruce uses the opportunity as a lesson for his son to move both of them forward. By the end of the issue we're given a Batman and Robin I really want to see more of, and that's really all you can ask. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman and Robin (2011) #9

May 17, 2012

If you're only picking this up as a “Night of Owls” tie-in you could probably give it a pass. If, however, you're a fan of Damian (even the New 52 version) there's enough here to keep your interest, at least for awhile. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman and Robin (2011) #10

Jun 21, 2012

The comic's other storyline introduces a new villain named Terminus who prepares to kill the Batman before his own demise. Nothing special here, and Terminus is certainly overshadowed by all the Robins appearing in the same panel together for the first time in the New 52 (although we still haven't gotten Batman and Red Hood together, yet). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman and Robin (2011) #11

Jul 19, 2012

As to Damian, who appears to be back in full on spoiled little-shit mode despite the tease that he might grow up a bit after the failure with Nobody, it's an interesting choice for him to view Todd (the Robin he's most like) with such contempt. I'll be interested to see what action the Red Hood might take in retaliation. Although the crowbar sequence is in bad taste, it certainly fits this version of the character. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman and Robin (2011) #12

Aug 16, 2012

I like seeing the Robins together in this issue and if DC is looking for another Bat-title to replace one of the underperforming New 52 books may I suggest something along the lines of Robin Team-Up (featuring Robins current and past teaming up for short arcs – which would allow for the inclusion of Stephanie Brown, too). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011) #13

Oct 17, 2012

At the same time we see the more dangerous version of the character as his dispatches another assassin sent by his mother and the recklessness of his youth which leads him into danger in the stories final pages as he's caught in a mob of zombies. Honestly, I could have done without the zombies, but the rest of this issue works well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011) #14

Nov 17, 2012

Aside from Damain actually doing some justice to the Robin name (and not being the complete tool the New 52 has been so focused on delivering month after month) there's almost nothing worthy of notice. The story is completely forgettable and the mix of both Patrick Gleason and Toms Giorello's art makes the comic look and feel uneven at best. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Batman and Robin (2011) #15

Dec 18, 2012

I like Damian, and I certainly like how he stands up for himself against the psychopath, but there's nothing of note, and certain nothing enjoyable delivered here that makes this one worth picking up. Sadly, this seems to be an all to familiar trend with the Bat-books recently. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Batman and Robin (2011) #16

Jan 22, 2013

There's plenty of gruesome action here. And the comic has one highlight where the far too dim Damian makes a concious effort not to kill the man he believes is his father. Sadly it's too little, too late. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman and Robin (2011) #18

Mar 15, 2013

On one hand, the issue puts Damian's loss at the forefront and showcases the toll it's taking on Batman. On the other hand it's still a bit of a cheat as the hard but necessary conversations after such an event have still yet to take place. However, the set-up certainly makes the only words we do see, Damian's final message to his father, certainly have a greater impact. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011) #19

Apr 12, 2013

Red Robin gets the short-end of the stick here. Despite his name in the title, Tim is relegated to little more than a cameo in which he has no more luck talking sense into his mentor than the partially dissected Frankenstein's monster. It will be interesting to see, given the mixed reaction DC has gotten to Grant Morrison killing off Damian, how long the Bat-books might play with the idea of bringing the character back, in one form or another. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Batman and Robin (2011) #20

May 13, 2013

Although I think Todd overreacts to Batman's grief, the result is to push yet another member of the Bat-Family further from the Dark Knight Detective. Batman and Red Hood #20 also offers another appearance by Carrie Kelley looking for Damian, teasing that she's not going away anytime soon. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman and Robin (2011) #21

Jun 24, 2013

The confrontation between Batgirl and Batman in the cave is interesting, but isn't hardly the tact someone as smart as Barbara would use. I do like her offer of wearing the Robin costume, but its stuck in the middle of an out-of-control argument that has no hope of reaching Batman. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011) #22

Jul 24, 2013

Catwoman helps break Batman out of his funk as does Carrie Kelley whose continued perseverance at talking to Damian forces Batman to go to extreme lengths to continue the pretense that his son is still alive. I'm not sure where Carrie will eventually fit in, but any comic with her instead of Harper Row has to be counted as a win. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and Robin (2011) #23

Aug 27, 2013

Although the final former side-kick issue is done, the comic will continue the Batman and… with villains such as Two-Face and Killer Croc leading into Batman and Carrie Kelly #25 which may, or may not, begin a new direction for the title. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman and Robin (2011) #23.1

Sep 12, 2013

By the end of the episode the luck of Gotham City (which is far less covered in vegetation that the Poison Ivy comic would suggest) has finally run out as the flip of the coin leads Two-Face back to his more destructive ways. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman and Robin (2011) #23.3

Sep 22, 2013

Writer James Tynion IV and Jeremy Haun deliver a solid retelling of the various aspects behind the character even if he's decidedly lacking in the kind of crazed evil malice that has defined Ra's al Ghul since his creation. It's far from a great Ra's al Ghul story, but for those needing a primer on the character it's sufficient. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman and Robin (2011) #24

Oct 18, 2013

All that said, even the changes can't ruin one of Batman‘s most interesting villains. As the beginning of a true origin for the character it's flawed, but fans may still enjoy the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman and Robin (2011) #25

Nov 29, 2013

On the plus-side we do get an appearance by Matches (which means the character, and Batman's use of his identity, is part of the New 52). Despite the promise the issue will have big revelations about Carrie Kelley (which I believe I've already guessed) the character fails to make even a cameo here. Given the false advertising and confusing storytelling this one is very much Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Batman and Robin (2011) #26

Jan 2, 2014

Although the comic has some nice moments, especially in the early scenes between Bruce and Erin, the flashbacks are so unbelievably dumb it wouldn't surprise me if everyone who read this issue lost a couple of IQ points. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Batman and Robin (2011) Annual #1

Feb 9, 2013

And as for a pint-sized Batman ruling the night in Gotham, it's a blast! Damian truly works in brutal, but Batman-like efficency, and never becomes the isipid murderous twerp some writers use as his fallback setting. I know I have been hard on the Bat-books recently, but this is a perfect example of what they can be when a little joy is inserted into the equation. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Batman and Robin (2011) Annual #2

Feb 6, 2014

Even with the fan bait of giving Batman fans a taste of the character Grant Morrison killed only because he could, Batman and Robin Annual #2 is unremarkarkable except for the fact it will likely continue to piss off longtime DC fans. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman and Robin (2023) #1

Sep 19, 2023

We also get an odd grouping of some of Batman's more monstrous enemies in Croc, Man-Bat, and others, as well as a general foreboding of yet another (likely less joyful) crossover. I'd like a little more normalcy for Bruce and Damian before jumping into the next big arc but there's enough here to pique my interest. Not everything is sunshine and roses, however, as the comic foreshadows a high school arc for Damian which would be the quickest way to make me run away from this comic as fast as possible.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman and the Outsiders (2019) #1

May 14, 2019

Writer Bryan Edward Hill and artist Dexter Soy deliver a solid first issue focused on the team's dysfunction and the looming threat which will force them to come together (that, and a common goal to discover just what Batman isn't telling them). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman and the Outsiders (2019) #2

Jun 18, 2019

The issue is also notable for Black Lightning making a verb out of Bruce Wayne as the two discuss the difference between what Batman and the Outsiders should stand for. The question now, is just what does Ra's al Ghul do now that he has the girl. And, now that Sofia is in his nemesis' possesion, is that enough to get Batman back in the field or does he continue to rely on the Outsiders? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman and the Outsiders (2019) #3

Jul 22, 2019

The fact that Batman's exercise helped begin to allow Signal to heal is a nice moment (as is the fact that its Cassandra who is the first to embrace him), but I'm not sure Batman's head is in the right place where Sofia's well being is concerned. One would think Sofia's life would be at least as important to Batman as the feelings of his fledgling team. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman and the Outsiders (2019) #4

Aug 26, 2019

From what we see in the panels of Sofia and Ra's, it seems the Demon's Head has done his work well and the Outsiders will have their hands full in the battle to save Sofia's soul. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and the Outsiders (2019) #5

Sep 19, 2019

The other fight, that between the assassin Ishmael and Cassandra Cain and Signal will have to wait until next month, but Ra's obviously has plans for Batman's pupils. Will they be up to the challenge? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman and the Outsiders (2019) #6

Oct 10, 2019

Not being completely up-to-date on Signal's backstory, it's hard for me to judge the impact of the surprise that Ra's has for the young man. That said, the comic has already demonstrated the Demon's Head has a knack for breaking wills and bending them to his own. Is that what's in store for Signal? And just how far with Cassandra go to prevent this (and take a measure of revenge on her mother's part in Ra's plans)? And will Batman ever suit up in this comic? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman and the Outsiders (2019) #8

Dec 30, 2019

Despite the team's victory in extracting Sofia from Ra's al Ghul‘s clutches, the comic is far from done with the Demon's Head who has begun taking his revenge on the Dark Knight's pupils with the corruption of Signal, a jibe at Cassandra's destiny, and a hitting Black Lightning where he lives. Far from being finished, it looks like Ra's has just begun. The question is, after he's done how many Outsiders will still be standing? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman and the Outsiders (2019) #10

Feb 24, 2020

While most of the issue is actually dialogue offer clues about a doomsday weapon and Shiva's interests in partnering with Black Lightning, there is some action towards the end as Black Lightning and Shiva run into a bit of trouble though they do get some unexpected assistance from the sudden arrival of Katana, Signal and Cassandra. Maybe the team might survive Ra's machinations after all.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and the Outsiders (2019) #11

Mar 18, 2020

While continuing to save the final fight with Ra's in reserve, there's still enough here fans of the comic can enjoy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and the Outsiders (2019) #13

Jun 22, 2020

Katana's gamble offers one example of how desperate the Outsiders have become. Another comes from Batman himself, who offers to boost Black Lightning‘s powers in order to fight the alien tech which threatens the world. But, at what cost?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and the Outsiders (2019) #14

Jul 15, 2020

Batman & the Outsiders #14 (thankfully) marks a more proactive turn for the heroes who up until this point have been reacting to Ra's plans. It also reveals to the Outsiders that Shiva is in communication with Batman and has been working, at least in part, with him for the last few issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman and the Outsiders (2019) #15

Aug 18, 2020

Ra's plans to destroy civilization involves a secret corporate cabal with unprecedented access and power. While the latest issue of the series still doesn't yet provide the action we've been waiting for for 15 issues, it does (finally) put the last domino in place allowing for what should be a heavy-action issue next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman and the Outsiders (2019) #16

Sep 15, 2020

Batman admits to Lady Shiva that her daughter deserves better, but what is that? Just how powerful is Black Lightning now? What happens to Sofia Ramos and the rest of the heroes? These are a few of the questions left to be answered in next month's issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman Beyond (2010) #1

Jul 3, 2010

The choice to the tease from the very first panel to the last of who the main villain of the series might be (which I won't spoil it here) works very well. For fans of the show it's definitely worth picking up, but even if you never saw an episode it's still worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman Beyond (2010) #3

Aug 22, 2010

Although I'm still not sure about this new Catwoman, this issue does give me the one thing I always wanted from Batman Beyond – Dick Grayson. And that's enough for me…as long as they don't screw it up. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman Beyond (2010) #4

Sep 19, 2010

And then there's the final panel… Yeah. Um, yeah. I won't ruin for it for in case you plan to pick this one up, but lets just say the final panel flushes the promise of the previous pages right down the toilet. Sigh. I doesn't work, whether it's real or simply yet another twist (this comic has more than a Shyamalan marathon). We'll have to see if the series can rebound, but I have my doubts.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman Beyond (2010) #5

Oct 21, 2010

We also lean the new Catwoman's identity and Bruce and Terry have a nice bonding moment. It's not a great issue, and some of the clone's super-villain banter is way too forced, but for all-encompassing Bat-fans it might still be worth a look. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman Beyond (2011) #1

Jan 12, 2011

One thing the issue does well is show-off it's main star, letting those unfamiliar with him get to know Terry McGinnis. The issue also includes an appearance by the future version of the Justice League. It will be interesting to see how big a role they play in the new series.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman Beyond (2015) #1

Jun 12, 2015

The truncating of the Bat-Family's chronology in the New 52 reboot left a glut of former and current Robins all roughly the same age and not enough room for each to operate. Mercifully released from that regrettable Teen Titans title, I would have preferred Drake to have spun off his own book in the present but this at least affords him the opportunity to prove himself in new ways. Drake plus the Batman Beyond Universe, with a more dystopian feel, is an odd mix, but writer Dan Jurgens (at least initially) sells me on the concept while artist Bernard Chang shows he has what it takes for the series' unique visual look. I'll be curious to see where things go from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman Beyond (2016) #50

Dec 29, 2020

The appearance of Wonder Woman and the use of one of the television show's most popular villains works to provide Dan Jurgens with a way to close out his 50-issue run in style. Given what we see to close out the issue, it will be interesting to see if a Batman Beyond Justice League is in the works somewhere in the near future.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Batman Beyond Universe #13

Sep 4, 2014

Joining the comic with this issue, artist Phil Hester manages to faithfully recreate the look of both series. I particularly love the flashback art. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman Beyond Universe #14

Oct 5, 2014

Filled with plenty of action, hard choices, and Bruce Wayne loosing another adopted son and apprentice, the latest issue of Batman Beyond Universe is worth picking up even for those (like me) who may not stick around to see how the fallout between Bruce and Terry is finally resolved. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman Beyond: Rebirth #1

Oct 4, 2016

Fans of the show should enjoy this, but there's not much new here to explore (as with most Rebirth issues the main goal is to set the stage for what is to come). Batman Beyond: Rebirth #1 is mainly concerned with resetting the world with McGinnis back in the Bat-suit (mostly ignoring Tim Drake‘s New 52 run) and reintroducing readers to the series' core characters including teasing the possible return of Batman's most dangerous enemy. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
2
Batman Incorporated (2012) #1

May 30, 2012

So, let me get this straight, we get crappy redesigns for Deadshot and Red Robin, Stephanie Brown, Catman and the rest of the Secret Six are still in limbo, but Halo and Morrison's fetish creations get to run free in the New 52. Fuck you for this DC. This issue, which is in the running for the worst Batman comic I've ever read, is the kind of shit that makes me want to stop reading comics all together. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Batman Incorporated (2012) #8

Mar 1, 2013

There's much speculation about who will fill the shoes the shoes of Robin whether it be Tim Drake, Helena, or even Stephanie Brown (who has yet to appear in the new DCU). Whatever the case, Damian's death wasn't necessary to accomplish the goal of replacing him as Robin, nor does his death serve any long term purpose in terms of Batman stories going forward (once DC moves past the obligatory couple months of characters grieving his death). This is a mistake and, as many of Morrison's stories are, a badly written one. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
1
Batman Incorporated (2012) #9

Mar 31, 2013

Or I could just say this: Grant Morrison has been planning the death of Damian Wayne for years, and if this is the best he can do with this amount of planning I don't know why anyone would want hire him to write a Batman comic ever again. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Batman vs. Robin (2022) #1

Sep 26, 2022

Very much a mixed bag, Batman vs. Robin #1 takes characters backwards in their developments instead of forwards. I'm also not too pleased with the gruesome depicted of the lynched Zatanna who Batman and Alfred come to find while searching for answers as to just what is going on. Alfred may be back, and Batman is certainly pleased with that, but what kind of death will a magically-fueled Robin bring to bear in what's to come?

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman, Inc. #4

Mar 30, 2011

Had this story been told the way a normal human being might tell it, this might be fairly enjoyable. Sadly, Morisson's reluctance to let the plot stand alone and instead rely on cheap theatrics and convoluted storytelling works against him here. But then again, Grant Morrison really pisses me off. Those who like his increasingly maddening style of writing may find more here than I did. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman: Black & White (2020) #1

Dec 24, 2020

Other stories include “Demon Fist” which focuses on a single member of the League of Assassins hoping to land one punch on Batman, “Weight” gives us snapshots across Batman's timeline while focusing on the weight of his childhood vow, the Batcave becomes infested with Ninja Man-Bats in “First Flight,” and Emma Rios offers a dreamy tale of the external struggle of Batman.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman: Black & White (2020) #2

Feb 3, 2021

In “The Spill” Batman is trapped in the Gotham spillway after an EMP goes off in Gotham City while pursuing the Joker who gloats for several panels about getting the see Batman's death before the barrier breaks and nearly drowns them both. And in “Dual” Batman tracks an all-white doppelganger across Gotham City.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman: Black & White (2020) #3

Mar 3, 2021

Perhaps the most interesting story is “An Unquiet Knight” featuring Zatanna reaching out to the spirit of a deceased Batman and helping him finally find peace.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman: Black & White (2020) #5

May 6, 2021

“A Father and Son Outing” offers a glimpse at Bruce Wayne's struggle to teach patience and the craft of making Batman larger than life to criminals. “The Man Who Flies” gives us a look at the city through the eyes of Nightwing, whose upbringing as a circus acrobat still colors his personality flying through the air with the greatest of ease. “Blue” offers a tale from the perspective of Harvey Dent‘s wife Gilda, examining her life both before and after the tragedy which created Two-Face. In “Signals” Commissioner Gordon chooses to act on a case personally rather than turning on the Bat-Signal and asking for assistance.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman: Black & White (2020) #6

Jun 1, 2021

Less effective are Batman rushing to save a child from a war between a pair of chess-inspired groups in “Opening Movies” and Batman and Clayface working together, sort of, to investigate the disappearance of young women in “Like Monsters of the Damp.”

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman: Black and White (2013) #1

Sep 10, 2013

Also include here are a Zombie Batman story written and drawn by Neal Adams (weird, and a tad too preachy) and Batman hunting down a determined Ventriloquist by Howard Mackie and Chris Samnee (I liked the art better than the story). The only story that didn't work for me was the one offered by John Arcudi and Sean Murphy which turns the Dark Knight into a little too much of a gear-head for my tastes. Batman has had quite a career in comics over the years and this first issue gives us a little bit of everything from the Dark Knight's past. Despite a $5 cover price and the lack of color and inks, fans should enjoy this one. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman: Black and White (2013) #2

Oct 7, 2013

Although I appreciated J.G. Jones's art in Dan DiDio's Man-Bat story, the hamfisted themes and Batman's questionable morality at the end left me cold. In much the same way, I liked the art and idea behind writer/artist Rafael Albuquerque Limbo storyline more than the final execution. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman: Black and White (2013) #3

Nov 11, 2013

There's also an opening tale by Lee Bermejo about Batman's team-up with a young Jason Todd, and a beautifully rendered (if ultimately kinda empty) tale from Damion Scott featuring Batman chasing various members of his rogues gallery around a hall of mirrors. Worth a look. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman: Black and White (2013) #4

Dec 19, 2013

Without any real weak stories this month, Black and White #4 also boasts a Mad Hatter and Penguin tale from Michael and Lee Allred where Cobblepot attempts to out-wit both the Hatter and the Dark Knight Detective (which features Micahel Allred's trademark smooth but quirky style), Dustin Nguyen does double duty writing and illustrating an average night for Batman in Gotham City ending with an appearance by Catwoman, Nathan Edmondson and Kenneth Rocafort offer up a tale of Batman taking on an invisible enemy, and David Macho and Rubn Pellejero deliver a tale of Batman getting the help of a homeless veteran (and his pet rat) to take down Killer Croc. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman: Black and White (2013) #5

Jan 13, 2014

Although I enjoyed the tone of Keith Giffen and Javier Pulido's “Cat and Mouse” featuring a crook's version of his encounter with Batman, it's probably the weakest of this month's stories. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman: Black and White (2013) #6

Feb 10, 2014

The final two stories also have something in common as they present rather mean-spirited versions of beloved characters. Dave Taylor's tale of robots and conspiracies isn't half as fun as it sounds and features an extremely unlikable Alfred. Adam Hughes offers us a Catwoman tale that while somewhat plausable makes Catwoman to be one hell of a manipulative bitch whose actions definitely cross a line. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman: Killing Time (2022) #3

May 12, 2022

We also get Catwoman playing various roles from thief to enforcer to helpless bait while also rescuing a shot Riddler and flashbacks to Bruce Wayne training with Ra's al Ghul as the comic tiptoes around just what prize is in the small box that is worth all of this trouble and connects the current storyline with all of the flashbacks.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman: The Adventures Continue: Season Three #1

Jan 12, 2023

The plot of the first issue of Batman: The Adventures Continue Season Three revolves around the attempts to kill Muscle in prison, one of which Batman stops when Killer Croc gets into his cell. The source of these hits come from the hitman's former employer Esther Valestra. And she's not the only one who wants him dead.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman: The Adventures Continue: Season Two #1

Jul 12, 2021

The addition of Deadman adds an interesting angle as he isn't able to possess the zombie Talons (who can see him), helping Batman accept their odd nature quickly (although a trip to Zatanna proves to be equally useful). Now, with Deadman's help, can Batman prevent the Court of Owls assassins from taking out any more prominent Gothamites?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman: The Adventures Continue #1

Apr 16, 2020

Lex is an interesting choice of villain, and the Bane cameo is fun. But of all the pieces of the comic, there's a single panel that I find the most intriguing suggesting the comic is finally ready to introduce a pivotal character of Batman mythos which, up until this point, has been ignored up until this point. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman: The Adventures Continue: Season Three #2

Feb 22, 2023

It's a fine, if mostly forgettable Batman & Harley story that could fit into any Bat-title, although, if it's not a purposeful attempt to steer the series in a different direction, it seems a bit out of place here.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Batman: The Adventures Continue: Season Two #4

Sep 28, 2021

It's an interesting choice to make Renee not a fan of Batman (which seems to conflict a bit with established continuity on the show). But when the Muscle kidnaps Montoya's girlfriend, and leads Renee into a death trap, the detective will need all the help she can get.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman: The Adventures Continue: Season Three #4

Apr 24, 2023

I must admit, I'm not enjoying this latest season of Batman: The Adventures Continue as much as the earlier runs. Don't get me wrong, the stories aren't bad, but as the comic has gotten a bit darker in tone the comic has lost some of the all-ages magic of the series which spawned it.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman: The Adventures Continue: Season Three #5

May 22, 2023

Along with cameos from several Suicide Squad members, mind-controlled to go after Batman in the climax, we get Harley working with the Dynamic Duo as well. I've said this before, but this storyline hasn't been my favorite of the relaunched continuing adventures of the Batman: The Animated Series universe, but the issue does tie up the loose ends, with some fun Suicide Squad cameos, and should allow for something more interesting next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman: The Adventures Continue: Season Two #5

Oct 13, 2021

Overall, a pretty forgettable issue. Rick Burchett has the unenviable task of following up the amazing art by Jordan Gibson from the last issue. Burchett's art is fine here, if a bit rushed in some panels that's not altogether unexpected on a title like this (but it is a huge drop-off in quality from Gibson's work that makes it hard to believe issue #4 and #5 came from the same comic).

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman: The Adventures Continue #5

Jun 10, 2020

While Deathstroke offers a plausible reason for his appearance in Gotham to the Dark Knight, the assassin's true purpose is revealed at the end of the issue where readers discover what he's doing in Batman's backyard and who he's working for. Now that Todd knows Deathstroke is being bankrolled by Lex Luthor to knock off Batman, what happens to his long-term plans for his former mentor? And, if indeed he decides to make himself more visiable, will we be seeing Hush? The Red Hood? Or something else entirely?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman: The Adventures Continue: Season Two #6

Nov 9, 2021

Batman recognizes the disguised Clayface as his attacker, but he's safely locked up behind bars at Arkham Asylum. And later Clayface escapes to attack Batman again! And Barbara discovers he isn't the only escapee working for the campaign (which also explains the ex-mayor's sudden rise in popularity). But is there enough time to reveal the truth before Mayfield and the Bat-villains can steal the election?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman: The Adventures Continue #6

Jun 25, 2020

The issue is punctuated with the battle between Batman and Deathstroke, but with the later finally out of the way the more interesting story can begin. Just what does Jason Todd have in store for the Bat-Family? And in what guise does he plan to reintroduce himself when he finally steps out of the shadows. His current look seems to suggest Hush but that doesn't mean once he's ready to take a more active role that we won't see the Red Hood or some other variation before the arc comes to an end.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman: The Adventures Continue #7

Jul 13, 2020

Azrael is an unexpected addition here keeping Jason Todd on the sidelines. Catwoman gets a good cameo as well, although the choice to use the revamped designs of the characters means we don't get Catwoman's original BtAS look (still my favorite Catwoman desgin).

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman: The Adventures Continue #8

Jul 27, 2020

With Azrael saying farewell at the end of this issue (at least for now), the comic once again teases the possibility of Jason Todd emerging from the shadows. Up until this point we've seen him spend much of his time shadowing the Bat-Family, but Batman: The Adventures Continue #8 points out the other target in his sights: the Joker.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman: The Adventures Continue #9

Aug 6, 2020

Looks like the surprise of Todd's return has been ruined, but we still don't know what his larger plans are (other than some revenge against the Joker). Along with Batman's discovery and the early action of Todd evading attacks from the Joker's minion, much of the comic is focused on Todd's backstory allowing Alfred to teach Tim about his predecessor and giving fans the first appearance of Jason Todd as Robin in the DCAU.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman: The Adventures Continue #10

Aug 17, 2020

Todd and Batman's interaction doesn't reveal details of the Red Hood's plans, but it does make the Dark Knight Detective aware how much the character has changed choosing to challenge Batman and impose his own kind of justice on Gotham City.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batman: The Adventures Continue #11

Sep 2, 2020

Although it's still unclear if we're going to get some version of the family crowbar and explosion sequence that ended Jason Todd's run as Robin in the original Batman comics, the flashbacks to foreshadow trouble for the younger half of the Dynamic Duo as after Batman's attempt to bench him leads Robin to act on his own and target both Harley Quinn and the Joker.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman: The Adventures Continue #13

Oct 5, 2020

After having made changes to Jason Todd's final encounter with the Joker as Robin, lightening it up a little for the audience of Batman: The Animated Series by not having the Joker actually kill the boy (although hitting him repeatedly with a crowbar probably didn't help Jason's personality), I'll be curious to see what the current creative team has in store for the culmination of the Red Hood's master plan.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Batman: The Audio Adventures (2022) #1

Oct 12, 2022

That said, I did enjoy the art of Batman: The Audio Adventures #1 and the comic has a nice nod to Batman: The Animated Series‘ odd pairing of Killer Croc and Baby-Dollalthough that didn't play into the somewhat unfocused story so far. The comic is far from a must-read, and there's not a lot to sell me on a larger storyline but fans may still get some enjoyment out of the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman: The Brave and the Bold (2023) #1

May 24, 2023

It's not a bad collection, but the most notable story is very hit-and-miss, and the backup stories aren't are all that memorable, with the Stormwatch story missing some key characters to sell me on the team instead using the issue to recreate the concept of StormWatch yet again.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman: The Dark Knight (2011) #1

Jan 5, 2011

Finch does a good job of jumping Bruce back into the saddle of Batman but still showing some rust (such as his confrontation with Killer Croc in the dark alley). I don't know that I'm ready for the “terrible ramifications” this story is meant to have on Batman's life, but it's a strong beginning. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman: The Dark Knight (2011) #9

May 31, 2012

The focus is all wrong, the character teased on the cover isn't here (I was looking forward to a Bruce/Tim team-up), and there's just not enough here to justify picking up unless you simply want to grab all of the Night of the Owls issues. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Batman: The Return #1

Nov 20, 2010

At least the cover is kinda cool.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Battlestar Galactica (2013) #1

May 21, 2013

The art by Cezar Rezak isn't bad but certainly doesn't do much to make a story that's focused mostly on explaining the basics of the classic storyline for new readers all that interesting. And despite the absurdity of time missiles, the plot to this first issue by co-writers Dan Abnett and Andy Lanning feels sluggish and even, at times, uninspired. As much as I'd like to give this title time, there's not much here to prompt me to pick up next month's issue. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Battlestar Galactica (2013) #2

Jun 30, 2013

Alternate dimensions, weird timelines, and plenty of classic Cylons, may be enough for me to stick around a little longer to see how this plays out. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Before Watchmen: Minutemen #1

Jun 11, 2012

Although it doesn't really give any new information about the characters the setting and characters are a perfect fit for Cooke's writing and art. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Before Watchmen: Minutemen #2

Jul 15, 2012

When the others don't seem interested in helping Silhouette with her cause to end a child trafficking ring (because it's not the kind of positive prestigious case to help them make a name for themselves) Nite Owl and Mothman agree to help but they're too late to do anything but stare in horror as to what they find. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #1

May 6, 2017

Even for a fan of the original Scarlet Spider, this comic is a hard sell. Reilly is even more unlikable than Kaine when he first decided to try his hand at being a hero. The comic also lacks the humor of that version of the Scarlet Spider. Kaine does appear here, searching for his missing clone brother, and we can expect a confrontation between the two before too long (and hopefully a costume upgrade). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #3

Jun 21, 2017

Like the previous two issues, Ben Reilly: Scarlet Spider #3 is a mixed bag. Reilly is still a wholly unlikable character and his antics (even the somewhat heroic ones) are self-serving. However, the comic does provide some fun moments such as our hero robbing the street heroes he saved in order to get himself a proper costume. Back in the red suit and hoodie, at least Ben is starting to look more the part. Now the question is how long do we have to wait before we see the original and current Scarlet Spiders square off? Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #5

Aug 2, 2017

As one might expect, Reilly and Kain are evenly matched, both getting the temporary upper-hand while neither being able to put away the other. Is the Marvel Universe large enough for two Scarlet Spiders? Or will Kaine attempt to make good on his threat again before this series comes to a close? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #6

Aug 30, 2017

There's plenty of questions left up for grabs. Also, Ben likely has to deal with the retaliation of his client whose child doesn't survive his experimental procedure. And as for Kaine, based on Marlo's effect on him, what's next for this Scarlet Spider? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #8

Oct 6, 2017

For now it looks like Ben's path is clear. Thankfully this should be a less jack-ass version of the character and (hopefully) one who is serious about his potential redemption. As for how long this new outlook will last, I guess we'll just have to wait and see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #9

Oct 31, 2017

Subplots in this issue lay the groundwork for future trouble for our hero involving Cassandra making some deductions about Reilly and the arrival of a new player in town capable of creeping the fuck out of cab drivers (and possibly others). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #12

Jan 2, 2018

Kaine's return makes me wonder how Ben's clone brother may play into his attempt at redemption. After the current conflict will Kaine disappear for another few issues, or will the title get a co-star as the two flawed copies of Peter Parker try to make good together? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #14

Feb 21, 2018

You won't miss much skipping this issue, as the comic seems to be transitioning out of its last arc onto something new, but there is some fun to be had. (Did I mention the Hippo?). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #18

May 23, 2018

I'm also not wild about the art by Andr Lima Arajo which is a vastly different look from early issues in the comic. While I think the more muted palate as softer framing might work well for some comics, it wouldn't be my first (or even seventh) choice for Scarlet Spider. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #19

Jun 12, 2018

Given the lengths the story took to get Mysterio up to fighting strength, I was surprised how quickly the comic abandons what could have been a major villain for our heroes. We'll have to wait and see just what kind of fallout their is from the father/daughter actions. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #20

Jun 29, 2018

Will Sliney steps in to the writing duties with this issue replacing Andr Lima Arajo. While I don't dislike Arajo's art, I never felt it was a good match for these characters. Based on this comic, Sliney feels like a better fit. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #21

Jul 17, 2018

Most of the humor from this issue comes from Kaine's half of the story while we do see Ben make a scientific leap (relying on that old Peter Parker science knowledge, something neither clone does enough) to defeat the super-villain and begin his own investigation into the Diogenes Initiative. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #22

Aug 7, 2018

There are certainly big questions her about Gabriel and the true motivations of the Initiative. They obviously deserve more scrutiny. But for now, Ben has a cure (of sorts) for Abigail. Will choosing to use it cause more conflict with Kaine or possible unforeseen ramifications somewhere down the line? With the dying girl's life in his hands, can Ben afford not to use the angel's blood? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #23

Sep 12, 2018

Aside from the late reveal, the issue is more setup for next issue's payoff than anything else. As for Kaine, he's largely on the sideline here as events play out. Will he intervene to help Reilly survive? Or, now that the girl is dead, will he make good on his threat to kill the other Scarlet Spider? For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Ben Reilly: The Scarlet Spider #25

Oct 16, 2018

Issue #25 wraps up pieces of the Las Vegas storyline Ben Reilly has been involved in, but also leaves just as many questions unanswered. Ending with Reilly returned to the land of the living, with a new bloodlust and less-heroic spirit, and Kaine all but dead, where do these characters go from here? For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Beware the Batman #1

Oct 31, 2013

Artist Vecchio does a fair job in trying to adapt the show's sleek CGI-animated look to the printed page. The comic's continuity is a little perplexing as Katana seems to be Batman's fully-fledged partner (something hard won on the series over several weeks) but is still in possession of the Soultaker Sword. Small continuity issues like that aside, the first issue does a good job is selling the all ages Bat-book. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Beware the Batman #2

Dec 7, 2013

Brizuela's panels make this one worth grabbing (even if it is a story about the ridiculous environmental terrorist Professor Pyg). I hope to see more of his work both here and on Scooby-Doo! Team-Up. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Beware the Batman #3

Jan 8, 2014

Although Whale isn't the most interesting of villains, the underwater setting works well and the legitmate threat of weapons hitting Gotham's streets is incentive enough for our heroes to act. Katana is still in training, but it's obvious from Batman's relationship with Gordon the comic is taking place at least a few months down the line from the last episodes to air (although if the episodes hadn't been prematurely pulled the gap might not be so noticeable). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Beware the Batman #4

Feb 7, 2014

With the show not returning to the air in January as scheduled I have a feeling these gaps in continuity could continue which may be why DC has decided to end the comic series after issue #6. As to the fate of the cartoon, given that neither DC nor Cartoon Network have discussed it in months, one has to wonder if it will meet a similar fate. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Beware the Batman #5

Mar 9, 2014

Katana vs. Katana works well, and gives the police a heightened reason to target Batman and his partner. Of course all this leads up to next month's premature final issue of the series told completely from the perspective of Alfred. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Beware the Batman #6

Apr 1, 2014

Neither the show nor the comic would rank high on my favorite versions of Batman (although they'd be higher than the current New 52 version), but both showed promise, and without another all-ages Bat-title to take its place the cancellation of the series (which had been consistently good) is sad news for Bat-fans everywhere. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Birds Of Prey (2010) #2

Jun 18, 2010

The plot behind the mysterious assassin deepens as the Birds find themselves on the run from a foe who knows their secrets, is at least two-steps ahead, and is able to make everyone dance to the song they have decided to play. I have faith in writer Gail Simone, but I'm a little concerned with where the story is heading, the near omniscience of their opponent, and the long list of repercussions the book will have to deal with (perhaps for years) unless Oracle and her crew mount a comeback, quickly. Although I wasn't a big fan of either Savant or Creote they deserve a better fate than they're given here. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Birds Of Prey (2010) #3

Jul 19, 2010

Next month's conclusion of this first story arc should be a doozy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Birds Of Prey (2010) #13

Jun 13, 2011

As the issue comes to a close it gives us an intriguing turn as it elevates Huntress to the role of field commander of the team. It's hard to argue against Oracle's decision as Helena really has earned the position. To steal a line from Virginia Slims, she's come a long way baby. Sadly, it looks like she's only going to get to keep it for a couple of more issues. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Birds Of Prey (2010) #15

Aug 16, 2011

That said, the issue is an improvement over part one and does have some nice moments between Zinda Blake and the Phantom Lady. I also thought Manhunter worked pretty well with the team. Is it a great finale? No, not really, but for a comic that has struggled to live up to its own legacy (and struggles here without its trademark writer) it's about what I expected. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Birds Of Prey (2011) #1

Sep 22, 2011

Even when Volume 2 of the series struggled (like whenever Hawk was in a panel) it still had Gail Simone's passion and wicked sense of humor. Sadly this one does not. I might give this another issue or two to see how the introduction of other members changes the dynamic of the comic, but more out of respect for characters Simone helped nurture and make wildly popular than any real hope for improvement. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Birds Of Prey (2011) #2

Oct 26, 2011

This isn't a bad issue, and the art by Jesus Saiz is more consistant this time around, but this team of Birds is getting farther away from the team Gail Simone made popular (Poison Ivy, really?). Aside from Black Canary these aren't characters I really want to spend time with every month (especially for $3 a pop). Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Birds Of Prey (2011) #3

Nov 24, 2011

The real interesting tidbit is the news that Batgirl won't just be guest-starring over the next couple of issues but will become a permanent member of the team beginning next issue. Babs inclusion could be just what this book needs. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Birds Of Prey (2011) #4

Dec 28, 2011

The good news is Batgirl works well here, especially with Black Canary. It's good to see the Babs/Dinah team back together. Now if we can just figure out a way to get Zinda Blake and the Huntress to replace Poison Ivy and Katana we might, might have something. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Birds Of Prey (2011) #8

Jan 18, 2011

The finally few pages really seem to drop the ball on what was a very fun, engaging story filled with ample amounts of action and internal monologue. It's still worth a look but ends on a rather disappointing note.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Birds Of Prey (2011) #11

Apr 20, 2011

The story's climax is more convoluted than I'd like, but I actually like this pair together. It's also nice to see the screwed-up but still noble side of Catman that's been missing since before the storyline involving the kidnapping his son. I also quite enjoyed the final conversation between Catman and Deadshot. Their friendship (something else I've been missing from Secret Six lately), definitely deserves more page time. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Birds of Prey (2020) #1

Jun 9, 2020

With a hefty $10 price-tag, the story is at best hit-and-miss as even the villains (who get a prominent role on the cover) are largely forgettable.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Birds of Prey (2023) #1

Sep 12, 2023

I don't know that there's enough to get me to stay with the series more than an issue or two, but the structure (and Barda's offhand comments about Batgirl) make it an enjoyable read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Birds of Prey (2023) #3

Nov 12, 2023

The chemistry of the cobbled together team continues to work with the group now in action, even if this issue doesn't give Cassandra Cain much of anything to do. I'm loving the art of Leonardo Romero here as the Birds make their way through the island, even if the issue is only to set up the much more difficult confrontation in the next issue between Wonder Woman and the Birds of Prey.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Birds of Prey (2023) #4

Dec 12, 2023

4 Razors, Birds of Prey, Black Canary, Wonder Woman

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Birds of Prey: Sirens of Justice (2020) #1

May 28, 2020

While the comic may not feature my favorite versions of these characters (also a few of the brand's staple characters are MIA), and I'm not quite sold on artist Inaki Miranda's depiction of Harley, the characters' interactions make this one a fun read fans should enjoy.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Bizarro #4

Sep 29, 2015

With Jimmy and Bizarro temporarily switching places, giving us the Silver Age-ish Jimzarro for the first time, and Zatanna being frustrated with how well Bizarro understands magic, the issue is a complete delight that includes several fun cameos from the Rock of Eternity to Skartaris. There's also a nice message at the end before the mini-series sets up its next adventure (sadly without Zatanna). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Black Adam (2022) #1

Jun 27, 2022

While fighting a fake Darkseid, Adam (and later Teth) are infected with some kind of malady that the power of SHAZAM! cannot fix so the anti-hero decides to transfer his powers to a random descendant (despite the wizard being the only one who can bestow such power). This has the Ron Marz lets randomly give one hero's powers to some dude stink all over it.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Black Canary (2015) #1

Jun 25, 2015

Those expecting to see Black Canary kick ass will be disappointed as most of comic deals with the behind-the-scenes of a traveling band (which may be interesting but isn't really why you pick up a comic titled Black Canary). I'm happy to see Dinah get her own title but at the same time I disappointed that it had to be this one. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Canary and Zatanna: Bloodspell #1

May 30, 2014

The only real negative from the collection (other than the somewhat convoluted curse plot held together wonderfully by Zatanna and Black Canary's interactions over the years) is the fact that after you're finished there's no next issue to look forward to and only some depressingly insufficient New 52 titles currently featuring inferior versions of our heroes. That has more to say with the current state of the New 52 than this book which reminds us what writers and artists who know and like their characters, and are given the freedom in which to work (and an expanded classic DCU history on which to draw from), can deliver. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Black Cat (2019) #1

Jun 13, 2019

The issue is light and fun, especially early on as Felicia turns the security guards own hyper-vigilance against them allowing her henchmen to commit the theft while they provide her with the perfect alibi. The best moment of the comic, however, comes from neither from the main story nor the Black Fox back-up tale but from the other short back-up story involving the Black Cat and her pets robbing a jewelry store. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Black Cat (2019) #2

Jul 24, 2019

Black Cat #2 teases the reader for the first few pages before revealing the location. Knowing her own limits, the Black Cat enlists the help of a doped-up magician to deal with the inexplicable the team will face once inside. Despite the bizarre sights and obstacles they traverse, the plan goes mostly to plan… that is until the Cat looses control of Xander only moments after putting her paws on her prize leading to all kinds of complications and obstacles between the Black Cat and the front door. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Cat (2019) #3

Aug 14, 2019

In this case it's Felicia's bad luck (provided by her Quantum Probability Rig inside her costume) that turns out to good luck for her and bad luck for the whacked our sorcerer allowing the thief and her minions to make it out of the Sanctum Sactorum will their prize and leave quite a mess for a confused Doctor Strange to clean up. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Cat (2019) #4

Sep 24, 2019

The latest issue also offers the end game for the Black Fox and the madness behind the insane break-ins which will not only lead to a lifetime score but also offers an added bonus of sticking it to the Thieves Guild. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Cat (2019) #6

Nov 13, 2019

The two storlyines unfold at simultaneously as Felicia enjoys her evening and the Fox runs from the Thieves Guild. It's good she enjoyed her night off, because now that her mentor has been captured, the Black Cat needs to get back in the game. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Cat (2019) #8

Jan 21, 2020

The comic touches on the larger themes of the arc including the kidnapping of the Black Fox through some flashbacks with Felicia and her mother, but the real fun is in the heist and the madcap action that ensues wherever the Black Cat turns up. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Cat (2019) #9

Feb 12, 2020

Felicia's plan includes Black Cat showing off her unique skills in a casino and getting poor Logan into far more than he bargained for. In other words, it's a darn good time. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Black Cat (2019) #11

Jun 18, 2020

Unfortunately for Black Cat, her patsy can't keep Iron Man busy indefinitely preventing her to make it out of the building with her new bounty. However, while in the Nanoforge, she's able to create one other thing which should lead to an equally fun follow-up issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Black Cat (2019) #12

Aug 11, 2020

As for Odessa, she does get a surprise visit from armored Black Cat. However that doesn't seem enough dissuade her from attempting to force Felicia back into the fold as the guild's most valuable asset.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Cat (2020) #2

Jan 27, 2021

It also features several nods to Spider-Man history including Anti-Venom Symbiotes and dusts of both the Spider-Mobile and Goblin Glider. And, if that wasn't enough, ends on one hell of a cliffhanger as we're going to see just what a mega-powered Black Cat is capable of.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Cat (2020) #3

Mar 3, 2021

The issue offers plenty of temptation for the title character, and a surprise for Strange who is astonished she was able to turn away from such power (and avoid creating an even more dangerous situation for everyone) as the title turns its focus back to the larger “King in Black” event.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Black Cat (2020) #4

Apr 7, 2021

While offering several flashbacks to Queen Cat's hunt reminding us of Felicia's recent big scores, Black Cat #4 builds to an eventual throwdown between the two women as Felicia tracks down Queen Cat sooner than she anticipated and cleans her clock (although the Black Cat is amused as the idea of finally having a nemesis suggesting this competition between the pair will continue).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Black Cat (2020) #5

Apr 21, 2021

Black Cat #5 is a solid, if odd, issue as the heist the characters have been building to has been turned on its head. The question is, what happens now?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Cat (2020) #6

May 19, 2021

Now working alongside Odessa Drake, the rival who Felicia has been antagonizing ever since the first issue of the last volume of Black Cat, can Felicia play the hero and save all of Manhattan from the Black Fox's devil bargain? And, if so, what will the cost be?

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Black Cat (2020) #7

Jun 8, 2021

Of course the Fox is gone, and Felicia has an altogether different relationship with Odessa (which no doubt will lead to all kinds of new problems in not too long), but otherwise it appears that business is back to normal for New York's sexiest cat burglar.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Cat (2020) #9

Aug 30, 2021

It's not easy to convince incredibly-powered individuals that they need you, but Black Cat uses events to make a pretty strong case to not one but two villains here. Felicia offers Star a plausible story for why an employer may want with Star and others with powers, although it seems far more likely a cover story to what Felicia is really after.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Cat (2020) #10

Oct 6, 2021

With most of the pieces in place, Felicia plan is coming together, although Star seems to have her own plans for the other Infinity Hosts, Odessa Drake is making threats, and Fury hasn't given up just yet. Now the real fun begins as we learn just what Felicia has planned.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Black Cat (2020) Annual #1

Jul 12, 2021

While making mention of the hero's recent adventures, Black Cat Annual #1 doesn't require the reader to know too much about her ongoing story. Instead, it's just a fun one-off adventure with an unrelated Nick Fury ongoing back-up story thrown in to try and help justify the higher cover price.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Knight: Curse of the Ebony Blade #1

Mar 24, 2021

Camelot and the history of the blade will obviously play into the larger arc here as well as a professor who is likely now more tied to the story than she ever thought possible.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Knight: Curse of the Ebony Blade #2

Apr 29, 2021

Black Knight: Curse of the Ebony Blade #2 is a solid second issue filling in some of the questions raised and laying the foundation and support for Whitman to take on his quest and stop Mordred from collecting all of the Ebony artifacts for himself.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Black Knight: Curse of the Ebony Blade #3

May 31, 2021

Although defeated, Mordred takes comfort in that the knowledge Whitman may get from the Chalice is just as likely to drive him mad opening the door for the remaining items to fall into the villain's possession.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Black Knight: Curse of the Ebony Blade #4

Jul 2, 2021

Other than lay the heroes low, foreshadowing their eventual comeback, Black Knight: Curse of the Ebony Blade #4 feels very much like the middle issue in a larger arc. It does offer some flashbacks to the history of the Black Knight and some dire premonitions about any future the Black Knight might have even if he gets out of his current predicament.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Black Knight: Curse of the Ebony Blade #5

Aug 2, 2021

Elsa Bloodstone returns as well to help in the battle against Mordred. Although she was a nice addition to the story, her involvement feels a bit forced given her hasty exit earlier in the series (which is then repeated again here).

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Widow (2016) #1

Mar 14, 2016

As good as the comic is getting me interested in a stand-alone Black Widow comic, it's impossible not to compare it to Ed Brubaker and Steve Epting‘s Velvet (about the world's best female spy on the run from her own organization) which likely inspired it. Under that high standard Black Widow #1 isn't great, but it's still quite good. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Black Widow (2016) #2

Apr 13, 2016

Beginning with an extended sequence is a secret spy graveyard followed by a scene straight out the character's appearance in the first Avengers film, Mark Waid and Chris Samnee make sure there's plenty of action to go with slowly building out the series' ongoing storyline. It may not have the same breakneck pace of the first issue's chase sequence but there's enough her to keep me interested for at least one more issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Black Widow (2019) #1

Jan 24, 2019

The new setting along with the return of Natasha's more brutal assassin instincts makes her something of a commodity in Madripoor. The forshadowing of some truly heinous actions in the near-lawless country continue to foreshadow a darker turn for the character that while different, may not necessarily be better. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Black Widow (2020) #1

Sep 8, 2020

The rest of the issue is where problems arise as the comic looks back several months to Natasha's relationship issues and the world's greatest spy getting caught on camera by a local news reporter (something which seems near impossible and also likely leading to events in the present). Oh, and there's a mysterious new boyfriend. Exactly what's going on with Black Widow?

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Black Widow (2020) #2

Oct 8, 2020

While her amnesia seems to explain her obliviousness to being caught on camera, there are quite a few unanswered questions here as to what the hell is going on, and as Clint asks – is this a life she needs to be saved from?

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Black Widow (2020) #3

Nov 9, 2020

The action taken from the more vengeful members of the group push Black Widow a little closer to her old life, but once the dust has cleared just what version of the character will be left standing?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Black Widow (2020) #4

Dec 3, 2020

For fans of the character, the best news here is Widow is back in fine fighting form and taking down all threats as they appear. However, her attention is still split between her old life and her new. How those will be reconciled may ultimately decide where the character goes from here.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Widow (2020) #6

May 5, 2021

While the Apogee henchmen are monstrous and fearsome, none turn out to be all that memorable (although their combined threat does push Black Widow further than any individual fighter would). Now that she's save the girl, so to speak, what's next for the Black Widow and the odd collection of supporting characters she's putting together?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Widow (2020) #7

Jun 2, 2021

Spider-Girl is an unexpected, but welcome, addition to the title. Her glee at being tapped by Natasha for an undercover mission is almost too cute (almost). And the comic continues the solid action we've seen over the course of the first arc and beyond. With mysteries still to be uncovered, it appears Anya is sticking around for at least another issue, perhaps even longer?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Black Widow (2020) #8

Jul 8, 2021

The comic ends on a cliffhanger that would be more effective if we thought for even a second Marvel would be willing to kill off Yelena. Still, with the White Widow down, things are getting complicated for Natasha.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Black Widow (2020) #9

Aug 4, 2021

Not a lot of surprises here, but a solid middle issue setting up the conclusion. All of this, of course, leads into the next issue's end of the arc in which the Widow will finally square off against Apogee (which might be harder than she planned as the villain goes full Hulk in front of her).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Black Widow (2020) #10

Sep 2, 2021

Although the trouble has passed, things are far from settled with Lucy's powers locked in (rather than cured) likely cementing her role at Natasha's side for the near future. As for the others, Yelena is sticking around but it's a bit unclear what is going to happen with the others. Are Kate and Anya in a hurry to leave? Or might we see the beginnings of a new team?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Black Widow (2020) #12

Nov 5, 2021

There's a lot of slow building set-up here, but eventually things get interesting. Although her Spidey-sense (so to speak) is aroused the entire evening, Black Widow is unprepared for what, or more precisely who, she finds. Whoever the Living Blade is, Natasha has tangled with him before (and he's certainly made an impression).

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Black Widow (2020) #13

Jan 11, 2022

Even after their encounter comes to an end, Widow isn't sure what she did to get on the legend's radar but she is sure that she hasn't seen the last of him. Recreating the character's older costume and look, along with a retro feel to the art, Black Widow #13 is a fun single issue that still serves a larger arc. Whatever the Living Blade wanted from Natasha all those years ago, he's back. Can she survive him a second time?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Black Widow (2020) #14

Mar 1, 2022

In a somewhat surprising turn, after it appears everyone is on their way to safety and the Living Blade poses no current threat, Black Widow reengages the assassin when she could flee to fight another day (with back-up, like say the Avengers) rather than pick a fight she knows she can't win. The early results in their latest encounter don't look good for our girl.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Black Widow (2020) #15

Apr 13, 2022

While not the run's best issue, Black Widow #15 does offer a little bit of everything we've come to expect from the creative team including several of our heroes kicking ass while supporting their friend and more of Spider-Girl‘s wisecracking along the way (I'm pretty sure it's Anya who I'll miss most here). There are also a couple of surprises including the return of a recent foe whose own story looks far from finished. As for what's next for Widow and the various members of her motley crew, well, I guess we'll just have to wait and see.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Blood Brothers (2017) #1

Jul 11, 2017

When an Aztec skull is stolen from the local museum the police detectives are on the case which includes a little extra motivation as the mysterious skull has ties back to the pair's father. I'm curious to see where things go next. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Blue & Gold (2021) #1

Jul 27, 2021

While I'm a bit confused to the ages of our heroes here (or just how much of their version of the Justice League existed in the current DC timeline), it's a joy to see these two back together again. Blue and Gold #1 if a fun read, and will no doubt appeal to those still nostalgic over these heroes (now bring back Booster's Elvis collar, please).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Blue & Gold (2021) #2

Sep 21, 2021

Perhaps my favorite moment of comes in Booster thinking idly how the pair could earn both some fame and glory with a high profile "death." What other schemes might he have up his sleeves? The issue teases the introduction of Princess Omnizon who isn't part of this story but will have a larger role to play in the issues to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Blue Beetle (2016) #1

Oct 3, 2016

Blue Beetle's initial confrontation with a member of the Posse provides the only real action of the issue while Jaime's dream sequence and a few words of warning from Ted Kord begin laying the foundation of trouble between the heroes and the Lord of Order (something I found more tantalizing that the Posse or Jaime walking the corridors of his high school). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Blue Beetle: Rebirth #1

Aug 29, 2016

So far I like the concept of the new series more than the issue's adventure involving two throwaway villains attacking Reyes for reasons that aren't completely clear (but tease more trouble for the Beetles in the months to come). I'm also curious about Giffen's decision to make a huge change to the recent mythology of the Scarab which gives Jaime his powers. It will be interesting to see this unfold. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Briar (2022) #1

Oct 11, 2022

There's some dark humor in the comic's early narration, but that fades away with zombie princess stumbling through the woods. Eventually her humanity returns only to see her captured by slavers. This is decidedly not a Disney story. While an interesting idea, the zombie disappears too soon as does the wit at the beginning of the tale as the comic fails to sell me on this version of Briar Rose or the setting she finds herself in.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Brightest Day #24

May 3, 2011

Those who kept reading this one every couple of weeks have stronger constitutions than I do. However you feel about it, Swamp Thing is back and it seems like the beginning of reincorporating Vertigo properties back into DC proper has officially begun, especially considering the tease of a certain Hellblazer we're given as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Bruce Wayne: The Road Home: Batgirl #1

Oct 16, 2010

Those unfamiliar with Stephanie Brown's past as the Spoiler and her less-than-friendly relationship to Bruce Wayne get s couple of quick flashbacks before she finally wins Bruce's respect only to" well, I won't spoil it. There's also a quick mention of former Batgirl Cassandra Cain, who I can't say I've missed, and what she's been doing in recent months. I'll agree with Bruce on this one, Stephanie Brown has done the name of Batgirl proud, "reminding me of the original Batgirl in more ways than one."

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Bruce Wayne: The Road Home: Oracle #1

Oct 28, 2010

On the positive side, we do get 32 pages for $3 (not too shabby) and I am glad that this issue lets Barbara correctly recognize and identify Bruce (even if it does take her more pages than I'd like). The ending leads us to a big showdown between Bruce and Ra's in the final “Bruce Wayne: The Road Home” One-shot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #1

Jan 30, 2019

There are some differences including introducing Anya in the new series' first issue not as a vengeance demon but as an underground broker of mystical artifacts. Also noticeable by their absence are Cordelia, Angel, and the Master. Nor do we see Dawn, so it seems Buffy will start high school sister-free. I'll be curious to see who makes the cut into the new Buffyverse (and what other differences may be in store for all involved). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #2

Mar 9, 2019

With Buffy Summers having Slayer duties, which include working with Giles to research the vamp with a shiny artifact, and avoiding her mother's new boyfriend (demon or demon victim within a few issues?), and Willow spending time with her high school girlfriend, Xander feels noticeably left out of things here. Poor Xander. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #3

Mar 25, 2019

The issue also offers the first meeting between Buffy and Spike and some foreshadowing about plans Drusilla has for Sunnydale and the Slayer's friends. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #4

Apr 29, 2019

Ending with Drusilla feeding off of Xander, and a cameo by Angel, we are left to wonder about his final fate. Does Angel save him? Or will Xander become a member of team vamp? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #5

Jun 14, 2019

While some of the early pages of the issue feature an oblivious Buffy and Willow discussing her date, the later pages take a much darker tone focus on Xander being sired (but somehow not “completely sired” – a distinction the comic doesn't go into detail about) and the reactions of both Buffy and Willow to the loss of their friend. The issue also foreshadows trouble at home for Buffy as Joyce learns her daughter is skipping school again (but is still oblivious to her Slayer duties). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #6

Jul 16, 2019

Other points of interest in Buffy the Vampire Slayer #6 are Xander's knowledge of the Hellmouth (and Drusilla‘s interest in it), more of Jenny Calendar (who makes a persuasive argument for Giles to take it easier on Buffy), and a late reveal about Robin (who it appears is more than he seems). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #7

Aug 12, 2019

Taking place mostly inside Willow's mind, on the final couple of pages the comic does offer a bit more of the usual back-and-forth between Xander and Willow suggesting that, at least for now, things are getting back to normal (or what passes for normal in Sunnydale, at least). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #8

Sep 12, 2019

Jenny quickly giving up the dagger may help save some initial bloodshed but likely won't help her relationship with the Watcher (or the rest of the world which she may have doomed). And what's up with Dru stabbing Spike? What does that mean for him, and for Sunnydale? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #19

Nov 24, 2020

Faith is in town. Will she go bad? Will Kendra? Will Buffy? Will one or more die? Or is it Slayer season on vampires in Sunnydale? Only time will tell.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #22

Feb 4, 2021

Giles feels pushed aside by the arrival of Wesley Wyndam-Pryce who seems to have the Council's ear (although Giles imparts some wisdom, with a touch of foreboding, about Slayers to the young Watcher). As for Buffy, she seems to work well with both Kendra and Faith, although she too is feeling inadequate to lead a Slayer trio and with her guilt over recent events.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #25

May 20, 2021

For the big worlds' colliding event, Buffy the Vampire Slayer #25 is actually a bit dull as the new characters avoid their original counterparts and avoid any possible negative reaction to running into themselves.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019): The Chosen Ones #1

Sep 4, 2019

The other back-up story, "Behind the Mask," takes place during a masquerade in Paris in 1820 where Adelaide encounters a roguish gentleman who turns out to be a bit peckish. While there's nothing must-read about any of the three stories (the last, written and drawn by Alexa Sharp, being my favorite), there should be enough here for Buffy fans curious about the exploration of more Slayer history. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019): Faith #1

Mar 5, 2021

While the art is fine overall, the is a bit of an inconsistency from Eleonora Carlini who sometimes takes effort to make Faith look like Eliza Dushku and in other panels not so much. While I think die-hard Buffy fans may be interested here, the result is something of a mixed bag.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019): Every Generation #1

Jun 10, 2020

There's certainly a market for Buffyverse stories like this with centuries of Slayers to explore along with various stories involving Buffy and her contemporaries as well. While I found the subject matter of “The Sisters of Angelus” the most interesting, nothing in the comic “changed the way I look at Buffy and everything about her world” as the publisher promised. I don't know that there is much here other than for die-hard Buffy fans interested in side stories like these.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #1

Mar 24, 2014

The reunion of Buffy and Giles is alone worth picking up Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season Ten #1, but the first issue of Season Ten has other strengths as well such as artist Rebekah Isaacs capturing the right feel for each of the characters and Christos Gage putting a new, and more adult, spin on Buffy and Spike's relationship. Even though Joss Whedon's personal touch is missing, Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season Ten #1 kicks off the new season right, and I'm interested to see where things will go from here. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #2

Apr 29, 2014

Still haunted by visions of Anya (which appear to be her rather than simple hallucinations or The First toying with the one-eyed Scooby) and wrestling with the his strained relationship to Dawn, Xander heads off to talk with Dracula to see if he can shed any light on the situation (setting up what should be yet another amusing reunion). Best of the Week.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #3

May 28, 2014

Co-written by Nicholas Brendon the dialogue feels as sharp as ever, and not just with Xander as Buffy and Willow share the kind of bestie moment we haven't seen between them in quite some time. Must-Read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #4

Jun 24, 2014

Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season Ten #4 is the first issue to deal with with Dawn and Xander's relationship issues directly as Dawn explains her "reset" following almost being wiped out of existence in Season Nine. As to what this means for the couple long term, we'll just have to wait and see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #5

Aug 4, 2014

The main takeaway from the arc (featuring the co-writing duties of Buffy star Nicholas Brendon), other than getting to see Xander and Dracula back together again, is the importance of the Vampyr tome which now controls the mutable laws of magic and which Buffy can trust no one but herself and her friends to keep safe. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #6

Aug 26, 2014

The only surprise with the fake reality is the one character who refuses to see through the lies as Giles continues to struggle with his new reality as a teenager cut off from his old life which will likely continue to be a theme of the series going forward. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #7

Sep 29, 2014

Xander's situation with Dawn is far from settled and the ongoing temptation to use the new Vampyr tome continues to affect all those who hold onto it foreshadowing an error in judgement looming just beyond the horizon. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #8

Nov 5, 2014

The B-story involving a de-powered Old One with a very personal grudge against Slayers hunting Buffy isn't as interesting, but I'm willing to see where it leads (especially as long as the main story continues to deliver). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #9

Dec 3, 2014

In the midst of the action the comic continues to pull Buffy and Spike together teasing the possibility of reuniting the couple. And although Andrew admits to his bad judgement he doesn't exactly learn from his lesson as the final panel foreshadows more trouble on the way. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #10

Jan 6, 2015

Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season Ten #10 proves to be an awful lot of fun capturing Harmony's craziness. I hope to see more of each of them. And Buffy's new position offers up all kinds of odd meetings that I'm sure the Season Ten writers will enjoy exploiting. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #11

Feb 4, 2015

Andrew's transformation will certainly have consequences, but the big news is the final panel which finally puts Spike and Buffy together again romantically. It will be interesting to see how the comic explores their relationship going forward. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #12

Feb 28, 2015

Romance doesn't flow for Giles who continues to be stymied in his adolescent form or for Xander and Dawn who seem to finally be more at ease with themselves after months of awkwardness. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #13

Mar 23, 2015

As to the story, Spike's pro-active nature in investigating the mystery bodes well for his future with Buffy (and produces a humorous reaction from his roommate). As to the cause of Spike's bad dreams I wonder if we may look back to a First Season episode of Angel for a possible explanation as new trouble from William the Bloody's past may have recently arrived in town. The Andrew subplot, while really not much more than filler, is a well-handled look at someone finally coming to terms with their sexuality with the support of their friends. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #14

Apr 28, 2015

Along with the introduction of the new big bad, Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season Ten #14 gives us Buffy snooping through Spike's mind finding both beauty and horror before confronting Archaeus whose connection to Spike makes him a serious threat to Buffy in more ways than one. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #15

Jun 2, 2015

The issue ends with the team regrouping after a marginal victory without hope of defeating the demon alone and teasing the first big crossover event since Angel's wacky Twilight adventure. A Buffy, Angel, and Spike team-up? Okay, that sounds like some serious fun. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #18

Aug 27, 2015

I'm not sure why but I found Rebekah Isaacs' art to be a little more caroonish than usual which isn't necessarily a bad thing but it does work a bit against the action-heavy first-half of the issue. I also think she could use a little practice drawing Boreanz's forehead. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #21

Nov 28, 2015

Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season Ten #21 covers an awful lot of ground bringing back characters like Satsu, Harmony, and Vicki while lining up the first test of Buffy's new romance. I'm a little concerned with the return of the U.S. Army as Season Four of Buffy is by far its weakest of the show's seven year run. That said, the episode definitely sells me on the fragile alliance and the probability of all hell breaking loose before all is said and done. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #22

Jan 3, 2016

The only major storyline deals with the return of Dylan to Spike's life as another of Buffy's core relatinships develops some cracks but, at least so far, doesn't show signs of crumbling just yet. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #23

Feb 5, 2016

Dawn seems to be embracing her new life. Buffy and Spike's relationship is already starting to show some strain. And, given an offer he couldn't refuse, Giles decides to leave the realm temporarily for one where his young visage won't count against him. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #25

Mar 28, 2016

Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season Ten #25 offers a tearful farewell to both Dawn and Xander who stay behind to close the portal. Buffy's acceptance of the fact also looks to cause another rift between her and Blondie Bear. That, plus the threat posed by D'Hoffryn means things aren't getting any easier for the Slayer any time soon. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #26

May 12, 2016

Meanwhile back on Earth, Buffy's inability to save Dawn begins to strain both her calm and her relationships with her friends. So, with Dawn out of the picture and Buffy adequately distracted, D'Hoffryn uses the new laws of magic to his advantage. Killing off every other member of the Magic Council to take their powers, the demon grows infinitely more powerful. Then, and only then, does he reveal his true motivation to Buffy and the Scoobies as he takes the Vampyr tome with little resistance from our heroes. And whatever he has planned for the book, it can't be good for the Slayer or her friends. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #27

May 31, 2016

We also get the reappearance of Lilah who lets us know Wolfram & Hart have a keen interest in Dawn and Xander's wacky adventure home (possibly setting a big return for the evil law firm in Season Eleven?). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #28

Jun 29, 2016

And, also in the tradition of the show, Buffy comes up with an out-of-the-box solution to their problem (which, of course, we'll have to wait to unfold in the comic's final issue). While the final arc of the season continues to feel more and more like a retread of the last few episodes of the show's weakest season, there's still fun to be had. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #29

Aug 2, 2016

Xander's death (if that's what it really is, and not a trick) comes as a surprise as it would take away Buffy's oldest and most loyal friend. However, I'm betting on the idea that there's more to Anya's light show than just roasting the man who left a version of her at the altar. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #30

Aug 31, 2016

A bit too reminiscent to the splintering and coming back together of Buffy and friends in Season Four, Season Ten does end on a high note with Buffy victorious not only over the villain but also her own doubts and fears concerning an new slew of responsibilities. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #1

Nov 30, 2016

After Buffy and Spike fight off a beast in the sewers to open the issue, the big action comes with the unexpected appearance of a Chinese Water Dragon. If this first issue is any indication, the shortened Season Eleven (only 12 issues) may be fairly hectic for the Scoobies. The first issue also teases a change in the United States Government's approach to magic (which I'm guessing will be one of the major themes of the season). On the plus side, it looks like we (and Buffy) are going to be thrown immediately into the action. On the downside, that means we're unlikely to get some of those fun individual issues mixed into the overall arc. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #2

Dec 30, 2016

Although things go from DEFCON 4 to DEFCON 1 with an alarming rate of speed in this issue (due to the season's shortened run), by the end of issue two we know exactly what this season is about. At a time where there's a growing hatred for "others," the season arc is certainly timely. The end reveal that the United States wants to round up a certain type of individuals and throw them into internment camps is certainly chilling. Just how will Buffy and the Scoobies respond? Unlikely to accept their fate, will they run? Or will the Slayer take on the U.S. Government? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #3

Feb 2, 2017

Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season Eleven #3 is purposefully frustrating for both our heroine and the reader. The world has gone mad and there's so much Buffy can do a this point. Choosing to go and protect others who are being targeted by their government, where will this eventually lead? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #6

Apr 26, 2017

I'm going to be glad to see Buffy breach the walls of the camp. Although I know it's the point of the series, the past couple issues have been depressing as hell. At least now the Slayer has a plan. Knowing Buffy it's probably going to be a terrible plan. But right now, to save the world (again), any plan will do. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #10

Sep 7, 2017

Despite the odd science experiments and doom and gloom for what's coming, the issue does present a lighter side in having Xander stand-in for the VP while he's questioned for the Scoobies. It goes about as well as you'd expect. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #12

Nov 1, 2017

Given the chance, the franchise could have returned to the original status quo with Buffy (aside from Faith) being the only Slayer in town. While choosing to return the powers to the Slayers who misused their gifts is certainly magnanimous of her there is the question whether or not it's actually a good idea. As to the government's immediate reversal of its policies, it feels a bit too neat an ending for complicated issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 11: Giles #1

Mar 10, 2018

While the comic is entertaining, it feels a bit too much like reshuffled greatest hits of the Buffyverse with the focus on Giles rather than a high school Giles rather than Buffy this time around. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 12: The Reckoning #1

Jun 28, 2018

The housewarming that kicks off the issue is interrupted by a couple of unexpected guests who bring news of the looming threat. It seems Fray's evil vampire twin brother has teamed-up with Wolfram & Hart (and they aren't the only familiar faces making an appearance). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 8 #4

Dec 22, 2011

I'm also very mixed on the comic's conclusion. Buffy being saved by the police at the last minute might get her out of immediate legal trouble (although there still is that whole “is slaying murder” issue left to be resolved), but it sure comes off anticlimactic when your super-heroine has to be saved by a guy with a gun. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 8 #40

Feb 1, 2011

It may not have been perfect, but it was memorable, and even with the craziness of the last year this last issue reestablishes the characters as well as give them somewhere new to go. A couple of months ago if you had asked me if I was looking forward to Season Nine I'm not sure my response would have been positive. Now, I'm curious to see where Buffy the Vampire Slayer will go next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #1

Sep 19, 2011

The first issue centers around Buffy's hangover from the first party for all her pals and new roomies at her new apartment. We get flashes of the party from Buffy's hazy memory (some of which she'd just as soon forget). The comic is filled with great dialogue and it actually feels like the characters we remember from Buffy's better days are back in force once again. It's only a first issue, but it's a damn good. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #2

Oct 15, 2011

Writer Andrew Chambliss does a fair job in picking up for Whedon but the dialogue and character reactions simply aren't as crisp this time around. It's still worth reading, but not quite as good as I was hoping. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #3

Nov 15, 2011

I was really impressed with issue #3, especially the dialogue and character interactions which felt much more natural and Whedon-esque than the previous issue (also penned by Andrew Chambliss). The story arcs seem more focused and character driven, and there's some great humor throughout. If this is where Season Nine is going to go, I'm on-board. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #5

Jan 19, 2012

It's not a great single issue but it does set out a new path for Willow and set up an entirely new challenge for everyone's favorite slayer. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #6

Feb 13, 2012

Even if you haven't read the first arc of Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season Nine, if you're a fan of the character you should definitely find a copy, especially if you can find the old school variant cover. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #7

Mar 17, 2012

I'm not sure exactly what this means for Buffy's pregnancy or her relationship with Spike, but from what we see at the end of this issue I'm going to assume things are going to get far more complicated before the season arc decides to answer either of those questions. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #8

Apr 16, 2012

With the first big Season Nine twist writer Andrew Chambliss keeps going for the unexpected. This isn't some nefarious plot by a big bad to hurt the Slayer, but an ill-thought-out attempt by a friend to keep her safe. Meanwhile, with the Slayer out of action Xander and Dawn help Detective Dowling with his Zompire problem. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #9

May 10, 2012

The final panel suggests we're going to get to see Buffy vs. Buffy in the next issue, which certainly works for me. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #10

Jun 20, 2012

The only real lasting effect of the arc is Spike, realizing there's no hope for vamp and slayer, deciding on his own to leave. Although it provides a nice moment for Spike it also removes yet another one of the comic's most entertaining characters. Next issue marks the return of Kennedy who hopefully will breathe some new life back into the Buffyverse. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #11

Jul 18, 2012

A couple of other interesting tidbits: Spike's friend Eldre Koh of the Nitobe needs help in his quest for vengeance (which seems really hard to be setting something up that doesn't really fit in this issue) and Buffy learns the police under Detective Dowling have started a special task force to deal with the Zompires. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #12

Aug 15, 2012

Realizing she and Kennedy need help Buffy calls in the debt Koh owes her, but things don't go exactly as planned. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #13

Sep 15, 2012

I know the point of the season is to return the character back to basics, and her decision sure wants to be profound, but it simply doesn't come off that way. Instead it feels far too much like the old self-centered Buffy long before she learned to rely on others to help her with her calling. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #14

Oct 18, 2012

I understand what Espenson is doing here, but the story is pretty damn pat (he ends up having to stake and kill the football jock who has been harassing him). This kind of story would seem to fit much better in something like the Tales of Slayers anthology series than in the middle of an ongoing season arc. If I had found it there, or if was just a one-issue tale (I don't need a second month of Billy's misadventures), I might give it a pass, but 14 issues in, as the season is still trying to find its focus, it simply doesn't work. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #16

Dec 18, 2012

Honestly, the Billy storyline curtailed my interest in the season by quite a bit. However, flipping through the comic and seeing the introduction of (the still magically-imbued) Illyria into the new arc was enough for me to pick this one up and stick around to see where things go from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #17

Jan 13, 2013

A good issue and I'm happy to see Illyria, although her account of her recent activities does seem to contradict Angel After the Fall. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #18

Feb 18, 2013

The Billy story aside, the comic works well as Severin's motives (if not his logic) are easily understood and Illyria's ego certainly hasn't been damaged too much for her time in Los Angeles. However, the last few panels make me a little concerned that the old one's time in Season Nine may be very short-lived. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #19

Mar 20, 2013

The issue ends with Buffy taking responsibility for her action which still isn't enough for Xander who is watching the woman he loves slowly fade away because Buffy and Angel couldn't keep it in their pants. Despite the dustup, the pair put their issues aside and work together to help save Buffy's little sister. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #20

Apr 18, 2013

I'm not sure I like Xander as Judas, especially betraying Buffy to a coldblooded killer like Simone, but I'm willing to wait and let this play out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #21

May 14, 2013

Buffy and her friends will discover the Deeper Well has not been left unguarded as the powerful entities remaining in our dimension want to protect the power of the Old Ones from falling into the wrong hands (not that something like that will stop the Scoobies from their dangerous plan). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #22

Jun 14, 2013

Although the battle for The Deeper Well is only begun, the issue ends with all the cards on the table and the fate of Dawn growing more desperate by the minute. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #23

Jul 18, 2013

Despite some ups and downs, Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season Nine is looking as if it will end on a high note as well as the possibility that some form of magic will be returned to world helping to set up a new storyline when the characters move on to Season Ten. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #24

Aug 20, 2013

The season is certainly going out with a bang as this issue is packed with characters, actions, and even a couple of nice surprises. Aside from Willow looking decidedly Joker-like (seriously, what's up with that?) this not much for me to complain about other than how sad I am to only have one issue left to wrap-up the season. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 9 #25

Sep 16, 2013

The issue's final panels show us the rules have changed as the laws of magic, vampires, and possibly much more are all different under the new seed than the old. Although Buffy and her companions survive (sadly without Illyria who doesn't make it out of the Well), the world they return to may be far different than the one they left. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer/Angel: Hellmouth #1

Oct 31, 2019

Hellmouth #1 ends on a cliffhanger. This time around Buffy isn't fast enough to prevent the Hellmouth from opening, and now she and Angel (who she doesn't yet know is a vampire with a soul) have no choice but to follow Drusilla down into Hell (where another character from the show's First Season may be waiting?). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer/Angel: Hellmouth #3

Dec 17, 2019

I enjoyed how the comic teased Drusilla spilling the beans about Angelus to Buffy but instead offer the much more powerful scene of Buffy discovering the truth for herself (although I wonder how Xander‘s vampireness might also effect her long-term views of Angel). Now all the Slayer has to worry about is being trapped in Hell and the only person able to help her stop an army ready to be unleashed on the world above is a friendly, brooding, vampire. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Buffy the Vampire Slayer/Angel: Hellmouth #5

Feb 18, 2020

Although I've enjoyed both the Angel and Buffy the Vampire Slayer reboots, I don't think Hellmouth met the lofty goals of the series. Still, there was fun to be had… and some tears to shed. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer: Willow (2020) #1

Jul 15, 2020

Willow's road trip eventually leads her to a sleepy town off the beaten path where the comic's story looks to begin in earnest. Featuring an attractive older woman and new trouble where things still go bump in the night (despite how rosy things look on the surface) means Willow may get more excitement than she bargained for.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Buffy: The Last Vampire Slayer (2023) #1

Aug 9, 2023

There are some interesting pieces here, but I don't think this is the comic to pull me back into reading Buffy on a regular basis.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Calamity Kate #1

Mar 21, 2019

While I'm not sure I'll stick around for all four issues of the mini-series, Calamity Kate #1 is a fun read bouncing between Kate monster hunting and her less successful human interactions. Worth a look. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Captain America (2004) #613

Jan 4, 2011

I thought the handling of the Winter Soldier's past being disclosed to the public was pretty shoddy (not to mention rushed), now we'll get to see if Brubaker can pull things back and give us the first big super-hero trial we've had in years.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Captain America (2011) #1

Jul 19, 2011

We also get appearances from HYDRA and Baron Zemo who are in cahoots with Codename: Bravo. I understand where Brubaker is going here but every WWII hero that's still alive and in top notch condition makes a Cap a little less special. It's a good, though not great, first issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Captain America (2011) #2

Aug 22, 2011

The final panel shows us things aren't going to get easier for Cap anytime soon with the return of the Ameridroid and Bravo playing Casanova in Sharon's dreams. Creepy! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Captain America (2011) #3

Sep 22, 2011

With Cap locked in the dreamworld for the next issue I'm assuming the craziness seen here is only the beginning. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Captain America (2011) #5

Jan 1, 2012

As to Queen Hydra‘s plan to use Cap's patriotism against him, I'm intrigued to see where writer Ed Brubaker will take us next. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Captain America (2011) #6

Jan 1, 2012

I was totally on board with the comic having villains attack Cap's mind rather than face him head on. I'm far less sure of Cap's nightmares becoming manifest in the real world. On the plus side, the art by Alan Davis is a big improvement over the last issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Captain America (2011) #7

Jan 14, 2012

The issue does have some bright spots such as focusing much of the story on a conversation between Cap and Sharon Carter. And the action, drawn by Alan Davis, looks like we want a Captain America comic to look like. Not great, but still worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Captain America (2011) #8

Feb 15, 2012

I feel like I missed a page (or three) as Sharon comes to the conclusion of what villain is behind Cap's regression back to Skinny Steve Rogers. It's possible Cobra let this slip off-panel in Sharon's interrogation but I just don't see him knowing that much of the operation. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Captain America (2011) #9

Mar 18, 2012

If I have one big complaint about issue #9 it's that the art by Alan Davis isn't as consistent as I'd like. Although the closeups look good, many of the other panels look rushed – especially the faces of the characters in some of the action shots. Here's hoping this is just a one-time problem. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Captain America (2011) #11

May 16, 2012

I like the inclusion of Dugan and Dimondback here, the later (given she's a former super-villain) will have a real stake in the case. Scourge, in one for or another, has been around forever in the Marvel Universe to help trim the fat. I'm intrested to see how writer Ed Brubaker uses the character in this new arc. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Captain America (2011) #12

May 29, 2012

Although the inclusion of Gyrich and Dunphy does nothing to help sell me on the story, there's certainly enough here to pick this one up including some good inner monologue from Cap during his attack on the HYDRA base and the art by Patrick Zircher whose action sequences really pop. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Captain America (2011) #13

Jun 19, 2012

As to the big throwdown between old friends (teased on the cover but not shown here), we'll have to wait at least another issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Captain America (2011) #14

Jul 18, 2012

The episode is a weird mix of art by Patrick Zircher and Mike Deodato, Jr. The two styles don't really mesh all that well giving the comic a somewhat unsatisfying feel. The story itself works well, setting up more conflict and guilt for Cap with the loss of another friend (although I've never been a fan of D-Man and didn't even know he was even alive somewhere in the Marvel Universe so it's not like Codename: Bravo did this to the Falcon). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Captain America (2011) #15

Aug 1, 2012

Captain America #15 isn't a bad issue, but the Discordians aren't really that impressive and I've already grown tired of Bravo and Queen Hydra's (failed) attempts to fuck with Cap far from the battlefield. It's worth a look but not an issue you'll miss much if you decide not to pick it up.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Captain America (2012) #1

Nov 26, 2012

Although I don't hate the art, I'm not sure John Romita Jr. is the right choice for the comic if, as Remender states in the afterward, the point is to take the series into the weird sci-fi stories the character enjoyed under Jack Kirby‘s run in the 1970′s. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Captain America (2018) #1

Jul 10, 2018

Other than Cap and Bucky taking down some throwaway villains and the tease of a new threat, there's not much here. What we do know is that America appears to be in bad shape and that Cap's good name isn't doing much better. As to how both of these will get rectified (and just how large a role both Agent 13 and Bucky will have in the comic going forward), there's still quite a few questions left unanswered. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Captain America (2023) #1

Oct 3, 2023

It's fine, but there's nothing here which is a must-read or feels like I need to pick up the next issue to see where this story goes (especially at $6 an issue).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Captain America: Man Out of Time #1

Nov 8, 2010

For $4 it's definitely not a must-read, but fans of the character or of Marvel's various What If…? stories may want to give it a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Captain America: Steve Rogers #1

May 27, 2016

Given the character's vast continuity I can't say I buy the premise of Steve Rogers being a Hydra agent but the set-up does allow Marvel to take Cap in an entirely new direction. We'll just have to wait and see whether or not it turns out to be a good one.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Captain America: Steve Rogers #2

Jul 7, 2016

While the issue itself is interesting, laying out events to explain Rogers' behavior and the Red Skull's plan, the revelation does deflate the series. After such a huge shock I'd expect Marvel to keep its secrets a little closer to the vest. Now that all the cards are on the table, I'll admit my interest in the new series has already begun to wane. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Captain Atom (2011) #0

Sep 27, 2012

I'm going to miss this comic. As written by J. T. Krul, and drawn by Freddie E. Williams II, Captain Atom may not fit well in the still rather small New 52 DCU (honestly, I can't see DC trying to stick the character in another comic), but the comic consistently presented the world and actions of a super-hero from an entirely different perspective. I'm not going to lie, I'm a saddened that the new DCU isn't a big enough place for a character, and comic, like this to thrive. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Captain Atom (2011) #1

Sep 28, 2011

This version of Captain Atom certainly isn't going to be for everyone, but the comic does add something different to the character and give him new storylines to explore. Personally, I'd like the character to be a little more solid than the wispy, somewhat ethereal version we see in artist Fernando Pasarin's art. But then again I guess I should just feel lucky DC didn't redesign him back to his WildStorm look. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Captain Atom (2011) #2

Oct 27, 2011

Writer J.T. Krul continues to explore the limitations and abilities of the new Captain Atom. I'd still like a little of the old Captain to shine through this Dr. Manhattan makeover, but as long as that dog story is kept on the back burner I'll keep giving this one a shot. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Captain Atom (2011) #3

Nov 21, 2011

The final page of the issue also give us the first appearance of General Eiling, the man (at least in the old version of the DCU) responsible for the creation of Captain Atom. It will be interesting to see how this version fits into Atom's backstory. And, thankfully, we get an issue without the mutated monster dogs. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Captain Atom (2011) #7

Mar 28, 2012

The art by Freddie E. Williams II is still as good as I remember from the first few issues and writer J. T. Krul continues to tell some intriguing stories that are as much sci-fi (if not more) than super-hero tales. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Captain Atom (2011) #8

Apr 26, 2012

Far on the outside of the DCU, and with a focus far from your usual super-heroics, Captain Atom is a title you need to be reading. However, it's by far one of the most ambitious projects of the New 52, and continues to be one of it's most pleasant surprises. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Captain Atom (2011) #9

May 22, 2012

Another good issue of the series that gives us some answers but raises even more questions. Now that Atom knows what his future holds, the question becomes how will he use that knowledge, and what can he do to prevent it? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Captain Atom (2011) #10

Jun 28, 2012

The issue makes a nice conclusion to the arc as well as allow the character to embrace his humanity by creating a flesh and blood Nathaniel Adam version of himself to explore his feeling for Renita. With this storyline wrapped up, I'll be curious to see what new direction Captain Atom takes beginning next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Captain Atom (2011) #11

Jul 23, 2012

However, it appears these unconcious gifts might actually be far more dangerous than the chance the human version of Nate gets into with Renita as the two finally give into their feelings for each other. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Captain Atom (2011) #12

Aug 20, 2012

I'm a little sad that the Nate storyline ends so quickly as there was plenty of story to mine for several issues about how human this version of Nate actually is and how far his relationship with Ranita could have actually gone. That said, the immeadiate effects of giving into his desires to once again live his life as a normal man teach Captain Atom an important lesson as he knows now he can never go back to being who he was. The issue ends with another none-too-subtle Watchmen reference with our hero removing himself from the Earth while gazing back on it from the surface of the moon. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Cartoon Network Super Secret Crisis War #1

Jul 8, 2014

I don't know that I'll pick-up all the tie-in issues, but the first issue sells me on the premise of the crossover. And any comic featuring both Mojo Jojo and Aku is certainly going to tempt me into putting it in my pull list. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Cartoon Network Super Secret Crisis War #2

Aug 9, 2014

Once again Derek Charm's art is top-notch (especially his gleeful rendition of Aku). With the heroes getting the majority of the time we don't get much Mojo Jojo other than the foreshadowing the monkey genius is already starting to bristle with his role within the League. The escape of the heroes might not be the League's only problem. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Cartoon Network Super Secret Crisis War #3

Sep 5, 2014

Despite the swath the heroes manage to carve out through the ship, leaving butchered robots in their wake, the latest issue also teases us with what Aku really has in mind for their enemies as the comic heads its final three issues (which will hopefully include more Mojo Jojo!). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Cartoon Network Super Secret Crisis War #4

Oct 11, 2014

The latest issue delivers on the action and off-beat humor (such as Dexter using the severed-head of a Buttercup bot to fight off his attackers) and is certainly worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Cartoon Network Super Secret Crisis War #5

Nov 6, 2014

Mojo Jojo's hero turn puts the character back into the action after being largely marginalized over the past few issues. It also earns the respect of Bubbles, Blossom, and Buttecup in an undeniably adorable panel. Realizing at the last minute his world hasn't been targeted it will be interesting to see Mojo's choices in the mini-series finale and what the revelation means to Mandark. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Casanova: Avaritia #2

Oct 12, 2011

[Marvel/Icon, $4.99]

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Cat-Man and Kitten (2022) #1

Dec 8, 2022

Even if it isn't the Catman I most want to see back in comics, and the one-shot does loose a bit of steam layering questions about these characters which a one-shot can't possibly answer, I still quite enjoyed being taken for a ride and I'm a bit sad that this is the only issue we'll get (at least for now). This is the kind of comic I would gladly read more of.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Catwoman (2018) #1

Jul 11, 2018

The question of which side of the law Catwoman will end up on after being separated from Batman is put on hold as she has more immediate concerns to deal with. While it still feels like Catwoman's future in the DCU is very much up in the air, the comic gives her a threat and a group of copycats to take down in order to clear her name. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Catwoman (2018) #2

Aug 15, 2018

There's a bit of action here as Selena dispatches the various impostors in mostly a page, more of Selina failing to find a good night's sleep, a sequence involving her supplier stocking her with new gadgets (the humor here sadly is nearly as groan-worthy as the items), and Selena deciding to go straight to the source to find out just who wants Catwoman, and why. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Catwoman (2018) #23

Jul 21, 2020

Batman-less Catwoman stories often don't reach my comic stack, but the comic's choice to use a modified version of my favorite Catwoman costume did pique my interest. The issue works as a tease. Ending on a cliffhanger, any answers to Catwoman's trip, wardrobe choice, or the outcome of her attempted good deed will have to wait for another month.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Catwoman (2018) #24

Aug 20, 2020

The two-issue story offers a nice solo story for the character before getting her involved in the next big Batman event. The costume, inspired by Catwoman's look in Batman: The Animated Series with a twist of adding the boots from the character's 80s comic costume, works well here and hopefully we haven't seen the last of it.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Catwoman (2018) #25

Sep 24, 2020

Sadly, none of the three stories here offer the costume we saw Catwoman don in the previous two issues of the series. Instead, Selina is back to more modern take on her costume in a series of stories that entertains but doesn't offer more than momentary distraction.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Catwoman (2018) #57

Sep 28, 2023

Taking place in part of the ongoing "Gotham War arc, Catwoman continues her bizarre Dickensian plan to solve crime in Gotham with the help of many, many thieves and Red Hood.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Catwoman (2018) #59

Nov 29, 2023

Along with an odd tattoo, these lives provide Catwoman a chance to push the limits further than she ever has before with death not to be feared. While allowing the character to head in new directions, the concept is more than a little odd, especially with this The Cat Goddess lurking on the other side of the veil.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Catwoman: Lonely City (2021) #1

Oct 23, 2021

Less than thrilled by the changes to the city, and still haunted by the past, Selina struggles to fit in calling on old friends and finding it much harder to perform her rooftop antics after a decade in prison. She does have a mystery to solve, and a final word from a dying Batman all those years ago. Can Catwoman become the hero that the new Gotham City needs her to be?

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Charlie's Angels vs. The Bionic Woman #1

Jul 9, 2019

While I'm not wild about the art by Soo Lee, and the first issue takes its sweet time in getting our characters together, there's enough here to likely appeal to most fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Charlies Angels (2018) #1

Jul 6, 2018

Charlie's Angels #1 is lightweight but enjoyable and should please fans of the show. If it can latch on, I wonder if we'll see various teams of Angels or always the original three. Either way, writer John Layman and artist Joe Eisma provide some nostalgic fun. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Charlies Angels (2018) #2

Aug 1, 2018

Once again its Kelly who gets the attention of the eligible bachelors (although since she cripples the guy, who turns out to be one of the good guys undercover as a Soviet agent, maybe Jill and Sabrina are the lucky ones for not turning his head before drawing their guns?). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Checkmate (2021) #1

Jun 25, 2021

Despite DC's tagline that its greatest detectives are behind the new Checkmate, we see no appearance of either Batman nor Detective Chimp (c'mon, can you really say the “best” detectives without including these two?). The first issue gives us Talia and Damian captured by Leviathan while the other members of the team look to piece together information and form a plan of attack. We also get some flashbacks to Shaw originally working his way into Leviathan as the first step of a master plan.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Checkmate (2021) #2

Aug 2, 2021

We also get more of Green Arrow and the Question working together for Checkmate which is quickly becoming one of the comic's more amusing pairings.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Checkmate (2021) #3

Aug 31, 2021

It's good to see Damian get a larger role here, which I'd expect to see expanded in the remaining issues, especially once Talia's true objectives come to light.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Checkmate (2021) #4

Oct 5, 2021

Although he appears in the cover, we don't get much from Superman here other than acting as a sounding board for his wife and helping Lois Lane make a discovery which seems important (but I'm not sure how it fits into this storyline). The issue ends on a cliffhanger where Leviathan comes after Checkmate suggesting things are finally heating up.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Checkmate (2021) #5

Nov 2, 2021

Lois Lane is fairing a bit better with the sudden appearance of a brother she never knew about, but the “Snowman's Ticket” is still a git of a mystery, except, perhaps to Mark Shaw.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Checkmate (2021) #6

Nov 30, 2021

Mark Shaw has been defeated but Leviathan remains, and, as the Checkmate members discuss, it might be a far more dangerous organization than it ever was with a former hero running it. With Leviathan still very much a threat, it appears our heroes will be sticking around, which also apparently includes King whose true identity is finally revealed.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Chilling Adventures In Sorcery (2021) #1

Nov 10, 2021

I was a bit surprised there weren't more stories here, expecting to see various other classic Archie characters. In “Living On, Part Time” Archie takes a job as a security guard at the Riverdale Arcade which turns out to be full of monsters in what's hard not to see rip-off of Willy's Wonderland. And in “Midnight Shack” the overeating Jughead is eaten by the leftovers he brought home.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Cinderella: Fables are Forever #1

Feb 16, 2011

Although there's not a ton of action in this first issue, we do see Cinderella's spy skills at work as well as learn the identity of the assassin she seeks. I'm not sure how this is going to play out, but it's a strong first issue that will make me take a look at next month's as well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Cinderella: Fables are Forever #2

Mar 21, 2011

I've also got to compliment Shawn McManus' art which fits the story by perfectly capturing the different locales and time periods the story covers. I particularly like the artist's closeups on the characters capturing various expressions over the course of the issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Cinderella: Fables are Forever #3

Apr 20, 2011

The confrontation with the Chiss (think giant porcupine) has a satisfactory, even humorous, conclusion and Cinderella decides the only way to track down the elusive assassin is to put herself inside spider's den. The spy has made herself the bait, but that's fine with me. I'm ready to go wherever she wants to lead. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Cinderella: Fables are Forever #6

Jul 27, 2011

Although I think it's a good that the series was limited to six issues, I wouldn't mind seeing Cinderella return (preferably without Dorothy) for a new adventure next year. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Civil War II #1

Jun 9, 2016

While nowhere near as interesting or nuanced as the first Civil War, there's at least an interesting idea at the center of the comic (although I'm not sure it's strong enough to rip the entire Marvel Universe in half). However, how that idea is implemented, including having the biggest battle of the comic (so big it takes the lives of not one but two Avengers) take place entirely off-panel feels like a slap in the face to fans (not to mention the death sentence to the characters chosen to thin the herd – each of whom deserved better). Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Civil War II #2

Jun 22, 2016

Two issues into the event, the sides are slowly being drawn but the issue of what exactly they are fighting over still feels ill-defined (especially compared to Marvel's first Civil War) or what Tony risks a super-powered war for here. And since apparently none of the Avengers have ever read or watched science fiction they are completely unprepared for the concept of a self-fulfilling prophecy as Ulysses' latest vision suggest the Hulk will destroy the Avengers. But by sending Danvers after him has Ulysses just caused the events to occur (where no intervention on the heroes' part might have let Marvel Comics' big green brute slumber)? Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Civil War II: X-Men #1

Jun 20, 2016

Neither friends nor enemies, at least for this issue, the two groups work together to prevent the slaughter of mutants. With Magneto back in his more familiar role as the leader of a more extreme group of mutants, the question left at the end of this issue is what happens now that one of Marvel's most powerful characters has become aware of an Inhuman with the ability to tell the future? Likely nothing good. Oh, and Cyclops? Still dead. Sigh. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Cobra #9

Jan 26, 2012

That said, there's plenty of action here, and Snake Eyes and his team to take center stage for the first few pages. We also get Rattlers! Rattlers!! Okay, it's certainly not a must-read but fans of the characters should get their money's worth here. And it even has a Snake Eyes variant cover. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Codename: Action #1

Sep 15, 2013

I have mixed feelings about Jonathan Lau's art, but the action scenes definitely have a spy flavor to them and work better than the less action-packed panels. With Operative 1001′s graduation assignment, the car chase, and an aerial training manuever by a bevy of French female spies, there's plenty of action for a comic with the word in its title. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Codename: Action #2

Oct 16, 2013

Issue #2 once again captures the feel of a cold war spy tale that also gives us an unexpected cameo from the Green Hornet and Kato that plays on larger themes of the comic but still seems a bit out of place. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Codename: Action #3

Nov 21, 2013

Codename: Action #3, as a middle issue in a six-issue mini-series, works in continuing to push the storyline forward. The lethal combination of Black Venus and Operative 1001 should cause some problems for the mysterious enemy organization known as Hexagon. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Codename: Action #4

Jan 2, 2014

Codename: Action #4 ends with a late reveal and a cliffhanger that suggests Dr. Thorpe has his own agenda outside the plans of Hexagon as the mini-series moves into its final two issues with our heroes coming face-to-face with the series' true face of evil. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Conan the Cimmerian #25

Dec 2, 2010

It's far from great, but this issue is well told from the perspective of Conan's companion Olivia as they journey through the jungle. Conan faces off against a “Great Ape” (and slices off its arm in true Skywalker fashion) before taking possession of a pirate ship and its crew. So.. the next comic is going to be Conan the Pirate? Now that I think about it, maybe I've given Conan just the right amount of attention. What can I say, I prefer my barbarians to have Mok sidekicks and fabulous Sun-Swords. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Convergence #0

Apr 9, 2015

After reading Convergence #0 I have more doubt about the event and whether the number of writers and artists tasked can get the right feel for the various characters. I have no doubt there will be gems to be discovered over the course of multiple months but after this incredibly overpriced $5 kick-off issue I'm less sure about the overall event. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Convergence: Batgirl #1

Apr 10, 2015

It also doesn't help that Convergence: Batgirl #1 might be the worst drawn mainstream super-hero comic I've ever read. The characters are ill-defined looking more lack slap-dashed artist sketches than a finished product, and the inking and coloring is haphazard resulting in numerous panels that appear out of focus. What the hell, DC? Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Convergence: Batman and the Outsiders #1

Apr 27, 2015

Given how many characters the comic has to introduce it does a pretty good job (although once the dome falls, like most every Convergence title, things get less interesting very fast as Mortal Kombat begins). One odd note: Although the cover of the issue gets Batman's look right the art inside makes a major mistake not arming the classically-clad Caped Crusader in his classic utility belt of the time. Considering the look of the old characters is the major selling point for the series it's distracting. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Convergence: Booster Gold #1

May 9, 2015

The structure of the story, not centered around an entire year without powers as so many of the Convergence tie-ins have been, is a nice change but the comic does loose points for blatantly refusing to give us a recognizable pre-New 52 Booster in all his glory. On the plus side Booster's jumping willy-nilly gets the New 52 version beat up by the Legion of Super-Heroes and reunites the other Booster with an old friend. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Convergence: Harley Quinn #2

May 18, 2015

Convergence: Harley Quinn #2 teases a dangerosly dark New 52-ish twist, but thankfully Pugh and Winslade know their audience and allow the issue not to end on a dark note but with Harley and the Captain sharing a moment of camaraderie together that's as strange as every other piece of this issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Convergence: Shazam #1

May 4, 2015

Although the writing and basic set-up of so many Convergence issues has, more often than not, led to disappointment, Convergence: Shazam! #1 is certainly on of DC's event's stronger issues as the return of the magic lighning comes none to soon to save Billy, Mary, and Freddy Freeman from a group of the Marvel Family‘s classic foes. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Convergence: Shazam #2

Jun 8, 2015

With Convergence over I'm hoping this isn't the last we see of the Marvel Family's alternative Earth (which is far more interesting than most of the New 52). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Convergence: Speed Force #1

Apr 14, 2015

Although I'm not sure I'm ready to see the Flash take on the Flashpoint version of Wonder Woman next issue, I am excited to see Wally and Fastback team-up. Unlike Convergence: Batgirl #1 this issue gets the feel of its characters right. (Plus I'm all in favor of throwing the Zoo Crew as much love as possible.) Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Courtney Crumrin #10

Mar 6, 2013

With the main character a little lost, and having to be reintroduced to her world, the issue works well as an introduction to Courtney and her world and delivers a pretty good tale. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Criminal (2019) #1

Jan 16, 2019

The comic is packed with story, including the old man's story and Teeg's flashbacks which help fill in some backstory and context for the events which are currently unfolding. There's more than a whiff of desperation hovering over Teeg as the comic unfolds, as even the small comfort he takes in the arms of his former friend's girl fails to satisfy (as eventually he ends up battered, bruised, ticked off, and pissing on his old friend's grave). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Damian: Son of Batman #1

Nov 8, 2013

I'm not sure that I'l stick with the mini-series until the end (especially as the final couple of panels suggest the story taking a bizarre left-turn as soon as the beginning of issue #2), but for fans of the character the first-quarter of Kubert's story is an interesting read. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Damian: Son of Batman #2

Dec 8, 2013

The confusion aside, the comic does give us Damian donning the costume for the “first” time, but the moment lacks any real gravitas (although I liked the “nice coat” comment the new Batman gets while jumping into action chasing a sighting of the Joker later in the issue). Andy Kubert delivers some moments, but the entire issue feels like a train wreck. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Daredevil (1998) #511

Oct 21, 2010

How dumb is Shadowland? The ridiculousness of Foggy Nelson getting through the riots, the cops, the ninja and into the belly of the beast (so to speak) doesn't even rank on the most absurd moments of this storyline. For a Shadowland comic this one's not bad, but then again that's a pretty low standard. Here where given a Daredevil comic where Daredevil (even a demon-infested one) makes only a token appearance.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2011) #1

Jul 27, 2011

The first issue is a good re-introduction to the character plopping the Murdock right back into his old life (even if it does skirt the consequences of Shadowland). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2011) #2

Aug 24, 2011

The issue also includes a fun conversation between Foggy Nelson and Kirsten McDuffie and Daredevil trying to hunt down who is behind the railroading of Ahmed Jobrani. Sadly, I'm less impressed with the issue's reveal of the first big bad of the series. I've never been a fan of Klaw. Sure, a “master of sound” makes for an intriguing villain for Daredevil, but I've always found him fairly ridiculous. The second issue isn't without a misstep or two, but it does have its moments. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2011) #3

Sep 21, 2011

The real fun of this issue, however, comes in the conversations between Matt Murdock and Foggy Nelson as the figure out a way for their client to win his case, talk with some attractive women at a local watering hole (careful, they might be super-villains), and decide the new direction of their law practice. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2011) #4

Sep 25, 2011

In terms of larger context you could probably skip this issue and not miss anything all that important to the ongoing storyline but that doesn't mean you should. There's plenty here worth picking up including a very cool cover by Paolo Rivera featuring Daredevil swinging through a city scape made of guns. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2011) #5

Nov 2, 2011

The B-story involves Foggy‘s attempt to convince his new girlfriend's roommate that Matt Murdock isn't Daredevil. His argument is less than successful until he comes up with either the smartest or dumbest idea the character has ever had. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2011) #6

Dec 5, 2011

Whether or not these vast terrorists organizations coming together (or being willing to give their data up to their competitors) is feasible, the comic works well in wrapping up this story arc and painting a bright new target on Daredevil's back. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2011) #7

Dec 26, 2011

There's also a great opening scene between Matt Murdock and Kristen McDuffie at the Nelson & Murdock holiday party where the lawyer shows up in horns and a red and white hoodie proclaiming he's no super-hero. I think the kids would disagree. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2011) #8

Jan 23, 2012

Although I'm not sure how the missing corpse of Matt Murdock's father is going to play into the next story arc I did like how learning about it derailed Daredevil's make-out session with the Black Cat. The pair could make an okay couple swinging over rooftops but I'm having trouble seeing Matt Murdock and Felicia Hardy together anywhere outside of the (probably very steamy) bedroom. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil (2011) #9

Feb 20, 2012

Don't get me wrong, I still enjoyed the issue, and I'm sure writer Mark Waid's explanation into the Mole Man's behavior is a good one. I'm just hoping the arc ends quickly and get back to the Black Cat and the mysterious FF artifact everyone is after. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2011) #10

Apr 11, 2012

Is it necessary to pick this up? The answer, along with all of Marvel's .1 issues, is no (that's how they are designed). However, it's darn good storytelling with some great art by Khoi Pham, so, yeah, it's worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2011) #11

May 1, 2012

Even with the pairing of this unlikely threesome the adventure itself isn't all that memorable. However, it is punctuated by some nice dialogue between Spidey and Daredvil and some strong opening internal monologue from the man without fear. It's also got some terrific art by Marco Checchetto. Month after month, even with a revolving group of artists, Daredvevil continues to be one of the best looking comics around. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2011) #12

May 9, 2012

The story works well, and the irony isn't lost on Kristen as Daredevil talks about how he used to be “a little bit smug” back then. The story works to allow both Kristen and new readers to gain insight into the history of the Nelson & Murdock. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2011) #13

May 21, 2012

The issue seems to wrap-up the Omega Drive storyline, at least until the epilogue where Daredevil finds himself transported to Latveria against his will. Next month should see a pretty good matchup of Daredevil vs. Doctor Doom as well as let us in on what Foggy was shocked to find in Matt's desk. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil (2011) #14

Jun 25, 2012

The latest issue reminded me of D.O.A. with Daredevil standing in for Dennis Quaid‘s character (not a good thing). The purposeful further teasing of what Foggy found, and a profound decision for the character, makes me care even less about the subplot that I did when it was introduced last month. Still worth a look, but this issue feels far too much like filler.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Daredevil (2011) #15

Jul 25, 2012

However, I am interested to see what lingering (if any) effects from this arc may show up down the line, and I am looking forward to (finally) getting the skinny on Foggy‘s beef with Matt that was teased but not explained months ago. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Daredevil (2011) #16

Aug 7, 2012

Foggy's extreme overreaction to a single event that's so obviously a set-up (especially given his history with Matt) doesn't make any sense, nor does his irrational belief (backed by no observable evidence) that Matt is somehow suffering and hiding it from those who love him. The opening story is certainly worth a look, but the comic ends on such an odd note (which will no doubt have ramifications for months, even years, to come) that I simply can't bring myself to recommend it. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2011) #17

Aug 22, 2012

Although the issue doesn't come close to resolving the pieces put into motion last issue, Waid delivers a strong (if somewhat sappy) story that's certainly worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2011) #18

Sep 26, 2012

The issue delivers another terrific cover, and the art inside considers to vary from issue to issue with rotating artists continually given the comic a slightly different look. I don't think this is artist Chris Samnee's best work, but the action sequences look good as do the panels of Daredevil's vision. The next issue promises a big reveal, but this issue promised an introduction of a new villain it didn't deliver, so I'll cross my fingers that the crazy Daredevil storyline's days are numbers. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2011) #19

Oct 23, 2012

Meanwhile, with the help of Henry Pym, Daredevil makes a discovery that leads him to search out the C-list villain he believes is behind his life falling apart only to discover he's not a C-lister anymore. Daredevil might not be crazy, but no his life is in the hands of a madman, and, should he escape, he'll have an entire city's police force hunting him down. The man without fear has had better days. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Daredevil (2011) #20

Nov 28, 2012

The Coyote story works far better, although bringing up (and showing) human trafficking as one of Coyote's new interests does feel a little unseemly for what has been up until now a pretty safe all-ages book. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Daredevil (2011) #21

Dec 22, 2012

I like the idea of Spider-Man guest-starring in the next issue, but with what writer Dan Slott is doing with the character I'm pretty sure it's going to be far less enjoyable than the Spidey & Black Cat crossover from earlier this year. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil (2011) #22

Jan 21, 2013

This issue features Daredevil vs. pseudo-Spider-Man who was sicked on Daredevil by Kristen McDuffie. The pair break it up long enough to take on an enhanced Stilt-Man before finally making peace with one another. Mark Waid also throws in an alternate explanation for Foggy Nelson‘s recent behavior. Although no more logical, it does open the door for an entirely new story for Daredevil and his best friend. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2011) #23

Feb 25, 2013

We're still no closer to the reveal of who is behind the attacks on Daredevil, although knowing the exact details of the accident which caused his blindness and enhanced senses narrows the field considerably. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2011) #24

Mar 27, 2013

The only real action we get is a gift basket sent to Nelson & Murdock by Daredevil's unseen enemy containing blind hyper-sensitive dogs who nearly destroy the entire office. It's a fun, though certainly not action-packed, issue which fans of the character should enjoy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Daredevil (2011) #25

Apr 24, 2013

Trying to use his experience to win the fight, Daredevil changes the venue only to discover he and Ikari aren't as evenly matched as he believed. The assassin has one more ace up his sleeve. The comic ends with Daredevil beaten, but spared (at least for now) leading into the next double-sized issue dealing with Foggy‘s surgery and, hopefully, the man behind the curtain pulling Ikari's strings. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2011) #26

May 27, 2013

The extra-sized comic also includes an unnecessary back-up story involving Foggy's time in the hospital. It has a nice message but feels tacked on mainly to boost the pages, and price tag, of the latest issue. Worth a look (for the main story).

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2011) #27

Jul 5, 2013

Daredevil #27 very much focuses on the hero out-thinking his opponents rather than using his enhanced skill-set to take them down. Because of this, and the quick wrap-up, we're left questioning whether Daredevil can actually beat Ikari and just who that masked man really is. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2011) #28

Jul 18, 2013

The issue ends in bizarre fashion as the Sons of the Serpent make sure Hackett doesn't give away any privileged information about their society by having the judge shoot the defendant in the middle of the courtroom. I was thrown off a little by these last few panels, but I trust that Waid knows where he's going. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2011) #29

Aug 8, 2013

Even if Daredevil gets out of the situation a little too cleanly (you'd think there would be a mountain of red tape to cut through after things died down) Waid delivers a tense issue that also foreshadows Murdock's new temporary partner. I know I have my guess as to her identity. What's yours? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2011) #30

Aug 26, 2013

In an age when nearly everything being written is planned in advance to put out in a single arc trade paperback one-shots like this are a dying breed. And that's too bad, because Waid and artist Chris Samnee prove how good such issues can be. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Daredevil (2011) #31

Sep 23, 2013

The ants are cool, as is the nice hospital sequence as Foggy tries to inspire other patients with Daredevil's example. However, once again the ridiculous behind-the-scenes power of the Sons of the Serpent storyline doesn't quite work for me, and, surprisingly, several panels from artist Chris Samnee look uncharacteristically rushed and not up to snuff. The cliffhanger ending hinting and the suicide of Foggy feels equally half-assed. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil (2011) #32

Oct 30, 2013

The comic ends with Daredevil interrupting a good ‘ol Southern lynch mob only to later realize the group is after actual monsters and he may have chosen the wrong side. The result is a somewhat forced Halloween adventure that ends in yet another cliffhanger and more trouble and no new answers for our hero. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil (2011) #33

Nov 29, 2013

Like the last issue, Daredevil #33 is weird and goofy adventure but I thought the humor worked better this time around. Daredevil's right of passage to get to Sinclair works well, as does the panel showing the pissed off hero finally confronting the wizard. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2011) #34

Dec 24, 2013

Although the tone is upbeat and Daredevil manages to get a victory while sidestepping disaster, it's obvious from the last couple of panels that the final two issues of the series are likely to be far darker as the fate of Foggy Nelson will finally be decided (and apparently the news isn't good). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2011) #35

Jan 22, 2014

Given the huge ramifications of this move, which is made mostly to spite a evil organization I've never fully bought into, I'm going to withhold final judgement until we see where this takes the character (other than to the West Coast). As to the final fate of Foggy Nelson, we're given all the signs that next month's final issue may be his as well, but given the amount of attention which will have to be given to the fallout of Murdock's courtroom bombshell could there be even the slightest glimmer of hope that Foggy might make his way into the next series after all? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2011) #36

Feb 24, 2014

The final issue does its best to justify an unnecessary renumbering and reboot next month while providing a milestone in both of Murdock's chosen professions. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil (2011) Annual #1

Aug 12, 2012

I'm not sure it's worth $5 (in fact I'm pretty sure it's not), but given the struggle of the last couple of issues of Daredevil it's nice to see a different take on the character by a new writer. The highlight of the issue, at least for me, is the art of Mark Farmer who knows exactly how to draw the hero in action. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2014) #1

Mar 25, 2014

Daredevil #1 sets up the new series with McDuffie helping Murdock in both the courtroom and as an extra pair of eyes on the unfamiliar streets as the vigilante attempts to save a kidnapped girl who terrorists plan to use as a living bomb. My only real complaint with the issue how hard it works to stay away from the subject of Foggy Nelson before the inevitable tease of the outcome of his cancer treatment. And no, I'm not buying Waid and Samnee killed him off-panel. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2014) #1.50

Apr 16, 2014

Featuring back-up stories of Murdock's wife by Brian Michael Bendis by and artist Alex Maleev and wacky fake twin storyline in homage to the character's goofier period by writer/artist Karl Kesel, Daredevil #1.50 is a curiosity more than anything else offering a glimpse of what Waid might do with the character given no constraints and several decades. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2014) #2

Apr 30, 2014

A poor man's Daredevil in several respects, the Shroud is an interesting first choice to pit against the hero, although it does make me wonder how far Waid and Samnee will have to scrape the bottom of the Marvel barrel for West Coast threats going forward. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2014) #3

May 29, 2014

And, as expected, Waid and artist Chris Samnee confirm Foggy Nelson is still alive and in hiding for his own safety. Judging by the chance Foggy takes here (entering the law office in a flimsy disguise) it's a secret that won't stay buried for long. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2014) #4

Jun 24, 2014

Although Murdock counts the capture of the Owl as a win, Daredevil is unable to stop the villain from fulfilling his purpose (suggesting he's become an even greater threat), and fate of the Shroud's girlfriend is left very much up in the air. Victory? I'm not so sure. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2014) #5

Jul 15, 2014

Nothing is really gained by waiting until the fifth issue to explain events (other than getting that first trade paperback out the way), but the story Mark Waid tells is a nice moment for Foggy to shine and reminds us, through Foggy's eyes, just who Matt Murdock is. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2014) #8

Oct 3, 2014

Daredevil #8 also includes Matt Murdock meeting Kristen McDuffie‘s parents (and offered a book deal for his autobiography). McDuffie's a great character, but Waid's decision to tell fans she isn't the woman for Daredevil takes some of the fun out of these kinds of stories. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2014) #9

Oct 25, 2014

The only real surprise of this issue is the survival of the Purple Man. Will he and Daredevil form an unlikely team-up to stop the out-of-control children or will the villain be to busy savoring the fresh hell his kids are putting Matt Murdock through? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Daredevil (2015) #1

Dec 12, 2015

I'm glad to see Daredevil back in Hell's Kitchen but this first issue with all of its changes and D-list villain doesn't sell me on the new series just yet. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Daredevil (2015) #2

Jan 5, 2016

We'll see if the return of The Hand, and the legion of magic ninjas the group can bring to bear on both Tenfingers and the Man Without Fear, can breathe a little life into the new series. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2015) #6

May 2, 2016

The fight definitely delivers on brutal action as Daredevil isn't ready for the ferocious attack unleashed by the assassin. As to the final panel's reveal of just what Elektra is after, that's going to take some explanation (but for that we'll have to wait at least one more issue). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2015) #7

Jun 1, 2016

Given everything we learn in this issue turns out to be lies, Daredevil #7 feels a bit empty by the time the last page is turned.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2015) #9

Jul 19, 2016

Now that we know what Daredevil was after, let's see just how he plans to use it. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2015) #10

Aug 17, 2016

Although the world isn't crashing down on him must yet, events in Daredevil #10 do seem to bode ill for both Matt Murdock and his horny alter-ego. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2015) #11

Sep 15, 2016

As for the mysterious villain, it appears he was just getting started with the blood painting. A new macabre work of art is discovered involving the bodies of several people positioned in a full scale diorama. It's still unclear just what the artist is after. Publicity? Flaunting the police (and Daredevil's) inability to capture him? Or something more? As for Matt Murdock's day job, it will be interesting to see how far a man respecting justice above all else may be pushed before something eventually breaks. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Daredevil (2015) #12

Oct 17, 2016

For all but those who think Inhumans are the best thing ever, Daredevil #12 proves to be a detour best forgotten as no part of the overall story of tracking down the killer (whatever his name is) will be missed by completely ignoring this issue. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2015) #13

Nov 16, 2016

The latest volume of Daredevil made several changes to the character. Returning Dardevil to New York, to work as a prosecutor for the first time, the comic also introduced Blindspot as the Man Without Fear's protege. Cut-off from Blindspot and unable to offer the young hero anything more than a single piece of advice (Don't Die. Don't Let Anyone Else Die), Blindspot is left to fend for himself against a mass murder with delusions of a promising art career. The end of this issue suggests a tragic end for this arc and for the young hero. We will just have to wait and see whether Blindspot can surprise us one more time. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil (2015) #14

Dec 23, 2016

Daredevil and Blindspot may have won the battle against Muse, but the super-villains actions of blinding Blindspot seem to have given Muse the ultimate victory. We'll see if Inhuman science can do anything for the would-be super-hero, but for now Matt Murdock is left with a hollow victory which feels like failure. Then of course there will be the repercussions of all his super-heroing. Will his work at the District Attorney's office be the next thing to implode? For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil (2015) #17

Feb 21, 2017

Knowing it wasn't a deal with Mephisto or some mystical quick-fix from Doctor Strange narrows the list of possibilities. The reveal of the arc's villain may also be a major clue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Daredevil (2015) #18

Mar 21, 2017

The introduction of the Purple Man into a story about how Matt Murdock forced the world to forget about his secret identity as Daredevil makes one wonder if Daredevil wasn't able to use the villain's power to his own advantage. If true, did Daredevil actually mind-control the entire world? And, if so, what would the unintended ramifications of that be? Will have to wait to see how events unfold in the rest of this arc for Daredevil's secret to be revealed. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2015) #20

May 20, 2017

For now, however, Daredevil is back to his old self. Walking away from Kristen and pissing off Foggy, with his identity unknown our vigilante is back to his old tricks taking the fight to organized crime in New York. Now if we could just get him out of that black costume. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Daredevil (2019) #6

Jun 7, 2019

With no courtroom, no Foggy, and no Daredevil, there's something off here. Sure, writer Chip Zdarsky and Lalit Kumar Sharma present a readable story to kick off a new arc, but the Devil of Hell's Kitchen isn't the only thing that feels missing. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil (2022) #1

Jul 20, 2022

The rest of the issue, including Daredevil being interviewed by someone else in the near (far?) future and Elektra kicking Stick‘s ass for fun, sets up the challenges of taking the devil out of Hell's Kitchen. Oh, and also an old acquaintance of Matt's appears with bizarre unexplained powers and a knowledge of his secret, so, um. yeah, there's that too.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil (2022) #2

Aug 23, 2022

Despite the tease of her death, Kristen McDuffie turns out to have been spared Goldy's actions leaving us with a relieved Matt Murdock who still has plenty of questions about Goldy's insane actions and what is really driving him.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Daredevil (2022) #3

Sep 26, 2022

When he doesn't go looking for The Hand, The Hand comes for Daredevil who is attacked by Elektra‘s old friend Aka who our hero has trouble locating. Toying with Daredevil, it appears Aka is a true believer in The Hand and its prophecies which suggest whatever comes next will not be a pleasant experience for the Devil of Hell's Kitchen (but also maybe, just maybe, our story can finally get started).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2022) #5

Dec 1, 2022

The comic is filled with Daredevil's uncertainty of his actions, and where they will lead him, but none of that changes his plans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil (2022) #6

Dec 15, 2022

Aside from Elektra's antics, the rest of the comic picks up with Daredevil‘s attempts to rehabilitate the super-powered convicts he broke out of prison in the last issue. Let's just say it's a work in progress, and despite all his words of help he hasn't yet told a single one about the war he needs them for as canon fodder. As Daredevil's plans get off to a shaky start, they have at least caught the attention of his adversary.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil (2022) #7

Jan 17, 2023

3.5 Razors, Daredevil, Elektra

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil (2022) #9

Apr 10, 2023

Fine for what it is, but you won't miss anything skipping the title for a month.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Daredevil (2022) #12

Jun 13, 2023

Oh, Daredevil. You've jumped the shark.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Daredevil (2023) #1

Sep 20, 2023

At $7, its oddness isn't quite enough to sell me on the new chapter of Matt Murdock's life.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Daredevil: Dark Nights #1

Jun 11, 2013

The triple-obstacles of Matt Murdock's injury, the blizzard, and his amnesia (which also effects his acrobatic stunts) is a little much. I prefer Weeks art to the story, but there are enough nice touches here to not let me dismiss it out-of-hand. The first issue doesn't do enough to sell me on the new limited series, but it doesn't turn me off either. Depending on what else hits newsstands that week, I would consider picking up issue #2. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil: Dark Nights #2

Jul 10, 2013

That said, Lee Weeks art is once again solid but his writing is only slightly improved over the first issue although it's still clunky and hamfisted at times (especially involving danger or hope). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil: Dark Nights #4

Sep 10, 2013

After a mostly fun lighthearted affair I was a little sad to see the comic take such a dark turn on the final page. Although I'd recommend this issue, I'm not sure I like where the story is headed. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil: Dark Nights #5

Oct 5, 2013

Although the end is far too tidy (and convenient) for my tastes, and the second issue isn't as fun as the first, the mini-series second arc kept my interest all the way through the end (which is more than I can say for the first arc). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil: Dark Nights #6

Nov 12, 2013

I always enjoy Daredevil's various flirtations with a host of female and criminals who can't get enough of Daredevil (seriously, blind lawyer is like catnip for the super-hero/villain set). The sexual tension between the pair is obvious, and entertaining, as is the art by Thony Silas. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil: Dark Nights #7

Dec 10, 2013

There are some fun moments here, but the issue is really used to set-up the various conflicts in next month's finale. Although it hasn't been as good as Mark Waid‘s run on the regular title, I've enjoyed seeing other writers and artists play with the character over the past few months in these isolated tales. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Daredevil: Dark Nights #8

Jan 13, 2014

Daredevil: Dark Nights may not have delivered great stories over its eight-issue run, but the adventures of Matt Murdock had their moments and I'm sorry to see the series coming to an end as Marvel gears up to a big February relaunch of several of their core titles (including Daredevil). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil: Woman Without Fear #1

Jan 18, 2022

We don't actually get the confrontation teased at the end of Devil's Reign #2 as the comic comes to an end in relatively the same place with Elektra standing face-to-face with Kraven for the first time.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil: Woman Without Fear #2

Feb 9, 2022

The next issue should offer more of the pair going at it while Elektra's old mentor enjoys the show. And now Elektra has the Thunderbolts to worry about as well. The longer tale, should she survive, we see teased as the possibility of Elektra and Daredevil teaming up to take out out the Hand. To get there, however, first she must survive Kraven and Devil's Reign.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Daredevil: Woman Without Fear #3

Mar 9, 2022

The action is fast and furious here, and when Kraven falls Aka appears with a threat from the Hand. However, helping explain the large amount of the Elektra/Daredevil flashbacks we've seen over three issues, the news of Matt Murdock‘s apparent death (off-panel) rocks Elektra's world and sends the assassin exactly where the Hand has wanted her all this time – enraged and vengeful after Wilson Fisk.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Dark Crisis on Infinite Earths (2022) #1

Jun 14, 2022

While there is certainly chaos left behind in the wake of the absence of Superman, Batman, Wonder Woman, and the others, Dark Crisis doesn't feel like much of a Crisis event so far. As for Beast Boy, poor Gar deserved better than to get sacrificed to raise the stakes of an event that's already killed off nearly a dozen heroes before it got started. In terms of the Darkness, we also do get some foreshadowing of Pariah's mad plans which both the heroes and villains seem oblivious to. Oh, and who the hell is dressing up as Batman in Gotham City?

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Dark Knight III: The Master Race #1

Dec 10, 2015

The most interesting aspect of the story isn't Carrie play-acting as Batman and beating up cops (for apparently no reason whatsoever) but the small story of Lara bringing Ray Palmer the bottled city of Kandor. The ramifications of that pairing are truly intriguing and so rich they belong in an entirely different comic. To bad the rest is mostly filler. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Dark Wolverine #86

May 26, 2010

I understand the appeal of a character who can do anything at the drop of a hat, but it seems a bit odd to me that of all the characters from Dark Reign it's Daken who is getting to keep his own book. It would be as if DC gave the Joker his own comic (wait, they did that). Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Darkwing Duck #4

Sep 26, 2010

All in all, not too shabby. Oh, and did I mention we finally get an appearance of NegaDuck, too? Darkwing and the gang save the day, but it appears more evil is lurking in the shadows. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Darkwing Duck #8

Jan 24, 2011

Crazy fun all around, and once again the comic delivers with yet another very cool old school Batman-inspired variant cover (this one by Diego Jourdan).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Darkwing Duck #9

Feb 23, 2011

Throw in the funny opening with the Duck Draper (which goes over as badly as you'd expect) as well as the reactions of both Gosalyn and Morgana Macawber to being taken for granted, and there's more than enough here that's worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Darkwing Duck #10

Mar 22, 2011

Issue #10 is filled with cover-to-cover action, great humor, and some terrific visuals. Definite Must-Read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Darkwing Duck #11

Apr 27, 2011

We'll have to wait another month for the conclusion of the Duckthulu arc. I've enjoyed this storyline, but I'm ready for a new story arc. Even if this issue can't quite live up to the insane level of awesome of last month it's still definitely worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Darkwing Duck #13

Jun 21, 2011

Never fear! Darkwing manages to pull himself together and save the city (and Gosalyn, who has gotten herself captured by the crazy former pitcher). Our hero also decides on a questionable new course of action that may prove to be his downfall. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Darkwing Duck #14

Jul 25, 2011

I'm really enjoying these shorter tales, held together loosely by Darkwing's decision to run for mayor, as writer Ian Brill's last couple of four-issue story arcs began to lose a little steam near their conclusion. And once again artist James Silvani provides some of my favorite art in comics right now matching some visual jokes (and a couple of sly cameos) to go hand in hand with Brill's insanely fun tale. Great fun all around. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Darkwing Duck #15

Aug 23, 2011

Once again writer Ian Brill and artist James Silvani outdo themselves in creating an insanely fun read (with extra insanity). If you aren't reading Darkwing Duck you're missing out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Darkwing Duck #16

Sep 26, 2011

The final pages of the issue also introduce our villains for the series final two issues: Magica and The Phantom Blot (based on the classic Disney character and enemy to Mickey Mouse). The new story arc will continue in a crossover in the next issue of Duck Tales (also ending in a couple of months) before returning next month for the series' penultimate issue. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Darkwing Duck #17

Oct 21, 2011

That said, there's still plenty to make this one an easy recommendation. Next month will see the final two issues of the crossover, and the final issue of Darkwing Duck, hit comic shops. I'm going to be sad to see it go. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Darkwing Duck #18

Nov 13, 2011

I'll miss you DW and here's hoping Marvel (whenever they get around to putting out a new title) gives us a comic half as good as the one Boom delivered every single month. For those who haven't kept up with the series I definitely recommend picking up the trade paperbacks and enjoying some of the most fun there's been in comics this past year-and-a-half. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Darkwing Duck Annual #1

Mar 8, 2011

Not all annuals are worth picking up (in fact some I wouldn't even use to line a birdcage), but this one delivers. The main story continues the wacky fun of the new series, and I got a kick at seeing the original creator of the show get dangerous one more time (if only for a few pages). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Darkwing Duck (2023) #1

Jan 31, 2023

While I don't think Carlo Lauro's version of the characters has quite the same pop that James Silvani provided, he still captures the classic feel of the show with plenty of monologuing and shameless self-promoting from our hero provided by writer Amanda Deibert.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Darkwing Duck (2023) #2

Mar 2, 2023

The issue is full of Darkwing fighting off toys, primarily a wave of rubber duckies, while struggling to keep Gosalyn safe (more on that later) and finally subdue Quackerjack. It's just the kind of wacky fun fans of the character expect and I'll admit to enjoying Lauro's art more in this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Darkwing Duck (2023) #3

Mar 20, 2023

Following up the events at the end of the last issue, Darkwing Duck #3 offers new trouble for the city of St. Canard but no Darkwing Duck in sight.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Darkwing Duck (2023) #4

Apr 26, 2023

Darkwing Duck #4 has some more odd couple moments for Darkwing and Morgana, a showdown with Bushroot which shows off improvements our hero has made to his gas gun in his spare time, and even pulls Launchpad back into the group in the epilogue effectively resetting the staus quo once again. While still feeling unappreciated by the city he protects, the terror that flaps in the night has returned to St. Canard.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Darkwing Duck (2023) #6

Jul 11, 2023

The amount of cameos eventually overshadow any storyline, but fans of the characters will get some enjoyment from seeing them all collected here.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Darkwing Duck (2023) #7

Jul 31, 2023

Whether you are picking up just this one issue or plan to stick around for what follows, you should have a good time.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Darkwing Duck (2023) #8

Aug 29, 2023

Darkwing Duck #8 is a fun middle issue to a larger tale fueled by the heroes' inability to get along.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Darkwing Duck (2023) #9

Oct 13, 2023

The search for Launchpad's missing compass continues without any new leads as Darkwing Duck #9 offers a middle issue in the larger arc primarily centered around the terror who flaps in the night getting more and more agitated. However, news of a crime spree in St. Canard forces Darkwing Duck back home where the new thefts shine a light on his search.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
DC / Hanna-Barbera: Super Sons/Dynomutt Special #1

Jun 8, 2018

Something more along the tone of Scooby-Doo! Team-Up would have made a far more obvious (and fun) choice over this bizarre entry. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
DC / Hanna-Barbera: Booster Gold/The Flinstones #1

Apr 3, 2017

Equally odd is the comic's back-up story involving the re-imagined Jetsons who, once again, bare little resemblance to the TV characters from whom they take their name. If you, like me, are picking up the comic for some wacky Booster Gold action, you should have fun. If you are hoping for recognizable versions of the Hanna-Barbara cartoons, however, you will likely be disappointed. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
DC / Hanna-Barbera: Green Lantern/Space Ghost #1

Apr 5, 2017

The issue works for the unusual team-up of Space Ghost and Hal Jordan, both while fighting each other and, for a short period of time, using each other's technology. The story's lack of subtlety gets in the way, but the art by Christopher Sebela is pretty damn good. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
DC Super Hero Girls: Infinite Frenemies (2020) #2

May 6, 2020

With the arrival of Livewire (who is angry over having her job of DJ usurped by Batgirl), the girls' the dresses are swapped for the heroes' regular clothing for a battle with the super-villain. The comic ends in your expected super battle, with a cute epilogue of the girls discussing how much they still enjoyed the evening. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
DC Universe: Rebirth #1

May 30, 2016

While the Watchmen integration is getting most of the mainstream press, I'm far more interested in the promise that Johns delivers with embracing the large corners of a wider DCU and giving readers more hopeful tales in the future. I know this is only a single issue, but after putting down DC Universe: Rebirth #1 I'm more hopeful than I've been about DC Comics than I have been since Bryan Q. Miller‘s Batgirl run. You lit the spark Mr. Johns, now lets hope the writers and artists to follow have a clear path about where to take this new version of the DCU (unlike what happened five years ago). You've delivered the best DC Comics' issue in years; don't screw it up. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Dead Boy Detectives (2014) #1

Jan 7, 2014

Although I found the elaborate heist/performance art involving Crystal's parents that opens the issue a bit hard to follow, Dead Boy Detectives #1 offers up a strong first issue to reintroduce out both characters and give them an excuse to return to school that destroyed and ended each of their lives. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Dead Boy Detectives (2014) #2

Feb 9, 2014

Charles RowlandandEdwin Painealso are surprised to see how good Crystal is at snooping already uncovering more about their deaths in a few days than they two have found in years. Does this mean a proper team-up is in order? And just what hell will be unleashed once others discover their snooping? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Dead of Winter #1

Aug 8, 2017

Is Dead of Winter: Good Good Dog a comic I'm likely to stick with? No, not really. However, for a single issue I was entertained. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Deadpool (2008) #27

Sep 19, 2010

Deadpool, Secret Avenger. Hmmm…

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Deadpool (2008) #37

Jun 1, 2011

As an idea, this one works fine for a single issue, although I'm not sure we need to see it continue for another month. Still, there's fun and plenty of insanity to be had here. And isn't that what you want from a Deadpool comic?

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Deadpool (2008) #47

Dec 11, 2011

The rest of the comic about Evil Deadpool taking a job to kill a kid, and regular Deadpool (using his weird-ass logic) deciding to kidnap a totally different kid at gunpoint to draw out both his evil twin and Captain America, is certainly bizarre, but isn't anywhere near as much fun. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Deadpool (2008) Annual #1

May 11, 2011

It's not for everyone, but Deadpool fans should get exactly (no more, no less) what they expect. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Deadpool (2012) #11

Jun 22, 2013

The logic of a good Daredevil story has never been as important and the humor and wackiness, and this issue has both in spades. I particularly like the instance where Daredevil calls out Matt Murdock on labeling anyone else crazy based on Daredevil's own questionable decisions. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Deadpool (2022) #1

Nov 15, 2022

The comic isn't quite as wacky as the flavor I prefer in my Deadpool stories, nor bloody, but it is weird and bizarre story with the time of Deadpool's contract ticking down while he's being turned into a living petri dish. There's enough to keep my interest, but not necessarily enough to bring me back for issue #2.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Deadpool (2022) #3

Jan 24, 2023

We also get Doc Ock and Harrower causing mayhem at a bar and later the zoo and various other interludes of people talking about how they want Deadpool dead. It's certainly weird Deadpool storytelling, including various Harrower mutated creations along with all of the symbiote stuff, but there's not enough here to keep my interest or any reason to stick around to see how any of this eventually pays off.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool Team-Up #883

Apr 6, 2011

Deadpool also gets a chance to test out his Power Cosmic against that of Galactus' first herald, the Silver Surfer, who is none too happy with the carnage Deadpool has unleashed. Deadpool might be all over the Marvel Universe, but this is consistently his best book. The final panel alone makes this one worth picking up. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Deadpool Team-Up #889

Sep 26, 2010

The latest team-up pits Deadpool and Gorilla Man against each other by a beautiful damsel in distress who, it turns out, may not actually be in distress, or beautiful, or, in fact, a damsel. Don't you hate it when that happens?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Deadpool: Black, White & Blood #1

Aug 11, 2021

Fans of Deadpool should enjoy the various antics found in these disconnected tales involving some unusual cameos, the character's obsessive compulsions, and a lot of blood.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool: Black, White & Blood #3

Oct 12, 2021

Both Deadpool and Bullseye are hired for an assassinations and fight through ninjas, sharks with freakin' lazer beams mounted to their heads, diseased monkeys, and zombies in “The Bet” which includes a surprise appearance of another Marvel character. And in“The Perfect Ones” Usagi Yojimbo creator Stan Sakai shows us how Deadpool found his perfect weapons.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Deadpool: Black, White & Blood #4

Nov 16, 2021

The best story turns out to be “Cherry,” in which Deadpool accepts a job to deal with creature loose in the one of A.I.M.‘s evil laboratories on a volcano. The monster? A cross between the Kool-Aid Man and a dinosaur which turns out to be far more articulate than you'd expect. Dammit, Karl!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Death of Hawkman #1

Oct 7, 2016

While I'm still on the fence with artist's Aaron Lopresti version of Hawkman (which has a bit too much New 52 influence for my tastes), I love the look of Adam Strange here. As the series turns darker with the looming war I'm a little afraid some of the magic and fun on display may fade, but there's enough in these pages to at least get me back for one more issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Death of Hawkman #2

Nov 10, 2016

The other piece of the comic focuses primarily on Hawkman, pointing out the qualities which made him a hero on Earth weren't always respected or appreciated on his home planet. Back on his home planet, the comic ends with Hawkman being approached by Adam Strange to get to the truth of the attack on Rann, the mystery of who has been skulking around and messing with his life, and hopefully preventing the heating up of hostilities between the two heroes' homes. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Defenders (2011) #1

Dec 9, 2011

As a first issue of The Defenders works well by introducing us to the various members and providing a threat reasonable (if admittedly kind of dumb) enough to force them together. Still, it's got some funny bits and the Silver Surfer, which should be enough to get me to buy the next issue or two. However, unless the threat of the month, the art, (or preferably both) improve in the next couple of months, I'm not sure how long I'll stay with this version of The Defenders.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Defenders (2011) #2

Jan 5, 2012

The second issue is still worth picking up on a very slow week in comics, but despite being my only chance to get a Silver Surfer comic every month (don't even get me started on Matt Fraction‘s version of the character in The Mighty Thor) this month's issue does nothing to convince me that this comic will be worth picking up every single month. Only two issues in, The Defenders feels much more like an occasional read. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Defenders (2021) #1

Aug 23, 2021

Defenders #1 offers the kind of weird set-up you would expect from a Defenders title. I'm happy to see the Surfer here, although I'm unsure what to make of Cloud or the Raider. After a prolonged set-up, the adventure begins in earnest in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Defenders: Beyond (2022) #1

Jul 26, 2022

We don't get into what the threat is large enough to call on the Defenders as the first issue is mainly about the reluctant characters (all except for Loki) being forced together into action by events well outside of their control.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Detective Comics #866

Jun 25, 2010

Throw in Robin's first encounter with the Joker and I'm pretty happy. Definitely worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Detective Comics #875

Apr 5, 2011

Although I'm not wild about the art for Batman (in the couple of panels the Dark Knight Detective actually appears), Francesco Francavilla's style works well for a story centered around Gordon, both in the past and the present. It will be interesting to show how the James Jr. storyline plays out, and how much time it's given center stage (as it is here). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Detective Comics #880

Jul 28, 2011

I have mixed feelings with the art in the issue which is especially inconsistent with regards to both Batman and the Joker, but the story itself, including the reveal, works quite well. It looks like Detective Comics is one title DC plans to let go out with a bang.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Detective Comics (2011) #1

Sep 12, 2011

Even with these issues the first issue may not be good but it is, for the most part passable, – at least until the gruesome final panel. In an attempt to give us a gritty Batman story Daniel gives us the face of one of Batman's villains nailed to a wall. This one's best forgotten. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Detective Comics (2011) #15

Dec 10, 2012

The story is actually pretty good, and far better than most of the issues of the comic since its New 52 relaunch, even if it does give us yet another ridiculous New 52 villain in “Emperor Penguin.” But for those hoping to see the Death of the Family finally heating up, you're going to have to wait at least another month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2011) #16

Jan 12, 2013

I'm not sure about the reveal of the Merrymaker, the villain apparently pulling the strings of the League of Smiles, but this is again a really good Batman comic – something in short supply since the launch of the New 52. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2011) #17

Feb 12, 2013

Unlike much of the endless teasing, Bat-Family bickering, and grotesque nature of Death of the Family, the Merrymaker storlyine involves Batman doing a bit of old fashioned detective work and using his brains to take down another threat to Gotham City. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Detective Comics (2011) #18

Mar 11, 2013

Although the comic touches on Damian's death I expected far more. Batman kicks some ass and finally takes down Cobblepot. Zsasz's new origin story aside (which is ridiculously simple even for a comic book) the Emperor Penguin storyline works well enough here and by the end delivers a new weapon to Ogilvy to help cement his power base – the Man-Bat formula. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Detective Comics (2011) #19

Apr 8, 2013

Other stories involve Emperor Penguin's soldiers bilking Gotham out of millions, the Penguin planning his escape from prison and revenge against his former assistant, Mrs. Langstrom's plans to save her husband, and a disagreement between cops, one of whom was infected by the Man-Bat virus, over Batman's proper role in the city. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Detective Comics (2011) #20

May 6, 2013

The issue also includes a back-up story involving Ogilvy's transport to Blackgate Prison and look at his origins. The story also brutally foreshadows the fact that the new Bat-villain is only getting started. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Detective Comics (2011) #21

Jun 10, 2013

The comic also contains a forgettable back-up story involving Kurt Langstrom who believes he may be responsible for a series of grizzly murders. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Detective Comics (2011) #22

Jul 12, 2013

Although it opens up new possibilities and challenges for Batman, I'm not sold on this storyline (or either Caldwell or Wrath). The comic also offers another less than great Man-Bat back-up story that takes up way too many pages and reveals that Francine Langstrom (to no one's surprise) is actually the Man-Bat attacking the streets at night. Anytime DC wants to dump this story would be fine with me. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Detective Comics (2011) #23

Aug 13, 2013

After giving up Red Hood and the Outlaws last month Detective and Batman and Robin are the only Bat-titles I'm still readying (having given up on the others months ago), but this Wrath storyline is certainly stretching my endurance to the limit. And, sigh, yes we get more of the awful Man-Bat back-up story this month as well. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Detective Comics (2011) #23.1

Sep 11, 2013

Detective Comics #23.1 isn't a great issue by any means, but I was able to easily follow the story without being forced to seek out Forever Evil. I could have done without the usual New 52 tweaks to Pamela Isley's origins but the core of the character seems largely intact. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Detective Comics (2011) #24

Oct 10, 2013

The entire arc has felt largely uninspired, so I guess it's no big surprise that the conclusion is a letdown as well. One interesting note: the main story ends on Officer Wallace's “oh, shucky-darns Batman, you're awesome” apology that I certainly don't mind except that such unbridled naivete feels completely out of place in the gritty 90s realism of the New 52. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2011) #30

Apr 7, 2014

For a story that deals in organized crime, white slavery, gangs, Bruce Wayne still mourning the loss of his son Damian, and the crime boss The Squid feeding one of his soldiers to his pet, Detective Comics #30 is less dark and gloomy than you might expect offering a nice mix of story and action to start of the pair's run on the title. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2011) #31

May 14, 2014

Focusing on the detective work of both Batman and Bullock separately as the Dark Knight hears the first mention of “The Squid,” while also throwing in some action and beautiful visuals, DC may have finally put together a creative team to consistently sell me on a Bat-book that doesn't star Scooby-Doo. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2011) #32

Jun 18, 2014

Although neither the Squid nor the biker gang pose much of a threat, the mystery of Icarus continues to allude both Batman and Bullock as the new creative team provides another beautifully-illustrated issue of a Batman comic I'm really enjoying. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2011) #33

Jul 14, 2014

Once again Francis Manapul and Brian Buccellato are able to deliver a strong Batman story with gorgeous artwork. If I have one major nitpick its using the Christopher Nolan crutch of having other characters make important deductions before Batman (such as Alfred here). Let Batman be the Dark Knight Detective. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2011) #34

Aug 12, 2014

Stripped of any super-villain, or larger-than-life Bat-villain, the Icarus arc sets a tone for an intriguing book on Batman's battle with the street-level criminal element of Gotham, while highlighting his reliance on his detective skills, that I hope to see continue as well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Detective Comics (2011) #35

Oct 12, 2014

Of the guest team, I'm a little more impressed with the writing of Ben Percy than the art of John Paul Leon, but that may just be my expectation to see Manapul's exquisite art and getting a far different style. I'm on the fence about picking up the conclusion to the two-issue arc or waiting for Manapul and Buccellato to return. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Detective Comics (2011) #37

Dec 15, 2014

The method which the super-villain uses to turn the office building into a bomb works (at least for a Batman comic book), although we still don't know why he has chosen to target a building full of Bruce Wayne's employees or what Anarky's end game might be. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Detective Comics (2011) #38

Jan 13, 2015

On the plus side Francis Manapul and Brian Buccellato offer some beautiful panels, but even the tease of what the Mad Hatter‘s story has to do with Anarky isn't enough to keep my interest once the masks are put in the hands of the people of Gotham. As I've already seen this story maybe I'll take a break from the comic for a few months to see what it might have in store after the Dark Knight Detective after this arc runs its course. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2016) #934

Jun 15, 2016

Those issues aside, I'm loving the fact that DC is giving Tim, Steph, and Cass their own title. Clayface is a bit of a wild card, but I'm willing to wait and see what writer James Tynion IV has planned for him. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2016) #935

Jun 27, 2016

While continuing to tease just what is causing Batman to bring Batwoman into the fold and throw a team of young sidekicks together with a former villain in Clayface, writer James Tynion IV and artist Eddy Barrows do provide some nice character moments in this second issue of the relaunched series. We get to see Stephanie and Tim back together as a couple (Cass' reaction to seeing them together is pretty good as well), and Batman's first interaction with a longtime Bat Family ally in Leslie Thompkins. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2016) #936

Jul 21, 2016

The military twist an interesting one. I'll be interested to learn just what the Bat-soldiers true mission is and why it was necessary to remove Batman and his sidekicks from the equation. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2016) #937

Aug 8, 2016

The other interesting take here is DC deciding to split the idea of the League of Assassins and the League of Shadows into separate malevolent organizations. I'll be curious to see where this leads. While giving us far more of Batman than we've gotten in the past couple of issues, the team continues to shine. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2016) #938

Aug 23, 2016

Detective Comics has quickly become my favorite team book of the relaunched Rebirth comics. The issue works in Batman without him taking to spotlight from the rest of the team. Now that the Bat Family is back together the question becomes what's their next move against the Colony? And just how far will Jake Kane go to save what he's built? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2016) #939

Sep 1, 2016

While I certainly expect Tim Drake to survive, the issue does tease his upcoming absence in the title. I'll be curious to see what that means for the team and its other members (particularly Spoiler). Writer James Tynion IV has fashioned, by far, my favorite of the Rebirth Bat-Books and I'm in no hurry to see one of the characters depart. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Detective Comics (2016) #940

Sep 29, 2016

Even if the loss is a a bit slight of hand (and there's that eerily similar panel to “Death in the Family”) which undercuts its emotional impact to a degree, the story still works well in how writer James Tynion IV and artist Alvaro Martinez allow the characters to mourn their friend's loss. As to how long it will take before they learn the truth, we'll have to wait and see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Detective Comics (2016) #950

Feb 15, 2017

Of the characters rebooted by the New 52 and now Rebirth, it's been hard for Cassandra Cain to find her footing. Personally, I'd rather see her as Black Bat than Orphan, but Takara's art makes a solid argument here for a more sleek costume for the character. The cameo by Shiva at the end of the issue foreshadows trouble, as does the back-up story involving Batman and Red Robin, but the issue doesn't need to be tied to a full arc to be appreciated and enjoyed. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Detective Comics (2016) #951

Mar 3, 2017

“League of Shadows” begins here with Shiva and the League hitting Gotham City. Killing the mayor and framing Batman for the crime (hrm, not really happy to see another Batman fugitive storyline), the League of Shadows also expose the local newscasters to Joker venom on-air. And they are just getting started. Wreaking general havoc, the League begins its attack on the city and its protectors. As to just what the League wants, and how Batman for Batman and his team will have to go to stop them, we'll just have to wait and see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Detective Comics (2016) #954

Apr 24, 2017

The issue ends suggesting all is not lost for the Bat-Family. Just as the arc has built-up Shiva, so it has with Orphan who continues to work her way through the League of Shadows eventually setting up a confrontation with Lady Shiva. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Detective Comics (2016) #957

May 31, 2017

Despite my problems with Stephanie's plan, and concerns about her potential ally, I'm glad to see her get back into the comic (even if I would prefer it to be as a member of the team). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Detective Comics (2016) #958

Jun 20, 2017

The real fun here is not from an Azrael-centric storyline but the payoff for Bruce Wayne's B-story with returns Zatanna to the DCU in glorious fashion. Here's hoping she plans on sticking around for quite awhile. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2016) #959

Jul 10, 2017

While James Tynion IV continues to play it coy as to what Bruce really wants from his old friend, it is terrific to see Zee back in action (although I have wonder what Batman's new fiance thinks about spending his nights with magical former flames in fishnets). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2016) #960

Jul 20, 2017

The other half of the story continues the Azrael thread in which a new agent of St. Dumas attacks Batman's friends and Azrael's encounter with Ascalon swiftly destroys all the work the young man has done to get out from under the influence of the Order of St. Dumas. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2016) #962

Aug 14, 2017

The issue also gives us more flashbacks to younger versions of Zatanna and Bruce as well as give Batman one answer he wasn't expecting. Tim Drake is alive, and it's about damn time for the search for him to begin. Sadly, that likely means Zatanna will be exiting stage right, but it sure was fun to have her around. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2016) #963

Aug 28, 2017

While I think it would make more sense for Batman to jump full-in on searching for Tim Drake, the idea of mending fences with Stephanie first proves to be an intriguing detour. How will she take the news? Has she gone too far down her recent path to join up with Batman? Or will the Spoiler ultimately spoil Anarky's plans before heading out and searching for Tim no her own? I guess we'll have to wait and see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2016) #967

Nov 6, 2017

As for the team's attempts to stop a more-seasoned and ruthless future-Tim, it looks like that's going to be complicated, especially considering he has control of Brother Eye. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2016) #975

Mar 6, 2018

While she doesn't deal directly with any of the other heroes in this issue, Batwoman does make a choice which will no doubt put her at odds with Batman and company, regardless of the outcome of what occurs in the Batcave. Despite nagging doubts regarding her actions, Batwoman has chosen her side. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2016) #994

Dec 20, 2018

I haven't been keeping up with Detective Comics much over the past few months, but the bizarre murder scene offers a tease to deeper mystery while Doug Mahnke provides some nice art of our hero in action. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Detective Comics (2016) #996

Jan 23, 2019

While Batman knows what the attacks have in common there's still the question of why. Why attack those who helped Bruce Wayne years ago? What's the point (other than to create one very pissed-off Batman)? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Detective Comics (2016) #998

Feb 19, 2019

Batman gets no more answers, so the comic continues treading water while showcasing various allies, including an appearance by Cyborg's father, one more time as it inches ever closer to Detective Comics #1000 which, I assume, will likely offer the reveal the arc has been teasing for several issues now. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2016) #1000

Apr 2, 2019

Not quite as successful as Action Comics #1000, Detective Comics #1000 still delivers some strong Bat-tales (with a couple of clunkers thrown in) and plenty of great art featuring Gotham's hero and his supporting cast. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Detective Comics (2016) #1002

May 1, 2019

More interested in beating Batman than taking his place as Gotham's new hero, the character was original created for the 2015 Batman: Arkham Knight video game. It's not clear if the comic character has the same origins as those in the video game (which would seem to be redundant to existing timelines), but Damian does seem to recognize the unmasked villain. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Detective Comics (2016) #1006

Jul 5, 2019

Detective Comics #1006 has a throwback feel to a 90s or early 2000s comic book. Batman has a bit more blue in his costume as artist Kyle Hotz seems to be pushing for more of a classic look for the hero that has far too often been stuck in black and grey recently. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Detective Comics (2016) #1027

Sep 21, 2020

“Detective #26” gives us a look at the Silver Ghost, a vigilante upstaged by the first appearance of Batman. “Legacy” offers a fight between Batman and Doctor Phosphorous that would lead to Bruce Wayne's death of cancer years later. “As Always” gives us James Gordon's ruminations on Batman dealing with world-wide threats over the years. “The Gift” takes place during the current Joker War arc. Batman fights costumed criminals led by Calendar Man on Halloween in “Generations: Fractured” which kicks-off a time-traveling story that will continue in Generations: Future State #1.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Detective Comics (2016) #1051

Feb 7, 2022

Even several issues into the arc, you can still make out the basics of the plot here (although I'm not sure why so many Bat characters are needed undercover within Arkham Tower). The Psycho Pirate loosing control means all hell breaks loose in Arkham Tower at one point, but by the end the situation is as under control as things get in Gotham City.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Detective Comics (2016) #1059

May 5, 2022

Despite the fact I'm still not onboard with the broke Batman idea, Detective Comics #1059 offers an interesting beginning to to the new arc that also may include a new love interest for Bruce Wayne. As to what's happening in Gotham City, and how it ties into the Riddler's shenanigans, that's a riddle Batman will need to solve. Also included is the beginning of a new back-up story for Gotham Girl.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Detective Comics (2016) #1062

Aug 1, 2022

The threat is grave enough that even Talia al Ghul arrives to cryptically warn her beloved about the oncoming storm. The issue sells me on the look while teasing the reader about the doubt that has begun to creep into Batman which no doubt will play a larger and larger role as things get more bizarre. As for the odd family, we see so little of them here it's hard to pass judgement. The issue also features a Jim Gordon back-up story which may or may not have put me to sleep.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Detective Comics (2016) #1063

Sep 1, 2022

Keeping the same eerie feel of the previous issues, but focusing more on mystery than action, Detective Comics #1063 also begins to explore who the mysterious visitors to Gotham City are in revealing their connection all the way back the the city's founding through the Orgham/Arkham family lines. It turns out they aren't new visitors, but old owners returned to take back the city and make the world remember their name once more.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Devil's Reign (2021) #1

Dec 14, 2021

The idea of villains using politics to attack heroes isn't a new one (most notably with DC's Lex Luthor becoming President). By the end of the issue, Fisk has the heroes on the run as even to help pull New Yorkers out of burning buildings makes them a target for Fisk's goon squad. The team's solution… Tony Stark for Mayor? Um, okay?

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Devil's Reign (2021) #2

Jan 4, 2022

This is your typical middle issue to a series laying foundation for conflict around the corner, suggesting Otto has his own plans for the technology offered him by the Baxter Building, and giving one hero a brutal ass-kicking. While Spidey is out, I don't see Beyond or other heroes leaving him out to dry (as his identity would likely compromise others). So, who might show up for a save?

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Devil's Reign (2021): Omega

May 27, 2022

Cage's war on the Thunderbolts provides of the issue's back-up stories as he calls on the help of Spectrum to attack one of their warehouses. Cage is also prominently featured in the other back-up story as the new Mayor of New York steps in front of the divided city for his press conference. Both lay groundwork for what is to come, much like Daredevil's main tale, but there's nothing here that can't be missed.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Devil's Reign (2021): Moon Knight #1

Mar 14, 2022

While there is some early humor with our hero fucking with the inmates, the comic's main purpose is to focus on Moon Knight's brutality (something which his current surroundings only heighten). This isn't my favorite version of the character, but the bloody story does work. And, we discover he has a reason for allowing his capture in seeking out one particular thug and making sure he never leave prison to trouble his wife and daughter again. Now that the job is finished, what's next for Moon Knight? And is the world ready for what has been reawoken in him in prison?

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Devil's Reign (2021): Spider-Man #1

Mar 8, 2022

Devil's Reign: Spider-Man #1 is your typical tie-in issue. While not bad, if you choose to skip the issue there's nothing here of major interest and you also won't miss anything in terms of the larger Devil's Reign story. The other half of the comment focuses on the Rose, and the character's obsession with proving himself by capturing Spider-Man for his father. Unfortunately, while his minions are able to momentarily get the upper-hand, things don't turn out so well in the end. It seems if you want a job done right…

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dexter's Laboratory #1

May 3, 2014

With the opening issue ending on a cliffhanger as Dexter tries out his invention for the first time we'll have to wait another month to discover its fallout. The tone and pace Derek Fridolfs and Ryan Jampole and create here is a hellova lot of fun while crafting an intriguing idea for a story that I'll definitely come back for more of. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dexter's Laboratory #2

Jun 10, 2014

In your basic “be careful what you wish for” storyline, Dexter's Laboratory #2 also sets up IDW's big summer event as Dexter creates a dimensional portal to find his sister, even in he must travel through all the other Cartoon Network properties to do it! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Dexter's Laboratory #3

Jun 22, 2014

Next month's final issue should wrap up the arc as Dexter will have to find some way to convince, or trick, his sister into returning home and let their reality get back to normal (or as normal as things get in Dexter's Laboratory). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dexter's Laboratory #4

Jul 7, 2014

The four-part mini-series comes to a close with brother and sister setting the universe right and traveling home together. They even do a little dancing. I've enjoyed the mini-series from writer Derek Fridolfs and artist Ryan Jampole who crafted an original story that still fits the look and tone of the television show. Dexter's advnetures may be coming to an end here but he'll be part of IDW's big summer event (along with several other current and former Cartoon Network properties) – Super Secret Crisis War! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Disney: Darkwing Duck #1

May 9, 2016

With Aaron Sparrow replacing Ian Brill as the team's writer it looks like we're going to get the same humor and hijinks from the previous comic (with a little more alliteration this time around). Welcome back Darking, now let's get dangerous! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Disney: Darkwing Duck #2

Jul 14, 2016

For the number of characters they shove into a single issue, the latest issue from Aaron Sparrow and James Silvani moves at a pretty good pace (even if the fight sequences are short-lived). Now bring on Cat-Tankerous! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Disney: Darkwing Duck #8

Apr 23, 2017

It seems Dean Tightbill, the former Dean of St. Canard University, has unearthed the vampire potato monster which even Bushroot is unable to control, for his get-rich scheme. The chaos that ensues once Posey is unleashed puts Darkwing and Bushroot on the same side for a change. Is this a one-time team-up? Or could Bushroot become less of a villain heading forward and even, dare I say it, a potential ally for Darkwing and company down the line? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Doctor Doom (2019) #1

Oct 12, 2019

Given the number of super-beings on the planet it should be easy to prove Doom's innocence, set-up as a patsy for whatever reason, but I'm guessing his surrender here will do anything but make him look more guilty and eventually push Doom into investigating the truth of the matter on his own. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Doctor Fate (2015) #1

Jun 26, 2015

The opening issue which introduces a talking cat along with hinting of plenty of old magic and mythology which suggests Doctor Fate may could struggle to find its own peculiar corner of the DCU. I'm curious to see if he flourishes or flounders. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Doctor Fate (2015) #2

Jul 25, 2015

Two issues in I'm still on the fence about Nassour as Fate. There's certainly plenty of room for Nassour to grow into the role, and I like the character, but Doctor Fate has always been one of the most powerful magic users of the DCU and it looks like some time before Nassour will ever truly command that much knowledge or power. I also have to wonder about previous Fates. Did they exist in the DCU after the New 52 relaunch? If so, are they living or dead, and might we see someone like Kent Nelson show up as potential ally or rival? Given how shabily DC relaunched its characters without answering basic questions about their backstories I have to wonder if they've even considered these questions. Until they do, and until Nassour truly grows into his role as the new Dr. Fate (complete with costume, please), I'm likely to stay a bit wary of this title. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Doctor Fate (2015) #10

Mar 25, 2016

In a classic Peter Parker set-up, several of the comic's issues deal with Khalid's absence (he is in Egypt after all) and how his new responsibilities are hurting both his family life and school. Even after he gets himself free from the embassy our hero still has plenty of challenges to face. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Doctor Who Classics Series 4 #6

Jul 11, 2012

Playing very much like an episode of the original Doctor Who series, “The Gift” gives us an alien race similar to Earth of the Roaring Twenties, an absurd ending, and a hell of a lot of fun in-between. Plus its got the most underrated Doctor and a talking penguin for a companion. That's pretty cool. I might have to go back and pick up a few more of these issues. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Doctor Who Vol. 2 #1

Jan 25, 2011

As first issues goes it's certainly a bit of fluff, but it's entertaining enough for Who fans to pick up. It's not going to bowl you over, or compare with the best of Series Five, but it just may help tide you over until Doctor Who returns to the airwaves this Spring.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Doctor Who Vol. 2 #6

Jun 22, 2011

For a Doctor Who comic this feels an awful lot like a lazy episode of Star Trek: The Next Generation, but it does have a couple of fun moments including the Doctor and Rory's duel, the talking dinosaur named Kevin, and Amy's attempt to get the Doctor to behave. Not memorable, but some Who (and STNG) fans might get a kick out of this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Domino (2018) #1

Apr 12, 2018

Although I like the look of the character, I've never been much of a Domino fan. Her mutation of manipulating luck (but hardly ever in the most graceful way) and her role of a mercenary seem well suited to writer Gail Simone, who I wish was still writing the 2008 version of Secret Six and who has a knack for bringing out the best in damaged and sidelined characters. While I'm not wild about the supporting characters introduced here (other than the dog), they do offer someone for Domino to bounce dialogue off of. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Domino (2018) #2

May 10, 2018

Apparently I didn't have to worry so much about Domino's gal-pals, as from the end of this issue it doesn't look like they'll be sticking around that long. While Domino appears to have plenty of friends, including Amadeus Cho and Deadpool who both have nice cameos here, it looks like it's up to Domino to put things right. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Domino (2018) #3

Jun 26, 2018

In terms of the larger themes, Domino continues to fret that one of her two best friends may be selling her out to her new enemies. As I'm not as sold on her compatriots, this part of the comic hasn't yet won me over. That said, I did enjoy Amadeus Cho‘s guest-appearance as he seems to fit into the mold of interesting characters who too often don't find themselves in interesting stories which Gail Simone is usually able to quickly rectify. And the tease about who Domino goes to in order to learn to better control her powers against Topaz's attacks does peak my interest. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Domino (2018) #4

Jul 19, 2018

Domino's story provides the comic's (often inappropriate, but still damn funny) humor while Diamondback and Outlaw‘s situation looks far more dire. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Domino (2018) #5

Aug 15, 2018

Domino #5 gives us more of the B-story involving Topaz and Prototype fighting Domino's gal pals Outlaw and Diamondback. The sequence allows for a few more flashbacks of Prototype's past while confiming that the pair's powers are somehow linked (and why Prototype has such a hard-on for destroying Domino's life). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Domino: Hotshots #1

Mar 19, 2019

Simone delivers an interesting set-up and a larger team of characters to play with (I am very curious to see her take on Black Widow over the course of the five-issue mini-series). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Doom Patrol (2009) #19

Feb 21, 2011

It's not a bad read, I was just hoping with all the insanity at his disposal Giffen would knock the second-half of this one out of the park. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Doomsday Clock #1

Nov 30, 2017

Honestly, I had little interest in this series going in, but the first issue is a strong set-up and I am now a little curious to see how events may unfold. I am surprised that almost the entirety of the issue takes place in the Watchmen reality, and I wonder just how Ozymandias and company plan on getting to the DCU. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dungeons & Dragons: At the Spine of the World #1

Nov 17, 2020

While I've played my share of Dungeons & Dragons, I'll admit my real interest in the comic was more about the writers than the subject matter. Lucifer‘s Aimee Garcia and WWE's AJ Mendez make for a great combination here kicking off the four-issue mini-series with several intriguing characters, introducing mysteries to be solved, offering up a lost city to be found, and teasing a malevolent force working behind the scenes. I'm curious to see where this journey will lead.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dungeons & Dragons: At the Spine of the World #2

Jan 5, 2021

Featuring quite a bit of action in the second-half of the story, and betrayal from one member of the group, the issue concludes the first-half of the four-issue mini-series with disaster as our characters have never been further from their goal of discovering the hidden mystical city. We get even more dark foreboding with another example of the power of Chardalyn to drive even the most virtuous insane as we're left to wonder how the band will get out of their latest trouble.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Dungeons & Dragons: Saturday Morning Adventures (2023) #1

Apr 3, 2023

This issue feels more inspired by its source material than an adventure you could slot in among its existing episodes. While artist George Kambadais certainly recreates the look of the kids, he puts his own more modern flourish on things which certainly makes it stand out from the animated series.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Dungeons & Dragons: Saturday Morning Adventures (2023) #2

May 8, 2023

The bickering of the team leads to both Hank and Sheila attempting to take turns of leader, neither option being one the rest of the team seems all that keen on, eventually fracturing the group even further and trapping two of the characters in the dungeon underneath from the classic D&D adventure the story seems to be puling from. The bickering reaches a fever pitch here that starts to lessen my enjoyment of both the characters and the story, and, as with the first issue, I'd still prefer a closer representation of the art from the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Earth 2 #1

May 6, 2012

I don't need a rambunctious Wally West-ish 21 year-old Jay Garrick (although the foreshadowing of how he receives his speed is kind of interesting). Alan Scott as a mogul doesn't impress me much either. This is a little shakier than I'd like from the first big release of DC's Second Wave. I liked parts of this first issue, but I'm not sure I'm going to want to stick around Earth-2 very long if this is the best heroes than can offer. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Earth 2 #27

Oct 23, 2014

Carrying on the tradition of Worlds' Finest, Earth 2 #27 has multiple artists splitting the work. Thankfully, the art meshes reasonably well in telling to story of the foursome's battle against an army of demons while focusing on reunions none of them ever expected. Once returned to their own Earth I had planned to turn my attentions elsewhere, but despite being stuck in a world I care little about this issue tempts me to continue sticking with Helena and Kara's adventures… at least for a little while longer. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Earth 2 Annual #1

Jun 5, 2013

For those like me who haven't been keeping up with the events of Earth-2, the annual does a fairly good job of getting you up to speed and teasing you with reasons to think about picking up the title. Given it's emphasis on Pratt's story I'm not sure it's worth picking up on its own but it has me considering paying a little more attention to what is happening in the monthly title. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Edenwood (2023) #1

Nov 1, 2023

For a genre outside my wheelhouse, I don't think there's enough here to bring me back to see where Rion's tale takes him, but for fans of the genre it might be worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Edge of Spider-Verse (2023) #1

May 9, 2023

Definitely a niche comic for those wanting all the Spidey-related content they can get their hands on, but far from a must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Elektra (2017) #1

Mar 1, 2017

One issue in, it's too hard to yet get a feel for the comic, especially given Matt Murdock's disruption of Elektra's timeline which leaves a gaping black hole into what the character thinks happened in her past and informs who she is today. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Elektra (2017) #2

Mar 29, 2017

While neither the concept of Murderworld nor the involvement of Arcade does much for me, I can't help noticing some comparisions between the first couple of issues of Elektra and Marvel's cancelled Scarlet Spider series focusing on a former villain put into the role of hero reluctantly. Personally, I'd much rather be reading Scarlet Spider, but this will do for now. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Elektra (2017) #3

May 8, 2017

Round One goes to our heroine, but it's obviously a rigged game. Arcade controls Murderworld and can change the stakes at any time. Putting Elektra back on the defensive, next issue she'll have to focus back on saving a life and not just killing everything that moves. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Elektra: Black, White & Blood #1

Jan 10, 2022

In “Not the Devil” Elektra hunts down and kills minions of the Kingpin from the shadows but momentarily hesitates after hearing the pleas of a young girl. And in the final story,“The Crimson Path” offers a more metaphysical tale of Elektra and her fight against evil and monsters which leave their mark on her.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Elektra: Black, White & Blood #2

Mar 2, 2022

In “Verit” a couple of New York Police Detectives work to try to solve the murder of a witness against the Kingpin who was killed so quickly that the murder wasn't caught on camera (funny, I didn't know Elektra was a speedster?). And in“Yokai,” set in Japan, Elektra fights a legendary creature who has stolen a small child.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Elektra: Black, White & Blood #3

Mar 29, 2022

In a bit of a flashback to her past, “Split” catches up to pre-assassin Elektra breaking out of the asylum she'd been locked away in with the help of Typhoid Mary. And in “With a Passion” Elektra's love/hate relationship with Daredevil is examined as are Matt Murdock's failed attempts to save the woman he loves.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Elektra: Black, White & Blood #4

May 26, 2022

The other two tales are notable both for their art and for the metaphysical elements they involve. Elektra faces off against demons in Japan in the mostly silent story “Assassin.” And in “Rendezvous” we see two sides of Elektra, a white and dark, battling each other through the familiar looking streets of Kevin Eastman's New York City.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Event Leviathan #2

Jul 22, 2019

Given his connection to Talia al Ghul, and the kind of outside the law tactics he likes to employ, I guess it shouldn't be surprising that Batman sees Todd as a potential suspect (although I'm not sure we've seen anything in Rebirth to suggest he has the mental capacity to pull this off, again, making me leery to accept this reveal just yet). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Event Leviathan #3

Aug 19, 2019

Back to square one, the heroes compare notes again to try and figure out who exactly Leviathan is and what their endgame might be. Amanda Waller obviously knows more about what's going on than she has shared with the heroes, but the question is will she live long enough to share her intelligence (and would she, even if she gets a chance)? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Event Leviathan #4

Sep 18, 2019

Continuing to tease us while the heroes bang their heads against a wall, (something Damian puts eloquently into words in a way that states events her take place long after City of Bane has finished), Batgirl contacts Batman and company with news that she is in the belly of the beast and that most of the surviving spies have decided to join Leviathan rather than fighting it. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Event Leviathan #5

Oct 15, 2019

Although the identity of Leviathan isn't revealed, we do finally get an appearance by Talia al Ghul and there are hints dropped about the organization's tie to Kate Spencer (and more importantly, the Manhunter tech she uses). With one issue remaining, there's still much to be resolved. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Event Leviathan #6

Nov 20, 2019

While it makes sense to give her a win given the death of her father, Lois Lane doesn't come off all that well here (more concerned with her byline, which she doesn't plan on sharing, than the fate of the world). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Everafter #1

Sep 12, 2016

While letting us know in this new world new and bizarre Fables are popping into existence, explaining the need for The Shadow Players, but is still very vague about just how this occurs and what rules (if any) the new Fables universe must play by. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Everafter #2

Oct 10, 2016

Left on the sidelines, Bo-Beep's medical allows the series to revisit one of Fables more intriguing ideas. It seems a Fable's notoriety and popularity can greatly influence how quickly they can heal from serious injuries. Given what happens to Connor on his first mission, Bo Peep better be very, very popular. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Everafter #3

Nov 9, 2016

The issue continues the other storylines introduced in the series first issue with death proving not to be the out-clause to his contract Hansel was expecting (although the traitor does have a contingency plan in mind) and a recuperating Bo Peep is given her unpalatable next assignment concerning the young girl bringing monstrous Fables to life at a whim. At first refusing to accept such an order, Bo Peep is shown an example of what might befall this world should the increasingly unstable girl be allowed to effect reality any further. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Everafter #4

Dec 24, 2016

For a second straight issue Bo Peep draws the short straw getting relegated to the B-story. However, based on her new orders the series should come full circle to reunite the agent with the dangerous young girl whose powers could threaten the world (if the ghosts don't destroy it first). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Executive Assistant: Iris Vol. 5 #1

Jun 1, 2018

As with most Aspen comics, effort is taken to get the character into various levels of undress on multiple occasions (and get her naked feet oddly highlighted in a couple of random panels which seems to really be playing to a select clientele). While not that memorable, the comic does its job of setting up its core character and world, although longtime fans are likely to enjoy this one more than first-time readers. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #122

Oct 30, 2012

The woman of the wood doesn't see fate, but assigns it. And, more importantly to the wolf, she can reassign it if she so wishes. Written by Bill Willingham with some great art by Gene Ha, the first issue of the new arc works extremely well playing on half-truths and magic most fables are known for. I'll be back. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #123

Nov 29, 2012

I enjoyed both parts of “The Destiny's Game” so much that I would have liked more of the story. Fables #123 does feel a little rushed, but it wraps up all the loose ends for all the major characters and allows the rules of the world to be bent without being broken. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Fables #124

Dec 24, 2012

Odds are those who have been keeping up with the backup story and know these characters far better than I are going to get more out of this issue than I did, but even for someone jumping in blind there's still plenty here that's worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Fables #125

Jan 30, 2013

However, Snow White's troubles are just beginning as Bigby's wife is surprised by the return of Prince Brandish, “protector of the realm, marshal of the west, and the first and one true husband of Snow White.” I think things are about to get interesting. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Fables #126

Feb 27, 2013

Fables #126 also includes a story centering around Beast, the Blue Fairy, and Geppeto that I found a little hard to follow. It obviously involves a contract between the Blue Fairy and Geppetto, but what the Beast's role is (not to mention the complete absence of Beauty) was a little hard to follow. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Fables #127

Mar 30, 2013

Hopefully the return of Bigby will turn the tide (although I'm not betting on it) and I'm still a bit confused as to how the story arc's B-story involving the proposed marriage of Gepetto and the Blue Fairy is supposed to tie in. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Fables #128

Apr 24, 2013

By the end of the issue Brandish's many magical defenses prove to much for Bigby who is transformed into a glass statue by the Prince's magical sword. This leaves a wounded Snow White to stand-up for herself ('bout time) in next month's final issue of the (somewhat disappointing) arc. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Fables #129

May 22, 2013

I've had very mixed feelings about this arc which cast Snow in the role of victim for fall too long. Although she finally gets some justice, the loss of Bigby actually makes it feel like Brandish is the real victor here. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Fables #130

Jun 25, 2013

June's delivery is perfect and her adventure, even when it turns dark and scary for the young girl, is a hell of a lot of fun. My only real complaint with the story is we only get one issue with the character before the comic moves on to its next arc next month. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fables #131

Jul 21, 2013

All geared up for King Arthur, I have to say I was a little dismayed at the bait-and-switch here. That said, I like Rose Red and I'm curious to see how her story unfolds with an attempt to recreate something as grand as Camelot. As for Brandish, the best thing his character did was to die in an agonizing fashion and I'm less happy to see him sticking around. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fables #132

Aug 27, 2013

It will be interesting to see who signs up for the new Round Table as the story continues to unfold and who Red Rose may have to pressure in to joining their ranks (even Brandish?). The B-story of this issue continues the so-far-failed attempts to reconstruct and resurrect the shattered Bigby. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #133

Sep 21, 2013

Fables #133 presents a strong story in that both sister's points are valid from their point of view. It also gives us a very un-Disney version of Snow White's history as the character discusses with her daughter Therese the hard choices she's need to make over the years to survive. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #134

Oct 21, 2013

Bigby's abscence in the comic has been felt, even before he was turned to crystal and shattered by Prince Brandish. This issue suggests that his return has more to do with the wolf's decision and will than the various magics of Fabletown tirelessly working to put him back together again. The issue ends on a sweet, if melancholy, note, but I expect we haven't seen he last of the wolf. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fables #135

Dec 1, 2013

With the near completion of Bigby's shattered crystal form we find one crucial piece still missing (in the hands of a mysterious woman) which must be recovered if the witches' magic has any chance at returning him from the dead. What dark forces are working against Bigby and his return? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fables #136

Jan 6, 2014

A very strong issue that continues the current story while laying the foundation for ramifications down the line by suggesting the evil to destroy the new Camelot is already in place. The issue also several times refers to the never-discussed parents of Snow White (who could play the role of Morgan le Fay this time around) and Rose Red as having some huge consequences of its own. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #137

Feb 5, 2014

Fables #136 also foreshadows the return of Bigby with the completion of his statue (except from a tiny piece made into a ring) and some ominous words from Winter suggesting that the wolf's eventual return may not be the cause for celebration all may hope it be. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #138

Feb 26, 2014

Slow simmering, the single issue lays the groundwork for Gepetto's possible return to power sometime down the line while, as he notes, all eyes in Fabletown and the Farm are on threats elsewhere. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fables #139

Apr 6, 2014

With nearly all of this issue being set-up there's an awful lot for next month's issue to get through. I'm also disappointed that the most interesting character of the group is the one who meets his downfall so early in the adventure. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #140

May 22, 2014

I'm happy to see Puss and Boots return, and even survive his second death scene, but there's certainly a tinge of melancholy hear and Willingham begins revealing the end of a comic I may have come late to but have grown to love. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #141

Jun 23, 2014

It's obvious the conflict between Rose Red and Snow White will play a huge role in the issues to come, but the idea of Geppetto's old sorcerer weapons taking refuge inside Rose makes for an interesting twist. We'll have to wait and see how Bigby's return and the role of Grimble will play into the battle yet to come. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fables #142

Jul 21, 2014

Despite Snow White's statement of having no interest into going to war with her sister the comic continues to push the story forward. We are also offered more of Lancelot as Rose Red's lover (and his role as the possible Guinevere in the new story who might betray her to… Snow White?). The shattered Bigby's return muddies the water a bit (or is it the distraction needed to cause the final wedge between sisters?), and we'll have to wait and see how long it takes for Fabletown's various magic users to discern the missing piece of the great wolf is being used to control him. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fables #143

Sep 3, 2014

The strong issue also includes the very last story of Babe the Miniature Blue Ox who reminds readers of previous adventures and then threatens them not to finish the issue thus allowing the series to continue. If only that was the case. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #144

Oct 2, 2014

With Bigby's story in full swing the rest of Fabletown prepares for his arrival, as does Snow White who prepares to meet her husband for what might be the final time. Where Fairest seems to have lost its way a bit, Fables #144 provides a strong tale with an enjoyable back-up story offering the final fate of the Three Blind Mice. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #145

Nov 10, 2014

The Camelot reborn storyline continues (even with a sword stuck in a stone) and it seems less and less likely that Rose Red and Snow White‘s battle of wills won't end in bloodshed. As foreshadowing of just that, the issue opens with three pages involving a secret meeting between Snow and Cinderella whose unique skills will apparently be put to the test against one of the hardest assignments she's ever accepted. As for Bigby, with the series winding to a close (and the magic used to effect Bellflower's dagger) one would suppose that someone might come to the conclusion of other forces being at work. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #147

Jan 7, 2015

Should the pair be still dueling when Rose Red returns you have to wonder what her reaction to the odd scenario might be and if Lancelot's realization that he is indeed Guinevere may come to pass as his attempt to take down a guilty knave his queen has pardoned might actually quicken the fall of the new Camelot. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #152

Jul 4, 2022

We also get the continuing adventures of the new Jack the Green, learning from the older version, and another look in at the family of Bigby and Snow starting a new life but not making friends of their new forest neighbors. And, in a turn almost as big as Cinderella's return, we get our new villain (the adult Peter Pan) rather easily taking out our old villain (Gepetto). Change is certainly in the air.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #153

Jul 25, 2022

The child that gets the most time is that of Ambrose Wolf who meets a bookworm in the woods who invites the avid reader back to his home to see the creature's marvelous collection of books. Ambrose spends more time than expected in the home of the worm whose true visage is a bit more terrifying that how he introduced himself to Ambrose and who has darker plans for the boy than simply sharing a love of reading. A bit of a middle issue to the larger arc, and not as much Cinderella, but still plenty for fans to enjoy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #154

Aug 30, 2022

Elsewhere adventures are still early in the making. Blossom encounters something trapped in a locked chest while looking for a clean and pretty adventure that is so hard to find, Winter leaps before looking to examine the world on the back of a tortoise, and Connor encounters a fellow adventurer who offers a team-up that foreshadows at least some degree of trouble for all concerned. A middle issue to be sure, without big events or reveals, but still a fun read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fables #156

Oct 31, 2022

This still leaves one of the children out on her adventure while other stories continue as well when the new Jack gets arrested after hunting down Peter Pan (offering some commentary on the bizarre ways on how laws work in the real world). The issue is also notable for the dialogue between Pan and Tinkerbell further exploring their relationship and foreshadowing the character's plans moving forward.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #157

Jan 25, 2023

Fables #157 wraps up the final adventure story of the Snow White and Bigby Wolf cubs with Winter escaping the world on the back of a turtle in ways that will unintentionally alter the small world forever (and bring a friend back with her).

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #158

Apr 12, 2023

Events are beginning to pick up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fables #159

Jul 3, 2023

As the comic continues to creep towards its conclusion, Tinkerbell gets a larger role here making an appearance in all three stories.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #1

Mar 10, 2012

Fans of the Fables series should enjoy themselves here. The writing is quick-witted and Jimenez's art looks terrific. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #2

Apr 10, 2012

Issue #2 continues to impress, and start to give us a little more insight into Briar and the Snow Queen, but it looks like we'll have to wait at least one more issue of this opening six-issue arc before we get any real answers. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #3

May 16, 2012

There are a couple of small, but fun, touches as we learn magical blessings can have quite literal translations in the real world (and the reason why Briar Rose never sang for her 60′s girl band). With strong art by Phil Jimenez and another cool cover by Adam Hughes, this tale of Sleeping Beauty is definitely worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #4

Jun 14, 2012

Although we'll have to wait a month until next month's conclusion, all the groundwork has been laid, including the suggestion of with whom our hero will find true happiness. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #5

Jul 9, 2012

Next issue's opening arc finale promises more actions and “the consequences of pissing off seven faerie godmothers.” Count me in. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fairest #6

Aug 14, 2012

The series may not quite go out with a bang. It's still quite good but I'm ready for the comic to move in a different direction. Next month brings us a new arc featuring Beauty and the Beast in 1940′s Los Angeles. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Fairest #7

Sep 11, 2012

Although I enjoyed the first story arc of the series I was looking forward to a change and this issue certainly delivers. I'm a little disappointed that it appears the rest of the story will take place in present day when the story presented here worked so well because of the period it took place, but I'm more than willing to give this arc a long look. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #8

Oct 7, 2012

The fact that she's even willing to go to Frau Totenkinder, the witch who stole her for her golden hair and raised her as her own, only proves how desperate and determined Rapunzel is to find her missing children. Fairest #8 does a great job at introducing the cast of characters for this new arc and laying down the quest, and lengths Rapunzel will go to fulfill it. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #9

Nov 12, 2012

Choosing the present over the lure of falling into the same traps of the past Rapunzel let's down her hair, with a little assistance from Joel and makes her escape to continue her search for her missing children. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #10

Dec 14, 2012

Although the cliffhanger works pretty well, the story behind it isn't as clear as I'd like (especially for an issue that finally spends time to explain the past and motives of our main character). However, once again Fairest delivers one of the best comics of the month. I wouldn't expect anything less. If you aren't reading this comic you are missing out on one of the few bright spots in comics this year. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fairest #11

Jan 15, 2013

With two more issues left in the arc, Rapunzel must now face her past the awful “children” she gave life to in her deepest despair. The bezoars are still “alive” and have been waiting all this time for the return of their mother. As to the mystery of her real children and the reasons for leading Rapunzel back to the well, we'll just have to wait and see what else Lauren Beukes has in store for us and our heroine. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fairest #12

Feb 12, 2013

With one issue left to the arc and Tokyo about to erupt in a gang war started by Rapunzel's old lover Tomoko you have to expect Rapunzel isn't about to simply take he bozoars and go home. As to what final actions Bigby and that Chesire Cat may have to play, I guess we'll have to wait one more month to find out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fairest #13

Mar 14, 2013

I enjoyed Rapunzel's story, and hope to see more of her in the future, but I'm glad to see this story arc wrapped up here and move on to something new. The tone of the last couple issues took a darker turn than I was expecting, and, although it works, I'm hoping for a little more wacky fun with Bill Willingham‘s return next issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fairest #14

Apr 10, 2013

I'll admit, I didn't find Alder, other than her outward appearance, all that interesting. Thankfully the issue itself has enough humor to get by (even if some of it is pretty lowbrow). I did, however, really like Reyanrd and hope we see more of him here, as well as the regular Fables title, in the near future. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fairest #15

May 10, 2013

More off the beaten path than the more recognizable characters of the first few arcs, this opening issue of Nalayani and her story is well told and the art works well. The stylized lettering by letterer Todd Klein leave something to be desired as at times some of the wording is difficult to read, but overall Fairest #15 succeeds in selling it's latest arc and an intriguing new character. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fairest #16

Jun 13, 2013

The issue ends with Nalayani's life in serious danger as the pair track down and kill some of the remaining dhole that attacked their camp. Although I don't think Fairest #16 is quite as strong as the opening issue of the arc there's certainly enough here for me to continue with these characters, and this arc, for at least a few more issues. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Fairest #17

Jul 11, 2013

The plague which first hits one of Charming's concubines and later the Maharaja takes the arc even further from the story of Nalayani's village. The source of the disease and eventual cure might turn out to offer interest insights into both characters, but for now I'm a bit concerned with the shift in direction of this latest arc. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Fairest #18

Aug 15, 2013

Fairest #18 is certainly an improvement over last month's issue, but it does have weird jumps in action such as the rivalry back at the maharaja's camp and Charming's attack of the crocodile that aren't properly set-up and seem a bit out of place with the focus of the issue, and whose inclusion disrupts the flow of the story. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #19

Sep 13, 2013

By the end of the issue Charming's true enemy will finally be revealed and Nayalani will be forced to say goodbye to the only home she has ever known. I thought this arc got a bit off track with the plague storyline, but this issue feels much more in-tune with the rest of the Fables universe leading into next month's final issue of Nayalani and Charming's tale. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #20

Oct 7, 2013

Although I thought “The Return of the Maharaja” got a little bogged down in the middle issues of what I felt was an unnecessarily long six-issue arc (four would have done just as well), the storyline ends with a pair of strong issues and characters I will look forward to seeing more of in the wider Fables universe. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #21

Dec 10, 2013

I love the choice of returning artist Shawn McManus to draw the character (as he did for both Cinderella: Fables are Forever and Cinderella: From Fabletown with Love) and I'm looking forward to see where he and writer Marc Andreyko take Cinderella from here. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #22

Jan 17, 2014

Once again Marc Andreyko and artist Shawn McManus offer a fun adventure for Cindy and her mousey pal but we'll have to wait at least one more issue to discover the identity of the man who has hired Cinderella's step-sister as an assassin and what his end game entails. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #23

Feb 13, 2014

Fairest #23 also gives quite a bit of time to one of the house rats turned into a man for Cinderella's ball who has stayed human all these years (no turning back into a pumpkin for him) and may be the first real clue as allow Cinderella to discover what is going on. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #24

Mar 16, 2014

Although we don't get much in the way of answers (which will likely be coming in next month's issue), the latest issue of the arc delivers a pair of action sequences between Cinderella and perhaps her oldest nemesis as the story arc reaches its penultimate issue next month before concluding in Fairest #26. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #25

Apr 8, 2014

The uprising of the mice which ends the issue sets up next month's conclusion to the arc, but its the few panels involving the return of the Fairy Godmother's memory which adds a new wild card to both the end of this arc and the stories still left to be told. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #26

May 25, 2014

I've enjoyed this arc and I'm sad to see it coming to an end realizing with the end of both this title and Fables it's likely the last major Cinderella story we're going to get. As the character who hooked me on this world, I'll miss her most of all. Hopefully we'll see Cindy step in to help fight off Leigh's intended chicanery, but if not I'm happy to see the character go out kicking some serious butt in style one more time. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #27

Jul 9, 2014

Fairest #27 plays very much into the winding down of the series. Although he's an odd choice for a series which until this issue has focused solely on female protagonists, as a fan of Reynard I'm curious to see what mischief the fox can get himself into before the series comes to an end. The revolution of The Farm should play into the struggle between Snow White and Rose Red and the coming confrontation which has been teased in Fables over the last several months. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fairest #28

Aug 14, 2014

Fairest #28 is a solid issue, but it still lacks the strong female lead that the series was built upon (unless Reynard's new love interest turns out to be more than she seems) making it feel much more like an issue of Fables which bothers me a bit as the spin-off doesn't look like its going to get a chance to go out on its own terms. A short interlude focused on the odd Mr. Webb is actually far more interesting than either of the main plotlines of the issue. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Fairest #29

Sep 14, 2014

The Owl and Pussycat story is worth picking up, especially given the husband's sweet attempt to give his wife a small taste of what she's been missing for hundreds of years, but even with the twist Reynard's tale is taking up far too many pages of the series limited number of issues for my liking. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fairest #30

Oct 16, 2014

Despite the fact that the theft is narrated from the culprit‘s point of view, Mark Buckingham makes the story work not revealing the truth (in proper mystery fashion) until the final pages of the issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Falcon & Winter Soldier (2020) #1

Mar 4, 2020

While this isn't the kind of title I'm likely to stick with for long, the first issue offers some nice humor and sets up the players in the story, included a skilled killer that the Winter Soldier and Falcon will need to work together to stop, fairly well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Fantastic Four (1998) #587

Jan 28, 2011

The first two stories are largely forgettable (even with Sue's unexpected coronation as Queen of the Mer-People), but the third delivers a small glimmer of what the Fantastic Four should be – exciting, tragic, adventurous, and deeply personal. It also dramatically kills off one of the main characters to save the rest of the family. And that story is worth a look. Too bad the rest is little more than filler.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Fantastic Four (1998) #600

Dec 3, 2011

At $8 and spending several pages to feature stories involving the Reed children and Black Bolt and Medusa issue #600 is far from a fantastic. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Fantastic Four (2018) #1

Aug 13, 2018

Even if they aren't together yet, it does appear that the family is ready for a reunion.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Fantastic Four (2022) #1

Nov 16, 2022

In somewhat of an odd way to launch a new title, Fantastic Four #1 only gives us one member of the team and sticks him in a time loop for the entire issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Far Sector #1

Nov 26, 2019

The design of Mullein works well, and she's obviously got a good head on her shoulders (and perhaps a few secrets of her own?). For a comic without the words Green Lantern in its title, this is the most promising Green Lantern story I've read in quite some time (and the art by Jamal Campbell ain't too shabby either). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Far Sector #3

Jan 29, 2020

Writer N.K. Jemisin explores the idea of what role a Green Lantern should play when a harsh government turns on its more rebellious element. Is a Green Lantern a protector of the peace? Or a guardian of the innocent? And what happens when those two ideals come into conflict? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Far Sector #5

Apr 6, 2020

Given the subject matter of the flashbacks, along with the strange class structure of the City Enduring, this issue could quite easily have come off preachy. Instead, writer N.K. Jemisin grounds the story in character and mystery allowing the various elements to make-up part of, but not overwhelm, the story. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Far Sector #6

Jun 4, 2020

For a comic about a race who has chosen to genetically-suppress their emotions, this issue is packed with emotion as Sojourner Mullein makes the questionable choice of giving into her feelings of loneliness as changing her relationship of Councillor Marth who is enjoying a bit of an emotional reprieve leading him to consider his recent actions which Sojourner found so despicable.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Far Sector #7

Aug 10, 2020

The cheat of allowing time to take place slower in the network allows Sojourner's choice to be dangerous but give her more flexibility than the six-minutes left of her ring's charge. Speaking of rings, a flashback offers another look back at the Green Lantern's ring and how it differs from the regular model given to the Corps teasing big things for Sojourner (if she can survive).

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Far Sector #8

Oct 8, 2020

Despite her frustration, Sojourner Mullein has made friends adn allies in the City Enduring in CanHaz, Syzn, and Marth (even if some of those relationships aren't easily defined). Now can she use the resources at her disposal to get to the heart of the city's issues and uncover person responsible for the chain of events that led her to the far edge of the known universe?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Far Sector #9

Dec 10, 2020

The issues starts out rather talky, with CanHaz sharing a bit more of City Enduring's history with the Green Lantern and offering a suggestion on where she might poke around. The revelations, and the comic's limited action, are saved for the later pages as Sojourner sneaks into Platform Solid Ground, an alien farmland where most of the City's food comes from. However, what she uncovers looks more like a prison camp involving the forced servitude that gives her more information about how City Enduring functions and what really keeps things running. Far Sector #9 offers another solid issue, but we'll have to wait until the next issue for the Green Lantern's response to her discovery.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Far Sector #10

Feb 4, 2021

Finding no help in either the head of local law enforcement or the councilman who maneuvered events to help bring her here hoping to change the status quo, our heroine is at a loss as to her next move. In a twist eerily similar to recent events, the real enemy has used the emotional turmoil to stage a coup, kill the vote on the Emotional Exploit, and seize power. The mystery may be solved, but the fight has just begun.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Far Sector #11

Apr 20, 2021

Despite the turmoil, there is still some sanity within the city and those willing to fight to help it from devolving ever further into madness. Are their enough, however, to halt the chaos before the end comes?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Far Sector #12

Jun 15, 2021

Far Sector offered the feel of old school sci-fi, mixed with mystery and comic action with an undercurrent of class warfare and racial injustice. It's a thoughtful and engaging story to see played out over a dozen issues. Both it, and it's creation of Sojourner Mullein, were a great success.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fatale #1

Jan 9, 2012

I'm unsure how the occult and mystical elements presented in the first issue will work themselves into the story, but as a first issue it's a great read. The comic is structured to feature story and character, packed with panels (and only a single full-page splash page). You're certainly getting your money's worth. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fatale #2

Feb 7, 2012

If you have any interest in pulp and noir tales, with a little horror thrown in, here's a comic you really should enjoy. I would have like more of Nicolas' story here as well, but I can wait until next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #3

Mar 14, 2012

A very strong issue that doesn't give away many of its secrets but doesn't feel like its necessarily obscuring a reveal for another month either. I can't wait to see where this supernatural noir goes from here.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #5

May 15, 2012

Credit to Ed Brubaker and Sean Phillips for delivering a noir/horror thriller that it appears is only getting started. Bring on Book Two. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #6

Jul 3, 2012

The rest of the new arc concerns a new character, a B-movies star named Miles who did a single film with Josephine, and who coincidentally shows up on her doorstep with a mysterious film Josephine wants to know all about and a bleeding young girl after fleeing the party of a local cult. The new arc starts out with a bang. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fatale #7

Aug 23, 2012

Although most of this issue is set-up, with the blind Hansel knowing that Josephine is in Los Angeles and Miles now bent to Josephine's will things should get interesting very quickly beginning next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #8

Oct 13, 2012

Meanwhile, in Los Angeles, Josephine begins a relationship with B-movie star Miles against her better judgement and waits for the other shoe to drop now the cult knows she's alive and where to find her as Mr. Bishop prepares to take his revenge. If you aren't reading noir horror tale, you should be. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #9

Nov 6, 2012

I expected the cult would be making their move in this issue, but even if writer Ed Brubaker has drawn out events a little longer than originally planned (the twelve issue series could now number more than twenty when all is said and done), the continued look at these characters, particularly Miles who has begun to question what is happening to him, is well done. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #10

Dec 2, 2012

They comic ends the first ten issues of the series with a bang and leaves plenty of room for more stories and a new direction as Josephine's admission to Miles about her effect on men seems to free her in a way that may not only be dangerous for Hanzel and his friends but whoever may cross her path next. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #11

Jan 8, 2013

The one-off works well not only giving us more of a glimpse into Josephine's past (and how the early days of the curse nearly destroyed her and any man who came into her path) but as an isolated horror story as well. We're also introduced to a police man who had the unfortunate luck to encounter Josephine and become trapped under her spell so completely that her disappearance leaves him despondent with only one one way out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #12

Feb 19, 2013

Mathilda's tale is an interesting one, and I enjoyed it, but a single issue is about all that's required to delve into it completely. The late twist works well seeing another woman like Josephine deal with her effect on the world and those who want to use her to their own ends adds to the overall story arc as well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #13

Apr 4, 2013

Once again Brubaker and Phillips craft tale with familiar characters in new settings. I'd like a little more revelation about the cults as we see them over time, but the various protagonists continue to entertain. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #14

May 26, 2013

I've enjoyed the one-offs, but I'm glad to see the comic pick up thread of Josephine's story once again. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fatale #15

Jul 5, 2013

I'm happy to see Lash's return but the length of his story cuts into the opening of Josephine's new arc which has to spend several pages introducing Lance as well. This means the crux behind the new arc is teased but not really shown. Still, fans of Fatale should enjoy themselves here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #16

Aug 12, 2013

Although this issue is mostly set-up for the death and pain we can see coming, writer Ed Brubaker teases us with an oppressive foreboding that's contradictory the the sunny nature of “Jane Doe” who doesn't even realize how effortlessly she's going to ruin the lives of everyone in the house. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #17

Oct 3, 2013

Writer Ed Brubaker continues to gather the storm clouds as well as Josephine's unsheilded presence comes to the attention of not one but two separate enemies both obsessed with finding her. A really strong issue with great use of foreboding and more top notch art from Sean Phillips. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #18

Nov 11, 2013

The first hearing of the song begins to jar the amnesiac's memory, but the out-of-control riot caused in the club allows her enemy to find her as well as force the obsessed serial killer cop to loose control. By the end of the issue Josephine knows who she is, but is it to late to save herself and those who offered her shelter? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #19

Jan 15, 2014

And before coming to a close we get a big reveal in the Nelson and Nicholas Lash's storyline as Lash discovers the identity of his murderous savior whose very personal agenda doesn't necessarily involve the best outcome for his captive. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #20

Feb 18, 2014

Although I'm happy to hear of Ed Brubaker and Sean Phillips' new deal with Image allowing them freedom to tell a variety of stories in the coming months, I'm sad to see Fatale coming to an end. The glimpses we get of Josephine's suicide attempts remind us of quite bit of backstory yet to be developed, so I'm hoping the pair might return to the characters sometime down the line. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #21

Apr 1, 2014

By the end of the issue Lash knows his darkest fears about Josephine have been proved true, but despite his terror he's trapped (as are we all) to stay and witness the conclusion even though he knows deep-down things aren't likely to end well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #22

May 18, 2014

It's certainly a dark issue, presented completely from the mind of the creature who was once a man (and now does thing such as listen for answers from a tree of hanging dead babies) looking back on his life. Balanced against these events are his current actions discovering a bread crumb (inadvertantly?) left by Joespehine and preparing for the next convergence when he might once again be able to complete the sacrifice and… well, whatever would happen certainly wouldn't be good for Josephine or the rest of the world. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #23

Jun 23, 2014

I'm going to be sad to see Fatale end, but the rich history of Josephine leaves open any number of stories for Brubaker and Phillips to return to the character somewhere down the line. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Fatale #24

Aug 6, 2014

I am surprised of the finality of events shown here as I expected writer Ed Brubaker and artist Sean Phillips to leave Josephine's story a bit more open-ended. However, given the character's long life there are likely dozens of untapped stories to be told should the pair choose to return to Josephine's story somewhere down the line. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
FCBD 2014: Atomic Robo & Friends #1

May 13, 2014

Red 5′s Free Comic Book Day issue also includes back-up story featuring Bodie Troll stealing pumpkin's in No Man's Patch for Miz Bijou (while also checking out the rumored roots and trash of the forbidden garden of far more interest to the troll). Finally, the issue includes a short tease for Red 5′s new series Haunted featuring Sarah McCallister traversing a world where the walls between Earth and the spiritual world have been torn down. Not surprisingly, the Atomic Robo story is the stand-out although there's some fun to be had with Bodie's adventure. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
FCBD 2017: Rick and Morty #1

Jun 5, 2017

Reprinting an issue of an arc from a couple of years ago works to make people aware of the comic, although it ends on a cliffhanger and makes finding out the end of the story more trouble than its probably worth for most casual readers. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
FCBD: Atomic Robo #1

May 14, 2013

The issue also includes a look at a new Red 5 series, Bodie Troll featuring a cute troll with ADHD incapable of scaring anyone. It may not be as good as the Atomic Robo story, but it's goofy and fun. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Fear Itself #1

Apr 12, 2011

I liked this first issue more than I thought it would, especially the Sin storyline, but I'm far from convinced this isn't going to get worse before it gets better. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Fear Itself #3

Jun 6, 2011

After returning the character to the comics for the first time in decades and actually finding a way to make me care about Captain America's former sidekick, Ed Brubaker isn't even on hand when Marvel Comics and writer Matt Fraction decide to kill him at the hands of the Red Skull's daughter. Sigh. It may be worth a look, but don't expect it to be a pleasant one.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Fear Itself #4

Jul 13, 2011

We also learn that Thor is destined to die (or, die as much as a God actually can in the Marvel Universe), and are witness to Tony Stark debasing himself in front of Odin by draining a bottle of booze (as plans go, not the brightest he's ever had). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Fear Itself #7.1

Nov 9, 2011

Aside from feeling like a cheap out, the comic works well and I'm actually glad to see Bucky stay around. I'm not sure reintroducing Bucky as the Winter Soldier (who every knows was him) makes any sense if he's going to work in the shadows, but I'll give Brubaker a shot (especially since it appears he's far more interested in writing Bucky stories than Rogers stories at this point). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
FF #1

Mar 28, 2011

The sheer number of supporting characters looks a bit much in the longterm for the book but I'm intrigued enough to stick around and find out how things go with the Forward Foundation (or is it First Family?) for at least a couple months.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
FF #2

May 3, 2011

There are some nice moments including the Moloids being taken aback by Spider-Man's intellect and an intriguing conversation between Sue and Ben over a couple of beers that has the word “foreshadowing” written all over it. Things are a little wonky for the FF these days, but at least they aren't boring. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
FF #3

May 17, 2011

On the negative side, this is at least the third time I've seen the Watcher make an appearance in as many months. That's far too often, especially here when his appearance isn't warranted in this issue. Instead it's used to over-hype the events that may occur in the next few issues. I like the Watcher, but if he starts showing up for every calendar event the entire point of his character is made worthless. Just sayin'. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
FF #4

Jun 1, 2011

All isn't quiet for long on their front, however, as Spidey, Sue and Alex Power (breaking out the much cooler black versions of the Future Foundation costumes) are called to the Peak of Old Atlantis which is under attack not only the Chordai and Mala, but the Mole Man‘s private army, and a very special guest. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
FF #7

Aug 29, 2011

There are moments including Sue‘s dialogue with her father-in-law and Valeria‘s escape from her room, but the main battle (including a far too obvious double-cross) feels rushed, messy, and unfocused. We are given a couple of hints that everything Reed thinks he knows about his other selves might be wrong, but here's yet another issue that's not really about the Council of Reeds. At least this one does have the Future Foundation in it. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
FF (2012) #1

Dec 4, 2012

There's not much to this first issue other than gathering the new team and re-introducing the members of the Future Foundation (including Bentley and Dragon Man), but Matt Fraction and artist Mike Allred have fun simply showing off the various characters. I'm not sure how long I'll stay with the title (I felt the last series grew tiresome rather quickly), but I'm glad I picked it up. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
FF (2012) #2

Dec 27, 2012

When the comic stays with the character dynamics inside the Baxter Building things continue to run smoothly. However, writer Matt Fraction's choice of villain, in a humdrum homage to the original Fantastic Four #1, doesn't work nearly as well. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
FF (2012) #9

Jul 23, 2013

Light and fun, I enjoyed FF #9 in the same way I occasionally like cotton candy, but much like the first couple issues of the series I came away wanting something a little more substantial (or even more zany). I really want to like the comic more than I do, but I'm not sure this will ever be more for me than a world I give a peak into every six months or so (especially if the tone of comic is going to shift more from the wackiness of the various children to the adventures of the grown-ups – although this would also finally give She-Hulk something substantial to do). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Final Crisis: Revelations #3

Oct 15, 2008

I'll admit Final Crisis hasn't yet won me over, but this story seems to be working pretty well. And I'll also admit a bit of a guilty pleasure at seeing Montoya beaten down (yeah, I want my Vic Sage back!) in a pretty one-sided girl fight. I'm also very intrigued by the character of Radiant and hope to see more of her post-Final Crisis.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Firefly (2018) #1

Nov 20, 2018

Overall Firefly #1 offers a solid first issue that is smart by shaking things up and having Mal and Zoe be the targets of a manhunt rather than River. I'll be curious to see where things go from here and what other stories we might see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Firefly (2018) #2

Dec 28, 2018

The comic ends on a darkly humorous note with Zoe and Wash both attempting to protect each other leading to two members of the team shooting each other just as an entire battalion of Alliance soldiers land on the planet. Things just got even more complicated. Nope, never boring. And never easy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Firefly (2018) #9

Oct 22, 2019

Firefly #9 is a solid read with the crew in the familiar spot of being far over their heads. The question now, is how do they manage to get Mal back and get out of Serenity Valley before all hell breaks loose? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Firefly (2018): Bad Company #1

Mar 28, 2019

The $8 price-tag is enough to make some pass on the issue, but there's enough here for fans of the show (and particularly this character) that is worth a look, even at the steep price. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Firefly: Blue Sun Rising (2020) #1

Jan 4, 2021

The issue concludes with Mal taking the fight to Blue Sun, and making an unlikely alliance, to resolve the captain's current problems (while likely creating new ones in the future).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Flash (2011) #0

Sep 29, 2012

Flash #0 also gives us the lighting strike which gifted Barry with his super-speed (thankfully the New 52 doesn't figure out a way to “improve” the classic retelling the way they screwed up Captain Marvel), Barry's creation of the suit which fits in his ring, and his first action all clad in red and yellow. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Flash (2011) #1

Oct 3, 2011

Even with some questionable changes (including the suit that now comes in pieces?) the first issue gets a lot right and does give us a fun Flash story, and let's face it, given the events of Flashpoint it's been awhile. Of all DC's characters Flash is one that should have one of the broadest appeals to readers of all ages. I'm hoping Manapul keeps things fast-paced and fun and, as soon as possible, gets Barry and Iris back together. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Flash (2011) #2

Nov 1, 2011

Once again the art by writer/artist Francis Manapul is exquisite. I love how how Manapul showcases the character's speed and motion while never loosing sight of who the man underneath the mask is. It's been a long time since this, or any Flash, has had a title this good. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Flash (2011) #3

Nov 28, 2011

Fans of the Golden Age should also pay attention to the mention Keystone City, especially now that we know some form of an Earth-2 Justice Society of America is scheduled as part of DC's New 52. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Flash (2011) #4

Jan 3, 2012

It bothers me that everyone is referring to Mob Rule by the same name when the group hasn't publicly ever used that name, but it's a comic book conceit I'm willing to let slide. Once again I'm impressed by how well-planned the story elements are from Francis Manapul and Brian Buccellato are every month. And the art is gorgeous. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Flash (2011) #5

Jan 31, 2012

Once again Francis Manapul delivers another terrific looking comic. I'm glad to see the end of the Mob Rule story arc and the chance to see the Flash deal with a problem with the Speed Force and the return of his Rogues Gallery in the next couple of issues. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Flash (2011) #6

Feb 27, 2012

Aside from Flash's battle with Cold, and the reason for the villain's new motivations, we also get Barry siting down as an awkward go between between Patty and Iris, and a continuation of the seed planted in last month's issue about the hero's need to watch his speed because there's a chance it could rip apart time and reality. We even get a giant treadmill. Sweet! Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Flash (2011) #7

Apr 3, 2012

Seeing how the next issue is going to be firmly centered around the speed force this issue did a good job of ending the Captain Cold story and starting a new problem for Barry with Patsy‘s now firmly anti-Flash stance. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Flash (2011) #8

Apr 30, 2012

That doesn't mean the comic doesn't have its bright spots. Manapul's art is again terrific, and even if the ideas aren't as well fleshed-out as I'd like they do open the doors for further discovery down the line. I'm less pleased with the new Grodd and New 52 version of Gorilla City both of which were going to get plenty of in next month's issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Flash (2011) #9

May 30, 2012

The issue has several important small plotlines including Iris still stuck in limbo, the Pied Piper deciding to come out of retirement when Central City is left without a hero, Dr. Elias mounting a protest against the scarlet speedster, and a teaser for the introduction of another of the Flash's Rogues next month – the Weather Wizard.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Flash (2011) #10

Jul 4, 2012

Given his need to keep running, which keeps getting in the way of Barry's life, and his desire to no longer hurt Patty anymore, the Flash decides Barry Allen needs to stay dead. I'm not sure I like this turn, or leaving Iris still stuck in limbo, but I'll stick around to see how it plays out. Up next, Heat Wave. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Flash (2011) #11

Jul 31, 2012

I enjoyed Barry as the Flash, but I'm still unsure of his life out of costume in this arc. It's also interesting to note that in the New 52 Keystone City is compared to Gotham in terms of in terms of high levels of crime and corruption. We'll see what the Flash has to say about that. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Flash (2011) #12

Aug 27, 2012

The issue's certainly not bad, but to get the payoff this storyline has been slowly building to it looks like readers are going to have to put down a little extra cash to pick up the annual next week. On the plus side writer/artist Francis Manapul has set up an annual that looks like it's definitely worth picking up (which, as those who have read comics for a while know, that's usually not the case). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Flash (2011) #13

Oct 29, 2012

I don't know if I'm ready to see the Flash battle Grodd for the next three months, but this issue certainly helps sell me on the idea of the multi-issue arc involving Grodd, the Rogues, and my favorite speedster. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Flash (2011) #14

Dec 3, 2012

I'm not all to pleased with Patty discovering Barry's secret identity, as I'd like to see the character phased-out of the New 52 as soon as possible, as this likely means she'll be around awhile (or killed off rather quickly). However, I am glad to see the introduction of Solovar here as well as the idea that Barry's super-suit doesn't offer him the same protection while fighting other speedsters. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Flash (2011) #15

Jan 7, 2013

With two issues left in the arc our hero is back on his feet with an impeding conversation with Patty, and a gorilla army to stop. Oh yeah, and Iris is still lost in time. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Flash (2011) #17

Mar 5, 2013

The Flash #17 is a good conclusion to an arc that I enjoyed much of but am happy to see end. I'm interested to see what version of the Reverse Flash we'll be getting, but I can't be anything other than disappointed by another unnecessary redesign of a classically cool costume. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Flash (2011) #18

Apr 2, 2013

Even with Manapul's abscence the comic works pretty well, although I'm less sure of the storyline that unfolds concerning the Outlander Nation or Barry Allen inexplicably suddenly loosing his powers (I'm also less than pleased I have to read the next issue of Dial H to apparently find out the cause). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Flash (2011) #19

Apr 30, 2013

Once again Francis Manapul is back to do the issue's cover, but the art inside the book by Marcio Takara, which isn't bad, is certainly a step down from what we were getting before.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Flash (2011) #20

May 29, 2013

It's great to see Manapual and his beautiful art of the Flash in action return. Next month offers the first meeting between Flash and Kid Flash and you have to wonder with the unseen villain targeting those who were temporarily trapped in the Speed Force how long it will take Barry to realize Iris is likely his next target. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Flash (2011) #21

Jul 1, 2013

Honestly, I could have done with a less dickish Kid Flash (but that's what I can say about nearly all the New 52 characters). Once again we get a cameo by the (horrendously redesigned) Reverse-Flash who may finally be turning his attention to our hero beginning next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Flash (2011) #23

Sep 2, 2013

The reveal of Daniel West was unexpected, and we'll have to wait until at least next month to discover his story. I'm also wondering if this isn't the first step to introduce another member of the West family. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Flash (2011) #23.1

Sep 11, 2013

It's not a bad issue and its competently told, but without the Flash, regular co-writer and artist Francis Manapaul, or a willingness to embrace the absurdity of the hero's Rogues it does feel a bit flat. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
2
Flash (2011) #23.2

Sep 18, 2013

I'm actually glad DC decided not to use Professor Zoom for the new version of the character as I can only imagine how angry I'd be if DC Editorial turned him into something this pathetic. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Flash (2011) #23.3

Sep 24, 2013

The last part of the issue catches up with the events of Grodd #1 as The Rogues find themselves once again forced to play hero and save their city from the gorilla invasion as the Flash and the rest of the Justice League have been taken out by the Secret Society of Super-Villains. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Flash (2011) #24

Oct 30, 2013

Two full years since the launch of the New 52, The Flash has seen its ups and downs but it has consistently offered (mostly) good stories and (always) great art. The latest issue of The Flash sets the stage to begin the new chapter with the hero back in control of his life and powers, and everything, at least for now, seeming back to normal. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Flash (2011) #25

Dec 2, 2013

I'm going to miss Manapual's beautiful kinetic style that fit the character perfectly. And given the continuing disappointment of much of the rest of the New 52 I'm a little scared to see where The Flash goes from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Flash (2011) #26

Jan 7, 2014

That's quite a bit for a one-shot to do, but the comic moves at a good pace and focuses on the more cerebral nature of our hero as well as bringing back “Flash Facts” to showcase different ways the hero is able to use his powers. There's a lot here to sell me on the comic's new direction, even if I still want Manupaul's art back, but the consistent highlighting of that horrific yellow piping that makes it impossible for me to take the hero seriously has to go. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Flash (2011) #27

Feb 3, 2014

I don't need Barry Allen needs a dark origin story help round him out as a character, but the issue does a good job of showcasing the drive that was born in him years ago. Although the reactions his captain and his father make me wonder if the comic is going to make his father ultimately responsible for the murder, I'm still holding out hope for Professor Zoom. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Flash (2011) #28

Mar 4, 2014

The issue's backstory (without an ounce of subtlety) continues to suggest that the man Barry knows as his father isn't who he thinks he is (in more ways than one). Patrick Zircher's art is okay but doesn't do much to add any flair to the storyline. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Flash (2011) #29

Apr 3, 2014

Using his speed to shake off the killer as he had done with Deadman in the previous issue, the Flash wins the day but the issue does offer a final scene between Frye and Barry's father suggesting the truth behind the murder of Barry's mother is far more complicated than anyone knows. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Flash (2011) #30

Apr 29, 2014

A little awkward in spots, and sure to disappoint Wally fans who were expecting the hero's big introducing into the New 52, The Flash #30 may not be what some readers were expecting. That said, the ideas the issue begins playing with are fertile ground for the character and (other than those distracting yellow seams in the unnecessary New 52 redesign of the character's costume) the art of Booth fits the character well. I'll be interested to see where things go from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Flash (2011) #31

May 31, 2014

Sadly the current storyline, other than Barry discovering the theft of the weapons, leaves much to be desired. Brett Booth's choice to feature that awful yellow piping of the Flash's costume in every frame goes from distracting to downright infuriating before long. And the continuing B-story does nothing to sell me on the New 52 Wally West who continues to share far too many bad traits with the rebooted schmuck version of Billy Batson. The cover is also one of the weakest of the series, however if you want to spend some extra cash you can shell out for Mike Allred‘s fun classic-style variant. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Flash (2011) Annual #1

Aug 30, 2012

Speeding up, the comic picks up where Flash #12 left off as the Scarlet Speester and Captain Cold take on Glider, Mirror Master, Weather Wizard, the Trickster, and Heat Wave. Throw in plenty of action, a last second double cross, the return of Turbine, and a crazy ending involving Gorilla Grodd and and army of apes and even at $5 you're going to get most of your money's worth. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Flash (2011) Annual #2

Aug 6, 2013

The issue also includes a 10-page back-up story of a regular day in the life of the Flash that's mostly filler to justify The Flash Annual #2‘s $5 price tag. Of course, that's a common problem with comic book annuals. It's not awful story by any means, but compared to the main story the back-up tale has little to offer. I'd have preferred the editors to junk this back-up story and shave $1-$1.50 off the cover price. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Flash (2011) Annual #3

May 5, 2014

I'm also going to continue complaining loudly about that awful, awful, awful yellow piping on the Flash's costume which is highlighted in every single panel of this issue whether the character is in motion or standing still. With a storyline that quickly goes off the rails and art that highlights the stupefying unnecessary shitty redesign of the character's costume (which previous artists have done their best to hide and/or ignore) there's almost nothing other than the few panels of the museum fight worth reading. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Flash (2016) #800

Jun 12, 2023

The comic falls off a bit with the final two tales which is a bit problematic as these are the ones that appear to be leading into future storylines for the characters. “Blitz Back” seems a bit out of place, likely setting up a future story, with a tale of the return of Hunter Zolomon to Central City. And“Between Love and You” is a clever idea about a dinner interrupted by the Mirror Master (and various other threats) which has the unfortunate problem of not being as good as the other Mirror Master story in the same issue (you couldn't have chose different Rogues?).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Flash Gordon #1

Oct 1, 2008

Although I wasn't blown away by this first issue I was entertained and given enough of a taste to want more. Here's hoping this version of Flash Gordon stays around awhile.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Flash Gordon: Kings Cross #1

Nov 14, 2016

Since I didn't read the previous series, there were a few lingering questions I have that weren't completely covered here. Who is the new female Phantom trainee? Did Dale actually marry Ming? While there were nagging questions like this, the first issue of the new mini-series did set-up the world, characters, and conflict enough for me to follow the new series without too much difficulty. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Flash Gordon: Zeitgeist #1

Dec 7, 2011

For a $1 it's an interesting, and more than a little bizarre, introduction. However, at $4 a pop (which will be the regular monthly price of all future issues) it's far less tantalizing. I'm also very mixed on the art by Daniel Indro which feels muddy and rushed in several panels. Worth a look (but only for this price).

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Flash: Rebirth (2016) #1

Jun 13, 2016

My other real complaint with The Flash: Rebirth #1 is the art by Carmine Di Giandomenico whose style doesn't flatter the character. While I'm still hopeful Rebirth can let some necessary light into to the DCU, The Flash: Rebirth #1 reminds me that the shadows of the New 52 are still looming. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Flashpoint #1

May 16, 2011

I think there's going to be plenty of bad stories in this crossover as both the Atlantis and Amazon series gear up over the weeks and months to come, but as setups go this first issue is actually better than I expected. It doesn't hurt that this one also has an interesting version of Captain Marvel who I hope to see more of (since I don't get any of him in the current DCU). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Flashpoint #2

Jun 8, 2011

It's not a bad second issue, although the glimpses we get of both Aquaman and Wonder Woman make me cringe at the thought of either of them being the center of future issues. And the consequence of Barry Allen's experiment does have an unintentionally funny ring to it. (And it's certainly better than the other off-shoot mini-series which also hit shelves this week.) Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Flashpoint #3

Jul 12, 2011

It's not a bad third issue, but by the end of the #3 we should be more than halfway through Flashpoint and there seems like quite a bit yet to be decided. The appearance of Grifter also makes my original theory of Flashpoint being the catalyst the DC reboot (which Grifter and other WildStorm characters are to be a part of) look that much more likely. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Flashpoint #4

Aug 10, 2011

Trouble is, even in the Flashpoint universe DC Comics seems intent on limiting the number of pages Captain Marvel can appear. The team is betrayed and Billy Batson is killed. But at least I'll get to see him in the new DC Reboot, right? Oh, Captain Marvel isn't part of that either? Sigh. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Flashpoint #5

Sep 6, 2011

As wrap-ups go this final issue does what it needs to, and does it better than I expected. Is the final moment between Barry and Batman a little too schmaltzy? Sure. Does the look of the rebooted DCU still make me a little queasy? Oh yeah, but this issue works (and gives us a glimmer of hope we haven't seen the last of the classic DCU). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Flashpoint: Abin Sur - The Green Lantern #1

Jun 8, 2011

More of a novelty than anything else, this issue does give us Abin Sur knocking the snot out of his dear friend Sinestro. Sadly it also gives as an update that this reality is still stuck in the dark days of Blackest Night. Ugh, and I thought Emperor Aquaman was bad. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Flashpoint: Citizen Cold #1

Jun 15, 2011

Interesting first issue which starts out with a battle between Cold and Mr. Freeze (pretty cool), a revelation that the Rogues are part of this reality as well (more of a miss), and ends with Wally West turned into a frozen Popsicle (okay that's kinda funny). I could have done with far less of the tortured back story, but it's still worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Flashpoint: Green Arrow Industries #1

Jul 6, 2011

There's quite a few problems with this issue including very inconsistent art (four different artists were used on various pages), Queen's lack of prowess with a bow, and a level of preachiness that doesn't come off well on the page. That said, here's a Flashpoint character I'd like to see more of, so why is this title only a one-shot – especially when it seems to just be hitting its stride as the comic comes to a close? Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Flashpoint: Grodd of War #1

Jun 20, 2011

This is a comic abot a telepathic talking gorilla. It should be fun. But when the only excitement you get is one gorilla ripping off another's head for no purpose other than to showcase what a bad ass he is, you know you're in trouble. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Flashpoint: Kid Flash Lost #1

Jun 23, 2011

It's too bad that story isn't real, because once Kid Flash is pulled into the real world (and starts disappearing) things get even worse. And that's hard to do when you've got an impressive super-villain base filled with killer robots. Of course it's made infinitely easier if you just steal your plot from The Matrix. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Flashpoint: Reverse-Flash #1

Jun 29, 2011

That's not to say it's a bad read, but there's little here for those of us who already know the backstory between Barry Allen and Professor Zoom including Zoom's repeated attempts on Iris Allen‘s life, his attempts to rewrite history by stopping Allen from becoming the Flash, and his death at the hands of his hated foe. Worth a look (but only for those who need a brush-up on the character).

View Issue       View Full Review
5
G'nort's Illustrated Swimsuit Edition (2023) #1

Sep 4, 2023

Despite the title, G'nort's Swimsuit Edition is not a collection of G'nort in swimwear (although the Green Lantern from the planet G'newt is the centerfold for the issue). The one-shot is made up of mostly art from various artists giving us a wide assortment of DC heroes and villains in beach and swimsuit poses. Attempting to add a bit more substances, two short stories are thrown in as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe #2

Jun 29, 2011

Meanwhile Duke and Dial Tone fight their way out of a government facility, not knowing who to trust. Anyone could be an agent of COBRA. Remember, it's not paranoia if they're really after you. Although I'm not totally sold on Javier Saltares' artwork, writer Chuck Dixon gives us pair of strong stories. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe (2013) #1

Feb 23, 2013

Shot down in an entire town of Cobra loyalists leaves Shipwreck badly injured, Duke captured by the Baroness, and the rest of the team separated into two groups and seriously out-gunned. There's a nice mix of action and humor here, although it's a little unclear why the JOE's haven't been using codenames before this latest reboot and the absence of core characters such as Snake Eyes and Scarlett (or any recognizable Cobra operative other than the Baroness' quick cameo on the issue's final panel) is sorely felt. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe (2013) #2

Mar 26, 2013

Cut-off from the outside world, we'll have to see how long the JOEs can keep fighting and how long Duke can hold out before succumming to Dr. Mindbender's mind control. Once that happens, he'll agree to do whatever the Baroness commands. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe (2013) #3

Apr 29, 2013

G.I. JOE #3 bucks the trend of “everybody breaks” in comics and movies recently by allowing Duke to hold out and even warn the JOEs that something is wrong. Now things get interesting. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe (2013) #4

Jun 1, 2013

After the Duke-heavy issue last month, it's good to see the comic getting the other characters involved. The comic's final sequence presents an interesting sceneario as even if the JOEs win the day by taking the town away from Cobra they loose in the public perception of allowing such wanton destruction to occur. It's good to see the comic continuing to have Hashtag deal with having to shoot a Cobra solider, although her cornering of the Baroness may spell and end to the character far sooner than expected. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe (2013) #5

Jun 26, 2013

Cobra's victory and the return of the Mad Monk means the team will have to be even more vigilant in the months to come. We'll also have to see what the negative public fallout means for the team. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe (2013) #6

Aug 3, 2013

Other than Cover Girl's suspicions about her boyfriend and her discovery of the wife he neglected to tell anyone about (including Cover Girl), the issue is mostly a self-contained story to help new readers get a better feel for another member of the team and explain how a supermodel became a member of G.I. JOE. It works really well, and I hope we see more of both Cover Girl in the months to come as well as similar issues featuring other JOEs. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe (2013) #7

Sep 2, 2013

I like the series bringing Destro and Baroness together (for apparently the first time?), and given Destro's reasoning for distrusting the man and the kidnapping of Duke's wife G.I. JOE #7 does what is needed to showcase the character as a legitimate threat to both friend and foe. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe (2013) #8

Sep 28, 2013

The issue also gives us more of Destro wooing the Baroness to his side to take down the Mad Monk, before the destroys all of Cobra with his insanity, as the pair indulge in an unusual game of skeet shooting. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe (2013) #9

Nov 6, 2013

The issue ends with Scarlett and her team unable to deny the damning evidence and setting out after their leader and the Mad Monk captured by Duke who is shocked to learn the final card the villain has left to play concerning Duke's wife. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe (2013) #10

Nov 19, 2013

The split between Destro and Cobra opens up new possibilities for the character and I'm happy to see the series sticking with the relationship between the Baroness and her silver-headed boyfriend. The flashbacks certainly give Duke a feet of clay which I have mixed feelings about as I do with Monk getting away to cause more trouble for the JOEs in the future. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe (2013) #11

Dec 22, 2013

Giving us a look at the origins of not one but two JOEs (and a cameo from Snake Eyes) G.I. JOE #11 is a very good single issue break from the title's ongoing storylines. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe (2013) #12

Jan 10, 2014

Focused on telling the legendary and bloody history of former Cobra Commanders, the latest issue fills in readers to just how long Cobra has been operating. It also reminds us that not all of Cobra's attacks come with a H.I.S.S. Tank, M.A.S.S. Device, or a gun. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe (2013) #13

Feb 14, 2014

How much truth each of the Siren's stories actually contains is kept purposefully vague, but its obvious the woman has a gift that Cobra has no intention of giving up anytime soon as she learns a valuable lesson as well when Cobra finds the perfect pressure point to force Siren to continue her work. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe (2013) #14

Mar 22, 2014

Paul Allor's choice to pair up Cover Girl and Hashatag on a covert mission without Duke's approval works well (even if it may be far too late to save Siren and her son at this point). Dealing with what they find should prove challenging for the two women and their small team. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe (2013) #15

May 6, 2014

The comic certainly leaves several questions from the series left unanswered (such as Cover Girl‘s concerns and suspicions about Duke) as IDW closes the book on the last of their JOE titles heading into this Fall's “Fall of G.I. JOE.” Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe (2014) #1

Oct 2, 2014

New York Times best-selling author Karen Traviss begins to lay a foundation for the series here but by the nature of the story is forced to be unnecessarily vague about the real intentions of all the players. The art on IDW's JOE books has always been hit-and-miss. Steve Kurth's work matches Traviss expositional storytelling but a little more traditional comic style would go a long way to help sell the storyline. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe (2014) #2

Nov 8, 2014

Choosing his mission, and the life of a boy who he believes is a hostage not a whackjob Cobra believer, over that of his former comrades, Duke warns Rashidov of the arrival of an American hit squad. The ramifications of his actions muddy the waters of the new series even further and might very likely lead to more trouble between the JOEs and their former commander. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
G.I. Joe (2016) #1

Jan 4, 2017

Set after the events of IDW's big Revolution crossover, this is pretty damn crazy. Personally, I like my G.I. JOE a bit more grounded (where Snake Eyes is one of more unique aspects of the story). I've also got to say the art by Giannis Milonogiannis doesn't do much for me at all. After one issue I've learned this new JOE may not be for me. And you know what they say, learning is half the battle. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
G.I. Joe (2019) #1

Sep 24, 2019

G.I. JOE #1 offers a couple of new characters, neither of them that interesting. Frontier looks to be a Flint rip-off (who himself was already a Duke rip-off), and Tiger (who most of the comic is centered around) doesn't present any real skills of note (other than disrupting Joe operations and getting himself in trouble). If the future of the Joes is in there hands, my money is on Cobra. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe Vol. 2 #18

Oct 14, 2012

We also get Serpentor‘s growing frustration with his attempts to bloody the Arashikage and break the Soft Master and tons of action including Snake Eyes leading a bloody attack on Vendri Corporate Headquarters in Kuala Lumpur. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe Vol. 2 #19

Nov 13, 2012

Writer Chuck Dixon delivers another strong issue full of action (and tons of dead ninja and Cobra soldiers) as the the crossover reaches its tipping point now that Storm Shadow finally knows the truth about Snake Eyes' agenda. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe Vol. 2 #20

Dec 15, 2012

With his forces depleted, but still better off than the Coil (who lost nearly 2,000 men in their attempt to destroy the Arashikage), Storm Shadow allows his sword brother to leave. Matters are far from settled between them as “Target: Snakes” concludes with a throwdown between the two in the next issue of Snake Eyes and Storm Shadow. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #164

Mar 30, 2011

In fact in many ways this entire issue feels like it's playing on the nostalga of my youth. The trouble is, with as much fun as there is here to have, the story itself is somewhat empty. Am I glad I read this issue? Yes. Does it make me any more likely to pick up the next one? Not really.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #249

Mar 1, 2018

While Snake Eyes was the cheapest of the 80s toy line he's been a fan favorite since the beginning. Killing him off doesn't seem like the best idea, but it does allow for an unique character like Dawn to enter the fray. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #252

Jun 5, 2018

As for the Baroness, both storylines show off the strengths and flaws of here character that led her to Cobra but also help her stand-up for a little girl in need of assistance. With Cobra working a more insidious plan of earning recognition as a legitimate organization (rather than throwing together the next Weather Dominator to throw the world into terror), the G.I. JOE world opens up a bit for stories like this to flourish. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #254

Aug 8, 2018

After such an impressive demonstration (which Destro helped orchestrate by sending his client's enemies to a rival provider), Destro earns his commission. Of course it helps that Destro's buyer never asks the most important question: If these weapons are far superior to everything else on the market, why does Cobra consistently get its butt kicked by G.I. JOE?

View Issue       View Full Review
5
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #255

Sep 6, 2018

Fans of Snake Eyes are also likely to be a bit disappointed as we only really see him through the tinted lenses of Scarlett's memory. The result is a somewhat interesting, but ultimately depressing look back at the pair's relationship. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #258

Dec 27, 2018

The final moments of Dr. Venom's life provide the opportunity for writer Larry Hama to pull back the curtain on the villain's past and offer us a glimpse at the road which led him to Cobra (a road it seems which was littered with the man's victims). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #259

Feb 18, 2019

The issue also features a plot thread of the Baroness joining Destro in New Jersey where he is performing an extremely hostile takeover of his arms business' largest rival (who Destro's men carve up with relative ease). I don't know about you, but I'd hate to have Destro as an enemy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #262

Jun 4, 2019

The arc's title “Artificial Intelligence” seems to, at least so far, apply to both stories. We'll just have to wait and see which turns out to be a greater threat to our heroes. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #266

Sep 4, 2019

The end of the issue foreshadows trouble coming with a group of Cobra setting up camp undercover just a few houses down from a U.S. Military base. Just what is Cobra planning? And does it tie into the Commander's interest in Snake Eyes? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #267

Oct 16, 2019

With Throwdown (and not the original) now captured by Cobra, with the Joes be able to save him before Cobra learns the truth or will learning the truth turn the Commander's attention towards Dawn Moreno whose mind houses the secrets he covets? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #268

Nov 21, 2019

One finale note, there is an interesting scene the aftermath of the abduction where Dawn Moreno picks up on of Snake Eyes' swords (which Throwdown has been using) and is shocked to discover just how natural it feels within her hands. If Cobra meant to capture Snake Eyes, I think the grabbed the wrong Joe. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #269

Jan 21, 2020

Elsewhere we also catch-up with Destro and the Baroness at the mercy of robotic Revanche only to be rescued by an unexpected ally. Zartan‘s play here isn't immeadiately obvious, although his timely rescue is likely to be part of a larger scheme. While not directly tied to the Snake Eyes plot, I do wonder just what this trio may get up to in the coming issues. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #270

Feb 12, 2020

While a few take the order seriously, the majority of Joes line-up to do whatever it takes to bring back one of their own which I'd expect to mean things will be heating up in the next issue, likely with more of our captured hero, Cobra's plans for him, and the rescue attempts getting underway (the consequences be damned). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #271

Jun 8, 2020

As to the state of the captive and rescue, things don't move much much forward as circumstances are pretty much the same at both the beginning and end of the issue. That said, there's an awful lot of fun here.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #272

Jun 18, 2020

Longtime fans of G.I. JOE will enjoy the group shots which artist Robert Atkins uses to fit as many Joes as possible in this issue. How many can you name?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #273

Aug 10, 2020

We get some Joes taking out Cobra sentries, and panels of several other of the various groups making their way closer to the compound, but most of the action takes place in the bunker where Throwdown fights off the various Cobra forces (and even kneecaps poor Cobra Commander and Dr. Mindbender after using them as hostages proves ineffective). Will there be anyone left for the Joes?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #274

Sep 7, 2020

While I expect Throwdown and the others to make it out of the bunker in the next issue, I do wonder if I've guessed correctly on a final twist Larry Hama has been waiting for. Time will tell.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #275

Nov 30, 2020

With Throwdown's rescue complete over a series of battle-heavy splash pages, it will be interesting to see if the alliances made over this arc can continue, and how Cobra will react to the betrayal of both Zartan and Destro.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #276

Dec 17, 2020

It's the local contact, the fiery Zara, who does most of the killing here (including killing the man the team was sent to extract). Although the mission was a wash, the group gets out intact with Zara the only casualty.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #278

Feb 15, 2021

The issue highlights how the Joes are able to handle the situation with far more grace than Cobra, whose haste proves to be their downfall. G.I. JOE: A Real American Hero #278 offers another fun single issue adventure with the arctic setting allowing for Hama and Schoening to tap an unique subset of the Joe roster. The inclusion of Low-Light proves to be quite important, as he's able to stop the last of the Cobra pursuit.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #279

Apr 26, 2021

While the issue features a handful of recognizable Joes including Ace and Shipwreck, it's the vehicles who are showcased with much of the action taking place in the air (and the Cobra forces on the ground waiting for the Joes' retaliation). With the vehicles being the focus, Sanchez looks to be good choice as I definitely preferred his art on the life-size toys to his renderings of the human characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #280

May 12, 2021

Although we don't get H.I.S.S. Tanks, the issue does provide several notable Cobra cameos in the Rattler, Night Raven, and the Stinger along with Techno-Vipers (who save Wild Weasel and the Baroness from the burning wreckage). We also get plenty of action as Cobra fights Cobra when the Baroness and Bludd blow up city streets all over Paris over the life of the visiting dignitary. It's an interesting concept that makes Baroness the hero of the story, saving the man's life from Bludd and his enemies if only so Cobra can make further use of him.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #282

Jun 17, 2021

The disruption apparently hasn't ended the hearing just yet, or (somehow) convinced the panel of the very real threat Cobra presents to America and the world at large. That means there's still enough time for Cobra to strike again.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #284

Jul 21, 2021

Despite his appearance on the cover, Throwdown isn't part of the team involved in the hunt as most of the Joe's storyline highlights the skills of the new character Sherlock (with the others chipping in when the shooting starts). As for Al Kawbra, his face remains hidden in every panel suggesting his identity may yet play a role in the arc's end game.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #285

Aug 19, 2021

Both the escape of Overkill and the capture of Al Kawbra without discovering the end game for his master plans ends the arc with more dangling threads than I'd like, but the end of this arc does lay the foundation for a new threat sometime in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #286

Sep 28, 2021

While the issue doesn't offer the chance to see either character in classic costume, issue #286 does give us an interesting look back at the early relationship between the quiet Snake Eyes and the only friend who ever got him talking (and became the major source of what the other soldiers learned of Snake Eyes' past). Plus there's plenty of fun moments for fans of G.I. JOE such as discussion about Tommy's tattoo and unwillingness to talk about his family business.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #287

Nov 16, 2021

The first part of a multi-issue story, the issue is perfunctory without any real highlights. The Joes face a small bit of resistance here and there, and get to dress up as Cobra soldiers at one point, but the mission is carried off without a hitch. However, neither the truth of what Mindbender is after on the island nor value of the data Black Hat was able to download is revealed here. That, plus the absence of any big-name characters, leaves the reader with a somewhat incomplete experience.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #289

Mar 2, 2022

I'm not wild about the art from Casey Maloney. Also, the comic is also mostly set-up, including a lame running gag about the two women making a local cop look like a chump, before finally our protagonists pit their skills against the new androids who prove to be more than capable while also be able to hide in plain sight (which Cobra plans to take advantage of by staffing the B.A.T.s throughout its casinos. The action is fine, once the comic finally gets around to it, but I was hoping for more finally seeing these two pair up.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #290

Mar 30, 2022

In order to save one of their own, the Oktober Guard will need to raid Revanche and steal the robotic parts needed. Sadly, the group doesn't realize they are walking into a trap before it is too late. While the Guard manages to make it out alive with the parts the came for, Revanche isn't too worried about the theft as their control of the parts within the soldiers gives them an advantage for the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #292

May 19, 2022

As for Snake Eyes, we get a letter home from Sean to his dad about fitting into the role of the original Snake Eyes while Dawn struggles with more and more memories of Snake Eyes seeping in and blackouts which leave her worried. It sure feels like G.I. JOE, after the tease that was Snake Hunt, may be once again setting the stage for a possible Snake Eyes return? Time will tell.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #293

Jun 20, 2022

Very much a middle issue in the larger arc, there's not much here you'll miss if you skip ahead to the next issue as G.I. JOE: A Real American Hero #293 is really about putting characters in place for what will happen next rather than giving us anything all that memorable this time around.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #294

Jul 13, 2022

Elsewhere, Jinx hides out in Dr. Mindbender‘s lab where the scientist conveniently lays out all his plans to our heroic eavesdropper. Eventually the extraction team gets called in to help deal with all the B.A.T.S. There's plenty of action here, but in terms of story development G.I. JOE: A Real American Hero #294 feels very much like the previous issue – a middling issue of a series dragging its feet to the comic's 300th issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #296

Aug 9, 2022

It doesn't look like our heroes can hold out until the reinforcements reach them, and the sudden emergence of Mindbender's new clone of Genghis Khan (part of his new Serpentor experiments) isn't likely to make things easier for our hero. There's plenty of action here with the fate of our heroes in doubt. What happens if they should falter and fall into Cobra's clutches?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #297

Sep 6, 2022

There's plenty of action here, much of it featuring the two Snake Eyes as Sean and Dawn buy their teammates time to flee leaving the pieces of the original Snake Eyes in the one place where he could be reconstructed. With only 3 issue left, is Snake Eyes coming back? Will Genghis Khan fair better leading Cobra? And just how crazy will things get when the Joe reinforcements arrive?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #298

Oct 6, 2022

With everything now set up for an epic fight between the Joes and Cobra, the fate of Snake Eyes hanging in the balance, and the uncertainty of the new Serpentor, things are shaping up for an interesting (and likely action-packed) final two issues. Go Joe!

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2010) #300

Dec 26, 2022

It may not be quite worth the wait (or the cover price), but we get Snake Eyes and a wrap-around cover featuring an insane amount of characters. That's better than Marvel offered in the 90s.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2023) #301

Nov 21, 2023

While the tale felt wrapped up, there were plenty of loose ends left dangling and Larry Hama gets a change to continue expanding this world. Our heroes make it out, although not without casualties and loosing Cobra Commander who manages to make his escape. The larger question is what becomes of the mutated core characters of Cobra at ground zero in the explosion of the Mutant Virus Bomb? At how do events play into the long teased plans of Revanche?

View Issue       View Full Review
5
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero (2023) #302

Dec 28, 2023

Although they refer to themselves as mutants, call we all just admit this feels an awful lot like G.I JOE ZOMBIES?

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero: Silent Option #1

Sep 22, 2018

The issue also includes the beginning of a back-up story filling in new readers abut what little is known of Helix's past, during an unofficial briefing where the team is assigned to find Helix, which will also continue to play out over the course of the four-issue mini-series. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero: Silent Option #2

Nov 26, 2018

There's plenty of action in G.I. JOE: A Real American Hero – Silent Option #2, but the comic is still in the early stages. No doubt a heroic save will allow the JOEs to rescue Helix. The question then becomes, what next? Do they help Helix in her quest? Or try to prevent her from going any further down this dark road? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: A Real American Hero: Silent Option #4

Mar 21, 2019

Like the previous issues of the four-issue mini-series, issue #4 is going to appeal mainly to G.I. JOE fans with the action and carnage ratched-up for the final issue. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
G.I. Joe: Saturday Morning Adventures (2022) #1

Feb 21, 2022

For his first wish, on the counsel of Destro, Cobra Commander makes giant B.A.T.s which he unleashes on the Joes who successfully take them down. Turns out not the best wish. However, learning a bit from his mistakes, the second batch are improved as Cobra threatens three cities around the world. Round Two will may be harder for the Joes, but they seem ready for the challenge. Yo Joe!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe: Saturday Morning Adventures (2022) #2

Apr 8, 2022

G.I. JOE: A Real American Hero Saturday Morning Adventures #2 continues the fun of the first episode while beautifully recreating the look from the 80s cartoon.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
G.I. Joe: Saturday Morning Adventures (2022) #3

May 13, 2022

Issue #3 is notable for bringing back Cobra's gladiator arena first seen in "The Cobra Strikes while also the return of one of the Fatal Fluffies from "Rendezvous in the City of the Dead. And we get Snake Eyes vs. Storm Shadow!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe: Saturday Morning Adventures (2022) #4

Jun 27, 2022

The four-issue mini-series concludes with the genie forcing G.I. JOE and Cobra into battle where no one can escape until at least one side is wiped out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe: Snake Eyes #1

May 25, 2011

Robert Atkins knows how to draw Snake Eyes in both his silent somber and total kick-ass moments so well that I don't want to see anyone else's take on him for a long time. It's hard to get both right and Atkins seems to do it effortlessly here. He even looks cool in his semi-ridiculous Hoth gear. The story, from Chuck Dixon, ain't too shabby either. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe: Snake Eyes - Agent of COBRA #1

Jan 29, 2015

The comic itself is vague about how long Snake Eyes has been missing or how long it has been since he signed on with Cobra. What is clear is his current mission which includes rescuing Destro from custody. The mini-series is set to run for five-issues suggesting that Snake Eyes' time with Destro and Cobra may be limited (and one has to ask is that even Snake Eyes under the mask?). The promise of Storm Shadow's appearance in the series and yet another confrontation between the two should answer several questions about Snake Eyes' short and long term future. But for now we can just be happy he's back in action once more. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
G.I. Joe: Snake Eyes - Agent of COBRA #3

Apr 1, 2015

Although lighter on action than last month's issue, after Billy steps in to commit a foolishly heroic action things go from bad to worse as both assassins and the Arashikage Clan send men after him setting up what you would assume would be an action-heavy fourth issue. And of course we still have a Snake Eyes/Storm Shadow confrontation to come before the series concludes. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: Special Missions #1

Mar 29, 2013

I'm glad to see Dixon getting another G.I. JOE title, although the covert team is sorely missing the most covert JOE of all – Snake Eyes. We'll have to wait and see if the still presumed dead JOE turns up or if Dixon has any plans for the masked man's protege Helix in the coming months. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: Special Missions #2

Apr 10, 2013

Although there aren't any big moments here, issue #2 moves the story forward by laying the foundation of trouble for our heroes, and villains, in the form of mutiny, sharks, and Scarlett's own nightmares being so close to her final encounter withSnake Eyes. That said, there's certainly enough here for me to keep reading to see how the storyline plays out (and keep hoping that sooner or later Snake Eyes will make an appearance outside of Scarlett's dreams). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: Special Missions #3

May 25, 2013

Forgive me for the water metaphor, but three issues in the storyline still feels like its treading water. I'm still interested to see where things are going, and trust Dixon to get there, but I would like events to move forward a little faster. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: Special Missions #4

Jul 9, 2013

Although we didn't get as much Scarlett as expected, this is good end to a pretty good opening arc although it still hasn't sold me completely on the series. Next month: Dreadnoks. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: Special Missions #5

Jul 24, 2013

G.I. JOE: Special Missions #5 does a good job of reintroducing Zartan and giving an explanation of how and why the master of disguise would put a crew like the Dreadnoks together. The issue introduces Buzzer, Ripper, Thrasher, Crusher, and an unnamed character I'm guessing to be either Zanya or Zarana. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: Special Missions #6

Aug 17, 2013

With the focus on Zartan and the JOEs we don't get as much of the Dreadnoks as I'd like (who only really see cheering on during the various death traps they can think up), but there's certainly enough here for fans of the characters to check out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: Special Missions #7

Oct 3, 2013

Zartan's mad plans are (thankfully) short-lived and we won't have to suffer through a battle of clones. But his abandonment of the Dreadnoks also suggests that might not be seeing them again going forward (and least not under his command). I've got to admit, this makes me a little sad. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: Special Missions #8

Oct 14, 2013

I'm pretty sure I wouldn't want to see the series continue without some of the JOEs bigger names getting into the action as well, but for a one-off tale G.I. JOE: Special Missions #8 works pretty well and reminds readers about the diversity of the ranks and skill sets of the organization. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: Special Missions #9

Dec 6, 2013

G.I. JOE: Special Missions #9 is an interesting issue because it reminds us that there are many jobs various JOEs are called on to do and not all of them are as heroic as those on the front lines. He may not fit the mold, but Bildocker is a vial member of the team. Although we only get a single issue for his story, I wouldn't mind seeing Bildocker pop-up again sometime down the line. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: Special Missions #10

Dec 19, 2013

Despite the timing and continuity problems (why is the Baroness all of the sudden wearing a completely different version of her basic costume?), I'm looking forward to see where writer Chuck Dixon takes things from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: Special Missions #11

Jan 24, 2014

The introduction of Helix, and the possibility of seeing the still MIA Snake Eyes‘s two lady friends attempt to work together despite their history, adds a nice wrinkle to the storyline as the search for Destro continues. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: Special Missions #12

Feb 24, 2014

I'm hoping the inclusion of Helix to the Special Missions team continues after wrapping up the current “Destro Must Die” arc next month. Aside from finally forcing both Scarlett and Helix to deal with each other and the loss of Snake Eyes it would also add another kick-ass female character to a team that at times has lacked some star power. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: Special Missions #13

Apr 8, 2014

After bringing her in, Helix isn't given much do in the arc's conclusion (but you can say the same for bothScarlett and Mainframe as well) in a very Destro-centeric issue. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: Special Missions #14

Apr 19, 2014

Following the cancellation of G.I. JOE: Cobra Files and the nearing end of IDW's main title as well it appears the company is set once again for a soft reboot of their various JOE titles. Special Missions may not have always been great, but it was consistently solid and goes out on a high note here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: The Cobra Files #1

Apr 16, 2013

G.I. JOE: Cobra Files assembles an unusual assortment of characters for this team. I'm not sure there's enough to keep me coming back every single month, but I may pop in from time to time to see how Chameleon and her team are fairing. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: The Cobra Files #2

May 28, 2013

G.I. JOE: The Cobra Files #2 is a solid issue that gives us a closer look at how the team does business, and how far they are willing to go to stop Cobra. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: The Cobra Files #3

Jun 23, 2013

Although light on action there's plenty of story here that sets up a big throwdown between the team and the Night Creepers to come. This issue also gives us Tomax continuing to play his mind games on Clockspring and turn one of Chameleon's most loyal soldiers against her. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: The Cobra Files #4

Aug 1, 2013

Even if I find Chameleon intriguing, I'm not quite sold on the rest of the team. I've always found Flint to be a blander version of Duke and the wild cards of Clockspring and Tomax haven't quite worked for me so far. I'm also not wild about the nuclear event which never feels as big and dangerous as it should. That said, I did like this issue giving us Chameleon's take on her female teammates and would like to see that kind of insight continue. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: The Cobra Files #5

Aug 14, 2013

There are some nice touches here by new artist Werther Dell'Edera who uses various pastels to color Clockspring's flashbacks but consistently paints the current version character in shadows to further drive home the man's questionable state of mind and dangerous nature. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: The Cobra Files #6

Sep 10, 2013

To be honest, I've never been that big a fan of Flint who I've always seen as a blander Duke. This issue does a good job in fleshing out and selling the character as the man willing to take the job that needs to be done (whether or not he believes he's a good fit for the assignment). As to whether the team (and comic's) days truly are numbered, I guess we'll just have to wait and see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: The Cobra Files #7

Oct 6, 2013

The tension which has been building in the mishmashed team since the first issue is finally boiling over. The only question is who will survive, and what side will some of them ultimately end up on? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
G.I. Joe: The Cobra Files #8

Nov 12, 2013

Heading into next month's final issue of the title it appears no matter who survives Tomax's betrayal, Flint's team is done. I don't see IDW willing to kill any major characters such as Flint or Lady Jaye, but the setting for the finale leaves the fate of several of the team's lesser members, possibly even Chameleon (who doesn't quite fit in either of the other current JOE titles) a bit more uncertain. I'm been meaning to drop at least one of the G.I. JOE titles for awhile now, and it looks like IDW's made the choice for me. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
G.I. Joe: The Cobra Files #9

Dec 27, 2013

Although we know Flint, Tomax, Chameleon (and possibly Lady Jaye) all make it out before the JOEs base is reduced to rubble the final fate of the rest of the team is far less certain, including the computer expert Clockspring whose development much of the series centered around. It's not a great final issue, but it does wrap-up the major storyline and leave the door open to new possibilities for all of these characters (at least the ones who aren't buried under tons of rubble). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Gargoyles (2022) #1

Dec 12, 2022

Quickly getting readers up-to-date with a show that ran for 78 episodes nearly 30 years ago is no easy task, but Elisa's narration works well with short introductions of the show's mythology, quick intros for the main characters, and cluing us in to major events such as the gang war that is brewing in New York since the Gargoyles helped put both local crime bosses behind bars, all while hopefully not boring longtime fans. As the issue concludes we also learn Maggie is going into labor to deliver a child several characters have a keen interest in, leading into next month's issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Gargoyles (2022) #2

Jan 24, 2023

The second issue continues to leave breadcrumbs for new readers while attempting to not pause too often for longtime fans of the Gargoyles cartoon.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ghost-Spider (2019) #1

Aug 29, 2019

While I'm curious to see Gwen explore the new world, I'm far less interested in the politics back in her home dimension which apparently will continue to play a large role in the new series. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ghost-Spider (2019) #3

Oct 30, 2019

Although the Man-Wolf isn't going away, it looks like the Jackal (either or both) has emerged as the looming threat for Gwen (no matter which world she's on). We do get another cameo from Peter Parker, but there are other Spider-characters who know more about the Jackal, will either of them make an appearance? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Ghost-Spider (2019) #4

Dec 16, 2019

While it's interesting to see Gwen overwhelmed, which we saw at the beginning of the relaunched title, it's also nice to see her breathe a bit and get a foothold on the new life she's carved out for herself. There's plenty of trouble on the way (including one of the Warrens' plans to destroy Gwen's suit), but that's a problem to deal with tomorrow. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Ghost-Spider (2019) #7

Feb 27, 2020

Is this the beginning of a Fantastic Four in Gwen's world? And if so, will the Storms follow The Thinker down a dark path? Also, with Gwen being distracted by the sudden appearance of the Storms, what else has she missed happening on both Earths? For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ghost-Spider (2019) #9

May 20, 2020

What isn't addressed is the multiple appearances of Ghost Spider turning into Gwenom for the second straight issue. Does no one notice? Or do they just thing it's Gwen being Gwen? Obviously Gwenom and the Richards (including the looming Maker) are going to play major roles in Gwen's life in the issues to come, but for now our super-gal seems carefree (or as carefree as she can get).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ghost-Spider (2019) #10

Jun 23, 2020

Before the end, the comic does offer some nice final father/daughter moments as well as some background to the Storms, their origin of their powers, and what befell poor Doctor Doom for helping them. The selfish duo appear to want to be heroes, but from these glimpses, and their behavior towards Gwen, you have to wonder if that's possible.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Ghost-Spider (2019) Annual #1

Sep 11, 2019

Annuals are rarely the best stories (and you are always paying a higher price for them). Ghost Spider Annual #1 isn't bad, but (like most annuals) is mostly forgettable. Releasing one immediately after launching a series feels incredibly awkward, but the story offers plenty of action for our heroine and cameos from several (albeit fake versions) of Spidey's biggest baddies. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Giant Robot Hellboy (2023) #1

Oct 31, 2023

Given the absolute craziness of the concept, throwing the reader right into the middle without explanation (kind of like how Hellboy must feel) offers plenty of off-the-wall fun. Now comes the hard part in making this story make sense.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Giant Robot Hellboy (2023) #3

Jan 1, 2024

The three-issue mini-series feels every bit the fever dream that came from sketches. I think a one-shot would have been fine here for the concept, especially as it leaves Hellboy back where he started with apparently no memory of events.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Giant-Size X-Men (2020): Jean Grey And Emma Frost #1

Mar 10, 2020

Writer Jonathan Hickman provides the outline of a story here which Russell Dauterman expands on over the course of an extra-sized issue. The easy joke would be to play on the two women's feelings for Cyclops, and his feelings for them, but neither Hickman nor Dauterman rises to that bait or play on any underling animosity between the two characters. Honestly, the last X-Men reboot has done nothing but confuse me on character, timeline, and plot. Stripping as much of that away as possible led to the first enjoyable issue I've had with the new reality the characters now find themselves in. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Glitterbomb #1

Sep 14, 2016

Glitterbomb isn't the kind of comic I usually pick up, but the premise intrigued me enough to give it a shot. I'm far from sold on the concept after only a single issue, but Frances is an intriguing character and I am somewhat curious to see where the comic goes. Does she attempt to hide new murderous side, do the police come after her, does the change actually affect her life (and career) in any way for the better? I'm not sure there's enough here to keep me around long enough to find out the answers to these questions, but it is a solid first issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Godzilla in Hell #1

Aug 1, 2015

The setting does allow for any number of bizarrely-designed threats Godzilla might encounter. Although I like the look of Godzilla here, his desolate surroundings and nightmarish antagonists don't do much for me. Readers more geared to horror comics are likely to get far more out of both the first issue and ongoing series than I will. Still, despite not explaining how he got there, Stokoe delivers a brand-new type of Godzilla story fans of the creature may appreciate. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Gotham City Sirens #18

Jan 4, 2011

While I'm not the biggest fan of how the issue uses Talia, at least it's better than what Grant Morrison did with the character. This title has had some uneven stories lately but this one is worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Gotham City Sirens #19

Feb 8, 2011

I also enjoyed how writer Peter Calloway juxtaposed the Catwoman/Batman relationship with that of Harley and the Joker. Harley's internalizing of the pain Selina has endured at her relationship with a man who wouldn't and couldn't give himself to her fully sparks the crazy fires one more time as Harley sets out to find Mr. J. for a final confrontation. It's not a great issue but the scene between Catwoman and Harley alone makes it worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Gotham City Sirens #21

Apr 6, 2011

There's also a B-story as Poison Ivy and Catwoman bicker over whether or not to help their friend. Ivy throws down an ultimatum which Catwoman ignores. Is this the end of the Sirens as we know them or will Catwoman risk everything to help her friends? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Grayson #1

Jul 14, 2014

With beautiful art from Mikel Janin which captures the character's acrobatic roots and a fight sequence against Midnighter reminding us Grayson can hold his own, the first issue offers a glimpse at a retrieval op for Dick as he continues to learn the ropes of the organization. I'm far from sold on Spyral itself, but there's a lot to like about this version of Dick Grayson. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Grayson #2

Aug 13, 2014

Also of interest is the fact that Midnighter returns for a cameo, still fuming at being beaten by an unknown Spyral agent meaning we're likely to get another battle between the pair fairly soon. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Green Arrow (2010) #1

Jun 27, 2010

Had the entire issue been more lighthearted and campy this new path for our hero may have been easier to swallow. Instead the series seems to be stubbornly stuck on the path laid down for the character in the best-forgotten (and never, ever, mentioned again) Cry for Justice mini-series. I can't help wonder if writer J.T. Krul is having a good laugh at all of our expense.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Arrow (2016) #1

Jun 21, 2016

Although the issue starts off celebrating the good Ollie is doing in the city, it ends on downward spiral as betrayal after betrayal is likely to have lasting ramifications for the Emerald Archer in the coming months. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Arrow (2016) #2

Jul 9, 2016

There's still quite a bit of unanswered questions here, but the mystery is working for rather against the series' opening first arc. Even if I'm a bit concerned with the cult itself, I'm still very much still onboard with this new direction for the Emerald Archer. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Arrow (2016) #3

Jul 26, 2016

Green Arrow #3 continues to play things close to the vest. The Ninth Circle's discovery that Oliver Queen is still alive should hasten their response to take down the archer. However, before Ollie can deal with his deadly new enemies he'll have to deal with the Seattle PD. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Arrow (2016) #4

Aug 10, 2016

Along with the choice to redesign Green Arrow's costume to more closely resemble that of the television show, the introduction of Diggle should also help bring in Arrow fans who want some familiar touch stones. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Arrow (2016) #5

Aug 24, 2016

Green Arrow #5 is most notable for Oliver and Dinah's reunion, although the emerald archer's choice to destroy the vast fortunes collected by the nebulous group of evil villains (quite possibly containing his own fortunes) seems to point to Mr. Queen taking a more street-hero brand of justice in the new series without his family fortune to fall back on. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Arrow (2016) #6

Sep 13, 2016

The issue works well, and I'm also pleased with the new art direction as Stephen Byrne takes over for Juan Ferreyra as the comic's new artist. I'll be curious to see how long the comic sticks with Emiko in the lead (with Ollie only in flashbacks). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Arrow (2016) #8

Oct 10, 2016

Green Arrow #8 also marks a change in the artistic duties of the book as Otto Schmidt takes over. If one issue is any indication, Schmidt is the right man for the job (particularly for how he draws Black Canary). I'm hoping he sticks around for many issues to come. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Arrow (2016) #10

Nov 9, 2016

Although awkward in parts (like just how exactly did Dinah manage to brand the expensive cocktail dress in a handful of minutes?), there's definitely some fun to be had here in the heroes' struggle to board the train and their search for the assassin. The unique locale certain gives the issue an interesting slant, especially now that Ollie, Dinah, and Diggle are trapped aboard with angry passengers, guards, and an escaped assassin, without any way to escape. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Arrow (2016) #12

Dec 10, 2016

While I'm unsure about Ollie and Dinah actually playing Robin Hood and Maid Marian from the woods, Green Arrow #12 does set-up an interesting next arc. Oliver Queen's name is already tarnished. What happens when Green Arrow's name is as well? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Arrow (2016) #14

Jan 11, 2017

Merlyn's return gives Green Arrow and Black Canary a new cagey adversary to deal with. Other than simply torturing Ollie, I'm curious to see just why Merlyn has returned and what he has in store for our hero. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Arrow (2016) #16

Feb 8, 2017

Even if Green Arrow #16 lacks a big super-villain threat (Merlyn only appears late in a cameo), the issue works well focusing on Ollie's reunion with Emi and earning a big win for himself and his city. Merlyn's sudden reappearance, and the death of Westberg (which is a deep personal blow to Green Arrow after finally finding a true ally on the police force he could trust), lead into the “Emerald Outlaw” conclusion in the next issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Arrow (2016) #26

Jul 13, 2017

Along with the team-up Green Arrow #26 reveals that the Ninth Circle is in to more than just framing goateed vigilantes for murder as the heroes discover the Black Hole (yet another villanious organization tied to the Circle) is performing Speed Force experiments. With more questions than either started out with, the pair decide to continue their team-up. I'll be curious to see where their journey takes them (if I can stomach that awful Flash costume for another issue). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Arrow (2016) #29

Aug 22, 2017

Most notable for Green Arrow and Batman coming to blows, and the appearance of the Court of Owls, the issue doesn't offer the vigilante much more information before the Dark Knight Detective points the hero to a different target. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Arrow (2016) #30

Sep 20, 2017

Ending on a cliffhanger, Ollie may actually need more help than his bluster and ego will allow him to admit. The subplot also leads Black Canary and Emiko into trouble while tracking down the human traffickers who have alluded them until now. Looks like Ollie isn't the only one in over his head. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Arrow (2016) #50

Mar 13, 2019

Ollie's discovery at the end of the issue cements his disappointment with all things hero related, apprently moving the Emerald Archer off the grid (again). Hrm. As for Black Canary, she does help Ollie escape but can't go with him as DC opens a new path for the character to explore sans archer. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Arrow (2023) #1

May 2, 2023

Confusing at times, by purposefully not explaining events and dropping breadcrumbs like Amanda Waller's hand in whatever is going on, the new Team Arrow book feels a bit overcrowded, but with Lian's abduction I'll be curious to see where the focus goes from here (although I'd guess we'll get continuing storylines from both Earth and Ollie and Lian on the alien world).

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Green Arrow (2023) #2

Jun 5, 2023

The second issue doesn't attempt to make sense or shed light on events of the first issue. However, we do see what Oliver Queen has been up to since being stranded on an alien world (his basic street-level heroics taking on space mobsters and the like) and Cheshire Cat joins in on his latest run-in with a paid enforcer to take Ollie down.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Green Arrow (2023) #3

Jul 10, 2023

The only thing that works in the issue is a separate interaction between Roy Harper and Peacemaker testing their skills (although the actual competition takes place mostly off-panel). Yeesh.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Arrow: Rebirth #1

Jun 3, 2016

Green Arrow: Rebirth #1 is a solid issue that resets Ollie and Dinah, clues the reader into the new status quo, and blends a bit of both the classic and recent interpretations of the characters for something new. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Hornet (2018) #3

May 17, 2018

Issue #3 of the series takes Mulan and reporter Tai to Instanbul where the run into the missing Britt who has been targeted by a secret cabal of wealthy individuals who want to rule the world from the shadows and the deadly Espada assassins sent to do the group's dirty work. On the run, will Mulan keep the green mask and cloak allowing Britt to perhaps take on the role of sidekick? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Hornet (2020) #1

Jul 30, 2020

While I wasn't expecting an alien story in a Green Hornet comic, Marques and writer Scott Lobdell sell the 1950s feel of the idea fairly well and I'm curious to see where the story goes from here.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Hornet (2020) #2

Sep 16, 2020

While the astronaut may not have proven to be an alien, there is the question about the identity of the pilot who crashed to Earth and the location of both the mysterious baby and the Sentinel's missing reporter. Those questions lead the Green Hornet and Kato to Area 51 in a solid second issue of 50s pulp science fiction.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Green Lantern (2005) #54

May 27, 2010

I thought I taw a puddy tat. I did! I did tee a puddy tat! There's a new Red Lantern in town and he's a cat. Okay, that's kinda cool. I think I'll name him Fluffy. Yeah, Fluffy the Red Lantern. Bask in the awesomeness of Fluffy the Red Lantern! Sadly we also need to discuss the story… The mystery of the white lantern deepens as we are shown images of other entities like Parallax and Ion. Great, there are more of them? I think I feel a migraine coming on. So to recap: Red Lantern Fluffy – awesome, more multi-colored space symbiotes – not so much. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Green Lantern (2005) #60

Dec 20, 2010

I'm not sure whether anything can save the supremely disappointing Brightest Day, but the involvement of Krona is at least something new that I don't hate about the the event. However, even Krona's involement doesn't make this badly thought-out issue any easier to swallow.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Green Lantern (2005) #62

Feb 22, 2011

There's so much wrong with this issue I don't know where to begin. The story is just gawdaful. Hal's refusal of help makes no sense for a guy who's known to use whatever advantage and leverage he can get over the years. Nor does his protection of Atrocitus given his most recent murderous offenses on Earth. I've also got to complain about the inconsistency of Doug Mahnke's artwork over the issue " he can't even get Batman's costume right (he puts Bruce into Dick Grayson's costume).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Lantern (2005) #67

Jul 20, 2011

We'll have to see how both of these events play out in the DC reboot, but I'm betting Jordan won't be without a ring for very long. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Lantern (2011) #1

Sep 19, 2011

Although I'm a big GL fan, it felt Johns had long ago tapped the good Green Lantern stories he wanted to tell. I wasn't expecting much from this first issue, and I'm glad I was wrong. I don't know how long Sinestro is going to hold onto his ring, or how long it will take before Hal Jordan recovers his, but I'm willing to stick around to find out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Lantern (2011) #2

Oct 19, 2011

Geoff Johns writing continues to chip away at that legacy in this issue where Hal is dumbfounded by Sinestro's use of the ring in saving multiple victims of a bridge collapse (and the bridge itself) all at once. Shouldn't the greatest Green Lantern have known this trick? I think so. The story still works, but I'm more than a little concerned at the longterm effects these less-than-subtle changes will have on one of my favorite characters (and one of the cornerstones of DC's New 52). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Lantern (2011) #3

Nov 16, 2011

Despite the odd ending that suggests Sinestro might be replacing Hal Jordan on a more permanent basis than anyone assumed, the issue works well enough. However, I am growing tired of Sinestro showing up Hal in every single issue. Once again we get another instance of Hal not knowing how to use his ring. Seriously? I understand you want to show Sinestro as as more experienced, but removing all of Hal's years of service (which didn't get rebooted, remember) doesn't seem like the best option. I like that Hal enjoys his ring, now lets see him know how to use it. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Lantern (2011) #4

Dec 18, 2011

It's not a great issue, but it is a step up from last month that leaves us still in the dark what the long term plans for Sinestro's role in the New 52 are to be. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Lantern (2011) #5

Jan 17, 2012

I'm not sure any character in the New 52 has fallen as far in terms of stature in his own title as Hal Jordan has. Seriously, why is Johns so intent on turning Hal Jordan into Kyle Rayner – a character who got the ring out of chance and has still never mastered it? Although I like the title, and I'm glad to see that the Hal/Carol relationship is as co-dependent as ever, I'd like for Hal to actually feel like the hero of old. Where is the universe's greatest Green Lantern? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Lantern (2011) #6

Feb 14, 2012

I really enjoyed this issue. It was nice, given the tumultuous events of Jordan's life over the past few years, to see him given a chance to enjoy life – even without a ring. Of course this respite was going to be short lived, but now we'll find out just how far Sinestro is willing to go to stop the future he glimpsed from happening. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Lantern (2011) #7

Mar 17, 2012

The Sinestro/Hal/Carol story continues to work but I'm less sure about where the comic seems headed next with the focus shifting to the Indigo Tribe and the Guardians search for “the first Lantern.” Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Lantern (2011) #8

Apr 18, 2012

After months of treating him as little more than a guy who never bothered to learn what his ring could really do, writer Geoff Johns finally showcases Hal Jordan and his ability to make it through several Indigo Lanterns with only a partially charged ring. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Lantern (2011) #9

May 12, 2012

I would have liked to have gotten the Indigo Tribe backstory a couple of issues back (or even way back when the group was first introduced well before the New 52 reboot). The introduction of the Guardians as the universe's greatest threat opens up several new possibilities and alliances. The idea of making a remorseful army of the worst creatures in the galaxy is an intriguing one. However, it has one major flaw which Hal Jordan stares both Hal and Sinestro down in the comic's final panel. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Lantern (2011) #10

Jun 16, 2012

I'm pretty sure that Black Lanterns weren't at (or anywhere near) the top of the list of what DC's reboot was missing, but it looks like they're back. The comic does give us some more strong interplay with Sinestro and Hal as well show us how much Sinestro respects Hal's ability and bravery (regardless of what he may say to the Earthman's face). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Green Lantern (2011) #11

Aug 2, 2012

We also get further teased about the Guardians upcoming plans and the mysterious “Third Army” which will apparently replace the Corps as the heroes make a short trip to Korugar to search for the Book of Black hidden in a corner of Sinestro's Bat Cave. Yeah, even Sinestro has Batman-envy. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Green Lantern (2011) #12

Aug 24, 2012

The main story between Jordan and Sinestro and the zombies isn't all that interesting, and the reveal of the Book of Black's prophecy is troubling if that's Geoff Johns' plan for the character. Sligthly more interesting is the Guardians plans for the other Green Lanterns of Earth who have been singled out as their biggest obstacle to removing the Corps. The choice of Renato Guedes to replace Doug Mahnke‘s art on the title also means the comic has a less crisp look and feel than the previous issues of the title. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Lantern (2011) #43

Aug 15, 2015

Following the disappearance of the Corps, Hal's journey for answers (with his opinionated ship and passengers) takes him to the Source Wall on the edge of the known universe where he runs into a bit of trouble with Relic which provides most of the issue's action. Whether or not the storyline works at least it is bringing in a fresh take to the character and his cosmic adventures (which could easily have all the life squeezed out of them by the return of the zombie lanterns who are better left buried and forgotten). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Lantern (2011) #47

Dec 21, 2015

I've actually enjoyed Green Lantern's return to more space-centric title, but Green Lantern #47 works in allowing Hal to reconnect with his family (and get a much needed makeover).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Lantern (2011) #48

Jan 12, 2016

The final few pages of the comic continue to tease the appearance of a Parallax from a different reality. After discovering the destruction of Oa in this reality, Parallax heads to Earth in search of Hal Jordan. Why his other self is the super-villain's primary target isn't clear but it does continue to tease the eventual meeting between the pair. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Green Lantern (2011) #49

Mar 1, 2016

Green Lantern #49 is an underwhelming issue that makes us wish Hal Jordan was back in space as his return to Earth has left much to be desired. That said, I am curious to see just what DC has planned for Hal vs. Hal. Given that I'm not completely sold on this version of the character, I have to wonder whether or not DC has the stones to turn the book over to Parallax and really shake up the balance of power within the DCU. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Green Lantern (2011) #50

Mar 19, 2016

It appears that there will be consequences to Hal's actions and that Parallax will continue to hide on the fringes for likely several more issues before we see a rematch. Great, more cock-teasing. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Lantern (2011) #52

May 10, 2016

One of DC's major struggles with the New 52 was how unprepared they with decisions about what was canon for its characters. These inconsistencies led to lots of growing pains throughout the New 52 run. Hopefully the company has a little better idea where it wants to go with Rebirth. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Green Lantern (2011) Annual #1

Sep 5, 2012

The Third Army itself, a zombie-like Borg race that assimilates and converts others into its ranks, doesn't really interest me. And removing my favorite GL (and Sinestro, whose arc back in the Corps has been pretty good) before the real battle even starts sure doesn't instill me with much confidence. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Lantern (2018) #5

Mar 14, 2019

I haven't been the biggest fan of the Darkstars (who have basically assumed the role of the Sinestro Corps as the evil army to be defeated), but writer Grant Morrison provides an interesting way to use them here. Given that rogue Hal Jordan stories are far from new, there's plenty of history to help support the idea of Hal Jordan breaking from the Corps. That said, I don't really want to see Jordan in the role of a Darkstar, nor go far enough to keep his cover intact (which apparently will begin with killing an old friend?). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Lantern (2018) #6

Apr 16, 2019

Though we know the universe still exists, just what actions Hal took remain a mystery as is the fate of the Green Lantern. Just where have he, the Darkstars, and the U-Bomb been taken? For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Lantern (2021) #1

Apr 14, 2021

While the Guardians in interest in Keli was inevitable, as was the confrontation it creates, the evolving role of the race that has always seen themselves as above and superior to the rest of the universe does represent a rather dramatic shift. Despite the interruption, the conclave is successful leaving the Lanterns in place as the universe's official protectors.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Lantern (2021) #3

Jun 10, 2021

The storyline looks to take advantage of these unique circumstances to provide and intriguing collection of Lanterns, while also offering stories of other Lanterns making due without their rings. I'm also happy to see Sojourner finally make it into a core Green Lantern title.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Lantern (2021) #4

Jul 13, 2021

There's still no sign of Hal Jordan who was teased at the end of the last issue so it's unsure what the greatest Green Lantern may be up to. We do however get confirmation on some of the Lanterns who have been taken out by the attack which sadly appears to include Arisia Rrab. Couldn't they have killed Kyle, instead?

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Green Lantern (2021) #5

Aug 11, 2021

The Stewart story has been a slog for most of the comic's run, so it's good to see that finally come to a close (even if it continues to take up too many pages). Now there are Lanterns to find, mysteries to uncover, and where the hell is Hal Jordan?

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Green Lantern (2021) #6

Sep 21, 2021

In the B-story that won't die, the comic also catches back up with John Stewart, the refugees he rescued from the void, and the rest of the former Lanterns heading off to save Kilowog from some Gold Centurions (whatever those are).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Lantern (2021) Annual: 2021

Sep 20, 2021

As to the second question, it appears one of the few Lanterns with a working ring, Hal Jordan, has remained on Earth to keep it safe (while the rest of the universe goes to hell). While perhaps not the best use of the character, I guess this makes sense in his role as the Green Lantern of Earth.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Lantern (2023) #1

May 16, 2023

Although the shift back and forth from one month ago to present gets annoying, the issue succeeds in setting the stage and tone of the new series. I would like to see a little less mopey Hal in future issues, but the story serves a purpose in these early issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Lantern (2023) #2

Jun 20, 2023

For a comic I've enjoyed the bulk of I'm a bit concerned where its headed from here, and just where Hal's story will get shunted off to, but this issue at least is another fun read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Lantern Corps (2011) #1

Sep 28, 2011

In need of some fresh air (so to speak) the pair take a trip to Oa and learn that two Green Lanterns have recently been killed in Sector 3599. Grabbing a team that includes Brik, Isamot Kol, Vandor, Hannu, and Sheriff Mardin set out to find the cause but are unprepared for what they find. A solid opener. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Green Lantern: Emerald Warriors #1

Aug 12, 2010

And, surprise surprise, it seems the Red Lantern isn't to be trusted. Really? Wow, thanks Peter J. Tomasi for spelling that out for me in multiple panels! Yes, it does give you plenty of Guy Gardner in all his glory but the rest…meh. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Green Lantern: Emerald Warriors #13

Aug 31, 2011

Since it's creation this comic has been hit-and-miss for me from month to month. The last issue works well-enough (even if its somewhat hamfisted), but if you don't have nostalgia for JLI I'm not sure the story is going to hold up on its own. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Lanterns #2

Jul 13, 2016

Although we have yet to see a direct confrontation between the two groups, Green Lanterns #2 does include appearances by Red Lanterns Atrocitus, Bleez, and (the most awesome Red Lantern of them all) Dex-Starr. With the Red Lanterns unleashing hell on Earth I'm guessing we won't have to wait too long before a showdown (and more Dex-Starr!!!). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Lanterns #6

Sep 21, 2016

The opening arc of the series concludes as Jessica Cruz is able to overcome her doubts and anxiety and save her partner from the Red Lanterns. Although Jessica and Simon are successful in destroying the Hell Tower and driving the Red Lanterns from Earth, things are far from settled as Atrocitus and Dex-Starr have left a gift deep within the Earth's core which will one day create all new problems for the Green Lanterns. However, Jessica's effect on Bleez also suggests that something has fundamentally changed for Atrocitus' most valued lieutenant. We'll just have to wait and see what that means for both Corps. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Lanterns #8

Oct 13, 2016

While the issue does give us a bit Rami's backstory and the history of the Phantom Ring, the main focus here is holiday shenanigans and the Lanterns tracking down the runaway Guardian. Now that they've found him, and taken the ring under their protection, Simon and Jessica have a new responsibility to live up to. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Lanterns #9

Oct 30, 2016

I still have some doubts about the Phantom Ring storyline overall, but basing much of the story on Lamninski and his obsession does make me more curious to see where this tale will go. Even if it's mostly background and set-up for the story about to unfold, it's still worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Lanterns #11

Nov 21, 2016

However, the sequence does reveal something about the Phantom Ring and its properties (which are far more complex than expected). With Laminski's transformation from a Green to an Orange Lantern we have to wonder just how much power the Phantom Ring has (and how much harm the good-intentioned fool could cause without meaning to). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Green Lanterns #20

Apr 13, 2017

The comic also includes a cameo by John Stewart and Guy Gardner discussing the rogue Guardian Rami and the Green Lanterns of sector 2814. It sounds like Jessica and Simon are going to have some company. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Lanterns #24

Jun 15, 2017

The issue's B-story continues foreshadowing trouble for the Corps with the the machinations of Volthoom (who the rest of the Guardians of the Universe are currently unaware is living in the body of Rami) who hopes to find the original rings for his own nefarious purposes (to rule them all? heh), and restore the power he had before the Corps existence. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Lanterns: Rebirth #1

Jun 6, 2016

As all the Rebirth issues should do, Green Lantern: Rebirth #1 introduces us to our characters, even giving us a cameo by Hal Jordan, and teasing multiple threats to come including a mysterious artifact and the return of the Red Lanterns. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Grendel vs. The Shadow (2014) #1

Sep 11, 2014

A fan of both Hunter Rose and The Shadow, the first issue of the three-issue mini-series is a joy to read. The double-sized prestige format makes the comic a little pricey, but it delivers in both story and style pitting my favorite of Wagner's creations against a hero nearly as mysterious and deadly as Grendel himself. Best of the Week.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Grendel vs. The Shadow (2014) #2

Oct 17, 2014

Despite the $6 price-tag, Matt Wagner again delivers with a terrific double-sized prestige comic pitting the iconic hero against Wagner's greatest creation. Following the battle, much of the comic is set aside for each man to contemplate his enemy. Hunter Rose also continues to make a professional splash in his new home, and charm a crime boss' daughter as well. And Grendel gets the best of The Shadow not once but twice. First, despite his defeat, he survives and escapes their initial encounter (something few villains can brag about accomplishing). And second, he immediately recognizes Cranston as the man behind the scarf setting up another battle in the final issue. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Grendel vs. The Shadow (2014) #3

Nov 18, 2014

In the end both warriors are bloodied and battered but Grendel, despite his hurt ego to go along with is injuries, manages to return back to his own time. His inability to find any mention of his adventures in the past suggests Grendel's journey wasn't just through time but also through an alternate dimension where crime does not pay. Worth a look

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians 3000 #1

Oct 9, 2014

Once the time loop is broken it will be interesting to see which versions of Vance Astro, Charlie-27, Martinex, Yondu, and Starhawk the comic leaves us with (I'm hoping for the starry-version of Starhawk). Although I'm not overjoyed with some of the heavy ‘roid rage action scenes by Gerardo Sandoval, it's fun to see these characters back in action once more. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Guardians 3000 #2

Nov 21, 2014

Featuring plenty of action, the second issue suffers from the same roid rage muscle art from Gerardo Sandoval that hurt last month's issue. And when he attempts to tone down that style characters often look oddly stretched as if they are standing in front of a fun house mirror. I gave the art in the first issue a pass because I was so happy to have the Guardians back, but with this issue no missing three of its core members (the real Starhaw, Aleta, and Nikki) while dragging its feet while developing its reality-bending plot it feels less and less like the team I know and love. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Guardians of the Galaxy (2008) #6

Oct 22, 2008

All in all a fun, action packed, issue with the last few pages leading to perhaps some big changes in the next issue? Guess we'll have to wait and see.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #0.1

Mar 4, 2013

My only real complaint with the issue comes in the final few panels where the story skips forward to the present with Star-Lord telling the story to Tony Stark and the rest of the Guardians of the Galaxy. I'm a little concerned with the extreme Iron Man influence of the re-design of the look of several of the characters (hell, even Groot appears to have arc reactors drawn into him – seriously, WTF?). Best of the Week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #1

Apr 1, 2013

I do have some slight concerns of the redesign of Star-Lord's costume which now look more like a sponsored futuristic football uniform. And, yes, it looks like in their “wisdom,” Marvel has gotten away from the character's trademark helmet in favor of something that never hides the main character's face which I can only assume was a concession made for the upcoming movie (or was redesigned as a new cyclist helmet for Lance Armstrong). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #2

Apr 27, 2013

The reasoning behind no other heroes showing up to assist Iron Man and the Guardians is a little weak (to say the least), but it does offer plenty of opportunities to showcase the the deadly skills of Gamora, Drax, and especially Rocket Racoon (who is his usual awesome self). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #3

Jun 17, 2013

Groot and Rocket Racoon both get great moments here, and the teams smallest member racks up another impressive body count before Peter Quill basically decides to declare war on his father. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #4

Jul 3, 2013

Guardians of the Galaxy continues to mix wild space action with some great humor (although I'd prefer more Rocket Raccoon and Groot and less Tony Stark). The art of the comic does take a hit with Sara Pichelli stepping in to replace Steve McNiven. It's not a badly drawn book by any means, and I do like Pichelli's take on Gamora specifically, but the art isn't up to the par of the first handful of issues. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #5

Aug 6, 2013

Guardians of the Galaxy #5 also introduces the Spawn character of Angela into the Marvel Universe (which is bizarre on so many levels) and suggests the cause of her arrival may lay on Earth. We get the beginnings of a throwdown between Gamora and Angela, but as to what the true intentions are for the hunter of Hell Spawns could be in a universe without them we'll just have to wait and see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #6

Oct 1, 2013

The inclusion of The Watcher, who seems legitimately dismayed at the arrival of Angela, helps lend some weight to a character who really has done much of anything so far. In much the same way, Quill's opening scene with Thanos sets the stage for just how much danger the Earth now finds itself. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #7

Oct 21, 2013

With no reason or authority to hold her, the Guardians release Angela to Earth (a realm she only knows about through stories). Although the issue ends with the angel on her own, given the fact she appears on next month's cover I don't think it will take too long before we see her again. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #8

Nov 5, 2013

Guardians of the Galaxy #8 is a great example of a tie-in issue you can enjoy even if you aren't following the main storyline elsewhere. Even though I've still yet to even glance at an issue of Infinity, I had no trouble following (and enjoying) all the usual craziness on display (even if I do have trouble buying Gamora running of to sulk with millions of lives in peril). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #9

Dec 9, 2013

Guardians of the Galaxy #9 leads directly into the the final issue of Infinity (which despite not reading I've still enjoyed these tie-in issues). It also reunites the whole team (well, I'm still waiting for Cosmo‘s return) and Angela moving forward with the post-Infinity clean-up you now will be coming. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #10

Jan 8, 2014

The issues also sets up a reason to tie the series into Marvel's new Inhumanity event (something I'm not excited for) while also suggesting that the Badoon may have had dealings with Angela's people in the past. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #11.NOW

Jan 31, 2014

I'm not really looking forward to title jumping into yet another crossover, but on the other hand the galactic ramifications of Jean Grey's trial make for an unique situation that fits this team perfectly. We don't get much from Rocket, Groot, or Drax, but the early stuff with Quill is fun as is the continued female bonding of the murder girls. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #12

Mar 4, 2014

With two more issues to the arc it will be interesting to see how the writers resolve the conflict. Will the heroes simply rescue Ms. Grey, will Gladiator be forced to admit the woman he's judging isn't the same one who committed the atrocities, or will the intervention of an outside force (Jason? The Phoenix?) tip the scales? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #13

Apr 2, 2014

Cyclops decision opens up more story possibilities for the X-Man as well as more timey-wimey problems for the X-Universe. For the Guardians, however, the mission is a success leading into next month's double-sized anniversary issue introducing new members and new troubles for the team. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #14

Apr 28, 2014

Taking place 1,000 years in the future from the perspective of a Badoon slave, we see the original team of Guardians in action for the first time since 2009 (minus the curiously absent Nikki?) as they liberate the camp and tease the possibility of some kind of Guardians crossover in the near future. Although Vance Astro gets most of the time here, I'm happy to see Charlie-27, Martinex, Yondu, and especially Starhawk, AKA “The One Who Knows,” all included here and can't wait to see where the tease of their eventual return may lead. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #15

Jun 3, 2014

With so many separate glimpses, and less than 20 pages in which to work, Guardians of the Galaxy #15 doesn't leave much room to actually move the arc forward (although there's enough room for lots of ads). Quizzically we get another issue without Angela or any knowledge of her fate. And despite her appearance on the cover, Carol Danvers isn't part of the story here, although it seems she may have a large role to play in putting the team back together again. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #16

Jul 1, 2014

Where the last issue felt very much like filler, Guardians of the Galaxy #16 starts to move the story forward again. Hopefully it continues and we won't have to wait several more issues to put the band back together. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #17

Aug 5, 2014

Although it still has the feel of a Guardians issue, I think both longtime fans and those inspired by the movie to pick up the issue may feel somewhat disappointed. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #18

Sep 5, 2014

Incomplete, the comic ends on yet another cliffhanger (this one involving the Cosmic Cube), the story works although by now most readers have long moved on. I was slightly disappointed that the comic doesn't address the original Guardians who were a part of Cancerverse arc as I'll always root for appearances of Starhawk and his teammates. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Guardians of the Galaxy (2015) #1

Oct 19, 2015

Brian Michael Bendis injects both humor and action in the first issue having the new team take on the Chitauri while foreshadowing bigger threats to the group in the coming months. Will I stay with this version of the team? Maybe, but he addition of a telepathic dog, a time-displaced astronaut, or the living embodiment of the Hawk God might make my decision easier. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #1

Jan 29, 2020

The Olympians feel like a goofy idea to launch a new comic on, although they do allow for a pleasant surprise at the comic's end which could certainly spice things up in the issues to come. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2023) #1

Apr 25, 2023

4 Razors, Guardians of the Galaxy, Science Fiction

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy: Tomorrow's Avengers #1

Jul 11, 2013

The timing of the release, as the events all take place before the current comic, seems a little off. We do get cameos from Star-Lord at the end of two of the stories trying to bring the team back together in which he specifically mentions his father and an imminent attack on Earth. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Guardians Team-Up #4

Apr 8, 2015

I could have done without the flashbacks to Gamora's childhood with her father which feel a bit unnecessary, and take pages away from the damage the two women can inflict on an entire spaceship of baddies (especially after they start dressing alike). And at $4 a pop the comic still feels a bit overpriced for what its offering. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Hack / Slash: Back To School (2023) #1

Oct 26, 2023

Lots of gore, off-beat humor, panic, and ominous overtones here from writer and artist Zoe Thorogood. In other words, just what you'd expect from a Hack/Slack comic.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Hack / Slash: Resurrection #1

Oct 28, 2017

Fitting very much into the role of reluctant hero, Cassie has put her life of monster fighting behing her (or at least tried to). More annoyed than anything else by the arrival of new zombies, she's forced to leave the warm cocoon of her hermitage and head back out into the world. The panels of the prison's evil scientist and his experiments suggest these won't be the last zombies sent her way, but first she'll have to get settled in to the bizarre new job she just agreed to take. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Hadrian's Wall #1

Sep 20, 2016

The setting in deep space and the unusual method of death (as I don't doubt murder was the cause) proves an interesting backdrop for the mystery. However, I'm not quite sold on the art of Rod Reis or the foundation laid by co-writers Kyle Higgins and Alec Siegel which isn't strong enough to guarantee I'll stick around. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #1

Aug 1, 2016

Hal Jordan's battle with the Sinestro Corps won't be waged alone for much longer. The final few panels reveal the return of his friends (through their own actions, not Hal's search). Given the title of the series, I'll be curious to see how long it takes for Hal and company to reunite and turn their combined will on their old foes. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #2

Aug 17, 2016

It will be interesting to see how long the existence of the other Green Lanterns remains a secret. Not exactly known for stealth, Gardner is likely to draw some attention in his own search for answers. But whose attention will be drawn to him first, Hal's or Sinestro's. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #3

Aug 30, 2016

Whatever the case, it appears Hal is going to need some help to take down the Sinestro Corps. But how long before the rest of the Green Lantern Corps is back in action? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #4

Sep 19, 2016

Even with the comic missing its headline star, there's still enough here for fans of Guy Gardner to pick up this issue as his appearance allows Sinestro to give us a few clues to the villain's plan for his Corps and the universe. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #5

Oct 5, 2016

With Hal fully healed and raring to get back into action, the next issue should finally see a confrontation between former mentor and student as well as a possible reunion between Hal and other Lanterns who are headed after the Sinestro Corps. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #7

Nov 7, 2016

The end of the opening arc raises several questions. What happens to Soranik and the rest of Sinestro's Corps? What actually happened to both Jordan and Sinestro? And how does the Green Lantern Corps move forward from here? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #9

Nov 29, 2016

As expected, the death of Hal Jordan has been greatly exaggerated. Although I'm not excited to see the introduction of Kyle Rayner into the story, I'm up for anything to get Hal back into action. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #10

Dec 27, 2016

The rest of the issue deals with the Green Lantern Corps and the Sinestro Corps bickering while trying (and failing) to break out of Brainiac‘s containment. I'm in favor of DC returning Braniac to the the Silver Age version of the character, and the issue offers an intriguing twist on who the Collector of Worlds is working for. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #12

Jan 16, 2017

Guy isn't the only one surprised by events as both Corps ability to work together seems to suggest a brave new world for the Corps working together. It's an unexpected move for DC to make, having the two warring factions come together, but it certainly helps get Green Lantern comics back to their original premise of space cops patrolling the universe and protecting worlds from all kind of threats (rather than getting mired in a never-ending ring-slinging war). I'll be very curious to see where things go from here.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #14

Feb 23, 2017

Issue #14 has some fun moments including Gardner's hot-dogging, Stewart's frustration over Jordan doing his own thing (again), and Hal pointing out that no one really likes Kyle Rayner. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #16

Mar 9, 2017

The outcome of the fight leaves Guy in bad shape and leaves the Green Lantern Corps without one of their big guns for at least a little while. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #17

Mar 27, 2017

Hal Jordan and the Green Lantern Corps #17 is a strange issue. After taking time to check-in on the recovering Guy Gardner, the issue focuses on building him up as something special, while admitting he's no Hal Jordan when it comes to being a Green Lantern, and then immediately having the character fail spectacularly, lose the power of the White Lantern, and (in celebrating his failure) return to his awful 90s costume as another Green Lantern. Kyle screws up again, and isn't smart enough to realize it. Classic. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #18

Apr 17, 2017

The final page of the comic foreshadows just how dire a threat the Corps is facing as Rip Hunter makes his first appearance since Rebirth (and apparently isn't known by any of the Green Lanterns in the reconstructed DCU). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #22

Jun 24, 2017

Filled with action, Hal Jordan and the Green Lantern Corps #22 proves to e quite enjoyable seeing the two corps work together. Here's hoping the villain's threat doesn't destroy an interesting new direction for the characters. There are a couple of smaller plot threads here worth noting. The first involves the future of Soranik Natu and the worst Green Lantern ever, who before their relationship even starts is trying to pressure her to make a major change. The second is the sudden loss of focus by Tomar-Tu which proves to be the only issue with the corps' response. As to what may have caused the issue, what Sora's response will be, and truth behind the bombshell the villain drops to John Stewart, we'll just have to wait and see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #23

Jul 12, 2017

The other subplot involves Soranik Natu investigating Sarko and discovering what is causing Kyle Rayner‘s odd behavior and insistence she give up her yellow ring in favor of the green. Given the fact that her discover wipes the man's existence from this timeline, however, suggests the timeline has already been changed. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #25

Aug 1, 2017

News of both a Green Lantern murdering a member of the Sinestro Corps and Kyle Rayner‘s secret about the paternity of the evil time-traveler recently dispatched by both Corps leads to a fracture no one can put back together. Soranik leads her lanterns off Mogo to instill their own kind of order on the universe. And, because going backward seems to be the main theme of the comic, an old enemy rises from the ashes once more. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #30

Oct 16, 2017

The best part of the comic, however, comes early on with the good-natured rivalry between Hal Jordan, Guy Gardner, and (the worst Green Lantern ever) Kyle Rayner jockeying for position to be the one John Stewart chooses for the mission to Earth. Hal gets the job, much to the dismay of his fellow Lanterns. Suck it, Kyle. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #34

Dec 19, 2017

Hal Jordan and the Green Lantern Corps #34 is broken into basically two parts. Half the comic features the Controllers and the captive Guardians. The other half focuses on the primary Green Lanterns and their search for clues to where the Controllers have taken the Guardians and for what purpose. There's quite a bit of threatening, and lots of shots of the Lanterns flying around, but for now the villains' actions continue unabated. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #37

Jan 29, 2018

The comic also offers a look-in to Oa where John Stewart considers resigning from the Corps now that the Guardians of the Universe have returned to lead. Convinced to stay, and prevent the Guardians from repeating mistakes of the past, does this foreshadow trouble ahead for Stewart and his fellow Lanterns? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #39

Mar 4, 2018

In terms of the larger picture, issue #39 is mostly set-up as it is primarily focused on laying the foundation for what is likely to be a far more-action oriented issue with Zod squaring off against the Laterns as this one comes to a close. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #43

May 3, 2018

The size of the Darkstars army, their eagerness to kill, and their ability to phase across space at the drop of a hat are big takeaways in setting up the larger conflict between the two groups in the coming issues. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps #49

Aug 2, 2018

Given the number of wild cards on their side, there could be some unexpected surprises in the next issue from Hammond, Zod, or any number of other characters, but here things go according to John Stewart's plan which gives the Corps a fighting shot (which is all they can ask for). Those on the front lines get a bit short changed in this issue, but I'm guessing the larger Hal Jordan and the Green Lantern Corps #50 will find a way to allow each character to shine. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hal Jordan And The Green Lantern Corps: Rebirth #1

Jul 18, 2016

With Green Lanterns setting up the Red Lanterns as major adversaries and this issue doing the same for the Sinestro Corps, I'm a little afraid we're going to get stuck in rainbow ring-slinging loop again. Hopefully Hal's space adventures will offer plenty of new stories as well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Harley & Ivy Meet Betty and Veronica #1

Oct 9, 2017

While mostly a waste, the comic does end on a fun note with rivals Betty and Veronica heading to a costume party as Harley Quinn and Poison Ivy while the real villains decide to show up in their classic costumes. It's probably not enough to get me to come back for another issue, but at least it comic finds the fun in its last few pages. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Harley Quinn (2016) #69

Jan 8, 2020

The issue reads like a fevered dream and I'm a bit surprised Harley doesn't wake to reveal the whole thing was nothing more than idle fancy. Instead, Harley takes out the other old coots fairly easily, bands together with them and her new tax man, and gets some justice for the entire group by looking for the real crooks of the operation (including one that looks an awful lot like Mayor McCheese). If the characters didn't turn out to all be criminals, one might expect an issue to come with every Happy Meal. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Harley Quinn (2016) #70

Feb 7, 2020

Before the comic gets serious, there's a ton of fun to be had both in and out of the ring including a surprise cameo by none other than Booster Gold who proves he kills at karaoke and, at times, provide some good advice. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Harley Quinn (2016) #72

May 18, 2020

Although Booster exits stage left at the end of the issue, the comic more than hints at the possibility of a romantic relationship between a pair of screw-ups who are more heroic than most are willing to admit. Could this be just the beginning of Goldie Quinn?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Harley Quinn (2016) #73

Jun 17, 2020

Defeated, and confused by Booster Gold, Harley returns to the ring to make an important discovery that gives a name to the person really behind Alicia's death and foreshadows a throwdown between Harley Quinn and Granny Goodness. My money's on the clown.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Harley Quinn (2016) #74

Jul 20, 2020

Clarity and closure on Alicia's murder isn't the only thing Harley finds as the comic ends with Harley and Booster Gold together at last. The question is, with the comic coming to a close is this all we'll ever get of Goldie Quinn? Or may another series and writer explore where this unlikely duo may go from here? Here's hoping we having seen the last of these two.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Harley Quinn (2016) #75

Aug 24, 2020

What the issue does deliver is plenty of Harley Quinn craziness including her joining the Justice League as part of the Super-Friends, being part of the Suicide Squad, a look back at her childhood, and more. The disparate styles of the stories are sometimes striking, but fans of the character should have fun with the unusual set-up featuring plenty of in-jokes and wackiness.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Harley Quinn (2021) #33

Oct 30, 2023

While my interest waned the further I got away from those first few panels, the comic does present a concept which could lead Harley into unexpected places.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Harley Quinn (2021) #35

Jan 1, 2024

Although there' not much story here, the character interactions are still quite fun and the issue is notable for introducing us to multiversal versions of the true loves of Harley Quinn's life the hyenas. That only is worth the price of the comic.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Harley Quinn and Batman #1

Aug 7, 2017

It seems Harley's days as the Joker's sidekick are over. However, this story is just getting started. Let's see where this new adventure takes her. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Harley Quinn and Batman #2

Sep 7, 2017

Fans of Ivy and Harley together should enjoy this issue (more than the recent animated film which casts them on opposite sides for most of its run time). We also get Harley sporting her own blimp-like hang-glider and Batman taking care of other crime in the city such as an appearance by one of his least threatening villains of all time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Harley Quinn and the Birds of Prey #1

Feb 19, 2020

The issue is packed with cameos. Along with Power Girl, Huntress and Cassandra Cain showing up on the train to support our girl, Harley also gets an unexpected welcome to Gotham. With Harley back in Gotham, where the Joker is waiting, it's likely the madcap action has just begun. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Harley Quinn and the Birds of Prey #2

Jul 1, 2020

There's certainly some of the back-and-forth between Harley and Renee that could have been whittled down in the over-sized issue. The story also races right by giving a proper introduction to Harley's gal pal Elementia (who helps her both get away from Montoya and break into the Joker's vaults). Other than Harley messing around with the Joker's robot guards, there's not a lot of action here, although we do get a short sequence of Bat-suited Cassandra Cain taking on the Joker, but there's plenty of Harley being Harley.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Redder (2023) #1

Aug 1, 2023

Great fun here, and the best use of an series like this to show off different aspects of the character with each story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Redder (2023) #2

Aug 21, 2023

Bonus points awarded for including Dex-Starr!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Redder (2023) #3

Sep 25, 2023

Three more black, white, and red stories of Harley Quinn's misadventures are collected in the latest issue of Harley Quinn: Black + White + Redder (which continues to be one of the best anthology series set around this concept).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Redder (2023) #4

Oct 25, 2023

"A Voice Traveling is a little more fun, and far more vengeful, featuring Harley running into an old colleague who points her in the direction of a college bully now working as a low-rent gang leader in Gotham City. It's easily the best of the bunch and most notable for Harley's line about her support animals. Finally, "Golden Years gives us a Harley as a senior citizen who springs to action where alien shenanigans make it impossible for her to watch her favorite soap opera. The comic your average anthology issue, but given the exceptional level of stories in the previous few issues, the series feels like its returning to the mean.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Redder (2023) #5

Nov 27, 2023

The other two tales fit into more standard Harley Quinn craziness. In my favorite of the three tales, "Flight gives us a prison break gone crazy when Harley can't quite decide if she wants to help the other prisoners on the plane escape or not (or remember what she agreed to just prior to to liftoff). Lots of fun here, and I love the art of Bilquis Evely.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Harley Quinn: Black + White + Redder (2023) #6

Dec 27, 2023

Harley Quinn: Black + White + Redder #6 provides our final three tales of Harley Quinn's wacky adventures in black and white (and red).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Harley Quinn: The Animated Series (2021): The Eat. Bang! Kill. Tour #1

Aug 12, 2021

As with the appearance of the highway, there are plenty of little nuggets for fans of the show who are finally given the opportunity to see Harley and Ivy together (but not before Ivy goes through all the emotions of a very emotional day). Picking up right after the famous wedding that didn't happen, Ivy has become big news leading Harley to suggest the pair get off the grid and spend a little time together. No doubt they will also find new kinds of trouble to get into.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Harley Quinn: The Animated Series (2021): The Eat. Bang! Kill. Tour #2

Sep 22, 2021

We do get an appearance from Batman, and some confirmation about Selena's romantic history with the hero in this universe, but he remains a tertiary figure to the larger events playing out in Gotham City (which has been abandoned by the United States).Fans of Batman: The Animated Series will get a kick out of the hyenas' role in the story here (as well as Harley's obliviousness why Catwoman wouldn't be the best babysitter for them).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Harley's Little Black Book #3

Apr 23, 2016

At $5 the comic feels a bit over-priced. Artist Joseph Michael Linsner certainly enjoys drawing Zatanna who looks terrific in her classic costume (while I'm still trying to get used to this new-look Harley). Fans of both characters may want to give it a chance but there's not enough for the causal reader add this one to their pull list. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Hawkman (2018) #1

Jun 16, 2018

Hawkman #1 gives us Carter Hall the archeologist on a mission to discover more of his history, which he believes is hidden from him. Opening with Carter robbing a sacred tomb and destroying a strange giant flying ape protector (as weird as it sounds), Hall then turns to Madame Xanadu to help lift the clouds of his past… and future? Glimpsing enough to make him continue his search, but without answers to make sense of his visions, where does the hero go now? Odd, but entertaining, I'm curious to see what happens next. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Hawkman (2018) #21

Feb 26, 2020

The events of this comic are more than a bit crazy, but its characters fully acknowledge that (which is kinda fun). I haven't given this comic attention in several months so I can't condemn it too much for being batshit-crazy. While I'm not sure exactly what the key evil Hawkman is after will actually unleash, I'm betting it isn't puppies and rainbows. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
He-Man / Thunder Cats #1

Oct 8, 2016

Fans of the original cartoons should enjoy themselves here. He-Man/ThunderCats #1 isn't a great issue, but it does feature some appearances by old favorites while setting up a threat large enough to team-up He-Man and his friends with the ThunderCats. I doubt I'll stick around for the entire series, but this nostaglic look back at the two franchises was fun. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: The Beast of Vargu #1

Jun 26, 2019

The first-half of the tale we see through Hellboy's eyes, while the second is shown through the puppets of the gypsy woman who rescues our hero. The performance not only perfectly captures events but adds to them an ending with Hellboy victorious (which Hellboy is incredulous to discover becomes true after the story is told). The issue also includes a back-up story as the gypsy woman offers another tale about the good and evil inside each of us as food for thought for the recovering hero on the road home. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: The Secret of Chesbro House #1

Jul 19, 2021

Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: The Secret of Chesbro House #1 offers a solid opening with a creepy setting and a group of strangers each with a bit of information about the house and its history. The reveal of the ghosts, first the headless father and later the daughter, offers a bit of a twist to what Hellboy was expecting just in time to leave a cliffhanger for the concluding second-half of the tale.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: Night of the Cyclops #1

May 31, 2022

Hellboy and the B.P.R.D: Night of the Cyclops is a simple single-issue story that comic sellers seem all too reluctant to print these days. While it doesn't offer much in the way of action (although it does deliver on the title with Hellboy fighting a Cyclops), and Hellboy technically isn't even the one to stop Aphrodite, it's a fun tale featuring some interesting art by Olivier Vatine and yet another unusual situation our hero has found himself in.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: Old Man Whittier #1

Jul 7, 2022

Another creepy tale from Mike Mignola with art the fits the tale from Gabriel Hernndez Walta. Set one year after the events of Hellboy: The Whittier Legacy, the new one-shot builds on the existing storyline of the creepy family but doesn't require the reader to know much about Hellboy's previous experiences with the Whittier family from the previous story to enjoy Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: Old Man Whittier.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1954: Ghost Moon #1

Mar 15, 2017

Given the team's inability to hurt the creatures, one of whom who calls Hellboy “cousin,” it seems likely that fighting the beasts may not be the best way to solve the problem. Finding out what they seek and retrieving the hunpig (which is likely tied to their search) seems like the most obvious course of action. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1955: Burning Season #1

Feb 26, 2018

Hellboy One-shot Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1955 - Burning Season (featuring some terrific art by Paolo Rivera) is unusual in that there isn't a something for Hellboy to defeat, only survive. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1957: Falling Sky

Aug 17, 2022

Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1957 Falling Sky is a fine one-shot, although my favorite bit are the glimpses into what seem like more interesting adventures than we get here. Martinbrough's version of Hellboy is a little more blocky than I prefer in some panels, but he does make good use of shadows, and there's enough here for fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1957: From Below

Aug 9, 2023

There's a little bit of action between the creature and Hellboy but most of the fun of the comic comes from the lead-up to the reveal.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Hellboy and the B.P.R.D.: 1957: Fearful Symmetry

Jul 6, 2023

Fearful Symmetry is a fine tale, but isn't a must-read for any but the biggest Hellboy fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hellboy In Love (2023) #1

Oct 26, 2022

As the issues suggests, there's some strong chemistry between the gruff Hellboy and the flirtatious and adventurous researcher. There's also plenty of action here with Anastacia and Hellboy squabbling cutely while working together to track the goblins and the artifacts down. Their path leads them eventually to a punk rock concert as the issue comes to a close but with answers possibly in sight.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hellboy In Love (2023) #2

Dec 13, 2022

True to the name of the series, we get some more flirting between the pair as their adventure continues its danger leading into a swarm of attacking birds and then an auction of unsavory folks bidding on items like those that were stolen.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hellboy In Love (2023) #3

Mar 2, 2023

As with the first two issues, there's plenty of fun back-and-forth verbal sparring between Anastacia and Hellboy.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Hellboy In Love (2023) #4

Apr 11, 2023

Hellboy in Love #4 is much more interesting for the further interaction between Hellboy and Anastacia. Where their attaction in the previous comics had been more flirtatious, this one firmly cements a romantic relationship between the pair has continued to deepen (and become strong enough for Hellboy to turn his back on the B.P.R.D. for several months).

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hellboy In Love (2023) #5

Jul 27, 2023

Hellboy in Love #5 is a fitting end to the mini-series which, surprisingly, doesn't end in the tragic death of Anastacia or her split from Hellboy. If anything, their final adventure here brings the pair even closer together. Knowing his later history, we can guess the end of their search together won't end happily ever after, but here at least they do get a happy ending.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hellboy: The Bones of Giants #1

Nov 11, 2021

Looking for help on the unusual situation Professor Edmond Aickman who isn't exactly pleased to see Hellboy even decades after their previous encounter involving King Vold, but he is initially quite curious about the hammer although something concerns him enough to flee in the dead of the night. Just what has Hellboy stumbled into this time?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Hellboy: The Bones of Giants #2

Dec 7, 2021

What Hellboy knows, thanks to a pair of Nidavellim, is that the professor is responsible for opening a crypt of the Frost Giant Thrym who a new cult hopes to see resurrected. After the stressful night, our intrepid heroes go in search of the missing professor only to discover they may have been to late as the madman may have succeeded in raising a giant from his grave. I don't think things are going to get any less weird any time soon.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Hellboy: The Bones of Giants #3

Jan 12, 2022

Overall, it's a solid middle issue to the arc with a couple of fun sequences but leaves the big action to play out in the four-issue mini-series' conclusion.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Hellboy: The Silver Lantern Club #1

Nov 5, 2021

Even if the adventure itself doesn't feature Hellboy, and we get the titular character only in the bookends to the flashback, there's still some fun to be had (especially in the manner which the demon was defeated, which I won't ruin here). Since it appears Simon has more stories to tell, at least until the pub's last call, this is just the start of the mini-series.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Hellboy: Winter Special: The Yule Cat #1

Dec 19, 2023

Hellboy tangles with the cat both in town and out in the snow where it takes a more human-ish form before returning to the look of the cat. There's plenty of action here, and I like the art of Smith. The story is framed by birds, and something more than birds discussing Hellboy, the Yule Cat, and destiny, along with scenes of Christmas time after Hellboy's return home. Not a must-read by any means, but a fun enough X-Mas themed one-shot for those looking for some Hellboy this Christmas.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Heralds #1

Jun 8, 2010

Did Hellcat just punch out a clone of Albert Einstein? Did Valkyrie just kill a T-Rex above the streets of Paris? Did Frankie Raye just come back from the dead? Did Cyclops just crack a joke? Did Abigail Brand‘s S.W.O.R.D. facility just explode, unleashing all kinds of craziness? Are Photon and She-Hulk really wearing fake mustaches? The answers to all these question is yes. Damn, Emma Frost throws the best birthday parties ever! I really wasn't expecting much from this mini-series by Kathryn Immonen and Tonci Zonjic, but this first issue is a whole lot of fun. Definitely worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Herobear and the Kid Special #1

Jun 15, 2013

At $4 its a little pricey for an all-ages comic (although that seems to be the going rate for these now). I enjoy Kunkel's black and white style, with flashes of red (which actually remind me of some of Matt Wagner‘s far darker Grendel stories). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Home (2021) #1

Apr 14, 2021

The five-issue mini-series has a super-hero slant, which is introduced late in the issue as a frightened Juan displays powers for the first time. While this will obviously become a larger part of the story going forward, the first issue focuses on Juan and his mother and the deeply cynical setting which ripped their family apart and provided the crucible for Juan's pain and transformation. It's an emotional beginning to a journey which I'm intrigued to see more of.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Hulk (2008) #23

Jun 25, 2010

I just wish the story was as well thought out as the art. After the explanations are over there's still plenty of head-scratching to be done over the questionable logic involved in Ross becoming the Red Hulk, Betty becoming the Red She Hulk, and all the rest of the nonsense we've had to put up with for months. Even with its “revelations” it's certainly nowhere near good enough to justify the $5 price-tag. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hulk (2016) #1

Jan 3, 2017

I've always liked She-Hulk. It's an interesting twists on events turning She-Hulk into Marvel's new Hulk. As someone who has always been able to control her transformation and powers this new journey is likely going to be a rocky road for her. Still, I hope the more lighthearted version of the character isn't lost for good. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Human Target (2021) #1

Nov 8, 2021

The real story is the poisoning of Chance (playing Luther) earlier that morning. Was the poison meant for Luther? And, if so, who (of the villain's many, many enemies) wants him dead? That's the mystery he has only 12 days to solve before his death from a poison so exotic even the Justice League can't save him from. However, Dr. Mid-Nite does give him a lead on where the poison came from, a very interesting lead indeed.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Human Target (2021) #2

Dec 9, 2021

Ice, rather than Fire, is an interesting choice for this role which seems far removed from her role within the JLI but still fits within the established character while offering something new. She mesmerizes Chance who notes both her coldness and the warmth of her charms. Chance accepts Ice's help, and a late reveal gives an interesting spin on their entire day together, but our dying hero can't help but speculate if he's already met his killer.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Human Target (2021) #3

Dec 30, 2021

We getBooster Gold in almost all his glory (sadly, no Elvis collar) along with Gardner, and Ice are all put to great use here. The cherry on top here is an unexpected final cameo of the one person who could get Guy to back off which. Aside for being a pitch perfect nod to the comic history Tom King is playing in, it further illustrates how smart and innovative Chance is, even if he remains far from finding his killer.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Human Target (2021) #4

Feb 3, 2022

We don't get the clue Chance is looking for to lead him in a new direction until near the end of the comic, when a drunken Ted Kord points him in the direction of another member of the JLI. However, the comic is far from fruitless as Tom King and Greg Smallwood continue to balance the nostalgia and film noir themes perfectly. There's a reckoning coming, but the journey to get there continues to be a hell of a lot of fun. I don't want this comic to end.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Human Target (2021) #5

Feb 28, 2022

What's obvious here is how quickly Chance and Ice have fallen for each other, as his few remaining days continue to slip away. However, that hasn't stopped him from pursuing one last mystery as the clues seem to be leading back to Ice's best-friend who may have used her feminine wiles on J'onn to help with her plan. Before the end we can see a reckoning for Chance and Ice adding another bittersweet layer to events.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Human Target (2021) #6

Mar 28, 2022

We may not get much in the way of moving the case forward (with Ice continuing to be a distraction), or any new cameos from the Justice League International, but we do get a return in the jealous Guy Gardner who attempts to break-up the pair of squabbling lovers and faces Ice's fury. The scene, and its aftermath remind us that we are in a Black Label comic, separate from the current continuity of the DC Universe. As for the case, Chance needs to get back to work with only a handful of days left to find his answers.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Human Target (2021) #7

Oct 10, 2022

First at a nightclub, and later at an amusement park, the pair play and verbally spar with Chance trying to determine if she is his killer and Fire judging the man who has taken up with his best friend. While there is certainly some sexual tension, turns out the dying man only has eyes for one super-hero at present, leading to an admission and a new subject coming in focus with five issues remaining.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Human Target (2021) #8

Nov 4, 2022

More brutal than the previous issues, The Human Target #8 is a little hard to read as it's mostly Chance being tortured, losing conciousness, waking up later and having events repeat.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Human Target (2021) #9

Nov 29, 2022

But we don't get Batman. What wo do get, aside from the paranoia, is the truth of Ice finally learning of Chance's condition and his limited amount of time left on Earth.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Human Target (2021) #10

Jan 13, 2023

With G'Nort you know there's going to be plenty of humor, but the mystery and investigation continues to drive the comic.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Human Target (2021) #11

Jan 31, 2023

It's a sweet and beautiful issue with secrets unburdened and love expressed before the sun begins to set and harder truths and pain is shared.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Human Target (2021) #12

Mar 6, 2023

It's a fitting end that still leaves you wanting, yearning, for more, but I'm tremendously grateful for what we were given.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Huntress (2011) #1

Oct 10, 2011

Either way, its a good introductory issue. Artist Marcus To provides several strong panels even without having a major league baddie to put our heroine up against in the first issue. He also gets points for dumping the most ridiculous part of the Huntress' costume (the often maligned ab window). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
IDW Endless Summer (2023): Dungeons & Dragons: Saturday Morning Adventures

Sep 7, 2023

Fun adventure with plenty of nods to the cartoon and the roleplaying game that also creates a potential new friend for the adventurers in the ongoing series.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
IDW Endless Summer (2023): TMNT: Saturday Morning Adventures

Sep 6, 2023

There's plenty of brotherly fun for Leonardo, Raphael, Donatello, and Michelangelo (whose spirit his brothers are attempting to lighten with the trip to the them park) along with action as the Turtles work together to stop Krang's portal from bringing in an army from Dimension X. It's a fun all-age adventure which should appeal to fans of the original cartoon.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Immortal Hulk #1

Jun 11, 2018

Ewing jumps back to the Hulk's roots (although allowing the character to retain his more recognizable green skin rather than the original gray) with the figure only appearing at night. However, there are a lot of unanswered questions. Where has Bruce Banner been hiding this whole time? How has no one noticed that the Hulk is alive? And what is the new trigger? Is it Bruce's death that brings out the Hulk, or the rise of the moon? And why does the Hulk retain Bruce's intellect but not his personality. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Immortal Red Sonja (2022) #2

May 19, 2022

Issue #2 focuses on Sonja struggling to find footing in the new land with its rules, curses, and manner of dangers (and, of course, the constant annoyance from her armor). She also faces off against the Green Knight. Although victorious, her victory over him today portends a day of trouble somewhere down the road for the She-Devil with Excalibur.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Immortal Red Sonja (2022) #3

Jun 20, 2022

The comic keeps the mix of comedy and action found in previous issues with Red Sonja's frustration growing moment by moment. Despite her armor's inability to shut-up, it has an even worse propensity for waiting until nearly too late to offer any information that might be helpful. Although she doesn't find the wizard, all evidence points to Merlyn still being alive. Now, if only Sonja can stay alive long enough to find him.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Incredible Hulk (2009) #610

Jun 20, 2010

Guess who's back? This entire World War Hulks storyline has been ridiculous but the latest issue does mark the return of one big, green, and very angry Marvel icon. It's just about the only good thing about this issue, but the event which leads to his return is fairly well done. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Infamous Iron Man (2016) #1

Oct 27, 2016

Doctor Doom has a long history with Marvel Comics. His recent adventures have left the scarred character whole (or at least more whole than he has been in decades). While the reasoning for such a move raises questions Brian Michael Bendis has no intention of answering, the idea of a Doctor Doom Iron Man is an intriguing one. Presented from Doom's point of view, this first issue is mainly meant to wet the appetite of Marvel fans as he takes down a villain like Diablo, rescues Maria Hill, and then proceeds to rob Stark Industries to further his own plans (which could include redemption or something far more layered and calculating). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Infamous Iron Man (2016) #2

Nov 21, 2016

Dr. Amara Perera makes another appearance here. I'm still a bit lost as to what she means to Doom or what her role will being going forward in his new heroic calling.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Infamous Iron Man (2016) #4

Feb 1, 2017

There are two stories here, equally entertaining. The first is professional in the constant struggle Doom will deal with if he ever hopes to make his role as Iron Man permanent. The second is far more personal as Doom returns to a war-ravaged country which hasn't fared well in his absence. Returning to find Ben Grimm, Doom finds much more than he bargained for including a confrontation in the next issue which should go quite a ways in telling us which path Victor von Doom is destined for. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Infamous Iron Man (2016) #5

Feb 28, 2017

Doctor Doom didn't expect his reformed stint as Iron Man to be easy, however I'm willing to bet Doom didn't see his mother coming back to haunt him as one of those obstacles. What does Cynthia want, and how is it tied to Reed Richards and his eternal feud with Victor von Doom? Infamous Iron Man #5 offers no answers, only plenty of questions. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Infamous Iron Man (2016) #6

Apr 4, 2017

No one said Victor von Doom's journey from villain to hero was going to be easy, but S.H.I.E.L.D.'s interference is likely to cause more than just an inconvenience before too long. Next issue's introduction of Riri Williams isn't likely to go over well for the new Iron Man, either. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Infamous Iron Man (2016) #8

May 30, 2017

I'm not sure how long Marvel can keep Doom in the role of one of it's biggest named heroes, but if Victor's visions are to be believed Marvel may have other ideas for the character rather than simply returning him to his old status once this arc plays out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Infamous Iron Man (2016) #9

Jul 6, 2017

The issue's subplot deals with recent troubling events as Ben Grimm reaches out to Johnny Storm about the odd recent conversation he had with someone acting like Reed Richards. I'm glad to see the Thing and Johnny both immediately understand that someone is playing them. However, I'm still not sure how this (or the odd future vision Doom had with an alternate version of Tony Stark) will eventually play into the main story arc. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Infamous Iron Man (2016) #10

Aug 3, 2017

Other than fucking with the villain turned super-hero, just what do she and the alternate dimension's version of Reed Richards have in plan for Doom? I'm guessing whatever it is, it isn't going to be pleasant. But, given Doom's recent actions versus those of the “heroes” around him, just whose side with Ben Grimm end up on? Will he realize in a world gone mad the closest thing to an ally is his oldest adversary? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Infamous Iron Man (2016) #11

Sep 6, 2017

The latest issue of the series also provides an appearance from Doctor Strange who helps Doom work through his problems. While I doubt Marvel will allow Doom's heroic journey continue much farther, Strange would make for an interesting companion who, perhaps alone in the Marvel Universe, understands the mysticism surrounding Doctor Doom. I hope he's every bit as good as he thinks he is because this Iron Man will need all that and more to defeat his true enemy revealed at last. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Infamous Iron Man (2016) #12

Oct 4, 2017

The comic has given a new spin on one of Marvel Comics' oldest characters. Hopefully we won't see that work go to waste (or see him marginalized as Magneto often has during his less villainous turns). I don't know what's in store for Doom going forward, but this comic shows there's plenty of potential for the character given the right direction and creative team. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Invincible Iron Man (2016) #600

May 31, 2018

The comic also features Tony getting his first look at Doctor Doom as a hero and, perhaps, sadly foreshadowing the end of the freshest arc the character has had in decades. It looks like Tony is back. With Stark's return, what exactly will happen to Doom (and why do I feel the Marvel Universe just got less interesting)? For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Iron Cat (2022) #1

Jul 4, 2022

Black Cat, Iron Man

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Iron Cat (2022) #2

Aug 2, 2022

The second issue fills in gaps for readers, offering us flashbacks to Felicia and Tamara's shared past and plenty of examples how both characters think and act leading Felicia to set the kind of trap for her old friend she knows Tamara can't ignore.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Iron Cat (2022) #3

Aug 22, 2022

The battle between Black Cat and Tamara Blake continues as each counters the other's latest move while neither is able to make the knockout blow.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Iron Cat (2022) #4

Sep 28, 2022

Black Cat, Iron Man

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Iron Cat (2022) #5

Nov 7, 2022

The series offered some fun moments, especially in the first issue, and this is a fine conclusion, but some of the story certainly felt drawn out over the past couple of issues. The singular focus on an Iron Man story, rather than the more imaginative heights the creative team of Makay and Prez had given us previously, never reached the heights of the previous Black Cat volumes.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Iron Man (2012) #1

Nov 9, 2012

The issue doesn't do much to sell me on the new and improved Marvel Universe that Marvel Now! represents, but it certainly doesn't turn me off from other new titles either. I haven't been a regular Iron Man reader in years, but I might stick around (at least for a little while) to see what the House of Ideas has in mind for Old Shellhead. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Iron Man (2012) #2

Nov 27, 2012

Although writer Kieron Gillen is pretty heavy-handed with the Arthurian references and let's Iron Man cheat his way out of a competition he should be able to easily win, the comic introduces a couple of intriguing ideas and a new stable of enemies for our hero. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Iron Man (2012) #3

Dec 11, 2012

I like the new new stealth armor (even if it makes Stark look like a huge fan of Tron: Legacy). The twist involving the health of the dealer's young daughter is interesting, but it does end the comic on a rather flat note. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
It Girl and The Atomics #1

Aug 11, 2012

The story isn't as weird as some of the Madman arcs get. In fact, at least for the first issue it's pretty straightforward, although what the exactly the fallout from Flem's experiment is may well determine where the comic goes from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
It Girl and The Atomics #2

Sep 19, 2012

I've also got to praise the variant cover by Darwyn Cooke which certainly helps sell issue #2. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
James Bond 007 (2018) #1

Nov 19, 2018

Writer Greg Pak delivers a solid introductory issue, although he waits a bit too long to get Bond into his own comic. While not completely sold, there's enough here that leaves me curious what's next for 007. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
James Bond 007 (2018) #2

Jan 2, 2019

The rival agent angle works well as James Bond 007 #2 also teases a femme fatale as part of the Russian's entourage. Here's something for Bond to sink his teeth into. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
James Bond 007 (2018) #6

Apr 23, 2019

Plenty of action here. Despite some questions about the choices in the re-imagined version of Bond by writer Greg Pak, I'm continuing to enjoy the back-and-forth between Bond and Lee and I'll be curious to see if Lee's trust in Aria is well-founded or if he's in for some reconditioning of his own. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
James Bond 007 (2018) #7

May 24, 2019

The issue continues to play up the mutual respect that Bond and Lee have built up over the arc, while distressing Moneypenny over Bond's new bromance and his willingness to go with Lee's plan and join Goldfinger's operation (at least for the time being). If Goldfinger takes the bait we should learn more about his plan as soon as the next issue, but if push comes to shove will Bond take out Lee in order to complete his mission? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
James Bond 007 (2018) #11

Sep 26, 2019

I haven't read every issue of the series, so perhaps the Olympitech plot line was introduced elsewhere but it sure seems to come out of nowhere as the comic turns on a dime in the final pages leading into Goldfinger's appearance in the final panel. Still, the trouble our heroes get into in the earlier pages are pretty entertaining. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
James Bond 007 (2018) #12

Nov 6, 2019

The series began to drag for me in its second-half, and I think the storyline could have been condensed by a few issues to improve the overall pace, but James Bond 007 #12 works as a proper ending to both wrap-up the Goldfinger storyline and say farewell to both Lee and K. Considering they both survive the brainwashing and battles they were put through, and end up on good terms with 007, you wonder if one or both may eventually return in another Bond series from Dynamite Entertainment. Time will tell.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
James Bond: Agent of Spectre #1

Mar 15, 2021

As neither the threats nor the bribery would make Bond ally himself with his enemy, the most obvious reason for Bond's acceptance of the assignment would be to get more information on SPECTRE, kill a high value target within their organization, and perhaps find what he needs to take down Blofeld as well. Whether or not any of this is possible, we'll have to wait and see.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
James Bond: Himeros #1

Oct 19, 2021

Bond doesn't see much action in James Bond: Himeros #1 until he tracks down the capable Sarah Richmond at the end of the issue, arriving with roguish style. What we get here is mostly set-up, little more than an opening chapter to a larger story. Sarah is more capable than many Bond Girls, but with a super-assassin on the loose she'll no doubt need 007's help to stay alive.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
James Bond: Himeros #2

Nov 18, 2021

There's quite a bit of action here, starting with the failed island assault and ending with the assassin Kino catching up to Bond and Sarah and making an attempt on her life. In the encounter, the pair appear evenly matched raising Kino's suspicions and just who is now protecting Sarah. Bond is now on the run with a woman he's unsure if he can trust and with an assassin on his heels, where does he go from here?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
James Bond: Moneypenny (One Shot) #1

Aug 31, 2017

Despite the story jumping back-and-forth, the comic is a quick read and Egar has fun putting Moneypenny in danger and showcasing her considerable skill in getting out of it. Other than it's $5 price-tag, my only real complaint is that it's only a one-shot. I wouldn't mind more of Miss Moneypenny in the future. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Jane Foster & The Mighty Thor (2022) #1

Jun 16, 2022

With Thor stories stuck in a bit of a pocket universe of their own, I'll admit to not recognizing half of the characters on hand here. Sif, at least I think it's Sif, gets far more time than Jane is this first issue as she sees the danger coming. Whoever is behind the threat, one thing is certain, Jane Foster needs to find Thor.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Jessica Jones #1

Oct 11, 2016

Jessica Jones #1 is a strong opening to the new series. I would have preferred a bit more primer to know just what Jessica has been through in recent months, but her new bizarre client and her reactions to old “friends” showing up is quite entertaining. Worth the look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Jessica Jones #2

Nov 22, 2016

There are certainly a lot of unanswered questions here: What, exactly, is Jessica protecting her daughter from? Who killed her client, and why? What does the Spot want with Jessica? And how far is Luke Cage willing to go to get his daughter back? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Jessica Jones #3

Dec 19, 2016

Would she honestly accept a job putting her knowledge of the super-hero community to use for a shadowy organization which won't identify itself? It sounds implausible, but let's face it, Jessica Jones hasn't always made the brightest decisions. And with Luke and his friends still hounding her, how far will she go to earn a little peace? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Jessica Jones #4

Jan 18, 2017

Carol's plan bears fruit as a member of the group does reach out to Jessica. Of course it's also caused unnecessary drama in the young woman's life where Luke Cage (and his apparent harem of female friends) is concerned. While far from shocking, the reveal undercuts the new series defining message about the character: she's a fuck-up trying to make good. In fact she's not. She's a hero who is making an extreme personal sacrifice to keep her friends and family safe. The only problem? Once revealed I'm not sure that it will earn her any sympathy. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Jessica Jones #5

Feb 14, 2017

Somehow aware of the events of Secret Wars and the fallout of the Avengers choosing to destroy multiple universes and kill billions, Mr. Brownlee explains his rather awful murder of his wife and why none of it matters at all. In his view, the Avengers broke his world, overwrote it with a flimsy copy, and nothing in this reality matters in the least. The trouble for Jessica is, despite he man's particular brand of crazy, the more he speaks the more she realizes that he's probably right, which may be an issue sending her in with that mindset going undercover with a group hellbent on exposing super-heroes and their secrets. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Jessica Jones #6

Mar 16, 2017

Equally troubling for Jessica is how dismissively Carol takes her question concerning the murder of her client and the killer's theory about the Marvel heroes killing billions of lives. Neither admitting the truth nor refuting it, the worm that destroyed that man's reality seems to be working its way into Jessica's brain. Now further disconnected from her husband and daughter, and with her name still not entirely cleared, where might these thoughts lead? And what's next for Jessica Jones, P.I.? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Jessica Jones #9

Jun 13, 2017

Despite having accomplished the later, Jessica sill has a case to solve and a client the entire Marvel Universe is looking for. While I expect the comic to get more mired into Marvel's big event, I'm hoping (as with this issue) that it can continue to skirt the crossover and keep Jessica on her own path as much as possible. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Jessica Jones #10

Jul 14, 2017

There's fun to be had here and the tone you'd expect from the series, although the events don't do much to push Jessica in one direction or another. By the end of the issue all Jessica knows is that she doesn't know much (not unlike Marvel's… oh, you know). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Jessica Jones #11

Aug 9, 2017

While the throwback comic idea isn't as successful as it should be, it does break the monotony of a good, but very talky, issue. Still, the highlight here is the interaction between the two woman. As to the secret Hill is keeping, and willing to kill for, I guess we'll have to wait until next month for more. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Jessica Jones #12

Sep 14, 2017

It's worth noting that in the final few pages Maria Hill leaves Jessica Jones with news that rocks the super-hero private eye's world. It appears her old friend is out in the would again and possibly looking for a reunion. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Jessica Jones #13

Oct 12, 2017

Given the character's success on Netflix, I am curious to see how Bendis presents Kilgrave this time around, and what exactly he has planned for Jessica. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Jessica Jones #15

Dec 29, 2017

Aside from the bizarre sudden immortality of the character (an all-too-convenient plot-point to possibly to allow David Tennant to reprise him on Netflix?), the comic is creepily entertaining while featuring some amusing dark comedy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Jessica Jones #16

Feb 6, 2018

The conclusion of the comic picks up a thread from Netflix's television show that was toyed with momentarily but quickly thrown away in favor of pitting the pair against each other. Could the Purple Man, under Jessica's influence, be a force for good in the world? I guess we're about to see. As for me? Let's just say I wouldn't bet against this becoming another Jessica Jones-sized shitstorm before all is said and done. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Jessica Jones #17

Mar 6, 2018

Given how much the character has dominated her life, the question for Jessica is what is life like after the Purple Man (again, assuming he stays gone… this is the comic company that has brought back pretty much every character ever from the dead after all)? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Jessica Jones #18

Apr 3, 2018

Eventually Jessica tracks down the Armadillo whose self-loathing reminds the private-eye a little too much of her own. While it initially appears she doesn't get through to him (he does punch her through a wall), it turns out her words do hit the mark and lead him home. Case closed. With the story Bendis gives Jessica a perfect day for the character he introduced to the Marvel Universe more than 16 years ago. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Joe Fixit (2023) #1

Jan 5, 2023

Your enjoyment of the issue is likely going to be somewhat tempered by your nostalgia of David's previous run with the character. If you are hitting this version for the first time it likely won't have the impact of longtime Hulk fans. However, even if you didn't bring your rose-colored 80s glasses, there's plenty to enjoy here as we, like Spidey, get to sit back and watch Mister Fixit totally dominate the Kingpin and send him angrily packing.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Joe Fixit (2023) #2

Feb 13, 2023

The issue spins its wheels for the first-half, including a superfluous interaction between Peter Parker and the Kingpin (and later a more impressive Spidey punch on the big man), before setting up Fixit's brainwashing (which it doesn't attempt to explain) and finally giving us Spider-Man versus the Hulk which goes through final panel of this issue still yet unsettled. Fans might get a kick out of certain panels, but this feels mostly like fluff pushing out the story into more issues than needed.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Joe Fixit (2023) #3

Mar 27, 2023

Enjoyable enough, even if we don't get much movement on the main arc here and the focus feels a bit all over the place in terms of the flashback, the suddenly resolved (at least for now) storyline, and the inner battle within Banner's mind.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
John Wick #1

Dec 5, 2017

I'm not sure how successful the comic will be, but writer Greg Pak and artist Giovanni do a fairly good job in bringing the character to life on the printed page. And the action isn't half-bad either. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Josie and the Pussycats #1

Nov 5, 2016

The issue turns out to be a fun reboot of the classic trio. As a bonus, the comic includes a classic Josie and the Pussycats tale featuring the Pussycats early days as a band. Fans should enjoy this one; I'm not sure how long I'll stick with it, but I'm glad I gave it a shot. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Josie and the Pussycats #2

Dec 7, 2016

Archie Comics delivers another fun issue featuring the musical trio, and I love the art by Audrey Mok. Here's hoping the Pussycats stay on the road a long, long time. As with the first issue, Josie and the Pussycats #2 also includes a bonus classic Josie and the Pussycats story as well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Josie and the Pussycats #5

Mar 13, 2017

Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Josie and the Pussycats #6

Apr 25, 2017

Josie and the Pussycats #6 could have gotten very dark very quickly. Instead the arrival of Alexandra defuses the situation. A little brother-sister bonding gets the Pussycats sprung to continue their road trip of misadventures far away from the frozen confines of Cabotopia. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Josie and the Pussycats #7

Jun 26, 2017

I'm a fan of one-off stories like this one which is a nice change of pace given the age of longer arcs written mainly to help sell trade paperbacks down the line. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Josie and the Pussycats #8

Jul 25, 2017

The drama behind the scenes is quickly eclipsed by the drama on stage when the Archies are kidnapped. Now it's up the Pussycats to get them back (and hopefully teach Josie another lesson or two in the process). Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
2
Justice League (2011) #0

Sep 24, 2012

The back-up story features Pandora, meaning it's all but totally forgettable, but it does introduce The Question (complete with trenchcoat and fedora). Although the character's street-level crimefighting and conspiracy theories seem to have been kept, this newer version is something much different than just a former investigative journalist. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Justice League (2011) #1

Sep 6, 2011

The end of the issue gives us the first appearance of Superman, who aside from looking far too young, is saddled with one of the more questionable costume alterations of the new DCU. Story wise this first issue, set in a world where people are afraid and uncertain of super-heroes, works well. I'm still not sold on the character designs, but it's good enough to bring me back for another issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Justice League (2011) #2

Oct 21, 2011

Was it worth the wait? No, not really. Is it a disappointing follow-up to a promising first issue? Yes. Is it overpriced at $4 without giving us any extra pages of action? You bet your ass. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League (2011) #3

Nov 21, 2011

There are quite a few casual references scattered throughout (including Professor Ivo and T.O. Morrow) longtime fans of DC Comics should catch, and new fans should note. And in my favorite panel, Johns gives us a great reaction when the Flash realizes that Batman doesn't actually have any powers. Must-Read.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Justice League (2011) #4

Dec 27, 2011

The humor and character interactions that worked well in previous issues are missing (except for Green Lantern‘s comment about Batman‘s reaction to GL touching Wonder Woman‘s lasso of truth). Darkseid is imposing, but I'm not really sure we needed a centerfold of the character, and the layout of the sequence is bizarre as the League is starring at the villain emerging from a Boom Tube yet, in close-ups, the Boom Tube is to the back of every character. How is this possible? Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Justice League (2011) #5

Feb 1, 2012

Seroiously DC, WTF? I know Geoff Johns is capable of writing better dialogue and stories than this. However, I'm growing less and less sure that “artist” Jim Lee (and I use that term loosely) is capable of putting a panel of the Justice League together that doesn't look completely half-assed and photoshopped. An early contender for worst comic of the year – Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Justice League (2011) #6

Mar 5, 2012

Also worth of note is the short back-up story involving Pandora which, despite what DC says publicly, continues to hedge the company's bets by further opening the door that not everyone is happy with the New 52 – including the Spectre and the Phantom Stranger. Next month – Captain Marvel. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
2
Justice League (2011) #7

Mar 26, 2012

We also get a preview of Shazam's (that's right, the won't be calling him Captain Marvel) supremely awful new costume which was leaked online a couple weeks back as well as the first look of the revamped buffer Dr. Sivana who basically looks like Hugo Strange without the facial hair. Why do you keep fucking with the childhood DC? What perverse glee are you getting from yet another truly awful New 52 revamp of a classic character? Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Justice League (2011) #8

Apr 25, 2012

The main story has some nice one-liners from Batman and Green Lantern, and an intriguing offer by Steve Trevor for Ollie, but it's pretty forgettable. The only saving grace in the Shazam story is the introduction of Mary's pet rabbit and slightest glimmer of hope that someday we just might see Hoppy the Marvel Bunny. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League (2011) #9

May 20, 2012

The return of artist Jim Lee means the overall quality of the art improves, but once again we get odd group shots where characters are presented and posturing at odd angles while in battle or attempting to communicate with each other. The back-up story gives us Billy standing up for his foster siblings (but still being a jerk), and Sivana unearthing a mystical tomb. It's certainly not great, but for JL fans it is worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Justice League (2011) #10

Jul 5, 2012

The back-up story of Shazam continues as Billy visits Mr. Tawny in the zoo and Dr. Sivana uses a single magic word to free Black Adam (who gets the same headed redesign Captain Marvel, I mean Shazam, will receive) and return magic to the world. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Justice League (2011) #11

Jul 24, 2012

The Shazam back-up story continues as the teenage brat version of Billy Batson finally finds himself on the most important subway ride of his life and Dr. Sivana tries to make a deal with the recently released Black Adam. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Justice League (2011) #12

Sep 3, 2012

The rest of the story has to deal with the team taking down Graves by believing in Christmas (or some such nonsense – this isn't the strongest part of the comic). What's important to note, however, are the big changes following the battle and the public's shaken faith in the team. Hal Jordan quits, Steve Trevor is fired, and we're teased with the introduction of a new Justice League of America which will premiere next year (and Captain Marvel beating the emo out of The Big Blue Boy Scout). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League (2011) #13

Oct 22, 2012

It's not a great story, but it's certainly better than some issues the comic has delivered over the past year and gives several characters their own moments to shine. We do get some talk behind the scenes discussing the shakeup of the team as well as a back-up story involving Steve Trevor and Green Arrow as a lead-in to the upcoming series Justice League of America. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League (2011) #14

Nov 27, 2012

The Shazam! back-up story works a little better than usual as it is focused on Black Adam journeying out into the world with Dr. Sivana rather than the truly awful (not to mention unrecognizable) version of Captain Marvel that DC has presented us with as part of the New 52. Seriously, this character in already in serious need of a reboot. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Justice League (2011) #15

Jan 2, 2013

Unless you're a huge Aquaman fan anxiously anticipating this new event (i.e. your name is Geoff Johns) there's almost nothing here for you. No Flash. No Green Lantern. Batman saved by Aquaman. The art's not bad, and we get a little more of Superman and Wonder Woman together on a date, but that's about it. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Justice League (2011) #18

Mar 24, 2013

The back-up story continues Billy Batson acting like a spineless prick and his continued unwillingness to be a hero despite the power granted to him and Black Adam‘s rampage and gathering of the Seven Deadly Enemies of Man to his side to unleash his evil on the wizard and his new champion. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Justice League (2011) #21

Jul 4, 2013

Fans of the new direction of the character, devoid of all his original charm and magic or a character that no matter how dark or cynical the world got around him never lost sense of responsibility and his antiquated notion of right and wrong, might enjoy this one as there is plenty of action – even if the unnecessarily rushed ending is totally cribbed from old Captain Marvel adventures (and not all that well). At least Mary Shazam (God, that's a stupid name) gets to kick a little ass, although the panels we get are much more focused on characters preening about to jump into battle, not actually in action (or as I like to call it Jim Lee inspired-art). Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Justice League (2018) #1

Jun 9, 2018

Despite being on a semi-hero kick in recent years, this issue seems to trumpet the return of Lex Luthor as a major villain while foreshadowing something possibly Earth shattering in whatever is making it to Earth. It's a solid beginning. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League (2018) #45

Jun 2, 2020

On a positive note, the art of Eddy Barrows downplays the shitty post-Flashpoint version of the Flash‘s costume by hiding the ridiculous grooves in his costume as much as possible by keeping the speedster in motion for most of the comic (and refusing to fill in that awful yellow piping).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League (2018) #75

Apr 28, 2022

The issue offers exactly what the cover promises in the death of major DC heroes (although I'm not sure how this will impact those with their own monthly titles). We also get cameos from heroes from other worlds, including Captain Carrot, as well an army of villains under the control of the Great Darkness.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League (2018): Road to Dark Crisis #1

Jun 6, 2022

The Pariah story is likely the most important to the larger arc (and also the least interesting), but the stories are fine even if they are pushing towards an event I'll admit I still don't yet care about.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League International (2011) #1

Sep 12, 2011

The first issue isn't great, involving the formation of the team, their first adventure, and a B-story about terrorists blowing up the Hall of Justice, but it's still one of the best of DC's “New 52.” Given the team, and writer Dan Jurgens' history, I'll give this one a chance at least through its first story arc but its going to have to improve over that time to get me to keep picking it up. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Justice League International (2011) #2

Oct 12, 2011

It's an improvement from the first issue, but the comic is still missing a little of the fun from Justice League: Generation Lost. If Booster is going to be the more serious version we're seeing here I think the book needs a little more youthful energy which someone like Blue Beetle could provide. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Justice League International (2011) #4

Dec 10, 2011

Writer Dan Jurgens does give us some fun moments (hell, he's even getting me to change my mind about Godiva) and the art by Aaron Lopresti fits the story well, even if Peraxxus' design is far too reminiscent of Galactus) including a full-page spread of the team jumping back into action. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Justice League International (2011) #5

Jan 11, 2012

The opening arc hasn't been great, but it hasn't had the huge ups and downs of the less consistent Justice League, either. The final panel makes me thing we'll soon see another old friend from the Giffen days as well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League International (2011) #6

Feb 6, 2012

From the comic's final panel it looks like the team is going to be thrown right back into the action but I'm hoping Dan Jurgens doesn't forget to include these kinds of moments which really make a JLI comic work. I'm also sad to see the (apparent) departure of Batman who definitely belongs on this title. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League International (2011) #7

Mar 8, 2012

We also get a surprise appearance by Batwing. Although I think he fits well with the make-up of the team, I am a little saddened by the prospect of him as a replacement for Batman. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League International (2011) #8

Apr 7, 2012

There's plenty of action, and the inclusion of two more New 52 characters, but the execution is only so-so. Still, it's worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Justice League International (2011) #10

Jun 9, 2012

We do get a couple of small moments between August General in Iron and O.M.A.C. over their similar situations and another scene of Guy Gardner visiting Ice in the hospital, but the focus is on a group of relatively unitnteresting super-villains that ends with the JLI smacked down again along with yet another cliffhanger. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League International (2011) #12

Aug 6, 2012

The JLI will return in next month's Justice League Internation Annual #1 before apparently coming back in some new form whether it be a new JLI series or perhaps as Godiva teases under the name of the Booster Bunch. The team we're left with in the final panel – Booster Gold, Godiva, August General in Iron, Guy Garnder, and OMAC could use a little sprucing up before their relaunched in a new title. And here's hoping the new JLI will have a little more of the fun of the original and less of the dreariness (and awful redesigned cosutmes) of the first attempt at a New 52 version. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League International (2011) Annual #1

Sep 6, 2012

With Booster Gold disappearing from existence but not continuity (Batman still remembers him) and the universe altering effects of Superman and Wonder Woman's kiss, there's quite a bit left unanswered (including the identity of the person now in control of Brother EYE). As to when we might get some answers, or see Booster's Bunch again, your guess is as good as mine. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
2
Justice League of America (2013) #1

Feb 26, 2013

Throw in the fact that there's no way this group of killers, crazy people, and the kind of characters who would usually get scrubbed when you reboot an entire universe, could possibly act like, or be marketed as. a team, and an elaborate money grab by DC putting out variant issues for all 50 states and you've got the beginnings of a trainwreck of epic proportions. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Justice League of America (2013) #2

Mar 23, 2013

Issue #2 does have some fun moments, my favorite being the sequence involving Vibe and Hawkman meeting for the first time. Although it's pretty forced, I also liked the idea of setting up a relationship between Trevor and Catwoman. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Justice League of America (2017) #1

Feb 27, 2017

Given the odd make-up of the team, which appears to be throwing a group of currently unused characters together in a single book (whether they belong together or not), it's hard not to compare it the flawed Suicide Squad film. The first mission for these new Justice Leaguers will be stopping the Extremists, a group of super-villains from a parallel Earth looking for a new planet to conquer after killing off all of its world's heroes. Can Batman pull this ragtag band together? Well, he is Batman. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League of America (2017): Vixen Rebirth #1

Jan 24, 2017

While there might be more to mine in the future, right now there's not much to the character other than her animal powers and her celebrity. The comic plays on both well enough, and fans of the character should enjoy themselves here. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League United #0

Apr 25, 2014

Offering an Adam Strange (apparently) before his time on Rann, Lemire and McKone populate the team with a nice collection of B-list and C-list heroes which one would assume would allow the creative team a little more leeway in terms of storylines compared to the major Justice League title. The comic puts together Stargirl, Martian Manhunter, Strange, Supergirl (who only appears on the cover), Green Arrow, and Hawkman (who apparently with take on pseudo-Lobo next month) for a first issue that delivers some fun interactions and plenty of action. I'm interested to see where things go from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League United #1

May 22, 2014

While I still think this group of heroes can work, I'm having some doubts about the initial set-up here as it looks like it's going to take at least a couple more issues to bring the full team together and make sense of things. A more straightforward first story, more centered on establishing the dynamics of the group and how the team works together would probably have worked better rather than throwing us into a pair of separate stories light years apart which are likely only to get more complicated as the Canadian group is transported to Rann. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League United #2

Jun 20, 2014

The genetic plot is pretty goofy, but I'm willing to let this opening arc play out and see if Lemire and artist Mike McKone can make it work. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Justice League United #3

Jul 17, 2014

The death of a major character seems a bit odd, especially as the title hadn't even had time to properly work Hawkman into the group dymnamic (as nearly all of his storyline was separate from that of the League). I expect him to miraculously return next month (like his severed arm did earlier in the series). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League United #4

Aug 21, 2014

Although Justice League United #4 wraps up the arc it doesn't do much to sell me to continue reading the title past this so-so issue which leaves the team and comic with holes to fill. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League United #6

Nov 20, 2014

The action allows the latest issue to highlight the powers and limitations of a questionable number of characters all in one book (and I'm always okay with Stargirl getting to kick a little ass). Starting the second-half of the Ultra arc in the annual was a bit of a dick move on DC's part as those who missed picking up the issue may struggle a bit for why everyone (including heroes from the future) seems to be fighting over killing, controlling, or worshiping an awkward alien kid, but even for as messy as it is the story still holds together (although I have doubts whether it can continue to do so for three more issues). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League United #7

Dec 23, 2014

With all that settled there's still plenty of action to be had as the two super-hero groups will combine resources to stop Byth from turning Ultra into a creature of mass destruction eventually responsible for the death of millions. With my need to cut back a bit on my monthly comic bills, Justice League United continues to straddle the line of worth picking up although this month's beautiful Darwyn Cooke variant cover made the choice a little easier. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Justice League United #14

Oct 21, 2015

Ever since the launch of the New 52 DC has had trouble with the inconsistency of their various Justice League books. There's a joy and love deep at the heart of this issue for all these characters that has been missing in far too many of those other stories. Even if we don't get any interaction between Batgirl and Stargirl both heroines steal plenty of moments separately between the insanity of battle most of the other characters wage through. The story may not make a hell of a lot of sense to me but I certainly applaud the spirit of the issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League United Annual #1

Nov 8, 2014

The B-story involves Green Arrow, Animal Man, Supergirl, and Stargirl tracking down the villainous Bith and discovering that their dead teammate Hawkman isn't so dead (although he's apparently now working for the other side). For an annual the issue works well kicking off the next arc of the series which (even for someone who isn't a bit Legion fan) should get interesting with the number of characters making appearances before all is said and done. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League vs. Suicide Squad #1

Dec 29, 2016

Because such a fight can't last all that long (certainly not six issues) his first issue also throws a wildcard in the mix as Maxwell Lord makes his first appearance in Rebirth taking advantage of the situation with a prison break to fill out his own team of soldiers including Lobo (thankfully back to his classic style). Not sure just what Max is after, but his involvement in the story does make it slightly more intriguing. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League: Generation Lost #2

May 28, 2010

I know Gardner's gone through some changes since Giffen has had his hooks in him, but I was really hoping Guy would help round out this team (I'm also holding out hope for J'onn, Mister Miracle and Oberon). Of course if he hits his head on something… Just a suggestion, Mr. Giffen. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice League: Generation Lost #14

Nov 27, 2010

Like most of these futuristic snapshots, this one offers little more than a chance to dream-up new characters or design new costumes for current ones (none of which are all that memorable). One thing we do learn is Maxwell Lord will attempt to kill Wonder Woman unless Captain Atom and his League can stop him (guess Max is holding a grudge over that whole ‘broken neck' thing).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Justice League: Generation Lost #18

Feb 1, 2011

By the end of the issue, when the action has finally stopped a few things are clear. We know Power Girl is now a part of the team, we know how Maxwell Lord is remains forgotten by the rest of the world (it has to do with the collective conscious of the world helping to make someone who remembers him immediately begin to forget), and we know Power Girl can beat up anyone she damn well chooses. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League: Generation Lost #19

Feb 14, 2011

We'll have to wait and see how permanent the fallout of this issue becomes and what his death means to Booster Gold and the Justice League, but for now the DCU is again left without a Blue Beetle. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League: Generation Lost #20

Mar 1, 2011

Given that so much of this issue is flashback we get very little of the confrontation of the JLI attempting to capture the fleeing Lord. What we do get is confirmation of Reyes' death and a glimpse into the mind of the man who shot him. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League: Generation Lost #22

Mar 29, 2011

I'm still a little sad we aren't getting a little Guy Gardner thrown in (he certainly could use the break from the Brightest Day nonsense he seems to be trapped in), but I'm happy to see the return of Blue Beetle so quickly. Also, I've got to say just having Batman back with the JLI is pretty damn cool. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Justice League: Generation Lost #23

Apr 19, 2011

However this ends, and I feel pretty safe in assuming Wonder Woman isn't going to die, writer Judd Winick has given us a DC year-long event I really enjoyed. I'm going to be sorry when this one's over. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Justice League: Generation Lost #24

May 2, 2011

The world may now know he exists, but Maxwell Lord isn't going away. And he's already started working on repairing his image. Too bad there's not a team out there to keep an eye on him… or is there? Oh, yeah! Sounds good to me! Maybe we could get a little Guy Gardner (and even Captain Marvel?) this time around? Guess we'll have to wait and see. Definitely worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Justice Society of America #52

Jul 5, 2011

It's not a great issue, but it does have a cameo from a rabbit super-hero (who it appears as a children's character from some kind of Sesame Street knock-off). This one's strictly or fans of JSA, Challengers, or the Zoo Crew.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice Society of America (2022) #5

Aug 15, 2023

Justice Society of America #5 is the kind of star-studded affair that writer Geoff Johns does best. Some of his best work has been on different iterations of the JSA and you can see his love for these characters come through the pages.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Justice Society of America (2022) #6

Sep 18, 2023

The comic also spends more time with the evolving status quo the Huntress has made with Batman, and her plans now that she seems permanently stuck in a past where she hasn't yet been born. For longtime DC readers, there's also a fun interaction between Khalid Nassour and Kent Nelson‘s sidekick Salem Nader which attempts to explain the bizarre history of Dr. Fate over the past 40 years. Let's just say it's complicated.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Kick-Ass 2 #1

Oct 27, 2010

It's a solid first issue and the look and voice of the characters remain, but… For a comic called Kick-Ass this one doesn't really. I'm sure there's plenty of that to come, but this first issue is far more introspection than action, and those wanting to get to the good stuff will have to wait at least one more issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Kirby: Genesis #0

Jun 1, 2011

Busiek does a great job at setting up the world and giving us a solid narrative around the probe's journey, which is actually far more interesting than the Kirby creations (at least the early glimpses we get). At on $1 this one's an easy recommendation, but I'm still more than a little wary of shelling out $4 for the first issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Knight Terrors (2023) #1

Jul 13, 2023

Full of zombies and nightmarish creatures, Knight Terrors seems designed for those who liked previous crossovers such as Blackest Night.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Koshchei: The Deathless #1

Jan 10, 2018

While he's the furthest thing from a sympathetic character, I'm intrigued by this look back into the past of Koshchei. The framing of the having the story told in a pub in Hell is a nice touch as well. If I have concerns it's with Mignola finding enough content to fill six issues. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Koshchei: The Deathless #2

Feb 8, 2018

Although the issue ends in heaps of blood and death, Koshchei the Deathless #2 feels very much like a sunny fairy tale told by Koshchei to Hellboy over a cold beer (if beer actually gets cold in Hell?). Although the unstoppable warrior was successful in the first part of his quest, it appears that his tale is about to take yet another tragic turn. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Kung Fu Panda #1

May 10, 2011

[Ape Entertainment, $3.95]

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Kung Fu Panda #2

Jul 6, 2011

[Ape Entertainment, $3.95]

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Kung Fu Panda #3

Oct 22, 2011

[Ape Entertainment, $3.95]

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Kung Fu Panda #4

Feb 2, 2012

[Ape Entertainment, $3.99]

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Kung Fu Panda #5

Jun 10, 2012

[Ape Entertainment, $3.99]

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Kung Fu Panda #6

Jun 24, 2012

[Ape Entertainment, $3.99]

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Lady Rawhide / Lady Zorro #1

Mar 28, 2015

I have no connection to or knowledge of the ludicrously-garbed Lady Rawhide and her motivations, and Dynamite still hasn't sold me on Lady Zorro as anything more than a somewhat ridiculous supporting character. Fans of either, or both, of these women are likely to enjoy the issue more than I did. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Lady Zorro #1

Jul 26, 2014

If your interest wasn't already piqued beforehand, Lady Zorro #1 won't do much to sell you on the mini-series but Zorro fans will likely enjoy the swordplay and the chance to see Lady Zorro in action once more. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Larfleeze #1

Jul 7, 2013

Throw in a giant energy space dog and you've got the makings of a really good first issue, although I'm not totally sold on the art by Scott Kolins (perhaps Kevin Maguire is available?). My interest in this comic has more to do with the people writing it than the character, but (for at least for one issue) that produces the kind of madcap fun the New 52 has been sorely missing. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Larfleeze #2

Jul 30, 2013

I've been bemoaning the lack of humor and fun in the New 52 for nearly two years now and, at least for the first two issues, that's exactly what Larfleeze delivers. Crazy, absurdest, space adventure wackiness. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Larfleeze #3

Sep 8, 2013

Freeing Larfleeze, Stargrave's former employer sets off to steal all of Laord's wealth and creates Orange Lantern constructs to deal with The Wanderer and reacquire his property, however things take yet another turn when The Wanderer uses her powers to turn the constructs into flesh and blood Orange Lanterns not too happy with being betrayed and slaughtered by their old pal Larfleeze in another goofy and enjoyable issue from Keith Giffen and J. M. DeMatteis. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Larfleeze #4

Oct 30, 2013

So far the comic has succeeded by giving us more of Stargrave than his master, but the latest issue proves both characters' antics can be a hell of a lot of fun. It also looks like the other Orange Lanterns are here to stay, as is Larfleeze (who they can't kill now that he is the living power battery for all their rings). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Larfleeze #5

Dec 4, 2013

The Wanderer's suspicions foreshadow a serious threat not only to her newly arrived family but to the entire universe as she suspects a powerful enemy has put aside their own internal squabbles to to their attention on her family. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Larfleeze #6

Jan 9, 2014

Where the action and humor of the main story picks up (I love the horsey), Stargrave's tale (which is nothing more than the pair watching an uninteresing group of characters) suffers a bit. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Larfleeze #7

Feb 8, 2014

Already at seven issues, the opening arc is beginning to drag a bit, but by the end of the issue Keith Giffen and J. M. DeMatteis finally bring the various threads of the storyline together by uniting the Laord, the Wanderer, Errata, and Dyrge all against a greedy ring-slinger and hopefully laying the ground work for a new arc and the eventual appearance of G'nort in a couple of months. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Larfleeze #8

Mar 2, 2014

Larfleeze vs. the gods from another dimension certainly promises plenty of action next week, but I'm even more excited with the actions of the planet of Sorrow who decide to call in a Green Lantern to deal with their new problem which means the comic has something truly great up its sleeve yet to come. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Larfleeze #9

Mar 30, 2014

Although I was hoping for a bit more G'Nort in this issue, Larfleeze #9 continues the ongoing storyline of the Orange Lantern and Pulsar Stragrave's interactions with the Laord's family while setting up what should be very interesting tenth issue next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Larfleeze #10

Apr 28, 2014

Although I think artist Scot Kolins does fine with the other characters here, I would have preferred a more over-the-top cartoonish take on G'Nort. That said, it's still good to have the Green Lantern Corps most absurd member back in action. Of course, I'm the guy who wanted to pitch a team-up book starring G'nort and Dex-Starr so I might be slightly biased. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Larfleeze #11

Jun 4, 2014

Although I'm not surprised that the title is going away, I am a bit sad as Keith Giffen and J. M. DeMatteis have managed to carve out some of their old school zaniness in this small corner of a must too gritty New 52 Universe. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Larfleeze #12

Jul 3, 2014

DC needs more, not less, comics with the irreverent charm of Larfleeze but apparently that's not in the cards. So I'll just thank Keith Giffen, J. M. DeMatteis, and Scot Kolins for getting me to not only buy but enjoy a comic about a character I cared very little about before this series and am now sorry to say goodbye to. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Legendary Star-Lord #1

Jul 8, 2014

The comic ends with the reason for his new trinket and a new frenemy which suggest where the comic may take our hero (although it's pretty vague about when this adventure takes place or the whereabouts of the rest of the Guardians). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Legendary Star-Lord #2

Aug 11, 2014

Disconnected from the rest of the Marvel Universe (or the Guardians own continuity) the opening two issues have provided some fun but they also showcase why Peter Quill works better with partners rather than in Solo (pun intended) missions. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Legends of Red Sonja #1

Nov 13, 2013

Although it lacks a view of the character herself, this collection of stories is more than enough to sell me on the series and make me to look forward to what the next group of artists and writers have in store. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Legends of Red Sonja #2

Dec 14, 2013

Undeterred from the tales of the She-Devil with a Sword's heroics in the first issue, which weren't having the desired effect, Sonja sets out to pull back on the legend a bit in hopes that the group may overconfidence when their paths finally do meet on the battlefield. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Legends of Red Sonja #5

Apr 9, 2014

Legends of Red Sonja #5 ends the mini-series a strong note (and unfortunate use of hero's chain-mail bikini by one of the acting troupe). Those who have stayed with the series are rewarded, and for those who haven't I would recommend looking out for the likelihood of a trade paperback collection in the near future. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Leviathan Dawn #1

Mar 2, 2020

The rest of the issue checks in with Leviathan itself as Shaw continues his plan including buying Markovia and becoming legitimate in the eyes of the world. The battle, it seems, has just begun. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Li'L Sonja #1

Feb 20, 2014

Fighting off the dragon with her sword, wits, and a full page of wonderful puns, Sonja eventually outsmarts the dragon and saves the day. A hell of a lot of fun, my only disappointment comes from how long it took me to pick it up and the fact that there's no issue #2 to look forward to. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Lone Ranger Vol. 2 #1

Jan 8, 2012

[Dynamite Entertainment, $3.99]

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Lone Ranger Vol. 2 #2

Feb 8, 2012

[Dynamite Entertainment, $3.99]

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Lone Ranger Vol. 2 #3

Mar 12, 2012

The pacing here is much better than in the first couple of issues and, despite the unnecessary use of flashbacks, it works very well by delivering the series' best issue to date. I've also got to throw a shout out to Francesco Francavilla for a very cool cover. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Lone Ranger Vol. 2 #6

Jun 17, 2012

The conclusion to “Hard Country” leaves a few questions unanswered as the Ranger wonders why an agent of the U.S. Government led them straight into a trap. Those answers, however, will have to wait as the next arc will apparently focus on Tonto and the secrets of his past. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Lone Ranger Vol. 2 #7

Jul 7, 2012

Those who don't mind picking up a comic where the title character barely makes an appearance should consider picking this issue up. I'm not sure there's enough here to work for an entire arc, but there's certainly enough to bring me back next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Lone Ranger Vol. 2 #8

Aug 8, 2012

Fans who have always wanted to see more Tonto are certainly getting their wish as the Ranger and Tonto's current condition are barely mentioned in favor of more panels about the Indian's past. But by next issue I'd expect to see more of the current storyline woven in involving more on the severity of Tonto's injuries (otherwise why not simply release the story as a Tonto mini-series and forget the need to make it fit inside the ongoing title?). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Lone Ranger Vol. 2 #9

Sep 12, 2012

I don't know that I'm excited to see three more issues of "Native Ground," but what we've gotten so far has been enough to keep my interest. Writer Ande Parks continues his use of Native American folk tales to help frame the story, which works well here given how little we get verbally from Tonto himself in this issue. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Lone Ranger Vol. 2 #10

Oct 11, 2012

Although the story arc has filled in quite a bit of backstory, we're now four issues in and no closer to learning the events that brought Tonto and the Lone Ranger together. I'm hoping that part of the story will be told by the Ranger in his quest to get his companion the help he needs to survive. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Lone Ranger Vol. 2 #11

Dec 13, 2012

I was hoping the flashbacks would take us up to the first meeting of the Lone Ranger and Tonto, but with only one issue left in the arc we may not get to see writer Ande Parks' take on the famous scene following the death of all but one Ranger at the hands of Butch Cavendish. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Lone Ranger Vol. 2 #12

Jan 27, 2013

The arc lasted a little too long for my tastes, so I'm glad to hear the comic is following “Native Ground” with a series of one-shot issues featuring the adventures of Lone Ranger and Tonto. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Lone Ranger Vol. 2 #13

Mar 3, 2013

The issue works well providing a villain that almost makes the Lone Ranger loose his temper. There's also a couple of nice scenes where the Lone Ranger earns the womens' trust first through his badge and later through a single silver bullet. That final piece also ties into the issue's opening scene at an Antiques Roadshow where a woman with family heirloom and a legendary story about her grandmother's grandmother adventure with a masked man helps set the stage for what follows. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Lord of the Jungle #1

Jan 22, 2012

Other than the strange half-ape/half-human creatures whom the natives and the apes both fear there's nothing all that new here. And, sadly, we don't seen any of Tarzan in action as an adult. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Magneto #1

Feb 2, 2011

I'm a big fan of the character created by Stan Lee and Jack Kirby. In fact, when written well, he's my favorite X-Men character. Sadly, in terms of talent, Chaykin is a far cry from either of Magneto's creators. This Magneto is roguish, boorish, and less than a pale shadow of the man who would come to torment the X-Men for years to come. Best forgotten, leave this one on the shelf where it belongs.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Magneto (2014) #1

Mar 12, 2014

I'll admit I'd have preferred the character to stay with Cyclops rather than becoming the vagabond vigilante we see here. However, it's certainly an intriguing set-up and offers a variety of stories to be told in the coming months. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Magneto (2014) #2

Apr 7, 2014

Writer Cullen Bunn and artist Gabriel Hernandez Walta weave a strong story balancing Magneto's own past with his current circumstances reminding us where Magneto came from while demonstrating that the former super-villain may not have changed as much as Cyclops and the X-Men had hoped. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Magneto (2014) #3

May 13, 2014

With Cyclops‘ team also searching for the truth behind the new Sentinels it will be interesting to see if the two comics converge and what Magneto's response from, and to, his old team might be. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Magneto (2014) #5

Jun 11, 2014

Although I liked the idea of Magneto walking the Earth like Caine from Kung Fu, Briar's introduction does open the comic to several new possibilities. The introduction of an unknown quantity not only gives someone for Magneto to interact with but offers an ongoing mystery about her motives. I'm on the fence about giving the reader much more information about the girl than the title character receives, but I'd suspect Magneto has his own suspicions which will serve him well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Magneto (2014) #6

Jul 14, 2014

Offering plenty of action of Magento maiming and killing various versions of the group he no longer considers true mutants, the comic plays on themes of the thought processes of an older and more ruthless version of the character that continues to emerge in the new title. Eventually Magneto gains control of the group's resurrection properties planning to bend them to his will as he has done so many mutants in the past. As to what he plans for the Marauders, and just what his control of them will do to the character, we'll just have to wait and see. Worth a look

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Magneto (2014) #7

Jul 26, 2014

Although the mutant-hunting creature is harder to deal with than at the peak of his powers, Magneto uses the Predator X's strengths against it before turning his fury on those in charge of the operation. Despite the fact that the reasons for Cyclops and Emma Frost‘s power loss was explained a month ago (a finale which involved our lead character), Magneto's power loss hasn't been fixed (or apparently even yet explained) in this issue. In the overall scope of things Magneto seems to be lagging behind the other X-books. Of course that may be why Marvel has put two issues of the series out in less than a month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Magneto (2014) #8

Aug 27, 2014

Personally I'm all in favor of Magneto being reinstated back to full strength, but evil Beast storyline already opened the door for that as a possibility (only to be immediately ignored by every X-book afterwards). The choice offered here takes the character down a darker road which may offer some intriguing storylines but probably doesn't serve the character all that well in the long run. If Magneto is restored to full power (whatever costs may be involved) the question then becomes where does he fit in the larger X-Men and Marvel universes? For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Magneto (2014) #10

Oct 8, 2014

For a comic that has gone out of its way to keep its lead character off the grid throwing him into the middle of a crossover this big is more than a little jarring. That said, the tease at the end of the issue involving Magneto's rash decision allows readers who stick around to see what an amped-up version of his former self might accomplish. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Magneto (2014) #21

Sep 2, 2015

Magneto has of course died in in comics only to be brought back. You just can't keep a good villain down. No doubt Magneto will rise again but for now it looks like the character will be put to rest leaving a large hole in the X-Men side of the Marvel Universe I don't see any particular character stepping into. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Magneto (2023) #1

Aug 8, 2023

Despite my love for Magneto, I'm not a big X-Men fan as I find the rabbit hole of its niche subverse of the Marvel Universe an interesting place to visit from time to time but far too cluttered with characters I care nothing about. Speaking of those characters, here are the New Mutants who take up (in my opinion) way too much time for a comic book titled Magneto. I'm also not a fan of attempting to shave down such a rich and complex history of a character for the sole purpose to make him fit better in current continuity. Oh well, Marvel will no doubt give him a brand new title in the next 8-12 months.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Marauders (2022) #1

Apr 14, 2022

Marauders, using the odd reliable X-Men trick of taking a couple beloved characters and filling out a roster with random others, is an odd comic in terms of style with the art bleeding over into anime at times. The results are weird, but still fun. The team's first mission may be their last as they fly into Shi'ar Galaxy looking for answers about the First Mutants, secrets that apparently the Shi'ar are willing to kill to protect.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Mars Attacks / Red Sonja #1

Aug 31, 2020

With the humans unable to communicate with the Martians, I wouldn't expect a lot of snappy dialogue back and forth but the series should offer it's share of Sonja-on-Martian violence with a large assortment of Martian warriors for Sonja to slice through.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Marvel Legacy #1

Oct 2, 2017

Marvel Legacy #1 is the first issue of a wide-sweeping arc promising to bring a bit of the classic Marvel back to the fold. I'll believe it when I see it. As for the first issue, I'll stick with my comparison of Final Crisis – it's an awfully ambitious clusterfuck. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Mary Jane & Black Cat (2022) #1

Dec 27, 2022

Far more fun, was the issue's back-up story in which Felicia tells a tall tale to friends over a poker game about how she once stole Doctor Doom's mask. It's worth a read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Masks #1

Dec 6, 2012

And Alex Ross' work, whether you love it or hate it, is exactly what you'd expect to find here with his glossy painted panels that make each character appear larger than life (which, let's admit it, is challenging when you're dealing with a character like The Spider). I'm not sure how long I'll stick around, especially at $4 an issue, but I'm not sad I gave this first issue a shot. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Masks #2

Dec 26, 2012

I thought the first comic worked in trying to throw all these characters together in an unusual situation that required them to work together. Masks #2 isn't quite as good, forced to rely more on fleshing out a story than just introducing the concept. There's far more talking about doing something than actual action, and some “necessary” awkward introductions among the heroes take up way too many panels. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Masters of the Universe: Forge of Destiny (2023) #1

Sep 11, 2023

Masters of the Universe: Forge of Destiny #1 features quite a bit of narration and expository explanation over the first-half of the issue to get events eventually moving, but I did enjoy Eddie Nunez's art here.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Masters of the Universe: Forge of Destiny (2023) #2

Oct 13, 2023

King Randor's journey of peace through the lands of Eternia, hoping to unite allies against Skeletor, runs into trouble when the royal caravan is attacked by warriors of Anwat Gar wrongly believing Prince Adam is the cause of their own prince's suffering.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Midnight Suns (2022) #1

Sep 28, 2022

Midnight Suns #1 (obviously inspired by the game of the same name) is a fine, if not particularly interesting, first issue setting the stage. I will admit to being distracted by Magik‘s look (a sort of half-gold armor that doesn't match the cover or much resemble the version fans and cosplayers have come to love over the years). Other characters include Blade, Wolverine, and the Spirit Rider. But perhaps the most interesting thing about events is the attention it draws from a certain super-villain.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Mister Miracle (2017) #1

Aug 10, 2017

The unreliable narrator has been a popular trope in comics recently, most notably Moon Knight. There's obviously something wrong with Scott and his perception of reality making it hard for us to judge what is real (a brutal visit from Orion) and what isn't (a visit from his old friend Oberon). Dark and foreboding, this may not be what I expected in a Mister Miracle story, but it's certainly worth a good long look for fans of the character. Called back home to New Genesis after the fall of Highfather, can Mister Miracle pull himself together in time to perform his greatest escape yet. I guess we'll see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Mister Miracle (2017) #6

Jan 14, 2018

While I haven't been staying up-to-date on this comic, this issue is nearly perfect in and of itself and should work for fans whether or not they care about he larger upheaval on New Genesis or how that ties into our heroes' future. Best of the Week.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Mockingbird #4

Jul 6, 2016

This issue is a hell of a lot of fun. Although saddled with a more complex backstory than her TV counterpart, this version of Mockingbird should be approachable for both new and old readers alike. Writer Chelsea Cain's dialogue is smart and crisp, and I love the art by Kate Niemczyk. Mockingbird isn't normally a character I give a second thought about, but if the rest of the series is anywhere near as entertaining as this issue I may have to start paying attention. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Mockingbird #5

Aug 4, 2016

Featuring a pair of unexpected cameos in Miles Morales and Howard the Duck, Mockingbird #5 may not be quite as good as last month's underwater issue but it proves to still be a hell of a lot of fun. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Mockingbird #6

Aug 24, 2016

Knowing that Hawkeye has confessed to the crime, I'm a little confused as to what exactly Mockingbird is seeking (or what intel eventually gets her skittish contact killed), but the strange backdrop sets up a murder-mystery I'll be interested in watching the Avenger solve. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Mockingbird #7

Sep 19, 2016

Mockingbird #7 will deliver the identity of the person responsible for getting Bobbi on the boat as well as the murder. Hardcore Marvel fans might get a chill out of the reveal of the Midnight Rider being responsible for Bobbi's recent troubles (well, one of them), but it's a bit anticlimactic for the series winking so hard at us for the rest of the issue you wonder if anyone involved can actually still see straight. Hopefully the reveal will add a bit of drama back into the comic (since a murder certainly didn't work) and help balance the next issue. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Mockingbird #8

Oct 26, 2016

The only real negative here is the tie-in back to Civil War II which feels a bit forced. In truth, the ending is hard to take seriously given both the tone of the comic and the fact that the scene is far more plausible if it's Bobbi's beach-bound fantasy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Moon Knight (2011) #1

May 10, 2011

The story (even with the issue addressed above) is good, but I wasn't that impressed with the art by Alex Maleev which isn't as strong as the art from Vengeance of the Moon Knight (the character's last ongoing title). I'm also far from sold on the $4 price-tag which is pretty damn pricey for a Moon Knight story. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Moon Knight (2011) #4

Aug 8, 2011

Every month I pick up Moon Knight expecting it to be my last issue and every month (at least so far) writer Brian Michael Bendis has given me a reason to come back for more. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Moon Knight (2011) #5

Sep 14, 2011

Even if the plot of uncovering the Los Angeles kingpin isn't furthered with the latest issue it there are some entertaining panels. However, because so little movement is made moving the story forward you could easily save $4, skip this issue, and (aside from a couple humorous scenes) not miss anything all that important.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2011) #6

Oct 10, 2011

My favorite part of this issue, however, is when the Avengers (the ones Moon Knight has been hallucinating about for weeks) actually show up to have a talk with him. This provides the week's best panel as Spidey has a question for Moon Knight about his latest tactics. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2011) #7

Nov 5, 2011

A good end to the series first story arc. It will be interesting to see where things go from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2011) #8

Dec 13, 2011

Moon Knight and Echo's dialogue is the highlight of the issue, but there are some other moments worth mention including Marc Spector's surreal conversation with his assistant why the werewolves in his TV-show can't look more real, and Detective Hall's immediate reluctance to help a vigilante. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2011) #9

Jan 25, 2012

Aside for one panel with Echo where things get real very quickly (and which better be a tease!), I thoroughly enjoyed myself from cover to cover. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Moon Knight (2011) #10

Mar 7, 2012

This isn't the best issue of the series by any means, but it's definitely still worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Moon Knight (2011) #11

Apr 2, 2012

This issue gets most of the storylines wrapped up with what's sure to be a can't miss final issue next month as Moon Knight goes out Nefaria one more time. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2011) #12

Apr 26, 2012

The final issue of the series deals with Moon Knight's final confrontation with Count Nefaria (who still can't believe he was taken down by Moon Knight), an appearance by the Avengers (the real ones, not just those in the hero's head), and a rather casual conversation with Tony Stark about the impending Robot Holocaust. In other words, classic Bendis' Moon Knight. Worth a look – in fact pick up the whole series in trade paperback. You'll be glad you did.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2014) #1

Mar 10, 2014

After one issue I don't find Ellis' take on the character to be as interesting as that of Bendis. However, the idea that Spector is compelled to create versions of himself in the four aspects of the other-dimensional intelligence which brought him back for the dead opens up new paths of discovery for the comic. From the early shots I've seen it appears the character will be putting his suit aside and be back in costume starting next month (even if the look gets an unnecessary reboot that looks like it was done by DC's New 52 Editorial). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Moon Knight (2014) #2

Apr 10, 2014

Although it means we get a story where Moon Knight is only in about half the comic, the story works well. I'm enjoying the art of Shalvey, but I really dislike the new more functional (i.e. New 52ish) black-and-white costume (reminding me a bit of Eppy Thatcher as well) instead of the character's traditional (i.e. way cooler) all-white garb. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Moon Knight (2016) #1

Apr 20, 2016

Still hearing the call of Khonshu, it appears our hero's first order of business is to get out of the mental hospital, don his old costume (the all-white one please), and try to suss out just what the hell is going on. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2016) #2

May 10, 2016

A mercenary turned champion of an Egyptian god, Moon Knight's origins have always been a bit odd. Writer Jeff Lemire continues to play with the concepts of Marc's fragile mental state as well as an extra-terrestrial being taking advantage of it for its own ends with interesting results. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2016) #3

Jun 8, 2016

Although one member of the group will be forced to stay behind as they either A) get on the subway or B) ride through space on Anubis' boat, by the end of the issue Moon Knight will have his hard-fought freedom. Pushed by the voice of Khonshu (who gives the our crazy hero some questionable advice) the real fight can begin as (at least to Moon Knight's eyes) New York looks a lot more like Egypt than it used to. Now the question becomes what is actually going on, and what can Moon Knight do to stop it? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2016) #4

Jul 11, 2016

While shocking to longtime fans, Frenchie's death does raise the stakes of Spector's current predicament as well as take away another key resource to help keep Moon Knight grounded and reign him in when necessary. It will be interesting to see what becomes of Marlene now as she could be the last anchor point for Marc outside of Khonshu's influence. Killing her would leave Marc untethered leading the comic into several possible stories involving Marc's inability to differentiate visions and reality. Or does writer Jeff Lemire plan to increase the woman's importance by having Marlene step into Frenchie's shoes as more of Margo Lane type sidekick for all the crazy action yet to come? I guess we'll have to wait and see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Moon Knight (2016) #5

Aug 9, 2016

The end of the issue is equally quizzical as Marc seemingly awakes from a nightmare back in the guise of one of his many identities. How much of the mental institution (if any of it) was real? How will Khoshu react to loosing his prize? And what's Moon Knight's role in the world now? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2016) #6

Sep 8, 2016

Although the unique structure of the book has limited our chance to see our hero in full costume (this issue does give us “actor” Marc Spector dressed on the movie set, but not connected to either the Lockley or Grant), Moon Knight continues to offer one of Marvel's more unique offerings. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Moon Knight (2016) #8

Nov 13, 2016

Moon Knight #8 continues the schizophrenic adventures of our hero. Taking place mostly in Jake Lockley's reality, the cab driver finds himself under arrest for murder and under suspicion for a series of recent killings. Escaping that reality, Moon Knight slingshots around both onto the movie set as Steven Grant and into the bizarre future fighting space werewolves. As the comic comes to a close, however, things get interesting as all three of his personalities comes face-to-face with Marc Spector back in the “real world” of Egyptian killers and pyramids in the middle of Manhattan. Whatever Marc has planned, he'll obviously need the help of all aspects of himself to get it done. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Moon Knight (2016) #9

Dec 20, 2016

Moon Knight may not exactly be sane by the end of this second arc, but at least he seems in full control of his faculties and only concerned with a single reality (rather than the multiple he's been jumping through since the series began). Even if he does now seem to have all his marbles, I'm not exactly sure what Marc can do against a god. I guess we're going to see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Moon Knight (2021) #6

Dec 29, 2021

Zodiac remains at large as the issue comes to a close with Spector beginning to heal and put his life back together. It seems both Zodiac and Hunter's Moon have plans for Moon Knight, whether he likes them or not. Will he fall as Zodiac hopes? Return to Khonshu's fold as Hunter's Moon desires? Or continue to carve out his own path? Only time will tell.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Moon Knight (2021) #7

Jan 27, 2022

One other important note about the issue, Moon Knight #7 reveals the identity of who Tigra has been keeping an eye on Marc Spector for, an Avenger who had quite a memorable run-in with Moon Knight not that long ago. Yeah, I can see why Black Panther would want to keep tabs on what new trouble Moon Knight could get into.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Moon Knight (2021) #8

Feb 16, 2022

Moon Knight #8 is a weird issue, but one that focuses on the positive relationship between Khonshu and this Fist. This is certainly a contrast to Moon Knight's relationship to his god. Hunter's Moon summons his god, one of the oldest stories, to battle one of the newest (who is apparently a godling?). The art is the real highlight here, providing some fun moments even if the story is a bit hit-and-miss and ends without offering any resolution.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2021) #10

Apr 13, 2022

While the half-black/half-white costume isn't my favorite (I prefer Moon Knight in all white, be it hero or suit) the art of Alessandro Cappuccio does hide parts of the costume in shadow while highlighting the glow of the white as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2021) #11

May 31, 2022

Moon Knight #11 breaks down the motivations of Zodiac (lots of madman monologuing here), with the villain attempting to free Marc Spector from various rules and confinements. However, pushing him further into Khonshu's clutches certainty doesn't seem the best way to manage this. As for his friends, looks like they've managed to stall for enough time for the hero to arrive and true confrontation between Moon Knight and Zodiac to begin.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Moon Knight (2021) #12

Jun 28, 2022

On the plus side, the issue does feature Zombie Moon Knights. On the other hand the battle the comic has been building for months sort of just ends rather than conclude, with Steven Grant taking control and preventing Marc Spector from taking any further vengeance out after the villain is rendered unconscious. Not sure what's next for our hero, but I'm guessing his god won't wait to long to cash in the favor he's owed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2021) #13

Jul 25, 2022

Taskmaster's take on Moon Knight, which doesn't even get into his ties to a god, works really well to sell just how dangerous a character he is (not that it changes the vampire's decision to continue his war). Sadly, we don't get a battle between the two. We also learn the fate of Soldierwhile the issue teases a possible more internal Moon Knight issue next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2021) #14

Aug 9, 2022

The internal dialogue explains the agreement in place to give Marc control and cuts deep into Marc's fears of how others view his condition and that he's by far the least likable of Moon Knight's personalities. If he lets the others out, will anyone still love him? Although it takes him getting his ass handed to him by the assassins, it appears the words finally hit home. What now becomes of Moon Knight?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2021) #15

Sep 19, 2022

The information provided by the team gives us some of the basics on Grand Mal and Nemean who Moon Knight has had run-ins recently. Following up on recent events, but playing into larger themes, Moon Knight #15 is a strong standalone issue that isn't a must-read but is sure an entertaining one.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Moon Knight (2021) #16

Nov 1, 2022

A very talky issue, the conversation is intercut with action sequences featuring Hunter's Moon battling, and losing, a fight against Grand Mal, Nemean, and some vampires which suggests the other Fist of Khonshu is killed (or at the very least paralyzed) by the villains leaving Moon Knight down a man heading into the fight with the Tutor.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2021) #17

Nov 21, 2022

Along with suggesting that Fists of Khosnhu can't die, a statement we know to be a lie, Moon Knight #17 mostly reminds us about the darker side of Moon Knight, and the power at his disposal, when he's got a point or statement to make. The return of Hunter's Moon, rather than an appearance by Khonshu is a bit surprising, but the real surprise is that Moon Knight allows the two killers to live.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Moon Knight (2021) #18

Jan 4, 2023

A smart and fun issue that also gives Hunter's Moon a chance to work off some of his rage and get back into the field as Moon Knight makes a definitive statement to the vampires about whose city New York is.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Moon Knight (2021) #19

Jan 19, 2023

Basic villain monologuing here that I don't know needs to take up so many pages (but then again its not like there is more meat left on the bone in the Moon Knight thread either).

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2021) #20

Feb 8, 2023

The Harlequin Hitmen certainly aren't characters I'd expect to see pop-up in Moon Knight, but their put to good enough use here as the messengers of someone out there pulling the strings and attacking Marc Spector through old friends and associates.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Moon Knight (2021) #21

Mar 15, 2023

3 Razors, Moon Knight

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2021) #22

Apr 26, 2023

Tigra guesses the truth about the Midnight Man long before she catches up with him, is hurt by the truth Marc has kept from her, and yet finds forgiveness in her heart when he apologizes leading to a shift in their dynamic that will be interesting to see explored not just between the two of them but between Tigra and his various other personalities as well. While not part of a larger arc, and centered on someone other than the comic's main character, there's quite a bit to enjoy here. Let's see where this goes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2021) #23

May 12, 2023

I wouldn't mind seeing Venom stick around for a little while longer, but a strong single-issue story is something I'll always be happy to receive.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Moon Knight (2021) #25

Jul 19, 2023

Moon Knight #25 offers an oversized issue that doesn't lead to any important revelations, wrap-up the ongoing story, or offer the unexpected.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Moon Knight (2021) #26

Aug 14, 2023

3.5 Razors, Moon Knight

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight (2021) #28

Oct 25, 2023

There's plenty of action for fans with the heroes fighting their way through the obstacles the Black Spectre has put in their paths, and some nice little character moments between the heroes as they journey into what could be their last adventure together. With the outcome all but assured, the journey continues.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Moon Knight (2021) #29

Dec 4, 2023

While the main focus is on Moon Knight versus the stand-in Spectre, the comic offers more action in the way of Hunter's Moon taking down Sarnak, Soldier rescuing Tigra, and Reese defending the Midnight Mission from Zodiac.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Moon Knight (2021) #30

Dec 20, 2023

While it's not my favorite volume of the character, MacKay had led us on an interesting, and often quite enjoyable, exploration of Marc with the lasting impression of boosting his various sidekicks into more that just role players.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Moon Knight: Black, White & Blood (2022) #1

May 16, 2022

Sadly, neither of the other two stories are nearly as entertaining. In “Anubis Rex,” Moon Knight is working with a young girl who is Khonshu's priestess in some form of dystopian future to battle those possessed by Ra's scarabs. And in “The End” we get a backward told story of Moon Knight ending up bleeding on the ground after working to try to protect a witness in time to testify against the mafia.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Moon Knight: Black, White & Blood (2022) #2

Jun 21, 2022

“The Empty Tomb” features a desperate Moon Knight attempt to rid himself of his connection to Khonshu by enlisting the help of Doctor Strange who doesn't feel all that good about his chances. A bloody and beaten Marc Spector sits down in Ruby's Diner to get a run through of all his personalities various troubles the next morning in “A Hard Day's Knight.” And in “Blood Red Glider” Moon Knight is given the opportunity to hunt down an old enemy in Henrik Kless.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Moon Knight: Black, White & Blood (2022) #3

Jul 26, 2022

In “Wrong Turn” three bank robbers pick the wrong cab to hijack as they get taken for a ride they will never forget by Jake Lockley. Poor fools. And Moon Knight fights off a cult in an attempt to save a young woman from becoming their sacrifice in “No Empty Sky” which also features a discussion between the hero and Khonshu about Marc Spector's role as his vessel (and what should happen if he should fall).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Moon Knight: Black, White & Blood (2022) #4

Sep 7, 2022

We also get two more tales, which like the first are fine but none are a real standout. After taking on a cult, Marc Spector finds his mind invaded by the god Shesmu “The Scent of Blood” who has plans for the hero. And in “Born to Be” Marc is haunted and attacked by cats which lead back to a Bastet cult.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Moon Knight: City of the Dead (2023) #1

Jul 28, 2023

The issue works as a fine introduction to a comic where a determined Moon Knight will be in a different realm filled not only with the Sons of the Jackal he dispatched at the beginning of this comic but plenty of old enemies he's sent to the afterlife.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Moon Knight: City of the Dead (2023) #2

Aug 30, 2023

3 Razors, Moon Knight

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #9

May 4, 2011

We're also given another appearance by the mysterious stranger who helped Jin escape the fire after the murder of his parents. As to what his agenda is in helping Jin take down the academy we're still not sure, but I'm willing to stick around to find out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #10

Jun 15, 2011

What we do know is in this other reality she sees several interesting characters including what appears to be an older version of herself trying to help her along her troubled journey. Like most of the series so far this one raises more questions than answers, and I've got mixed feelings concerning the emotionally explosive hanging sequence, but it's certainly not boring. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #11

Aug 17, 2011

The entire issue is centered around temptation. First Ike is offered his freedom by Gribbs, and then more amorous pursuits by Ms. Daramount, and all he has to do is commit one simple murder. However, in true Morning Glories style, the issue gives us a final twist when Ike learns the identity of his intending victim. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #12

Sep 13, 2011

The addition of Hodge gives the comic yet another wild card. The start of a new arc, issue #12 is a good jump in point for those looking to jump into the series. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #13

Oct 19, 2011

The issue delivers another solid tale by further the story but still keeping most of its secrets unrevealed. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #14

Nov 22, 2011

The mystery remains two-steps out of reach for the characters and audience alike, but I'm so enjoying the ride that (at least for now) I'm not too worried on the destination. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #15

Jan 26, 2012

Once again writer Nick Spencer and artist Joe Eisma give us another weird, but highly entertaining tale, and a terrific value. At an age when content seems to be shrinking as more and more monthly comics seem hellbent on a $4 price-tag, here's 30 pages of (very good) story for $3. That's pretty awesome, if you ask me. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #16

Feb 29, 2012

The combination of Casey's current storyline with the flashbacks of her getting ready to leave the nest to attend Morning Glories work well, especially when her father remembers running into his daughter in the woods more than a decade earlier. That, plus Miss Hodge's return (which is identical to that which we were also given months ago), are nice touches in making it feel as if the comic is giving us more answers than it really is. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Morning Glories #17

Apr 4, 2012

A strong issue, and a darn good read, that actually answers some questions as well as continues the mystery. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Morning Glories #18

May 15, 2012

Although the issue doesn't really move the plot forward it does cement a couple of important points (other than Jun's sexual preference). One, we know Jun isn't alone working for Abraham. And two, we discover which other member of the new Morning Glories recruits is not only part of the group but in charge of their mission. It's not who you expect. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #19

Jun 13, 2012

The issue doesn't give much away, but it's certainly memorable as by the final page the first of our original six characters will meet their end. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Morning Glories #20

Jul 10, 2012

That said, we do get quite a long look at the sibling rivalry of the two sisters for the affections of their (still yet to be shown) father as well as why Hodge is content with her current role. We also get foreshadowing about which of the students Hodge sees as the most dangerous to her plans. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Morning Glories #21

Sep 4, 2012

That said, for a comic that hides its secrets close to the vest this latest issue does give us some information, including the fact that Abraham's students are just as deadly (and possibly more insane) than those of Morning Glories. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Morning Glories #22

Oct 16, 2012

We get a tease that we'll learn what Hunter is actually good at in this issue, but other than an ability to get shot we don't really get an idea what his special gift might be. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Morning Glories #23

Dec 3, 2012

The biblical references continue as Akiko tells her liberator that the group should stop trying to target Abraham, but target his son instead. We also get a short scene with Ike and Jade finally making it out of the cave who, as the appearance of the military suggests, apparently have traveled back in time with Casey without realizing it. Confusing? Yeah, but still a good read. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Morning Glories #24

Feb 17, 2013

Although Morning Glories #24 doesn't answer any of the big questions the series has kept under wraps for two years it does provide some background to Ike and one hell of a cliffhanger that should promise real answers whenever the comic returns to this storyline. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #25

Apr 3, 2013

Hunter is saved by an older version of Jade who gets him to uses his mysterious ability to try and set the events, which are currently spiraling out of control, back on their natural path. However, it's the one character (Casey) whose story isn't touched on here who we learn is the key to everything. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #26

Apr 30, 2013

The first big reveal is Casey is secretly Ms. Clarskon, one of Casey's old high school teachers before being accepted into Morning Glories. And the second, is the scary resemblance to Ms. Daramount, once Casey embraces life as a brunette, and all of the insane implications that come with it. It's certainly a memorable way to kick off the next arc. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #27

Jun 5, 2013

For a Morning Glories comic issue #27 is pretty straightforward. We also get to interesting features at the back of the comic including summary and supposition from “Professor Meylikhov” and a cute recap of the first season. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Morning Glories #28

Jun 28, 2013

Although the there isn't much time covered over the course of this issue there's quite a bit going on including philosophical and religious discussions about what one is owed and what one is willing to sacrifice for what they believe is right. There's plenty of obscure symbolism as well with the scripture on Mrs. Clarkson's radio, the robed figures in Hunter's dreams as well as references and people we have seen before in his flashes as well as similar flashes of various characters and events from issue #13 when Casey gets close enough to touch the Cylinder. What does it all mean? The comic even has an answer for that, but some readers may not like it. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Morning Glories #29

Aug 5, 2013

Although Irina is stopped, Jun (really Hisao) much deal with the death of his brother, Jade is no mood to forgive Ike for threatening her life, and Hunter's weird time reset (and meeting the future Jade) leaves him with several questions, none of which have easy answers. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Morning Glories #30

Sep 2, 2013

Morning Glories #30 is a bloody issue given the circumstances of Irina's flashbacks which help explain the anger and deadly intent Irina seems to live and breathe. Mr. N., who states that several of the young woman's goals aren't that different from those of the Headmaster, also seems to genuinely want to help Irina into continuing her education. As to what his plans are for such a ruthless killer, and what exactly Casey's role in the troubled young woman's past truly is, we'll just have to wait and see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #31

Sep 23, 2013

Morning Glories #31 continues to play with ideas of reality, time, and perception in this issue focused on the character who we've met who has the hardest time separating them. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Morning Glories #32

Oct 12, 2013

We discover the Morning Glories Academy campus has another holy or mystical site which can be used to travel through time such as the cave and the tower. Hodge's use of Zhuang Zhou‘s famous quote about about the loss of perception and understanding is a reminder that everything both the characters and audience experience in this world has far more facets than may be initially realized. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Morning Glories #33

Oct 22, 2013

The result of Jun and Hisao switching bodies means the core group of students is left with a stranger in their midst with the face of a friend, and Jun and Guillame are both left to suffer the loss of their loved one. As to what this means for the future, and how/if Jun can successfully take his brother's place (again), we'll just have to wait and see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #34

Nov 15, 2013

It wouldn't be a Morning Glories comic without a WTF moment and this one comes in the final few panels showing us Hisao wasn't the only one with limited power over life and death. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Morning Glories #35

Dec 3, 2013

Daramount certainly takes a dark turn here, reverting closer to how she was originally presented, but her the level of her viciousness with Fortunato (someone the Academy obviously prizes) is more than a little perplexing. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Morning Glories #36

Jan 16, 2014

Rather than being coy, Nick Spencer and Joe Eisma come right out and showcase Ian's unusual nature although we don't get an explanation as to why there are so many versions of him running around (clones, copies, astral projections, duplicates?). Whatever the case, it's obvious he's someone worth keeping an eye on. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Morning Glories #37

Mar 13, 2014

Along with the lesson of Lot's wife and Hodge threatening an also comatose Gribbs, Akiko's travels also lead her across the path of a scientist we've seen before in other visions and flashbacks (and whom Akiko seems to have geniune fear towards – never a good sign at Morning Glories Academy), as well as the tragic fate of Akiko's father (which is hinted could be tied to that of his daughter and the creation of the Academy's own gods which are mentioned here once more). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #38

Apr 22, 2014

Artist Joe Eisma doesn't skimp on the violence of Gribbs' brutal attack on the campus' smart ass (which is more than a little difficult to watch), but he and writer Nick Spencer do offer a surprise with the unexpected return of one of Abraham's new companions. How exactly she survived the events of Wood Run (or is this a version of Zoe before those events?) has yet to be established, but obviously she still has a role to play. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Morning Glories #39

Jul 8, 2014

Reintroducing Casey's high school rival Isabel as the class school president and enemy within a school which already has far too many for Casey's liking offers a bit of extra incentive for Hodge to push Casey into the next part of her plan. Running for class president seems like an odd waste of energy in a school like Morning Glory Academy, but the rivalry with Isabel and the access the student president receives force a resentful Casey to reconsider. I wonder if we'll get a debate issue (or what student council debate even looks like at the Academy)? This issue also suggests whatever makes Casey stand-out from the rest of the students, at least to Hodge, is more than we've seen in her time-travel adventure to set things right. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Morning Glories #40

Oct 1, 2014

Given the lecture hall set-up the issue is even more verbose than usual in throwing out ideas from ancient philosophy to modern science fiction to explain the nature of the universe as we know it. The real reveal isn't the discussion itself (which I'm sure has clues to larger themes buried in Dr. Simon's ramblings) but the dark nature of Ian who not only tortures the blinded Fortunato but also prepares to use the power of the Cylinder for his own dark purposes. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Morning Glories #41

Oct 14, 2014

I've got to say after 40 issues I've been on the fence about continuing to pick-up the intriguing, but meandering, series, but this issue sold me on the title for a least another month. Bring on Towerball! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #42

Dec 1, 2014

Several other pieces of the jigsaw puzzle the comic has become are touched on (without revealing much) including Ian's odd “science project,” and the relationship between Hodges and Daramount, Akiko and Fortunato, and Vanessa and her mother. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Morning Glories #43

Mar 6, 2015

Despite his usual banter with Casey early on, it's obvious that the fate of Jade is weighing heavy on Ike which makes the revelation of his eyes being opened (an important phrase we've seen before concerning the kids reaching an important milestone of their potential) all the more interesting. Such an experience doesn't leave the cocky young man unscathed as he chooses to join the fight and put together a team to help Casey win the upcoming election. Has a new organized rebellion finally begun? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Morning Glories #44

Apr 2, 2015

Like pretty much every other student in the school Vanessa is a puzzle piece that doesn't quite yet fit. Why is she important enough to (at least partially) mollify Ellen? And why was it necessary for Casey, under the guise of Clarkson, to make sure both mother and daughter made it safely to the school? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Morning Glories #45

May 12, 2015

Since we've already seen multiple sightings of an older Jade helping to usher various characters onto the right path we can be confident she's not going to be Jun's sacrifice. Nor does she appear willing to bring back Hisao on her own, but if bringing back a loved one turns them into an enemy I have to wonder what bringing back an enemy might result in. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Morning Glories #48

Oct 7, 2015

The issue also has fun laughing at Casey's poor chances to win the election before finally introducing a way for her to steal it with the help of Ian‘s knowledge of the mysterious Cylinder. If it works just how will it shake-up the school's status quo, what will Casey learn about Morning Glories, and just what private plans does Ian have for the Cylinder? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Morning Glories #49

Jan 4, 2016

As to the third storyline involving Vanessa‘s entry into the Science Fair (which would allow someone inside the Academy to stay in contact with the outside world), it seems to put her on the path of the older version of herself we've seen in the Academy's dungeon, but it also seems to be of less importance than either of the other two stories. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ms. Marvel (2014) #1

Feb 10, 2014

As an introduction to Kamala Ms. Marvel #1 works but as an introction to the new Ms. Marvel it feels incomplete. Although we do Kamala in Danvers' old costume (which she rightly prefers) given the promotional materials (and comic's variant cover) we know it's not the costume she keeps. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Ms. Marvel (2022): Moon Knight #1

Aug 25, 2022

Despite the bizarre naming and numbering of a series of separate team-ups which are connected, the odd pairing of Ms. Marvel and Moon Knight against a creepy threat works well.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
My Name Is Bruce #1

Oct 1, 2008

Fans of Campbell, or of the film this story borrows liberally from, might want to give this one a try, but it's more of a curiosity (and a bit of an expensive one at $3.50) than anything else. Those waiting for the film can check it out in limited release on Halloween day.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Mystik U #2

Feb 2, 2018

The second storyline is the will-they-won't-they back-and-fourth between Zatanna and bad boy Sebastian Faust which leads directly into a cliffhanger as their moment of passion has consequences. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Nancy Drew & The Hardy Boys: The Death of Nancy Drew #1

Jun 11, 2020

The Death of Nancy Drew #1 offers a solid first issue to kick-off the new mini-series. Although the twist at the end is hardly shocking, it does offer an opportunity to push the comic in a slightly different direction next issue and offer the perspective of the one character who isn't given a voice here.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nancy Drew & The Hardy Boys: The Death of Nancy Drew #2

Jul 14, 2020

While filling in the details of how Nancy faked her death, Nancy Drew & The Hardy Boys: The Death of Nancy Drew #2 doesn't offer much more information about where the mini-series goes from here. There are several panels with our detectives looking to the Bobbseys for answers without luck, but our intrepid trio do turn up a lead in a “Barber” with ties to the Syndicate and perhaps the answers they seek.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nancy Drew & The Hardy Boys: The Death of Nancy Drew #3

Aug 12, 2020

Despite the Syndicate believing Nancy Drew is dead, the shadowy group has remained two-steps ahead of the intrepid trio. Even the small win here still leaves a larger mystery to be solved, if Nancy doesn't end up getting both of the Hardy boys killed first.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Nancy Drew (2018) #1

Jun 19, 2018

Although I was more of a Three Investigators fan growing up (where's that comic and/or movie?), I've always enjoyed the character of Nancy, and like the 2007 big-screen adaptation this new version does her proud. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Nancy Drew (2018) #3

Aug 20, 2018

The group splits up to look into various threads of the mystery which include a local club drug, library research, and seeking out answers where Pete's mother once worked. While the last doesn't sound all that exciting, it appears Nancy may unintentionally given herself the most dangerous assignment. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Nancy Drew (2018) #5

Nov 5, 2018

I've enjoyed the five-issue arc from writer Kelly Thompson and artist Jenn St-Onge and Nancy Drew #5 provides a fitting conclusion. Although the comic ends on a cliffhanger, with Nancy in new trouble and in need of all the help she can get, Dynamite Entertainment has no new solicitations for further adventures of Nancy Drew. Hopefully this isn't the last of the plucky teenage detective for the foreseeable future. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Naomi #1

Jan 31, 2019

While it seems unlikely that we'll see much action in this comic, Bendis and Walker have sold me on Naomi as a character and the the small thread she now holds to unravel a larger mystery. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Naomi: Season Two #1

Mar 10, 2022

Speaking of her parents, the first issue here hints of a theme introduced in the TV-show involving the possibility of her father working for some agency hunting aliens (like himself and his adopted daughter). Seeing how this is one many incredibly lame changes the show made to the backstory of the characters, here's hoping I'm wrong with what seems to be foreshadowed and that's not where this new season is headed.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Naomi #3

Mar 26, 2019

Continuing to tease us about Naomi's past by offering just as many nuggets as false assumptions (such as Dee and his lost love possibly being her parents), writer Brian Michael Bendis delivers just enough truth and foreshadowing of larger events to keep the reader, like Naomi, focused on learning the truth (and guessing what may come next). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Naomi #4

Apr 23, 2019

I'm thoroughly sold on the comic's premise at this point and can't wait to see just what that box holds and how it may change, or reveal, Naomi's fate and place within the DCU. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Naomi #5

May 21, 2019

Jamal Campbell produces some terrific art to go along with with this modern-take on a Superman-like origin story. Now that the prologue is done, it's time for Naomi to discover just what she can do (before the monster her parents hid her from destroys her world as well). Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Naomi #6

Jul 19, 2019

Naomi is one of the best origin stories I've read in recent years. Although there's still quite a bit to learn about Naomi, the full range of her powers, and finding a new role as a super-hero, the series ends with infinite possibilities. Thankfully, it doesn't appear we'll have to wait long as DC is apparently taking the Atomic Robo approach to Naomi and releasing her tales in separate mini-series. Naomi 2 is on the way, and I'll definitely be keeping an eye out for her. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
National Comics: Madame X #1

Oct 31, 2012

The comic's not bad, but certainly nothing special. And with a $4 price tag, it probably will appeal to only longtime fans of the character. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Negaduck (2023) #1

Sep 21, 2023

Negaduck #1 is a fun first issue offering cameos from quite a few Darkwing Duck villains and showcasing an increasingly frustrated Negaduck who never even gets to put his plans into action.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Negaduck (2023) #2

Nov 6, 2023

A fun continuation of the story, with Morgana quickly seeing through Negaduck's ruse and foreshadowing potential disaster for the villain even if he is successful in his quest.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
New Avengers (2010) #8

Feb 2, 2011

The dinner is interrupted by Ms. Marvel, a falling object and Dr. Doom all crashing into the street across from the restaurant. (That's Marvel's New York for you.) What follows is a husband and wife takedown of what is actually a Doombot before the other New Avengers arrive, followed by a group meal, Jones' decision about being a hero, and Spider-Man getting in the last word at Cage's expense.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
New Avengers (2010) #10

Mar 16, 2011

More than a little hit-and-miss, but still worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
New Avengers (2010) #14

Jul 20, 2011

This issue also includes Spider-Man quitting the team unable to come to grips with Victoria Hand‘s involvement with the squad. Although Wolverine attempts to talk reason to the Web-Head, he's on his way out the door when Mockingbird returns and isn't with the team during the battle with the giant Nazi robots (and we know Spidey's not going to miss giant Nazi robots, right?). If true, his absence from the team will be felt for a very long time. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
New Avengers (2010) #17

Oct 17, 2011

The issue isn't a bad one, but I've got admit it's pretty damned unimpressive. Even the trademark dialogue writer Brian Michael Bendis is known for seems strained. If the issue is simply meant to (underwhelmingly) jump off a new story arc this one does the job (but little else). However, if the point of the issue was to draw in new readers with a brand new team it fails miserably and it gives me no reason to pick up the next issue. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
New Avengers (2010) #18

Nov 12, 2011

The issue works well in introducing most of the members of Osborne's new team (even if it is the second straight issue that fails to give us the promised new team of New Avengers with Daredevil). Without Moonstone, Venom, Bullseye and Daken the team is missing its more amusing characters, but I'm willing to give it a chance.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
New Avengers (2010) #19

Dec 21, 2011

It's not the best issue of the title we've seen this year, but the latest issue of the title does have its moments. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
New Warriors (2014) #9

Sep 17, 2014

The B-story involves the rest of the team blowing off some steam by hitting a nightclub in Prague. Although it gives the various other characters less a role to play (which is fine by me with Kaine picking up the slack), this lighthearted subplot does foreshadow dark times ahead for one particular member. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Nights (2023) #1

Oct 19, 2023

For a comic that portends the apocalypse, and includes a couple of murders, Nights #1 is both sweet and quite funny. I'm not sure if every issue will jump around this much on the timeline, or if we'll stay in the five-years later period going forward working our way to what the final page suggests. Either way, there's quite a bit here to explore in the unusual cast of characters Vince now considers family and the not so quiet foreboding of trouble on the horizon.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Nights (2023) #2

Nov 21, 2023

While it only inches forward events from the first issue marginally, Nights #2 works well as a one-off adventure for Vince who makes a new friend in the star-shaped mole named Starven (I wouldn't mind seeing him again at some point) and survives a monster attack (which turns out to be the same monster that killed Matt) before confessing his feelings to an unconscious Gray who appears to reciprocate (as much as a 185 year-old psychotic vampire can). Another solid issue from the new title, which also continues to set up gags about this alternate version of history.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nightwing (2011) #1

Sep 22, 2011

One thing I thought worked well from both a story and artistic level was how the comic incorporated Dick's athleticism, acrobatics and circus moves throughout the entire issue without ever making it seem forced. I'm a little scared that the story I liked least is the one that's going to carry over to the next issue but that's not going to stop me from picking it up. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nightwing (2011) #2

Oct 24, 2011

The issue works well but I'll be interested to see how big a part Haly's Circus plays in the everyday life of Dick Grayson. I'm also more than a little tired of seemingly every new bad guy introduced in the Bat-titles knowing their true identities. The Bat-Family might want to work on that. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Nightwing (2011) #4

Dec 28, 2011

The part of the story that does work is the effect Babs arrival has on Dick and Raya‘s burgeoning relationship. Even when trying to put things right at the end, Babs causes even more harm. Women. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Nightwing (2011) #5

Jan 22, 2012

The comic ends with a reveal I won't spoil here about the true motives of one of the comic's supporting characters. I'm not sure if its meant to be shocking, but it doesn't come off as well as I'm sure writer Kyle Higgins planned. There's simply no shock value turning a character so soon after they have been introduced. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Nightwing (2011) #6

Feb 19, 2012

There are some nice moments including Raya wavering on her part of Raymond's plan and an uncoonected scene involving a cops retreiving one of Nightwing's batons from a murder scene. Whether this is frame job is part of Raymond's plan, or something else, we'll just have to wait and see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Nightwing (2011) #7

Mar 28, 2012

We also get the same sequence of Batman knocking Dick's tooth out to prove a point as we did in Batman #7. It doesn't work any better here (in fact it works less because Saiko has already given him some of the information he seems shocked to hear from the Dark Knight Detective). Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nightwing (2011) #8

Apr 25, 2012

For an issue where Dick Grayson's voice is largely absent the story still works, although I'm not sure we needed this much of Cobb's backstory. I'm more surprised, however, by the continued level of smart aleck banter from the zombie-ish Talons. Who knew the undead were so talkative? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Nightwing (2011) #9

May 24, 2012

The Court of Owls storyline, which started in Batman, is working far better in than title than most of other Bat-titles it's spread to this month. In terms of “Night of the Owls” this tie-in certainly isn't a must-read to keep up with the main story, but for fans of Nightwing the action may, may be enough to still warrant picking it up. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Nightwing (2011) #10

Jun 28, 2012

The issue finally fills in some information about the corrupt cop Detective Nie who tried to pin a murder wrap on Batman by planting evidence looks to be the man behind Nightwing's stick showing up at a recent murder as well. This story works better for me than Paragon (although I'm betting the two are related). This was a make-or-break issue for Nightwing for me, and although it's not great there's enough here to bring me back for another month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Nightwing (2011) #11

Jul 22, 2012

Paragon cleans house of the disloyal soldiers before looking for a new ally to take down one of Gotham's self-appointed saviors. The story continues, but doesn't really advance that much (even Nightwing's eureka moment is kept from readers) so aside from the developments in the subplot with Sonia you could probably skip this one and not miss a beat. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nightwing (2016) #22

Jun 14, 2017

While a bit of a D-lister, Tiger Shark does present an opportunity for writer Tim Seeley to revamp the character into a major threat (remember, the Kingpin was largely a joke before Frank Miller got his hands on him). The peak into Dick's personal life is also a nice touch. For the first time in awhile, I'm curious to find out where Nightwing's adventures take him. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nightwing (2016) #100

Jan 23, 2023

Celebrating 100 issues for the character's solo run, Nightwing #100 features Nightwing and his pals the Titans dealing with Heartless' prison break in Bludhaven leading to hundreds of people (both super-powered criminals and normal people held for an inability to pay bail) released on the streets.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Nocterra #1

Mar 9, 2021

While the Shades are little more than generic monsters, Nocterra #1 works in setting up the world and, most importantly, the character of Val. It also foreshadows more trouble for the ferryman not only from the monsters but another hunter after her cargo.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
NOIR #1

Nov 24, 2013

The reunion between The Shadow and the Black Sparrow was enough for me to pick up this issue. Although I'm less interested in a Sparrow/Fury team-up there's enough here that I'd consider sticking with the series to see where it goes from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
NOIR #2

Dec 15, 2013

The mystery of the treasure doesn't get any clearer here and the focus so heavily on Miss Fury didn't help matters any. The second issue's rough art by Andrea Mutti also works against the sex appeal of the comic's pair of female leads. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Nova (2013) #1

Feb 25, 2013

There's an awful lot of set-up, and for a cosmic title Nova #1 is light on action and epic space craziness. With so much effort to lay out Sam's world here you'd expect smoother sailing going forward, except the kid has just had his world turned upside down by a talking raccoon and a green-skinned assassin. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Nova (2013) #2

Mar 25, 2013

Although the origins of the Nova character are little more than a ripoff of Green Lantern (human given magic artifact by dying alien to join an intergalactic space peace keeping force), the choice here to use a less dickish version of the Ultimate Spider-Man TV-show‘s Nova works really well. With Sam's origin now established, I can't wait to see where things go from here. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Nova (2013) #3

Apr 22, 2013

The choice to bring the Chitauri into the proper Marvel Universe (they were originally a Marvel Ultimate creation) doesn't bother me, although it is another sign of Marvel Studios directly influencing both the style and storylines of Marvel Comics. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Nova (2013) #4

May 22, 2013

The story gets a little sloppy int the middle, and there's no Rocket Raccoon, but the series continues to be fun and high-spirited, and promises more of Titus and a perhaps even a direct attack on Sam's family in the next issue. That, along with some more great art by Ed McGuinness, is enough to make me come back next month for more. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Nova (2013) #5

Jul 1, 2013

Writer Jeph Loeb and artist Ed McGuinness deliver a fun wrap-up the series' first story arc that cements Sam as the new Nova, a hero with some powerful friends but one who is also willing and able to stand-up to world-threatening threats on his own. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Nova (2013) #6

Jul 22, 2013

There's some nice moments here between Sam and his mother as well as the foreshadowing of just how screwed up the young man's life will become the longer he plays super-hero. It's a nice issue, but it's certainly not a must-read. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Nova (2013) #7

Aug 28, 2013

Although our hero isn't able to get into much action, this issue is quite entertaining as Nova continues to struggle to grow into his role as a super-hero and try (and often fail) to learn the best way to use his powers to make a difference. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Nova (2013) #8

Oct 4, 2013

Although the issue is an Infinity tie-in, I was able to follow the story easily without having to pick up Marvel's latest event comic. Nova #8 continues the mix of action and humor that served the title well, but Kalendra is going to have to do more to impress me than what we get here if she's going to be a major threat to Nova next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nova (2013) #9

Oct 29, 2013

The heavy bondage themes not withstanding, Nova #9 provides a good example at the type of hero the newest Nova is. Honorable, maybe not, but certainly willing to do whatever is needing to save the ones he loves. And despite his repeated refusals, it seems Nova may have found himself a pair of new teammates (which I would be more on-board with if they clad Astrovik in Vance Astro‘s costume). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nova (2013) #10

Dec 5, 2013

Even with these complaints, the issue works as both an introduction to the character for new readers as well as continuing Sam's various struggles with being a hero and finding his place in the larger Marvel Universe. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nova (2013) #11

Dec 18, 2013

Despite immediately abandoning the set-up of a blind Sam, the issue has fun moments on both Earth (involving Sam babysitting his little sister) and in space (where they hero discovers the fate of another Nova). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nova (2013) #12

Jan 29, 2014

Of course the whole point of this issue is to set-up the supremely ridiculously titled Nova #13NOW (really Marvel?) which will pit Sam against a very angry Beta Ray Bill and teach the young hero that things aren't always what they seem. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nova (2013) #13.NOW

Feb 26, 2014

By the end of the issue the heroes are finally on the same page and next month we'll see they can provide as much fun working together as fighting as the pair head off into space to find the ship of slave traders who tricked the young Nova into helping them. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nova (2013) #14

Mar 13, 2014

Despite these issues, Nova #14 is a lot of fun and I'll take any excuse to get Cosmo back into comics (even if I'd rather be seeing him in Guardians of the Galaxy). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nova (2013) #16

Apr 22, 2014

Emotionally the comic makes a big shift its final pages as Sam's victory is space means nothing to the troubles awaiting him at home and a new problems for the young hero and his family to deal with beginning next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nova (2013) #17

May 26, 2014

The comic ends on an ominous note teasing the death of The Watcher and Origin Sin which Nova will be playing a big role in. Burnt out on crossover events, I plan on checking back with same once the dust settles. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nova (2013) #21

Sep 22, 2014

Although Nova #21 doesn't reunite Sam with his father, it does confirm for Sam that the former Nova is still alive and (like many other of the former gladiators) searching for a way home. It will be interesting to see how long the comic keeps his father lost in space and just what happens to Sam's space-fairing extra-curricular activities once he does return to Earth. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Nova (2016) #1

Dec 15, 2016

I'll be curious to see how long the comic splits focus between the two characters (possibly leading to a mentor/apprentice relationship like DC's current Blue Beetle comic). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Nova (2016) #2

Jan 11, 2017

The second issue of the title still doesn't quite sell me on its set-up, although I do like that it doesn't take long for the pair of Novas to be out in space rather than Earthbound. The final panels suggest not all their space travels will be fun and games, however. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Nova (2016) #5

Apr 10, 2017

As for Sam, the weight of his heroic mantle, the danger his family finds itself in because of his new ally, and the fact that another Nova has lied to him, is nearly too much for the young hero to bear. I'll be curious to see what this latest betrayal might mean for Sam's psyche going forward. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Once & Future #1

Oct 8, 2019

I may have been late to the party, but I'm fully on-board now. Let's see where this goes! Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Once & Future #3

Oct 28, 2019

Other than surviving what's been thrown at them, things aren't looking all that bright for our heroes (despite Rose sign-up for the bizarre adventure). Arthur is moments away from retrieving the sword, and the woman responsible for his resurrection has also added her own knight to the new Round Table with a specific task that doesn't bode well for Duncan (or humanity). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Once & Future #4

Dec 4, 2019

The comic also offers a quick cameo to another member of Duncan's bizarre family, which in turn reveals a bit more about Bridgette and how she's been pulling strings for years to prevent what is currently unfolding (although the cliffhanger ending makes it look like she'll need a bit of help to keep going). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Once & Future #6

Jan 29, 2020

The story comes to a definite conclusion with Duncan returning the sword while also teasing what more might be in store of him by the return of a far from satiated questing beast and a glimpse at another famous figure from Arthurian legend. The issue would have provided a nice wrap-up to the story, but I'm happy we'll get to see more of Duncan (perhaps offering the opportunity for Rose to be a bit more involved?). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Once & Future #7

Apr 8, 2020

The comic doesn't name the mysterious figure working the shadows causing more chaos in the world. Is this a familiar face from Arthurian legend, or an unexpected addition like Beowulf? For that, we'll just have to wait and see. In the meantime, I'm glad to see Duncan's journey is far from complete and there are more stories to be told.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Once & Future #8

Jun 26, 2020

Up until now Bridgette has been the expert leading Duncan into a world he couldn't possibly have imagined. However, Once and Future #8 points out there are holes in her knowledge. She doesn't know Beowulf is real nor realize that Merlin is back working against her and her grandson.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Once & Future #9

Jul 22, 2020

While Zombie Arthur seems a bit off his rocker, Merlin seems relatively sane in comparison, working on the long game to see the return of his king (despite what shape Arthur may be in physically or mentally). Releasing figures like Beowulf and Grendel into the world should keep Duncan occupied, but will it buy enough time to put Arthur back on the throne?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Once & Future #10

Aug 26, 2020

The issue comes to a close with the creature making short work of local police (yeah, pretty useless as Bridgette suggested, although their deaths do buy a little time) and Bridgette discovering just how big a hole she's dug in dispatching the story's hero and leaving no one left to kill the beast. Will Duncan be up to the challenge?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Once & Future #11

Sep 23, 2020

Even if Duncan and Bridgette survive the latest creature, they still have to deal with the continued machinations of Merlin who isn't wasting time in planning his next surprise.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Once & Future #12

Oct 21, 2020

Mary's assistance is unexpected, especially by Bridgette, but not unwelcome. There's solid action here while the story continues to shift as Duncan proves himself a hero yet again (giving away Excalibur with ease) as another piece of Zombie Arthur's plan is revealed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Once & Future #13

Dec 1, 2020

It's not all dark foreboding and terror of things to come as Duncan and Rose's relationship turns romantic (and their attempts to hide the relationship from Duncan's Gran don't last long). I like the pair together, and am happy to see the comic developing this side of their storyline. Born out of danger, will both survive long enough to see where this may lead?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Once & Future #15

Feb 1, 2021

The issue ends with the introduction of yet another character, Sir Jason Hempleworth, although it's not yet clear what his role (and the role of the government) have yet to play.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Once & Future #16

Feb 23, 2021

As for Rose, she learns a bit about the secret government organization which has been secretly watching her for weeks and showed up just in time to save her from whatever the hell Duncan's mother is calling herself this week. The introduction of the Shadow Secretary helps explain how the British Government handles the odd mystical occurrences the pop-up from time to time (while also dropping more hints about the “accord” which we've heard reference to before as a measure to help keep the peace).

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Once & Future #18

May 6, 2021

With Zombie Arthur more powerful than before and the world plunged into magic and madness, the stakes have never been higher. It seems our heroes' jobs aren't done just yet.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Once & Future #19

Sep 2, 2021

Once and Future #19 is the prime example of things getting worse before they get better. The question is, just what needs to happen in order for things to get better at this point? England has been lost to the Otherworld, and while there is still some fight left in our heroes, where do they go from here? And just who is this mysterious figure that appears at the end of the issue and what role may he play in the events yet to come?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Once & Future #20

Sep 29, 2021

Meanwhile, Zombie Arthur fights off the new Arthur that has appeared by calling on an army of undead warriors to crush the usurper. However, Other Arthur does not fight alone as Lancelot has chosen his side. It appears he also has a Merlin, unlike the zombie, a Guinevere as well. Who will be the Once & Future King?

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Once & Future #21

Nov 4, 2021

Along the way there's also plenty of fun banter as Duncan finds himself quite outnumbered by those who know more about legends and myths. After rescuing Rose's parents and seeing them to shelter, our heroes set out again alone to keep the others safe and hopefully not attract either Arthur's attention. But in a world turned upside down by magic and myths brought to life, is any place truly safe?

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Once & Future #22

Dec 8, 2021

Once and Future #22 starts off with a bang while also catching up a little with Zombie King Arthur, whose plans aren't going as well as he had hoped, and offering the return of Duncan's mother (but what role is she now playing in the constantly evolving story?).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Once & Future #23

Jan 3, 2022

The issue is a rarity in that, while still well done, is one you could skip without missing much of a beat. Other threads include Merlin stressing and yet another story being brought into the mix when a parlay with the fairies leads to three magic beans and a beanstalk.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Once & Future #24

Feb 3, 2022

Meanwhile, after deciding freeing a crazed water god may not be the smartest idea, Bridgette, Duncan, and Rose look for a worthy warrior in the woods who has no love of kings. Enter Robin Hood, who just might be able to keep the various King Arthurs busy long enough for our heroes to come up with a plan.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Once & Future #25

May 11, 2022

The issue is also notable for Bridgette's daughter showing up at the heroes' compound… as a friend? And the return of Lancelot looking for Elaine suggesting that this pair might still have a part to play in what is to come. But whose side will they be on?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Once & Future #26

Jun 13, 2022

We discover why Bridgette's daughter decided to show up in the Grail Castle as she's looking for a particular Arthurian artifact that can save her son. Also, a certain sword had hit a certain stone on Earth. Should it be pulled from the stone, or should the Grail be found, just what happens to the carefully crafted plans? And if it fails, will Rose be forced to face the Green Knight?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Once & Future #27

Jul 13, 2022

The fight over the sword is just the beginning of a larger thread, even Duncan gives it a go, but the end of Galahad's quest brings the story back to the themes of family and may just have given our heroes a new ally in hopes to survive until to the end of the year.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Once & Future #28

Aug 16, 2022

The release of Lear also goes to plan, more or less, so you might say things are finally looking up for our heroes. Well… until the return of the Green Knight who has a promised blow to return. The issue ends quite brutally for one of our trio (although is there perhaps some trick at play?) as events continue to build to issue #30.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Once & Future #29

Sep 12, 2022

The penultimate issue of Once and Future offers a pair of great moments heading into the series' conclusion, and that doesn't include Rose surviving the blow from the Green Knight. The first is the tease of what is to come that offers just enough foreshadowing to provide a "holy shit! kind of realization about the moment which will follow.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Once & Future #30

Oct 24, 2022

Once and Future had a great run and this issue offers a satisfying conclusion with the tease leaving the door open for more in the future. I certainly wouldn't say no to seeing more of these characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Phantom Lady #1

Sep 2, 2012

Although there are interesting ideas here to explore, including the pairing of Phantom Lady and Doll Man (another character with a long history but who comes off here as a dimmer, less interesting version of Ray Palmer) the story doesn't quite work. The art of Cat Staggs is fine, but is completely overshadowed by the cover art by Amanda Conner and Paul Mounts. The comic might improve over the next few months, but until it does there's simply not enough here for me to stick around. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
1
Phantom Stranger (2012) #0

Sep 9, 2012

Wow. Despite refusing to use the name, Didio hamfistedly rams the Stranger's identity down the throats of the reader so no other conclusion can possibly be drawn. And here I thought Michael Bay was unsubtle. The comic also (almost as an afterthought) gives us an emotionally empty retelling of Jim Corrigan and the Spectre's origin that, like nearly everything else in the New 52, will make you nostalgic for the original. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Power Girl (2009) #13

Jun 28, 2010

Winick's Power Girl is conflicted about her relationship with the JLI and her feelings for her former teammates Booster Gold and Maxwell Lord. Character first (wow, don't remember if I've ever said that about a Power Girl comic before). It appears that Winick has also found a loophole to bring another former Leaguer into the hunt for Maxwell Lord, but we'll have to wait until next month to find out for sure. And you know what, I'm looking forward to it (yeah, can't remember saying that before either). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Power Girl (2009) #17

Oct 20, 2010

The next issue should have another big throwdown and more answers, but this issue works well on its own (mostly for the early scenes with Batman). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Power Girl (2009) #20

Jan 25, 2011

Those looking to see Power Girl do what she does best (kick some serious ass) will get exactly that here, along with a quick cameo from Batman and the reappearance of a Kryptonian's best friend. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Power Girl (2009) #22

Mar 22, 2011

We also get a cameo from Zatanna, with the promise of more of her and Batman in the next issue as well. Sounds good to me. Oh, and did I mention this one has magic freakin' dinosaurs?! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Power Girl (2009) #23

Apr 27, 2011

It's not a great issue, but it does have magic dinosaurs and a pretty good appearance by Zatanna (who keeps to my rule that she's far more interesting guest-starring in other books than in her own current monthly title). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Power Girl (2009) #24

May 23, 2011

The B-story of the issue deals with Power Girl ranting to Batman about the troubles with her new public identity of Karen Starr. Although not nearly as engaging, these scenes help lighten the mood a bit and continue to move that storyline forward. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Power Girl (2009) #25

Jun 22, 2011

The final scene between Mazin and his father works well, as does Power Girl's conversation with the hero branded a terrorist (even if it does feel slightly rushed). However, Kara's final pages with Batman feel a little awkward and don't flow nearly as well as similar scenes she had with Dick Grayson a few issues back. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Power Girl (2009) #27

Aug 22, 2011

Although it was never quite as good as Batgirl or Secret Six, I'm sorry to see this title go away. It's provided some extremely entertaining stories including magic dinosaurs, a misunderstood Arab super-hero, appearances by Batman, Superman, and Zatanna, clones, a Power Girl fan convention, and more. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Powerpuff Girls #1

Oct 1, 2013

The issue comes with an amazing array of variant covers (several only available from select vendors) and sets up what will apparently be the mini-series' big plot development as an incarcerated Mojo Jojo, tired loosing to the Powerpuff Girls, decides his big brain has been nothing but trouble and reaches out to the one man who might be able turn him back into a happy monkey – Professor Utonium. Say it ain't so, Mojo! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Powerpuff Girls #2

Nov 3, 2013

The issue does a great job with Mojo Jojo's transformation and fallout, and the introduction of Him's odd new scheme seems to spell trouble for the Girls for the next few issues. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Powerpuff Girls #3

Dec 2, 2013

Writer/artist Troy Little delivers another fun issue with the bizarre situation of turning the town's baddies into well-respected members of the community (even building a statue of the Powerpuff Girls) and a big action sequence as our heroines work with the former villains to stop an attack by a giant octopus (also under HIM's influence) forcing even Buttercup to accept their new outlook on life. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Powerpuff Girls #4

Dec 18, 2013

With the various villains all now up to no good I'd expect quite a bit of action in the final two issues of this enjoyable mini-series from writer/artist Troy Little. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Powerpuff Girls #5

Jan 21, 2014

Writer/artist Troy Little delivers another fun issue leaving the Mojo Jojo thread still left to be resolved next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Powerpuff Girls #6

Mar 10, 2014

Along with Mojo's return (and outlining of his ridiculously complicated plan), the issue also delivers a good deal of action as the girls work together to save the day leaving their archnemesis stranded in space without any victory to gloat over. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Powerpuff Girls #7

Mar 21, 2014

Even with their defeat and the overwhelming odds stacked against them I'd be surprised if we don't see the Powerpuff Girls leap back into action next issue rather than let the monsters' rampage continue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Powerpuff Girls #8

Apr 15, 2014

Although the Girls suffered momentary defeat at the end of last issue, Powerpuff Girls #8 allows the threesome to return with a force thanks to a little fatherly push and a brainstorm by my favorite member of the group. Once again the day is saved by the Powerpuff Girls, but despite the monsters eventual defeat Steve's reign continues as his subjects admit that this has been the best day ever (meaning, if the comic stays around long enough, we may get another Monster Day somewhere down the line). The lastest issue delivers on action, wackiness, and a nice message about never giving up no matter the odds. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Powerpuff Girls #9

May 12, 2014

The boy band idea allows for some cute moments from the threesome, a cameo from Dee Dee, and even showcases Professor Utonium fan boy nature. It also lets writer/artist Troy Little to bring back an under-utilized villain in the Boogey Man while working the unique threat of the Rowdyruff Boys into the comic for the first time. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Powerpuff Girls #10

Jun 29, 2014

Whether that made any sense to you at all, Powerpuff Girls #10 is the kind of insanity you don't want to miss. It's even got a cameo from Mojo Jojo who is foiled yet again. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Powerpuff Girls Super Smash Up #1

Feb 8, 2015

Personally I'd prefer a solo Powerpuff Girls series but it seems IDW is more interested in growing the comic brand of the various Cartoon Network characters. Team-up books are a bit iffy as some of the various rotating guest-stars are likely to interest some readers more than others. I also have to wonder with the Powerpuff Girls traveling through other dimension whether we'll get to see much of the various Townsville villains in the series? For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Powerpuff Girls Super Smash Up #4

Apr 29, 2015

Powerpuff Girls: Super Smash-Up! #4 is a fun addition to the series (giving us the most entertaining world the Girls' have traveled to yet). It also includes a short, if largely forgettable, back-up story demonstrating Mojo Jojo‘s inability to hold down and honest job and why he will never be anything more than a super-villain. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Powerpuff Girls Super Smash Up #5

Jun 9, 2015

Much like the Powerpuff Girls title that preceded it, Powerpuff Girls: Super Smash-Up! has proved to be an awful lot of fun (even if not all of the back-up stories were as strong as I'd like). I'm sad to see it come to an end. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Powerpuff Girls: The Bureau of Bad #1

Jan 3, 2018

Powerpuff Girls: The Bureau of Bad gets off to a good start here, and I'll be curious to see what tales we'll get from the various villains in the issues to come. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Powerpuff Girls: The Bureau of Bad #2

Jan 22, 2018

We'll have to wait until issue #3 for Mojo Jojo to finally take center stage and offer up his closest call, but I'll admit the comic does pretty well with the likes of the Fashionistas and Garbage Gary and delivers an enjoyable story. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Prince of Power #2

Jun 13, 2010

Cho vs. Thor, what more do you want? I was never a big fan of Hercules, but I've got to say I'm really starting to warm to Amadeus Cho. Cho walks right into the trap left by Loki's bastard Vali Halfling and finds himself defending himself against a very angry God of Thunder. Vali Halfling is after the secret to immortality and has convinced everyone that Cho is helping him (which is bad news for our hero). There are some nice sequences here, and I especially love Thor's consternation with the Prince of Power. Definitely worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Radiant Red #1

Mar 21, 2022

What we do get in Radiant Red #1 is a look at Shen's personal life. We also are introduced to a pair of people snooping around including a reporter and someone of less scrupulous means who have a sudden interest in the bank robber. It looks like the past hasn't stayed buried, but I'm not sure I'll stick around for five issues to see where this one eventually leads.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Red Hood And The Outlaws #0

Sep 25, 2012

Most troubling of all is the back-up story presented by the Joker (the super-genius Christopher Nolan version who relies on impossibly complex plans) where he states he is completely responsible for Todd's history. It's best ignored and forgotten. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Hood And The Outlaws #1

Sep 24, 2011

It's not a great first issue but it's solid all around and provides far better versions of all three characters than we were getting before the DC Reboot. It's well-paced and doesn't have to stop the action in order to spend time re-introducing the characters (who feel far more lived in than many so far in the DC Reboot). I'll also admit the inclusion of Starfire works better than I thought it would. These characters, each damaged in their own way, and each with their own view of the world, have a story to tell. Now let's find out if it's worth telling. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Hood And The Outlaws #2

Oct 26, 2011

I was a bit confused given the rewriting which allows Roy Harper and Starfire to accompany the Red Hood on his journey (it's obvious he left for the quest alone at the end of the first issue). It's a litle confusing. However, those who were up in arms over the first issue's deception of Starfire should be a bit molified that she's been toned down in this issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Hood And The Outlaws #5

Jan 28, 2012

Even though I've stopped reading many of the New 52 titles I'm going to stay with Red Hood and the Outlaws for at least awhile longer. It's never quite what I expect, and its not the direction I would take the characters, but I'm still intrigued by what Lobdell has planned for this motley crew he's assembled. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Hood And The Outlaws #6

Feb 18, 2012

The issue is also memorable for giving us a flashback of Todd as the snotty Boy Wonder and a New 52 tweaked design of the old Nightwing costume. I'll admit I like the costume (although the flashback itself is far too much a hamfisted reminder of why Todd was killed off in the comics so long ago). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Hood And The Outlaws #8

Apr 21, 2012

And the second is a small scene between Todd and Tim Drake that suggests the pair have an interesting relationship that may not be sanctioned, or known about, by the Dark Knight Detective. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Hood And The Outlaws #9

May 22, 2012

Although I'm not thrilled with the redesign of Freeze or the conclusion of the Red Hood's battle with Talon there are several nice moments here including Kory's reaction to being attacked by Mr. Freeze, Todd's inner struggle and walk down memory lane, and his confrontation with Batgirl in the comic's final pages. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Red Hood And The Outlaws #10

Jun 24, 2012

Although it has some fun moments (including Jason's date), the latest issue is by far the weakest of the series so far. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Red Hood And The Outlaws #11

Jul 25, 2012

We also get the continuation of the back-up story featuring Essence hunting down the Untitled (which can't finish quickly enough for me). Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Hood And The Outlaws #12

Aug 19, 2012

The logic of Arsenal getting himself captured, tortured, and telling his captors all about his days in space not withstanding, the story utilizes the comic's offbeat sense of humor well. I'm pretty sure I'm going to hate whatever the hell the “Thirteen” is which is ominously mentioned at one point, but, at least the comic has gotten back on its feet after a horrible mis-step last month. I'm also happy to see Timothy Green II has taken over as artist for the title (even if some of the art here looks a little rushed). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Hood And The Outlaws #13

Oct 21, 2012

Although I enjoyed the final two issues of the arc I'm happy to see it come to and end and return Starfire, Arsenal and Red Hood back to Earth where they belong. Next week should begin “The Death of the Family” crossovers and we should, hopeful, see a confrotation between Jason Todd and the Joker looming before too long. Red Hood and the Outlaws #14 also promises an appearance by Superman. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Red Hood And The Outlaws #14

Nov 26, 2012

Given Jason Todd's personal experience with the Joker it should have been the easiest thing in the world to tie the comic to the ongoing Bat-title crossover. However, what we are given here is awkward beyond belief reinforcing the idea that the Joker is responsible for Todd being chosen as Robin in moves that make the impossibly complicated plans of Heath Ledger's Joker look amateurish by comparison. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Hood And The Outlaws #15

Dec 22, 2012

The comic finally gives us a confrontation between the Joker and the Red Hood. Even if it's not as good as I hoped, at least the crossover feels legitimately underway. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Hood And The Outlaws #16

Jan 25, 2013

Logic problems aside and despite missing its leading man for the entire issue, Red Hood and the Outlaws #16 is, for the most part, fun. Dumb fun to be sure, but there's certainly enough for fans of the characters and it feels more like an old-school Joker story and far less unseemly that many of the increasingly gritty and awful Death of the Family issues have been. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Hood And The Outlaws #17

Feb 24, 2013

Red Hood has been a complicated character well before the New 52 in finding the right balance with the character's deadly intentions and still honoring his past as Robin. For this issue writer Scott Lobdell gets it right which makes the comic's twist all the more surprising as the Joker left our protagonist one final present which may have lasting effects on the Red Hood's role going forward. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Hood And The Outlaws #18

Mar 25, 2013

We're told there will be no lasting physical damage from the Joker's trap and it seems Todd's mental state isn't impaired either, so the entire episode feels a little pointless unless the goal is to use this experience to transform the Red Hood from anti-hero to hero and bring Jason back into the Bat-Family. One further note, Red Hood and the Outlaws #18 also brings Jason and Bruce a little closer (possibly foreshadowing his return as Robin?). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Red Hood And The Outlaws #19

Apr 23, 2013

The issue also has an odd appearance by Essence who attempts to influence Arsenal through his dreams. The point of this subplot isn't very clear (or interesting), but it's arguably better than the beyond bland blank slate of Jason Todd we're left with as the issue closes. The consequences to this issue might be interesting, but this issue is a mixed bag.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Red Hood And The Outlaws #20

May 21, 2013

Whether or not it's good for the character, or for the New 52, we'll have to wait and see, but my initial reaction is this is an easy choice for DC Comics to give the character a completely new direction while thumbing their noses a decades of history. Well, this is the New 52. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Red Hood And The Outlaws #21

Jun 26, 2013

After acquiring Jason Todd, the assassins take him back to ‘Eht Alth'Eban, the home of the League of Assassins, where the inform the Hood they don't want him dead. What they actually want is the guy with no memory of how to assassinate anyone (or the hatred which drove him into that life) to become their new leader. Um… okay. I guess intelligence isn't a prerequsite to join the League of Assassins. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Hood And The Outlaws #26

Dec 21, 2013

The issue ends with the Red Hood and the Outlaws doing a pretty good job of holding their own against the League including the Red Hood fighting Bronze Tiger to a standstill. But should Todd be victorious (which seems likely as the comic has solicitations for the next several months) I'd like to see the character given a chance to spread his wings without the baggage of the All-Caste or the Outlaws to weigh him down. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Hood And The Outlaws #27

Jan 28, 2014

The best part of the issue is that it brings an end to the odd, and often awkward and confusing, storyline allowing Todd to play hero and put an end to this chapter of his life. Hopefully this means the comic will move forward with less poorly-defined mysticism and on to more of Todd's journey of redemption. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Red Hood And The Outlaws #28

Feb 23, 2014

Far less convoluted than several issues of the series, the straightforward storytelling works well and provides plenty of action while introducing a new enemy in Midas and the Army of the Golden Hand. Stephen Segovia steps in to do an okay job with the art this month although his Starfire is a little off and some of the wideshots are less detailed than I'd like (a common complaint about much of the New 52). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Red Hood And The Outlaws Annual #1

Jun 6, 2013

A whiny blank slate Jason Todd is about as bland as it sounds, and although Chesire's appearance works the issue has a hard time determining just how many powers this new version of the character actually has (she can phase, now?). Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #1

Aug 18, 2016

The issue concludes with Black Mask's master plan still quite secret, but the train heist Red Hood is assigned to complete does introduce Artemis to the comic (who doesn't look too pleased with Jason destroying her ride). Just what is on the train it needs an Amazon to protect? And what does Black Mask have planned for Gotham? We'll have to wait at least another month to find out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #2

Sep 22, 2016

Opening with flashbacks to Artemis' past, the comic does a solid job introducing her for those unfamiliar with the character. I'll be curious to see whether her quest for the weapon of the gods continues, or if her new allegiances provide other battles to be won. The pairing of Artemis and Red Hood, two mid-level characters with envy of those who do exactly what they do, only better, works well. As for the third member of the team, it looks like DC has decided to go with the imperfect clone origin of Bizarro rather than a hero from a parallel dimension. But we'll have to wait at least a month before finding out any more details, or what Black Mask wants with him. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #3

Oct 18, 2016

Although he apparently still has Black Mask's trust, Jason is forced to admit the gangster continues to be several steps ahead of him (just as he must admit empathy to Bizarro's current situation which will eventually compel the hero to act). Red Hood may not know why Black Mask needs Bizarro, but he can be sure nothing good can come from such a pairing. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #4

Nov 16, 2016

It looks like in Red Hood and the Outlaws #5 we'll finally see the birth of the new Outlaws as a team. That is if Red Hood and Artemis can survive long enough to break Black Mask's control over Bizarro. I'm guessing they will.) Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #5

Dec 20, 2016

By the end of next month's issue we should have an united team. The question I have is what do a former sidekick with a dark past, a fallen Amazon, and a broken Superman clone do going forward? Are they heroes, are they vigilantes? Are they criminals? I'm very curious to see where writer Scott Lobdell decides to take this unusual threesome next. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #6

Jan 18, 2017

I wouldn't call the odd threesome bosom buddies by any stretch of the imagination, but by the end of this arc we do have a team of Outlaws. Even with Black Mask defeated, Jason isn't quite ready to throw in the towel on his new friends. Artemis still has a quest to finish and someone needs to keep an eye on Bizarro. Artemis' personal quest gives us a clue as to the series' next arc, as I wondered how this group would be framed going forward. They certainly aren't villains, but they aren't exactly the Justice League either. Writer Scott Lobdell will likely have to keep thinking outside the box for their storylines. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #7

Feb 16, 2017

Eventually taking the more difficult road of accepting the role as Bizarro‘s guardian (in much the same way Batman chose to do for Jason), Red Hood cements the membership of the new Outlaws but also signs-up for hard days ahead keeping Biazarro in check. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #8

Mar 14, 2017

Bizarro is notably absent in a very talky eighth issue, but Artemis' story does help define the character both to Jason Todd and to the audience. The discussion over drinks in an empty villain bar might not be the most clever way to offer these nuggets of information, but it does put Jason and Artemis together in a situation where these facts might more naturally be shared. Now that we know a little more about Artemis, it looks like the quest for the Bow of Ra is ready to begin. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #10

May 16, 2017

The comic is a bit on the nose in these scenes, while the Artemis/Akila storyline holds a bit more subtlety (while still obviously setting up a conflict between Artemis and what is left of the girl she once knew). It looks like the horror the Outlaws have found in the location of their harshest failures are just beginning. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #11

Jun 22, 2017

Red Hood and the Outlaws #11 wraps up the four-part Artemis arc with the Outlaws finding themselves on opposite sides of the the Qurac conflict. However, it doesn't take much more of Akila‘s out-of-control behavior for Artemis to recognize her friend, dead or reborn, is long lost to her. The tragic end helps cement a bond between the former Amazon and Red Hood, although the issue's final panel does suggest some serious fallout for the other member of the team. As for Artemis, she's not got a new godly weapon (one that drove her oldest friend into a murdering psychopath) to look after. Yeah… that should end well. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #12

Jul 19, 2017

While the Outlaws are able to put Solomon Grundy down with Bizarro's help, the clone's exertion comes with cost. However, hope arrives from an unlikely source. Could Superman's greatest enemy be the key to saving the Man of Steel's clone? After finally bringing the threesome together I'd be surprised to see the comic let go of one of its stars so quickly. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #13

Aug 15, 2017

Along with the amusing cover (which is fun throwback to the Silver Age), the issue opens and ends with surprises. The opening gives us Bizarro's view of his creation (or the creation and past he wishes he had). Even near death the creature sees himself through the lens of Superman. Equally surprising is the comic's final panel which suggests big changes. While I have some doubts about the permanency of the new Bizarro we see before us, such a twist is unexpected and I'll be curious to see where this takes the Outlaws next. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #15

Oct 18, 2017

From the perspective of the Outlaws the issue works well enough, although it certainly raises issues about the morality and decisions of Gotham City's other heroes. After beating the Outlaws, the real question is where does the arc (and the comic) go from here? Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #17

Dec 18, 2017

Red Hood and the Outlaws #17 offers an opportunity for a team-up between the Outlaws and the Suicide Squad who head to the Arctic to destroy a Colony base whose continued operation poses a threat to the planet. Mainly an excuse to team-up the two groups, the issue has its individual moments (such as the back-and-forth between Artemis and Harley Quinn), but more often than not it's fan service rather than anything driving the plot. Still, there's some fun to be had here seeing the two groups interact. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #18

Jan 11, 2018

The subplot of what is really going on with the now far-smarter Superman clone is the more interesting aspect of the story including Bizarro's odd hallucinations of his Superman plushie talking to him and the eventual reveal to the reader on what he was really after in the Colony base. It seems the idea of Bizarro falling back into his old dumber self isn't what is happening. We still don't get a clear reason as to why he is bathing in synthetic Kryptonite or what the creature's true plans for the Outlaws are, although it's obvious something is wrong with the new-and-improved Bizarro. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #21

Apr 13, 2018

The rest of the issue deals with the Red Hood undercover in the Iceberg Lounge laundering the money he stole from the Penguin (and winning quite a bit more). Once discovered, Jason is able to extricate himself out of the situation without too much trouble, but he is forced to ask himself (and Alfred) just why he's perusing his current course of action. Breaking up his rare moment of self-contemplation, something new walks in to his life. I'm guessing Faye's package and Bizarro's addiction will propel most of the next issue which appears to include Artemis giving Luthor a piece of her mind. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #22

May 16, 2018

It's no surprising Lex Luthor fails to help, leaving Bizarro slowly returning to the creature he once was. I am curious to see how long writer Scott Lobdell plans to milk this degeneration as the scenes of Bizarro aware of his situation, and later discussing it with Jason, are the best of the comic. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) #25

Aug 16, 2018

Overall an okay issue that will appeal mostly to the comic's fans. However, the loss of Artemis and Bizarro, the sudden reappearance of Arsenal, and the (bizarre) filler back-up story don't much to inspire confidence in the immediate future of the comic. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Hood and the Outlaws (2016) Annual #1

Sep 6, 2017

The comic features some nice scenes between Jason and Dick, and both Dick and Jason struggling to explain their troubled history to Artemis. And, in a touching subplot, the annual also gives Bizarro a romantic moment all his own. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Hood and the Outlaws: Rebirth #1

Aug 3, 2016

That said, the set-up does allow for some strong action to kick things off as well as a public showdown between Red Hood and the Dark Knight Detective mirroring the pair's first meeting years ago. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Hood: The Lost Days #1

Jun 5, 2010

Issue #1 fills in Todd's time with Talia and Ra's al Ghul before regaining his mind in the Lazarus Pit. I've always been a fan of Talia and it's nice to see a side of her here other Batman writers (*cough*Grant Morrison*cough*) seem to have forgotten. It seems the Bat-books can do no wrong lately…well, most of them, anyway (*cough*Grant Morisson*cough*), and I'll be happily waiting to see how this story plays out. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Lanterns #1

Sep 15, 2011

Although the character disappears for the rest of this issue, the opening alone was enough to get me to pick it up, and the rest of the story and the foreshadowing of a possible uprising among the ranks of the Red Lanterns was enough to keep me interested with the remaining part of the story. Worth a look (especially for fans of Dex-Starr).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red One #1

Mar 22, 2015

The first issue of Xavier Dorison and Terry Dodson's certainly has fun with the character of Vera and the reaction of various men to her. I'm more interested in the character and the process of how she is transformed into a super-hero than the the inevitable conflict with the Carpenter (or the questionable undercurrent that anyone who isn't a rabid right wing Republican is actively helping the Soviet agenda). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red One #2

May 11, 2015

Terry Dodson's art continues to be the highlight of the series while Xavier Dorison writes himself into corners at times getting too political but continues to deliver fun moments of Vera, both in and out of costume, enjoying her life in America. Because the conservative and fascist themes are so integral to the story Dorison wants to tell (however unsubtly expressed) Red One will likely continue to be a mixed success at best as the character (I'm already completely sold on Vera and the hard choices concering her true allegiances which should dominate later storylines of this series) often gets drowned out by the message. I don't have much interest in Red One versus the Carpenter, but I would like to stick around to see Vera continue to evolve as a hero. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Robin #13

Jun 4, 2010

Strong issue all around, and I like how writer Fabian Nicieza is playing on Red Robin's over-confidence, leaving open the possibility of a big fall in the future. The comic remains fun, well-written, and one of DC's best. Definitely worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Red Robin #15

Aug 5, 2010

I'm assuming Babs will weigh-in on this elaborate plan to throw Vicki Vale off the scent of the Bat-family, and I'm hopeful that the moment will be given the time and weight it deserves. At the same time, if he had weighed the effect of such a plan on one of his closest allies and went forward anyway, it does help push Red Robin further into a morally ambiguous gray area which should give plenty of opportunities for new stories. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Red Robin #17

Nov 11, 2010

My only real complaint with the issue is the obvious slight to Stephanie Brown in Tim offering the role of Bagril back to Cassandra. Aside from the fact it's not his to give, it's just one hellova a dick move to make. I'm glad to see her pass on the opportunity, and it seems like there may be a new role for the character in the expanding Bat-family that feels more her own. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Robin #18

Dec 10, 2010

Even with these quibbles, the issue is still a good read. As long as the character of Tim Drake continues to be written so well I'm willing to forgive quite a bit. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Robin #20

Feb 16, 2011

That said, the best part of this issue is the second-half where Red Robin reconnects with the Teen Titans (and Damian). The Empire Strike Back reunion scene is pretty good, as is the chemistry between Drake and his former teammates is enjoyable as well as telling on how much Drake has grown into his own character. Now if they can just survive the daunting task of taking out Calculator's base of operation protected by an army of robots made in his own image. (I wonder if he calls them Doombots?) Definitely worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Robin #23

May 18, 2011

It's nice to see another appearance by Lynx. I'd actually like more of her but Red Robin's life is chaotic enough just fitting her in for a couple of panels (like this one). The storyline begun here should give us quite a few action-packed issues as the league of Scarab (Scarab League?) sets their sights squarely on a single hero. Sadly, Tim loses a couple of cool points for only seeing Raiders of the Lost Ark three times? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Robin #25

Jul 18, 2011

The real shocker comes in issue's final panels where we see Red Robin's impressive new base of operations as well as learn that our hero has “assassinated Captain Boomerang.” Like most of DC's current Bat-titles I'm sorry to see this one going away, but it looks like the final issue will be a doozy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Robin #26

Aug 17, 2011

Although Red Robin has survived the DC Reboot (with a somewhat ridiculous costume change) this title is sadly going away. Red Robin will only appear in the new Teen Titans (with other redesigned and costume challenged teen heroes) as his own title will not be getting a reboot. So grab this last chance to read Red Robin's solo adventures while you can. It's worth it. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja (2013) #1

Jul 23, 2013

This first issue spends much time setting up Sonja's relationship to the king while also hinting on why Red Sonja isn't someone you want to mess with (including a nice sequence where a drunk Sonja teaches some thieves a lesson). The action is a little light and some of the time period lingo seems a bit forced at times, but Simone sells me on her vision of the character (although I'm going to have to wait at least another month to find out if she's sold me on this storyline). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Sonja (2013) #2

Aug 25, 2013

As I doubt Dynamite is willing to kill off the character, Sonja should survive her current situation but it will be interesting to see how long it keeps her in seclusion (the end of this arc or beyond?). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Sonja (2013) #3

Sep 18, 2013

The bloodiest issue of the new series yet, Simone succeeds in giving both new and old fans of the character a look at the crucible of fire which formed her and sent Red Sonja into the world alone seeking something she has forever lost and left buried deep in her past. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Sonja (2013) #4

Oct 17, 2013

On their way back to the fallen city with their drunken singing master the young women encounter Mermen servants of Annisia who have been sent out after any who escaped the quarantine. Thankfully for twins, despite her sickness and lack of vision, Red Sonja proves to still be a formidable opponent. Surviving the fight, Sonja is ready to return leading to next month's battle between former allies turned deadly enemies. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja (2013) #5

Nov 28, 2013

The issue does end with a bit of a twist as both women come face-to-face with a common foe from their past suggesting that the epic final battle between the two warriors that the storyline has been leading to may not occur in the arc's final issue (or perhaps at all if both don't survive the attack of their former slave master). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Red Sonja (2013) #6

Dec 27, 2013

The comic also apparently says farewell to Sonja's loyal bodyguards Nias and Ayla who won't be accompanying the She-Devil on her journey onward (although they do get to kick some ass in their final appearance). I think the comic may be hurt without their humor and interactions with our heroine. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja (2016) #5

May 24, 2016

The creative team seems to be a good pairing for the new series. While I'm not ready to jump in with both feet, I may stick around for another issue or two to see where Sonja's war takes her. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Sonja (2017) #0

Jan 23, 2017

Amy Chu looks to be a good choice as the new comic's writer (although I'm not quite sold on the premise). Carlos Comez's art is a little too cheesecake for me, but certainly fits in with the character's long comic history. And, for the price of a quarter, you can't complain too much. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja (2017) #25

Jan 22, 2019

Red Sonja #25 is an interesting opening issue to the new arc. There's obviously quite a bit about Sonja's traveling companion to be discovered. Where does the power of song (capable of making even Sonja shed a tear) come from? As their journey continues no doubt the She-Devil will get some answers. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja (2019) #1

Feb 13, 2019

I'm not sure how long I'll stay with this new volume, but Red Sonja #1 offers a solid opening for fans. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja (2019) #4

May 9, 2019

There's a good mix of action, humor, and drama in the latest issue and some foreshadowing of a new tactic for Dragan whose man returns with a piece of valuable information for his warlord. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Sonja (2019) #12

Jan 22, 2020

The comic closes with some parting words by the doomed Dragan whose curse prevented him from abandoning a land he truly wanted very little to do with and in the end led him to his destiny at the end of Sonja's blade. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Sonja (2019) #14

Mar 11, 2020

While Sonja contemplates such a bargain with one so loathsome, much of the comic's dark humor takes place back in Hyrkania where attempts to ration remaining supplies have led to a comedy of errors. By any measure, these are dark days for Red Sonja and the people of Hyrkania. For fans

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja (2019) #16

Jul 9, 2020

The question at the heart of this arc is how far can Sonja bend, especially as the harsh reality of what she's agreed to becomes ever more real? The other thread to the issue involves Sonja learning a story of her new people involving a deplorable king and the daughter he lost, Idra. While on the surface it explains the kingdom's recent festivities, there's a far darker truth behind the girl's death which few are willing to face (a theme which hits home to Sonja given her recent circumstances).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja (2019) #17

Aug 4, 2020

Sonja wins the day, thanks to guile and a bit of luck, but her duty as general has only just begun.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja (2019) #20

Oct 15, 2020

About half of the issue is set aside to introduce readers to Cyril. Cyril has his father's bloodthirsty and vicious nature (willing to cull the unwilling from his own soldiers in order to toughen the rest) but also a cunning that, along with a visage that hides just how dangerous he truly is, allows for far different kind of opponent for Red Sonja to face off against in this arc. As Cyril earns the fear, if not the respect, of his men, a Sonja as lost as she's ever been haunts the path of her past waiting for events to come into focus once again.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja (2019) #21

Nov 12, 2020

The issue works mostly as a prelude to the inevitable confrontation between Red Sonja and Cyril, with both overconfident with their plans and in their chances with killing the other. The real game is about to begin.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Red Sonja (2019) #22

Dec 10, 2020

As for the battle between Cyril and Sonja, our heroine learns she has drastically underestimated her enemy which nearly cost Sonja her life. She manages to regroup in the treasury but can she withstand everything which Cyril has planned for her?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja (2019): Valentine's Day Special 2021 #1

Feb 17, 2021

The Red Sonja Valentine's Special offers some goofy fun, well-suited to a one-shot (even if it never quite finishes the story) with some fun nuggets such as Red Sonja's guide to dating.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja (2021) #1

Sep 8, 2021

Although I'm not in love with the art of Giuseppe Cafaro, particularly the action sequences, Red Sonja #1 offers a solid opening to a new story and an unlikely role for Sonja (although given her wounds at the end of the issue, Sitha may be doing the protecting in the short term).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Sonja (2021) #2

Oct 12, 2021

Sitha isn't pleased to leave the comforts of Samosh's home, nor to see Sonja move on after completing the job she was paid for. However, the story does set-up an uneasiness for Sonja as she returns only to discover the girl gone and warlocks and necromancers in her way likely leading to a more action-packed third issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Red Sonja (2021) #7

Mar 30, 2022

Despite being the beginning of a new story, it feels like we're plunged into the second or third issue of an arc with Red Sonja #7, and I'll admit feeling a bit lost as both Sonja and Sitha seem to have at least a week worth of tale untold with us jumping into the middle just in time for a weakened Sonja to faceoff with the powerful, but not all that interesting or well-developed, Drang and Sitha to come to the rescue.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Red Sonja (2021) #9

Jun 2, 2022

Along with fighting pirates on the pirate ship, we also get the travelers fighting bizarre monsters after reaching the cursed island. Wherever this young girl is from, it certainly isn't a vacation hot spot. Ending with the pair separated, and Sonja dropped to the bottom of the ocean, there are still leagues to go and likely plenty of more obstacles before their journey is complete.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja (2021) #12

Sep 8, 2022

Following the battle, the issue ends with a prolonged epilogue filling in a bit of the details of Sitha's life post-Sonja (without getting into specifics about any adventures she may have had). Sonja and Sitha was an interesting pairing, and while it was destined to be short, I am sorry to see it come to an end, especially in an issue we don't see much interaction between them (although Dynamite is already exploring Sitha's further adventures in other comics).

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Red Sonja (2021): Holiday Special 2021

Dec 8, 2021

In "The Dance of Fire" Sonja sets out after a pair of thieves and killers known as the Gallows Brothers only to stumble across an odd ritual in the woods as a wizard forces Sonja to dance around a fire with the other maidens, offering their lives to the gods for a plentiful harvest. Despite forcing Sonja to dance all night, things don't turn out as the wizard had hoped.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Sonja (2023) #1

Jul 28, 2023

A new volume of Red Sonja begins here in Vestfold with where the brutal High Priest Thord Varg has taken control following the death of the king.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja (2023) #4

Oct 24, 2023

The comic is heavy on action with some strong art by Walter Geovani, some featuring Sonja and other sequences showcasing the army overwhelming the city

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja (2023) #6

Jan 3, 2024

Sonja's choices allow her to battle Varg back to the real world, while fighting the temptations of the diamond all the while eventually returning it to its rightful owner who is moved by the gesture.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Sonja/Tarzan #1

May 4, 2018

Although mostly set-up for the conflict to come, and not quite enough build-up to make me believe Duul can stand-up to both heroes, there is enough here for fans of both characters to enjoy. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Sonja: Age of Chaos #1

Jan 30, 2020

While I know that there's enough here to keep me around for the entire series, Red Sonja: Age of Chaos #1 works well enough in introducing readers to a host of characters they might not know that much about. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja: Birth of the She-Devil #1

Jun 19, 2019

The first issue introduces us to Sonja's quest (with further flashbacks of her friendship with Shashana), her drunken wandering which leaves destruction in its wake, and her temporary capture by a Sultan whom she hopes to pry information out of. The last of these seems a bit more elaborate than necessary (and more calculated than the stab-first method Sonja uses elsewhere in the comic), but it does provide some early action to help frame the tale. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Sonja: Birth of the She-Devil #2

Jul 24, 2019

Of more interest is the further flashbacks to even earlier days and the conflict between Sonja and her mentor over the loss of his other pupil, Shashana. The flashbacks not only give us a brief encounter between Raka and Red Sonja, but the cult leader's current grab for power seems to move the pair into an unavoidable reunion and confrontation. As to what happened to Shashana… we'll just have to wait and see what horrors may or may not be revealed in the coming issues. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Sonja: Black, White, Red #1

Jul 14, 2021

All three stories work well with the first being the most humorous, the last the most bloody (literally), and the middle a nice mix of the two. Fans of Red Sonja should enjoy themselves.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja: Black, White, Red #2

Aug 19, 2021

The final tale, "Listen Close," is memorable for its late twist when the She-Devil with a Sword is hired by King Assuman to find his bride along with other daughters and wives of the kingdom kidnapped by a Gorgon, only to discover the Gorgon offers a far better fate for the women than the chauvinistic king would ever grant them. While not as strong as issue #1, Red Sonja: Black, White, Red #2 should still please fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Sonja: Black, White, Red #3

Sep 27, 2021

The final tale in the collection has something in common with both other stories as Sonja attempts to save a silent village from a dragon only to discover everything is not as it seems.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Sonja: Black, White, Red #4

Oct 25, 2021

The best of the three tales, “The Iron Maiden,” features some great humor (almost all of it at Sonja's expense) and some of my favorite art of the series so far. A wounded Red Sonja is found and tended to in the woods by a local woman, although the wounded She-Devil with a Sword struggles to return the favor when Onelia attempts to save her village from traders get her into trouble.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Sonja: Black, White, Red #5

Dec 23, 2021

Red Sonja hunts a witch and fights werewolves on the side of a mountain in “The Chill Touch of Sorcery!” And Sonja meets a new challenger in the brash “Erik the Black: He-Demon with an Axe” who walks into a tavern boasting of his greatness to Sonja but never walks out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Red Sonja: Black, White, Red #6

Feb 2, 2022

In “The Daring Rescue of Crown Prince Maximilian (Beloved of All The Peoples),” Red Sonja is hired by emissaries from the Kingdom of Levkoy to rescue their captured prince (who turns out to not be exactly what our hero was expecting). And following a fortune told, Red Sonja journeys to battle a giant who (along with her arrogance) was said be her demise in the appropriately titled “The Giant.”

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Red Sonja: Black, White, Red #7

Feb 24, 2022

In a story that has ties to Sonja's childhood, Sonja fights off werewolves in the forest to return the body of a nun she knew in her youth to be burned in a temple in “Unbowed.” And wounded Sonja makes a stand against a group of barbarians on a snowy mountainside in “Blood on Snow.”

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Red Sonja: Black, White, Red #8

Mar 17, 2022

Red Sonja and fifteen sailors survive the trip to Sleeper Island only to face the wrath of a demon even deadlier than the storm in “Fifteen Men on the Sleeper Chest.” And “Cursed” gives us Red Sonja and a young girl in the midst of a winter storm talking over the legend of a witch, killed by Sonja years ago, whose memory still haunts those in the woods demanding a sacrifice to be made to her.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Red Sonja: Red Sitha (2022) #1

May 10, 2022

The first issue is mainly set-up, offering a look at who Sitha has become.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Red Sonja: Revenge of the Gods #1

Mar 23, 2011

It's not a great read, and I'm not thrilled with the art of Daniel Sampere, but fans of the character should enjoy themselves. And, despite being tied to an earlier adventure, there's little here a casual reader should need to follow the tale. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Rick and Morty vs. Dungeons & Dragons #1

Sep 8, 2018

When Morty meets attractive teen girls discussing Dungeons & Dragons (seriously, where were these girls when I was in high school?!) he fakes a knowledge of the game and pleads desperately with Rick to teach him everything he needs to know. This begins with a crass course in the tabletop role-playing game before evolving into the pair jumping into a more real-life example dressed and armed as their characters. Maybe it's just the cynic in me, but I'm not seeing this end well for Morty and his chances with the ladies. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Rick and Morty: Heart of Rickness (2023) #1

Jul 25, 2023

3 Razors, Rick and Morty

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Robin Rises: Omega #1

Jul 20, 2014

Despite decent art by Andy Kubert, the one-shot does nothing to sell me on a story whose outcome I actually want to see (just not further drawn out over many more months). Given my dislike for the New 52 version of Apokolips I'm not looking forward to see those characters get more attention, either. I want Damian back, but that doesn't mean I have to stick around and read the awkward lengthy rebirth DC has planned. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Robin: Son of Batman (2015) #1

Jun 24, 2015

It appears that Damian's short-run with super-powers has come to an end (thankfully), forcing the character to return using his deadly skills and brains to deal with whatever situation might arise. I'm more sold on the Nobody arc, and the addition of Goliath, than the Year of Blood (which is vaguely hinted at), but I'm not sure that's enough to keep me on board for more than a couple of issues. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Robins (2021) #1

Oct 20, 2021

I like the Robins all together, and I'm happy to see that Stephanie Brown‘s stint as Robin has been confirmed as part of current continuity (even if her time as Batgirl still hasn't, sigh). That said, the group discussion in Dick‘s apartment feels a bit awkward and staged with the characters racing through what could be an intriguing discussion. I'm also far from sold on this weird new (old?) Robin.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Rocket #1

May 11, 2017

Along with lots of narration and introductions of several bit players I wouldn't expect to live all that long, Rocket #1 also features a far-less murdery Rocket than we've seen in recent years (possibly to appeal to a younger audience brought in by the recent film). As heists go the comic takes a bit too long to get into the swing of things, which limits the time which can be spent on the heist itself, and the rest of his crew is pretty forgettable. Still, fans of the character might be able to find enough here to enjoy. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Rocket Raccoon (2014) #1

Jul 11, 2014

Where Star-Lord really needs another character to work off of to be put to maximum use, Rocket can carry a book all on his own as is evidenced in Young's wacky adventure which includes an appearance by the other raccoon out there, a warrant out for Rocket's arrest for (gasp!) murder, and a plot to take down the hero by all the lovely ladies he's rescued and promptly dumped soon afterward. Yeah, it's pretty damn awesome. I can't wait to see where things go from here. Best of the Week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Rocket Raccoon (2014) #2

Aug 12, 2014

On a personal note I'll also admit to shelling out the extra cash for the Stan Sakai (the genius behind Usagi Yojimbo) variant cover which is pretty damn cool. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Rocket Raccoon (2014) #3

Sep 12, 2014

We'll have to wait at least another month for the story behind the other raccoon, and probably even longer to find out how the latest setback effects Amalya's murderous plans, but Skootie Young delivers yet again matching art and story for some bizarre fun. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Rocket Raccoon (2014) #4

Oct 25, 2014

Rocket beating down his angry exes provides quite a bit of fun as well as the comic's second ongoing story arc comes to a close with a battle royal which Rocket stumbles out of victoriously. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Rocket Raccoon (2014) #5

Nov 16, 2014

Forced into telling a story nearly all through its art, Young delivers a campfire story that may bewilder (most) of the young campers but turns out to be the series' best issue so far. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Rocket Raccoon (2014) #6

Dec 20, 2014

And so Rocket and his nonsense-speaking friend (“Brute” only communicates in bianary) head into action. The result of which, as expected, is pretty damn entertaining. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Rocket Raccoon (2014) #7

Jan 28, 2015

Thankfully there is something for Rocket and his new snow ninja friend Jinx to do as the egg of one of the monsters that poisoned Groot may hold the cure (that is if Rocket can survive long enough on his quest to retreive it). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Rocket Raccoon (2014) #9

Mar 15, 2015

The twist near the end of the comic lessens the impact of the story a bit as it's revealed we're only seeing a simulation of one possible future of the pair. What makes the story work is Young flipping the idea that Groot keeps Rocket in line and that the raccoon's loving friend might become something far more dark and dangerous without his questionable influence. Yeah, looks like Rocket Raccoon is a good influence after all (at least for a living tree turned Kaiju monster). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Rocket Raccoon (2014) #10

Apr 13, 2015

As we've come to expect from the series, issue #10 is heavy on both action and humor as Rocket is forced to fight his way out of Knowhere after paying off Klep. Armed with a new lead, and a new reason for authorities and bounty hunters to come after him, Rocket and Groot's new adventure kicks off with an entertaining first issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Rocket Raccoon and Groot #1

Jan 7, 2016

For a comic entitled Rocket Raccoon and Groot issue #1 doesn't offer much of our title characters. Instead we get a surreal journey of cute in-jokes (“Me Are Shrub” indeed) and long set-up that never pays off. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Rocket Raccoon and Groot #3

Mar 24, 2016

Rocket Raccoon and Groot #3 closes the new series' opening arc featuring the misadventures of Rocket Raccoon and Groot in a parallel dimension where Rocket's working for a crazy warlord and supposed amnesia turns out to all be an elaborate ruse to get back at his best pal for a surprise birthday party. Once again the issue features the low-rent knockoffs Pockets and Shrub (who go toe-to-toe with our heroes at one point in the story before being forced to work together and flee for their lives). It's a goofy conclusion to a bizarre story that provides some enjoyable moments. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Rocket Raccoon and Groot #5

May 13, 2016

Rocket Raccoon, Groot, and a planet full of vikings determined to throw our wooden friend into a volcano as a sacrifice, what more could you want. I also really enjoy the more cartoon-style take on our intrepid heroes by artist Jay P. Fosgitt. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Rocket Raccoon and Groot #6

Jun 30, 2016

Even being recognized as heroes can't quite quench the need to one-up each other as their body count ends up tied when the dust is settled. Oh well, I'm sure there will be plenty of other madcap adventures for the pair to prove themselves both winners. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Rocky & Bullwinkle #1

Mar 31, 2014

As a fan of the show, and the variant cover by Stephanie Buscema, I'm glad I picked up this okay first issue, but I'm not sure how long I'll stay with the title. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Rocky & Bullwinkle #2

Apr 16, 2014

The intermission delivers another adventure of Dudley Do-Right who struggles with Inspector Fenwick's orders to get his man. Snidley Whiplash‘s maneuvering to cause the mountie's arrest of an insurance salesman (whose personality and salemanship drives both prisoners and mounties crazy) gives the villain temporary free run of the town but also comes back to bite the villain when he's later forced to share a cell with the salesman. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Rocky & Bullwinkle #3

May 15, 2014

This month's intermission tale features Snidley Whiplash‘s new get-rich scheme by selling worthless merchandise with a “double your money back guarantee” realizing most customers are too lazy to take advantage of the deal. Sadly for the villain Dudley Do-Right isn't most people and soon bankrupts the Snidley's entire business with his circular logic. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Rocky & Bullwinkle #4

Jun 18, 2014

Although both provide some fun moments, neither the set-up for Rocky and Bullwinkle nor the Dudley Do-Right interlude are all that special. That said, fans of the character should still enjoy themselves here.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Rogue & Gambit (2023) #2

Apr 19, 2023

Not reading the main X-Men storyline, I'm not entirely sure I understand the situation that led to this series of events. It has something to do with the fate of Krakoa and the X-Man Manifold and keeping him safe, but other than that I'll admit to being a bit lost. However, even without understanding larger events that caused the situation which put these characters in this spot, Rogue & Gambit #2, for the most part, works well enough on its own to be worth a quick read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
S.W.O.R.D. #1

Dec 23, 2010

With a quality far surpassing that of Image Comics much maligned trade paperbacks, this hardcover edition is a must for fans of the series. It comes with with a hefty price tag, but if you grab it online (as I did) you should be able to save yourself $30-$40.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
S.W.O.R.D. (2020) #1

Dec 15, 2020

The first issue of the series is mainly to introduce the various characters, through the eyes of Magneto who shows up for an inspection and to tease the potential dangers of the facility's secret mission. As a fan of Magneto, the issue held some interest for me, but also has references to all kinds of larger Marvel plotlines (snake invasion?) I didn't follow. I also had trouble buying the “science” of the issue which S.W.O.R.D. #1 which is more hinted at than explained.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #1

Oct 29, 2013

As first issues go Samurai Jack #1 is a lot of fun. Writer Jim Zub captures the tone of the original cartoon, and I was also very impressed with the art by artist Andy Suriano and several of the panels that balance the action, tragedy, and offbeat humor of the character (although I'd love to see more of the cross-cut sequences the cartoon was known for). Fans of the character will want to track this one down. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #2

Nov 26, 2013

Once again the art by Andy Suriano and dialogue from writer Jim Zub capture the feel of the original cartoon while continuing their adventure. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #3

Dec 26, 2013

The truth is the hero, like his town is long dead in the attack the samurai witnessed and only the Threads of Time allow him to stay and remember his home as it was. Freeing the ghost, Samurai Jack continues his journey onward to best Aku and make it home. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Samurai Jack #4

Jan 28, 2014

Capturing the strand which has kept the Queen young and powerful for generations, Samurai Jack moves one step closer to his task (which is now being aided actively by the strands themselves who are growing more powerful as Jack collects more of them). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #5

Mar 5, 2014

Samurai Jack #5 offers fans the first real look at the evil that is Aku in the new comic series and a battle between the monster and our hero that leaves Samurai Jack near death. Mortally wounded, out hero has to use the chrono magic in the threads to save his life rather than return home meaning his never-ending quest against Aku will continue (for hopefully many, many more issues). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #6

Mar 25, 2014

The return of The Scotsman (whatever his current form) and the unique nature of the story set-up what should be one of Jack's more memorable adventures (with some nice art by Brittney Williams). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Samurai Jack #7

Apr 14, 2014

Available in a cute variant cover by Agnes Garbowska, Samurai Jack #7 wraps up the bizarre adventure that despite its unique set-up stays true to the style and themes of the original cartoon. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Samurai Jack #8

Jun 1, 2014

Still, the story works and provides plenty of action while playing on the deviousness of Aku, even if I felt that artist & inker Andy Suriano's heavy lines were a bit too much in some of the panels (which the reader is going to focus more on without any dialogue to read). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Samurai Jack #9

Jun 28, 2014

Several of the best Samurai Jack episodes centered around the odd creatures and personalities Jack met in the future be they crazy Scotsmen, forest creatures who knew how to jump good, trapped Norse warriors, or even Aku in an attractive disguise. The character certainly lends himself to comics heavy on action and light on dialogue but the series needs to remember to allow Jack to interact with others from time to time as well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #10

Aug 4, 2014

Although I think Andy Kuhn's art is a little rough in spots, the adventure does offer the artist a chance to draw Aku in several different shapes and sizes and give us variations of younger Jacks. The result is a fun storyline that underscores the fact that Jack's ability in battle and magical sword are far from the samurai's only weapons against the evil that is Aku. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #11

Aug 26, 2014

It will be interesting to watch “The Quest of The Broken Blade” unfold as Samurai Jack will work to restore his sword whose spirit has been lost leaving Jack more vulnerable than ever to Aku's attacks. And how soon will it take Aku to realize Jack is no longer armed with the blade? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #12

Oct 7, 2014

And where does Samurai Jack, and those who look to him to be a champion of hope, look to find his own? From the looks of things the Quest has only just begun. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #13

Nov 2, 2014

While Robo-Merc is a fun new Aku minion, the most interesting piece from the latest issue of Samuari Jack is the reveal of how the samurai's sword was initially forged and how those same elements (three monks, three gods, and three hammers) gather once more to reforge the blade before all is lost. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #14

Dec 9, 2014

The tests come to a close with the end of the issue (or do they?) with Samurai Jack facing off against the evil that is Aku, but without the help of his magic blade how long can Samurai Jack survive? My guess, the hero will prove his worth even without the sword and thus earn its return allowing his quest to return home and undo the future that is Aku to continue once more. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #15

Dec 24, 2014

With the arc complete Jack has earned the sword bequeathed to him by his father all those years ago, but still stuck in Aku's demented future our hero is no closer to finding a path home. His quest, it seems, will continue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #16

Jan 27, 2015

Letting Aku step into the shadows for an issue or two allows for a different kind of story and the tease of an unlikely team-up of the samurai and the thief certainly sells me on the new arc. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #17

Mar 30, 2015

As last month's issue foreshadowed when Jack first attempted to seek an audience, the Master of Time isn't exactly all he's cracked-up to be leaving me to wonder where next month's issue might take the arc. Despite the ending, which is more problematic for next issue than this one, this month provides plenty of fun team-up actions between Jack and the Thief as the pair struggle to work together to survive the countless obstacles put in their way in order to find the one man who the samurai believes may be able to transport him back home and finally undo the future that is Aku. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Samurai Jack #18

May 2, 2015

After several multi-issue arcs I'm happy to see IDW try their hand at a few one-shot adventures and explore a variety of adventures the lost samurai can have in the dystopian future. Hopefully this is a trend we'll see continue to break-up some of the longer arcs of series. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #19

May 21, 2015

Christine Larsen steps in to do the art for the latest issue that's more comedy than action (although Jack does have to defend himself against his old friends when they become feral and possessed by the ghost). Larsen offers some fun reaction shots of our hero to the bizarre situation he finds himself dragged into while Jim Zub continues to have fun adding to the legend of Samurai Jack. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Samurai Jack #20

Jun 16, 2015

Comics based on cartoons can be a real crapshoot, but Jim Zub and company delivered a strong monthly series that added rather than detracted from the franchise. Even if I'm not the biggest fan of Andy Suriano's rough art on display, this issue is a must-read for fans of Samurai Jack.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Samurai Sonja #1

Jun 30, 2022

Bending Sonja's story to a new time and locale, without her trademark red locks, offers an interesting introduction to a new version of our heroine. There's likely going to be plenty of feudal Japan battles, but the comic also teases more mythical threats as well. While I'm not totally on-board after a single issue, there's enough her to make me curious about what kinds of trouble a Samurai Sonja might get herself into over the next few issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Savage Red Sonja (2023) #1

Nov 8, 2023

It's not likely a comic I'd stay with beyond a single issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Scarlet Spider #1

Jan 12, 2012

This version of the character, finally free but weighed down by his past, may make for an interesting story (even if it is Kaine). Based on this first issue I'm definitely going to give it a shot…but I'll admit I still miss the hoodie. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Scarlet Spider #2

Feb 13, 2012

Although we get more narration into Kaine's past we sadly don't get another flashback of the original Scarlet Spider this time around. However, the two issues do a pretty good job reintroducing and establishing Kaine as a new hero in the Marvel Universe. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #3

Mar 19, 2012

Although I'm a little concerned that Kaine doesn't understand the basic concept of a secret identity (a doctor, cop, bartender, assassin, and a smuggled illegal immigrant all know he's the Scarlet Spider) things look pretty good for this title with plenty of action and some really good Spidey narration – Kaine-style. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Scarlet Spider #4

Apr 17, 2012

We also get yet another person (Annabelle) learning the Scarlet Spider's secret identity (geez, this guy keeps secrets worse than movie Batman) as well as getting our first glimpse at Aracely‘s hidden talents. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Scarlet Spider #5

May 14, 2012

With Kaine and Lawton the comic has a fun odd-couple buddy-cop movie feel which when mixed with the countdown and suspense of the story turns out to be a hell of a lot of fun. We do get cameoes from Iron Man, Maria Hill, and (for some unknown reason) Ultimate Universe Nick Fury, but none of them interact with our hero or make it to Houston in time. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #6

Jun 17, 2012

Another good issue that give us a big throwdown between Kaine and Ana in a burning church as well as some humorous moments between the frustrated hero and Aracely and some contemplative moments about as Kaine gets used to his new role and place in the world. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #7

Jul 16, 2012

His attempts to get some answers from the CEO of Roxxon do lead him to the identity of the distrubed young woman but also find him squared off against the Southwest's mightiest heroes – The Rangers. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #8

Aug 15, 2012

Of course that's not the end of the story as the ensuing battle uncovers the awful truth about what Roxxon is really up to and creates an unstable new situation the Scarlet Spider and Rangers will have to work together to stop. Here's hoping the conclusion is filled with as much action and humor as this issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #9

Sep 18, 2012

The twist at the end involving Zoe Walsh (the woman Kaine saved, slept with, then discovered is all kinds of crazy) is also well thought-out, creating a beautiful but volatile enemy who knows Kaine's face and has a reason (albeit a crazy-ass one) and near limitless resources to plan her revenge. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #12

Dec 17, 2012

The comic continues to tease the abilities of Aracely, play on the guilt of our main character, and provide plenty of opportunities to prove to everyone (including himself) that he is indeed a hero. (And the cover's pretty cool, too.) Merry Christmas. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #12.1

Dec 24, 2012

While tracking a killer whose mark reminds Kaine of his past, the Scarlet Spider takes on the gangs of Houston and The Hand who have shown up to make their presence known in the port city. And, if that news isn't bad enough for our hero, the Kingpin appears to have major plans for Houston as well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Scarlet Spider #13

Jan 15, 2013

Between Kaine taking out the smuggling lowlifes and fighting off the werewolves who have come to collect Aracely (yeah, this one has werewolves) we get a bizarre dream sequences of the telepathic young woman full of Mayan imagery and predestination. But we'll have to wait at least a month to figure out what it all means and just how a bloodied and beaten Scarlet Spider survives being eaten alive by werewolves. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Scarlet Spider #14

Feb 18, 2013

I really hope Kaine's transformation lasts only and issue or two as I'm far less interested in reading about a spider-monster assassin than Kaine's attempt to redeem himself and do honor to the name of the Scarlet Spider. Even a short cameo by Ben Reilly can't save this one. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Scarlet Spider #15

Apr 3, 2013

Other than adding new enemies for Scarlet Spider, this short arc merely restated the comic's main theme (hero or killer) that's so ingraned in the series it really didn't need to be reintroduced so forcefully. I'm glad human Kaine is back, but far less sure of the Vertigo-esque path the comic appears to be going down (which, from comic's last few pages, looks sure to continue in the coming months). Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Scarlet Spider #16

May 1, 2013

Aside from the ridiculously awesome circumstances, Scarlet Spider #16 continues laying groundwork for ongoing stories including Kaine finally giving into his feelings for Annabelle, and a dire warning to Kaine to leave Houston which the hero never receives. Hopefully the foreboding won't infringe too much on the glorious insanity the comic delivers when it is at its best. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #17

May 27, 2013

Scarlet Spider #17 continues to make use of the fun relationship between Kaine and Aracely as well as the self-deprecating narration of our hero. This issue is full of action as “Red Ninja Spider-Man” takes on Beast, Ice Man, Kitty Pryde, before his fight with Logan. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #18

Jul 2, 2013

Writer Christopher Yost is in fine form here providing several fun moments between the two heroes including Kaine's apt description of Logan, Logan's reaction to Kaine being a clone of Spider-Man, and Wolverine's reaction to the brilliance of the Scarlet Spider's plan.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #19

Jul 30, 2013

Although I don't see Kaine getting invited back to the Jean Grey School for Higher Learning for high tea any time soon, the forced team-up with two of Marvel's deadliest heroes works well (and allows for plenty of Kaine's sardonic narration which writer Christopher Yost does so well). Kaine's deal with the Kingpin also foreshadows new trouble for the hero sometime down the line. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #20

Aug 18, 2013

With the Jackal's survival things are far from over, and I'm happy to say the next issue teases the return of the first hero (in some form) to go under the name of the Scarlet Spider. I can't wait to see what the return of both his degeneration and Ben Reilly means for Kaine. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #21

Aug 30, 2013

Even if it wasn't everything I wanted, Scarlet Spider #21 was more than I ever expected so I can't really complain too much, can I? (Yes I can, I still want that awesome costume back in the Marvel Universe! C'mon, Marvel prove you really are the House of Ideas and find a way to give us two Scarlet Spiders every month!) Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #22

Sep 30, 2013

With the comic coming to an end with issue #25, and Marvel showing no real interest in using Kaine elsewhere, Yost is presented with a unique opportunity to end the comic on his terms. For at least a single issue Kaine is able to fight off what Kraven and his daughter demand of him, but given next issue's one-on-one battle with Kraven to the death we'll soon see whether the Scarlet Spider truly is a hero or a killer. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Scarlet Spider #23

Nov 4, 2013

With Kraven's defeat, writer Christopher Yost sets up the series' final arc as Kaine's past will apparently haunt him through the end of the series (and possibly beyond?). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Scarlet Spider #24

Dec 3, 2013

I'm going to miss this book, and although news has it that Scarlet Spider will be continuing to enjoy life with a new version of the New Warriors (hopefully with Aracely along for the ride and a Guardians of the Galaxy costume for Vance Astrovik) it won't be the same. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scarlet Spider #25

Dec 23, 2013

I'll miss this title which leaves me no monthly Spidey comics (at least none I care to read). And I'll miss Yost's rehabilitative take on a character who ends the series far more interesting than when it began. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Scooby Doo: Mystery Inc. (2020) #1

Jun 30, 2020

Although the sequence feels a bit rushed, the comic does have an amusing final twist for its intended all-age readers explaining why all the odd goings on started happening only after as Scooby and friends arrived.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Scooby-Doo Team-up #1

Nov 27, 2013

Both young and old fans should find something worth picking up here in a comic I couldn't help but smile through as I turned every single page. Best of the Week.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Scooby-Doo Team-up #2

Jan 14, 2014

Delivering a Dynamic Canine Duo, Scooby-Doo! Team-Up #2 is another extremely enjoyable issue (while playing on iconic Batman panels along the way) from a title I hope DC never stops printing. The New 52 needs a serious jolt of the kind of madcap joy and comic book awesomeness that stories like this bring to clean the grit from several of DC's current titles. Bring on the next Bat-villain; Scooby and I are waiting! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scooby-Doo Team-up #3

Mar 11, 2014

Things get even wackier with the appearance of Scooby's #1 fan Scooby-Mite who decides to make his own changes to reality (including given the scaredy-dog super-powers). We even get an appearance of Larry (Robin's biggest fan) to make the insanity complete. Once again, my only complaint with this comic is that I have to wait two months between issues. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scooby-Doo Team-up #4

May 12, 2014

The comic's back-up story features the Titans being visited by Raven‘s uncle Myron “The Mildly Irritating” who quickly gets on everyone's nerves but eventually leaves on his own accord as he gets fed up with Daphne constantly attempting to pull his “mask” off and Scooby constantly running him over. Once again, Scooby-Doo Team-Up doesn't disappoint. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scooby-Doo Team-up #5

Jul 7, 2014

Despite the fact the Scooby Gang finds themselves on an island where magic is real, the latest issue of Scooby-Doo Team-Up keeps the the classic formula of having a reasonable explanation behind all the odd occurrences – even the giant Hydra, Cyclops, and Minotaur which they see attack the Amazons with their own eyes. Rather than have the “no men allowed” be a sexist ban, writer Sholly Fisch writes in an explanation in the form of a curse stripping the Amazons of their power should men step foot on the island which also explains the reason for the Duke of Deception‘s illusions. As always, worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Scooby-Doo Team-up #7

Nov 15, 2014

Although not as strong as the rest of the series, Scooby-Doo! Team-Up #7! does have fun with having the Scooby Gang comment on the ridiculousness of caveman advancements. Other than a single scene not much is done with Dino meaning Scooby is left out of getting his own prehistoric pal. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Scooby-Doo Team-up #8

Jan 25, 2015

Although I far prefer the previous issues of teaming the Scoobies with the DC Universe's vast array of comic crimefighters, this month's issue works a little better than Scooby-Doo! Team-Up #7. There are a couple of nice touches including Judy swooning over Fred and a fun team-up with Scooby and Astro. In the end the group solves another mystery involving the Space-Age Specter which offers a reveal used before, most notably in “Foul Play in Funland,” where a robot is responsible for the trouble. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Scooby-Doo Team-up #9

Apr 11, 2015

After a pair of lackluster issues without any super-heroes to team-up with the comic returns to form here offering the same kind of zany fun delivered in its first five issues. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scooby-Doo Team-up #10

Jun 29, 2015

To this point I've much preferred the issues of Scooby-Doo! Team-Up involving Scooby and the gang teaming up with various super-heroes than various Hanna-Barbara characters, but Scooby-Doo! Team-Up #10 is quite fun as the gang joins forces with the Quest family to solve a mystery. The mummy and the theft of the jewel create a natural crossover for the teams while providing some fun moments between various characters (including Scooby and Bandit discussing their crazy human counterparts). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scooby-Doo Team-up #11

Sep 5, 2015

Although I've mostly preferred the issues of the series that pair Scooby-Doo and his pals with various DC heroes rather than Hanna-Barbera characters, Secret Squirrel turns out to be a good choice for this issue. The character fits right in with the gang, and the comic even ends on a nice touch giving his sidekick a hero moment and giving Scooby a special reward the squirrel can appreciate. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scooby-Doo Team-up #13

Dec 22, 2015

And I've got to admit that Scooby-Doo! Team-Up #13 provides one of the most bizarre and surreal panels I've ever seen in a Scooby-Doo! comic as Scooby is possessed by none other than the Spectre. It has to be seen to be believed. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scooby-Doo Team-up #14

Mar 7, 2016

Although the gang plays a much larger part in the first storyline than in either the defeat of Black Manta or Ocean Master, the choice to pair the group with Aquaman and Mera certainly pays off – even if it isn't the Batman: The Brave and the Bold version of the character (which would have been AMAZING!). Still, this is pretty good. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scooby-Doo Team-up #15

May 26, 2016

The mystery turns out to have a goofy conclusion that fits the mold of the comic but the ghost gorilla itself isn't all that interesting (or in anyway scary). Still, it's not every day you get a comic where a talking dog and his best friends fight a ghost in city full of talking gorillas, now is it? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Scooby-Doo Team-up #16

Jun 23, 2016

Eventually the group finds the Monster Society of Evil by walking straight into a trap. However, with a little help from the wizard Shazam who temporarily grants Shaggy and Velma magic powers, our heroes are able to free Billy, Mary, and Freddy and help save the day. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Scooby-Doo Team-up #20

Nov 28, 2016

It's Scooby-Doo in space with Space Ghost, what more could you want? Must-read!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scooby-Doo Team-up #24

Apr 1, 2017

Eventually, with the help of J'onn, the Scooby Gang unmasks the real villain hoping to get revenge on the hero by making all aliens out to dangerous threats. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scooby-Doo Team-up #25

May 4, 2017

The second-half of the issue reveals the Psycho-Pirate who puts his powers to good use turning the heroes temporarily against each other, before of course coming together with the Scooby Gang to save the day. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scooby-Doo Team-up #26

Jun 7, 2017

Uncovering the dragons are robots made for a distraction eventually leads our meddling kids to uncovering the mastermind behind the plot. The choice for Daphne to show some natural martial arts ability, and kick some robot dragon ass, is unexpected but not unwelcome as well. I wonder if this is a one-time thing or if we may see more of this in the future? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scooby-Doo Team-up #31

Oct 30, 2017

The sub-atomic adventure is a fun read, plus the comic begins with the Atom saving Scooby-Doo and the gang from a properly ridiculous villain like the Bug-Eyed Bandit. There's also a nod and a wink to the hero's more notable previous adventures. The short adventure proves to be big fun. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scooby-Doo Team-up #33

Jan 15, 2018

The later-half of the issue features a fight between the heroes and the Fatal Five where the Scooby Gang is able to help step-in and offer assistance (despite their lack of powers). Overall, a fun adventure for Scooby-Doo and friends. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Scooby-Doo Team-up #34

Jan 26, 2018

Birds of Prey fans should enjoy this one, and I was thrilled to see a favorite, but now sadly mostly forgotten, member of the team earn a cameo (I just wish she could have stuck around awhile longer). Eventually the group determines the giant birds are nothing more than robots under the control of the Penguin and the Birds of Prey (and a kung fu Daphne) jump into action while Velma takes control of the villain's latest toy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Scooby-Doo Team-up #35

Mar 12, 2018

The truth behind the ghost turns out to be nothing more than two bank robbers holed-up in Yogi's cave who are snatching the occasional picnic basket for lunch. With the help of the bears, the gang is able to nab the goons. However, this time Scooby doesn't get the last word as Yogi is finally able to make off with the picnic basket. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Scooby-Doo Team-up #37

May 29, 2018

There's your usual amount of crazy Scooby action here, and the fights between the super-pets (who do eventually put their issues aside) provide some fun as well. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Scooby-Doo Team-up #38

Jun 18, 2018

If something wasn't wrong with Blue Falcon there would be no need to call in Mystery, Inc. which limits the mystery a bit more than usual. While not one of the comic's stronger issues, there is still fun to be had with Scooby-Doo and Dynomutt working together and the constant comparisons to Batman and Robin. The less realistic version of the cartoon dog using his many cybernetic features is also far less ghoulish (and plays on Dynomutt often malfunctioning when trying to help). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scooby-Doo Team-up #42

Oct 10, 2018

Thankfully Scooby-Doo and the gang can rely on the help of Congorilla, Sam Simeon, Detective Chimp, and others in order to fight Grodd and save the day. It's completely bananas, but it's also quite appealing. Okay, I'm done with the puns. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Scooby-Doo Team-up #45

Jan 8, 2019

With no mystery to be solved, the team-up relegates our regulars to mostly spectators. Velma and Daphne, along with Barda, spend most of the issue pretending to be under the control of Granny Goodness, who attempts to leverage her hostages into forcing Mister Miracle into a death trap he won't escape from. But then again, they don't call him Mister Miracle for nothing. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Scooby-Doo Team-up #48

Jun 24, 2019

What better way to get to the truth than by robbing the Flash Museum? While the villain hiding being the ghost of the Top is a classic Rogue, he's just obscure enough to make the storyline work. Playing to his ego forces the villain to reveal himself, and thankfully some back-up arrives just in time to save the gang from the Rogues who no longer need their help. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Secret Avengers #1

May 27, 2010

The post-Norman Osborne Avengers relaunches continue with Steve Rogers‘ own black ops team of Secret Avengers. The first issue does a good job of giving you a feel for each member (Black Widow and Valkyrie, War Machine, Moon Knight and Ant-Man, Sharon Carter, and Beast) while providing flashbacks on how Rogers convinced the more reluctant members to join the team. As first issues go its solid. Not great, but solid (though the final panel did made me wince). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Secret Avengers #10

Mar 2, 2011

I've felt this comic has been shaky ever since it's first issue, but there are moments here when it really feels like things are beginning to come together. Of the current major Avengers titles it's been the most hit-and-miss so far. We'll have to see if the things continue to improve, but this one is worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Secret Avengers #17

Oct 2, 2011

The issue does include a very cool cover by John Cassaday (and I can only imagine how much more I would have liked the issue if he had done the art inside as well). The story itself might have been saved by some great art but this is anything but, and in just a single issue I'm left on the fence again about picking up the next one. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Secret Avengers #18

Oct 30, 2011

Writer Warren Ellis even gives us an appearance by Arnim Zola (a perfect villain for this type of story), the return of the Beast (who is given most the of monologue necessary to explain the situation), and a fun cameo by Reed Richards which allows the comic to end with Steve Rogers delivering a joke. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Secret Avengers #19

Nov 30, 2011

Warren Ellis is proving to be a good match for this book. I've only been disappointed with one of the issues since he took on the title, and I'm looking forward to see what else he might have in store for this team. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Secret Avengers #20

Jan 4, 2012

Alex Maleev's art is a little rough in spots but it works for the story, especially as it shifts depending on what period of the past the Black Widow finds herself. Not every issue of Secret Avengers works, but I'll give Marvel credit for using the book to play with some crazy concepts. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Secret Avengers #21

Jan 17, 2012

Rogers interrogation of the traitor works okay, but the team fighting the (rather generic-looking) monsters in the basement is far from thrilling. The comic also ends with a thoroughly unsatisfying ending as Captain America either allows a woman five feet away to commit suicide or was simply too stupid or too slow to stop her. I don't know, maybe the years are finally catching up with him? Hit and Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Secret Six (2014) #1

Dec 10, 2014

I'm happy to see Black Alice‘s inclusion in the group but the absences of both Deadshot and Scandal Savage are certainly felt. I'm unsure about the new Ventriloquist (who appears to be a stand-in for Ragdoll's particular brand of horrible yet lovable awfulness) or the P.I. Big Shot (is he the redshirt to get killed off as soon as possible?), but throwing a Talon into the group feels a bit like DC still milking a character whose five-minutes of fame ended two-years ago. Despite a strong set-up, I think we're long past time that people admit that Court of Owls wasn't that good. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Secret Six (2014) #2

Feb 16, 2015

The issue ends with the escape of the villains who it seems are going to stick together long enough to get some answers and take some vengeance on the hidden voice responsible for their capture and torture. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Secret Six (2014) #3

Jun 22, 2015

Sadly the issue does have its problems starting with the incredibly disappointing look at Catman in his new costume. The early scenes involving the bare-chested warrior (whose run in with the cop could have been toned down a bit) bring back the character Simone masterfully brought to the forefront of the DCU, but his new duds (making him look like a failed back-up dancer for a Michael Jackson tribute band) are the worst thing to happen to the character since Kevin Smith. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Secret Six (2014) #4

Jul 22, 2015

Ragdoll's unique voice has certainly been missing in the comic. His addition works well here while Scandal, as enemy rather than one of the major driving forces behind the group, is a bit off-key. The latest issue opens with a buddy-buddy moment between Catman and the nondescript detective-ish guy (a character so forgettable neither I nor the Internet seem to remember who the hell he is) which only makes me miss Catman's best bud even more. Oh well, at least there's some fun to be had. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Secret Six (2014) #7

Nov 4, 2015

While most of the issue centers around discussion about Black Alice, the rest of the characters are left to fend for themselves in a B-story involving Catman‘s attempts to try and forge the odd group into something approaching an actual team or family. His attempts aren't very successful, but the threat against one of their own might be just what this group needs to work together and bond as a team (even if it is a team that remains a shadow of its former pre-New 52 self). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Secret Six (2014) #8

Dec 4, 2015

There's plenty of action, bad decision making, and questionable choices that make-up a good Secret Six comic (even if we're still missing Deadshot and Catman seems stuck in that awful, awful New 52 costume). It appears that, thanks to the “help” of our anti-heroes things are going to get worse for the world before they get better. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Secret Six (2014) #10

Feb 2, 2016

I'm also a bit confused as to who is actually walking around in Black Alice's body at the end of the comic. Despite Scandal Savage‘s attempt to kill the young woman, or whatever is/was possessing her, Black Alice survives… but is it really her or just some creature wearing her face? And does this mean we've seen the last of Scandal and Rag Doll (two characters who this team could desperately use) for the foreseeable future? For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Secret Six (2014) #12

Apr 5, 2016

It seems our group is ready for another heroic rescue of a teammate from herself. The question is, when the dust settles who will still be standing? And, if the tease we see at the beginning of the issue is true, are we finally going to see Scandal Savage‘s path become more intertwined with the group? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Secret Six (2014) #13

May 5, 2016

I'll admit I haven't enjoyed this group as much as the previous incarnation of the Secret Six, but Gail Simone has finally sold me on Strix. I'm betting she, like the rest of the group, isn't going to go quietly into the night. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Secret Six (2014) #14

Jun 2, 2016

It may not have everything (not even a cameo from Deadshot?), and the group (particularly Catman) is still stuck in those awful New 52 redesigns for the last go-around, but Secret Six #14 proves to be a proper farewell to this version of the team. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Secret Six Vol. 2 #1

Sep 10, 2008

Longtime comic readers, especially Batman readers, should get a kick out of the fun presented here. As first issues go this one is pretty strong, and as a lifetime fan of Catman (oh c'mon, he's awesome!) I can't wait to for more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Secret Six Vol. 2 #22

Jun 12, 2010

“Cats in the Cradle Part Four” ends Catman‘s quest for revenge, and possibly his membership in the Secret Six? Say it ain't so Gail Simone, say it ain't so! All around another strong issue including a look into the pain of Black Alice, Ragdoll acting like a man, and a final flashback into the childhood of Thomas Blake. Oh, and Catman eats somebodies face off! You don't want to miss that, do you?! CATMAN!!!!!! Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Secret Six Vol. 2 #23

Jul 14, 2010

Even if it's not quite as good as usual there's plenty of mayhem and madcap action that makes this issue worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Secret Six Vol. 2 #26

Oct 7, 2010

A pretty good read from writer Gail Simone, with lots of bloody action courtesy of artist J. Calafiore. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Secret Six Vol. 2 #27

Nov 6, 2010

By the end of issue #27 we're still left with two separate squads and only one issue left to conclude this fun, but bizarre, story arc. It's not the best issue of Secret Six, but it's a hellova lot of fun. And, did I mention it has Catman riding a giant freakin' cat and mauling an entire army. Yeah, that's pretty cool.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Secret Six Vol. 2 #30

Feb 7, 2011

The first-half of a two-part crossover with the Doom Patrol, this one's got it all (even a team of sexy parachuting female suicide bombers). Manic action from the first page to the last, writer Gail Simone shoots from both barrels here with both dark humor and the kind of ass kicking only the Secret Six can deliver. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Secret Six Vol. 2 #31

Mar 7, 2011

A strong opening to a new arc that sends the team literally to Hell. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Secret Six Vol. 2 #32

Apr 12, 2011

The last panel does give us a bit of a surprise and should make the final issue of this storyline worth reading, but I'll just be glad when things get back to “normal” for the team. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Secret Six Vol. 2 #34

Jun 8, 2011

There's still plenty of fallout to come, including a difficult choice by Scandal and the reported return of a Bane on Venom, but this single character-driven issue (which has its share of bloody panels) is a nice change-of-pace after the trip to Hell and back. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Secret Six Vol. 2 #35

Jul 12, 2011

With only one issue left, I'm saddened that this is the end of the Secret Six, at least for now (and possibly for good). Whether the powers that be in the DCU believe it or not, their universe is going to be a lot less interesting without the Six to kick around. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Secret Six Vol. 2 #36

Aug 8, 2011

I'll hold out hope, because Gail Simone's already performed one miracle. She took an under-utilized Bat-villain from my childhood who had become a joke and turned him into one kick-ass anti-hero. If she can do that for Catman who's to say she won't find a way to resurrect the Secret Six as well?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Secret Warriors (2017) #3

Jun 21, 2017

Without getting too bogged down in the events of Secret Empire, which is going to be a constant struggle for this book, the third issue provides plenty of fun while still imparting some debate about heroism and actions in war. And taking a shot at its own publisher for what the X-Men have become? Priceless. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Serenity: Float Out #1

Jun 3, 2010

The art of Patric Reynolds doesn't help either. The ships look fine, but the characters looked rush, blurred, and half-assed. A comic with a strong story can sometimes overcome bad art (and vice-versa), but when they both are unremarkable you end up with a turd like this. Oswalt is a funny guy and should stick to what he knows. We have enough mediocre comic book writers.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Serenity: Leaves On The Wind #1

Feb 4, 2014

I've been waiting for the future of Serenity to be explored, and things get off to a good start here. Penned by Joss Whedon with art by longtime Buffy artist Georges Jeanty that captures the right look of the ship and her crew, I can't wait to see where the six-issue mini-series goes from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Serenity: Leaves On The Wind #2

Mar 6, 2014

Jayne swapping places with Zoe means we're still without a full crew, and River‘s choice to put herself in a medically-induced coma to find more information like Miranda which can be uses as leverage against the Alliance proves the young woman‘s timing hasn't improved as it leaves her defenseless, and the ship down another crew member, when Jubal Early catches up with Serenity once more. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Serenity: Leaves On The Wind #3

Mar 30, 2014

With River's remembrance of others who, like her, were manipulated and experimented on by the Alliance means the crew will have to make a side-trip before rescuing Zoe which also means Mal needs to recruit another member to the team. It also likely means the mini-series will finally begin pulling the curtain back on those who experimented on River and means the possible return of pairs of soldiers with hands of blue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Serenity: Leaves On The Wind #4

May 11, 2014

Although Kaylee earns the cover for this issue neither she nor Inara are given much to do other than express the crew's concern of Mal bringing in the Operative. It will be interesting to see an example of what River was meant to become as next month's issue will also give us the conclusion of the Operative's fight with another of his ilk. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Serenity: Leaves On The Wind #5

Jun 5, 2014

With only one issue remaining, and Zoe still locked in an Alliance prison somewhere, the Alliance has finally made Mal Reynolds angry enough to join the fight as both he and Bea discover just how many of the Browncoats the Alliance has killed. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Serenity: Leaves On The Wind #6

Jun 30, 2014

The only sequence I thought felt out of place was the confrontation between the frehsly-rescued Zoe and the Operative. It's not that I don't feel that scene would have taken place, I'm just not quite buying taking place at that particular moment which seems a bit shoehorned into the comi (plus it removes an intriguing character from the fold). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Serenity: No Power In The 'Verse #1

Oct 31, 2016

The last half of the issue sets up the events which will likely dominate the mini-series going forward as Mal and his crew are called to investigate the disappearance of Bea which leads them to be surrounded by gun-totting New Resistance operatives wondering just what the hell Serenity's crew knows about their operation. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Seven Secrets #13

Feb 2, 2022

All doesn't go as well for other separated members of the Order as the inside man is revealed and another secret falls into the hands of Amon. I'll admit to not being surprised by the reveal of the traitor, but how Amon convinces others to join him (through the use of the future-seeing secrets) is certainly of interest. Not only does it garner more support to the traitor's side it raises the question of whether or not Caspar is indeed on the right side (although Amon's hardon to kill him doesn't exactly paint the Seeker as heroic).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Seven Secrets #14

Feb 21, 2022

Seven Secrets #14 is a quick-moving issue with more action between the two secret sects consumed with protecting or acquiring the seven secrets. It doesn't delve into just what Caspar is, or where his unusual power comes from (did he acquire it while growing up in the other dimension, or was it something he was born with?), but we do see him gain more control over it heading into our cliffhanger. Realizing more of their dwindling number are in danger, our small group of heroes is once again too late to make a save but they do arrive just in time for another case to be opened, and perhaps see the precipitating even of Caspar's death?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Seven Secrets #15

Mar 16, 2022

Coming at the end of the issues is the reveal that the Seventh Case is actually empty. The Seventh Secret has been walking around for several years now. And, if the world is to be saved, he's going to need to live up to his destiny. We now know why Anton is scared of Caspar, but (given we know his death is coming) how exactly will this play out?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Seven Secrets #17

May 18, 2022

Told through the grief of a mother who has lost her child, but still has hope that some form of Caspar can be saved, Seven Secrets #17 fills in the gaps involving Caspar's birth and his unusual gifts. Now we'll find out whether the remaining Keepers and Holders can help whatever Caspar has become defeat their enemy who has been one-step ahead of them this entire series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Seven Secrets #18

Jul 6, 2022

There's quite a bit of reveals and revelations in the final two issues of the series (including the source of the briefcases, Caspar's role/destiny, etc.) all of which are triggered by the death of the series' main character. The resolution completes this story, in a more anime style than a classic comic book one, while still allowing for future stories at some point if the creators are so inclined (although I don't think a sequel is necessarily needed here).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Shadow War (2022): Alpha #1

Apr 4, 2022

The arc, which will move through various Batman titles before finishing up in Shadow War: Omega #1, will focus on solving the motives and identity of the killer. But to have any chance at the truth, first Batman will have to save Deathstroke from the army descending on him (which probably won't earn him any points with his son).

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Shadow War (2022): Omega #1

Jun 8, 2022

Other than the "shock of the villain revealed, and Deathstoke's death being immediately redacted thanks to a dip in the Lazarus Pit, there's not much here. Although, we do get Damian being less of a prick than usual and a nice moment between father and son (right before, you know, all of the Justice League gets killed in an event that isn't referenced here except being name-dropped in the epilogue).

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Shadow War (2022): War Zone #1

May 25, 2022

Part of the current Shadow War crossover, Shadow War Zone #1 is an overpriced issue will filler back-up stories in an attempt to justify its $6 cover price. They don't.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Shadowland #1

Jul 12, 2010

Odds are we'll be seeing Bullesye again. Even if it's another bait-and-switch the storyline of pushing Murdock down the dark path seems to be in full swing. And if it's real"well, that's a hell of a hard first step down a path of no redemption for the hero of Hell Kitchen to take in the first issue of this five month long event. Either way it should be an interesting few months for Daredevil readers.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Shadowland #3

Sep 2, 2010

Sure, this Hand demon gives our heroes a big bad villain to fight, but it also undercuts the only real dramatic thread the mini-series had going for it. Nice to see Elektra finally show up, though. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Shadowland #4

Oct 13, 2010

Other than the Avengers getting their butts handed to them by DD and the magic ninjas (well, what would you call them?) there's really not much here. But at least we're one step closer to finally ending this once promising but poorly executed mini-event. That's something, right?

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Shang-Chi (2020) #1

Oct 1, 2020

Shang-Chi #1 offers a short glimpse of Shang-Chi's current life after leaving behind spies and super-hero adventures and now working in a bakery. However, the arrival of an old friend and then a horde of assassins presents our hero with a reason to return home and deal with unfinished business. For someone not all that familiar with the character, the issue doesn't do much to sell me on the mini-series (although I was pleasantly surprised by Fin Fang Foom‘s cameo). Still, for fans, this is a solid opening.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Shazam! (2018) #1

Dec 18, 2018

While offering a bit of a backstory for Mary, the main issue primarily focuses on Billy while introducing the idea for a magical road trip for the Marvel Family for the comic's first arc. I'll be curious to see where things go from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Shazam! (2018) #2

Jan 29, 2019

SHAZAM! #2 also features an appearance by Dr. Sivana and Mr. Mind (inside the scientist's ear), who we see also has an entry in the large book which the scientist has been carrying around, likely foreshadowing his eventual run-in with the Big Red Cheese and the rest of the Marvel Family. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Shazam! (2018) #3

Mar 6, 2019

It looks like starting next issue we'll be getting a look at more of the lands. Are the heroes destined to protect these various realms? Or will the entire Marvel Family be heading back to “Earthlands” at the end of the arc? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Shazam! (2018) #4

Apr 3, 2019

Looks like the heroes have their work cut out for them. And there's a new face on the scene as well that has learned of what trouble Billy and his friends have gotten into. It appears the group will meet Black Adam fairly soon. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Shazam! (2018) #6

Jun 11, 2019

While the focus is primarily on Billy, Mary makes a bold move in revealing their secret to their foster parents, Pedro and Eugene continue to struggle in the Gamelands, and the comic also briefly showcases a battle between Black Adam and Sivana, with the doctor wiping the floor with the wizard‘s first champion. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Shazam! (2018) #7

Oct 1, 2019

Jumping back into the fray, Billy ends up in the Darklands which seems appropriately named and likely where the family may gather together to face their next test. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Shazam! (2018) #9

Jan 7, 2020

Along with finally offering the full Marvel Family (no, I'm not calling them the Shazam Family), the comic also gives us Black Adam and the Seven Deadly Sins and characters from Oz, although the core on the issue has more to deal with Billy and his choices than a fight against such foes or new faces. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Shazam! (2018) #12

Jun 17, 2020

The Scarecrow is a clever choice for a Bat-villain to throw up against Earth's Mightiest Mortal as his fear gas is capable of bringing any hero's attack to a halt, even that of the Big Red Cheese.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Shazam! (2018) #13

Jul 30, 2020

SHAZAM! #13 provides quite a bit as Billy is bested, but still smart enough to find a new way to fight back against Mr. Mind as he forces the worm to pick on someone his own size. As for the villain on the horizon, I will be curious what a Captain Marvel vs. Superboy Prime fight might look like.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Shazam! (2018) #13

Jul 30, 2020

SHAZAM! #13 provides quite a bit as Billy is bested, but still smart enough to find a new way to fight back against Mr. Mind as he forces the worm to pick on someone his own size. As for the villain on the horizon, I will be curious what a Captain Marvel vs. Superboy Prime fight might look like.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Shazam! (2018) #14

Sep 14, 2020

In some ways the issue feels a bit rushed, but also has an extended epilogue resulting in inconsistent pacing. Still, Superboy-Prime is back in the DCU as a potential toy for writers to enjoy as a foil for several characters (perhaps Young Justice?) in the years to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Shazam! (2023) #1

May 8, 2023

The opening issue catches up on Billy's life, offers some heroic moments for the Captain (including rescuing a lost young alien dinosaur and having tea with his parents). We get Freddy, and the reminder that most of his foster siblings are still without their powers. And even Tawky Tawny makes an appearance (but still no Hoppy). All that and the comic ends with some apparently godly intervention to teach Billy a lesson, one that is likely to have recursions for Fawcett City‘s favorite son.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Shazam! (2023) #2

Jun 20, 2023

While Billy isn't aware of just what is really going on, Freddy does a little snooping on his own which allows him to blunder in on the truth and into trouble of his own perhaps laying a trail for Billy to ultimately discover the truth. The comic, in my favorite part, also features a follow-up to Captain Marvel's help of space-going dinosaurs when a dino-lawyer drops by with plenty of paperwork for the hero to deal with.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Shazam! (2023) #3

Sep 13, 2023

After being captured at the Rock of Eternity, we also find out that the gods have plans to use Freddy to better spy on their progress in turning the Captain into something more befitting their name. Our hero's journey to the moon, which I half-expected to be a snipe hunt meant to teach our Captain some humility, sets up his next challenge against Garguax on the face of the moon.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Shazam! (2023) #4

Oct 10, 2023

This comic continues to be delightfully bonkers and I'm totally into it.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Shazam!: Lightning Strikes (2020) #1

Jul 21, 2020

There's some nice action here along with some kid-friendly banter. Even if the story misses the point of Billy becoming a bully when publicly shaming Esposito, I don't think many are going to feel too sorry for the character who redeems himself by the end. While I'm a much bigger fan of the more classic version of the character of Captain Marvel, fans of the more modern take on Shazam may enjoy this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
She-Hulk (2014) #1

Feb 22, 2014

Although I think it goes too far, the automated levels Stark leaves between himself and any legal problems (even those brought to him by friends) is humorous as things get more complicated and further out of hand before She-Hulk goes into smash mode to get his attention. Overall a solid first issue (even if I'm not sold on the art of Javier Pulido that appears to be aping Mike Allred‘s art on FF). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
She-Hulk (2014) #2

Mar 17, 2014

Although things don't exactly go smoothly, the much-needed victory gives She-Hulk exactly what she needed as the misadventures of the lawyering super-hero continue. And by the end of the issue our heroine has her first new client: the son of Victor von Doom. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
She-Hulk (2014) #3

Apr 9, 2014

Offering the same mix of action and courtroom drama, along with a good supply of both humor and action, She-Hulk #3 shows off Jennifer Walters' impressive abilities although the day is far from won when Kristoff's father shows up forcing an early end to the proceedings. I may still not be 100% sold on the the art of Javier Pulido, but there's enough here to bring me back to see where the story goes from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
She-Hulk (2014) #4

May 25, 2014

With everything else more or less wrapped up, the comic turns its attention to the mysterious Blue File teased in the first issue as She-Hulk returns home and asks for the help of both Angie Huang and Hellcat to get to the truth of a forgotten lawsuit involving herself and several heroes and super-villains. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
She-Hulk (2014) #5

Jun 21, 2014

Pulido's style doesn't work for me here, particularly in the big fight between Hellcat and Tigra, but the issue does provide a few fun such as the Shocker's misconception about just how many Thors there are in the Marvel Universe. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
She-Hulk (2014) #6

Jul 21, 2014

I was less-than-thrilled with switch to Ronald Wimberly's art beginning last issue, but the Blue File storyline offered an intriguing mystery I wanted to see through. Since that isn't going to happen any time soon, and the art is even more jarring this month, I'm sad to say I'm probably done with the title. I think Charles Soule has introduced several intriguing ideas for the new series including Jennifer's Walters' unorthodox staff and offices catering to super-human characters, but despite my appreciation of the character there's simply not enough here to bring me back month after month. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
She-Hulks #4

Feb 9, 2011

If you haven't been reading it there's no reason to pick it up. If you have you probably enjoy the character of Lyra more than me (or at least care enough to remember who she is). Or maybe I'm just Hulked out from all the Hulksanity that's been running wild over the Marvel Universe the past few months (years?). Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Sheena #8

Apr 27, 2018

Sheena #8 is pretty standard stuff, while pretty light on the action. Although the final panel does suggest that things are about to pick up. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Sherlock Holmes (2023) #1

Oct 2, 2023

It's certainly weird, and I don't think all the pieces work, but I will say the oversized comic isn't boring.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Silk #6

Aug 30, 2015

There's plenty of action here, including a short throwdown between Black Cat and Silk, along with a cameo from your friendly neighboorhood Spider-Man, but there's nothing in this issue that suggests I've been missing much by mostly ignoring Cindy Moon's adventures so far. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Silk (2021) #2

May 4, 2021

We're given more information than Cindy, who is still searching to prove a connection between the company and the gang killings. It's also not yet clear just how the cat demon fits in or what its ultimate goal/price for helping Ishii's takeover may be.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Silk (2022) #1

Jan 24, 2022

Much of what fans have come to expect in early Silk runs is still present here including Cindy's internal monologue and narration, her dual jobs as an online journalist and super-hero (including taking down some dimwitted robbers), and keeping up with her therapy appointments in a less than full social calendar. As to what was awakened in the museum, it can't be anything good. Looks like Cindy's dance card just filled up.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Silk (2022) #4

May 9, 2022

That said, Silk #4 isn't all gloom and doom. In fact it has what must be one of the most unexpected Marvel team-ups as all time as the decrepit Silk is driven into battle by none other than J. Jonah Jameson. Talk about a weirdly perfect team-up that would make Spider-Man's head explode. Now if they only had a plan.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Silk (2023) #1

May 23, 2023

While I enjoyed the noir touches, with a random bit of monster fighting thrown in, the twist didn't do all that much for me as I was expected some kind of multiverse angle to explain a different version of Cindy Moon (and one I'd spend more time with). I'm not sure there's enough here to bring me back every month, especially realizing they'll likely just relaunch the comic in another year or so.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Silver Surfer (2014) #1

Apr 4, 2014

I'm always a bit hesitant to accept a brand-new character like Eve as hugely important to someone like the Surfer and unsure about the dynamic between the two (especially as they haven't even met yet). It appears as if the comic may be setting up Doctor/Companion-style relationship (which, again, would be an entirely new place to take the character). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Silver Surfer (2014) #2

May 5, 2014

Speaking of wishes, Dawn's wish is underscored for the second straight issue as it both saves the Surfer from the Never Queen's wrath and further links them going forward. I'm far from sold on Dawn, but so far I'm enjoying Slott's take on the character – except for his bizarre misconception that the Surfer is human under the adamantium skin which he can remove at will (seriously WTF?). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Silver Surfer (2014) #3

Jun 27, 2014

Hopefully Slott will pull back a bit on the oversell of Dawn and simply allow her to accompany and enjoy the adventures the Surfer can provide while providing a character to explain various parts of the Surfer's existence such as the Power Cosmic. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
2
Silver Surfer (2014) #4

Jul 24, 2014

And on attempting to leave our hero finds himself trapped inside the barrier long since removed by Galactus meaning the most interesting aspect not toyed with in Slott's version of the character (his limitless ability to travel across all of space) has been removed along with his dignity and nobility. Kill me now.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Silver Surfer: Black #1

Jun 19, 2019

Silver Surfer: Black #1 doesn't quite sell me on the concept of the mini-series, but it does layout a new challenge for our hero to survive his new reality (which appears to be eating away at him) and return to soar the stars once more. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Silver Surfer: Black #2

Jul 27, 2019

As we saw in the first issue, further use of the power cosmic continues to effect our hero. By the end of the second issue, the Sivler Sufer's arm is completely enveloped in the black. How can he defeat Knull, and escape, without succumbing to the darkness slowly enveloping him? For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Silver Surfer: Black #3

Aug 27, 2019

Over the first three issues the comic has alluded to the Surfer being haunted by his past which fate has now opened up before him in delivering the unborn Galactus and suggesting that Norrin Radd may be as much responsible for Galactus' birth as Galactus for creating the Silver Surfer. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Sins of Sinister (2023) #1

Jan 30, 2023

Fans of Sinister may have some fun here with all the villain's monologuing but I'll admit to being a bit lost (and not caring all that much to try and figure out what the point of this ultimately might be). Although the crossover promises an epic story spanning a thousand years, none of the comics cross over outside of the X-Men comics into the wider Marvel Universe to any major titles. So despite the appearance of some Avengers here, I'd guess the entire episode will be largely ignored by the rest of the Marvel Universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Six Gun Gorilla #1

Aug 31, 2013

The comic is more dystopian and less whimsical than I expected from the title. The world writer Simon Spurrier and artist Jeff Stokely throw is into takes awhile to get used to (and I could have done without the number of oddball sci-fi terms thrown in). I'm not sure it's a comic that I'll stick with it, but it's certainly worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Skyward (2018) #1

Apr 24, 2018

Writer Joe Henderson and artist Lee Garbett offer up an interesting premise for the new Image series. An untethered future overs unique challenges for our protagonist. In a single issue they set-up the world, give us some insight into how reckless (yet resourceful) Willa can be, and foreshadow the end goal. Can Willa's father really save the world? (And does he hold some responsibility for what happened?) Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Sledgehammer '44 #1

Mar 22, 2013

I know Dark Horse, and Magnola in particular, like these two and three-issue mini-series, but I'm not sure the comic publisher might not have been better off teasing this and then releasing the whole story in a single old school double-sized issue to complete the nostalgic feel of the comic. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Smallville: Alien #1

Dec 12, 2013

Although the issue didn't wow me, and I have mixed feelings about the art by Edgar Salazar, there's enough here to tempt me to poke around other parts of the Smallville universe and see if Miller can do what the New 52 Superman titles so far have struggled to accomplish " make me care about the Big Blue Boy Scout again. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Smallville: Alien #2

Jan 18, 2014

The Gotham storyline offers writer Bryan Miller and artist Edgar Salazar a chance to show off the Smallville version of the Batcave to Chloe and Lois and tease us with the possibility of a certain Mr. Dick Grayson being introduced into the series in the near future. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Smallville: Alien #3

Feb 19, 2014

Clark and Lex finally catch up with the Monitor (for all the good it does them) leaving that thread on a cliffhanger suggesting Lex Luthor might re-discover Superman's secret (but I wouldn't bet on it just yet). The Batman story also gets an unusual ending with the reveal of a Bat-Joker from another world who will no doubt cause trouble for Smallville's version of the Dynamic Duo in the next issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Smallville: Alien #4

Mar 18, 2014

The ease of which Superman beats the Monitor here took me a little by surprise (isn't this the same guy who was mopping the floor with the Man of Steel just last issue?), but Smallville Season Eleven: Alien #4 ties up all the loose ends (including quite a bit of epilogue involving Bruce finally agreeing to join the JLA), and even gives us a little of Lex being Lex (causing tomorrow's trouble). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Smallville: Chaos #1

Aug 19, 2014

With Lex throwing a wrench into Ted Kord and Michael Holt's new super collider for his own ends to explore the existence of the bleed, Superman and Lois find themselves pulled into a depressing world where humanity is at the mercy of a Manhunter army. Back home, Superman's quick takedown of one man possessed by the mysterious space gem isn't quite finished as several become infected by the shattered gem allowing Eclipso to rise in a world without Superman. Better hurry home boy scout. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Smallville: Chaos #2

Sep 16, 2014

The main takeaway from Smallville Season Eleven: Chaos #2 seems to be that no matter what Earth Superman may find himself living on, his dead computerized father is still a giant jerk. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Smallville: Continuity #1

Dec 31, 2014

The bleak situation should allow the comic to bring back a wide assortment of characters to fight against the end of their universe. Not only do we get the regular Smallville cast but Batman, Nightwing, Zatanna, Wonder Woman, Supergirl, and others all make an appearance here as Superman must lead his friends into war. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Smallville: Lantern #1

Apr 21, 2014

Along with offering a cameo from John Stewart, who as the Earths' current GL appears to have been tapped to showing Superman the ropes, and a brief history of Green Lanterns in the Smallville Universe, the opening issue to the latest Smallville mini-series also foreshadows looming problems with the Manhunters who are awoken as well on discovering a new Lantern has been chosen. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Smallville: Lantern #2

May 20, 2014

The choice to have the Manhunters powered by yellow rings is an interesting one which offers Parallax the opportunity to send out rings for ring bearers of his own which will likely set-up an all-out ring slingin' war in the latest mini-series remaining two issues. There's also a B-story involving Prometheus who I'm really hoping this version of Ollie won't have to kill in the name of "justice." Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Smallville: Lantern #3

Jun 16, 2014

Who will wear the Green Lantern ring of New Krypton? If Parallax is defeated and the Guardians are freed does that mean other possible victims (such as Hal Jordan?) may make an appearance as well. And what might happen if Lex Luthor gets his hands on one of those yellow power rings? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Smallville: Lantern #4

Jul 18, 2014

The final issue wraps up the various threads of the mini-series, although it does have to rely on a giant space whale fighting a giant space worm which began to make my eyes glaze over (as it did when Geoff Johns introduced the various space entities in charge of the color spectrum). Despite being impaled by a yellow-ring construct Superman comes out unharmed, and with the reboot of both Yellow and Green Lanterns rings he also says farewell to the responsibility of being a member of the Corps. Although Lex doesn't actually get his hand on a ring he does learn the valuable lesson on the usefulness of allies which means we may see a legion or secret society in Smallville's not-too-distant future. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Snake Eyes #4

Aug 30, 2011

The issue ends with a conversation between Snake Eyes and Scarlett to end the issue which gives us some clues as to Snake Eyes next “outside the box” assignment. I'm a little unsure of the final page's reveal, but the rest of the comic is strong enough I'll wait to see just what the Sword of Genghis Khan's role in the upcoming story might be. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Snake Eyes #5

Oct 1, 2011

Chuck Dixon gives us a solid issue that sets up a new story arc for Snake Eyes. It might not be as strong as my favorite JOE trapped in a mountains surrounded by Cobra agents trying to kill him, but I've got a feeling things should begin to pick back up next issue (especially once we learn how the disease can psychologically effect those infected). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Snake Eyes #6

Oct 23, 2011

After a bit of a transition issue last month things start to pick up again with the hunt for Vargas and the cure (even if I do still miss Agent Helix and Snake's team from the last story arc). Now we just have to wait and see if Snake Eyes can get his hands on the antidote before everyone infected, including Duke, succumbs to the madness. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Snake Eyes #7

Nov 19, 2011

There are some nice character moments, and even if more of the action suggested rather than on-panel this time around it looks like next issue should ramp things back up again. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Snake Eyes #8

Dec 18, 2011

Eventually too far outnumbered the trio resort to a little trickery to make it out alive, and get Duke back home to recuperate once a cure has been discovered. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Snake Eyes #9

Jan 15, 2012

The final panel shows us Storm Shadow (YES!), will be joining the storyline possibly as soon as next issue. Although there wasn't quite enough here to get me to check out the rest of “Cobra Command” (at least not yet), once again writer Chuck Dixon gives us a Snake Eyes comic that's an awful lot of fun. And arist Alex Cal doesn't miss a beat stepping in for Casey Maloney.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Snake Eyes #10

Feb 12, 2012

There's plenty of ninja action here and more than a little foreshadowing that we're going to get a major throwdown between Snake Eyes and Storm Shadow before “Cobra Command” ends. And we've still got plenty of unanswered questions as to what the new Cobra Commander is really after and what plans he has for the dirty nuclear bombs Destro is seen unloading in the comic's final panel. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Snake Eyes #11

Mar 24, 2012

Snake Eyes turn is certainly of interest, and you'd have to assume the pair (for however long they can co-exist) will be a huge threat to COBRA and their new commander. Although unexpected it does give Snake Eyes a very real opportunity to take down the terrorist organization who the JOE's couldn't stop from nuking an entire country. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Snake Eyes #12

May 1, 2012

Next month gives us a new beginning as the title become Snake Eyes and Storm Shadow and the pair go after their first target – Zartan. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Snake Eyes And Storm Shadow #13

Jun 4, 2012

The issue gives us a good beginning to the unlikely pairing of the old rivals with a pair of great covers, one showcasing each character. With Snake Eyes cut-off from the rest of the world we'll see how long he can keep his dangerous game going, or if he eventually falls into the trap of rejoining the clan for real. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Snake Eyes And Storm Shadow #14

Jun 27, 2012

We get another glimpse at Snake Eyes and Storm Shadow's lives as young pupils of Arashikage as well Snake Eyes knocking out Rika and sending a coded message to Helix about Zartan. We'll have to see how long the mute ninja can keep playing both sides before someone figures out what's really going on. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Snake Eyes And Storm Shadow #15

Jul 28, 2012

Balanced against the ongoing story are more flashbacks to Storm Shadow and Snake Eyes days as children in the clan as we are reminded again that although he has all the necessary skill, Snake Eyes doesn't have the right temperament for a ninja. And the issue gives us the first appearance of the Dreadnoks who find the wounded Zartan at the plane's crash site. I can't wait until next month! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Snake Eyes And Storm Shadow #16

Sep 1, 2012

Another strong issue full of action and flashbacks to Snake Eyes younger days with the clan. Although I'm a little sad to see Rika leave so soon, her death certainly puts several other story elements in play, meaning the next few months should be very interesting. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Snake Eyes And Storm Shadow #17

Sep 30, 2012

With the war between Cobra and the Arashikage heating up, the choices Snake Eyes makes further blur the lines between right and wrong. Next month turns up the flames as Snake Eyes' old G.I. JOE teammates, realizing their pal is alive and has gone back to the ninja who trained him, get into the action as well as the crossover “Target: Snake Eyes” begins. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Snake Eyes And Storm Shadow #18

Oct 24, 2012

Meanwhile, Helix continues on her own path to find Snake Eyes which leads her to a meeting with the Hard Master. And Serpentor discovers he has underestimated the Soft Master and finds the captor has become the prey. However, the ninja master offers the cult leader a partnership to take down their mutual enemy – Snake Eyes. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Snake Eyes And Storm Shadow #19

Nov 24, 2012

Another strong issue that sets up a possible Snake Eyes/Storm Shadow showdown in the next issue of G.I. JOE or perhaps another temporary reliance as the ninja clan will need all the help it can get to survive Cobra‘s latest attempt to destroy them. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Snake Eyes And Storm Shadow #20

Dec 23, 2012

The fallout leaves the JOEs minus one aircraft carrier and another apparent “death” for our title character. It also, in an interesting choice by writer Chuck Dixon, gives Storm Shadow the smallest semblance of victory. With the crossover now finished and Snake Eyes once again missing in action, it will be interesting to see what new direction the comic takes next month as it appears the comic will continue to give both characters title credit. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Snake Eyes And Storm Shadow #21

Feb 11, 2013

Although given recent events there is plenty for the student and teacher to hash out, the comic needs no words to tell the story. Dixon even leaves us with a nice final surprise from our other title character who doesn't make an appearance here but whose absence is felt in every panel. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Snake Eyes: Deadgame (2020) #1

Jul 23, 2020

Despite my love for the character, and the strong possibility that Storm Shadow will be involved as the mini-series continues, I can't see myself staying with this comic for very long.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Snake Eyes: Deadgame (2020) #2

Oct 15, 2020

The comic ends with Snake Eyes captured and at the mercy of Kirigun who has yet to be impressed by his would-be adversary. We also get a cameo from the character I've been waiting for as Storm Shadow shows up. I'm not sure if he'll bring any answers to tie Snake Eyes' past and the Arashikage back to current events, but at least he can look cool in this crazy ass comic, or at least as cool as Liefeld can draw him.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Sonic The Hedgehog (2018): Halloween Special

Oct 18, 2023

Our intrepid team eventually find the monster in the woods only to discover it's a group of kids playing a prank and stealing the candy for themselves. After a brief altercation, our heroes explain to the kids their mistake giving the comic a nice message about sharing before the entire group comes together to give the candy back to the local children. Sonic and Tails seem oddly forced into a story here, almost as an afterthought, but otherwise Sonic the Hedgehog: Halloween Special is a fun issue fit for all ages.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Sonjaversal (2021) #1

Feb 9, 2021

Although the set-up is a bit weird, the god is actually a Sonja too (or is she just a tool for the god)?, the idea should provide plenty of action for the series and Red Sonja will battle doppelgangers of herself from across time and dimensions. First up is Orange Sonja, part of a technological future armed with a gun and spending days battling cyber creatures. We also see glimpses of Green Sonja and Purple Sonja and mention of a Pantheon. However, we've entered the tale midway through, and Orange Sonja discovers killing the She-Devil with a Sword is easier said than done – even for a Sonja.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Sonjaversal (2021) #2

Mar 15, 2021

Sonjaversal #2 ends with several Sonjas, including Red Sonja, all walking through a portal to the same location which seems to suggest a battle royal is just around the corner (even if answers are not).

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Space Usagi (2023): Yokai Hunter #1

Oct 18, 2023

The action from the first-half of the issue is fast and furious culminating with Usagi's faceoff with Jei before a twist revealing the entire story is being read by one of Usagi's descendants in the far future working both provide a classic tale and create a bridge for the new series of adventures in the far future for Usagi's descendants. Plus, how adorable is that variant cover from Agnes Garbowska!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Space Usagi (2023): Death and Honor #1

Dec 20, 2023

Both new and old fans should get a kick out of the issue which is notable for allowing Stan Sakai to draw a futuristic version of the character in unusual settings (and the Agnes Garbowska variant cover is pretty damn cool as well).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Spawn: Spawn's Universe #1

Jun 28, 2021

Spawn's Universe #1 is big, brash, and loud. In other words, it's a Spawn comic. It also offers a turning point for a character who has been around since the beginning. No doubt loyal Spawn readers will get more out of it than I did.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Spider-Gwen #2

Mar 16, 2015

Other than Gwen (and the hallucinatory pig) the only variation of a well-known character that has caught my eye is that of crime lawyer Matt Murdock who is going to have to be given a much larger role to keep my interest (especially if the end of Gwen's concussion means farewell to Spider-Ham). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Spider-Gwen: Ghost-Spider (2018) #1

Oct 26, 2018

The writing from Seanan McGuire, especially Gwen's internal monologue, is fun and breezy and reminds me of old school Spider-Man. Rosi Kmpe's art matches the writing and the spirit of the character.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Spider-Gwen: Ghost-Spider (2018) #8

May 9, 2019

Those who, like me, have missed the past few issues of the comic will find a nice place to jump on. Seanan McGuire provides just the right amount of awkward banter to balance the tough situations Gwen keeps walking into. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Spider-Gwen: Ghost-Spider (2018) #9

Jun 18, 2019

Artist Takeshi Miyazawa makes good use of the sharp differences in the characters' designs, focusing on the imposing size of Man-Wolf versus the speed, strength, and agility of our hero. The pair trade verbal barbs, but despite Gwen's rage she doesn't go too far in taking the monster down. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Spider-Gwen: Ghost-Spider (2018) #10

Jul 16, 2019

I'm sad to see the series come to a close, though not before Gwen chooses a new super-hero name and scarfs down a few hot dogs, but I'm happy to see her adventures will be continuing in the new series. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Spider-Gwen: Gwenverse (2022) #1

Mar 15, 2022

Looking forward, it appears the series will be an interlocked number of What If…? style stories eventually rolled into one. Spider-Gwen: Gwenverse #1 offers a wonky set-up to allow Tim Seeley and Jodi Nishijima to play with any version of Gwen they can think up while Gwen is forced to fight and work with aspects of her own personality writ large. Is it worth $5 a pop? Maybe, eventually, for die-hard Gwen fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Spider-Gwen: Shadow Clones (2023) #1

Mar 8, 2023

Interesting idea mixing classic Spidey villains and cloning themes in a new way, with mixed results and that odd tonal shift which distracts from the narrative.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Spider-Gwen: Smash (2023) #1

Dec 18, 2023

After so much multiverse hopping, it's interesting to see Gwen struggle to settle back down while questioning if home is still really home any more.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Spider-Ham (2019) #1

Jan 14, 2020

Peter Poker, the Spectacular Spider-Ham #1 ends with the egotist taking the place of the other heroes and jumping universes to hunt down a villain across space and time. His first stop, apparently, is Mary Jane's bedroom? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Spider-Man (2019) #1

Sep 25, 2019

With Miles, Peter, Gwen, Ben, Kaine, and countless other web-heroes swinging around New York does Marvel really need another Spider-Man? No, and even if it did I doubt this is the one fans would ask for. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Spider-Woman (2023) #1

Dec 7, 2023

That's quite a bit of baggage for a series to launch with, but Spider-Woman #1 works well enough to garner interest.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Spine-Tingling Spider-Man (2023) #1

Oct 23, 2023

While I enjoyed the first few panels, the rest of the comic isn't my cup of tea. From that point on the comic devolves into a frightened Peter running for his life searching for answers after getting a mysterious text only leading him into more trouble.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Trek: Boldly Go #1

Oct 25, 2016

The introduction of the Borg so early in the revamped continuity certainly leads to some serious problems for Starfleet. A century later, with more advanced technology, Starfleet could barely survive encounters with the cybernetic lifeforms. What hope does Kirk and his generation have? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Trek: Deep Space Nine - Too Long a Sacrifice #1

Jul 27, 2020

I enjoyed the issue, and seeing these characters used in a new story, although I have mixed feelings of the art of Greg Scott which seems to fit the look of Odo better than some of the other characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2013) #1

Jan 14, 2013

We also get an appearance by Darth Vader, haunted by his failure at Yavin. Reassigned by the Emperor, the Dark Lord of the Sith should have plenty of opportunities to try and make up for his mistakes and begin his search for young Skyalker. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars (2013) #2

Feb 22, 2013

Although we don't get an appearance by Darth Vader here we do get a short scene with Col. Bircher taking over command of the Star Destroyer Devastator to hunt down and kill as many Rebels as possible as the Dark Lord of the Sith finds himself reassigned on a special mission for the Emperor. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars (2013) #3

Mar 18, 2013

Darth Vader arrives at his new assignment, overseeing the Empire's new secret battle station high above the forest moon of Endor: the second Death Star whose construction appears to have been well under way before the Rebellion's destruction of the original Death Star. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars (2013) #4

Apr 16, 2013

Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2013) #5

May 15, 2013

With the focus on the other characters, Luke and Prithi‘s storyline gets only a couple of pages, as does that of the Dark Lord of the Sith who makes a decision concerning the troubling identity of the young man who destroyed the first Death Star and Vader‘s current assignment overseeing the new Death Star. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2013) #6

Jun 17, 2013

With Han Solo stuck on Coruscant and out of contact, and a pissed-off Col. Bircher wanting revenge for his lost Star Destroyer, it becomes even more necessary for the rag-tag fleet to find the mole. Sadly, it appears the group will move forward without Prithi who leaves after witnessing the depths of Luke's feelings for Leia. I like the character, and I'm hoping we'll continue to see more of her in the months to come. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2013) #7

Jul 16, 2013

Star Wars #7 also gives us Han and Chewie trying to make it out of Coruscant alive while been tracked by Boba Fett and more of Darth Vader‘s quasi-disciple Birra Seah who the Emperor is not pleased to see in command of the second Death Star during a surprise visit. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2013) #8

Aug 21, 2013

Star Wars #8 gives us separate stories involving all three of the big name characters as well offering readers appearances by Bossk, Boba Fett, and Darth Vader. Fans should feel right at home. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2013) #9

Sep 19, 2013

Making Tag Ragaren a sympathetic character is a nice twist for the issue, although I could have done with a little less of Leia's tale and more of an equal focus on Luke slicing through Stormtroopers with his lightsaber and Han and Chewie continuing to try and evade a some very persistent bounty hunters and make it off the Imperial homeworld in one piece. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2013) #10

Oct 15, 2013

Prithi may not be able to wait long enough to help her friends escape, but her quick thinking alerts the Rebel Fleet to the impending Imperial attack led by the overconfident Bircher which just may be the key to reuniting the two pilots with their friends. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2013) #11

Nov 20, 2013

Fans of space battles, X-Wings, and Interceptors should enjoy this issue as much of it has to deal with in space that our main characters (not surprisingly) manage to survive. With all but Han Solo's story wrapping up it will be interesting to see what direction the series takes from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars (2013) #12

Dec 22, 2013

As to Leia's pronouncement of her plans to wed and get an entire planet for the Rebellion as a dowry, while still having time to get into some sexually-tense moments with Han, we'll have to see what circumstances occur to throw a wrench into the proceedings and leave Leia free, years later, to marry a certain scruffy-looking nerfhereder. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Star Wars (2013) #13

Jan 11, 2014

Given the number of titles in Marvel's stable I can't see any Star Wars title getting the kind of focus Dark Horse has given them since acquiring the rights in 1991. Although the company has put quite a bit of mediocre comics under the brand I've been thoroughly enjoying this series and will be sad to see it come to a premature end. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Star Wars (2013) #14

Feb 16, 2014

I'm sorry to see what has been the best arc of the series so far come to and end. Although Nanda survives her two days with the most dangerous man in the known universe, and even gets what was promised to her, we see how the emotional scars left from the five days will last a lifetime. Best of the Week.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Star Wars (2013) #15

Mar 29, 2014

We don't get much in the way of action here, other than Luke's reckless flying that eventually gets him grounded by Wedge, but the comic doesn't end before we get a brief hint of the darker intentions of the royal house of Arrochar suggesting how the storyline may play out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2013) #16

Apr 17, 2014

Continuing to foreshadow the betrayal of Leia's betrothed and Arrochar, the latest issue also gives us a glimpse at an Imperial Probe Droid making it a good bet that the Empire knows exactly where the leaders of the Rebel Alliance are to be found. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2013) #17

May 20, 2014

The return of Obi-Wan‘s guidance helps save Luke's life and prepare him for the deception to come, but I wonder home much of Ben's ghostly wisdom the comic should and/or will use going forward as Luke's own instincts should have likely warned him of the danger (even with his only limited understanding of the Force). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2013) #18

Jun 17, 2014

Star Wars #18 offers a satisfactory ending to the marriage that might have been while fueling Vader's rage and offering a nod to technology the Rebels would make later uses of on Hoth in The Empire Strikes Back. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars (2013) #19

Aug 2, 2014

Much like Boom Studio's terrific Darkwing Duck series, another Disney property doing well is forced to end to be gobbled up by Marvel. No doubt Marvel will be more interested in putting out a Star Wars comic, but will they find a creative team as invested in these characters? I have my doubts. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars (2013) #20

Aug 18, 2014

Star Wars #20 works as a final issue giving each of the core members their own moments to shine while teasing us on adventures we sadly won't be able to see continue as the rights return to Marvel Comics (who, after what we've seen here, have some big shoes to fill). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2014) #1

Jan 26, 2015

Star Wars #1 is a solid first issue that didn't wow me and certainly left me with some concerns. It's clear Aaron struggled with trying to get the entire group their own moments rather than allow them to happen naturally in the story foreshadowing the rather unbelievable concept of C-3P0 action star. The characters are familiar but removing nostalgia from the equation they aren't yet fully-formed in this universe quite yet. The writing is solid, but why blow your wad so early and force a Luke/Vader confrontation in the very first issue?! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars (2014) #3

Mar 19, 2015

The storyline also explores Luke's need to prove himself worthy of a father's legacy and Kenobi's teaching while still not understanding how to grow into the Jedi is destined to become which leads him to taking dangerous risks to protect his friends and complete their mission despite the Dark Lord of the Sith standing in his way. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2014) #6

Jun 11, 2015

The issue's B-story has wide consequences as Han and Leia run into Han Solo's ex-wife while running from an Imperial patrol in the Outer Rim. Just what exactly Sana Solo‘s role will be going forward is unclear but her introduction begins a likely wide divergence between the decades of Star Wars comics and novels of the past 25 years. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars (2014) #7

Aug 8, 2015

Star Wars #7 offers an unexpected glimpse into the in-between years of Obi-Wan. The story, and others like it may have made a better separate mini-series, but fans of the character can still enjoy this single look back. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars (2014) #10

Oct 14, 2015

On the plus side Chewie and C-3PO's adventures are quite entertaining, I like the design of Sana's ship, and Star Wars #10 does offer Star Wars nerds a cameo from another bounty hunter foreshadowing more trouble for Solo before this arc comes to a close. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2014) #13

Dec 22, 2015

This issue marks the halfway point of the six-issue crossover arc. Not surprisingly we get far more of Han and Luke than we do of Darth Vader. That said, the Dark Lord of the Sith makes a memorable appearance at the end of the issue coming across a familiar face and setting up the next story in the arc. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars (2014) #17

Apr 5, 2016

Although it earns them the cover, Luke and Han's back-up story, while quite amusing and providing all of the comic's laughs, is given far less attention than Leia's latest precarious position. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2014) #18

May 5, 2016

Star Wars #18 offers plenty of action as the three women fight their way through countless robots to the prison control room. There's a nice nod to fans as well in that by the time they make it there C-3P0 and R2-D2 have things well in hand. With the issue more about survival than answers, we'll have to wait at least another issue for the reveal of who is behind the attack on the prison, what his true motivations are, and how his past is tied to that of Leia. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars (2014) #21

Jul 27, 2016

Certainly a big perspective shift given the focus of the series first twenty issues, Star Wars #21 offers a different kind of Star Wars story beginning here with the first issue of the new three-part arc. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars (2014) #22

Aug 31, 2016

Classic Star Wars fans should have fun with this one getting to see Luke, Leia, and Han Solo (along with Chewbacca, of course) all working together. Throw in a space battle, Rebel subterfuge, and a heist storyline (something I'm always on-board with) and you've got an enjoyable single issue which you wouldn't necessarily have to read the rest of the arc to fully enjoy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars (2014) #23

Oct 4, 2016

The current arc began focusing on Sgt. Kreel and his elite Stormtrooper squadron. The end of this issue brings events full circle as a deadly distraction provides Kreel and his men entry to the Star Destroyer to begin their mission to take back the Imperial property. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars (2014) #24

Nov 1, 2016

Plenty of action here include a lightsaber battle between Luke and Kreel and multiple battles between the Rebels and Stromtroopers all over the ship, one of which nearly gets Sana sucked out an airlock. Things aren't looking good for our heroes (but never tell them the odds). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars (2014) #25

Nov 30, 2016

While Kreel and his men fail the Dark Lord of the Sith, something few do and live to tell the tale, the latest issue of Marvel's Star Wars series doesn't completely shut the door on this storyline as Scar Squadron is able to salvage a small victory from their defeat by taking a hostage from the doomed Star Destroyer, one that Vader knows all too well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars (2014) #30

Apr 12, 2017

The comic turns on an odd note, which I'm not sure is properly set-up or executed by writer Jason Aaron leaving an unsatisfying conclusion to the arc. Other than that, the storyline proves an interesting way to tie three generations of Jedi together in a single tale. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars (2014) #34

Aug 17, 2017

While the comic certainly shows off the skill-set of Sana, it does make you wonder how she's managed to stay alive so long double-crossing every one she comes across and making enemies wherever she finds them. Lando's involvement offers some fun back-and-forth between the pair, but when you boil the story down it's obvious he's not really needed for Sana's plan. Still, it was fun to see the scoundrel again, and the pair do make for a fun team-up. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars (2014) #37

Oct 10, 2017

While it will no doubt be fun to see Kreel and his men versus Star Wars most-famous characters, the foreshadowed conflict between Luke and his friends and Kreel is likely to also signify the end of the comic's break-out original characters. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars (2014) #50

Jul 13, 2018

Betrayed, outgunned, and with their backs against the wall, it will be interesting to see how the core characters make it out of Vader's trap as we're likely to see lots of action in the issues to come (if the Rebellion can figure out how to launch its fighters before the Star Destroyers pick them off one-by-one). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2014) #53

Sep 13, 2018

Star Wars #53 offers fancy flying and quick thinking from Luke and a brutal day for the Millennium Falcon and the rest of the Rebel Fleet. Leia' infiltration of the Executor sets up next issue's race against time to find the missing codes and save the Rebellion before Darth Vader catches her and the Imperial Fleet destroys what Rebels remain. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2020) #1

Jan 8, 2020

There's certainly room here prior to the events of The Return of the Jedi for the comic to explore in terms of Luke growing into the Jedi who we'll next see standing in front of Jabba the Hutt and the heroes getting along without the help of a certain scruffy-looking nerf herder. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2020) #2

Feb 6, 2020

As for Luke, his journey looks to be internal as the comic foreshadows a shrouded figure in visions that may hold keys to help unlocking his potential (or a potential threat that needs to be overcome?). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Star Wars (2020) #13

May 20, 2021

There's nothing in the prelude that you'll miss by skipping the issue, just the characters getting into (and then out of) trouble. Just by asking some questions, the group quickly earns the wrong kind of attention (especially after Luke reveals himself to be a Jedi) and soon find themselves running from an entire moon of bounty hunters and killers.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars (2020) #30

Jan 10, 2023

It's not must-read material by any means, but it did pique my interest about where this story might go.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars Adventures #19

Apr 3, 2019

The comic also includes a back-up story in “Tales from Wild Space: The Big March” showcasing the further adventures of cartographer Emil Graf and his crew. Their latest destination offers opens the door about another story about a Battle Droid. Unlike Bats, Q5-7070 wasn't as lucky as after being separated from his unit the droid was forced to fend for himself on a hostile world of alien creatures all wanting to eat or destroy him. Those looking for short Star Wars tales, without jumping into the longer current Marvel Comics arcs, may enjoy themselves in the latest issue of the anthology issue. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars Adventures #22

Jun 11, 2019

The issue also includes another “Tales from Wild Space” with the short but sweet “A Tauntaun Tail” featuring an unlucky Tauntaun picked on by both other Tauntauns and a Wampa before finding a home with the Rebellion. Both stories are fun and keep with the family-friendly nature of the comic, and if you didn't love Tauntauns before just wait until you meet this one. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars Adventures #23

Jul 18, 2019

The back-up story showcases the relationship between Jabba the Hutt and Bib Fortuna and how the gangster learned to appreciate the value in his most dependable employee. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars Adventures #26

Oct 2, 2019

The back-up story, another Tale from Wild Space, features Resistance Pilot Tallissan Lintra helping out a lost pilot following maneuvers with her squadron. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars Adventures #31

Mar 26, 2020

The “Tales From Wild Space” back-up story, “The Lost Stories, Part 2” offers the further adventures of Emil Graf in the Lost Library of Nelgenam while searching for new (or, in this case, old) stories he hasn't heard before. Most of the story features the cartographer running from vicious library droids before running into an even scarier obstacle. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars Adventures (2020) #1

Oct 13, 2020

The issue's back-up story takes place during the Battle of Hoth as we follow Darth Vader searching the Rebel Base on Hoth for Luke Skkywalker. While “Tales of Villainy: Invasion of Echo Base” doesn't add much to the story we already know, it is fun seeing Vader in full power here on the hunt for his son. I also preferred Nick Brokenshire's art to that of Ilias Kyriazis in the main story. Also, I have to say I'm far more intrigued by the idea of backstories being part of “Tales of Villany” than the previous comic's hit-and-miss “Tales from Wild Space.”

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars Adventures (2020) #7

Aug 3, 2021

While not as interesting, “Tales of Villainy” back-up story “The Crimson Corsair and the Crime Lords of the Barren Rim” does offer the first appearance of the space pirate Sidon Ithano in the comic.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars Adventures: Forces of Destiny: Hera #1

Jan 18, 2018

Hera is a good choice for the one-shot. Although Chopper looses a bit of his personality on the printed page, he does provide someone for Hera to interact with in the early pages of the issue before she begins working with the locals and helping them join the hard, but worthy, work of becoming part of the Rebellion. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars Adventures: Return to Vader's Castle: Shadow of Vader's Castle #1

Nov 5, 2020

With an $8 price-tag it's hard to argue that you are getting your money's worth here although some of the art is intriguing ranging from Anakin's time in the castle just after his turn, to a mad scientist's experiments, to the state of the castle following the original trilogy. It's a bit hit-and-miss, but the right audience may find some fun here.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars Adventures: Smuggler's Run #2

Feb 3, 2021

Alec Worley and Ingo Rmling's adaptation of Rucka's young adult novel Smuggler's Run: A Han Solo & Chewbacca Adventure gives us more of Han and Chewie out thinking and outmanuevering both the bounty hunters looking to cash in on the price Jabba put on Han's head and the Imperials led by the driven and vicious Alecia Beck who is outfoxed by Han and forced to let the Rebels escape or turn an entire planet against the Empire. The second-half of the fun adaptation (originally released in German and now translated back to English) delivers gun fights, space battles, and Chewie throwing Han around like a rag doll (don't worry, it's all part of the plan).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars Adventures: The Weapon of a Jedi #1

Jun 2, 2021

With so many different Star Wars comics being published, Star Wars Adventures: The Weapon of A Jedi #1 isn't a must-read. It's also not quite as lighthearted as most of the Star Wars Adventures line. However, it does work as a solid opening to tease what is to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars Tales (2022): Krrsantan #1

Jun 16, 2022

We get two more tales in the collection. The first takes place prior to The Empire Strikes Back, with Leia captured by the Empire and the Wookiee taking on Han Solo and Chewbacca while attempting to earn Darth Vader‘s bounty on Luke. The other offers some backstory to the bounty hunter and a chance to get revenge.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Chewbacca #1

Oct 31, 2015

The issue begins by explaining Zarro and her father's predicament, allowing writer Gerry Duggan and artist Phil Noto set the stage allowing the walking furball to stroll in at his leisure. Although we don't know just what Chewie's secret mission is, I'm interested to see where this detour leads.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Maul #1

Feb 4, 2017

For Maul this means increasingly dangerous hunting expeditions (the comic opens with the Sith Lord killing an entire pack of Rathtars. Pushing the limits of his master's orders, Maul discovers a captured Jedi Padawan ready to be auctioned off to the highest bidder. Maybe his revenge can get an early start after all. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Maul #2

Mar 28, 2017

Aside from the appearance of a pair of familiar faces, Darth Maul #2 gives us more of Maul's inner thoughts as the series leads to his eventual face-to-face confrontation with Kaitis. With nothing between him and his revenge against the Jedi it seems the real fun is about to begin. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Darth Vader #1

Feb 18, 2015

After seeing our protagonist kick butt for several panels we're stuck seeing Vader bow to his master for forgiveness given the failures the Emperor chooses to lay at Vader's feet. Given this encounter, and Vader and the Emperor both keeping secrets from each other, the comic's remaining pages deal with his attempts to find the Millennium Falcon and the young warrior who he does not yet realize is his son as well as figure out just what plans Palpatine is hiding from him. Although it seems like two-steps back from the character's journey in the recent Dark Horse title, Darth Vader #1 is a strong issue fans should enjoy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader #3

Mar 31, 2015

Unless the series is going to be Darth Vader cutting a huge swath through the galaxy leaving dead bodies in his wake (don't get me wrong, that could work), the series needs characters like Aphra to ping conversation and ideas off of. I'm intrigued to see where the comic goes from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader #4

Apr 19, 2015

The comic also foreshadows the end of the pair's relationship which the scientist realizes can only end in her death while pushing the pair towards Vader learning more about who currently has the Emperor‘s favor and setting forth to learn how his new army might change the score. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Darth Vader #8

Aug 18, 2015

The highlight of the comic is the elaborate heist which includes not only stealing from the Imperials but almost completely covering their tracks to make everyone (except the Imperial Command it seems) unaware that a heist even took place. Just when it appeared the Dark Lord of the Sith had put together the perfect private army to continue his own plans the comic introduces the character of Inspector Thanoth who could put everything at risk. With the heist complete, and Thanoth looking over Vader's shoulder for the forseeable future, I'll be curious to see how much of the bounty hunters will see in the coming months and how the adjunct's presence stifles Vader's plans. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader #9

Sep 11, 2015

With nearly all of the comic centered around Vader we don't get much from Aphra, although Darth Vader #9 does tease a new storyline for her as well as she pays handsomely or information she could have otherwise procured in order to find someone who will likely be of interest not only the rogue archaeologist but her new employer as well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader #12

Nov 30, 2015

As for the comic's action, the fight against the Plasma Devils allows the Dark Lord of the Sith to work out some built-up aggression. Not only does he take out the group single handedly he even destroys an escaping Y-Wing by chucking his lightsaber at it in mid-flight. It just goes to prove you don't mess with Darth Vader. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader #13

Dec 17, 2015

The second chapter of Marvel's first Star Wars crossover offers plenty of action from the title's star, a look at a vengeful Leia still reeling from the destruction of Alderaan and her hatred of Vader, and Luke at the mercy of an assassin with the perfect bait to trap a trusting farm boy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader #17

Mar 16, 2016

Darth Vader #17 is a bit of a transitional issue. We do get to see Vader easily dealing with the individual threats on Shu-torum in style (such as using the natural landscape to destroy an attacking cruiser). As to Aphra, the Rebellion can't hope to hide her whereabouts from Vader forever. The question is, what will happen when he learns the truth. Will he abandon his ally or come for her (either for rescue or to permanently tie up a loose ends)? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader #19

Apr 26, 2016

As for Vader, his victory may be short-lived as he learns that Aphra has been found not by his mercenary bounty hunters but by Inspector Thanoth who has a few questions for the Dark Lord of the Sith. It appears Vader's secret plan to finance his own clandestine missions for the Empire may be about to bite him in the ass. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Star Wars: Darth Vader #20

May 18, 2016

Vader's story is truncated here to include a rather lengthy backup story involving Aphra's robots. While I enjoyed Vader's confrontations with both the Emperor and Thanoth, personally I found the backstory to largely be a waste of space leaving me with a mixed reaction to the comic's latest issue. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader #21

Jun 15, 2016

Darth Vader #21 is an action-heavy issue as both Vader and Aphra's storylines contain extended actions sequences. Although Aphra has reason to fear what Vader wants her for, she has no choice to comply. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader #22

Jul 7, 2016

Darth Vader is also beaten in the comic's back-up story (although he is not yet aware of it). With the murderbots Triple-Zero and Beetee fulfilling Vader's command to bring Aphra back their former master, Aphra is able to retake control of her creations and plan yet another improbable escape. Some days it just doesn't pay to be an evil Sith Lord. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader #23

Jul 31, 2016

While offering us our first deep-space lightsaber battle of the series, Darth Vader #23 also finds a use for Aphra and the bounty hunters offering a short subplot involving their search for the Emperor aboard the crippled Star Destroyer. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader #24

Aug 16, 2016

With Cylo reborn into yet another clone his story isn't done just yet as the series heads into it's over-sized final issue next month. The issue should also wrap-up the story arc of Aphra who makes an unexpected move heading into the series' finale. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Darth Vader #25

Oct 20, 2016

Overall Darth Vader has proven a solid comic highlighting one of cinema's best villains. I'm sad to see it end as there are obviously far more stories left to tell. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader Annual #1

Dec 29, 2015

Most annuals aren't worth either the time or cover price, but for fans of the character Darth Vader Annual #1 may well be worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2017) #1

Jun 14, 2017

The previous series was able to keep my interest for most of its run. A younger Vader out to prove himself does allow the comic to tackle different types of storylines. While not sold on all the choices writer Charles Soule makes here, Darth Vader #1 does offer enough to make me come back for at least one more issue. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2017) #2

Mar 19, 2020

Although I'm curious to see how Greg Pak may try and walk a razor's edge to allow the characters to have some closure without revealing all, the nature of the story limits what they can find. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2017) #3

Jul 19, 2017

By the time the two clash the obstacles have done their work and softened up the Sith leading to a victory for the Jedi. The question now becomes is how long with it take for Vader to regroup and climb the mountain again? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2017) #4

Aug 17, 2020

The nostalgic tinge of Vader's movements on Naboo continue here, although they do take a pause during Vader fighting the gigantic creature for his life. As for what he will find inside the tomb, that remains to be seen.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2017) #5

Sep 18, 2017

Unfortunately for the galaxy, after giving up so much to earn his current role, Vader cannot make such a sacrifice. The arc ends, as we expected, with Vader firing his blade for the first time. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2017) #6

Oct 20, 2020

The brutality of the Emperor's attack (leaving Vader crippled once more) is a bit unexpected, as is the mission he leaves Vader to face on his own. That said, I am curious to see just how this the Dark Lord of the Sith manages the challenges set before him and returns to his rightful place terrorizing the galaxy.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2017) #8

Nov 29, 2017

Even a Jedi librarian isn't immune from emotional reactions as we see in the issue's final panels when Jocasta chooses to confront the Inquisitor rather than make her escape foreshadows much more action in issue #9. As for Vader, I'm sure he'll relish the attempt to face off against another Jedi (although we might have to wait an extra month for that confrontation). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2017) #9

Jan 20, 2021

Given the issues with the plot of Rise of Skywalker, I'm not sure doubling-down on ties to the last Star Wars movie is the best choice. However, pointing the arc in that direction does offer the opportunity to explore and explain the hidden world (and its inhabitants) in ways the movie never showed much interest in doing. Are we about to learn more about the Sith?

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2017) #10

Feb 17, 2021

Ochi is still tagging along, although it's still unclear what further purpose he has to play (other than witness to Vader's accomplishments and eventually end up with a dagger).

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2017) #12

Mar 5, 2018

After eliminating the Emperor as a suspect, Darth Vader turns his attention to the Empire itself and arranges a little demonstration both to scare off these would-be assassins and begin the legend of Darth Vader with a forceful reminder that neither betrayal or failure will be accepted. While impressive, most impressive, I doubt that will stop our assassins (as the arc is still only getting started). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2017) #14

Apr 16, 2018

While Vader was sent as a show of force to get the planet under control, it's likely the Sith Lord (after he swims out the watery death the cliffhanger ends on) is going to be far more interested in the Jedi given shelter by the Mon Calamari including Jedi Master Barr who uses his influence over the king to prompt a Rebellion by the Mon Calamari. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2017) #16

May 15, 2018

The original Star Wars was a little fuzzy about just where Darth Vader fit into the hierarchy of the Empire. In Tarkin's plea, we get confirmation that Vader is set outside of the military completely and able to act on the Emperor's wishes. Vader agrees to leave his men, but based on Barr's surprise for the Inquisitors, it looks like a decision he may regret. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2017) #17

Jun 20, 2018

While the Empire wins the day, an important admiral and a fleet of ships manage to escape the destruction of their homeworld. As Barr foresaw, the Rebellion just got stronger. But was the near total destruction of the surface world of Mon Cala worth it? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2017) #19

Aug 16, 2018

The first issue of a new arc, I'm curious to see where the story comes from here (as the comic works very well as a standalone story that doesn't necessarily need to be extended). Will the Inquisitors plans for the Jedi children be revealed? Will Vader hunt more Jedi? Or does the Emperor have something else in mind for his most loyal servant? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2017) #20

Feb 15, 2022

The comic also sees the return of the former handmaiden Sab who has joined Crimson Dawn basically to fuck with Vader (she's the one who is responsible for the flawed list) and to keep better tabs on his movements. Still having questions about Vader's connection to Padm Amidala, Sab finds the birthing chamber and droid which reveals that Anakin Skywalker had a son and that Vader is hunting him. However, a very big piece of that puzzle has still yet to reveal itself to her.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2017) #24

Jul 11, 2022

As we've seen in previous issues of the series, recent events continue to flood Vader with memories as the machine's discovery leads to memories of the Death Star's destruction of Alderaan and Padm pleading with Anakin to find the good within himself (which is also set against Sab's recent attempts to play on Anakin's old allegiances). Stunned momentarily, but far from defeated, Vader goes after the fleeing governor likely leading to a deadly confrontation.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2020) #7

Nov 16, 2020

Far from 100%, Vader survives the assassin's attacks and discovers something unexpected calling out to him that may offer some assistance as the comic takes a truly bizarre turn that has ties to scenes from Rise of Skywalker which failed to make it into the film (and I can guess why).

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2020) #11

May 10, 2021

While the arc has shown us the fury of Vader unleashed, in the end we end up much at the same place before the arc started with Vader once again kneeling before the Emperor. Of course, none of that is surprising given the issue needing to fit into Star Wars chronology, but given the build-up it's hard not to feel a bit let down in the end of the tale.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2020) #27

Oct 3, 2022

The comic ends with a bit of a tease and the pair limping off together towards a possible conclusion to the arc and a meeting with the Emperor whose plans for his apprentice likely do not include a new friend who reminds him of his lost love and humanity.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2020) #28

Nov 3, 2022

Darth Vader #28 is an odd comic. In what felt like the natural conclusion to the Sab arc, instead we get a confrontation between the former Handmaiden and the Emperor, without any payoff either way halfway through the comic, before shifting gears in lightspeed directly into Sab and Vader continuing to work together on a new mission.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2020) #29

Dec 5, 2022

The two-halves of the story fit well-enough together as Dorm learns bits and pieces about Sab's recent actions (which she still doesn't understand) while her fellow former handmaiden, only momentarily swayed by what she finds on the planet, completes the assignment given to her by Vader and the Emperor by becoming an assassin for the Empire.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2020) #30

Jan 18, 2023

Darth Vader #30 takes some unexpected turns as Darth Vader takes the one captured handmaiden at his disposal, Dorm (who can't believe Sab is willing serving the Empire), to bring the others out of hiding.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2020) #31

Feb 14, 2023

Through the introduction of an Umbaran, we get a little information to help give the Handmaidens some more distinct personalities as we get to learn at least a minimal amount about Dorm, Eirta, Sach, and Rab. But now that their partnership was successful, what happens to the Handmaidens?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2020) #34

May 15, 2023

With Vader out of control and not completely aware of his actions, the of Sab feels unnecessarily vague, but there's nothing uncertain about the fate of those who were hunting him as he splits their shuttle in half and gleefully stands over the wreckage.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2020) #36

Jul 19, 2023

The majority of the issue involves the droids getting together and hatching their plan. Although not a bad plan, underestimating Darth Vader doesn't serve them well especially when he has a ringer on their team. The issue ends with Vader victorious and the droid army in ruins to be rebuilt for his own purposes. It's unclear his plans for the droids (especially after immediately demonstrating Vader doesn't need a droid army to stand up to his enemies), but I guess we'll see where this goes.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2020) #37

Aug 25, 2023

After highlighting Vader's problems gaining full control, and continuing to have Vader think on his past (this time images of his Jedi training), the issue moves to forcing his ship into the Executor and facing an overwhelming droid army out of control.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2020) #39

Oct 13, 2023

The arc of Vader finding the Force again has been of more interest to me than the never-ending supply of droids for him to kill.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2020) #40

Nov 15, 2023

This crossover has been dragging on for some time and doesn't feel any closer to a conclusion. However, Darth Vader #40 does have some solid art of Vader from Raff Ienco, especially highlighting Darth Vader, as well as the tease at the end of where the crossover will go from here as it continues on throughout 2023.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Darth Vader (2020) #41

Dec 28, 2023

Unless you've been loving this storyline there's not much for you here other than more Vader on droid violence, although it is interesting to see that Darth Vader has Imperials after him for his attack on the Emperor and it is somewhat interesting to see Vader be able to control the Force through any droid he's connected to.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Darth Vader - Black, White & Red (2023) #1

May 3, 2023

All are fine, with solid art, but nothing here is a must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Star Wars: Darth Vader - Black, White & Red (2023) #2

Jun 6, 2023

"The Endless Mercy" feels out of place from the start with a far more horror feel than the sci-fi/fantasy of the Star Wars Universe with Dark Vader fighting his way through genetically engineered monsters created by another evil scientist.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Darth Vader - Black, White & Red (2023) #3

Jun 30, 2023

Speaking of Vader at the peak of his powers, "Annihilated offers just that with the Dark Lord of Sith destroying and entire Rebel convoy and then the Rebel base it was headed to all by himself. It, like the third story, shows the power and viciousness Darth Vader is capable of. My favorite story of this issue is "Diplomatic Immunity where Vader takes a single pilot back to her homeworld where he annihilates the town she grew up in and threatens her family in order to turn the Rebel spy against the Rebellion and work for him. This is easily the best issue of the series so far.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader - Black, White & Red (2023) #4

Aug 7, 2023

While the first two stories show Vader at his most powerful, the last shows him taken unaware but still with the fortitude to survive.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Darth Vader and the Lost Command #1

Jan 31, 2011

The early scenes work well and as does the last half when the comic shifts into full-on action mode as Vader's troops attack the planet of Atoa. The feel of everything is right here, even if the Atoans themselves are a bit disappointing " although we do get a glimpse of something more in the final page. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Star Wars: Dawn of the Jedi - Force Storm #1

Feb 22, 2012

Also troubling is the fact the series takes at the beginning but Jedi already have lightsabers? And there are Sith (who look like generic Vader wannabes)? The Force is not strong with this one. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Doctor Aphra #1

Dec 13, 2016

Along with the main story, which (to be fair) does include a pair of murders by Aphra and her droids, the fist comic also features a back-up tale involving Aphra's time in school and what lengths she went to get her doctorate (which is now suspended). It appears these events will play a large role in Aphra's current predicament which will also force the scientist to come to terms with her disapproving father. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Han Solo #1

Jun 24, 2016

As for that mission, which I'm guessing is going to take up the next several issues. Han and Chewbacca have been signed up for a galactic Cannonball Run of sorts. While competing in the race they will also make stops on three planets in attempts to save the remaining Rebel spies. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Hyperspace Stories (2022) #8

Sep 7, 2023

The comic plays on preexisting conflict. Fans of the Ren/Hux dynamic will likely enjoy it, even if it doesn't offer much of interest in the otherwise unnotable new planet to the Star Wars galaxy or a mission that gets resolved, despite its challenges, in a single issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Star Wars: Jedi - The Dark Side #1

May 24, 2011

This new series from writer Scott Allie and artist Mahmud Asrar will focus on Qui-Gon Jinn's years working on the Outer Rim long before he would take on a padawan named Obi-Wan Kenobi. The first issue sets up the characters and situations which will play an integral part in the first five-issue story arc, but it doesn't do much more than that. I also found Asrar's art a bit sloppy in places. The close-ups of each character are very detailed and you can tell why he was chosen for the project, but the larger shots seem rushed and a little blurry. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Jedi Fallen Order - Dark Temple #1

Sep 6, 2019

The mystery at the beginning, and again at the end where things go wrong in the jungle, work fairly well. However, the flashbacks which make up the majority of the issue are rather bland. While I'm interested in the story, like Cere I am impatient and I do want to pace to speed up considerably. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Star Wars: Obi-Wan & Anakin #1

Jan 13, 2016

There may be fertile ground for stories like this to fill in the adventures of these characters but neither Charles Soule nor artist Marco Checchetto present anything to make this adventure stand-out in any way. That said, the variant cover from Skottie Young is pretty cool. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Poe Dameron #27

May 22, 2018

My lukewarm reaction to the character of Poe Dameron has kept me relatively uninterested in a comic featuring the character who was later helped exponentially by his role in The Last Jedi. Although not as interesting as the previous issue, there's fun to be had including Porgs and the return of Nien Nunb (even if it is a bit of unabashed fan service).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Princess Leia #1

Mar 11, 2015

Although we get glimpses of other familiar characters including Luke, Wedge, Han, Chewbacca, and Admiral Ackbar, it seems that Leia and Evaan will be carrying the bulk of the story from here on out as the pair search for other survivors of Alderaan whom the Empire has put a bounty (including a certain Rebel princess). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: Princess Leia #3

May 6, 2015

Although I still have mixed feelings about the inking of several panels, Terry Dodson's art continues to be one of the highlights of the five-issue mini-series which, at least to this point, seems to have bitten off more than it can chew in such a short run. The only real question now is will Evaan survive the final two issues and pop-up somewhere else in Marvel's current Star Wars run? For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Rebel Heist #1

May 7, 2014

With each issue centering around the combination of both a core Star Wars character and original characters to the expanded Star Wars Universe Star Wars: Rebel Heist gets off to a good start here. I like Marco Castiello's art (even if some panels do feel a bit rushed) and Matt Kindt captures Solo through the eyes of of a hero-worshiping fanboy in way over his head. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Star Wars: Rebel Heist #2

Jun 2, 2014

The template from the first issue works well again as this time we don't get the view of a hero worshipper crushed into reality but the disappointment of a young woman realizing the Rebellion sent a princess rather than soldier to get the job done. Putting her life in danger to take Sarin's place and get the code, which turns out to be harder to move than either expected, the princess grudgingly earns the respect and admiration of the recruit but still suffers the same fate of Han Solo in the end. Next month: Chewbacca. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Rebel Heist #3

Jul 1, 2014

Next month adds Luke Skywalker to the mix and should also put Han Solo back in play as the final issue of the mini-series will hopefully put the various pieces together and reveal just what the Rebellion deems so necessary that they've sacrificed some of their very best to get the job done. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Rebel Heist #4

Aug 7, 2014

The reveal of what the entire operation was for might be a little too cute for my tastes, but it doesn't detract from some strong storytelling that bridges both old and new characters in a way I hope the new films can manage. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Target Vader #1

Jul 9, 2019

Even without selling me on Valance, Star Wars: Target Vader #1 is a strong first issue setting the stage for what is to come, while offering a nice final twist on how everything seen here plays right into the hands of the Rebellion. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Target Vader #4

Oct 17, 2019

With two issues remaining, and Valance already defeated, I'm curious as to where the mini-series will go from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: The Halcyon Legacy (2022) #1

Feb 8, 2022

Earning the cover, the comic is really of interest for the inclusion of a Wookiee Jedi who gets to show off some piloting skills keeping the Nihil at bay until help can arrive.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: The High Republic - Trail of Shadows #1

Oct 20, 2021

The idea of tying together Star Wars and detective story isn't something I expected. The Emerick and Sian storylines feel very disconnected in the issue which has enough mystery going on without needing to add how the two tales supposedly will fit together. While an interesting idea, I don't know that there's enough here for me to come back and search for any answers.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Star Wars: The Mandalorian #1

Jul 20, 2022

A straightforward adaptation of the first episode of The Mandalorian, The Mandalorian #1 is exactly what you would expect introducing us to bounty hunter Din Djarin and his acceptance of the job which will change his life forever.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Star Wars: Thrawn #1

Feb 15, 2018

Despite starting out with a Thrawn that knows very little of the Empire or its politics, we still see flashes of the brilliance and guile of the man he will one day become turning every situation to his own advantage. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Starfire #1

Jun 19, 2015

I enjoyed Palmiotti's work on Ame-Comi Girls (a female-character-driven title I was sad to see disappear for DC's digital line-up) and the team-up with Conner seems to be a good match. I'm curious to see where the pair and Lupacchino choose to take the character from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Starfire #11

Apr 21, 2016

For an issue where not much happens, Kory and her friends discuss some big ideas about a hero's friendships and relationships and how those can be effected by the danger her profession can bring. While I'm guessing these connections will likely melt away after the reboot, it's still a solid issue building on this version of the character. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Starward (2022) #1

May 3, 2022

Starward #1 certainly dumps quite a bit onto both the reader and the main character, and some of the pseudo-mythology feels a bit much, but Stephanie takes the news she's some sort of reincarnated celestial being in stride while quitting her job, ignoring the college career she was never all that keen on, and beginning a brand-new journey.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Stellar #1

Jun 25, 2018

There's obviously far more to delve into the character than we glimpse in this first issue. I'll be curious to see if the reveals help flesh out the character or bruise the mystery surrounding her. Although we don't learn the full extent of Stellar's powers and abilities, the final few panels clue us in to the fact that there are others like her out there. And it seems like they have some issues with their former colleague. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Stellar #2

Jul 25, 2018

Based on their power set, an insane member of this group definitely presents a problem for our heroine. Just who is Zenith, and what events have led to this reckoning? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Stormwatch (2011) #1

Sep 13, 2011

The first issue does a fair job of reintroducing the characters into their new setting. Sadly, the comic is weighed down by some pretty awful art by Miguel Angel Sepulveda (his version of the Midnighter alone should get him fired from the title). It show's promise, but the book's look needs to be addressed if DC wants to keep this title around for more than a couple of months. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Stormwatch (2011) #2

Oct 9, 2011

The second issue works well (even with the unsubtle entendres between Apollo and Midnighter). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Stormwatch (2011) #3

Nov 6, 2011

Even if we accept all of this, how does this stop someone with superhuman senses, like say Superman, or someone with a space ring that warns of just such issues, like say the three Green Lanterns on the planet, from noticing the Earth is under attack? And, an even bigger question, even if they could stop them from finding out about such a danger why would they? As we see in this issue they could use all the help they can get. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Stormwatch (2011) #4

Dec 14, 2011

When introduced this Stormwatch appeared to be a group that would take on shadowy threats far more covertly than we've seen so far. That might work. Fighting giant aliens very, very publicly (while keeping it hidden from the rest of the DCU) is far more problematic. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Stormwatch (2011) #5

Jan 7, 2012

Stormwatch isn't a great comic but, at least for one more month, it's done just enough to get me coming back to see where it's headed. I want to see more of the Engineer, see Jenny Quantum grow into her role, and find out how the comic plans to use the Martian Manhunter. Despite some dreadful writing in spots (and some spotty art here and there) the final page cliffhanger will bring me back for issue #6. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Stormwatch (2011) #6

Feb 8, 2012

However, we also getJack Hawksmoortalking to the city soul of the ship which is as awkward as it is stupid, I don't need yet another speech by the Martian Manhunteras to why the Justice League is stupid, andMidnighter andApollo‘s relationship is being handled with all the care of Twilight fan fiction. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Stormwatch (2011) #7

Mar 14, 2012

In places it seems like the new creative team might be able to make something of the title, but right around the corner are more groans and examples of questionable content and/or execution that have plagued the title since its launch. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Stormwatch (2011) #8

Apr 11, 2012

The comic's still rough in a several areas, but I like how Jenkins used the characters over the past two issues (with exception of another decidedly insipid Jack Hawksmoor subplot). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Suicide Squad (2016) #1

Aug 25, 2016

Narrated by Amanda Waller, Suicide Squad #1 goes over the basics of these characters and the Task Force X set-up for new readers before dropping the characters into their first mission which goes wrong before they even land in Russia. Mostly just preamble for the story yet to come, it's too early to judge how well this new team will work together just yet. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Suicide Squad (2019) #1

Dec 30, 2019

There's not a big enough draw here for me to return anytime soon, although fans of more recent versions of Task Force X may find enough here to keep their interest. That said, I did enjoy Zebra Man's inclusion here, and Harley's questions about his gimmick. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Suicide Squad (2019) #5

Jun 1, 2020

There are two big takeaways here. First, the crew appears to be setting out on their own. Second, we discover the man behind the curtain pulling Lok's strings is… Ted Kord? Well, that's certainly surprising (and pretty out of character for the former Blue Beetle). The motives of the very Maxwell Lord-ish Ted are going to take some explaining.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Suicide Squad (2021) #1

Mar 8, 2021

It's always hard any volume of Suicide Squad on a single issue because you aren't sure what the team will look like after the smoke clears and several characters are killed. This version looks neither better or worse than last year's model, although it foreshadows the possibility for more meaningful missions.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Suicide Squad (2021) #2

Apr 21, 2021

The issue does feature an appearance by Batman who responds to the trouble at Arkham, although there is no direct contact between the Dark Knight Detective and the Squad (although they might not have gotten out as clean with Talon as they expected thanks to Batman's arrival). As for the future of the Squad, it's still unclear what the addition of Talon means for the team and just how Superboy and Peacemaker will coexist after their dust-up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Suicide Squad (2021) #4

Jun 9, 2021

Red-X runs rings around the Squad, making a few interesting observations (such as the mental state of Talon), but he's far from the team's only problem. Tensions between Peacemaker and Waller hit a fever pitch and Peacemaker starts planning a coup d'tat. There's certainly trouble brewing, especially given that Red-X temporarily short-circuits the bombs Waller uses to control her troops. The escape of Rick Flag during the chaos isn't likely to make Waller's life any easier.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Suicide Squad (2021) #5

Jul 19, 2021

Bloodsport's less than effective run-in with Ultraman suggests that the Squad's next mission will pit them against the Crime Syndicate (where they might not match up all that well). It's an interesting idea for a story, but unless Waller has some bigger guns hidden in her closet I don't know that the fight will last very long (but that's a problem for the next issue).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Suicide Squad (2021) #6

Aug 18, 2021

The issue isn't quite as strong as what's come before, but it works to push the storyline forward and offers an intriguing set-up for the next issue with not one but two Superboys with questions about each other. The Swamp Thing storyline remains largely a tease, but Waller's discovery of Earth-3 suggests an entire new world of recruits for her to choose from.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Suicide Squad (2021) #8

Oct 27, 2021

This is a seriously crazy issue. Even if Ambush Bug's narration does drone on at times, the humor works and despite the number if irons in the fire including governments coming after Waller, Rick Flag putting together his own team, the machinations of Talon, and now Peacemaker unleashed, Suicide Squad #8 works as a good start for new readers and a nice summary to catch the rest of us up on everything the current volume of the title has going. Let the craziness continue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Suicide Squad (2021) #9

Nov 23, 2021

The reveal of the target of Waller's interest turns out to be a complete unknown, leaving the slow build-up without any immediate payoff. We do get plenty of dysfunctional team antics, some fun third-wall breakage by Ambush Bug, and an appearance by Sojourner Mullein, but it will be at least another month before we learn the reasoning behind Waller's big gamble. Waller's prize is creepy (in a Doctor Who kinda way), but what exactly is he?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Suicide Squad (2021) #10

Dec 15, 2021

The issue is a fair middle issue to a larger arc with the lowest body count so far (unless you count Culebra, who survives death yet again). It is notable for several cameos, more of Ambush Bug‘s fourth-wall-breaking narration, cementing Major Force as the most dickish member of the team, and making good on the romantic tension between Match and Nocturna (how exactly will this play out?).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Suicide Squad (2021) #11

Jan 13, 2022

The issue continues Ambush Bug‘s narration which has some fun moments, especially during the introduction of the various Earth-8 characters and we also get more of the turmoil within Waller's team which includes those loyal to Flag's point of view.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Suicide Squad (2021) #14

Apr 11, 2022

Left to their own devices, the various surviving members end up getting into all kinds of trouble as Peacemaker and Ambush Bug steal some more Bizarro Superboy clones, Rodriguez runs into some resistance while sneaking into a top-secret military base, and Mirror Master almost gets killed at least three times. The crazy antics of the Suicide Squad come back to normal bringing back some of the wacky fun of the earlier issues and suicidal new plan from the team's leader.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Suicide Squad: Rebirth #1

Aug 6, 2016

The team looks to included Deadshot, Captain Boomerang (who apparently has been demoted), and Harley Quinn. With so little time on the page it's hard to suss our more than Harley is the crazy one, Boomerang is the dick, and Deadshot is the killer. While this certainly works as an introductory issue it still leaves me with several questions about the series when it isn't primarily focusing on Waller. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Super Dinosaur (2011) #1

Apr 26, 2011

As a first issue should, this one really lays out the enter world of Derek Dynamo and his relationship to his father and his reptilian best-friend. I'm a little less sure of the family assigned to their base, and the villains themselves, but there's certainly enough here for me to give this one a good long look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Super Dinosaur (2011) #4

Sep 20, 2011

The issue ends with a tease that the crazy awesomeness of next issue will put this one to shame. And this one was pretty darn good. If you aren't reading Super Dinosuar you need to be. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Super Dinosaur (2011) #5

Oct 17, 2011

This insane battle wraps up the comic's first story arc and even lays down a little foreshadowing for a possible rift between Derek and his dino-pal. And even in defeat Maximus still manages to get the upper hand by asking Dr. Dynamo about his missing wife. Great art and insane action makes this one an easy recommendation. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Super Dinosaur (2011) #6

Dec 7, 2011

It's a solid issue. Even if almost all of the crazy insanity takes place in the story's first-half, the remaining pages deal with important relationships and subtle changes at the Dynamo Dome. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Super Dinosaur (2011) #7

Jan 11, 2012

As Derek and Erin spend some time racing Wheels and Pixie, and SD and Erica spend more time bonding over video games, the rest of the comic deals with the upheaval at Castle Maximus after the capture of Max Maximus and Squidious being thrown out by his minions. As to the mystery over Doctor Dynamo‘s missing wife we may, may finally get some movement on that story in the next issue. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Super Dinosaur (2011) #8

Feb 18, 2012

There's plenty of actions, and a couple of fun moments, but I'm a little afraid Robert Kirkman and Jason Howard's latest comic (much like Astounding Wolf-Man) may have peaked too soon. Here's hoping next issue ramps up the zany fun. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Super Dinosaur (2011) #9

Mar 25, 2012

Throw in Derek coming clean with Miss Finkle about performing his examination through a robot, plenty of action around an erupting volcano, and the first look at the face of the new enemy when The Exile is unmasked, and it looks like the series is back in full-gear and a whole lot of fun. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Super Dinosaur (2011) #10

Apr 22, 2012

Robert Kirkman and Jason Howard deliver another fun issue which gives us some dinosaur-on-dinosaur action, multiple cliffhangers, and several possibilities for next month's issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Super Dinosaur (2011) #11

Jun 14, 2012

Another solid issue that ends with an intriguing cliffhanger, and an entire new world to explore, as Derek finds himself transported with the Exile to Inner-Earth. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Super Dinosaur (2011) #12

Jul 29, 2012

After months of discussions of Inner Earth I was happy to see the place through Derek's eyes. I'm pretty sure the team of Super Dinosaur and three untested kids as a rescue force is a really bad idea, but I'll tip my hat for the terrific name. We'll have to wait at least one more month to see what secrets the hidden city the Exile reveals in the issue's final page have to do with Derek, Super Dinosaur, and fate of humanity. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Super Dinosaur (2011) #13

Aug 29, 2012

The quick shift into the motivations of the Exile and the unexpected complexity of the politics in Inner Earth is a nice touch. I'm hoping the characters get to spend more time exploring the world before reuniting and returning to the surface. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Super Dinosaur (2011) #14

Oct 4, 2012

The issue keeps the story moving forward, although with the time split between the groups we don't get as far down the road as I'd like. Still, there are plenty of action scenes for both Derek and his friends and some humorous moments, such as Derek introducing himself to the non-believers. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Super Dinosaur (2011) #15

Nov 15, 2012

The Exile is imprisoned but his theory on life on the surface has been proven and he has plenty of time to plot his revenge. We also get SD finally making a connection in Inner Earth when the group is saved thanks to help from another Tyrannosaurus rex, only to have to abandon his new friend to help Derek get safely home. It may be a bit rushed, but Super Dinosaur #15 is a good conclusion to the arc. Next month: Super Dinosaur in space! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Super Dinosaur (2011) #16

Jan 2, 2013

Fun stuff. I especially like seeing Super Dinosaur in his own space suit. The comic seems to foreshadow a Romeo and Juliet tale between the offspring of the warring tribes, but we'll have to wait until next month to see if that's case. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Super Dinosaur (2011) #17

Feb 11, 2013

The comic's B-story continues Dr. Dynamo's search for his wife. The final pages bring Derek in on the truth of his missing mother and set the stage for the comic's next big arc. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Super Dinosaur (2011) #18

Apr 11, 2013

The best part of Super Dinosaur #18 is the evolution of Minimus into the far more deadly threat of Tyrannosaurus X. Aside from looking pretty cool, the character's unique match of brains and brawn gives the series a legitimate super-villain whose far more interesting, and threatening, than Maximus. His addition also pumps some new life into a comic that at times (despite it's absurdly awesome premise) has felt a little stale. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Super Dinosaur (2011) #19

May 8, 2013

Although Derek and SD win the day (with a little luck and a giant explosion from SD's overloaded armor), the comic does a good job of setting up Tyrannosaurus X as a legitimate threat in a way that mad scientist Max Maximus never quite worked. Here's hoping we see much more of the new super-villain in the coming months. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Super Dinosaur (2011) #20

Sep 3, 2013

While working diligently on finding a cure for his mother both Derek and his father let other problems slide as the issue's B-story sets up the next arc when Tyrannosaurus-X liberates the Dino Men from Earthcore Headquarters and begins to set in motion his new villainous scheme. I've missed you Super Dinosaur, welcome back. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Super Dinosaur (2011) #21

Feb 3, 2014

Honestly anytime I find a Super Dinosaur comic I'm pleasantly surprised as the series release schedule has become incredibly inconsistent. Writer Robert Kirkman and artist Jason Howard have been putting out only a single issue of the monthly title every four months. Although there are a couple odd moments here, there's still quite a bit of fun to be had. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Super Dinosaur (2011) #23

Jan 11, 2015

Given the responsibilities of Robert Kirkman and Jason Howard on other titles I don't know when Super Dinosaur will return but I hope that when it does we won't get the same multi-month gaps we've seen over the show's recent publication. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Super Powers #1

Dec 6, 2016

Mainly targeting younger readers, Super Powers #1! is a fun (if lightweight) all-ages comic featuring DC's big three heroes. Opening in Gotham City where Batman has disappeared, Superman discovers clues leading him to discover Braniac is responsible. With the help of Wonder Woman who traces Braniac to New Krypton, the Big Blue Boy Scout finds and frees the Dark Knight Detective, leaving the heroes to deal with the villain. Personally, because it's geared to a younger audience, I'm a little disappointed that Baltazar and Aureliani (who tag-team the writing and drawing of the comic) didn't go for more classic Super Powers or Super Friends costumes of the heroes. Still, kids should enjoy this one. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Super Sons (2017) #1

Feb 20, 2017

The new series is unexpected but not unwelcome. Robin and Superboy make for an entertaining team. The biggest question concerning their team-ups is what happens when their parents find out? One would think their sons travelling across the country would be noticed sooner rather than later by the likes of Batman and Superman. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Super Sons (2017) #2

Mar 22, 2017

The pair's impromptu team-up continues to have their issues while they investigate events which will eventually lead them into the path of Kid Amazo (and likely their fathers). Damian's dickish attitude to his new partner hasn't changed as this comic really pushes that side of his personality. Jonathan, meanwhile, remains mostly a blank slate desperately needing any kind of personality. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Supergirl (2005) #59

Dec 21, 2010

Also included here is another appearance of Superwoman (hopefully the last we'll see for a long time) and a humorous frame of Supergirl knocking out the inexplicable Composite Bat-Santa (which isn't explained or referred to in the rest of the issue) as part of her nightly patrol. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Supergirl (2005) #60

Jan 27, 2011

Even with these issues it's still far better than most of what I've read in the series. And with Batgirl and Damian (YES!) set to guest-star in next month's issue I'm actually (and I can't believe I'm saying this) looking forward to a Supergirl comic. Well played, Mr. Spencer. Now just try and stay away little things like senseless child murder and you might be able to get this title back on the right track.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Supergirl (2005) #61

Feb 23, 2011

There are a couple of nagging issues here (the most obvious being the continuity issue surrounding Blue Beetle's involvement in this story), but it is FUN and a far cry from the dreary story arcs the character was stuck in just a few months ago. Definitely worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Supergirl (2005) #62

Mar 29, 2011

I was slightly disappointed with the harder Supergirl which takes away from some of the fun of the Girl of Steel/Damian relationship. However, I did enjoy the scene between Kara and Lois Lane which points out not only Supergirl's hubris but and why you shouldn't underestimate her.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Supergirl (2011) #16

Jan 28, 2013

Even though I enjoyed the art by Mahmud A. Asrar, the comic does suffer from the same problem with every Flash appearance not drawn by Francis Manapul in the inconstant drawing and coloring of the yellow streaks and lightning that only appear in about half the comic's panels featuring the hero. Use them or don't use them, but using them for only half the issue doesn't work. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Supergirl (2011) #19

May 4, 2013

It appears Power Girl is sticking around for another month giving us double the Kara fun which means I'll likely pick up next month's issue as well to see where this new friendship is headed. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Supergirl (2011) #20

May 20, 2013

Writer Michael Allen Johnson does a great job in showcasing both similarities and differences between the Karas of different Earths while providing a thrilling and amusing issue full of stark humor and life and death stakes that costs Supergirl something precious but introduces someone even more valuable into her life. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Supergirl (2011) #22

Jul 22, 2013

Whereas most of New 52 Superman titles still feel a bit off as the character on display still hasn't grown into the iconic Man of Steel, I've enjoyed the Supergirl issues I've read. They haven't quite grabbed my attention to add it to my pull-list every month, but in the gritty New 52 Kara's humor, self-deprecation, and willingness to not take herself too seriously is a welcome salve. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Supergirl (2011) #23

Aug 28, 2013

With the number of villains thrown at Kara the issue is filled with action but still packs an emotional punch with Kara facing both the mistakes of her past and her own mortality. Don't weep for our heroine quite yet as I'd be very surprised if Kara isn't back among the living and trashing Brianiac's ship before the end of the next issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Supergirl (2011) #24

Oct 23, 2013

The comic ends with an appearance of an Oracle and the introduction of a Supergirl/Action Comics crossover (something I'm not too excited about) featuring “The Return of Krypton (something I'm really not excited about). I enjoyed this arc, but it may be time for me to give this comic another short break. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Supergirl (2011) #26

Dec 24, 2013

The new team does a pretty good job of summarizing Kara's recent storylines while jumping the character into action against a formidable (if stupidly designed) adversary. I like Cinar's take on Kara (even if I think Bedard's dialogue is a little too whiny for much of the pair's first issue). There's enough here for me to stick around to see where the new team plans to take our heroine. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Supergirl (2011) #27

Jan 29, 2014

Although I've grown to like this depiction of Kara, the comic's hot-and-cold storylines have been hit-and-miss for me and I have little interest in seeing Kara and pseudo-Lobo, Round 2 after her solar recharge. Maybe I'll come back for the next arc. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Supergirl (2011) #28

Feb 24, 2014

Although I'm against throwing a ring on an already super-powered character like Supergirl, I have hopes the experience might give her a bit more perspective once she inevitably returns to normal (and gives her a little bit of Power Girl‘s spunk, which this version of Kara is sorely lacking). And, hey, maybe we'll get a cameo from Dex-Starr? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Supergirl (2011) #29

Mar 27, 2014

Despite once again floating the idea that no Red Lantern can ever remove their ring and survive (something Guy Gardner has already accomplished) we know Kara's days as a Red Lantern are numbered, and unless someone is going to do full issue of a Kara and Dex-Starr team-up I'll probably wait until this journey is over before picking up another Supergirl comic. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Supergirl (2011) #35

Oct 27, 2014

For a character who had become lost in grief and anger, and had been allowed to bottom out and wallow and whine herself into a shell of her former self it's nice to see Supergirl have a little fun for a change. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Supergirl (2011) #36

Nov 26, 2014

Both her short stint as a super-barrista, including another argument with Clark (when will these two be NICE to each other?), and her testing in space continue the trend of an angry young girl whose rage (sadly) may not have burnt out during her stint as a Red Lantern (its only saving grace). I'm far from sold on the book's new-ish direction which lacks the wit, humor, and style of the new Batgirl. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Supergirl (2011) #37

Jan 8, 2015

I'm enjoying Emanuela Lupacchino's art for a second straight issue, but the reveal of the Crucible planning to kidnap and clone Superboy vastly limits the scope of the storyline going in by narrowly defining the group at the outset and setting up yet another hard choice for Kara involving sacrifice no matter what she chooses. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Supergirl (2016) #1

Sep 14, 2016

Needing an escape eventually leads Kara to the Fortress of Solitude where the comic sets up an unexpected reunion for Kara with the re-introduction of her father as the new Cyborg-Superman. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Supergirl (2016) #2

Oct 19, 2016

As for Kara's battle with her Frankensteinish father, it ends an anti-climactic manner. However, the comic does return to that plotline by the end of the issue as Kara's doubts and concerns about what the creature told her are confirmed. While a single version of Cyborg-Superman is destroyed, her father's mutated form is still out there awaiting his next attempt to reconnect with his daughter and complete his plan to restore Argo City (the Kryptonian home where he and Kara lived), no matter what the cost. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Supergirl (2016) #14

Oct 20, 2017

There's also some nice small nuggets here in Kara learning Mandarin before seeking out assistance which helps underline the character as a world-wide hero and not just a local one fighting for truth, justice, and the American way. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Supergirl (2016) #17

Jan 16, 2018

The choice to make Catco more like the classic Daily Bugle to Spider-Man also over-complicates things here adding yet another storyline to a fairly unfocused comic. Kara is great, but I think the world around her could use some work. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Supergirl (2016) #18

Feb 21, 2018

The epilogue offers a nice moment of respite for our heroine who actually gets to be a young woman instead of a savior for at least part of one night as a girl enjoying her first dance. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Supergirl (2016) #19

Mar 19, 2018

Kara doesn't forget the life she saved, but checks in with the troubled Lee later down the line helping the non-binary character deal with bullies at school and come out to parents. More than just saving Lee's life, Kara offered the character hope. And hope can change the world. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Supergirl (2016) #21

Aug 14, 2018

Marc Andreyko and Kevin Maguire are an interesting pairing for this book. I enjoyed Kara's interactions with Superman and Hal Jordan (even if I've never been the biggest fan of how Maguire draws the universe's greatest Green Lantern). As for who or what is going to great lengths to hide the information that Supergirl seeks, I guess we'll just have too wait and see what she uncovers in her travels. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Supergirl (2016) #23

Oct 18, 2018

Armed with a new lead, Supergirl's quest continues, but just how far is the circle willing to go in order to keep their secrets safe? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Supergirl (2016) #34

Sep 26, 2019

I'll be curious to see how much Kara is involved in Leviathan going forward, or if the death and return of loved ones might sidetrack her for the foreseeable future. And, since Kara Danvers has been missing in Supergirl's absence, what's the plan to reintroduce her to the DCU? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Supergirl: Rebirth #1

Aug 22, 2016

While I understand wanting to tie the comic into the Supergirl TV series, I do have some doubts concerning cementing Kara firmly as an agent for the DEO. I'm equally skeptical at throwing Kara back into to high school (how old is she supposed to be?), but I'm willing to see what it might lead to. The issue goes a long way to sell me on this new version of Supergirl, but I'm not yet sold on the set-up for the new series. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Superior Spider-Man (2018) #1

Dec 28, 2018

There's some fun here with Doc Spidey taking down a C-list villain before a far more serious threat takes the field. Honestly, I'd prefer more of Doctor Doom as Iron Man than Doc Ock as yet another Spider-Man, but fans should enjoy this first issue. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Superior Spider-Man (2018) #3

Mar 11, 2019

While it might have been fun to see what Otto could have done with the Power Cosmic, it makes sense for him to gracefully give up the power which would in short order destroy a human body. Still, the door remains open for more cosmic powered shenanigans given Anna's deception. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Superior Spider-Man (2018) #5

May 1, 2019

Far from a must-read, there's still some odd fun here in the absurdity of Otto's date and the equally absurd new threat he'll need Strange's help to stop. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Superior Spider-Man (2018) #9

Jul 31, 2019

The comic also features a brief encounter between Otto and the ridiculous Z-list villain Tuner D. Century who Otto is able to take out some of his frustration prior to his heart-to-heart with that “other” Spider-Man. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Superior Spider-Man Returns (2023) #1

Oct 17, 2023

The one-shot gives us more of Doc Ock's version of Spidey in the flashbacks that make up the majority of the issue as well as the origin story for a new villain who blames Spider-Man (not knowing it was Doc Ock's Spider-Man who she was working for) for her tragic transformation and subsequent imprisonment.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Superior Spider-Man Team-Up #2

Aug 16, 2013

I've stayed away from Superior Spider-Man as I've been less than enthused at the prospect of a Doc Ock Spidey. However, the back-and-forth between the two former super-villains trying to live-up to Spider-Man's legacy works well here. I have enjoyed writer Christopher Yost's work on Scarlet Spider and I'm intrigued to see just what the return of the Jackal has in store for everyone Spidey-related. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Superman (2006) #700

Jun 24, 2010

But it's the middle story, guest-starring a young Dick Grayson as Robin, that works best. There are some fun moments including Superman trying to save Dick from Bruce's wrath by quickly doing his homework and the Batman's message to Clark in the epilogue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
2
Superman (2006) #703

Oct 15, 2010

The only reason to pick up this issue is to marvel at the ridiculousness of every single panel. At a price tag of $4, trust me, it's not worth it.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Superman (2011) #32

Jun 30, 2014

Superman #32 doesn't sell me completely on the comic going forward, but it does pique my curiosity as to where Johns and Romita will take the Man of Steel. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Superman (2011) #33

Jul 29, 2014

Clark's renewed interaction with The Daily Planet staff also brings back more classic elements of the character. Now if they could just get him out of that ridiculous armor. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Superman (2011) #34

Sep 9, 2014

Next month's issue will tell readers quite a bit of what Geoff Johns has planned for Ulysses and how Superman reacts to his new friend's use of deadly force. (Zack Snyder suggests a high five.) Too by-the-numbers for my taste, “Men of Tomorrow” seems to have taken its expected dark turn leaving the continued bromance between the new friends in serious doubt. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Superman (2018) #1

Jul 18, 2018

The issue ends in a cliffhanger that suggests Superman's victory of Rogol Zaar may have been premature. I'll be curious to see just what more is revealed in issue #2. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Superman (2018) #18

Dec 21, 2019

The reveal is a smart, calculated move by a hero led as much by his internal struggle of the split in his life as what he views is best for all concerned going forward. There will obviously be ramifications to the events both in large and small ways across the entire DCU (and you have to wonder if Clark's admission accidentally outs any other characters accidentally through his connection to them). If anything, Bendis underplays events (rather than make an event comic out of the story). I'm curious to see what happens next. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Superman (2018) #19

Jan 27, 2020

Brian Michael Bendis brings back Mongul for the first villain to face Superman since coming out to the world. While I wouldn't rate the villain as a favorite, he does have the physical might to stand toe-to-toe with the Man of Steel for several rounds making him a legitimate threat (which is underlined by Mongul knocking Superman unconscious by the end of the issue). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Superman (2018) #25

Sep 15, 2020

The other half of the comic delves into the friendship between Lana Lang and Clark Kent as he invites his old friend to the Kent Farm for an interview hoping to help put the world at ease. There are some nice individual moments here, such as the apparently oblivious Lana realizing how lonely Clark was as a kid, but like the Synmar storyline things never develop past the initial stage.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Superman / Batman (2003) #76

Sep 30, 2010

For an issue of this title it's one of the best, but that's not saying much. Aside from a panel here and there (such as Batman being brought back to the Batcave) I'm not that impressed with the art by Eddie Berganza who can't seem to draw Superman the same way in any two panels (there was even one panel I thought he was weaving Superboy into the story for a moment!), or draw him significantly different than anyone else with dark hair seen here. That said, it's a story that should be told as well as read. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Superman / Batman (2003) #77

Oct 21, 2010

Much like in her recent appearance in Batgirl, I think Kara plays much better against another character than flying solo (of course part of that could just be the yawn-inspiring tales she has to put up with in her own book). With either Batgirl or here with Damian, she really shines.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Superman / Wonder Woman (2013) #1

Oct 14, 2013

DC hasn't been able to get me to stick with Wonder Woman or Superman's various solo titles, but I'm at least a little interested to see where this will lead. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Superman / Wonder Woman (2013) #2

Nov 19, 2013

Although I'm against Superman needing magic god armor to take on anyone, the series of events does get the Man of Steel bitch slapped by Apollo whose second move is nowhere near as intelligent and leaves the god at the mercy of Superman. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Supreme (2012) #63

Apr 9, 2012

After years in exile once again Supereme has returned to the Image Universe, with a terrific final issue from Moore that's a perfect reintroduction to the character. I'll be interested to see where Larken takes the character from here. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Supreme (2012) #64

May 9, 2012

I'll give Larsen credit for trying to do an amazing amount of work in terms of a tonal shift in only a single issue. In places he struggles, and his art is a little rougher than the more polished version we got in last month's issue that went so well with Moore's story. I liked the original character enough to stick around at least a couple of issues to see where Larsen plans to take him from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Supreme (2012) #65

Jul 1, 2012

The first issue following up Alan Moore‘s long-delayed final Supreme story had to do quite a bit of work to set the comic on a new path but I'm pleasantly surprised that even though the more vicious version of the character takes center stage here (as evidenced by him nearly beating Superpatriot to death) several of the more whimsical elements might still be allowed to flourish as well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Supreme (2012) #66

Aug 20, 2012

The Extreme version of Supreme is certainly back in full-force here, but the amount of rage he takes out on Suprema (nearly beating her to death) feels more than a little unseemly and too brutal even for this character. That said, the story does set up a huge fight next month – Supreme vs. Omni-Man. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Supreme (2012) #67

Jan 1, 2013

Honestly, when the comic three months without a new issue I figured the recently relaunched Supreme had been dealt a silent death behind the scenes. I'm pleasantly surprised it's still here. Even embracing the Extreme 90′s version of Image Comics it's still more fun that almost anything DC is currently putting out with their gritty New 52. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Supreme (2012) #68

Jan 14, 2013

The art is a little distracting and may not send Larsen out with the bang I was hoping for, but there's certainly enough here for fans of the character inducing foreshadowing of the possible return of the Supremacy and the arrival of a new baby Supreme in the not too distant future. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Tales of the Human Target (2022) #1

Aug 29, 2022

An interlude for the ongoing The Human Target twelve-issue maxi-series, the Tales of the Human Target one-shot gives us a look at three members of the Justice League and their separate attempts to do the right thing, not realizing the person that each was dealing with was the Human Target Christopher Chance.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teen Titans (2003) #88

Oct 30, 2010

And it doesn't hurt that it sports a cool cover and inside art from Nicola Scott whose work I loved (and miss) in Secret Six. This one's definitely worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teen Titans (2003) #92

Mar 2, 2011

A good wrap-up to the storyline, but a bit of a meloncholy one if neither of these characters is back next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teen Titans (2003) #93

Apr 5, 2011

The action itself isn't all that special, but the interplay between characters and emotions of the team's shakeup work quite well. I'm glad the team has its leader back, and even if their first test isn't something I'd choose, it's still a good beginning. It also doesn't hurt that we get another issue drawn in the clean, sleek and vibrant style of Nicola Scott. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Teen Titans (2011) #0

Oct 1, 2012

Scott Lobdell's writing aside (which is clunky and has a couple of huge plot holes) the story works for the most part up until Drake puts his family in danger by stealing from the Penguin. Yes, this earns him his face-to-face with Batman, but it's hardly the work of the genius the book espouses him to be. The comic also doesn't explain how Tim is able to continue being Tim, and live publicly with Bruce Wayne, with his parents in witness protection and the Penguin still after him. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Teen Titans (2011) #1

Oct 5, 2011

Teen Titans #1 isn't an awful first issue (the opening of Kid Flash aside), but for someone who was never a big Titans fan to begin with there's very little here to bring me back for a second issue. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
3
Teen Titans (2011) #15

Jan 9, 2013

Although Batgirl proves less than helpful (as she tells them, as nicely as possible, to fuck off and deal with their own issues), the team does run into Arsenal and Starfire, seeking out their own member of the Bat Family, as the issue catches up with the final page of Red Hood and the Outlaws #15. I'm so ready for this crossover to end. Hit and Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teen Titans (2016) #1

Oct 31, 2016

Kidnapping is certainly a Damian way to put together a team. Although Damian gives the team one reason he has assembled them together as the new Teen Titans, the issue ends with a far more personal reason. It seems Ra's al Ghul has grown tired of waiting for his grandson to tire of his Gotham City adventures and return to the League of Assassins. Offer Damian an ultimatum the boy has no intention of bowing down to, it falls on Robin to gather a group strong enough to fight what he knows is coming. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teen Titans (2016) #4

Jan 30, 2017

Thankfully for Damian, he made a greater impression on Beast Boy, Starfire, Raven, and Kid Flash than he expected. It seems Robin crafted himself a new team after all. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teen Titans (2016) #11

Aug 29, 2017

The comic is also notable for upping the character's powers considerably. Even without the ocean relic, the new Aqualad taps into his abilities and is able to make a stand against Black Manta. It will be interesting seeing the comic explore the depths of Aqualad's powers in the coming months. As for Manta, it doesn't look like he should expect a Father's Day card any time in the near future. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teen Titans (2016) #13

Oct 29, 2017

The other arc is a bit more interesting as Damian goes in search of someone more like himself to bolster the Titans line-up. Emiko Queen has the skills and a similar enough backstory that, in Damian's eyes, she would make a great addition. One problem: after a single conversation she turns the Boy Wonder down, flat. However, we'll see if teaming up to fight Onomatopoeia may lead to a change in heart. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teen Titans Go! #1

Dec 23, 2013

The back-up story from writer Merrill Hagan and Jorge Corona plays on Robin's obsessively-compulsive natures as the Boy Wonder and Beast Boy get into a bet while playing miniature golf. As often happens in the cartoon, the situation gets far out of control and gets the Titans banned from the golf course for life. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teen Titans Go! #2

Feb 22, 2014

Both adventures are fun. I like the choice of judges in the first story, and the inclusion of the classic version of Captain Cold (who is honestly surprised he was able to successfully freeze one of the heroes) is terrific. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teen Titans Go! #3

Jun 5, 2014

The party story works a little better than Cyborg's start-up (with references most young readers aren't going to get), but Teen Titans Go! #3 delivers another fun issue based on the current cartoon. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Teen Titans Go! #4

Jun 26, 2014

Too prove he's the team's best member Robin decides to create an obstacle course in the comic's second story centering each obstacle on his specific skill-set. However, when he's teammates beat him to the finish line it online infuriates their leader even more. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #1

Aug 26, 2011

Fans of the characters, especially from their comic roots, will want to pick this up (although there is a nice joke thrown in for fans of the animated series as well.). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #4

Dec 6, 2011

We'll have to wait and see how this new version of the Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles weaves April O'Neil and other characters like the Shredder further into the comic, but for a first arc it's been a fun ride. Now let's see what kind of trouble the turtles can get into now that they've been reunited. And, if you can find it, I'd definitely recommend picking up the variant cover by Turtle co-creator Kevin Eastman. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #5

Dec 24, 2011

Although I'm still missing the original look of Kevin Eastman's art this comic is proving to be one of best around. Best of the Week.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #6

Feb 1, 2012

The issue feels a little like filler as it spends most of its time setting up stories that will be told in the next few issues. Still, it opens with a pretty darn good action sequence and does give us the first appearance of the Mousers. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #7

Feb 29, 2012

If you're not reading this comic, I don't know what to tell you. It's got talking brains inside mechanical bodies, giant philosophical rats, and Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles. Honestly, what more do you want? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #8

Apr 4, 2012

Tons of action, a little more insight into Krang's plans, and April finally meeting the turtles. What more could you want? Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #9

May 2, 2012

Honestly, the first page of April working out the story, and her reaction to them reintroducing themselves to her, is worth picking up all by itself. We also get plenty of heroes in a half-shell action. And, certainly not least important, issue #9 also finally gives us the first real shot of the Shredder, in all his ridiculous glory. Oh yeah, you know you want it. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #10

Jun 6, 2012

I'm a little surprised how quickly the Turtles have abandoned the sewers, but I'm happy to see that Splinter has finally confronted his old adversary (even if it does seem a little drawn out). Now he just has to make it out alive to give us the confrontation we really want to see – the first battle between the Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles and the Shredder. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #11

Jul 4, 2012

It's Splinter who takes center stage in terms of this issue's aciton as he not only takes takes down every single Foot ninja The Shredder can throw at him, and the Foot's mutant soldier Alopex, be he still has enough moxie left over to challenge the man who destroyed everything he loved. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #12

Jul 30, 2012

The issue ends with the foreshadowing of a possible Angel/Casey/April love triangle and April finally officially meeting Splinter and being able to finally thank him for saving his life. We also get the rather inglorious end to Old Hob and the news General Krang is prepared to go ahead with the ominous sounding “Plan B.” Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #13

Aug 28, 2012

The main story points have to do with the Turtles killing time after saving Splinter while The Shredder (who is drawn for the first time with pupils instead of zombie eyes) finds only disapproval with his granddaughter Karai. There's also the return of the subplot of Casey Jones and his abusive father. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #14

Oct 4, 2012

I love the original look of the characters, and had gotten used to Duncan's version of them, but I'm simply not a fan of how Kuhn's style (particularly the way he draws the comic's four main characters), which is a big problem going forward making me wonder how long I can continue to stay with the comic. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #15

Nov 5, 2012

I was surprised to see the comic reintroduce Slash so early in its run. His new origin is certainly more in line with the current comic (and far less confusing than trying to reintroduce him as an eco-terrorist from another dimension) and the first battle with his Turtle-brethren is certainly action-packed. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #16

Dec 7, 2012

The conclusion of the issue leaves Leonardo with some heavy soul searching and Michelangelo loosing another friend to the Turtles' dangerous lifestyle as well as a new team-up that could cause serious trouble for the Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles when an injured Slash is found by their enemy Old Hob. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #17

Dec 17, 2012

Although the version of the Neutrinos we see her are far more comfortable with violence than the original characters created for the cartoon, the comic does a good job at dealing with the fallout of the previous issue while spending the proper amount of time introducing the group, without giving too much away too soon, and staring a new arc featuring the Turtles traveling to Dimension X. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #19

Feb 27, 2013

The comic also gives us (not nearly enough) scenes of Karai‘s own mission as the Shredder‘s daughter sneaks onto Burnow Island causing mischief and mayhem on Krang's home base on Earth. Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles #19 isn't bad, but it's an awful lot of Neutrino politics and set-up for a battle that's barely begun before the comic comes to a close. In fact you could probably skip this issue entirely and not skip a beat picking the comic up again next month. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #20

Mar 23, 2013

Although Honeycutt eventually hands himself over to Krang who makes his escape, the Turtles are able to save the King and Queen and make it home safely where Karai has been getting into some mischief of her own on Burnow Island involving some stolen mutigen (perhaps foreshadowing the introduction Rocksteady and Bebop). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #21

Apr 26, 2013

Fans of Eastman's style will definitely want to pick this issue up as Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles #21 is filled with several fight sequences all drawn in the original style of the first TMNT comics. Longtime fans of the Turtles should be able to guess the identity of the Turtles' attacker, but it certainly doesn't take away from one hell of a great comic. Must-Read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #22

Jun 3, 2013

I don't envy any artist starting a new arc following and issue Kevin Eastman drew himself. Honestly, I have a mixed reaction to the art by Mateus Santolouco, especially with his depiction of April. Some of the action sequences are well done, but I think it's going to take me some time to get used to his style. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #23

Jul 2, 2013

The early juxtaposition of Leonardo and Casey is well-handled. Casey's story offers more insight for April into her friend's relationship with Angel, and Leonardo's story (which includes a cameo from a concerned Karai) offers serious repercussions for the Turtles and the rest of the city. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #24

Aug 4, 2013

With Leonardo on his side, the Shredder and the Foot (whose gang war attacks for total control of the city have increased as well) look almost unbeatable. The issue puts my favorite Turtle at the forefront and gives his brothers the unique problem of trying to stop the brainwashed Leonardo who is now out to destroy them all. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #25

Sep 5, 2013

With the promise of the addition of Rocksteady and Bebop, and more of Alopex and Karai, the full roster is filling out nicely. My only real complaint with the comic is the inconsistent art from artist Mateus Santolouco whose style is at time distracting. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #26

Sep 29, 2013

Things are certainly looking bleak for our heroes as Leonardo (still struggling a bit against Kitsune‘s brainwashing) continues to help Shredder with his master plan. However, it appears Karai (perhaps with the assistance of Alopex) may have plans of her own. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #27

Nov 7, 2013

With the help of Old Hob and Slash, Splinter, Michelangelo,Donatello, andRaphaelcrash the party to rescue Leonardo. However, they don't plan on Karai showing up with her two new mutant soldiers: Rocksteady and Bebop. Now things are gonna get interesting. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #28

Dec 4, 2013

With The Foot in control of New York and the Turtles in exile to lick their wounds and put their family back together the series moves forward into its new arc beginning next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #29

Dec 23, 2013

From Leonardo and Raphael‘s continued squabbling, and Leo's refusal to accept Splinter's commands, it's obvious there's much healing to be done over the next few months but the tale April's parents have to tell may give the Turtles yet another reason for returning home sooner than planned. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #30

Feb 5, 2014

The low-key issue is very much presented as the calm before the storm. Alopex finds at least temporary acceptance with the Turtles, Leonardo begins interacting with his family, and even Raphael lets his guard down a bit. However, it is all to be short-lived as Karai‘s agents have found the Turtles which should lead into a much more action-packed issue next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #31

Mar 5, 2014

Other than the first appearance of Koya, who we should be seeing much more of next issue, and April's haircut, Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles #31 is most notable for Leonardo accepting the blue mask from Splinter and taking his place alongside his brothers yet again. Now we see if Shredder's training, with the abscence of the brainwashing, has made Leonardo a more fierce warrior or if this too will take time. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #37

Aug 22, 2014

The battle with Krang means the return of Koya and the first appearance of Bludgeon as the comic's mutant character pool continues to build. The comic's B-story features Alopex still on her own after abandoning both the Foot and the Turtles, but after the fox is approached and bewitched by a vision of Kitsune it appears Alopex's freedom will be short lived. As someone who would like to see her stay firmly on the side of the Turtles this isn't a development I particularly like, but it should at least give us more of the character in the coming months. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #38

Oct 11, 2014

Donnie's departure is unexpected but certainly makes sense from the his point of view weighing the severity of threats against the Turtles and the world. Along with a cameo from Pete and teasing the return of Rocksteady and Bebop in next month's issue, Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles #38 introduces Herman and Mondo Gecko who despite their looks (and lack of training) have been well-armed to be a part of Hob's army. Of course just how far Hob plans to take his mutants-first crusade, and how long Splinter will support him, will have to be seen. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #39

Oct 30, 2014

More concerned with the events in Dimension X and the construction of the Technodrome nearing completion, Donatello leaves the group to enlist the help of Harold and work towards stopping the Krang invasion of Earth which he sees as a far greater threat that the Shredder‘s vendetta against Splinter and his family. I don't expect this split to last all that long but it does open Donnie up for his own storylines while opening a spot on the team for my favorite new character of the series. Yeah, I'm pretty happy Alopex is back in action once more (now would somebody get busy making me a figure?). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #40

Dec 9, 2014

Those waiting for a full-on action issue won't be disappointed, although the far less action-packed subplot between Casey and April's father grows the relationship between the two characters but mostly gets in the way of more awesome action. The extended fight sequence is great, and Donatello‘s own actions at the end of the issue foreshadow unusual days to come, but I'm most happy with the return of Alopex who has apparently found her home in the city with Angel. The panels between the arctic fox and Raphael are ridiculously cute and I'm hoping we'll see far more of her in the future (along with a toy!). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #41

Dec 29, 2014

Rounding out Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles #41 the issue also offers glimpses into Casey and April‘s current life away from their friends while Baxter Stockman and Professor Honeycutt come to their own understanding about the Technodrome and the looming destruction of all mankind. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #42

Feb 3, 2015

As plans go it's pretty darn good and makes for a nice twist, although it still leaves plenty of room for something to go wrong and the leaves the door open to either one of the Turtles' enemies realizing how the Turtles have used them. Of course if it works the Turtles will be able to destroy the war machine as their enemies destroy each other. But if things went down that easily where would that leave the series as the heroes would be left with no enemies to fight tomorrow? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #43

Mar 2, 2015

The only ones not thrown into action are Alopex (who sadly doesn't appear in the issue) and Donatello who is likely going to face the wrath of Shredder next month as, after discovering the betrayal, the leader of The Foot orders Rocksteady and Bebop to kill the Turtle. Gulp. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #44

Mar 29, 2015

The issue wraps up most of the ongoing storylines while opening the door for this version of Karai to become a more interesting character in the coming months. Issue #44 also gives us the return of Alopex and Angel along with the defeat of General Krang. Sadly it also marks the death of a Donatello whose loss will likely be felt in every single panel of the series from this point on. It's a bold move likely to enrage its share of fans but it also allows the series to break with tradition and take the remaining three Turtles on a different journey than we've ever seen before. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #45

May 5, 2015

The issue also gives us Casey (seemingly fully-healed from his life-threatening injuries) hitting the streets and teases a new partnership for the Shredder and Baxter Stockman which will also likely play a role in the final arc of the series. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #46

Jun 4, 2015

For a single issue Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles #46 tackles quite a lot, and I'm not sure how all of these threads will get woven together and fully addressed in only four issues, but I'll stick around to find out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #48

Aug 13, 2015

With only two issues left the series continues to build to a finale that has an increasing number of stories to wrap-up. Since I've enjoyed this series more than any TMNT comic since the first volume I'm going to be sad to see it end. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #55

Mar 11, 2016

The issue also spends several pages on April and Casey‘s relationship hitting the inevitable brick wall given his stubbornness and her desires for more out of their lives. Personally, I could have done with far less of this plotline and more of Alopex who we see both helping Angel with the Street Phantoms and getting her mind played with by Kitsune. Given the later I'm growing increasingly afraid of Alopex being boxed into the role of a tragic figure. As my favorite of all of the new characters created for this series (or the recent cartoon) I'm holding out hope that Eastman and Waltz have more in store for the fox than an unfortunate end. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #100

Dec 18, 2019

The sacrifice of Splinter and return of a less-murderous Oroku Saki felt like an echo of Magneto's X-Men from so many years ago. I'm not sure where such a move takes the Turtles moving forward, but it certainly shakes up the status quo (in a way IDW wasn't willing to do in allowing Donatello to stay dead or a robot). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #101

Jan 16, 2020

Donnie's narration leads us through the city to check-in with several characters including Alopex who has put down her weapons to open a shelter in Mutant Town and all of the recently mutated who find themselves trapped within the walls. Finding a new purpose, Alopex is one of the only characters that doesn't feel lost (even April seems to be disconnected from the larger world) and Jennika is in desperate search of family and belonging that is decidedly lacking between her fellow Turtles since the death of Splinter. The question is, what exactly will break the Turtles out of their malaise and reunite them once more? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #102

Feb 6, 2020

Diamond and the weasels are both interesting additions to the status quo, the former's angry self-interest and the foreshadowing of the weasel's potential both open new avenues for trouble in Manhattan and a situation potentially large enough to inspire the reunion of family. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #103

Feb 26, 2020

In the other pages of the issue, the plot continue to follows the turtles. The disappearance of Michelangelo allows for some bonding between two of the brothers while Donatello seeks some comfort in an old friend by visiting April. Raphael is his usual churlish self, although Jennika does get a couple of good licks in calling out the turtle, and his brothers, for recent behavior. These continue to be strong character-driven moments while the story unfolds outside of the turtles' vision. What will, finally, bring them back? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #104

Mar 26, 2020

The other piece of the story picks up on Sally Pride splitting from Old Hob and the Mutanimals and protecting the adorable young mutants (all of whom get names here). A catharsis from what has been lost, a new story begins here. of Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #105

Jul 6, 2020

Along with the concert that allows the turtles to blow off steam, we also get the beginnings of their new roles as instructors and masters as the Splinter Clan continues to grow even more. It appears Splinter's legacy is in good hands, and the Turtles (and their new friends) will be ready for whatever happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #107

Aug 7, 2020

Splitting the focus a bit, the latest comic also checks in on April who the Turtles send after Baxter Stockman when discovering the Mousers (and who it appears is also in control of the Slithery). There are also a few panels which catch us up Lita‘s failed attempts to lead the other kids, whose reason for their capture has still not yet been explained, in escape. With the other Turtles now captured as well, who is coming to save the kids?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #108

Aug 31, 2020

April also learns that Baxter Stockman isn't in control of the creature but simply monitoring it and taking steps to prevent it from reaching the outside world (along with a hidden agenda he chooses not to share). The knowledge of Stockman's activities allows April to leverage more power but how far can she push the mad scientist before he starts pushing back?

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #111

Nov 17, 2020

In a comic that highlights the core group's ninja moves, Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles #111 also offers a pair of emotional moments. First there's Sally comforting Mona Lisa after the brutal reality of her parents unfortunate reaction to her mutation. Second, there's the warm fuzzy of the kids celebrating the Turtles' victory.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #112

Dec 15, 2020

In an issue that brings Casey Jones to Mutant Town, he's largely overshadowed by the internal strife within what was once New York City. However, the Turtles may have a solution for who can gather and lead the mutants as they suggest Sally Pryde run for office.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #114

Feb 19, 2021

The issue offers basic time traveler moments where Lita encounters herself and her friends, Jennika confronts Karai with thoughts of murder in her head (leading to a physical confrontation between her and Raphael), and the Turtles' first encounter with Rahzar and Tokka (which ends with one the group being flung several blocks through the air after mistakenly upsetting them).

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #116

Apr 29, 2021

While some of the other mutants don't understand the time and energy everyone is putting into a musical performance, the process brings the group together even more as the issue comes to the and on the eve of the competition. Time to rock!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #117

Jun 16, 2021

While the current storylines appear to be wrapping up, there's still Old Hob and the election and the return of Oroku Saki who will be providing something quite different to the title than what various Turtle adaptations have done with the character in the past. Yes, the future does look bright indeed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #119

Jul 26, 2021

Following up from last week's issue, we see more of Oroku Saki stepping in silently to do what he can (here taking out one of Hob's assassins). Will the larger chaos finally force the Turtles old enemy, now ally, to leave the shadows and reveal himself?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #120

Sep 1, 2021

Despite his recent change of heart, Old Hob has plenty to pay for as the comic ends in another cliffhanger. Will he get the beatdown Raphael thinks he so richly deserves? Or will calmer heads prevail and will the Turtles turn another former enemy into an ally?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #121

Oct 7, 2021

Sally is safe, and her rise to the first legitimate leader of Mutant Town seems assured. Many questions remain, however. What do they do with Hob and Sally's old friend Ray? And will the weasels take the decision out of the others' hands by releasing Hob and possibly even leave with him? Also, just who was Hob talking to on the phone and what other tricks might he have up his sleeve?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #122

Oct 27, 2021

There's a hopefulness here with so many of the characters planning and building for the future, despite the challenges ahead. We also get Halloween night, complete with frankly adorable costumes for everyone. With characters splitting up important roles within Mutant Town, it's no surprise which Turtle takes on the role of protector, although Raphael‘s first attempt to collar Hob doesn't end so well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #123

Dec 6, 2021

We get a trip to a fight club, an introduction of a character teased earlier, Casey and Leonardo dealing with some street trash, and Leo thinking through finding new connections outside of his family. Not complete without a tie-in to the ongoing story, we also see the return of Old Hob luring away the weasels. What new trouble is he up to?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) #124

Dec 27, 2021

Without the need for dialogue, Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles #124 hits on several of the themes of the current arc offering a melancholy Christmas for all concerned, but one at least where the Turtles know the weasels are safe. Saki continues to help where he can as we wait for the former nemesis to eventually reveal himself.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) Annual: 2014

Sep 2, 2014

As annuals go, it's weird and goofy to be sure and probably worth picking up for Eastman's art (despite the $8 price tag). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles (2011) Annual: 2012

Nov 7, 2012

I'm not the biggest fan of the Rashomon storytelling angle Eastman uses here, but I I love the look and feel of the characters and their surroundings. At $9 it's certainly going to scare off a few buyers, but Eastman fills the comic with as many of the reintroduced characters as possible and provides tons of story and action, along with a great wrap-around cover, longtime fans should enjoy. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles / Usagi Yojimbo: WhereWhen #1

Apr 19, 2023

Written and beautifully drawn by Stan Sakai, there's much to enjoy here for fans of both franchises, although the swap does make it seem like we won't get the Turtles and Usagi together for at least another issue. The Turtles, will have to deal with Usagi's distrustful friends, setting up a classic hero vs. hero misunderstanding, while the rabbit ronin will need to find his way back to the past.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles / Usagi Yojimbo: WhereWhen #2

May 12, 2023

The second issue of Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles/Usagi Yojimbo: WhereWhen picks up immediately from where the first issue ended in the classic hero misunderstanding with the friends mistakenly taking the newly arrived Turtles for the Kappa who have been terrorizing the area.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles / Usagi Yojimbo: WhereWhen #4

Jul 6, 2023

Plenty of action for fans here involving both the Turtles and Usagi Yojimbo characters fighting off the various robots. We also get some rising tensions in the camp from Noriyuki's subordinates which, given his order to remain until their wounded and dead could be taken care of, may come up again before the mini-series' concluding issue (if any of the army survives).

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles / Usagi Yojimbo: WhereWhen #5

Aug 15, 2023

4 Razors, TMNT, Usagi Yojimbo

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles Micro-Series #4

Apr 28, 2012

You definitely get your money's worth in terms of action as almost the entire comic showcases Leo's fight with the ninja and their mysterious leader (who may, or may not be the Shredder). In terms of writing and art I don't think it measures up to the the main title. However, if you have a favorite Ninja Turtle, this series has given you a chance to grab a comic centered solely around them. That's not too shabby, even if it is slightly overpriced. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #1

Jul 14, 2013

I really enjoyed this first issue and the comic's take on version of the characters being used in the cartoon. I'm glad to see the comic simply jump right into the world rather than feel the need to do another origin story. Fans of the other Turtle books or the cartoon are going to have no trouble following the series. It's also nice to see that IDW isn't just shoving out another Turtles title without some care to the quality of the book. This issue has sold me on the series which, as long as the quality keeps up, I hope to see get a long run. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #2

Aug 29, 2013

Where I though the first issue did a terrific job of kicking off the new series, issue #2 is solid and enjoyable comic but it's certainly a (small) step down from issue #1 (although fans of Snakeweed may enjoy this one more than I did). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #3

Sep 22, 2013

Any issue that forces the other turtles to take Mikey seriously is a good one. Although they aren't really zombies, Mikey's knowledge of the walking dead not only discovers the problem but helps the turtles defeat the Kraang. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #4

Nov 2, 2013

Writer Erik Burnham steps in with this issue and the comic doesn't miss a beat as it continues to have the same feel, pace, and humor of the latest Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles cartoon. Aside from the action, the issue also teaches lessons to both Raphael (to not be so quick to run head-first into action) and his brothers (who need to adopt Raphael's reckless style to save him). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #5

Nov 30, 2013

Of the characters created for the new animated show, Fishface is one of the oddest. I haven't been the biggest fan of his, butTeenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: New Animated Adventures #5 uses the setting to the character's advantage, making him a credible threat given the circumstances the Turtles find themselves in. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #6

Dec 28, 2013

Memorable mostly for the characters interactions (such as Raphael literally poking the beast after being warned not to), and with plenty of action and Turtle hijinks, fans of the show should enjoy the foursome's latest adventure. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #7

Jan 19, 2014

The ridiculousness of Mikey and Raphael in women's clothing doesn't go unnoticed by both friends and enemies, and Donnie's attempts to shrug off any romantic aspects of his night with April seem only partially successful. And I always enjoy the combination of Leo and Karai, which is one of the TV show's most interesting pairings. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #8

Mar 1, 2014

Those who are more fond of the Rat King than I am are likely to enjoy the issue more than I did, but even so there's enough here in terms of character interaction and developing ongoing plots which I felt helped the comic work despite focusing on a villain I don't much care for. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #9

Apr 3, 2014

Both stories are fun and play on basic character traits of the Turtles. The first story allows the two to eventually come to an understanding. The second showcases Raph's bruised ego and Donnie, Michelangelo, and Leonardo choosing not give their brother a hard time after learning his shiner came in the service of helping a friend. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #10

May 2, 2014

The goofy adventure (set bizarrely around Valentine's Day for a late April comic) is fun while highlighting another of the Turtles' weirder villains. Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: New Animated Adventures #10 also includes a Mikey back-up story where the Turtle's one-track mind races his brothers into a desperate situation (which turns out to be pizza). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #11

May 21, 2014

While not quite as entertaining, the episode's back-up story features the Turtles interrupting the Kraang‘s latest Mutagen experiment transforming a cut little bunny into something for the Turtles to push through a portal (after their done beating up the Kraang). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #12

Jul 5, 2014

The issue also includes a short back-up story involving April outwitting the Turtles to share the final two slices of pizza with Splinter and another chapter of the LEGO adventures of the Turtles showcasing their origins in LEGO form for the first time. Of the two, the LEGO tale is the more interesting back-up tale, but it's the main story that makes this one worth picking up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #13

Aug 3, 2014

The other story included features an injured Raphael ignoring Splinter‘s repeated orders to rest his shoulder. It takes Raph getting buried alive while taking on some leftover Mousers for the Turtle to finally learn his lesson. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #14

Aug 20, 2014

The pair of goofy stories both center around well-established character traits and fit well into the comic's existing catalog. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #15

Sep 25, 2014

Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: New Animated Adventures #15 also offers a pair of goofy and enjoyable back-up stories. The first is presented from the perspective of Ice Cream Kitty who fancies herself a legendary hero with the freezer door is mistakenly left open allowing the slowly-melting warrior to dispense justice on the streets of New York. The second storyline involves Splinter‘s attempt to master Mikey's favorite video game, which offers only frustration for the Turtles' master. All three stories work well and are certainly worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #16

Oct 26, 2014

Both stories prove to be fun as Splinter is able to teach his sons a lesson about respecting his privacy while providing them with a nightly adventure that was more than they bargained for. Donnie's story, while goofy, offers some fun moments as well such as the man's statement to the cops about the crazy night. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #18

Jan 2, 2015

The holiday-themed back-up story offers a bit more enjoyment as Mikey freaks out discovering he's been chosen as Raphael's Secret Santa. However, knowing his brother so well, Mikey eventually comes up with the best present anyone could ever give Raph for Christmas. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles New Animated Adventures #20

Mar 1, 2015

The comic's back-up story features the Turtles struggling with a blackout. With all their favorite pizza places closed, and none of them wanting Mikey to cook, the Turtles accept their brother's challenge of a pizza baking contest which just goes to prove that loving pizza and being able to make pizza are two very different things. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles vs. Street Fighter (2023) #1

Jun 19, 2023

I enjoyed myself here, but not enough to stick around for four more issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: The Armageddon Game: Opening Moves #1

Jul 21, 2022

In what seems to be the plan for each of these Opening Moves issues, Saki and Kitsune enter the mind of one of their enemies looking for knowledge and weakness which will help in the struggle to come. In this issue that is General Krang, and I'll admit that's where my interest in the comic waned as I've never been the biggest fan of the more intergalactic tales in the TMNT universe. Still, the pair gain some knowledge and will continue their search in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #20

Apr 4, 2018

At $5 the comic does really have enough for the casual reader, but for fans of Raph and Alopex there's enough here to enjoy. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Universe #25

Aug 9, 2018

Leonardo will need all his wits to fight off the attack of Kitsune, but he's learned enough to evade and eventually escape his enemies attacks. He's also learned to enjoy some rest with his brothers prior to the next fight the Turtles will inevitably find themselves embroiled in. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Thanos (2016) #1

Nov 26, 2016

Thanos #1 is a strong reintroduction to the character. The first issue also sets up the plan to stop whatever the Mad Titan has planned in a subplot involving the rather obscure Champion of the Universe recruiting a reluctant Starfox to find out just what exactly Thanos is after. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
2
Thanos Rising #1

Apr 8, 2013

After giving us the birth of the blue-skinned baby Thanos in a world filled with bland suburban Caucasians, the story follows the outcast finally making friends and to learn his first lessons about death. None of which is of any interest. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The 7th Sword #1

May 16, 2014

Part fantasy, part sci-fi, part western, with swordplay, killer robots and monsters and a reluctant hero all thrown in, The 7th Sword #1 is a strong opening to the series. I'm curious to see more of Cray and his journey. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The 7th Sword #2

Jun 9, 2014

The 7th Sword #2 sets up the arc for the remaining issues of the mini-series with the warrior agreeing to train and fight for ZenZion while teasing the possible romantic entanglement of Cray and Kathleen which might entice the samurai to stay far longer. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The 7th Sword #3

Jul 12, 2014

The issue ends with Cray satisfied in his warriors but news of the size of the army Kavanaugh can bring to bear forces Kathleen to ignore the samurai's wisdom yet again and set her technicians to reading the unreliable Hamerhead killing machine to fight alongside the group in hopes of improving their slim odds. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The 7th Sword #7

Feb 19, 2015

With the mini-series coming to a close and Cray choosing to stay in ZenZion I'm not sure whether or not we'll eventually see further adventures of the space mercenary samurai but for while it lasted The 7th Sword #7 proved to be a fun ride. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Avenging Spider-Man #7

May 13, 2012

She-Hulk has been far underused in the Marvel Universe of late and any time she's game to show for another issue here I'll be sure to pick it up. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2021) #1

Apr 20, 2021

The story also suggests Batman's experience meeting the gang led to the evolution of his costume and to growing the Bat-Family to including teenagers who he sees have a knack for solving crimes (and even inspires the addition of Scooby's hero Ace the Bat-Hound).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2021) #2

May 17, 2021

After the discovery of the Joker's Trojan Horse, the Dynamic Duo lays a trap of their own for the Joker and his henchmen (making their second cameo appearance in opening and closing the comic) after escaping police custody in record time (seriously, how incompetent is the GCPD?) leading to the capture of the villain again.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2021) #7

Oct 19, 2021

The real surprise comes from the reveal of the identity of the villain behind the abduction and ransom of more than 30 dogs in Gotham City as The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries gives us my favorite Bat-villain of all time: Catman!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2021) #8

Nov 15, 2021

JH Development turns out to be Joker and Harley Quinn constructing a Joker World amusement park which they use to try and kill Batman and those meddling kids. While it's unclear what the park is for (other than feeding the Joker's vanity), the creepy super-villain attraction meshes well with Scooby-Doo themes. The villains are caught, and like all classic Scooby-Doo stories, the ghost has a rational explanation as well, leaving Batman the decision of what to do with Joker Land. Thankfully, a little branding goes a long way.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2021) #9

Dec 21, 2021

Batman only makes a cameo at the end to take the Riddler into custody, while leaving Scooby and the gang working with the super-villain for most of the issue in an unexpected twist. Daphne is able to discover the source of the ghost while Velma uncovers the trick the Riddler has played on them all, but in the end it takes all of them to find the treasure.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2021) #10

Jan 17, 2022

Renee, appearing both as herself and the Question, is a fun addition that fits right in with Scooby-Doo and the gang. Unlike the gang's usual traps, the one Batman sets captures both Shaggy Man and the General without a hitch (although I don't know if Batman really needed to surf in able to pull that off, but to each his own).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2021) #11

Feb 14, 2022

The Creeper fits into the comic's oddball characters even if the reveal our baddie (a former criminal, now working at the museum), is a little odd. Turns out he is responsible for the theft and appearances of ghostly apparitions inspired by classic detective story characters to scare off others from the exhibit.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2021) #12

Mar 14, 2022

While there's not much mystery here, there's certainly lots of fun including Catman vs. Catwoman (with puns!). Even Calendar Man and Bat-Cow make appearances. And, of course, there's only one character who would ever bring such chaos together offering a nice nod to Batman: The Brave and The Bold to end the series with a big win for our heroes.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2022) #1

Oct 19, 2022

Although not the biggest fan of Batman, Inc., I'm happy to see this comic back and the goofy concept of the various Batmen does fit the tone of the comic well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2022) #2

Dec 28, 2022

While the other members of the team help Batman uncover what Poison Ivy has planned, we get plenty of Daphne as Batgirl including a twist on the classic Scooby-Doo unmasking scene where Ivy discovers Batgirl's true identity is… Daphne Blake? Fun times.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2022) #3

Jan 16, 2023

The story has the feel of Scooby-Doo, complete with Scooby and Shaggy gags with the monster of the week and eventual unmasking. However, the comic has an odd look that ultimately feels more like a sticker book, with stickers laid on top of completely separate backgrounds, than recreated cell panels (which I'm guessing was the intent).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2022) #4

Feb 21, 2023

Other than an appearance by Batman at the beginning and the identity of the person behind the ghosts haunting the beach being a classic villain, The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries #4 is a pretty standard Scooby-Doo story that doesn't really need the Caped Crusader to make it work. Although superfluous, it's always fun to see the Scooby version of Batman (and the comic does also deliver my favorite version of one of the Bat-villains in the unmasking) so there's still something here for fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2022) #6

Mar 16, 2023

3.5 Razors, Batman, Mystery, Scooby-Doo

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2022) #7

Apr 24, 2023

There's some fun to be had here with the comic continuing to show off Daphne's skills, in a call-back to earlier issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2022) #9

Jun 23, 2023

The use of classic Scooby-Doo villain Ghost Clown works well for the story while letting Batman and readers jump to false conclusions that the Joker is responsible for ruining the Scooby Gang's big day.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2022) #10

Jul 17, 2023

Fun adventure that offers the unmasking of a classic DC villain at the end (even if the physics of how the super-villain kept his costume under the pirate mask makes no sense). We don't get all that much from Mystery, Inc. in the investigation, and only a little for Batman, with so much of the story happening before the arrival of the pirates, but they do solve one of the room mysteries earlier in the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2022) #11

Aug 17, 2023

The comic shows an appreciation of Bat-history, and it is nice to see Oracle get some love (although in the same comic series that gave us Barbara as Batgirl not all that long ago, the change does feel a bit sudden).

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2022) #12

Sep 20, 2023

Still, for fans of both Scooby-Doo! and Batman Beyond, the unexpected team-up is a fun way to wrap-up another team-up series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Batman & Scooby-Doo Mysteries (2024) #1

Jan 3, 2024

You'll likely see the unmasking coming, but the issue does follow the typical Scooby-Doo style and its fun to see Nightwing back under the big top and involved with the group showing of his acrobatic skills.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Death of Doctor Strange: X-Men / Black Knight #1

Jan 24, 2022

A tie-in issue to The Death of Doctor Strange ongoing Marvel story arc, The Death of Doctor Strange: X-Men/Black Knight is more an issue to flesh-out Jacks Chopra than anything else as both daughter and father work out their trust issues in the middle of a battle against demons.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Fade Out #1

Oct 4, 2014

Although it lacks the strong female lead of Velvet or Josephine, there's much to recommend here as Brubaker and Phillips go all-in for a period crime story with all the trimmings (making use of research assistant Amy Condit) whose motives may take quite some time to unravel. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Fade Out #3

Nov 24, 2014

Although I'm not enjoying The Fade Out as much as Velvet (or the best issues of the now complete Fatale), writer Ed Brubaker and Sean Phillips continue to keep my interest by shining a light into the dark corners of post-WWII Hollywood and continuing to slowly build out the world of Victory Street Pictures. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Flash: Season Zero #1

Oct 13, 2014

Although the hero is far from victorious, the first issue does a solid job in reintroducing the characters and events of the “Pilot” while expanding this version of the Flash's Rogues gallery with some colorful new villains. I haven't been picking up the Arrow comic, but this one has a definite chance to remain on my pull-list as long as it keeps it's $3 price-tag. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Flash: Season Zero #2

Nov 18, 2014

Although we don't get a traditional Flash comic villain, the grouping of the circus freaks (and their evil clowns) led by the villainous Nathan Bliss adds to the danger as the Flash will be forced to take on multiple meta-humans at once for the first time. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Flash: Season Zero #3

Dec 20, 2014

The issue also illustrates that Barry's deepest fears and nightmares don't involve the legion of evil meta-humans waiting for him, or even the mysterious man in the yellow suit who stole his life, but the two most important people in his life he feels he has failed: his parents. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Flash: Season Zero #5

Mar 4, 2015

Fans of both The Flash and Arrow should enjoy the crossover even if questions are left unanswered. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Flash: Season Zero #10

Jul 2, 2015

Given its focus you could certainly argue that The Flash: Season Zero #10 is more a Suicide Squad issue than a Flash issue, but our hero still finds moments to shine (such as getting rid of the explosive device in the comic's climax) even if it leaves limited opportunities for his supporting cast to earn much time. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Green Hornet (2013) #1

Apr 1, 2013

Waid is a great storyteller and, together with Indro, has found a new character to revitalize. Fans of the character should enjoy this fresh, yet certainly old-school, retelling of the Green Hornet's adventures. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Green Hornet (2013) #2

May 20, 2013

Waid's take on the character continues to focus on the theatrics of the Hornet going to further and further extremes while also showcasing the power of the press and the threat from saboteurs in a world at war. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Green Hornet (2013) #3

Jul 7, 2013

The comic does a good job at showing us events from both Reid and Kato's perspective as Reid's harsh (but in his mind necessary) tactics are viewed completely different even by his best friend. I don't think we need worry a permanent split between the pair, but it's likely things will continue to get worse between the Hornet and Kato before they get better. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Green Hornet (2013) #4

Aug 1, 2013

Even if I have issues with where the arc is heading, I'll admit this might be the kind of story that could appeal more to new readers of the the Green Hornet rather than those of us carrying decades of the character's history with us. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Green Hornet (2013) #5

Sep 3, 2013

Rather than become a broken man the Hornet becomes one possessed with finding the truth. Although he's been humbled this doesn't mean the man's massive ego has been put in check, as Reid still believes on shadowy streets the Green Hornet is infallible. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Green Hornet (2013) #6

Oct 9, 2013

The final sequences gives us the Green Hornet and Kato finally confronting the businessmen behind the bombings (featuring a great splash page by artist Daniel Indro), and the comic ends on a cliffhanger as we will soon see just how far Reid is willing to go to sell the Hornet's act when he is tasked with killing and FBI agent. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Green Hornet (2013) #7

Nov 14, 2013

Personally I'm hoping the radio adventure is short-lived as there's just something about the character that fits the mold of a newspaper man and the series, in the early issues, have used The Sentinel well by establishing it as another character. Case being introduced to her boss' secrets begins to widen the network the vigilante can rely on while also laying the groundwork of possible romance down the line. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Green Hornet (2013) #8

Dec 29, 2013

Although there's no mention of Christmas, the story fits well as a holiday-themed one-shot. It's also a nice break from the series' long opening arc (and I would love to see more single issue adventures in the months to come). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Green Hornet (2013) #9

Feb 12, 2014

I'm not going to lie, Green Hornet #9 is a depressing issue (and more than a little gruesome with what Dugan goes through to dispose of his wife's body), but it's also a strong issue that hits the hero with a completely unexpected consequence that may take several issues to play out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Green Hornet (2013) #10

Mar 12, 2014

Callahan‘s investigation into the fake Hornet ties nicely into the storyline from Green Hornet #8 while wrapping up the storyline of The Voice (while still leaving unseen aristocrats behind his broadcasts free to cause future mischief). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Green Hornet (2013) #11

Apr 11, 2014

Aside from continued dark turn of Dugan, Green Hornet #11 also offers Lenore Case to get into the action (in costume), which she enjoys a little too much for Britt Reid's comfort. How both characters' roles play out should be fun to watch over the series' final two issues. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Green Hornet (2013) #12

May 28, 2014

Wrapping up quite a bit, including making sure Lieutenant Dugan goes down for the murder of his wife, while forcing the Hornet to continue to deal with the guilt surrounding his unintentional role in the murder of Fulton's daughter, writer Mark Waid still leaves the final fate of both Britt Reid and the Green Hornet to be decided heading into next month's final issue of the series. Someone has obviously discovered the Hornet's true identity but we'll have to wait a month to discover who is responsible for stealing the costumes of Green Hornet and Kato and what exactly they have in mind for the newspaperman turned vigilante. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Green Hornet (2013) #13

Jul 6, 2014

Hero origins often come with a cost, and although I understand Waid's reasoning for the actions Lenore Case commits I don't quite buy the sacrifice she makes to guilt Britt Reid into continuing his costumed adventures (or that Reid would need such convincing in the first place). And with Reid still separated from The Sentinel the comic also leaves a dangling thread of the story undone as there is no room her for the newspaper man to reclaim what he's lost over the thirteen-issue series. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Intrepids #3

May 11, 2011

The series does capture the feeling of family between the group members, although a uniquely dysfunctional one. With only three more issues left, I think I'll stick around to see how things turn out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Intrepids #6

Aug 31, 2011

Issue #6 is a good conclusion to a series that's given us some great moments (and memorable panels). It might not be as strong from beginning to end as I'd like, but where else do you see a grizzly bear with a mini-gun strapped to his back? There's enough here that I'd be willing to give a second mini-series a chance as well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Invincible Red Sonja (2021) #1

May 19, 2021

There's plenty of action here for Sonja to sink her sword into while setting up the larger story of Sonja protecting Zaria. The art by Moritat is a bit more cheesecake than I'd prefer, but it certainly fits within the theme of the character.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Invincible Red Sonja (2021) #2

Jun 9, 2021

It's not all work for the She-Devil with a Sword as she does have enough time to teach the princess the joys of wine (and the troubles of a hangover). A notable thief, Sonja's prescience at the site of the theft of the jewels isn't likely to go unnoticed. Has she been framed? Or is this just another obstacle to overcome to fulfill her duty?

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Invincible Red Sonja (2021) #3

Jul 21, 2021

In terms of the larger story, we do not see the face of the masked figure who stole the crown (suggesting it to be a character already introduced in the story), but we do see it traded to Bahira Yakootah in a deadly bargain as someone is obviously playing a larger game in hopes of changing the power structure of the region.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Librarians #1

Sep 21, 2017

The Librarians #1 does a fairly good job reintroducing the characters and each of the Librarians' main skill-sets in short order (even if artist Rodney Buchemi struggles mightily drawing Jacob Stone). As with the show, the story presents a mystery for the group to solve which gets even more bizarre when the dead man's body is dug up from his grave by what appears to be a family of Sasquatch for a demonic ritual (there's something you don't see every day). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Life Story of The Flash #1

Sep 24, 2008

Though you may have to hunt the Internet for this one, I heartily recommend it both to longtime fans of the character and for those getting their first taste of Barry in Final Crisis. The book itself is a great read, but the idea behind it (a fictional character writing a life history of another fictional character) is inspired. The book also throws in some nice touches along the way including a blurb from Lois Lane on the back cover in which she describes the book as "the finest super-hero biography I have ever read, written with all the tenderness and compassion that only the woman who knew the Flash best could bring to such a book." I agree.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Lone Ranger: Snake of Iron #1

Jul 28, 2012

Writer Chuck Dixon does a good job presenting each of the separate engaging tales, and although I'm not real fond of the Ranger's fringed jacket the art of Esteve Polls compliments the story. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Lone Ranger: Snake of Iron #2

Sep 2, 2012

[Dynamite Entertainment, $3.99]

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Lone Ranger: Snake of Iron #3

Oct 20, 2012

The issue showcases the rising tension in both situations, but it looks like we'll have to wait at least another month before the two storylines converge and the Lone Ranger arrives to help his faithful Indian companion. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Lone Ranger: Snake of Iron #4

Dec 10, 2012

Although far from perfect, the mini-series has spotlighted Tonto's honor and skill set when separated from the Lone Ranger and the final issue manages to wrap-up the various subplots without too much trouble. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
The Lone Ranger: The Death of Zorro #1

Apr 5, 2011

All that said, too much of the issue centers around periphery characters which I doubt will play that big of a role in the rest of the series. As first issues go, especially for a five-issue mini-series, this one needs to deliver more up front. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Man of Steel (2018) #1

Jun 1, 2018

Brian Michael Bendis does quite a bit to sell me on his version of Superman (although I still have some big questions about Rogol). Ivan Reis proves to be an excellent choice of artist for the issue that feels both classic and modern, and I can't say how happy I am to have the Big Blue Boyscout not going commando anymore. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Man of Steel (2018) #3

Jun 18, 2018

We still aren't quite caught up to the tease we saw in Action Comics #1000, but by the end of the issue Supergirl and Superman finally have come face-to-face with Rogol Zaar. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Man of Steel (2018) #6

Jul 12, 2018

While I still think Jor-El being alive is one of the stupider story elements DC has introduced in recent years (and, when you think about that, it's say a lot), Bendis does make use of it here to isolate and reset Superman to where he wants the hero heading into his new series. I'm curious to see where things go from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Mighty Thor #4

Aug 2, 2011

The Surfer's scenes with Thor work much better, but the nagging issue of the character's loss of voice really bothered me (and made it hard for me to initially try and figure out when this story is actually taking place). Still, issue #4 has plenty of action including Thor's attempt to kill Galactus, kamikaze style. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Mission #4

Jun 2, 2011

This issue once again gives us an egaging story where Paul finds quickly spiraling far out of his control into a bloody mess. Would we expect anything less from the screenwriters of Red? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Mission #6

Aug 2, 2011

The series may be over, but the final page twist tells me we having seen the last of Paul or his mission. Plenty of questions will be answered, although far more will be raised, in this final (for now at least) issue of the series. I'm looking forward to see where the title goes from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Multiversity #1

Aug 25, 2014

Some of what he dreams up here works well (reincorporating the classic idea that events from one world bleeding over into the fiction of others) while other aspects (such as the introduction of the comic's bad guys) leave room for improvement. There's half a good comic here, saddled between the less interesting storylines and various worlds, when Morrison focuses on the Multiversity itself. As a fan of Captain Carrot I'm going to give it a marginal pass, but it's going to need far more of fun characters like Captain Carrot and the zany worlds which spawn them and less of Morrison's bag of tricks (oh great, music is reincorporated as bending reality because it worked so well in Final Crisis) and gritty post-apocalyptic worlds to keep me around for any length of time. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The Multiversity: Thunderworld Adventures #1

Dec 30, 2014

Morrison sells me completely on a version of the character I would gladly spend money on every month. Sadly, the one-shot ends all too soon and its magic is restrained to the private sandbox of The Multiversity whereas the New 52 could do with an emergency injection of the lighthearted, action-packed, Silver Age wackiness that we're given here. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The New Champion of Shazam! (2022) #1

Aug 8, 2022

It may not be the Hoppy I want (c'mon DC, strike him with lightning already!), but the comic does make use of a talking rabbit from the Rock of Eternity to get Mary back into the super-hero gig, whether she wants to or not. No longer sharing the magic with the rest of the family, Mary has been given the full power of the wizard which she uses to stop a bank robbery (before, again, attempting to decline the gift). There's still trouble in the world, including some back home she will need to investigate. Seems like Mary's plans of easing into her new life at college isn't going to go exactly as planned.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The New Champion of Shazam! (2022) #2

Sep 15, 2022

Now halfway through the four-issue mini-series, I'd expect to see our heroine (and her bunny) picking up the pace to discover just what is happening in Fawcett City.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The New Champion of Shazam! (2022) #3

Nov 9, 2022

The issue also offers another run-in between Mary and one of these soldiers, this one who has the ability to turn someone's worst thoughts against them. Mary, now a popular meme who everyone has an opinion about, has more than enough to brew over which eventually boils over leading to a confrontation with her foster sister leading to some rash action and setting up the mini-series' final issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
The Ninjettes (2022) #1

Sep 13, 2022

None of the characters are important enough to be given names here (let alone backstories or any stand-out characteristics), including our main character who steadfastly denies she belongs amongst a group of sociopaths that begins killing each other off to thin the herd down to three victors. I'm guessing she'll be one to survive, although I doubt that I can to stick around long enough to find out the outcome.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Ones (2022) #1

Nov 14, 2022

The Ones #1 successfully sells the premise while still leaving quite a bit of room to further explore our odd collection of characters, who each will have their own story prior to the apocalypse, in further issues. Given us a character that comes off more like a salesman than prophet helps to lay the uncertainty of his prophecy, although the final panel shows the dangers of not listening to someone who knows the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Phalanx (2022) #1

Jun 7, 2022

The one-shot, which apparently isn't connected to a larger story, is your basic hero out of time. The villain, a man possessed by an evil alien presence, proves to be difficult to catch even with the help of the heroes our protagonist Spur runs into. Fans of 90s Image Comics may get a kick out of this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Rocketeer (2023): In The Den Of Thieves #1

Jul 24, 2023

The first issue of the new mini-series resets events with the anxious Cliff, the thriving Betty, and the reliable Peevy who is kidnapped at the end of the issue by a squad of Nazi Rocketeers hoping the engineer can help them solve their problem with the jet packs.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Rocketeer / The Spirit: Pulp Friction #1

Jul 31, 2013

I'm glad to see Waid and Paul Smith bring these two characters together, but it reminds me of the vast library of great characters DC's New 52 has closed the door on (which I guess is better than the ones they've gotten completely wrong). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Rocketeer / The Spirit: Pulp Friction #2

Oct 28, 2013

Writer Mark Waid and and artist Paul Smith continue to showcase each of the heroes' girls as Ellen shares a tender moment with Cliff and one of the mini-series' villains finally shows his face to offer Betty a starring role on this newfangled television contraption. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Rocketeer / The Spirit: Pulp Friction #3

Nov 18, 2013

Of course there is still a problem with the teleporting power of the signal. Although Betty's insides aren't scrambled like those of the poor victim who found himself in California, her mind is emptied allowing her to be the perfect pawn of and the Octopus and Trask who turn poor Betty into another of The Spirit's femme fatales and set her loose on the hero. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Rocketeer / The Spirit: Pulp Friction #4

Dec 20, 2013

The storyline ends with a hint of another possible team-up between the pair which I would certainly be up for (although next time maybe we could stick with a single artist to give the story a more consistent look?). I'd also love for DC to actually give The Spirit new life of his own in an ongoing title, but I won't hold my breath for either to happen anytime soon. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Rocketeer: The Great Race #1

Apr 18, 2022

Since it feels like Cliff might be out of costume for some or even most of this four-issue mini-series, we get some early panels of the Rocketeer in action before the larger story kicks off. Next, on to the Great Race.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Rocketeer: The Great Race #2

May 10, 2022

Other than a short flashback of a handful of panels, we don't get the Rocekteer in action here. Everything is centered around the start of the race, the racers, and the foreboding of what the Nazi may have planned for his fellow racers and the secrets of what are really happening behind the scenes. Perhaps the Rocketeer will be needed before the finish line after all?

View Issue       View Full Review
3
The Savage Hawkman #1

Oct 4, 2011

If you've always wanted Hawkman to be more like Witchblade then this is your comic. For everyone else, however, it's a huge disappointment. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow #0

Jul 22, 2014

Although the final interaction between The Shadow and the widow is a bit clunky, the use of a secret cabal of magicians as bad guys with all kinds of tricks up their sleeves is an intriguing idea that is left open-ended when the villains manage to allude the vigilante's usual swift justice. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
The Shadow #1

Apr 19, 2012

At best the first issue of The Shadow is a mixed success with a great cover by Alex Ross. Is that enough to keep me reading the title? Maybe, but much like Dynamite's Green Hornet titles it's going to have to get better for me to plop down $4 each month. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Shadow #7

Nov 13, 2012

I've always been a fan of The Shadow, but Garth Ennis‘ six-issue run to launch the new series from Dynamite Entertainment wasn't enough to keep my attention. Given the new creative direction here I decided to give The Shadow a second chance. I'm glad I did. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow #8

Nov 30, 2012

Writer Victor Gischler does a good job setting up several pieces of a larger mystery without giving us, or The Shadow, a clue as to the true purpose of his journey to Spain. I'm not as fond of Aaron Campbell's art as Herbert‘s work from last month's issue but it's not enough to stop me from coming back to see how this story plays out. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow #10

Mar 20, 2013

Of course the Shadow also has to deal with the Black Sparrow who, although sexually aroused by watching her former lover kill so skillfully, isn't to pleased when the targets in his sights belong to her boss. The comic ends on a cliffhanger as the Shadow unmasks Del Rey, but we'll have to wait a month to find out who is under his mask. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow #11

Apr 17, 2013

I've enjoyed this arc by the series' new creative team, even if I am a bit sad to see the Sparrow go away so quickly. I do like how his decision weighs heavy on Lamont Cranston once he returns home to the comforting arms of Margo Lane. Now we'll have to wait and see what new trouble awaits his alter-ego in New York City. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow #12

Apr 29, 2013

The Shadow #12 reminds readers of the resources the vigilante uses to in his one man war against crime along with plenty of action and some lighter moments between Lamont and Margo Lane. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Shadow #13

May 18, 2013

It may not be quite as good as the last few issues of the series, but it's still worth a look for fans of the character. It will be interesting to see how complex The Light's motivations truly are, and how she views another “soul stained by darkness and shadow.” For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Shadow #14

Jun 19, 2013

I'm curious to see how long it will take The Shadow to turn his gaze on the nun at the dead man's hospital who matches both The Light's description and temperament, or if it will be another member of his network that makes the discovery. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Shadow #15

Jul 10, 2013

Margo's obvious overacting aside, the issue works to continue to flesh out the latest villain to come to the attention of The Shadow as well as but Lamont Cranston's one true friend in deadly jeopardy. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow #16

Aug 10, 2013

The Shadow #16 also includes more flashbacks to The Light's childhood and training as well as tying that piece of the storyline together with The Light's first victim in New York whose past intertwines with her own This also gives The Shadow his first real lead to uncovering to the vigilante's identity. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow #17

Sep 19, 2013

By the end of the issue our hero will know the identity of The Light setting up the arc's final issue next month. From what we've seen so far the pair seem evenly matched in both skill, determination, and a belief that their form of brutal justice is for the greater good. Given this it may well be that only one will survive next month's likely deadly final encounter. My money's on the guy in the hat. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Shadow #18

Oct 20, 2013

The issue comes to a close with The Shadow victorious, but the inability of the police to discover a body in the river suggests we may not have seen the last of The Light nor her mission. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow #19

Nov 29, 2013

Putting both his network and the intimidation tactics of his alter-ego to good use, Cranston manages to locate and save every single victim but what he finds at the scene will force The Shadow to leave New York City and journey halfway around the world to understand what the box containing a severed finger wearing a ring very much like his own signifies. The issue sets up the larger mystery with a single-issue tale that works well all on its own. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Shadow #20

Dec 5, 2013

After an issue off, artist Giovanni Timpano returns to the title with a style that fits the cold and darkness of the setting and storyline as our hero journeys into a mystery linked to his shadowy past. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Shadow #21

Jan 19, 2014

Once again the storyline touches on a piece of The Shadow's past without revealing too much of the man he once was, other than the fact that he lived many lives in several different countries before learning the secret to cloud men's minds and deciding to make New York City his home. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Shadow #22

Feb 11, 2014

By the end of the issue The Shadow is prepared to return to New York which brings up an interesting point. Although it has showed off the character in various locales, while providing bread crumbs to the mysterious vigilante's past, the trip is actually a complete failure as The Shadow learns nothing of interest in any of these stops. The final stop on his journey is the least interesting of the bunch, so its probably a good time to get him back to New York City. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Shadow #23

Apr 6, 2014

The end of the issue wraps up the arc as The Shadow finally tracks down the the White Tiger (which he really didn't need to leave New York to do), and provides his own brutal justice for the man's crimes. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Shadow #24

Apr 23, 2014

With Howard Chaykin on deck to write and illustrate a six-issue mini-series taking place in the late 50s following up the conclusion of this ongoing title, it's a little unclear where the character goes from here, but I'd be surprised if Dynamite didn't have future plans for the vigilante who knows what evil lurks in the hearts of men. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Shadow #25

May 24, 2014

After discovering the dastardly truth behind the mad woman's plot, our hero puts his soldiers to work administering antidote to the mind-controlled horde only appearing to have died before rising and beginning their assault on the city. Dispensing swift justice, The Shadow closes his latest case making way for Dynamite's new ten-issue series set more than a decade later in Lamont Cranston's crime-fighting career taking The Shadow and Margo Lane to Russia at the beginning of the Cold War. Although short, this bizarre final arc ends the series on a strong note. I'm sorry to see it end. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow (2015) #1

Aug 10, 2015

Honestly, I'm more impressed with the artwork of Giovanni Timpano than writer Cullen Bunn's tale which I'm far from sold on. The issue does demonstrate the bloodthirsty nature of The Society of United Magicians while alluding to the dangers of Houdini's secrets falling into their hands, but even for a comic about a cloaked vigilante who can cloud men's minds to appear invisible the storyline is a bit hard to swallow. It's good to see that The Shadow's adventures will be continuing, but I'm just not sure how much of this run I'll sticking around for. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
The Shadow (2017) #1

Aug 17, 2017

While the structure works for a single issue, The Shadow #1 fails to sell me on a new series set far after the glory days of the man who knows what evil lurks in the hearts of men. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Shadow Special #1

Jan 6, 2013

Much of the oversized issue deals with flashbacks of Allard and Griffin meaning the story limits the amount of time The Shadow appears, at least until the last few pages when Crantston takes his vengeance on men he once called brothers. It's a little pricey at $5, but fans should enjoy themselves with this glimpse into Cranston's past before he could look into the hearts of men. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Shadow: Midnight In Moscow #1

Jun 7, 2014

Presenting a future where The Shadow's work in New York has done little to stop the flow of crime, and even force Cranston to consider retirement, the first issue is a bit depressing while weaving into the blackmail of a London scientist who I'd expect we'll see tied to the shrink-ray in the next issue. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
The Shadow: Midnight In Moscow #2

Jul 13, 2014

The first two issues represent one-third of Howard Chaykin's tale, the point of which (other than Cranston leaving New York) is still murky at best. The idea of an older Shadow's adventure in London is interesting, but two issues in Chaykin hasn't sold me on that story that's already cost me $8. That's a problem. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow: The Death of Margo Lane #1

Jun 4, 2016

Honestly, I can't say I'm all to keen on seeing Margo Lane bumped off. However, Wagner does tease us will a powerful and elusive adversary in the first issue who I'll likely return to learn more about. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow: The Death of Margo Lane #2

Jul 22, 2016

Regardless as to whether Margo has indeed met her end, the Shadow believes this is the case allowing Matt Wagner to play with the character's guilt over her demise and fuel his quest to find the Red Empress with a thirst for vengeance. It also allows the Shadow to take certain liberties, such as reading Margo's journals of her relationship with Lamont Crane and his alter-ego, which he would otherwise not indulge in. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow: The Death of Margo Lane #4

Sep 27, 2016

The Red Empress' connection to one of the Shadow's deadliest enemies suggests a formidable opponent. With only one issue remaining the battle between the pair is likely to be swift, but not necessarily come to a definitive conclusion. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow: The Death of Margo Lane #5

Oct 24, 2016

While the series doesn't deliver the “death” of Margo Lane as promised, writer and artist Matt Wagner serves up something possibly even more damaging to the hero – Margo choosing to leave Lamont's side and his quest to enforce justice on an unjust world. With the close of the mini-series we don't see the effect of Margo's continued absence on the Shadow (something which would be interesting to explore as his spikes in violence since her supposed death seemed to foreshadow a darker path for the vigilante). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow: Year One #1

Feb 26, 2013

It's always a risky proposition to peek behind the curtain of a character like The Shadow. I'm not really on-board with the changes Wagner makes to Margo (although their arguably better than the ones the movie decided the make). I trust that Wagner will give us glimpses of the man's past in the Far East, but not tread too far into the mystery that surrounds him. It seems much of the comic, if we can use this first issue as a guide, will deal with The Shadow setting up shop in New York, his relationship with Margo, and providing us a look at his early days in his crusade against crime. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow: Year One #2

Apr 25, 2013

I have mixed feelings about Margo recognizing Lamont Cranston as The Shadow so easily. I know she's to become his Girl Friday, but the series of events feels a tad rushed for my tastes. There's also an interesting scene during the party concerning the new Bela Lugosi movie which Cranston overhears and uses to help form the look and theatrics of the vigilante who knows what evil lurks in the hearts of men. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow: Year One #3

Jun 4, 2013

I had been assuming up until this point that he mysterious voice pushing the rival gangs into battle was that of The Shadow. This issue reveals the identity of a new villain, Dr. Zorn, whose abilities are eerily similar to our hero (although his methods are quite different). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Shadow: Year One #4

Jul 25, 2013

I'm hoping Wagner speeds things up a little in the next issue involving The Shadow's investigations as well as the reveal of Zorn's motives and origins. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow: Year One #5

Sep 14, 2013

Much of the issue is set aside for conversations between Lamont and Margo about her new role. These work fine, and show us the two have feelings for each other neither is likely to share anytime soon, but the action certainly picks up with the appearance of The Shadow and the bloody gunfight on the bridge for the money inside the armored cars and some terrific laughter-filled panels by artist Wilfredo Torres. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow: Year One #6

Nov 15, 2013

Issue #6 plays on a common damsel in distress theme as Margo takes a foolish chance that puts her in danger with The Shadow nowhere in sight. Since we know Ms. Lane isn't destined to die, I'd expect The Shadow to make a miraculous save before returning to hunt down his true enemy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Shadow: Year One #7

Feb 2, 2014

With three issues left to finish the tale (now that the mini-series has been expanded to ten issues) the stage is finally set for the reporter to make a connection no one may believe and for The Shadow to track down Dr. Zorn and dispense some justice. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Spirit Vol. 2 #8

Nov 21, 2010

Aside from the cover (ugh, can we get rid of these “First Wave” bars at the top and bottom, please!), there's much to enjoy here. David Hine has gotten better over the series and here seems to have gotten the tone and humor of the character just right, and the art by Moritat proves to be seductive, humorous (I love the Sprit's smirk!), and a little bit naughty. The comic also includes another b&w Spirit adventure by Walt Simonson. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Spirit Vol. 2 #12

Mar 23, 2011

Fans of old Silver Age Superman stories featuring the Toyman should feel right at home with this one as the weapon aimed at Dolan is a minature clockwork Spirit doll that comes dangerously close to fulfilling its task. A little odd? Sure, but a lot of fun, and its nice to see Ellen play the heroine for a change saving her father and the Spirit with one shot. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Spirit Vol. 2 #13

Apr 26, 2011

The Professor may have been defeated, but the man who hired him, New York gang boss Shonder Zeev, is still out there. We'll have to see how this larger storyline plays out over the next few issues. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Spirit Vol. 2 #16

Aug 3, 2011

I'm also thrilled with the art by Jean Paul Leon who manages to spice up the pages with great artwork including quite a few panels Will Eisner would be proud of by working the title of the comic, and hero, seamlessly into every single page. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Spirit: The Corpse-Makers #1

Feb 7, 2017

Will Eisner's The Spirit: The Corpse-Makers #1 takes it's time to set-up the world, characters, and tease the mystery which will be developed in the coming issues. Francavilla's art fits the character well. Fans of The Spirit should enjoy themselves here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Spirit: The Corpse-Makers #2

Mar 25, 2017

Although we don't get much of Ms. Marlowe here, I like the idea of a female detective self-aware of how she is breaking basic stereotypes. And her name, of course, fits immediately into the world of the Spirit. Writer/artist Francesco Francavilla is continuing to take his time to lay out the story, but issue #2 certainly piques the attention of not one but two protaganists who I have no doubt will bump into each other before too long. And that, I'm interested to see. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Spirit: The Corpse-Makers #3

May 23, 2017

The latest issue spends more time with Marlowe, whose recent near-death experience hasn't shaken the young woman's resolve to get the bottom of the strange events. Although their paths have yet to cross, you would have to expect a meeting between the two investigators fairly soon. And given the number of questions both have, it may well take both the Spirit and Lisa Marlowe, P.I. to solve the case.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Spirit: The Corpse-Makers #4

Sep 25, 2017

Although the art of Marlowe retelling her story is terrific, writer/artist Francesco Francavilla does go over quite a bit of familiar ground for the audience to get our hero up to speed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Spirit: The Corpse-Makers #5

Jan 24, 2018

With some nice back-and-forth between the pair, and a take down of the criminals in charge of the operation, the story comes to a close. The series wrap-up means a sad farewell to Marlowe, who holds her own alongside the hero quite well here, although we do get a tease for other possible team-ups with the Spirit somewhere down the line. I wouldn't seeing the character get her own short series, especially with Francavilla doing the design as once again the art of this mini-series has been terrific. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Thanos Imperative: Devastation #1

Jan 19, 2011

The new series, The Annihilators, is also set to return two former Guardians in their own adventures – Rocket Raccoon and Groot. As to what will happen to the rest of the Guardians, we'll just have to wait and see.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Umbrella Academy: Hotel Oblivion #1

Oct 4, 2018

While focused mainly on set-up and foreshadowing, there's still quite a bit to enjoy in The Umbrella Academy – Hotel Oblivion #1 with Spaceboy and his shadow hanging out in Tokyo, Number Five putting his unique skillset to use, and Vanya on the road to recovery suggesting that she may have a role to play this time around. I enjoyed the first mini-series, and while I thought Dallas wasn't as strong, I am looking forward to seeing what new trouble the Umbrella Academy can find themselves in this time around. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Variants (2022) #2

Aug 2, 2022

Daredevil, Jessica Jones, She-Hulk

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Visitor: How And Why He Stayed #1

Feb 28, 2017

The visitor's superiors may believe the former, but the mere possibility of the later caused the visitor to stay his hand, step back, and allow events to unfold. I'm curious to see what events he may witness, and what will be his final verdict. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Visitor: How And Why He Stayed #2

Apr 4, 2017

The episode ends on a foreboding note heading into the five-issue mini-series third issue. Despite the life that he's carved out for himself and Hellboy's success in forging his own path, it appears something ominous may be around the corner. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Visitor: How And Why He Stayed #4

Jun 6, 2017

The comfort that the Visitor can provide, by altering his physical appearance to be what his wife needs is both tender and heart-breaking. Ruby's death is a blow, but one that he is prepared for. With that “distraction” gone, I'm assuming our Visitor will turn his attention back to Hellboy in the final issue as we'll see if his decision to spare the child and remain on Earth was the right one. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Visitor: How And Why He Stayed #5

Jul 12, 2017

Even if this last issue is a bit anti-climactic, The Visitor: How and Why He Stayed is a solid story that adds another layer to the Hellboy timeline. I'm a little sad to see it end. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
The Wicked + The Divine #14

Sep 14, 2015

The murder of the comic's leading character as part of Ananke's mysterious plan is also addressed, but not explained. I'll admit I'm still at a loss with the series since the death of Laura, removing the human element to the story and leaving us with only the nefarious plans of spoiled gods which may not be enough to keep me coming back to see how things eventually shake out. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
The Wicked + The Divine #22

Sep 7, 2016

In the end it isn't Laura or the might of one side of warring Gods or the other but reason presented by Urdr that leads Anake's blind followers to seek the truth. It also allows the Gods to prevent Minerva's sacrifice and force Laura to make a difficult decision whose aftershocks are likely to effect the entire pantheon. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Wicked + The Divine #25

Jan 9, 2017

Much of the comic deals with Laura confronting and convincing Woden to be less of a prick. During her threats to kill him Ananke's former toady we discover Woden is at least smart enough to put an insurance policy in place to protect himself. It might turn out Laura choosing not to kill him was the right move since it appears she'll need all the help she can get with the Great Darkness. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
1
Threshold #3

Mar 17, 2013

When images of the new "Captain K'rot" started hitting the Internet months ago I prayed it was some elaborate hoax. Sadly, this wasn't the case. Seeing yet another beloved character from my childhood debased for a quick buck didn't fill me with anger or surprise. After a year and a half of being desensitized to how DC Comics has chosen to do business, I honestly wouldn't be surprised by any new low the New 52 will eventually sink to. And this is pretty damn low. And I fucking love Keith Giffen! Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Thunderstrike #1

Nov 27, 2010

With this issue it appears Marvel is following DC's lead in over-cluttering their universe with extras heroes, whether their needed or not (and charging an extra buck an issue for their pleasure). Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Time Masters: Vanishing Point #1

Jul 22, 2010

And I do have to hand it to writer Dan Jurgens for finding a way to include Superman in a comic without allowing him to overpower it. The rules of time must be obeyed, even by the Man of Steel. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Titans (2016) #1

Aug 8, 2016

The issue also gives us the rest of the team searching for answers in more traditional means, and the beginning of a subplot involving Linda Park looking into the strange man who appeared to her in a flash of lightning. Even if she doesn't remember her former husband, Wally made enough of an impression to trigger Linda's reporting instincts and begin to look for her own answers. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Titans Hunt #1

Nov 8, 2015

I'm also curious to see what the end goal of this series proves to be. As I don't see the heroes re-teaming up going forward, I wonder if this will be their only entry (and exit) into the New 52 DCU or whether DC may considering offering us “past” adventures of the group going forward. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Titans: Rebirth #1

Jun 16, 2016

I'm happy to see Donna Troy back in action once again and I'm on-board with DC's choice to not only put Dick Grayson back in the Nightwing costume but the far superior blue version made popular before the launch of the New 52. Aqualad, Speedy, and Beast Boy are obvious choices, although Lilith Clay‘s inclusion did surprise me. Mostly set-up, I'll be curious to see what the new Titans comic has in store for the team. Throwing Nighwing, Wally, and Donna together in the same book is enough to keep my interest for at least a few issues. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
TMNT Villain Microseries #4

Jul 24, 2013

Given we know so little about the character this issue should appeal to fans, and the dark turn it takes involving the arctic fox's former home hopefully foreshadows a crisis on conscience for the character that we could see played out over several months (if not years). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
TMNT Villain Microseries #5

Aug 26, 2013

Although this isn't a series I plan to pick up every month, the last two issues have been strong focusing on Alopex and now Karai, two of the more intriguing characters of the Foot Clan. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
TMNT Villain Microseries #7

Nov 5, 2013

The timing works out well as the pair made their debut in the recent issue of the ongoing Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles title, and this one-shot helps fill in the basics for those unfamiliar with Bebop and Rocksteady whose mix of power and dumbassery seems to have survived this transition into the new Turtles comic universe. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
TMNT: Saturday Morning Adventures (2022) #1

Oct 18, 2022

The setup allows for multiple of the Turtles' foes to get cameos (including Shredder, Bebop and Rocksteady, Rat King, Krang, and Groundchuck and Dirtbag) before our heroes successfully win the game and make it back to the real world deciding they've had enough of video games for now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Tom Strong and the Planet of Peril #1

Aug 22, 2013

The science hero raised in high-gravity chamber certainly embraces Silver Age comics (which are even directly referenced) in a style antithetical to DC's current gritty 90s reboot. I'm not sure how many issues we'll get out of this series (Vertigo currently lists solicitations for five issues), but I'll gladly take what I can get. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Tom Strong and the Planet of Peril #2

Sep 4, 2013

Of course threats like this aren't enough to get the science hero down and he remarks the pair will simply have to stamp out the plague and save an entire world before heading home with the formula needed to save the life of both Strong's daughter and unborn grandchild. Another strong (pun intended) issue setting up a herculean heroic undertaking for Strong before he can make his way home. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Tom Strong and the Planet of Peril #3

Sep 29, 2013

Although the get no closer to finding Strange, the pair are able to offer their support to the Agents of S.M.A.S.H. who will need their help to save the convoy which might hold another clue to bring the travelers from another world one step closer to their final goal. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Tom Strong and the Planet of Peril #4

Oct 28, 2013

Although Strong gets no closer to answers, or even finding the man who could offer them, the early action and the conversation between the two heroes delivers another strong issue fans of the character should enjoy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Tom Strong and the Planet of Peril #5

Dec 4, 2013

I've enjoyed this mini-series and issue #5 (as I expected) sets the table for a run to finish as Val contradciting the disease with a 100% mortality rate puts even more pressure on Strong to find a cure. I enjoyed Strong and Strange together here (and hope we get more of the two science heroes working together in next month's finale). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Tom Strong and the Planet of Peril #6

Jan 5, 2014

Even if this is the weakest issue of the mini-series it still has some fun moments, strong (pun intended) character interactions, and the kind of off-beat humor you would expect. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Tomb Raider #1

Mar 3, 2014

Those who have played the game are obviously going to have a heads-up on the rest of us as it appears we're only going to learn pieces of Lara's first adventure through flashbacks and the search for these artifacts (and return to the island?) rather than a straight comic adaptation of the game. For fans

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Tomb Raider: Inferno #1

Jun 23, 2018

The phrase curiosity killed the cat could be applied here as Lara springs the trap and is captured by her enemies. Her need to understand Trinity and discover their secrets has become more imporatant, at least in the short run, than her own life. And that, is a dangerous way to live. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Tomb Raider: Survivor's Crusade #1

Dec 4, 2017

Fans will likely enjoy Lara's return, and the personal quest, rather than a search for a specific artifact, site, or treasure, certainly focuses on different themes than her regular quests (although, personally, I'd prefer the later). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Transformers '84: Secrets & Lies #1

Jul 28, 2020

The timing of the comic's story allows for us to see Jetfire as Decepticon. While it's awkward to think of Dinobots prior to the arrival on Earth (aren't they supposed to be modeled on pre-historic Earth life), there inclusion does allow for another of my favorite characters to be part of the larger story as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Transformers (2019) #1

Mar 19, 2019

With the series Ruckley has found a new way to delve into characters and stories fans already know fairly well, and I'm always pleased to see the Generation One design of the Transformers which Hernandez delivers. I'll be curious to see where things go from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Transformers (2019) #2

Apr 2, 2019

Transformers #2 wraps things up with Megatron‘s speech (the one that was foreshadowed in the last issue). As expected, trouble comes when the rally is interrupted by violence. The perpetrators get away, but their poor aim and the fact that their attack only help bolster Megatron's position and rally against the status quo has to make one wonder just who the attackers were working for. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Transformers (2019): Fate of Cybertron #1

Jul 12, 2022

There's quite a bit here, including the Imploder (keeping some of the Autobots at bay) that aren't really explained for someone jumping in at the end. That said, we do get Prime vs. Megatron one more time as well as a big battle between the Autobots and Decepticons allowing the Autobots to flee and begin life again on a new home. The oversized issue isn't an ultimate conclusion to Transformers, but does work fine as an end to this chapter of their adventures.

View Issue       View Full Review
1
Transformers vs. G.I. Joe #1

Aug 4, 2014

If the story is crap the visuals aren't that much better. Although I don't have an issue with John Barber's nostalgic throwback-style art of some of my favorite characters from both franchisees, I was very much distracted by the attempt to make the comic look like faded newsprint of an 80s comic on glossy current comic stock. The attempt to make the comic feel vintage actually makes it look incredibly cheap and (even more) half-assed. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Transformers: King Grimlock #1

Aug 11, 2021

After his transport, Grimlock gets his first taste of action taking on what he calls “horse-cats” before encountering the tribe who plead for the Dinobot's help and inform him without defeating the Golden One they don't have the magic needed to send him home. Eventually, no doubt, Grimlock will be convinced to help. Until then we should get some fun of seeing the King of the Dinobots let loose on a world where he no longer must hold back.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Transformers: King Grimlock #2

Sep 6, 2021

By the end of the issue, the two appear to part ways suggesting that Grimlock's journey to destroying the Red Wizard will be a solo one. However, given the amount of pages Arko has taken up in the series so far, I don't think we've seen the last of the warrior.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Transformers: King Grimlock #3

Oct 21, 2021

The issue also picks up on the thread of Arko who left Grimlock and has apparently signed up to work with the Golden One (wasn't that who she wanted Grimlock's help to take down?). Aside from making little sense, I'm not sure how this will play out over the two remaining issues which seem to set up a confrontation against the Dinobot and a very squishy human who, while brave, isn't likely much of a threat.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Transformers: Regeneration One #0

Sep 21, 2013

Despite not quite following all the various plotlines (zombie Decepticons? and what exactly did Jhiaxus steal from the rest of the Transformers millennia ago?), the issue does well to deliver plenty of action and provide an opportunity to bring both the Matrix of leadership back into the original Marvel Comics continuity but introduce Rodimus Prime as well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Transformers: Regeneration One #89

Mar 18, 2013

On Earth, Optimus Prime is out for a pleasure drive (really, he doesn't do anything more in his one page cameo), and on the crashed Ark a battered Decepticon awakens as Shockwave brings his broken memories into focus and plans his next move. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Transformers: Regeneration One #90

Apr 15, 2013

There's plenty of action in this issue as the remaining Autobots fight those Transformers held under Scorponok's sway. I'm betting we haven't seen the last of either Grimlock or Scorponok as the two, still locked in battle, fall from sight down a deep shaft. The Shockwave/Starscream alliance has possibilities but it will be interesting to see just how Galvatron fits into their plans. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Transformers: Regeneration One #91

May 17, 2013

Although the issue does have appearances by Soundwave and Prowl, and gives us the Dinobots willing to work with Hot Rod to return to the center of Cybertron in search of their fallen leader, it centers around the comic's most ridiculous storline leading to mixed results. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Transformers: Regeneration One #92

Jun 20, 2013

The story is a little weird (especially this version of Spike), but there are some nice touches including several familiar faces for longtime fans (along with those already mentioned we also get Silverbolt, Huffer, Inferno, and Blaster). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Transformers: Regeneration One #93

Jul 23, 2013

There's a lot going on in this issue including several characters reverting to form as, despite the last-minute betrayal, Galvatron has finally made it back home. We also get cameoes from Optimus Prime, Prowl, Kup, the Aerialbots, and Ultra Magnus. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Transformers: Regeneration One #94

Sep 1, 2013

No big fan of Zero Issues, I'm not sure what exactly to expect from next month's issue. This month, however, certainly delivers. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Transformers: Regeneration One #95

Oct 31, 2013

The issue ends with several questions still unanswered about the future of Cyberton, but with Rodimus Prime the Autobots have a new leader and with Bludgeon's defeat the comic should be able to turn its attention back on Galvatron and the Decepticons and the lingering issues on Earth. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Transformers: Regeneration One #96

Dec 5, 2013

Although I'm a bit uncertain of the Spike and Dark Matrix creature subplots, Transformers: Regeneration One #96 does a good job of wrapping up the loose ends from the last arc and setting up several new threats for the Autobots moving forward. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Transformers: Regeneration One #97

Dec 31, 2013

The issue ends on an interesting note as it appearsShockwaveandStarscream‘s roles on the sidelines as silent observers is at an end now that Jihaxus (who Starsream has some connection to) has returned. And on Earth Fortress Maximus comes back online, but he may not be the same loyal Autobot soldier as he once was. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Transformers: Regeneration One #98

Feb 5, 2014

Along with plenty of action, Transformers: Regeneration One #98 delivers a rejuvinated Shockwave, teases the return of Galvatron, and sets all the pieces in motion for what should be a very interesting final arc. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Transformers: Regeneration One #99

Mar 3, 2014

With plenty of action that highlights many of my favorite Transformers, and even moves the logical Shocwave to emotion in a terrific panel, there's much here to enjoy as the comic sets up its grand finale that all started in a four-issue mini-series 30 years ago. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Transformers: Regeneration One #100

Mar 24, 2014

Fans will certainly want to pick this one up (despite its price-tag), but it is a little light on action (other than Galvatron's defeat) while relegating several key characters such as Grimlock, Shockwave, and Starscream to small roles or cameos. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Trinity (2016) #1

Sep 26, 2016

While I'm guessing not all the issues will be dinner's at the Kent farmhouse, this issue works well and sets up the series to explore the relationships between DC's big three. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Ultimate Comics Spider-Man (2009) #160

Jun 28, 2011

Had I been reading the title more regularly (or at all the last couple of years) I'm sure the payoff would have been higher. Even with these issues, I still enjoyed the comic and it might even lead me to go back and re-read some of Brian Michael Bendis' run. It's a nice send-off for the character, even knowing Marvel already has a replacement in the wings. It seems in the Ultimate Universe you can't kill Spider-Man, even if you do manage to kill Peter Parker. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Unbreakable Red Sonja (2022) #1

Oct 17, 2022

One issue in, it's a bit unclear if this is a younger version of Sonja or simply a talent red-headed thief having taken the name.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Unbreakable Red Sonja (2022) #3

Feb 20, 2023

The styles of Valletta and Garcia don't necessary clash in Unbreakable Red Sonja #2, but their differences do give the comic an unusual back-and-forth look that is more distracting than anything else in an issue otherwise notable for Sonja teaching her younger self how to kill with a knife.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Uncanny Avengers (2023) #1

Aug 22, 2023

There's not enough here to likely make me stay with the comic for more than an issue or two. However, despite the hodgepodge nature of the group (did someone at Marvel simply draw character names out of a hat?), the comic does have its moments such as Captain America stating his case against conspiracy whackjob fascists (whose hateful rhetoric is sadly all too timely in today's world).

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Uncanny Spider-Man (2023) #1

Sep 26, 2023

For the casual fan, the adventure works as a bit of a What If tale, but I doubt I'll stick around to see the larger story play out.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Uncanny X-Force (2010) #3

Jan 26, 2011

Even with this limitation the team itself works well in its own dysfunctional way. And I will give credit to writer Rick Remender for breathing some much needed life and charm back into Psylocke. For at least an issue I actually cared about the character again. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Uncanny X-Men (1963) #526

Jul 31, 2010

Other than the team saving a young woman dealing with her new-found mutation there's little action here, but that doesn't mean it's not worth a read. On their own neither story is strong enough, but as two similar personal tales told together we're given an issue that stands out for its emotion rather than bloodshed. Definitely worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Uncanny X-Men (2011) #1

Nov 8, 2011

Uncanny X-Men #1 is a good first issue that reintroduces the core group of characters and defines how this book will be separate from the legion of other X-titles. It didn't wow me, and I'm not sure Mr. Sinister is the best choice of villain to start off the series, but it gave me just enough that I'll probably stick around for another issue or two to see what happens. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #1

Feb 20, 2013

Although I think most of the art of Chris Bachalo is fine, my only real complaint is with the redesign of so many classic characters' costumes. Magneto's is my least favorite. In terms of story Uncanny X-Men is all that you could hope in giving readers a new story, setting up the players, and then (in a relatively easy to figure out twist) see where Bendis plans to take the story. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #2

Mar 6, 2013

We also get learn a little more about a couple of Cyclops' new recruits: Fabio Medina and Tempus (whose wish to see her family send the group back to Australia and, thanks to Magneto‘s betrayal, right into the path of the Avengers). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #3

Mar 18, 2013

When all is said and done Cyclops takes Magik‘s advice to take advantage of the Avengers frozen in time to make a little recruitment visit to the Jean Grey School for Higher Learning. Next month should be very interesting. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #4

Apr 19, 2013

Uncanny X-Men #4 is another strong issue giving equal time to both the big guns and the younger generation of Cyclops' team. However, it is a little awkward the comic can't decide if Wolverine is supposed to be present (he's drawn in a couple panels but never speaks or acts) when Cyclops and his team arrive. And, despite reading every issue of this series so far, I also found Magik's subplot, which eventually takes over the comic, confusing. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #5

May 2, 2013

Magik's inclusion on the team troubled me because I knew storylines like this were a very good possibility. Now with the entire team trapped in Limbo that's where the comic seems headed for at least the next full issue. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #6

May 29, 2013

Also intercut with this is Maria Hill‘s decision that she needs an inside man, or in this case woman, on Cyclops‘ team to have a better gauge at what exactly the mutant activist wants and how far he's willing to go to achieve those ends. Her choice is a bit ridiculous, but certainly one I can appreciate. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #7

Jun 29, 2013

The choice to visit a pre-Avenger version of Doctor Strange for assistance is well thought out, although even with his help it will be interesting to see what lasting effects Magik has after swallowing the entire Limbo dimension into herself. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #8

Jul 16, 2013

The first issue back from Limbo plays on two classic X-Men themes: a family's concern and distrust of a new mutant's abilities and (as Magneto would put it) how homo sapiens react in fear and danger at the presence of homo superior. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #9

Aug 5, 2013

Those complaints aside, Brian Michael Bendis provides another solid issue. I'm happy to seen Gold Balls sticking around and I'll be curious to see just what role Mystique has to play in the larger picture (and whose side she's really on). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #10

Aug 21, 2013

Action picks up with the X-Men make an impromptu appearance at a pro-mutant rally to promote a message of peace only to get attacked by the first of a new version of Sentinel bred for their destruction. The attack by the Sentinel, on the peaceful demonstration certainly makes me wonder just who is behind the new mutant killers and what their ultimate agenda really is. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #11

Sep 3, 2013

Although I enjoyed this issue, I'm not exactly pleased with the launching of a new X-Men event requiring me to read other X-titles (none of which I'm currently reading) to keep up with “Battle of the Atom” or try to parse the large sections of the story which I'm missing by not reading those issues. The other choice is to set aside this comic and pick it up in a few months after the crossover finishes. None of these options are ideal, but I won't hold it against this issue which is definitely worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #12

Sep 26, 2013

The dilemma Cyclops is presented with here, try to help the past version of himself and the love of his life (and continue to screw with the timeline) or abandon them is a tough one that the issue handles well. When the future version of the group shows up to forcibly take back the original X-Men, Emma Frost is surprised to find an older Jean Grey among them which should lead to a rather un-ladylike battle between the pair of Cyclops' exes. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #14

Nov 26, 2013

Uncanny X-Men #14 thankfully jumps right back into a new story while not spending too much time on the latest X-Men crossover and it gives us a look at Deeds unique power-set that the comic takes from an odd curiosity to incredibly useful in the span of a single issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #15.INH

Dec 21, 2013

With the addition of some of the time-displaced X-Men and Kitty Pryde, Cyclops' team of X-Men is growing larger (and less reliant on former super-villains). With the teasing of Magneto's eventual betrayal it will be interesting to see how much more shake-up we see in the team over the course of 2014. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #16

Jan 20, 2014

Lost in the various discoveries Magneto makes is an offhand remark Mystique makes to her old friend (while in the role of Dazzler) suggesting the death of Charles Xavier may have damaged Magneto far more than anyone suspects. With the character getting his own series it will be interesting to see how this will be explored in the coming months. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #17

Feb 23, 2014

I've got to say I'm not altogether happy with the set-up of this issue as Cyclops throws the unprepared recruits into a dangerous situation without the control of a Danger Room scenario. Although they each perform well in surviving the bizarre super-evolutionary town in Montana, they nearly get taken in by S.H.I.E.L.D. thanks to Hijack's cellphone leading the heroes right to them. And I'm not exactly buying the idea that this is the last we've seen of Hijack whose skills are far too valuable not to see him return after he's “learned his lesson” (if that's even why he was truly let go). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #18

Mar 11, 2014

Although awkward (seriously, this issue should have taken place at least two months ago) it does deliver some interesting moments between Cyclops and his younger self and Jean Grey. If you've been waiting for the issue that reincorporates the rest of the X-Men this is it… but only kinda because in the present they are all off-world. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #19.NOW

Mar 28, 2014

Although highlighted by some fun small comedic moments (such as Goldballs discovering his powers work again) Uncanny X-Men #19.NOW is certainly one of the darker issues of the series so far (which is saying something for a comic that gave us a multi-issue arc in a Hell dimension). In that same vein, the latest issue also touches on events in Madripoor answering a couple of lingering questions concerning the fate of the real Dazzler and the source of Mystique‘s mutant growth hormone. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #20

Apr 21, 2014

With Cyclops basically declaring war on S.H.I.E.L.D. and antaganozing the other branch of X-Men he makes no friends here. Keeping the true identity of those causing the attacks under wraps, it's unclear whether Mystique is directly involved or just using the situation to her own advantage. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #21

May 29, 2014

The issue's back-up story takes Magneto back to Madripoor (for unexplained reasons which only marginally really fit his current path in his own ongoing series). There the team's former member discovers the true fate of Dazzler at the same time Beast makes a discovery concerning the identity of their unseen enemy. With those insights and Hill's realization that someone has been forcibly maneuvering a war between the X-Men and S.H.I.E.L.D. should hopefully lead to a big reveal and some real answers beginning next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #22

Jun 25, 2014

I'm still a fan of these characters and I'll give credit to Brian Michael Bendis to keeping me on the title for 22 straight issues but the air of “what now” the comic ends with makes me guess it's going to take a bit to work to gear up to the next big arc. Given the disappointment here, and with the next few issues tying into a Marvel event I'm not following, it may awhile for me to pick up my next issue of the title. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #26

Sep 26, 2014

The issue brings up two subplots worth keeping an eye on in Iceman‘s boiling rage against Scott Summers for Xavier's death and in the conflict of Cyclops' young mutants when discussing the reasons for the existence of a training program pitting them against the Avengers. Both foreshadow potentially messy situations for Cyclops and possibly his entire team. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #27

Oct 22, 2014

Cyclops' decision-making at the end of this issue (after the heroes where routed easily by Malloy) offers Scott Summers the opportunity to further his own mutant agenda (even if it may very likely push him down a super-villain path which he has teetered on ever since the fracture of the team). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #28

Nov 30, 2014

I'm happy to see Magneto's return but sad to learn that he appears to be at odds with a move that could take the X-Men, and the series, to an entirely new level. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #29

Jan 5, 2015

Along with continuing to play on Magik jumping back-forth through time for the assistance of Doctor Strange, who comes us with an unusual solution to the Malloy problem, the latest issue also gives Tempus her own subplot as she considers altering time in a very large way by warning Professor Xavier of the Malloy situation in the past and alloying him to try and prevent the current situation before it ever occurs. Of course you have to wonder what else a past version of Xavier might learn about both his future and that of his prized student opening up the door for a very big shakeup if Brian Michael Bendis wants to walk the reader through. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #31

Mar 5, 2015

The other problem with the arc's wrap-up is that removes the intriguing character of Malloy in a way that admits he doesn't really matter (an argument at odds with everything the X-Men have stood for over the last half-century) as the character was never designed to be anyhing more than a plot device from the beginning. The fallout also leaves several questions about the future direction of this title with Scott closing his school and (apparently) choosing to roam the Earth like Caine in Kung Fu. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #600

Nov 12, 2015

Uncanny X-Men #600 is a good, but sadly not great, issue that is still worth a look. Iceman confronting himself about his sexuality proves to be a nice moment for both versions of the character. I'm a little less sure of the choice to pair Jean Grey and the younger Beast romantically (and honestly would like to see these characters returned home). Cyclops' big arc ends with more of a whimper than a bang and the issue is unnecessarily expanded to throw in an Iceman back-up story whose sole purpose seems to be an attempt to justify the $6 cover price.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Uncanny X-Men (2016) #1

Jan 14, 2016

There's certainly plenty of action to be had, but first issue doesn't sell me on either the storyline by Cullen Bunn nor the art from Greg Land. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Uncanny X-Men (2016) #12

Sep 16, 2016

I've been in and out of the series since it was relaunched. Because of this I'm a bit confused as the exact nature of the Corporation the team is up against (or what their ultimate plans for mutants is). Better understanding this might sell Hellfire Club as allies the X-Men could use, but in the end I'm much like Psylocke questioning whether or not this is the best the X-Men can do. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Uncanny X-Men (2018) #11

Feb 7, 2019

It's a pretty bleak future which Cyclopes has returned to. Most mutants are in hiding, the X-Men are gone, and humanity has found a “cure” for the mutation they fear. As for Scott and Logan, the wait for the reunion feels a bit too strung out (although that's nothing new in comics). And, other than seeing Cable put Logan in Scott's path, I'm not sure you get much from either back-up story to justify the extra pages here (or the the absurd cover price). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Uncanny X-Men (2018) #12

Feb 27, 2019

The rescue offers some welcome faces in Magik and Havok (whose fate at the end of this issue is far more murky than I'd like) and a few others I'm not so sure of. Either way, the rebuilding of the X-Men gets going in short order here. There are obviously other mutants out there, both old friends and enemies, and I'll be curious to see how many of them may show up in the next few issues as potential new members (or potential new problems). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Uncanny X-Men (2018) #15

Apr 10, 2019

While certainly memorable, I have very mixed feelings on Marvel taking one of Cyclops eyes (in the design of his Age of Apocalypse alternate version). Hope, who Scott sacrificed everything to save, taking the shot certainly resonates with the characters as the X-Men attempt to prevent the Mutant Liberation Front from killing everyone's favorite anti-mutant politician. But did we really need a literal one-eyed Cyclops? Hrm… unless of course there's a mutant out there with eye-restoration powers? For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
4
Uncanny X-Men (2018) #17

May 3, 2019

The comic will likely be remembered for Wolverine in a suit, the end of Cyclops and Wolverine's short bromance, and the flashback of Wolfsbane's assault and murder by a pretentious douchebag group whose unwanted advances scare her into showing her mutant abilities and whose mutant abilities push the bigots into horrific violence. The entire scene is seedy, and Wolverine's eye-for-eye justice certainly doesn't seem to sit well with the legacy of the main X-Men title. Having it interrupted, and take place entirely outside of the events shown, comes off as cheap and gutless as well by a creative team that isn't willing to own all the questionable decisions made here. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Uncanny X-Men (2018) #22

Jul 30, 2019

The issue, like the series, has it's up and down moments. Although I'm hardly his biggest fan, Havok likely deserved better (along with many mutants who met their end over the course of the series). Ending with a stronger united team deciding hatred and bigotry are better than hiding and anonymity, the X-Men appear ready to write their next chapter. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Uncanny X-Men (2018) Annual #1

Jan 28, 2019

The story by writer Ed Brisson and Carlos Gomez ties in a flashback to a scientist crucial for Cable to bring Cyclops back (and printing it in old-school comic-style was a nice touch). As we've seen elsewhere, the new Cable is a bit of a dick forcing Cyclops to choose between helping the X-Men or saving the innocent man who resurrected him. Rebranding the character firmly back in the hero column, the real question is where does Cyclops go from here in his steps to rebuild the X-Men? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Usagi Yojimbo #135

Mar 9, 2011

Fans of the character will no doubt want to pick this one up, but for casual readers this issue delivers more on promise than execution.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo #136

Apr 13, 2011

This issue begins a multi-story arc and the final page delivers all we need to know about the troubles the rabbit ronin has in store for him next month. If you haven't been reading Usagi (what's wrong with you?) this is actually a really good story to jump in and get your feet wet with the character and his world. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo #139

Aug 9, 2011

The storm outside, the prisoner, and the odd mix of personalities under one roof is a good set-up for a murder mystery. I won't tell you who is killed, or why, but I will say I'm definitely looking forward to picking up the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo #140

Sep 14, 2011

It may be light on action, but writer and artist Stan Sakai gives us yet another strong issue surrounding the travels of the rabbit ronin. But I wouldn't expect anything less. It also includes a great stare down between Usagi and the poet Saburo's bodyguard Benki. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Usagi Yojimbo #141

Nov 7, 2011

Sakai doesn't try to give us s super-sized story for his milestone. Instead he gives us more of what we've come to expect from him every month – a strong tale of Usagi Yojimbo standing up for justice for those who can't stand up on their own. In a nice touch, the back cover of the comic is a collection of all 200 covers featuring the character. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo #142

Nov 29, 2011

Another great tale by artist and writer Stan Sakai. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo #143

Jan 31, 2012

The issue may be a little light on action but there's plenty of foreshadowing to next issue's conclusion of this two-part tale that tells us there's a big battle or two coming if Usagi is to save the brewer from his enemies. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo #144

Mar 5, 2012

A good conclusion to the tale, which include some terrific panels of Usagi in action. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo #145

May 26, 2015

Revealing Kitsune to be the less bloodthirsty of the the two thieves, the comic ends with the unmasking of Chizu as the other with Usagi likely being forced to step-in between the two women for the apparently worthless scroll that led to the night's events unraveling. It's good to see Usagi back in action, and entangled in another of Kitsune's messes, once more. Best of the Week.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo #146

Jul 1, 2015

It seems Usagi's thankless (but very enjoyable) job to keep the two women from killing each other is far from over heading into the final issue of the storyline. Usagi Yojimbo #146 is filled with the type of action and comedy Stan Sakai's creation is known to deliver, I can't wait to see how the story ends. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo #147

Jul 27, 2015

The unusual threesome provided by Stan Sakai proved to be a great way to relaunch the ongoing series after it's lengthy hiatus. Usagi is back and, if this arc is any indication, the rabbit ronin will have his hands full with whatever fate has in store for him next. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo #148

Sep 19, 2015

The One-Armed Swordsman is a bit of a melancholy tale, punctuated with action that our hero is witness to but not often involved in, but the single issue and the pair of unexpected encounters not only allow Usagi to meet a fellow honor-bound ronin but also witness a measure of justice exacted in Takashi's revenge over Te. Stan Sakai is quick to point out it wasn't solely revenge that drove the ronin into seeking out and challenging Te once more but also a driving need to prevent the villain from continuing his evil work any longer. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo #149

Nov 16, 2015

Although a somewhat sad and tragic single issue, the issue ends on an upbeat note with our hero finding some joy in keeping his promise to Yoshi even after the prize is destroyed by delivering a fraud to a pompous fool who won't know any better. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo #150

Dec 6, 2015

Despite avenging the tea master's unnecessary death, Usagi Yojimbo #150 is a sad issue with our hero unable to prevent an outsider using local customs against honest citizens. Stan Sakai hides the more gruesome aspects of tea master's death just out-of-frame but still captures the complicated nature of the act which costs the life of Usagi's friend. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Usagi Yojimbo #151

Jan 25, 2016

Offering one bloody battle between Usagi and gang of assassins, a discussion of arranged marriages, and a pair of late twists involving the schemes of both members of the wedding party (neither of whom is as honest as they pretend to be), Usagi Yojimbo #151 delivers on all counts. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo #152

Mar 3, 2016

Leaving the villagers to finish the dyke on their own, an exhausted Usagi sets out after the bandits on his own only to find a desperate and starving group with no shelter for the storm. Bringing the two groups together not only helps save the town, but choosing to exit stage left when no one is looking forces the villagers and the thieves to come to an understanding between themselves without the samurai's help (offering the moral of the single issue story about kindness being repaid in kind and cooperation leading to a shared rewards). Once again Usagi saves the day, and this time he does it without even having to raise his sword. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo #153

Mar 31, 2016

Restored to health, and with a lightened spirit thanks to the gift offered to him by the female Kappa, our hero resumes his wandering once more. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo #154

May 20, 2016

Despite the ferocity of the ninja's attack when Usagi refuses to leave the battlefield, his choice to show the ninja mercy in their previous encounter saves his life it this bittersweet tale. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo #155

Jun 30, 2016

The Hell Screen is an interesting piece of the story. Is it simply a red herring, to throw suspicion off those who want the temple's lands for themselves. Or does the graphic depiction, said to seek vengeance on those who offend it, have some supernatural tie to the deaths? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo #156

Jul 26, 2016

“The Secret of the Hell Screen” continues as Miyamoto Usagi and Inspector Ishida continue to investigate the odd deaths surrounding the bizarre piece of art that even the son of its creator believes is cursed and needs to be destroyed. No closer to answers, Usagi's dreams begin to make the rabbit ronin wonder if there isn't some truth to the curse of the Hell Screen. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo #157

Aug 30, 2016

With the murders solved, and an unexpected discovery made which further underlines the futility of the Hasano's life, Usagi says farewell to Inspector Ishida but I'm guessing we'll see him again before too long. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo #159

Dec 5, 2016

Once Yuki shares her father's documents with Usagi and Ishida, the comic jumps back into full-action mode as the pair get justice for Yuki's father and take down a dishonest man and his minions. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo #160

Dec 30, 2016

While I've enjoyed Ishida's recent appearances, after staying around town for several issues, I'm ready for Usagi's wanderlust to kick back in and see the rabbit ronin continue his wanderings. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo #161

Sep 12, 2017

The issue also includes the first page of a new ongoing back-up story featuring Chibi Usagi. And you thought our hero couldn't get any cuter! I'll be curious to see where this one goes. The rabbit ronin is back! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo #162

Oct 11, 2017

With the mystery solved and his friends now out of harms way and allowed to leave the city by Ishida, everything ends well for our characters and our hero can begin his wandering once more. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo #163

Nov 18, 2017

Usagi Yojimbo #163 also includes another page of the ongoing Chibi Usagi story. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo #164

Dec 11, 2017

Usagi Yojimbo #164 deepens the mystery concerning who is leading the Black Goblin Gang and what they are ultimately after. Punctuated by two action scenes in which Ishida is able to save Usagi but he and the rabbit ronin are unable to save Hatamoto Asano, there's plenty left to be uncovered. Leading into next month's concluding issue, the death of Hatamoto Asano is likely to have major consequences for the entire town. There's also a mystery to be solved involving the identity of the Black Goblins' Master (which we may have gotten a clue to in this issue), the truth about what happened to all the stolen silver, and Ishida's continued quest to bring the thief Nezumi to justice. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo #165

Jan 4, 2018

Although the gang itself has been decimated, the true villain remains at large suggesting possible further trouble for Ishida and Usagi somewhere down the line. For now though, it seems like our rabbit ronin's wanderings will continue in a new upcoming mini-series Usagi Yojimbo: The Hidden. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #1

Jun 26, 2019

After a bit of a hiatus, I'm happy to see the rabbit ronin's escapades continue and can't wait to see what trouble Sasuke and Usagi may get themselves into. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #3

Aug 20, 2019

Moving away from demon puppets, the next issue looks to take the rabbit ronin back to the role of bodyguard. Although, in Usagi's travels, when has any job or part of a journey gone as expected? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #4

Sep 16, 2019

After fighting off demonic puppets in the comic's opening arc, it's a nice change to see Stan Sakai take the rabbit ronin back to basics here, and introduce a new character (inspired by a real writer) worthy and in need of Usagi's help. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #5

Oct 10, 2019

Usagi Yojimbo #5 offers a sad, but memorable, tale from our rabbit ronin's wanderings. There may have been no happy ending for Mura, but her stories did far outshine her husband's accomplishments. Also worthy of not is a drawing in the historical notes at the end from Stan Sakai's wife, Julie Fujii-Sakai, which is one of the more glorious things I have ever seen in a comic. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #6

Nov 18, 2019

Usagi's pilgrimage back to the spot of his greatest defeat, in hopes of discovering some sign to allow him to free himself from his vows to the fallen Mifune, instead leads to an encounter with a goblin in the woods with ties to both Usagi and Mifune and the tragedy that changed the samurai's life forever. The events of the issue restate the character core belief structure and, is so often the case, ends with the rabbit ronin hitting the open road once more. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #8

Feb 11, 2020

The mats are of far more importance than just their monetary value, and Usagi's involvement in their protection against the Neko isn't likely to earn him any friends among the ninja as the story concludes next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #9

Mar 25, 2020

The action is fast and furious in Usagi Yojimbo #9 with Usagi fighting with the soldiers on the ground and Chizu battling Kagemaru and Kimi and on the cliffs above. Stan Sakai also offers a nice moment between Usagi and his friend and a glimpse into the hidden long-term plans of Chizu to wrest control of the Neko Ninja back from Kagemaru. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #10

Jul 29, 2020

While not one of Usagi's most epic tales, the tension, hate and greed of those he comes into contact are palpable, making Usagi Yojimbo #10 memorable indeed. Although our hero is triumphant in combat, the issue ends tragically with even the innkeeper choosing greed over loyalty and leaving Usagi battered and alone once more.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #11

Aug 14, 2020

One other familiar face returns, the former Mifune warrior who Usagi recently came across who hopes to enlist the rabbit ronin in a chance to avenge Lord Mifune. Homecomings are indeed complicated.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #12

Sep 2, 2020

For those who know the character, the twist of Usagi showing his true colors is not surprising (although the glimpse at a bloodthirsty Usagi is shocking). He would not risk the lives of anyone, let alone the village he grew up in and the woman he still loves for a political victory. To survive he and his childhood frenemy must stand against the plot, at least until help can arrive.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #13

Oct 19, 2020

Usagi Yojimbo #13 also features a remembrance and flashback to a childhood adventure of Usagi and Kenichi before the pair's rivalry split them apart. While initially giving them hope that they could work together to fix their current problem, things aren't looking good for our heroes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #14

Dec 1, 2020

One note, this is Tom Luth‘s final issue of colorist as the artist is retiring. He has colored many panels and covers of Usagi Yojimbo in the past along with issues of Groo the Wanderer. The issue contains a well-deserved thank you to Luth from writer and artist Stan Sakai.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #16

Jan 7, 2021

Despite releasing Usagi of any responsibility or burden to remain and fight alongside him, the wandering rabbit ronin refuses to leave his friend to face the creatures alone as the comic ends on a cliffhanger just as the real battle is about to begin.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #19

Apr 28, 2021

After some longer arcs it's good to have another single issue tale of our hero still fighting demons obsessed with, and even driven mad by, events from the past.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #20

Jun 22, 2021

As the villains plot their revenge, Usagi decides to help the swordmaster on his quest which no doubt will run into more trouble before long.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #22

Sep 24, 2021

Despite the thieves' successful escape, Boss Hasegawa's warriors are sent to retrieve the book tracking down the foursome and leading to a skirmish and the kidnapping of Kiyoko who will be held for ransom until dawn.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #23

Nov 2, 2021

Usagi Yojimbo #23 is a solid middle issue of the arc adding some drama while drawing out the trouble for our characters to be resolved within the next issue. The comic foreshadows some hope for our heroes given the one honorable member of Boss Hasegawa's soldiers who keeps Kiyoko safe from the others, and the Boss himself, after giving Usagi his word she would be safe until sunrise. Now, if they can just find that book"

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #24

Dec 1, 2021

It doesn't take long before all hell to break loose. Although our protagonists come out victorious, and Kistune and Kiyoko find a way to make a profit on the ordeal, Usagi has made a new enemy in Boss Hasegawa (but also a new friend in Aoki, the honorable samurai who accepts Usagi's wisdom about not serving an dishonorable lord). The ronins hit the road once more, but where will their travels take them next and will Yukichi get to meet any more of Usagi's friends?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #25

Jan 26, 2022

Usagi finds more destruction in the warrior's wake in their latest victims, but Yukichi finds something quite different, but no less dangerous, in a young girl whos draws him in with her flute playing, luring the young warrior into a trap for her uncle. On the trail of six remorseless killers, has Usagi actually taken the safer path?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #26

Feb 22, 2022

We do get a longer segment between Yukichi and Jei which teases a confrontation that never arrives. However, Jei does manage to deal with the one samurai who manages to escape Usagi's wrath. As for a confrontation between Usagi and Jei, we don't get one here (which I'll admit to being a bit disappointed), although the rabbit ronin is shocked to learn what held up his cousin from arriving earlier with his aid.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #27

Mar 25, 2022

Although neither Usagi or Yukichi see any ghost discussed in the story (or at least don't realize that they do), “A Ghost Story” is appropriately tired as the merchant's jealous wife's attempts to kill the servant eventually lead her to an unexpected encounter in the woods putting an end to Shizuye's troubles for good.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #28

May 26, 2022

Usagi Yojimbo #28 works as nice solo story offering some action for the pair and more lessons for the young ronin which Usagi has taken under his wing. The assistant reluctantly allows the ronin to accompany him while working with the gang to find another opportunity to get rid of those interfering with plan and steal the treasure. This time, however, it's the thieves who fail to realize Usagi has caught on to their plans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #29

Jul 27, 2022

It's a solid first issue of a new arc that still plays on previous events. The pair's arrival in town also leads to Usagi's reunion with Chizu who helps explain the situation to the pair of ronin and reveal the hidden treasure that was buried deep in one of the merchant's boxes implicating Lord Hikiji of treason that the trio will now need to see safely delivered to the south (unless the Komori, or the Neko Ninja, catch up with them first).

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #30

Aug 24, 2022

While the first half of the issue deals with Chizu, Miyamoto Usagi, and Yukichi avoiding the Komori, we get plenty of action in the final pages as the bat ninja catch up to our travelers on the road. Successful in fighting them off, our heroes still lose their horses and precious time needing to now take a more circuitous and dangerous path to their destination.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2019) #31

Oct 7, 2022

Usagi Yojimbo #31 wraps up the storyline, offering a nice epilogue for Chizu and justifying her actions (despite her sorrow at bruising her relationship with the rabbit ronin). We may not get much action, but there's plenty of tensions culminating in Usagi making an unexpected move against the Komori. With the adventure complete the ninja parts ways with the samurai, as the ronins' journey continues.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2023): Ice and Snow #1

Oct 9, 2023

The setting may be cold and icy, but things are quickly heating up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2023): Ice and Snow #2

Nov 7, 2023

Wounded, and in need of sustenance, Yuk-Onne can't pass up such a juicy target. But after all is said and done, will Jei and Yuki-Onna turn out to be enemies or perhaps friends with a common cause?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo (2023): Ice and Snow #3

Dec 13, 2023

While Usagi Yojimbo: Ice and Snow #3 does include Miyamoto Usagi and Yukichi, their part of the story is largely secondary with Usagi attempting to warm his friend after surviving the attack of the Yuki-Onna.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo: Dragon Bellows Conspiracy #1

Jul 6, 2021

The first issue of the classic run introduces several separate characters who will be brought together over the arc along with a conspiracy that requires investigation and answers.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo: Dragon Bellows Conspiracy #4

Oct 11, 2021

In the other ongoing storyline, Gen finally catches up with Zato-Ino leading to a lengthy battle that highlights this chapter of the story and costs the bounty hunter his horn. Before their fight can conclude, Usagi and the ninja arrive as the ronin quickly makes each a promise and secures their help for the attack on Lord Tamakuro's fortress. Now the real battle begins.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo: Dragon Bellows Conspiracy #6

Nov 22, 2021

The rest of the issue deals with the fate of the wounded Zato-Ino who is rescued and taken to an isolated village. Although planning to move on when healed, he provides service by dispatching a gang of bandits troubling the town (in the issue's one big action sequence) who become more violent after realizing the bounty on the town's new resident. He loses his loyal companion in the process, but finds a new home to call his own and the chance to begin a different life.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo: Lone Goat & Kid #1

Feb 2, 2022

The reprinted comic is a tragic tale for the heartbroken young woman who meets the same fate as her love when she's killed by her greedy brother who can't ignore the reward Usagi is offering for the swords. However, he'll face the greed of his “friends” who want a little of that reward for themselves, eventually beating him to death for it in the woods.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo: Lone Goat & Kid #2

Mar 3, 2022

Tatsusaburo‘s story kicks off events and covers the work needed to produce the region's largest kite ever. Usagi and Hatsu‘s storylines converge quickly as the rabbit ronin exposes the crooked gambler to the town. Hatsu attempts to save face by turning all the gamblers against the ronin blaming him for the townspeople's sudden anger to the gamblers as the chase crashes into Tatsusaburo's story and Usagi goes for an unexpected ride. The different threads are woven delicately together in a rare bloodless Usagi adventure that still holds up well today.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Usagi Yojimbo: Lone Goat & Kid #4

May 2, 2022

The Komori Ninja make for great villains and Stan Sakai makes the most of the bat design which turns out to have several deadly features.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo: Lone Goat & Kid #5

Jun 1, 2022

While Usgai doesn't refuse the challenges, his choice in how he accepts allows him to remind his new friend of the honor of the samurai and how he can still serve in his final days.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo: Lone Goat & Kid #6

Jul 6, 2022

The two ronin are evenly matched and the outcome would likely have been dire for at least one if not for Wakame's greed forcing his warriors onto the battlefield in the middle of their duel attempting to bring a swift end to the proceedings. With Wakame's treachery exposed, and his men killed, both samurai leave to continue their wanderings but their paths will cross again.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo: Senso #1

Aug 11, 2014

I'm not sure exactly where creator Stan Sakai is taking the character with the new six-issue mini-series, but I'm thrilled that my favorite fluffy samurai is back in action once more and look forward to see where this future tale may lead him. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo: Senso #2

Sep 8, 2014

We still don't know what the aliens ultimately want, but Usagi Yojimbo: Senso #2 certainly sells them as a legitimate threat which only someone like our own rabbit ronin might be able to handle. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo: Senso #3

Oct 12, 2014

The third issue of Usagi Yojimbo: Senso is heavy on action and features the death of a well-known character. It's the second alien rocket, however, which crash lands right the middle of the village Usagi is attempting to evacuate that is the more immediate problem for the rabbit ronin if he has any hopes to surviving. I can't wait to see where the future adventures of Usagi Yojimbo go from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo: Senso #4

Nov 14, 2014

In the middle of what appears to be a hopeless situation the issue offers a rather bleak picture of what's to come. However, those with faith in Miyamoto Usagi know that the rabbit ronin has a knack for always finding a way. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo: Senso #5

Dec 16, 2014

As Usagi Yojimbo: Senso #5 comes to a close it teases us with what writer/artist Stan Sakai has in mind for the finale as everything involving the alien destruction has led to the creation of a weapon powerful enough to take on the enemy. That last panel is amazing! I can't wait to see it unleashed! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo: Senso #6

Jan 19, 2015

And thankfully we don't have to wait very long as Sakai and Dark Horse return to the current adventures of everyone's favorite rabbit ronin later this year picking up the ongoing series where it left off. Usagi may not live forever, but hopefully we'll get more of his amazing adventures for years and years to come. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo: The Hidden #1

Mar 31, 2018

While most of the more recent Usagi Yojimbo stories have been shorter one-off tales, I'll be curious to see creator Stan Sakai dive a bit deeper into a single mystery. The discovery that one of the dead men is a Christian offers a different reasoning for the attack… although their is still that mysterious package. Just what did the street thief grab which marked him for death as well? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo: The Hidden #2

May 1, 2018

So far the only answers Usagi and Ishida have uncovered have led to larger questions. Just what was the true motive for the crime, and what help can the local thief offer in solving it? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo: The Hidden #3

May 28, 2018

With the mystery picking up, but answers still alluding our heroes, there's lots here to enjoy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo: The Hidden #4

Jun 29, 2018

During the course of events the pair lose the empty box that once held something worth killing for, and so far is their only clue. Despite talking to another Christian, neither Usagi nor Ishida has any idea of what their adversaries are after or what prize they are willing to kill for. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo: The Hidden #5

Sep 4, 2018

With two issues remaining, Stan Sakai has given us most of the pieces to the mystery. We know why the Christian was killed and what his killers are searching for, but there's still plenty of work to be done before this case can be closed. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Usagi Yojimbo: The Hidden #7

Oct 30, 2018

And so Usagi Yojimbo: The Hidden comes to a close, but not before a final epilogue that plays on hints foreshadowed earlier in the series. Forced to move on again, our weary travel says farewell to his friend and the rabbit ronin's wanderings continue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Usagi Yojimbo: Wanderer's Road #5

Apr 9, 2021

For those who have never read the classic 80s story, or for those interested in seeing it printed in color, Usagi Yojimbo: Wanderer's Road #5 is worth seeking out.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Vampirella (2017) #10

Feb 26, 2018

The former goddess, now cursed bloodthirsty immortal, blames Vampirella for not stopping her descent into madness and apparently is willing to take out centuries of aggression on her former friend including throwing the vampire and her bae into gladiatorial combat. Let's just say things don't go so well for our heroine. If you aren't already a fan there's not much here to grab your interest (other than Joanie's cover). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Vampirella (2017): Halloween Special #1

Oct 28, 2018

Specials and Annuals are rarely great, or must-have, issues, but the Vampirella 2018 Halloween Special provides some fun that fans should enjoy. I actually preferred the second tale, co-written by Blake Northcott, and wish it could have stolen a few extra pages from the longer opening tale which begins to drag a bit. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Vampirella vs. Red Sonja #1

Nov 15, 2022

I'll admit to being more than a little lost (not great for the first issue of a comic) as the series gets off to a slow start which no doubt will eventually focus more on the two characters once the story gets rolling.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Vampironica #1

Mar 20, 2018

There are several questions the comic has to answer, first and foremost is how is undead Veronica supposed to stay in school in the middle of the day? For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Velvet #1

Oct 25, 2013

Spy stories, like revenge, are best served cold. Set in the mid-1970s, Velvet has the ability to draw on Cold War tensions and the nostalgia of old school espionage that should play into the strengths of the kind of story Brubaker and Epting wish to tell. The first issue sells me on both the character and the comic's opening arc as Velvet left to her own devices to both clear her name and uncover the mystery of why two of her old friends were killed. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Velvet #2

Dec 12, 2013

A really strong second issue fills in a bit of Velvet's past (at least to the man given the job of chasing her) as well as reveals a skeleton in her closet that might come back to haunt both her and the Director. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Velvet #3

Jan 21, 2014

Although she's been out of the game for years Velvet continues to easily slide back into the life she was born for as the agency that trained her hunts her down and she searches for the identity of the person who murdered two old friends and framed Violet for the crimes. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Velvet #4

Mar 10, 2014

We only get a glimpse of Arc-7′s search for Velvet as the death of Stepanov and his wife and what Velvet is doing (if no clue as to the reason behind her actions). It will be interesting to see if we get more of her pursuit going forward or if the focus stays primarily on Velvet's search for answers. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Velvet #5

May 27, 2014

For those waiting for a little more insight into who Velvet is and what makes her tick, Velvet #5 is an issue you don't want to miss. It also lays the groundwork by alerting the character than her hidden enemy has done far more damage to her life than recently framing Velvet for murder. I can't wait to see where her story goes from here. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Velvet #6

Jul 29, 2014

The brash actions taken by Velvet over the course of the issue, particularly in the final few pages, won't earn her any new friends in the spy organization still chasing her, but as long as she remains one-step ahead of her pursuers Velvet at least has a chance. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Velvet #7

Sep 17, 2014

Velvet's continued actions baffle Colt and Roberts who are only beginning to suspect that there's likely far more to the story than the simple frame job suggests. Colt's perspective gives us a glimpse at the dangerous false trails one finds while searching for a master spy while Roberts more analytical approach searches for assets and leverage which can be used against Velvet, although he discovers just how far he's been lagging behind his target in the final couple pages of yet another terrific issue. Best of the Week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Velvet #8

Nov 17, 2014

Providing action, suspense, and a few more breadcrumbs to the larger mystery at play, Velvet #8 doesn't disappoint. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Velvet #9

Feb 14, 2015

The real question is whether, after going to the trouble of breaking him out of prison, Damian is a comrade or a potential new enemy who may only complicate her attempts to learn the truth about who has framed her and arranged the deaths of two men she loved. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Velvet #10

Apr 25, 2015

I don't know what writer Ed Brubaker and artist Steve Epting have in store for the comic's third arc, or where the conspiracy will lead Velvet from here, but sign me up! Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Velvet #11

Aug 23, 2015

Part One of “The Man Who Stole the World” sets up what we assume is a shaky temporary partnership between Velvet and an old flame (as we've seen in the comic use before). The issue's final few pages however reveals that there's far more to Maximilian Dark than just an old flame to help with the search. Max, it seems, may be the first domino in the larger conspiracy that has cost multiple men their lives and forced Velvet on the run. I don't know exactly what Dark's game is, but I'm curious to see Velvet uncover it and us it, as she uses him here, to her advantage in the coming months. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Velvet #12

Nov 23, 2015

Steve Epting's art continues to be the perfect match for writer Ed Brubaker's words as Image Comics' spy thriller proves to be one of the best comics of the month yet again. We may not gain much ground in Velvet's investigation this month but I'm still all-in to see where it will eventually lead. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Velvet #13

Feb 25, 2016

Given that she's at the mercy of a madman for most of the issue, and is saved by a man whose sacrifice she fails to understand, Velvet #13 doesn't offer us Velvet at her best. That said, in those mistakes our master spy's mind never stops turning, and, as we've come to expect, she does whatever needs doing to survive and live to fight another day. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Velvet #14

May 3, 2016

What did Velvet learn? What's next for Velvet, Colt, and those still working against her? Can Velvet escape Colt's clutches or turn the fellow spy into a co-collaborator? Or, with what she knows now, is being taken by her former employers exactly what she wants? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Velvet #15

Jul 25, 2016

Faking her death and springing her trap on her boss, Velvet finally gets some answers as well as an offer she finds all to easy to refuse. Despite knowing it will end any chase of ever clearing her name, Velvet takes her vengeance leaving the series wide open as to where to go next. There's still plenty of old adventures from her spy past, and what happens now with Velvet presumed dead but still on the run with an unique skill set which shouldn't go to waste? Whatever Brubaker and Epting have planned I hope we won't have to wait too long to find out where Velvet's next adventure will take her. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Vengeance of the Moon Knight (2024) #1

Jan 4, 2024

Vengeance of the Moon Knight #1 is a solid opening issue putting the supporting characters of the previous series front and center (even doing a bit of what I refer to as the Leverage strut) while also throwing in some bigger name cameos as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Vigil (2023) #1

May 31, 2023

3.5 Razors, The Vigil

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Vigil (2023) #2

Jun 28, 2023

Giving off some strong Frankenstein / Island of Dr. Moreau mad scientist vibes, the second issue again puts one character front and center while allowing others to work in the background.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Vigil (2023) #4

Aug 22, 2023

As has been the framework of the previous issues, The Vigil #4 introduces us to another member of the team in Dodge whose quick metabolism allows her the ability of intangibility making the former professional fighter who killed one of her opponents in the ring not someone you would want to fight with.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Vigil (2023) #5

Oct 5, 2023

A heady fifth issue leading several characters to a crossroads prior to the battle to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
2
Voltron #1

Dec 14, 2011

[Dynamite Entertainment, $3.99]

View Issue       View Full Review
5
War For Earth-3 (2022) #1

Mar 7, 2022

While Waller's team takes down Power Ring and then Owlman, Ultraman is distracted by the sex games of Owlman and Superwoman providing the Squad with just the opening they need and Waller time to make her pitch to the world's most dangerous man. Aside from the seedy Owlman / Superwoman / Ultraman stuff, ick, there is plenty of action (although nowhere near $6 worth) and Waller does have a plan which her team executes leading to a new status quo. The war has begun. Hmm, okay?

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Wesley Dodds: The Sandman (2023) #1

Oct 16, 2023

Wesley Dodds: The Sandman #1 works as a reintroduction to the character with a nice nod or two for longtime fans (such as Dodds meeting Rex Tyler at a party and his dream of the colorful clad group who will eventual become his teammates). Being rebuffed by the war department and having everything he owns literally go up in flames is an interesting start for the character. I am curious to see where he goes from here.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
West Coast Avengers (2018) #1

Sep 5, 2018

The first issue offers wacky action as the heroes save the Los Angeles beaches from land sharks and discover a former member has outgrown them (literally). I'm not sure if there's enough to bring me back for issue #2. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
White Widow (2023) #1

Nov 8, 2023

Armament provides a mystery for Yelena to solve and shake her out of suburban boredom, but I don't know that there's enough here to bring me back for a second issue for a series that feels like it will have a drawn-out tease before revealing its secrets.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
White Widow (2023) #2

Dec 19, 2023

White Widow #2 is another fun issue starting with a flashback of Yelena dealing with another assassin also sent to kill Wolverine who offers some off-the-cuff advice that has changed the assassin's career path.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Wild Storm #3

Apr 23, 2017

With Jenny's first appearance more of a tease than anything else, most of the comic deals with the ongoing storyline involving Angela Spica who gets two different sets of unwelcome guests in her apartment. One attempting to save her, and one attempting to take her out. Unfortunately, Angela isn't given much time to trust Grifter and his friends before the assassins from IO show up and begin shooting everything in sight. So far Angela's story hasn't brought her into Jenny's orbit… but from the tease we get here I'm guessing it won't be too long before that happens. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Wild Storm #4

May 24, 2017

While Bendix's addition fits well into the mix, I'm still not sure exactly how the new version of Jenny Sparks (introduced in the last issue) fits in with all these other pieces. Like her first incarnation, she continues to be a wild card who could have major impact in a variety of different ways. And how many of her old friends will also show up in the coming issues? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wild Storm #5

Jun 27, 2017

The other storyline involves Angela sitting down with former astronaut Adrianna Tereshkova whose bizarre origin makes her feel oddly less alone. Has Angela finally found a friend and ally? And has Cray's refusal to hunt her turned him into an enemy of the state? Time will tell. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wild Storm #7

Sep 27, 2017

As for Angela it looks like she, and we, will have to wait at least one more issues for answers about the world and players she's found herself trapped in since making her suit. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Wild Storm #8

Oct 24, 2017

The Wild Storm #8 introduces us to The Doctor, and introduces her to Jenny Mei Sparks (whose name is uttered for the first time in this comic). While we get more of The Doctor than this new Jenny, The Doctor is able to learn a bit about her mysterious visitor and what she represents from previous Doctors. The acid trip the medicine woman takes Jenny on is full of imagery, some of which makes sense and some which only raises far more questions. Is this the beginning of a beautiful friendship? Or something far more complicated?

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Wild Storm #9

Nov 27, 2017

The Wild Storm #9 feels very much an issue set aside in the middle of graphic novel to lay some foundation for what is yet to come. The Japanese sequence helps to set it apart as more than just a filler issue (although, really, that's what it appears to be). The interaction we got with Jenny Mei Sparks and the new Doctor in the previous issue may have raised my hopes a bittoo much that the timeline had been accelerated, but it seems Warren Ellis is more than content to take his time and continue to build out his world. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wild Storm #11

Jan 25, 2018

Both Skywatch and IO continue to look suspiciously at each other as frictions mount. This offers a chance for Henry Bendix to inform readers what happened the last time there was split between the two organizations, and on Earth Jacklyn King‘s team moves forward with what very likely may be the first step towards a new conflict. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wild Storm #12

Mar 13, 2018

Break-ins are the common theme of both storylines in The Wild Storm #12. As Jacklyn King begins I.O.‘s hack into Skywatch, Grifter and his team for an evacuation of an I.O. facility to steal data, crash their system (part of the plan), and leave lots of dead bodies (not so much part of the plan). The one thing that's clear after the dust settled is everyone is more on edge than they were before and the war Jennifer Mei Sparks saw brewing between Skywatch and IO may have just begun. I hope you are gathering your team Sparks, it appears the world is going to need them sooner than later. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wild Storm #13

May 21, 2018

The other big emphasis in this issue is the existence of human-alien half-breeds. The Wild Storm #13 introduces us to John Lynch, the former director of IO, who reaches out to his former soldier Marc Slayton when he discovers someone has been digging into the details about his uber-secret project to enhance human soldiers with alien DNA codenamed Thunderbird which left the subjects forever changed. Fitting into that same theme, John Colt makes a birthday call and Voodoo has some unpleasant dreams. There's definitely a strong alien flavor there the foreshadows looming trouble just off the horizon. I'll be curious to see just how Warren Ellis weaves the half-breed stories into that of the growing I.O./Skywatch conflict and Sparks putting together her new team. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wild Storm #14

Jun 26, 2018

As we've come the expect from the series, The Wild Storm #14 jumps around to various other characters a well. We get Jenny Mei Sparks and Shen Li-Men making nice with Jack Hawksmoor (and a glimpse that Jenny 2.0 has a little of the original's fire in her), and, in the comic's biggest action sequence featuring a lot of headshots, we see the cold war between I.O. and Skywatch heat up. Despite Zealot killing off the intruders, I.O.'s retaliation for the death of their agents is brutal, and effective, battle cry. Better get your team together, Miss Sparks, this world is in need of some authority. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wild Storm #15

Jul 22, 2018

Continuing to grab intel, and support, Shen and Jenny Mei Sparks are still sitting on the sidelines (which apparently is where Zealot has been relegated as well). How long they can they remain there? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wild Storm #16

Sep 1, 2018

Meanwhile the threat of the increased conflict between I.O. and Skywatch continues to be the looming threat likely to finally bring these threads together. Better hurry Angie, the world is going to need you sooner rather than later. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wild Storm #17

Sep 25, 2018

The Wildstorm #17 also returns to Angela Spica pushing the limits of the technology that is a part of her and getting a different account from the Daemonites about her new friends who are actually aliens known as the Kherubim. While the conversation fails to sway Angela's loyalties to one side or the other of the warring aliens, it does provide foreshadowing of what is to come (including a looming authority, which I'm been waiting for since issue #1). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Wild Storm #18

Nov 7, 2018

While Lynch's fight provides most of the issue's action (yet another fight the former head of I.O. manages to walk away from), and some terrific action panels from Jon Davis-Hunt, Angie's move to join Jenny and company, and Shen‘s magical healing of Jack Hawksmoor, pushes the comic forward to one more step to offering us a new version of the Authority. Although they are still missing a couple of heavy hitters, it looks like the real fun can begin as we seem to be coming closer and closer to the world meeting Jenny Mei Sparks and her friends for the first time. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Wild Storm #19

Jan 31, 2019

The issue also offers two crucial pieces of information about Jenny Mei Sparks including her origins (not the spirit of any century) and a trip to Mars and delivers the first appearance of the final two authoritative figures who are likely to play a large role in how events unfold. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Wild Storm #20

Feb 27, 2019

Other items of note, due to the fight Jenny Mei Sparks makes an important discovery which implications are only foreshadowed here, and tensions at I.O. bring a new player into the field (one not too shy about dropping bodies or creating havoc simply to make a point). It will be interesting to see where both these threads lead, but for now we can simply bask in the awesome of two more authoritative heroes kicking some serious ass. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Wild Storm #22

Apr 30, 2019

The issue also features Jacklyn King putting Angelia's tech to good use when someone shows up for her as well as it appears the gloves are completely off in the battle between Skywatch and I.O. with only the Authority to step in and save the world. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Wild Storm #23

Jun 4, 2019

While Shen is able to stop two loose canons from attacking New York, there are plenty of others out there still under Bendix's control. The cold war between Skywatch and I.O. has finally erupted. Looks like a job for an Authority. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Wild Storm #24

Jul 10, 2019

The Wild Storm #24 isn't the best issue of the run, but it is a solid conclusion. A new Wildcats mini-series is what's next, but I still want more Authority (…and possibly some Planetary?). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Will Eisner's The Spirit #5

Dec 15, 2015

Still leaving plenty of story to be told, the issue gives us the Spirit using his detective (and intimidation) skills to find his missing friends as well as a confrontation between our hero and his most hated adversary. I'm curious to see where the series goes from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Will Eisner's The Spirit #6

Jan 9, 2016

Will Eisner's The Spirit #6 gives us what little information our hero has about his missing two years and our first look a new mysterious woman to the Spirit's stable of femme fatales as it continues to tease us with the name Mikado Vaas. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Will Eisner's The Spirit #7

Feb 10, 2016

Issue #7 may not reveal much about Vaas, other than Ebony White and Sammy Strunk tying the elusive villain to an import/export business, but it does reset the Spirit's relationship with his best gal while also teasing the appearance of a femme fatale to heat things up next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Will Eisner's The Spirit #8

Mar 21, 2016

With a bit about the identity of the villain revealed, along with the name of the femme fatale who kept the Spirit prisoner on the island in his time away from Central City, Matt Wagner sets the stage for the final third of the twelve-issue maxi-series. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Will Eisner's The Spirit #9

Apr 14, 2016

While the comic begins with the flashbacks to Tangiers, most of the latest issue's story focuses on the Commissioner Nolan subplot as the assassin Pinky Fingers arrives in town and shoots up the police station to get to his target. Dolan is injured, though not critically, and the assassin is able to get away from our hero likely setting up another showdown between the shartpshooter and the Spirit in next month's issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Will Eisner's The Spirit #11

Jun 7, 2016

Will Eisner's The Spirit #11 also fills in a bit of story for Ellen who discovers who is behind the assassination plot on her father and why she may not have as much trouble dumping her fiance as she feared. I'd expect both stories to easily wrap-up next month as well. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Winter Soldier (2012) #1

Feb 6, 2012

Thankfully there is some action mixed in (including a Russian-speaking gorilla with a machine gun) that helps move the story along. I'm a bit surprised how much Brubaker gives away in the first issue, but with so much heavy lifting done here, I'm expecting issue #2 to get right to business. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Winter Soldier (2012) #2

Feb 22, 2012

The comic is still worth a look but I think once writer Ed Brubaker can spend less time on set-up and let the stories flow more naturally I'll be happier with the result. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Winter Soldier (2012) #3

Mar 12, 2012

It looks like three issues in things are finally starting to pick up. Let's hope it continues. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Winter Soldier (2012) #4

Apr 15, 2012

As Bucky and Doom shoot up the UN the Black Widow works to track down the Red Ghost's and his machine gun totting, jetpack wearing, gorilla soldiers who (given the cover of next month's cover) we should be seeing more of very soon. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Winter Soldier (2012) #5

May 23, 2012

A good conclusion of the arc that still leaves a couple of threads let unanswered. It also marks the returns of the Red Ghost's army of gorillas with machine guns (c'mon, who doesn't love that?). There's plenty of action and even an ending that gives Bucky some of his beloved solitary brooding time (along with a quick assassination at the end). No, he's certainly not Captain America anymore. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Winter Soldier (2012) #6

Jun 13, 2012

Although this storyline doesn't appear to have Doombots or gorillas with machine guns, it's setting up to be very much an old fashioned spy thriller. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Winter Soldier (2012) #7

Jun 26, 2012

Okay, so it doesn't have gorillas with machine guns, but a motor home of death is still pretty cool, and Brubaker keeps the tension taught as Bucky does his impression of Sandra Bulluck from Speed. Another strong issue with a nice (if far too foreseeable) twist at the end. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Winter Soldier (2012) #8

Jul 30, 2012

Meanwhile Bucky and Jasper are able to find and trace the helicopter Novokov used to make off with Natalia, but they don't know that they are far too late because Natalia has now fallen to the dark side and is… dancing. Great idea for a story, but Brubaker's choice of the final reveal makes the comic read far more humorous than ominous. Still, worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Winter Soldier (2012) #9

Sep 6, 2012

That said, even if I have problems with the concept, Brubaker's execution is still well done. The comic does have a couple nice moments, my favorite being Bucky's internal monologue as he squares off against Natasha and realizes how much she's been holding back during their sparring sessions. Does a brainwashed Black Widow make for a dangerous adversary? Sure, but with the character currently involved in other Marvel titles I don't see this arc having any immediate impact. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Winter Soldier (2012) #10

Sep 16, 2012

It's unlikely the Black Widow will stay lost for long and, yes, there will be some guilt over her actions and the death of Jasper but no real lingering effects to the overall Marvel Universe. The only way this story has any lasting meaning is if the Black Widow had killed Nick Fury (which didn't happen, and I don't see any reason a character with the savvy of Fury would have put himself in position for her to try) or if Bucky is forced to kill Natasha (which won't happen either). Still, it's well told and worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Winter Soldier (2012) #11

Oct 3, 2012

Brubaker is managing to drag out the story in a way that still makes it compelling, and hinting at Novokov's deeper plans involving his new weapons and Natalia, but I have mixed feelings about the art of Butch Guice as several panels appear rushed. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Winter Soldier (2012) #12

Nov 6, 2012

The choice to send Bucky after Daredevil seems an odd one from the Soviet sleeper-soldier's point of view, but it should provide plenty of action for the next issue. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Winter Soldier (2012) #13

Dec 21, 2012

The fight has its moments, and it's certainly well told, but by the end of the issue we're right back to where we were an issue-and-a-half ago with no movement on the search for the brainwashed Black Widow or the ultimate goal of Novokov. Even if Brubaker seems to be milking a story that doesn't make any sense with what's going on with the rest of the Marvel Universe (as Black Widow isn't reprogrammed in The Avengers or other titles in which she's also appearing), it's still worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Winter Soldier (2012) #14

Jan 29, 2013

More concerning however is Novokov's victory. Although the Avengers are able to restore nearly all of Natasha's memories, they can't make her remember Bucky at all. Aside from making no sense, this certainly opens up new possibilities for the character (including the teased pairing with Hawkeye to mirror the movie characters), but it also means a huge piece of what made this book work will be absent for the foreseeable future. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Winter Soldier (2012) #15

Feb 13, 2013

While Winter Soldier #15 isn't all that good neither is it a bad comic. However, it doesn't do nearly enough the sell me on the new direction for the title or the character. Pass.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Winter Soldier (2012) #16

Mar 12, 2013

The island of misfit assassins is more goofy than frightening and the objectives of Bucky's new mission are murky at best. Two issues in new writer Jason LaTour has done little to help sell me on the comic's new direction. It's not a bad issue, but there's not much offered here to make me pick up next month's comic. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Winter Soldier (2012) #17

Apr 11, 2013

After the heavy set-up, questionable plot choices, and goofy island of assassins, writer Jason LaTour finally seems to be settling down with the character. Winter Soldier #17 has a Bond-like quality (even if that Bond is Moonraker), that fans of the character may enjoy. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Winter Soldier: The Bitter March #1

Feb 20, 2014

Offering us a look at the more murderous version of Bucky under control of the Soviets, the issue sells me completely on the idea of Shen alone with an injured Fury on a mountain against a mythical enemy he fears he can't beat. Chris Eliopoulos also provides an awesome variant cover. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wonder Woman (2016) #1

Jun 28, 2016

The Wonder Woman storyline actually works quite well as writer Greg Rucka and artist Liam Sharp manage to keep the subject of Diana's search hidden until the very last panel of the issue. I'm far less interested in Trevor, who I hope is just passing through as a regular guest-star and isn't going to be staying around for the long hall. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Wonder Woman (2016) #2

Jul 20, 2016

While not as engaging as the first issue, Wonder Woman #2 does feature the art of Nicola Scott (which is a reason to buy almost any comic). The art is definitely a plus, and the story works well, but I still have my doubts about whether writer Greg Rucka (penning both storylines) can make this on-and-off story structure ultimately work. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Wonder Woman (2016) #3

Aug 10, 2016

Next month the comic will slingshot back to the year one storyline. So far, I'm preferring this arc (and the jumping back and forth continues to be awkward). I am curious to learn more about Cheetah's curse and the source of the creatures chasing Diana. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Wonder Woman (2016) #5

Sep 6, 2016

My other complaint with the issue is the art of Liam Sharp whose version of the Amazon princess works fine for me in action scenes but not quite as well in her more contemplative moments when not fighting odd werewolf creatures. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wonder Woman (2016) #6

Sep 24, 2016

Of the even-numbered issues centering on Diana's origins, Wonder Woman #6 is the best so far. Filled with humor, Diana's introduction to the outside world is hardly what she expected. The issue also offers the first meeting between Wonder Woman and Dr. Barbara Minerva long before she would become her greatest adversary. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Wonder Woman (2016) #7

Oct 6, 2016

While the “Year One” storyline is just getting the threesome acquainted in the odd issues of the new Wonder Woman series, Wonder Woman #7 reunites Wonder Woman with Cheetah and Steve Trevor as Wonder Woman her former friend turned enemy work together to free the captives and defeat Urzkartaga. The issue works well to wrap-up this part of the story while still leaving plenty to be delved into in the next arc. Will Diana's fragile truce with Cheetah hold? What does her reunion with Steve mean for the future of the pair? I am curious to see where the comic will go next. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wonder Woman (2016) #16

Feb 13, 2017

While it may not be the stuff of epic super-villain origin, the issue sets up strong motivations for Veronica Cale with jealousy and misplaced hatred towards Diana for what has happened to her daughter. Without even realizing it, Diana has made a new enemy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Wonder Woman (2016) #26

Jul 18, 2017

It's a compelling issue which leads into the final few pages and a rare night off for the herione attending a wedding with a friend. The meeting of a precious young girl, not all that different from the flashbacks we get of Diana herself at that age, will lead to the explosive final panel which ends the comic on a compelling cliffhanger. Who set the bomb? Who was the target? Does the girl's mention of a coughing woman tie back to the doctor who gave Diana her physical? And what will be the physical and mental effects of this latest trauma. For the first time in a good long while, I'm anxiously anticipating what's next for Wonder Woman. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wonder Woman (2016) #27

Aug 7, 2017

Wonder Woman #27 may lack the same emotional impact of the previous issue, but it does open an interesting door about how Diana's powers can be stolen by others. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Wonder Woman (2016) #28

Aug 21, 2017

Opening the door to a slew of action in the next issue, Wonder Woman #28 is an okay issue that takes the arc on an entirely new path (and further and further from the strengths of Wonder Woman #26). That said, I am still curious to see where the story goes from here. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Wonder Woman (2016) #29

Sep 11, 2017

I'm going to take a wild guess that the answer which the arc will eventually conclude will be a resounding No. However, the moral conundrum does offer a different kind of challenge for the Princess of the Amazons along with a entirely different view about what it means to be a hero. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Wonder Woman (2016) #39

Jan 31, 2018

If you are already reading the series, issue #39 won't really have much impact, but for someone like me who hasn't picked up a Wonder Woman comic in months there isn't much here to inspire me to stick around and see how events play out. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wonder Woman (2016) #76

Aug 15, 2019

Beginning in Themyscira, we are given a chance to see Diana with her mother as well as her return to man's world given the repaired gateway between the two realms following the defeat of Ares. There's also a reunion with Steve Trevor (who is far happier to see Diana than the guest she brought with her), and (keeping with the theme of mothers and daughter which opens the issues) Diana putting aside animosity in order to reunite Isadore Cole with her mother Veronica. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wonder Woman (2016) #750

Jan 23, 2020

Other stories include Diana turning the tables on Ares, Diana going to Circe in an attempt to put things right, a tale of Diana of Themyscira before a certain pilot crash landed, Diana through the eyes of the Bombshells, receiving a call to return home, and a melancholy tale of the a remorseful Silver Swan. We also get Diana's presence at the 1939 World's Fair and a story of sisterhood featuring Wonder Woman and the young hero Star Blossom.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Wonder Woman (2016) #751

Feb 19, 2020

The issue also offers a new mythological threat for Wonder Woman as the rising storm (which she helps those around the city prepare for) is revealed to be the work of the Dark Fates who, after Cheetah‘s failure to beat Wonder Woman (despite all their help), now look to deal with her directly… no doubt foreshadowing trouble to come. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Wonder Woman (2016) #758

Jul 15, 2020

Wonder Woman's victory over the Phantom Stranger also inspires larger changes as a passionate Diana is able to convince her mother to embrace the outside world and the women who need their help and guidance by creating an Amazon Embassy. However, the comic reminds us that the Dark Fates are still out there plotting and that victory often comes before the fall.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wonder Woman (2016) #780

Oct 21, 2021

The second-half of the issue looks at the impact of Diana's return on the world, offering glimpses to reaction of several characters and groups after Wonder Woman makes her first public save since her return. The issue ends with a trip to Themyscira and another welcome home for the character while Diana struggles to take a breathe before returning to the world. There's also some foreshadowing concerning changes to Diana during her time away, although it's not yet clear what may be lurking beneath the surface.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Wonder Woman (2023) #1

Sep 26, 2023

There are some interesting ideas at play, but it's not exactly a fun read for DC's "bright new era. That said, I'm curious how Diana's status as a criminal will affect her larger role across the DCU.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Wonder Woman (2023) #2

Oct 29, 2023

While I'm not overly interested in the Amazon's Attack! event that this comic is helping to set up, and which the back-up story foreshadows, Wonder Woman #2 is easily one of the best comic books I've read this year providing action while at the same time exploring the character of Diana, who she is, why she fights, and why she must take a stand for what's right.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Wonder Woman (2023) #3

Nov 28, 2023

After one of the best Wonder Woman comics I've ever read, the series comes down to Earth for something closer to a middle issue of an ongoing arc. Wonder Woman #3 isn't bad by any means, it just doesn't measure up to last month's terrific issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Wonder Woman: Black & Gold (2021) #5

Nov 1, 2021

Wonder Woman and Steve Trevor are captured by Dr. Cyber and Mouse Man while the villains are breaking the Human Firework out of a secret government laboratory in "How Wonder Woman was Brought Low by a Mouse but Captured by the Stars" which is stuffed full of Silver Age-style goofiness. And "Memories of Hator" recounts Wonder Woman's first encounter with former enemy turned friend Badra.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Wonder Woman: Black & Gold (2021) #6

Dec 1, 2021

The concluding issue of Wonder Woman: Black & Gold offers five more tales of Wonder Woman's adventures in black and white, with a splash of gold. The six-issue mini-series ends on more of whimper than a bang.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Wonder Woman: Rebirth #1

Jun 9, 2016

Shedding her New 52 costume in favor of something a little more old school, Wonder Woman sets out to find out who is responsible for her confusion and what she can do about it. I'm not sure exactly where Diana's journey will take her, but the decision to make Wonder Woman one of the core DC heroes who acknowledges something is off in the world is an intriguing one. I'm certainly on-board with Greg Rucka penning the Amazon's adventures but I am curious to see which of the artists used here is chosen to stay in the long run. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
World's Finest (2012) #0

Sep 10, 2012

Some may not like the art by Kevin Maguire but I think it's one of the issue's saving graces (although I'm not of fan of his Catwoman design) along with the Kara story which is given far less time but is much tighter than the rambling main story with Helena. Worlds' Finest #0 isn't a bad issue as much as an unnecessary one with a couple of good moments. Hit-and-miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
World's Finest (2012) #1

May 7, 2012

This is one of the strongest first issues of any of the New 52. I'm certainly not expecting anything else this good from DC's Second Wave, but if Levitz, Perez, and Maguire can continue to deliver stories this good month and month then Worlds' Finest is quickly going to become one of my favorite DC titles. Best of the week.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
World's Finest (2012) #2

Jun 13, 2012

Issue #2 feels a less focused than the first issue, and Hakkou is yet another throwaway New 52 villain (whose motives and ties to Apokolips are sketchy at best). Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
World's Finest (2012) #3

Jul 9, 2012

Except for still sticking Power Girl in that truly awful costume (seriously, something needs to be done) the series seems to be back on track after only a slight mistep last month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
World's Finest (2012) #4

Aug 8, 2012

In one of the running jokes of the character having her costume constantly torn (that somehow managed to survive the transition into the New 52) Power Girl, after getting lathered in oil, gets a ripped boob window, momentarily helping out that hideous costume. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
World's Finest (2012) #5

Oct 10, 2012

Although neither story is bad, all of the best parts of Worlds' Finest #5 come in the conversations between the two women between their stories and at the comic's beginning as the heroes continue to test Kara's powers to see how they might work differently in their new home. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
World's Finest (2012) #6

Nov 14, 2012

The Helena/Damian story works better than Power Girl's tale which really isn't given enough time to develop. That said, we are give the brutal one-note Damian though most of the story, at least until his curiosity at Helena's true identity gets the best of him. I will be interest to see if Helena becomes the New 52 big sister stand-in for Stephanie Brown to teach him a little humility and humanity. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
World's Finest (2012) #7

Dec 12, 2012

When the comic introduced Damian last month I wondered if the plan was to allow Helena to step into the big sister role a character like Damian sorely needs (which was filled by Stephanie Brown before the New 52 reboot). I really enjoyed the two together, including Damian's promise to keep her secret – even from Batman. I hope we get to see more of the pairing in the future. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
World's Finest (2012) #8

Jan 16, 2013

Despite having two separate artist working on the Power Girl story it actually works better than the Huntress intro that does little more than set-up Kara's quest to keep her friend safe. It also reminds us just how powerful (no pun intended) Power Girl is when she isn't fighting radioactive monsters from Apocalypse. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
World's Finest (2012) #9

Feb 13, 2013

Things do pick up in the end with the arrival of Power Girl and the reveal of who the thieves are actually working for. Although the prospect of Mr. Terrific showing up doesn't do much to excite me, it is a nice twist and it looks like the comic is finally ready to deal with Karen Starr's relationship to the hero whose pretty much disappeared from the New 52 since his book was cancelled. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
World's Finest (2012) #10

Mar 13, 2013

After missing for several months Kevin Maguire is back, and for the first time in the series' near year-long run he's the only artist on display giving the comic a much more cohesive look than usual. I like the idea of Power Girl being far more hot-headed and mischievous in using her powers than either Superman or Supergirl while pointing out what the ramifications of that would look like. The scenes with Huntress grieving over Damian are also handled with care. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
World's Finest (2012) #11

Apr 9, 2013

I don't know what's happened to Mr. Terrific (or really care, for that matter) but the appearance of Desaad in the comic's final panel means the Apokolips storyline is heating up again. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
World's Finest (2012) #12

May 7, 2013

This is definitely more of Power Girl issue than a Huntress one, but we do get flashbacks of Helena kicking some serious ass and some strong character moments discussing Power Girl's need for a celebrity persona and the Huntress comforting her friend from the latest devastating Apokolips attack. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
World's Finest (2012) #13

Jun 18, 2013

For a series that has been schizophrenic with its art, we finally get an issue with a single artist. I don't love Robson Rocha's art but it's passable and he certainly has a flair for drawing Power Girl in action. The idea of the pair fighting a giant hell dog sounds more fun that the actual adventure, and I could do with less Apokolips-centric storylines (which at this point doesn't seem likely). Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
World's Finest (2012) #14

Jul 13, 2013

This also (finally) also offers us a reason why Desaad has targeted the pair and what he's truly after – a return to Apokolips. Rocha's art is allowing the a comic to find a more consistent look, and, as I've stated, I really enjoy when Paul Levitz keeps the focus on the Karen/Helena relationship and tones down a bit of the Apokolips craziness (which actually works fine here). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
World's Finest (2012) #15

Aug 20, 2013

Over the years Power Girl's origins and powers have been tweaked several times. I'm assuming this latest move is to try and separate her a little from the New 52 Supergirl, but I'm hoping we aren't going to see any huge lasting changes to the character. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
World's Finest (2012) #16

Oct 17, 2013

Although Power Girl is able to hold it together for the issue's fight with a New 52 villain who isn't named, it appears the story of the hero's wonky powers is going to continue for at least the next few issues. Given Karen's issues, Huntress carries the bulk of the story well on her own, even if the bad guy gets away. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
World's Finest (2012) #17

Nov 18, 2013

With Kara's powers still on the fritz it may be time for the ladies to call in help, even if it means exposing themselves to possible questions about their origins. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
World's Finest (2012) #18

Dec 19, 2013

As always the best parts of the comic are the interactions between our two heriones which we get quite a bit of to both open and close the issue. I'm not sure where this Tats/Xazdi storyline is going but I'll keep sticking around for more of Helena and Kara who next month are finally going to earn their first annual. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
World's Finest (2012) #19

Jan 23, 2014

I”m glad the pair's isolation is coming to an end, but I would have preferred the issue to move along quicker rather than simply set-up events for confrontations which apparently won't even take place in this title (as DC plans to begin the pair's introduction to the wider DCU in Batman/Superman #8). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
World's Finest (2012) #20

Mar 7, 2014

Although it lacks the big moments of the characters meeting for the first time, the second chapter continues to play on how this world's Batman and Superman are similar yet different to those our heroines remember from their own parallel world while revealing our villain. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
World's Finest (2012) #21

Mar 30, 2014

Seeing the evil Superman inside the alternate dimension the pair believed to be their old home doesn't deter them from agreeing to continue to seek a way back to their Earth. Although I don't think we're likely to see a Power Girl/Superman team-up anytime soon I'd like DC continue to explore the Batman/Huntress relationship going forward to see where it may lead. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
World's Finest (2012) #22

Apr 12, 2014

Tying up the loose ends of the crossover and returning the the early structure of the comic, the latest issue gets the heroines back on track (although hopefully not any closer to going home as I'd hate to see them leave for the less interesting Earth-2). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
World's Finest (2012) #23

May 21, 2014

Although I'm against Helena and Kara returning home to Earth-2, and less than thrilled with the return of Desaad teasing what will likely be a larger role in upcoming issues, Worlds' Finest provides a healthy mix of both humor and action from the pair of kick-ass heroines that fans should enjoy. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
World's Finest (2012) #24

Jun 15, 2014

Although we don't get much interaction between the pair, as a penultimate issue Worlds' Finest #24 works well as the threat to Huntress and the city is far more grave without the safety net of Power Girl swooping in until her bestie already has the situation well in hand. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
World's Finest (2012) #25

Jul 15, 2014

With at least the next several issues taking place on their hellish homeworld which has fallen to Apokolips and an evil Superman, Worlds' Finest #25 plays to the series strengths by centering the storyline on the friendship and interaction of our two heroines. The issue works well and even an appearance of the New 52 version of Desaad (adding a bit of action to the proceedings) can't ruin what works as a bittersweet portend that perhaps the series' best issues may now have already been told. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
World's Finest (2012) #26

Aug 18, 2014

Oddly, the comic also continues the storyline on Prime Earth where Tanya Spears has been apparently tapped to take Power Girl's place (both in and out of tights). How or why this is possible is unclear. I also wonder how long the comic plans to split focus between two worlds taking several pages away from its established stars. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
World's Finest (2012) Annual #1

Feb 4, 2014

We get three separate tales. The first gives us Robin's first outing as Batman‘s partner. The second involves Kara enjoying a little normalcy before being unable to save her date for the evening. And the third story combines the first two as Helena and Power Girl work together to take on an evil Amazon (with an unusual connection to Wonder Woman) who is to blame for Kara's recent misfortune. Despite the $5 price-tag, it's still worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
X-Force (2018) #1

Jan 1, 2019

One issue in, I may not be completely sold on the group, but there's enough here to pique my curiosity for another issue or two. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
X-Men (2021) #1

Jul 13, 2021

The issue also introduces us to industrialist Kelvin Heng whose plans to terraform Mars were squashed by Krakoa. While he isn't set-up as a direct antagonist here, it certainly doesn't appear he's gone to be strong ally. There are also those poking around asking questions about all the X-Men returning from the dead which Cyclops isn't answering.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
X-Men (2021) #2

Aug 18, 2021

Most of the comic is centered around the X-Men fighting the wave together as a team but there are a few other threads involving Ben Urich‘s continued investigation into the unexplained resurrections of dead mutants, and an odd (if humorous) scene involving Rogue pulling Gambit out of his regular poker game. The Rogue/Gambit scene feels like it was thrown in as filler, but I'm wondering if there was a more interesting storyline at that card game left unseen than what we received in the main story?

View Issue       View Full Review
6
X-Men Prime #1

Apr 6, 2017

The main purpose of this issue is to reintroduce Kitty to the X-Men, offer some fan-service reunion moments, and start to show what the X-Men under Kitty's leadership might look like. A fan favorite, Pryde's return isn't likely to hurt the X-books, but without nearly all the core members of the team the book feels empty. And the threat of a sercret organization putting together their own mutant squad doesn't do much for me either. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
X-Men: Blue (2017) #1

Apr 20, 2017

The reveal of the team's final member, and true leader, makes things a bit more interesting. Having gone through so many transformations over the years, just what is this version of Magneto after? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
X-Men: Blue (2017) #3

May 15, 2017

Writer Cullen Bunn holds the tension of the comic fairly well until the reasons behind Nimrod's actions are revealed and the X-Men go all smashy-smashy. The trouble is, whatever his motives, at the present Nimrod is actually a friend to mutantkind and his actions (and considerable resources) would be valuable to the X-Men and countless mutants in trouble (not to mention giving them time to readjust the super-villain's idea about mutants by working with him). Oh well. Hit-and-Miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
X-Men: Red (2018) #1

Feb 14, 2018

While Jean is impressive, a super-villain is able to steal the show and derail her noble purpose in its infancy. Has her dream already become a nightmare? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
X-Men: Red (2022) #1

Apr 12, 2022

There's also quite a bit of time spent on the politics of the Great Ring, the ruling council of the planet which Storm oversees, and conflicting interests over war or peace. I'll admit, this (and the weird Storm vs. Storm segment) is where the comic lost me. I assume these pieces will fit together eventually, but I don't know that I'll stick around long enough to see what that looks like.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
X-Men: The Trial of Magneto (2021) #1

Aug 31, 2021

More than anything, the first issue of X-Men: The Trial of Magneto feels like Marvel's attempt to turn Magneto back into a villain and, in doing so, split the mutant community into warring camps… again. Even if Magneto is eventually vindicated, both the accusation and the refusal to bring Wanda back (but is she dead?) are likely to be enough to create the schism Marvel is not-so-subtly forcing into existence.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Xena: Warrior Princess (2018) #1

Feb 20, 2018

While I'm far from the biggest Xena fan, Xena: Warrior Princess #1 is a solid opening to the new series set early enough in the franchise's run it should work for both new readers and longtime fans alike. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Young Hellboy: Assault on Castle Death #1

Jul 28, 2022

Tying back the previous mini-series, we're introduced to the Italian monetary hellbent (so to speak) on killing Hellboy before his is prophesized to bring about the apocalypse. Although their agent wasn't able to complete his mission over the Pacific, they have other sleeper agents awaiting to be awoken. The name of the mini-series is only mentioned once, by a surprise guest-star. It's uncertain just what the Castle of Death is, or how it might relate to the cult out to kill the young Hellboy, but may just be the cure for his homesickness.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Young Hellboy: The Hidden Land #1

Mar 2, 2021

We're also introduced to Scarlett Santiago, the Sky Devil, a new character who saves Hellboy from quicksand and who I'm looking forward to seeing more of as the mini-series continues.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Young Hellboy: Assault on Castle Death #2

Oct 4, 2022

While it's likely real trouble is just behind the corner, and I'm still not sure exactly how the janitor will play in (other than as a potential victim), this issue (even starting with the mania of a cult) proves to be an awful lot of fun.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Young Hellboy: The Hidden Land #2

Apr 7, 2021

Although we do get the ape on dinosaur violence (well-timed given the recent release of Godzilla vs. Kong), Young Hellboy: The Hidden Land #2 is really more about stepping back, providing some information about a new character in the vigilante turned hidden island's protector, and then setting up the evil which they will need to battle over the remaining issues as something dark stirs in the ancient temple calling out to the zealot who attempted to kill Hellboy. It appears the Ohnar have good reason to avoid the temple and I'm guessing Professor Bruttenholm‘s interest in it won't go over well with the locals.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Young Hellboy: Assault on Castle Death #3

Nov 28, 2022

While still enjoying the adventure, some of Hellboy's dialogue suggests at least a part of him has begun to suspect not everything he's seeing is real.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Young Hellboy: The Hidden Land #4

Jun 7, 2021

With Scarlett Santiago firmly entrenched as the island's guardian, and Hellboy and the Professor's minds wiped of their entire adventure, I don't know that we'll get to see more of the pilot turned giant ape in the future, but the issue does allow her to go out on a high note saving the world from the vampire.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Young Hellboy: Assault on Castle Death #4

Feb 7, 2023

While there's fun here, as there has been across all four issues, I'm not sure why we needed four issues of Hellboy stumbling around a warehouse in a fevered dream when one or two issues would likely have done the job in telling this rather simple story.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Young Justice (2011) #9

Nov 6, 2011

The story, having the team unknowingly investigate the past of a member of the Justice League, is an interesting idea. It also forces the more powerful members of the team into using covert skills they don't normally employ. Although I enjoy the cartoon this is the first issue of the series I've picked up, and it's good enough I might go back and read a few more issues. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Young Justice (2011) #11

Dec 27, 2011

The rest of the Bat-books have been a little shaky this month, but I'll give credit for Young Justice for delivering a fun Bat-story on all counts. And the best part is we'll get even more as the story concludes next month! Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Young Justice (2011) #12

Jan 25, 2012

Next issue should see less flashbacks and more of the team battling this new version of Clayface but I've got to say I've enjoyed the past two issues focusing on Batman and Robin and now Talia. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Young Justice (2011) #13

Feb 16, 2012

Although it's a bit of a letdown after a terrific Batman and Robin issue and well-done Talia al Ghul issue that introduced the character of Clayface, Young Justice #13 continues to define this new version of Clayface and bring Aqualad's indecision to the forefront as the team is bested far too easily by this new enemy. It will be interesting to see if Aqualad's story plays out in similar fashion to the similar arc on the television show or if the comic takes a different path beginning next month. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Young Justice (2011) #16

Jun 3, 2012

The three stories connect in the comic's last few pages as all the crimes are connected and will pit all six heroes against Kobra in next month's issue. This series is very hit-or-miss for me depending on the characters and story chosen from issue to issue. If next month's conclusion is as good as this one, I'll definitely pick it up. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Young Justice (2011) #18

Jul 29, 2012

We also get a short cameo by Captain Marvel who is disappointed when he learns he won't be traveling with the team on their latest mission. I'm glad to see the goofier version of the Big Red Cheese show up in a DC Comic (and still using his appropriate moniker), but, you would think of all people, Batman be able to figure out the Captain's secret, right? Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Young Justice (2011) #19

Aug 31, 2012

We get Grodd, the final adventure with the original core team, and even cameos by Congrilla and Nightwing. That should be enough to warrant fans picking this one up. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Young Justice (2011) #20

Sep 23, 2012

For the introduction of the new team, and particularily Nightwing's interactions with them, the issue is worth a read. However, as a jumping point into a brand-new arc it's a little messier than I'd like. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Young Justice (2011) #21

Oct 23, 2012

The first team led by Nightwing tries to find a way into Metropolis, where the heroes trapped inside the force field are already on the scene. And a second team including Miss Martian and heads to the moon to rescue their friends and find some answers. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Young Justice (2011) #22

Nov 25, 2012

The issue is certainly packed with characters including several of the newer members of the Young Justice team including Batgirl, Wonder Girl, Zatanna and Blue Beetle, and even a surprise cameo by Plastic Man. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Young Justice (2011) #23

Dec 27, 2012

There's enough here for fans, including appearances by several members of the team, but it's certainly not a must-read and could probably be skipped without missing a beat of the overall arc. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Young Justice (2011) #24

Jan 26, 2013

There's plenty of action, and some nice character moments (I really enjoyed the sequence with Zatanna, Blue Beetle, and Cassie), even if the story seems a bit fractured and unfocused. Batgirl fans should be happy as the heroine gets several pages here and I'm always pleased when Captain Marvel gets in on the action. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Young Justice (2011) #25

Feb 25, 2013

Of the two alien stories, Braniac‘s works far better although both seem to reach rushed conclusions far earlier than either had planned. There are also plenty of threads left dangling with no hope of resolution. However, the scenes between Dick and Babs are pretty damn good, and the various stories continue to allow multiple characters to each find their moment in the sun. Is it a great finale? Not really, but fans should enjoy it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Young Justice (2019) #1

Jan 15, 2019

With a feel of classic Teen Titans and original Young Justice stories, the new comic offers a solid opening. Like Bart, I'm excited to see what happens next. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Young Justice (2019) #2

Feb 12, 2019

Even though his appearance offered to the cliffhanger leading into this issue, we'll have to wait another month for more on Superboy. That said, this issue fleshes out Cassie fairly well and offers some fun moments between Wonder Girl and some of the new heroes (even if Teen Lantern gets less time than Jinny or Cassie). Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Young Justice (2019) #3

Mar 18, 2019

While the rest of the team, who were imprisoned by Lord Opal after their failed uprising attempt, only gets cameos here, the focus remains on Superboy. His reaction to Lord Opal's soldiers seems to suggest he may not have his powers in Gemworld (but we'll have to wait and see if that is the case) while the soldiers' reaction to the emblem on his chest continues to showcase the distrust of Superman by those in Gemworld. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Young Justice (2019) #5

May 2, 2019

The heroes are still stuck in Gemworld, and they have a few obstacles to work through before they make it home. That said, I'm really looking forward to see where things go from here. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Young Justice (2019) #7

Jul 19, 2019

The group's next jump takes them to the Earth of Kingdom Come and a far-less amused Justice League who eventually accepts the kids' story and, with the help of Doctor Fate, allows them to move on. Through a small miscalculation (hey, even mystics make mistakes) the group doesn't arrive home but is dropped into yet another parallel Earth. While this one may not have talking animals or miniature super-heroes, I'm betting it will have its own challenges for Young Justice to overcome in order to make it back home. Must-read.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Young Justice (2019) #8

Sep 17, 2019

Like Bart, I would have been happier if the team has spend more time in Captain Carrot‘s world than in this one, but the comic is notable for the high-level of action (and the suggested death of one member of the team… before they have even technically become a team). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Young Justice (2019) #10

Nov 14, 2019

While I enjoyed the arc, and will miss this version of Stephanie Brown stepping up to take on the role of the main Bat-character in the alternate world as Batwoman, I do have to agree with Impulse that the storyline peaked with the team meeting the Zoo Crew.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Young Justice (2019) #12

Jan 20, 2020

It is worth noting that Robin has chosen a new name… by stealing the codename of an evil version of himself from an alternate reality? I'll be curious to see if “Drake” will last (or if the various teen heroes decide to make a running joke out of such a bizarre choice). Whatever he chooses to call himself, it looks like Tim Drake has himself a team to investigate S.T.A.R. Labs and what happened to his best friend. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Young Justice (2019) #13

Feb 13, 2020

The rest of Young Justice, and their new friends, get far less time than Superboy but there is enough here for the group to finally jump into action on multiple fronts (including looking for reinforcements in characters known for their involvement in other incarnations of the team). For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Young Justice (2019) #14

Mar 17, 2020

The size of the group gets a bit out of control here, with several characters getting lost. As the dust settles, I'll be curious to see who actually sticks around. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Young Justice (2019) #15

Jun 25, 2020

Young Justice #15 closes one chapter of the series and sets the stage for another with a large cast of interchangeable heroes all part of the team available for different adventures. I'm guessing Superboy and Impulse will drive the next arc, but from there anything appears possible.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Young Justice (2019) #16

Jul 13, 2020

Although several characters make appearances in the flashbacks, and Drake shows up at the end, this is really a two-character issue focused on Impulse's story and his friendship with Conner which was a driving force to right what he saw wrong with the universe. Now, what are the ramifications of that decision?

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Young Justice (2019) #17

Aug 11, 2020

Disconnected from the team's larger story, this is an issue you could skip without missing anything of huge importance but the writing in so good here and framing much of story through the eyes of Yolanda offers an Astro City vibe (damn I miss that comic) that hits just the right notes as Drake reminds the reader that there are many ways to be a hero.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Young Justice (2019) #18

Sep 9, 2020

Although the rest of the characters make cameos here, to offer moral support at the end and help Stephanie celebrate the win, it's really a Stephanie Brown issue (which we haven't seen in several years). We may not get Steph in a cowl, but Young Justice #18 does pull the character out of the shadows and shine some much needed light on the former Batgirl.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Young Justice (2019) #19

Oct 12, 2020

While Zeus is less than pleased with Cassie's decision, the recent attacks to help Wonder Girl make a decision about her future. Now she has to live with it. As for the group, the comic seems to be pointing to next issue as a “conclusion” of the series. Is this the end for Young Justice?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Young Justice (2019) #20

Nov 9, 2020

Given the success of the comic, I'm guessing we'll see the group together in one form or another going forward (although in the ever-shifting reality of comic book universes you can never be sure). The final issue pays homage one more time to what has come before, offers some fun banter, and leaves us wondering about the possibilities for Young Justice in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Zorro #8

Oct 23, 2008

Those who haven't been keeping up with this series should peruse the back issues in your local comic shop, or look for the hardcover volume of these first eight issues which is scheduled to hit stores next month. Zorro rides again, and you don't want to miss the fun!

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Zorro (2018): Sacrilege #1

Jun 6, 2019

The final few panels foreshadow how the evil surrounding Santa Leticia will have some mystical or demonic cause, but Zorro: Sacrilege #1 works by telling a more grounded Zorro tale that turns out to be better than I was expecting. I probably won't stick around for the uber-evil to be revealed, but as a single issue the story works better than expected. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Zorro (2018): Black & White Noir #1

Aug 10, 2022

“Fool's Gold” opens with our hero's head on the literal chopping block after being asked to look into the strangers working with the local sheriff to steal the mined gold from Coronado. Here we get multiple examples of the character's ingenuity in getting out of trouble. And the impeding arrival of a viceroy in “The King's Emissary” Don Diego finds himself jailed for being Zorro in a tale that showcases the cunning of the fox as even in chains he manages to outwit his enemies.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Zorro (2018): Swords of Hell #1

Oct 8, 2018

Honestly, I'm not sure I'll stick around for all four issues of Zorro vs. the zombie horde, but despite the unusual storytelling choices the comic still proves to be an interesting read. For fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Zorro (2018): Feliz Navidad #1

Dec 20, 2022

An early Zorro Christmas tale “Christmas Dinner” is translated into English and reprinted here. The tale may lose a bit in the translation, and lacks much of Zorro, as Don Diego helps Sargent Garcia set a trap to find which of three men is a criminal allowing the other two to enjoy the holiday. And in another reprinted story, a chance encounter with some soldiers on the road accidentally leads them to believe a nearby priest could be Zorro in “The Rosary of Father Joaquin.”

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Zorro (2018): Masters II #1

Nov 22, 2022

As with the first Zorro Masters one-shot, Zorro Masters II reprints a couple of stories from Dell Zorro and Dell Four Color, each from writer/artist Alex Toth.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Zorro Rides Again #2

Sep 7, 2011

Wagner weaves these stories together well, and even if this second issue is a little light on action he's laid the groundwork here for the main threads of his second Zorro series. Worth a look.

View Issue       View Full Review

Reviews for the Week of...

December

November

More